ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

DOCUMENTATION TECHNIQUE

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 GENERAL INDEX
Section
PRELIMINARY
Section
PRODUCT PRESENTATION
Section
HARDWARE
Section
TERMINALS
Section
CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE
FEATURES
Section
CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT
Section
CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
Section
CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP
ALCATEL OMNIPCX Section
OFFICE CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS
Section
CALL SERVER : HOTEL
DOCUMENTATION Section

TECHNIQUE E-SERVER : INTERNET

APPLICATIONS
Section
E-SERVER : REMOTE ACCESS SERVER
(RAS)
Section
APPLICATIONS
Section
OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE
Section
PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Section
MMC STATION
Section
REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01 SOFTWARE KEYS
Copyright © ALCATEL. 2001. All rights reserved. Alcatel Business Section
Systems, in keeping with its policy of constant product improvement for
the customer, reserves the right to modify product specifications without MAINTENANCE
prior notice.
Section
GLOSSARY
This product contains software whose use may be subject to legal provisions governing data processing,
files and data protection. In France, refer to Law No. 7817 of 6 January 1978.
Alcatel OmniPCX Office

GENERAL INDEX

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

GENERAL INDEX

General Index

Legend
PROD : Section Product presentation HARD : Section Hardware
TERM : Section Terminals FEATURES : Section CALL SERVER : Telephone features
VMU : Section CALL SERVER : Integrated Voice Mail Unit MOBIL : Section CALL SERVER : Mobility
VOIP : Section CALL SERVER : Voice on IP PRIVNET : Section CALL SERVER : Private networks
HOTEL : Section CALL SERVER : Hotel IP : Section e-SERVER : Internet applications
APPLI : Section Applications PM5 : Section PM5 : System configuration
MMC : Section MMC Station KEYS : Section Software keys
MAINTE : Section Maintenance

Numerics
4070 IO/EO (DECT base stations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 4
4070 IO/EO DECT base stations (installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBIL File 2
4070 PWT (bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 4
4070IO/EO NG (DECT base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 4
4073 GS Smart (DECT handsets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 9
4073 GS Smart (implementation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBIL File 7
4074 (DECT handsets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 9
4074 (implementation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBIL File 6
4088 adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 9
4093 ASY-CTI (Reflexes 3G option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 2
4094 ISW (Reflexes 3G option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 2
4095 AP (Reflexes 3G option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 2
4097 CBL (Reflexes 3G option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 2
4098 FRE (IP Enabler). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 6
4099 (Multi-Reflexes option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 3
40XX (Reflexes 2G sets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 9
50XX (Reflexes 2G sets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 9
8-digit numbering plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 20

A
Account code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 51
Adding sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTE File 3
Add-on modules for Reflexes 2G sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 9
Alcatel Reflexes (terminals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 2
Amplified reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 44
Analog remote access (PM5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM5 File 1
Analog station (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 13
Answering camped-on calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 28
APA (board). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 15
Appointment reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 47

Ed. 01 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/10

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

GENERAL INDEX

ARS (examples of use). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 3

ARS (internal destinations). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 2
ARS (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 2
ARS (parameters/tables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 2
ARS (time ranges) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 2
ARS calendar (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 23
ATA (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 10
Attendant diversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 5
Audiotex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 2
Auto. call setup on going off hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 25
Auto-answer mode (intercom mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 25
Automated Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 2
Automatic welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 13

B
Background music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 45
Backup/restoration (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 20
Barring counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 7
Barring prefixes (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 13
Barring prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 7
Barring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 7
Base stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 4
Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 17
Bis (repetition of last number/numbers retransmission list) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 25
Board management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTE File 2
BRA (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 8
Break-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1
Break-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1
Broadcast call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 25
Busy tone detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 24

C
Call Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 40
Call pick-up (set, group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 39
Callback on busy station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 27
Callback on busy trunk group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 37
Canceling forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 31
Capacities and limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROD File 2
CCBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 18
Centralized Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1
Check-in (Hotel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL File 3
Check-out (Hotel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL File 3
CLASS (compatibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 15
CLI (APA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 22
CLIP / COLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 21
CLIR (ISDN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 16
CLIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 44

2/10 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

GENERAL INDEX

Clock synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 5

Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 5
CoCPU / CoCPU@ (boards). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 3
Collective speed dial numbers (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 5
Collective Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 25
Compatibility (subsets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROD File 1
Complementary services (cost) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 4
Conference (MMC Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 29
Configuration of stations (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 2
Configuring a DECT system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBIL File 3
Consulting a mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 3
Consulting camped calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 28
CoPU-1 (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 6
CPU / CPUe (boards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 2
CPU/CPUe alarm (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 2
CPU/CPUe background music (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 2
CPU/CPUe broadcast loudspeaker (connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 2
CPU/CPUe doorphone (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 2
CPU/CPUe general bell (connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 2
CPU/CPUe hard disk (connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 2
CPU/CPUe please-wait message (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 2
CPU-1 (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 4
CPU-1 alarm (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 4
CPU-1 background music (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 4
CPU-1 Broadcast loudspeaker (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 4
CPU-1 doorphone (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 4
CPU-1 General bell (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 4
CPU-1 hard disk (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 4
CPU-1 please-wait message (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 4
CPUe-1 alarm (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 5
CPUe-1 background music (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 5
CPUe-1 Broadcast loudspeaker (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 5
CPUe-1 doorphone (connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 5
CPUe-1 General bell (connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 5
CPUe-1 I (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 5
CPUe-1 please-wait message (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 5
CSTA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 2
Customizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 49
Customizing the Hotel application screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL File 2
Customizing the voice server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 3

D
Data restorations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTE File 6
Data saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTE File 4
DDI (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 16
DDI (Direct Dialing Inwards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 14
DECT (general) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBIL File 1

Ed. 01 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/10

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

GENERAL INDEX

DECT (MMC station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 19

Default Operator Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 4
Delayed call-back request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 43
Dial by name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 25
Dialing prefixes (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
Directory (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
Directory of unanswered calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 25
DISA (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 22
Distribution lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 2
DNS (server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP File 5
Do Not Disturb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 31
Doorphones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 3
Downloading (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
DTMF (code transmission). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 38
DTMF end-to-end signalling (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
Dynamic routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 10

E
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROD File 3
Elitecost (starting-up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 5
E-mai . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP File 7
Emergency numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 25
End of dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 8
End of dialling (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 17
End-to-end signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 38
Enquiry call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 29
e-Reflexes (terminals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 6
Euro (call metering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 4
External bell for Reflexes 2G sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 9

F
Fast IP Reflexes (terminals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 6
Fax notification table (MMC station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
Faxes (call routing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 55
Faxes (notification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 56
Filtering of vocal messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 3
Firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP File 10
Follow-Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 31
Forward on busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 31
Forward to pager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 31
Forward to text answering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 31
Forwarding and transfers within a network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1
Forwarding to VMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 33

G
General Call Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 39

4/10 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

GENERAL INDEX

General level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 4

General mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 2
General monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 48
Greeting (on busy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 23
Groups (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 9

H
H.323 Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VOIP File 1
Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 29
Hardware messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTE File 5
Headset (features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 46
History messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTE File 5
Hold recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 29
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 29
Hotel (features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL File 1
Hotel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL File 2
Hotel installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL File 1
Hotel reception set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL File 3
HSL1 (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 7

I
Identification restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 25
IEC 60950 compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROD File 3
Immediate call forwarding (station, group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 31
Indirect operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1
Initializing mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 3
Installation number (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
Integrated voice server (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 25
Intercom intrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 30
Internet Access
– ....................................................... IP File 4
Intrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 27
IP Addresses (Handset MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
IP Enabler (installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VOIP File 2
IP Telephony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VOIP File 1
IP terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 6
ISDN remote access (PM5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM5 File 1
ISDN services (cost) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 4
ISVPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1
ISVPN+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 4

J
Joining (external forwarding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 35
Joining (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4

Ed. 01 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/10

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

GENERAL INDEX

K
Key system (mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 1
Keyboard facilities (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
Keyboard facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 16
Keypad Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 16

L
LanX (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 14
Local LAN access (PM5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM5 File 1
Local V24 access (PM5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM5 File 1
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 44

M
Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 2
Main PCX recall (calibrated loopbreak) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 42
Maliciouscall identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 16
Manager/secretary screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 32
Meter total recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 53
Metering counter reading/resetting (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 3
Metering counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 4
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 4
MEX (board). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 7
MIX (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 11
MMC Station Administrator session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 1
MMC Station Installer session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 1
MMC Station password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 1
Mobile Reflexes (implementation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBIL File 4
Mobile Reflexes 100/200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 5
Monitoring (selective, subscriber). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 48
Monoline/multiline (station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 1
Moving of stations (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 21
Multi Reflexes (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 24
Multi-operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1
Multi-Reflexes Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 3

N
NAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP File 10
Network metering - ISVPN+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 4
Network routing on operator busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 2
Network Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1
NMC (Network Management Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 6
Normal/restricted service (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 12
Normal/restricted service (user) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 12
Numbering plans (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 16

6/10 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

GENERAL INDEX

O
OS groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 4
OSs (Operator Stations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 4
Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1

P
Paging (MMC station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 41
Parameter duplication (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 14
Passwords (MMC Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
PCX (mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 1
PCX forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 36
Permanent Logical Link (PLL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 8
Personal Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 3
Personal speed dials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 25
PIMphony Reflexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 7
PM5 (installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM5 File 1
PM5 (PC Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM5 File 1
Point to Multipoint T0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 7
Point to Point T0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 7
PRA (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 9
Pre-announcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 13
Priority calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 26
Protecting calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 25
Proxy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP File 9
PS1/PS1N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 17
PS2PS2N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 17
PS3/PS3N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 17
Pulse metering (configuration by MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 12

Q
QSIG-BC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1

R
R&TTE 1999/5/CE compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROD File 3
RACK 1 (mechanical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 1
Rack 1 (presentation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROD File 1
Rack 2 (presentation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROD File 1
RACK 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 1
Rack 3 (presentation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROD File 1
RACK 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 1
Reaction on transfer failure (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
Read/write memory (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
Reading of historic/equipment messages (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4

Ed. 01 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/10

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

GENERAL INDEX

Recording a conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 3

Recording of messages (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 15
Reflexes 3G station profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 1
Reflexes DECT (implementation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBIL File 5
Reflexes stations (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 12
Relocating sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTE File 3
Remote forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 34
Remote notification (signaling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 3
Remote substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 54
Replacing sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTE File 3
Rerouting (external forwarding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 35
Reserving trunk groups (OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 5
Resource keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 1
Room Status (configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL File 2
Room Status (features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL File 3
Room status (Hotel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL File 3

S
Selective forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 31
Shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 29
SLI (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 13
Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM5 File 1
Software keys (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
Software keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KEYS File 1
Specific features of S0 stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 19
Speed dial rights, barring, traffic sharing (link categories) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 6
Splitting (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 17
Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 9
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROD File 3
Star numbering plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 20
Station identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 44
Statistics (voice server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 2
Sub-address (ISDN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 16
Supervised call ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 48
Switching between normal and restricted service (OS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 5
System reset (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 10
System sub-assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROD File 1

T
T0 (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 8
T0/DLT0 Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 6
T1 (primary access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 9
T1/T2 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 9
T1/T2/DLT2 alarm counters (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 4
T2 (connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 9
TAPI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 1
Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 50

8/10 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

GENERAL INDEX

Terminal profiles (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 11

Text mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 43
Third party CTI - TAPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 1
Third party CTI - TAPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 2
Tickets and statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 4
Time ranges (MMC station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 6
Time Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 11
TL and ISDN access (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 7
TL forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 15
TL forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 10
Traffic counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBIL File 8
Transit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1
Trunk groups (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 8
Trunk groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 2
Trunk line allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 52

U
UAI (board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 12
UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD File 17
UUS (User-to-user signaling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 16

V
VBTEL (visually impaired OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERM File 8
Visual mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 4
VN7 (compatibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 17
Voice prompts management (PM5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM5 File 3
Voice server dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 1
Voice server operating modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMU File 1
Voice Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 57
VoIP CoCPU (installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VOIP File 2
VPN Client to LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP File 6
VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP File 6
VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIVNET File 1

W
Wake-up ticket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLI File 4
Wake-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 47
Welcome messages (MMC station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC File 18
Withdraw from group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES File 31

Ed. 01 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/10

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

GENERAL INDEX

10/10 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
Preliminary

SECTION

PRELIMINARY

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

PRELIMINARY

Section Preliminary

REASONS FOR THE NEW EDITION FILE 1

CLAUSES FILE 2

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION PRELIMINARY (INDEX) PRELIMINARY

Section Preliminary (Index)

CLAUSES FILE 2

REASONS FOR THE NEW EDITION FILE 1

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

PRELIMINARY REASONS FOR THE NEW EDITION

File
REASONS FOR THE NEW EDITION
1

In relation to Issue 02 of the technical documentation, this issue 03 adds the following main changes:

- Product presentation section

- "Compatibility of environments" file: 4760 compatibility

- Hardware section

- "CPUe card" file: suppression of the VOIP card in the representation of the CPUe card.
- "ATA card" file: adding in a MET daughter board.

- Terminals section

- " DECT 4070 IO/EO Bases" card: suppression of the note relating to the non downloading of
4070 bases.

- CALL SERVER section: Telephone features

- "ISDN Services" file: access to the system functions during a call(keypad facilities)

- CALL SERVER Section: Integrated voice server

- "System features" card: blind transfer for the Automated Attendant; voice mailboxes for hunting
groups.
- "Services offered to users" card: joining mechanisms in case of external destination of the per-
sonal assistant; adding functions in the remote customisation.

- CALL SERVER section: Mobility

- "Installing base stations" card: suppression of the paragraph "Quantifications".

- CALL SERVER Section: Voice on IP

- "Services and topologies" card: adding the "RTP Proxy" service

- "Installation - Configuration" card: changing the configuration menu of IP stations.

- CALL SERVER Section: Private networks

- "Configuration of basic access" card: T0/DLT0": suppression of the "German market" restriction
for use of the MIX card.

- e-SERVER section: Internet applications

- "Overview" card: correction of the description of offers of services

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

REASONS FOR THE NEW EDITION PRELIMINARY

- "Secure Internet access" card: corrections in "firewall rule settings" and in the "firewall events log"

- PM5 section: System configuration

- "Installation Procedures" card: suppression of Windows 95 in the options OS options.

- Set DHM section

- "General commands" card: adding the command NetCnf enabling the configuration of IP ad-
dresses.

- Maintenance section

- "System messages" card: new messages (210, 212, 213 and 214); new types or errors in mes-
sages 111 and 112.
- "Incorporation" card: OBC version enabling the unplugging/plugging of live interface cards
when powered up.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

PRELIMINARY CLAUSES

File
CLAUSES
2

Copyright and Trademarks

Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFXtm is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Copyright 1993 - 2000 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

CLAUSES PRELIMINARY

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
Product presentation

SECTION

PRODUCT PRESENTATION

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

PRODUCT PRESENTATION

Section Product presentation

GENERAL DESCRIPTION FILE 1

CAPACITIES AND LIMITS FILE 2

COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS FILE 3

ENVIRONMENT COMPATIBILITY FILE 4

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION PRODUCT PRESENTATION PRODUCT PRESENTATION

(INDEX)

Section Product presentation (Index)

CAPACITIES AND LIMITS FILE 2

COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS FILE 3

ENVIRONMENT COMPATIBILITY FILE 4

GENERAL DESCRIPTION FILE 1

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

PRODUCT PRESENTATION GENERAL DESCRIPTION

File
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1

Alcatel OmniPCX Office is an "e-communication server", a new "all-in-one" concept combining proven
telephony functions with data management and access to all the resources of the Internet. This "multi-
purpose" server provides a turnkey global communication solution for small and medium-scale enter-
prises with 6 to 200 employees.

For enterprises with 6 to 12 employees, the Alcatel OmniPCX Office range has been expanded to in-
clude the OmniPCX Office Compact Edition module. Only the Business offer is available (advanced
voice functions, a professional solution with welcome, mobility, CTI and VoIP functions).

MAIN FEATURES

Voice:
- Advanced telephony
- Voice mail unit
- Automated Attendant
- Integrated CTI server
- Voice over IP
- Mobility
- PIMphony (telephony application for PC)

Data:
- LAN switch
- Router and integrated firewall
- DHCP and DNS server
- Information sharing
- Resources sharing
- Remote access server (RAS)

Internet:
- Shared access to the Internet (ISDN or xDSL connection)
- Proxy server
- Cache server
- E-mail server
- VPN
- Intranet server

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/12

GENERAL DESCRIPTION PRODUCT PRESENTATION

INSTALLATION SYNOPSIS

Fax Private Network

(QSIG/ISVPN)
ISDN
@
Analog station

Analog Public
Network

4970 IO/EO DECT base

External battery rack

Z
- Integrated voice server
- Integrated CTI server

Multi Reflexes Integrated Internet applications:

- Internet access
Z - Proxy s erver
- Cache s erver
LAN - Firewall
- M ail s erver

Z
PM5
Z
Reflexes Stations
- First
- Easy
- Premium
- Advanced
Pulse metering
- Elitecost IP Touch
- Printer 4038/4068

General call ringer

10 base T
Z
Doorphone Loudspeaker
e-Reflexes

"Please wait" music

Background music

Auxiliaries
TAPI 2.1 or CSTA Server

2/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

PRODUCT PRESENTATION GENERAL DESCRIPTION

HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

In order to cover the entire SME/SMI market segment (6 to 200 users), Alcatel OmniPCX Office is
available in:

- 3 19" rack modules which can be mounted in a rack or placed on a shelf.

- 1 module which is fixed either directly to the wall, or to a wall support (US version).

Rack 1 or S or SMALL

- 28 ports
- 1 CPU slot + 2 general-purpose slots (no SLI16 board)
- Consumption: 1 A (230 V) / 2 A (110 V) - 80 W.
- Dimensions: H = 66 mm; W = 442 mm; D = 400 mm.
- Weight: 6 kg.

Rack 2 or M or MEDIUM

- 56 ports
- 1 CPU slot + 5 general-purpose slots
- Consumption: 1.2 A (230 V) / 2.3 A (110 V) - 120 W.
- Dimensions: H = 110 mm; W = 442 mm; D = 400 mm.
- Weight: 11 kg.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/12

GENERAL DESCRIPTION PRODUCT PRESENTATION

Rack 3 or L or LARGE

- 96 ports
- 1 CPU slot + 4 specific general-purpose slots (no UAI16 and MIX boards)
- Consumption: 1.2 A (230 V) / 2.3 A (110 V) -150 W.
- Dimensions: H = 154 mm; W = 442 mm; D = 400 mm.
- Weight: 13 kg.

Maximum capacity:

The system can be extended by adding one or two modules to the main module. All combinations are
possible, with a maximum of 3 modules. The maximum capacity is 236 stations.

4/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

PRODUCT PRESENTATION GENERAL DESCRIPTION

OmniPCX Office Compact Edition module

- 12 ports.
- 1 CPU slot + 1 MIX slot
- Consumption: 1.5 A (240 V)
- Dimensions: H = 345 mm; W = 300 mm; D = 65 mm.
- Weight: 4.5 kg.

The following mixed boards are available:

- MIX 244
- MIX 284
- MIX 248
- AMIX 444-1
- AMIX 484-1
- AMIX 448-1

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/12

GENERAL DESCRIPTION PRODUCT PRESENTATION

PRODUCT LINE-UP

Different solutions exist for each model, depending on the desired level of service: These solutions al-
low the system to be built up by adding modules, boards, applications and software keys.

"Business" solutions
Based on a mature product offering meeting telephony requirements (conventional automated atten-
dant), these packages include:

- a basic voice mail (2 ports, 20 minutes recording, up to 8 ports and 200 hours recording) providing
a voice mailbox for all the users and a personal assistant.
- an automated attendant
- a CTI server
- Voice over IP
- ACD
Solution Rack CPU type Number of users
Alcatel OmniPCX Office 25 Rack 1 CPU-1/ CPU-2 from 6 to 28
Alcatel OmniPCX Office 50 Rack 2 CPU-1/ CPU-2 from 16 to 56
Alcatel OmniPCX Office 100 Rack 3 CPU-1/ CPU-2 from 50 to 96
Alcatel OmniPCX Office 200 Rack 3 + Rack 3 CPU-1/ CPU-2 from 100 to 192
Alcatel OmniPCX Office CE Compact Edition -2 CPU from 6 to 20

"e-Business" solutions
These packages allow evolution toward services meeting complete enterprise communications needs,
including telephony as well as Internet (e-mail server, proxy and cache server, VPN, Intranet server).
Alcatel OmniPCX Office thus becomes an e-communication server.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office can also be used as an Internet Appliance (with no telephone terminals con-
nected).

Solution Rack CPU type Number of users

Alcatel OmniPCX e-Office 25 Rack 1 CPUe-1/CPUe-2 from 6 to 28
Alcatel OmniPCX e-Office 50 Rack 2 CPUe-1/CPUe-2 from 16 to 56
Alcatel OmniPCX e-Office 100 Rack 3 CPUe-1/CPUe-2 from 50 to 96
Alcatel OmniPCX e-Office 200 Rack 3 + Rack 3 CPUe-1/CPUe-2 from 100 to 192

6/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

PRODUCT PRESENTATION GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Applications and CPU boards

Business solution e-Business solution

(All Voices (All Voice
services, up to + Internet services)
4 VMU ports)

Rack 3

Rack 2
CPU-2 CPUe-2

Rack 1

CE

CPU-2 + VOIP-1 CoCPU-2

VoIP
a/o CoCPU-2

RAS
(16-max) CoCPU-2

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/12

GENERAL DESCRIPTION PRODUCT PRESENTATION

BOARDS AND OPTIONS

The following table lists the boards available on Alcatel OmniPCX Office (S, M or L racks).

Board Function Optional boards Connections

APA2 2, 4 or 8 analog trunk line inter- GSCLI: Ground Start si- Analog trunk line (TL), TL-
APA4 faces gnalling PS diversion
APA8 CLIDSP: CLIP local ma-
nagement
ATA2 2 or 4 analog trunk line interfaces MET: pulse meter recei- Analog trunk line (TL), TL-
ATA4 vers PS diversion
BRA2 2, 4 or 8 T0 basic accesses ISDN network
BRA4 ISDN-EFM T0/S0 forwar-
BRA8 ding box
CPU Processing Unit (up to R1.1) HSL1, HSL2: intercon- Lanswitch or Ethernet ter-
CPUe nection with add-on mo- minal
dules Please-wait message
XMEM: memory exten- player
sion and/or IDE interface Tuner for background
for the hard disk music
AFU, AFU-1: (Auxiliary Alarm
Function Unit) Doorphone
Loudspeaker
General call ringer
ISDN-EFM T0/S0 forwar-
ding box
Pulse metering device
PC PM5
-1 CPU Processing Unit (starting from HSL1, HSL2: intercon- Lanswitch or Ethernet ter-
-2 CPU R2.0 Business solution) nection with add-on mo- minal
Processing Unit (from R3.0 Busi- dules Please-wait message
ness solution and later) 64 Mb XMEM/XMEM-1: memo- player
Flash memory. ry extension and/or IDE Tuner for background
interface for the hard music
disk Alarm
AFU, AFU-1: (Auxiliary Doorphone
Function Unit) Loudspeaker
2.5" Hard disk General call ringer
VoIP4-1 and VoIP8-1 ISDN-EFM T0/S0 forwar-
ding box
Pulse metering device
PC PM5

8/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

PRODUCT PRESENTATION GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Board Function Optional boards Connections

CPUe-1 Processing Unit (CPUe-1 from HSL1, HSL2: intercon- Lanswitch or Ethernet ter-
CPUe-2 R2.0 and CPUe-2 from R3.1 e- nection with add-on mo- minal
Business solution) dules Please-wait message
AFU-1: auxiliary func- player
tions Tuner for background
WAN: additional Ether- music
net link Alarm
2.5" Hard disk Doorphone
Loudspeaker
General call ringer
ISDN-EFM T0/S0 forwar-
ding box
Pulse metering device
PC PM5
CoCPU, CoProcessing Unit (up to R1.1) VoIP: (Voice over IP): Lanswitch or Ethernet ter-
CoCPU@ SLANX4: mini-switch minal
(CPU/CPUs - CoCPU/
CoCPU@ link)
WAN: additional Ether-
net link
CoCPU-1 CoProcessing Unit (CoCPU-1 VoIP: (Voice over IP): Lanswitch or Ethernet ter-
CoCPU-2 from R2.0 and CoCPU-2 from SLANX4: mini switch minal
R3.1 Business and e-Business so- (links between CPU
lutions) boards)
DDI2 2 or 4 analog trunk line interfaces Analog trunk line with
DDI4 with Multiple Subscriber Numbers Multiple Subscriber Num-
(MSN) bers (MSN)
LanX8 8 or 16 port Ethernet 10/100 BT @ Phones, Hub,
LanX16 (of which 1 or 2 10/100/1000 BT Lanswitch, PC, etc.
LANX16-1 ports on LANX-2 boards)
LanX8-2
LANX16-2
MEX Add-on module controller
(equipped
with an
HSL1
board)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/12

GENERAL DESCRIPTION PRODUCT PRESENTATION

Board Function Optional boards Connections

MIX244 0, 2 or 4 T0 basic accesses + 4 or ISDN network, analog Z
MIX248 8 UA interfaces + 4 or 8 Z inter- terminals and Alcatel Re-
MIX284 faces flexes stations
MIX484
MIX448
MIX044
MIX084
MIX048
AMIX484-1 4 analog line accesses, 4 or 8 UA GSCLI: Ground Start si- PSTN network, analog Z
AMIX448–1 interfaces and 4 or 8 Z interfaces gnalling terminals and Alcatel Re-
AMIX444–1 flexes stations
CLIDSP : local CLIP ma-
nagement

METCLI
PRA-T2 PRA-T2, DASS2, DLT2: 30 x 64- PRA-T2: ISDN network
PRA-T1 Kpbs B-channels + 1 x 64-Kbps DASS2: UK public/private
DASS2 D-channel; 2048 Kbps. network
DLT2 PRA-T1: 23 x 64-Kbps B-channels DLT2: Private QSIG
T1-CAS + 1 x 64-Kbps D-channel; 1544 network
Kbps PRA-T1: Hong-Kong
ISDN network
T1-CSS 23 x 64-Kbps B-channels + 1 x ISDN (US)
PCM R2 64-Kbps D-channel T1-CAS: USA public
network
T1-CAS: 24 x B-channels, inclu-
PCM R2: Public network
ding signalling; 1544 Kbps.
PCM R2: 30 x 64 Kbps B-chan-
nels +1 x 4 Kbps signalling chan-
nel; 2048 Kbps.
SLI4 4, 8 or 16 Z interfaces Analog Z terminals
SLI8
SLI16
SLI4-1
SLI8-1
SLI16-1
UAI4 4, 8 or 16 UA interfaces Alcatel Reflexes stations
UAI8 Multi-Reflexes
UAI16 Carte UAI16-1 only: possibility of 4070 IO/EO DECT base
UAI16-1 powering terminals connected to stations
the 16 interfaces remotely from EPS48 only on interface 1
an external EPS48 power supply of the UAI16-1 board

Remarque : the CPU and MIX boards have the same characteristics as those used by Alcatel Omni-
PCX Office.

10/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

PRODUCT PRESENTATION GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SUBSETS COMPATIBILITY

For detailed information, refer to the Technical Communication on this issue.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/12

GENERAL DESCRIPTION PRODUCT PRESENTATION

12/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

PRODUCT PRESENTATION CAPACITIES AND LIMITS

File
CAPACITIES AND LIMITS
2

The following table gives the capacities provided by the various Alcatel OmniPCX Office solutions.

S / e-S M / e-M L / e-L XL / e-XL Max. limits CE

System
Type of modu- Rack 1 Rack 2 Rack 3 Rack 3 + 3 modules, Wall modu-
le extension all combina- le
Rack 3 tions possi-
ble
Total number 3 6 9 18 27 2
of slots (with
CPU and MEX
boards)
Available slots 2 5 8 16 24 1
Total number 1
of main CPU
boards
Total number 1 3 4 8 12 0
of UAI16-1
boards
Total number 0 2 5 10 12 0
of SLI16
boards
Total number 2 5 4 8 12 1 (mixed)
of UAI16-1 +
MIX boards
Total number 1 2 2 5 6 0
of CoCPU-1,
CoCPU-2 Co-
Processing
boards
IP channels 16 32 32 80 96 0
VOIP daughter 2 3 3 6 6 1
boards
XMEM64-1 1 (plugged into a CPU board)
daughter
board

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/14

CAPACITIES AND LIMITS PRODUCT PRESENTATION

S / e-S M / e-M L / e-L XL / e-XL Max. limits CE

Hard disk 1 0
Hard disk ca- 20 Gigabytes minimum NA
pacity
Communication ports
Reflexes ports 24 56 96 192 200 8
Z ports 16 32 80 160 196 8
Voice ports 28 56 96 192 200 12
(Reflexes + Z)
Multi-Reflexes 6 6 6 12 18 4
Hubs 4099
LAN-Switch 2 4 8 12 12 0
boards
Available 28 56 112 168 168 1
LANswitch
Ethernet ports
(*)
LR Analog tru- 8 16 32 64 72 4
nk lines (**)
SDA Analog 0 16 32 64 72 0
trunk lines (US
only)
Primary T1 + 1 3 3 6 9 0
T2 + DLT2 ac-
cess
Basic T0 + 8 10 4
DLTO access
ISDN access 10 NA
(T0 + T2 + T1
+ DLTO +
DLT2)
T1 CAS access 1 3 3 5 5 0
(US only)
PCM R2 1 1 1 2 3 0
boards
IP trunk lines 24 40 40 88 96 8

2/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

PRODUCT PRESENTATION CAPACITIES AND LIMITS

S / e-S M / e-M L / e-L XL / e-XL Max. limits CE

Total trunk 34 90 120 120 120 12
lines and B
channels (LR,
SDA, T1, T2,
T0, IP)
Terminals + Work stations
User directory 250
numbers (*)
Reflexes termi- 28 56 96 192 236 20
nals (***) +
simple termi-
nals (Z)
Reflexes termi- 24 56 96 192 236 16
nals (***)
Simple termi- 16 32 80 160 196 8
nals (Z)
Mobile Re- 120
flexes (**)
IP subscribers 55 120 200 55
(IP Reflexes +
PIMphony IP)
Virtual termi- 200
nals
PIMphony IP Business Solutions: 55

e-Business Solutions 55 Rack 1 / 120 Rack 2 and 3 / 200 Rack 3 55

and extensions
Client PC 55 120 150 55
H.323
PIMphony 75 Business solutions / 200 e-Business solutions 75
clients with in-
tegrated CTI
server
CTI server
TAPI 2.0/2.1 75 Business solutions / 200 e-Business solutions 75
server-session
TAPI 2.0 ser- 150 Business solutions / 400 e-Business solutions 150
ver-supervi-
sion

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/14

CAPACITIES AND LIMITS PRODUCT PRESENTATION

S / e-S M / e-M L / e-L XL / e-XL Max. limits CE

PIMphony Uni- 75 75
fied
TAPI 2.1 ser- 25 25
ver-session
TAPI 2.1 ser- 236 236
ver-supervi-
sion
CSTA server- 25 25
session
CSTA server- 236 236
supervision
Reflexes terminal options
Add-on modu- 10 40 60 120 136 8
les (max. 2/
terminal)
S0, Z and V24 12 24 42 48 48 4
interfaces
V24 metering 1
interface
DECT bases (full wireless configurations)
Remotely sup- 4 4 4 8 12 3
plied, splitter-
less DECT
bases
Remotely sup- 16 48 60 60 60 NA
plied DECT
bases with
splitter
Remotely sup- 20 52 60 60 60 NA
plied DECT
bases with and
without splitter
Remotely sup- 23 55 60 60 60 NA
plied DECT
bases (remo-
tely supplied +
local supply)
Call server
Voice mail 8 2
ports

4/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

PRODUCT PRESENTATION CAPACITIES AND LIMITS

S / e-S M / e-M L / e-L XL / e-XL Max. limits CE

Voice mail sto- 20 minutes (basic) / 80 minutes (with XMeM64) / 200 hours (with 20 minu-
rage capacity hard disk) tes (basic)/
80 minutes
(with
Xmem64)
Preannounce- from 4 to 8 from 4 to 8
ment
Languages from 2 to 4 from 2 to 4
Directory en- 3000
tries
Speed dial 2200
numbers
System on 16 seconds
hold music
Customizable up to 2 minutes
on hold music
On hold up to 10 minutes NA
music with
hard disk
Multiple EDN 98
per S0
Entries in ARS 500
table
Account codes 250
Metering tic- up to 1000 tickets
kets
NMC tickets up to 30,000 tickets NA
with hard disk
Groups (sets + 50 with maximum of 32 users per group
broadcasts +
pick-ups)
OS groups 8 with maximum of 8 operator stations per group
Conference 3 simultaneously
ISDN RAS 2X64 kbps (with Xmeme64)/16x64 kbps (with CoCP-1) 2x64 kbps
(Xmem64)
Call Center
Agents decla- 32 -
red

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/14

CAPACITIES AND LIMITS PRODUCT PRESENTATION

S / e-S M / e-M L / e-L XL / e-XL Max. limits CE

Agents active 20 -
Groups of 8 -
agents
Members of 20 -
agent groups
Assistant agent 10 (Business solutions) / 20 (e-Business solutions) -
Supervisor 1 (Business solutions) / 4 (e-Business solutions) -
e-server
Shared Inter- 128 kbps/s (2 B channels (ISDN) / 10 Mbps/s (ADSL modem or ex- NA
net access ternal router
WCA users 200 NA
WCA nomad 25 NA
users
Internet users 25 NA
Simultaneous Depends on available bandwidth (eg: up to 20 over a 128 Kbps/s NA
Internet acces- link)
ses
Web page ca- 1.5 GB NA
che capacity
E-mailboxes 200 NA
E-mail storage 10 GB NA
capacity
Intranet web 200 Mb NA
server capacity
File server 4 GB NA
Simultaneous 50 NA
PPTP telewor-
kers
LAN networ- 50 NA
king via the In-
ternet (IP sec)
ISDN RAS
RAS with CoC- 16 x 64 kbps/s
PU-1/CoCPU-
2

(*): Subscriber numbers include all terminals and virtual users, 13 auxiliary ports (VMU, Internet access,

6/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

PRODUCT PRESENTATION CAPACITIES AND LIMITS

Remote access), main operator terminal number.

(**): Make sure that radio base dimensioning is adapted to mobile sets number.

(***): Numbers indicated include Reflexes terminals connected to Multi Reflexes Hubs 4099.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/14

CAPACITIES AND LIMITS PRODUCT PRESENTATION

BOARDS IMPLEMENTATION

Rack 1

SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT C PU

BOARDS SLOTS 1-2 CPU SLOT

CPU-1, CPUe-1, CPU-2, CPUe-2 No Obligatory
MIX x/y/z Yes No
AMIX-1 x/y/z Yes No
UAI4, UAI8, UAI16, UAI16-1 Yes No
SLI4, SLI8, SLI4-1, SLI8-1 Yes No
SLI16, SLI16-1 No No
PRA-T2, PRA-T1, DASS2, DLT2, T1-CAS, Yes No
PCM R2
APA4, APA8 Yes No
DDI2, DD14 No No
BRA2, BRA4, BRA8 Yes No
CoCPU-1, CoCPU-2 Yes No
LANX8, LANX16, LANX16-1, LANX8-2, Yes No
LANX16-2

Rack 2

SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT C PU

SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5

8/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

PRODUCT PRESENTATION CAPACITIES AND LIMITS

BOARDS SLOTS 1-2- CPU SLOT

3-4-5
CPU-1, CPUe-1, CPU-2, CPUe-2 No Obligatory
MIX x/y/z Yes No
AMIX-1 x/y/z Yes No
UAI4, UAI8, UAI16, UAI16-1 Yes No
SLI4, SLI8, SLI16, SLI4-1, SLI8-1, Yes No
SLI16-1
PRA-T2, PRA-T1, DASS2, DLT2, T1- Yes No
CAS, PCM R2
APA4, APA8 Yes No
DDI2, DD14 Yes No
BRA2, BRA4, BRA8 Yes No
CoCPU-1, CoCPU-2 Yes No
LANX8, LANX16, LANX16-1, LANX8- Yes No
2, LANX16-2

Rack 3
Attention : The VoIP4-1 and VoIP8-1 boards implemented on a CPU board consume a
hardware resource used for slot 8 of the module. In this case, it is impossible to
add a board other than a LANXxx board in slot 8.

SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT C PU

SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5

SLOT6 SLOT7 SLOT8

BOARDS SLOT 1 SLOTS 2-3-4 SLOTS 5-6-7-8 CPU SLOT

CPU-1, CPUe-1, CPU-2, No No No Obligatory
CPUe-2

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/14

CAPACITIES AND LIMITS PRODUCT PRESENTATION

MIX x/y/z Yes Yes No No

AMIX-1 x/y/z Yes Yes No No
UAI4, UAI8 Yes Yes Yes No
UAI16, UAI16-1 Yes Yes No No
SLI4, SLI8, SLI16, SLI4-1, Yes Yes Yes No
SLI8-1, SLI16-1
PRA-T2, PRA-T1, DASS2, Yes Yes Yes No
DLT2, T1-CAS, PCM R2
APA4 Yes Yes Yes No
APA8 Yes No Yes No
DDI2, DD14 Yes Yes Yes No
BRA2, BRA4, BRA8 Yes Yes Yes No
CoCPU-1, CoCPU-2 Yes Yes Yes No
LANX8, LANX16, LANX16-1, Yes Yes Yes No
LANX8-2, LANX16-2

Compact Edition

BOARDS MIX SLOT CPU SLOT

-2 CPU No Obligatory

10/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

PRODUCT PRESENTATION CAPACITIES AND LIMITS

BOARDS MIX SLOT CPU SLOT

MIX x/y/z Yes No
AMIX-1 x/y/z Yes No

POWER SUPPLY LIMITS

The following tables give the detailed power consumption of the different items (boards and terminals)
and the limit not to be exceeded for each model (all values are expressed in W).

The maximum budget at the charger level is also indicated for each model and you just have to add
the values for all items present in the system. The configuration will be within the power supply limits
if the total obtained is less than or equal to the maximum budget allowed for the type of rack used:

Maximum budget in Business R3

- Compact edition = 30 W
- Rack 1 = 34 W
- Rack 2 = 57 W
- Rack 3 = 85 W

Maximum budget in e-Business R

- Rack 1 = 50 W
- Rack 2 = 70 W
- Rack 3 = 951 W

Maximum budget in R1 and Business R2

- Rack 1 = 34,33 W
- Rack 2 = 57 W
- Rack 3 = 85.81 W

Maximum budget in e-Business R2

- Rack 1 = 50 W
- Rack 2 = 71 W
- Rack 3 = 95 W
BOARDS AND TERMINALS RACK 3 RACK 2 RACK 1/CE
CPU boards
CPU/CoCPU 6,39 5,16 5,14
CPUe/CoCPU@ 7,09 5,73 5,71
(Co)CPU-1-2 7,09 5,73 5,71
CPUe-1 15,95 16,86 17,03
MEX 1,60 1,32 1,30
Daughter boards

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/14

CAPACITIES AND LIMITS PRODUCT PRESENTATION

BOARDS AND TERMINALS RACK 3 RACK 2 RACK 1/CE

XMEM/XMEM-1 0,13 0,10 0,10
VOIP 16-1 2,17 1,74 1,74
VOIP 8-1 1,26 1,01 1,01
VOIP 4-1 0,81 0,65 0,65
HSL 0,38 0,30 0,30
WAN 0,91 0,73 0,73
2.5" Hard disk 2,61 2,33 2,17
S-LANX4 2,01 1,62 1,62
AFU/AFU-1 0,64 0,55 0,61
Trunk boards
BRA 8 1,09 0,97 0,90
BRA 4 0,64 0,56 0,53
BRA 2 0,38 0,33 0,31
PRA T2/T1 - DASS2 - DLT2 - T1-CAS - PCM R2 0,41 0,33 0,33
ATA 4 1,42 1,42 1,13
ATA 2 0,78 0,78 0,62
Measuring 0,07 0,06 0,06
APA 8 2,27 2,19 1,82
APA 4 1,41 1,34 1,14
METCLI (4 interfaces) 0,46 0,43 0,38
GSCLI (4 interfaces) 0,11 0,10 0,09
CLIDSP 0,51 0,41 0,41
DDI 4 9,31 10,25 FORBID-
DEN
DDI 2 4,65 5,12 FORBID-
DEN
Datacom boards
LANX 8/LANX 8-2 4,53 3,64 3,64
LANX 16 8,56 6,88 6,88
LANX 16-1/LANX 16-2 8,12 9,38 9,61
Mixed boards
4T0/8UA/4Z 3,00 2,9 2,76
4T0/4UA/8Z 3,45 3,45 3,29

12/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

PRODUCT PRESENTATION CAPACITIES AND LIMITS

BOARDS AND TERMINALS RACK 3 RACK 2 RACK 1/CE

2T0/4UA/4Z 2,16 2,13 2,03
2T0/8UA/4Z 2,74 2,65 2,52
2T0/4UA/8Z 3,2 3,2 3,05
8UA/4Z 2,48 2,39 2,33
4UA/8Z 3,01 2,96 2,92
4UA/4Z 1,91 1,86 1,82
4AT/8UA/4Z 2,45 2,52 2,62
4AT/4UA/8Z 3,35 3,48 3,57
4AT/4UA/4Z 2,43 2,49 2,56
Extension boards
UAI 16 2,39 2,21 2,10
UAI 16-1 1,66 1,73 1,77
UAI 8 1,38 1,32 1,27
UAI 4 0,88 0,87 0,85
SLI 16/SLI 16-1 4,76 5,00 FORBID-
DEN
SLI 8/SLI 8-1 2,39 2,51 2,39
SLI 4/SLI 4-1 1,21 1,26 1,20
Terminals
Reflexes (UA) station 0,39 0,45 0,46
Add-on module 0,21 0,24 0,25
Multi-Reflexes 4099 0,52 0,61 0,62
CTI/AP option 0,79 0,92 0,94
V24 option 0,79 0,92 0,94
S0 option 1,07 1,23 1,26
4070 (IBS) remotely supplied from the PCX 2,52 2,90 2,98
Z analog set 0,19 0,21 0,22

Notas :

When using an option with CTI, the consumption value must be added; example for a rack 3:

- 4093 (V24+CTI) = 0 + 0.79 = 0.79 W

- 4094 (S0 + CTI) = 1.07 + 0.79 = 1.86 W

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/14

CAPACITIES AND LIMITS PRODUCT PRESENTATION

When using an SLI extension board or an MIX board, the number of analog sets that can be connected
must be added even if they are not connected; e.g. for a rack 3:

- SLI16 = 4.64 +(16 x 0.21) = 8 W

- MIX484 = 2.99 + (4 x 0.21) = 3.83 W

When using a UAI16-1 extension board, a "power splitter" option can be added to port 1 (in parallel
with the UA set) that makes it possible to feed all the subscribers and base stations connected to this
same board. They will then be deducted from the power budget; e.g. for a rack 3:

- either a UAI16-1 with 10 UA sets and 3 IBS without the "power splitter" option = 13.12 W, or 1.66
+ (10 x 0.39) + (3 x 2.52) = 13.12 W
- either a UAI16-1 with 10 UA sets and 3 IBS without the "power splitter" option = 1 W, or -1 + (10
x 0.39) + (3 x 2.52) = 13.12 W

The consumption budget for e-Business solutions can only be used if CPUe-1/CPUe-2 boards are
used. 2nd generation Racks offer a higher performance power supply with a higher consumption bud-
get per Rack. However, the CPU, CPUe and CPU-1 boards cannot detect these different 1G and 2G
Racks and therefore cannot include them when calculating power consumption. Maximum consump-
tion budget values for e-Business solutions:

- 50 W for a Rack 1
- 71 W for a Rack 2
- 95 W for a Rack 3

The consumption budget can be read via the labeled addresses below:

- PowBudMain for the main cabinet value

- PowBudMex1 for the value of add-on module 1
- PowBudMex2 for the value of add-on module 2

Note that the IBS value = 0W (local power) in the labeled addresses. This is because the system cannot
detect whether the IBS's are powered locally or self-powered. To avoid being restricted by power limits
in a case where the IBS would use a local power supply it doesn't count them

14/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

PRODUCT PRESENTATION COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS

File
COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS
3

SAFETY DECLARATION

Compliance with IEC 60950 3rd ed. standards

Interface classifica- Interface location

tion
TNV-3 - Z interface (SLI board)
- Z interface for Alcatel Reflexes station (AP board)
- Analog trunk line interface (ATA board)
SELV - Alcatel Reflexes station interface (UAI board or Multi-Reflexes option 4099)
- 4070 IO/EO base station interface (UAI board)
- T0 interface (BRA board)
- T2/T1 interface (PRA board)
- S0 interface (S0 board)
- Please-wait or background music interface (CPU/CPUe board)
- Alarm interface (CPU/CPUe board)
- General bell interface (CPU/CPUe board)
- Doorphone interface (CPU/CPUe board)
- Loudspeaker interface (CPU/CPUe board)
- V24 interface (CPU/CPUe board)
- CTI interface for Alcatel Reflexes station (CTI or V24/CTI board)
- 10/100 base T Ethernet interface (CPU/CPUe or CoCPU/CoCPU@ board)
- 4070 IO/EO base station (inputs-outputs)
- 4097 CBL UA/DECT adapter

SELV: Safety Extra Low Voltage

TNV-3: Telecommunication Network Voltage

To maintain safety levels, it is essential to connect up circuits of the same nature and to ensure that all
means of connection comply with the constraints laid down for each circuit type.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS PRODUCT PRESENTATION

ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS

This product complies with the core requirements of European Community R&TTE Directive 1999/5/
EC.

Electromagnetic compatibility :

- EN 5502 Ed. 1998 class B: Limits and methods of measuring the characteristics of radioelectric
disturbances produced by information technology equipment.
- EN 55024 Ed. 1998: Information technology equipment: immunity characteristics.
- EN 61000-3-2 Ed. 1995: Electromagnetic compatibility: harmonic current emission limits.
- EN 61000-3-3 Ed. 1995: Electromagnetic compatibility: voltage fluctuation and flicker limits in low
voltage networks.

Safety:

- IEC 60950 Ed. 3: Safety of information technology equipment.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

PRODUCT PRESENTATION ENVIRONMENT COMPATIBILITY

File
ENVIRONMENT COMPATIBILITY
4

On the new generation Alcatel OmniPCX Office, it is possible to re use some equipments and terminals
from the Alcatel Office range.

TERMINAL COMPATIBILITY ON THE ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

Compatible Alcatel Reflexes

- The complete range 2G : 4001, 4003, 4011, 4012, 4023, 4034, 4081L, 4081M and 4088.
- The complete range Beta 2G.
- The complete range 3G : Advanced (4035), Premium (4020), Easy (4010, and First (4004), 4097
CBL.
- All sub-devices behind Alcatel Reflexes : 4083 ASM, 4084 IS, 4084 ISW, 4085 AB, 4091, 4093
ASY, 4094 ISW, 4095 AP.
- Sub-devices CTI 4091 support only the UA protocol. SPI for TAPI interface is not imple-
mented anymore.

Compatible Alcatel Reflexes IP terminals

- Alcatel IP Enabler 4098 FRE.
- Alcatel e-Reflexes Easy, Premium and Advanced.

Compatible Alcatel mobile terminals

- Terminals DECT 2G : 4073 GS, 4074 GB, GBEx, GH, GI and SGAP.
- Terminals DECT Mobile 100 and 200.
- Reflexes DECT terminals with 4097 CBL.
- Alcatel intelligent base station 4070 IO/EO (IBS) and gain antennas.

COMPATIBLE APPLICATIONS ON ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

- Cost control:

- Eltecost
- Alcatel 4715 release 4.4.14
- Alcatel 4740 release 4.4.14
- Alcatel 4760 release 1.5

- CTI applications CTI Third party only:

- PIMphony offer (with TAPI 2.0 SPI connected on LAN)

- TAPI & CSTA servers

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

ENVIRONMENT COMPATIBILITY PRODUCT PRESENTATION

- The Alcatel Office Call Center is compatible, except the AOCC built-in voice mail, in re-
lease 1.0. It is fully compatible in release 1.1.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

PRODUCT PRESENTATION ENVIRONMENT COMPATIBILITY

INCOMPATIBLE HARDWARE PARTS ON ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

- The complete range of Alcatel Reflexes 1G (first generation).

- Alcatel mobile DECT sets 4075, 4074 B, 4074 Bex, 4074 H.
- Base station DECT RBS Alcatel 4070 IA and 4070 EA.
- The complete range Alcatel 160 sets.
- The complete range Alcatel 4120 (900B) sets.
- Voice mail of Alcatel Office Call Center in release 1.0.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

ENVIRONMENT COMPATIBILITY PRODUCT PRESENTATION

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
Hardware

SECTION

HARDWARE

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

HARDWARE

Section Hardware

RACK 1 - RACK 2 - RACK 3 MODULES FILE 1

CPU - CPUE BOARDS FILE 2

COCPU - COCPU@ BOARDS FILE 3

CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD FILE 4

CPUE-1/CPUE-2 BOARD FILE 5

COCPU-1/COCPU-2 BOARD FILE 6

MEX BOARD FILE 7

BRA BOARD FILE 8

PRA BOARD FILE 9

ATA BOARD FILE 10

AMIX-1 BOARD FILE 11

UAI BOARD FILE 12

SLI BOARD FILE 13

LANX BOARD FILE 14

APA BOARD FILE 15

DDI BOARD FILE 16

POWER SUPPLIES FILE 17

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION HARDWARE (INDEX) HARDWARE

Section Hardware (Index)

AMIX-1 BOARD FILE 11

APA BOARD FILE 15

ATA BOARD FILE 10

BRA BOARD FILE 8

COCPU - COCPU@ BOARDS FILE 3

COCPU-1/COCPU-2 BOARD FILE 6

CPU - CPUE BOARDS FILE 2

CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD FILE 4

CPUE-1/CPUE-2 BOARD FILE 5

DDI BOARD FILE 16

LANX BOARD FILE 14

MEX BOARD FILE 7

POWER SUPPLIES FILE 17

PRA BOARD FILE 9

RACK 1 - RACK 2 - RACK 3 MODULES FILE 1

SLI BOARD FILE 13

UAI BOARD FILE 12

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE RACK 1 - RACK 2 - RACK 3 MODULES

File
RACK 1 - RACK 2 - RACK 3 MODULES
1

RACK 1

The RACK 1 module consists essentially of a plastic frame.

The plastic frame receives all the parts for attaching the power supply board, the fans, the battery and
the mains power connector, and everything needed to facilitate the routing of the cables.
There is no backplane board: the metric connectors are on the power supply module.

The enclosure comprises 3 parts: metal cover and base, plastic front face.

Access to the fans, the power supply module and the battery is gained by disconnecting the mains ca-
ble and removing the top metal cover (it is vital to removal all the boards before opening the cover).

Metal cover

Power supply (+Backpanel)

Boards (CPU + Battery retaining clip

interfaces)
Battery

Fan
Mains power cable

Plastic frame
Mains power connector
mounting plate
Grounding clips

Plastic front face

Metal base

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

RACK 1 - RACK 2 - RACK 3 MODULES HARDWARE

RACK 2 AND RACK 3

The frame consists of a "U"-shaped sheath closed on the top by a riveted plate. The boards are guided
by 2 (Rack 2) or 3 (Rack 3) rails riveted vertically to the frame.
The enclosure consists of a metal top part, two metal side parts and a plastic front face.

Access to the fans, the power supply module and the batteries is gained by disconnecting the mains
cable and unscrewing the back panel.

Power supply

Cooling zone
(fans) Mains power
connector

Board
installation Batteries
areas

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE CPU - CPUE BOARDS

File
CPU - CPUe BOARDS
2

The CPU and CPUe boards (Processing Unit) present the following characteristics:

- CPU: call handling, 100-MHz processor, 32 MB of S-RAM, 32 MB of Flash

- CPU-1: call handling, 133-MHz processor, 64 MB of S-DRAM, 32 MB of Flash.
- CPU-2: call handling, 133-MHz processor, 64 MB of S-DRAM, 64 MB of Flash.
- CPUe: call handling, management of the router function for accessing the Internet, 133 MHz pro-
cessor, 64 MB SDRAM, 32 MB of Flash, more powerful DSPs.

Plug-in to BACKX board

XMEM

SDRAM

ASPEN ON

1 4

HSL AFU

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/12

CPU - CPUE BOARDS HARDWARE

DAUGHTER BOARDS

The CPU - CPUe boards can take the following daughter boards:

- HSL (High Speed Link): module interconnections.

- XMEM (eXpend MEMory): memory extension + 2.5-inch hard drive connection.
- AFU, AFU-1 (Auxiliary Function Unit): supporting auxiliary functions such as general bell, doorpho-
ne, audio In, audio Out, etc ... ; the AFU-1 board is required for the connection of the ISDN-EFM
box (T0/S0 forwarding).
- VOIP-1: (Voice Over IP): Gateway H323 with integrated Gatekeeper function; supports the mana-
gement of CODECs and DSPs for IP telephony and IP Trunk (IP trunk lines) applications; IDE inter-
face to connect a hard disk or an XMEM.

Attention : The VoIP boards implemented on a CPU board consume a hardware resource used for
slot 8 of the module. In this case, it is impossible to add a LANXxx board in slot 8.

DAUGHTER BOARDS CPU/CPUe/CPU-1/CPU-2

XMEM/XMEM-1 YES
HSL1 YES
HSL2 YES
AFU or AFU-1 YES
HARD DISK YES
VoIP/VoIP-1 YES

SDRAM CAPACITY

Capacity CPU CPUe

SDRAM32 YES NO
SDRAM64 NO YES
SDRAM128 NO YES on CPUe
model e-S only

2/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

HARDWARE CPU - CPUE BOARDS

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

PROCESSING UNIT CPU

LAN AUDIO-OUT CONFIG

LAN FAN POWER

MODULE CPU
MODULE1 MODULE2 AUDIO-IN DOORPHONE

PROCESSING UNIT CPUe

LAN WAN AUDIO-OUT CONFIG
LAN WAN FAN POWER

MODULE CPU

MODULE1 MODULE2 AUDIO-IN DOORPHONE

Available functions:

- LAN: 10/100 base T Ethernet port (MDI-II/straight)

- AUDIO-OUTloudspeaker, alarm and general bell interfaces; 12V output
- AUDIO-IN please-wait message and background music interfaces
- DOORPHONE doorphone interfaces
- CONFIG RS232 for MMC, NMC and PPP connections
- MODULE1HSL link to add-on module 1
- MODULE2HSL link to add-on module 2
RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LAN outputs TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
AUDIO-OUT out- Audio Audio Alarm A CenRg CenRg Alarm B Ground +12 V
puts Out A Out B A B
CONFIG outputs CTS DSR RX Ground Ground TX DTR RTS
MODULE1 out- TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
puts
MODULE2 out- TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
puts
AUDIO-IN outputs Audio In Audio In Audio Audio
A B Ctrl A Ctrl B
DOORPHONE Door DoorPH DoorPH Door
outputs PHB1 A1 A2 PHB2

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/12

CPU - CPUE BOARDS HARDWARE

MEANING OF THE LED INDICATIONS

PROCESSING UNIT CPU

LAN AUDIO-OUT CONFIG

LAN FAN POWER

MODULE CPU
MODULE1 MODULE2 AUDIO-IN DOORPHONE

PROCESSING UNIT CPUe

LAN WAN AUDIO-OUT CONFIG
LAN WAN FAN POWER

MODULE CPU

MODULE1 MODULE2 AUDIO-IN DOORPHONE

Name Color Function

CPU Green CPU functioning LED (flashing)
POWER Red/Green - Mains operation: steady green LED
- Battery operation: steady yellow LED
- Idle: flashing red LED
- System shutdown: steady red LED
FAN Red/Green - Both fans functioning: steady green LED
- 1 or both fans down: steady red LED
LAN Green LAN functioning LED (flashes when there is traffic)
MODULE Green Presence of HSL board
WAN Green Not Used

4/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

HARDWARE CPU - CPUE BOARDS

GENERAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

Configuration without SLANX4 (recommended configuration)

CoCPU board without SLanX4 board

COPROCESSING UNIT CoCPU

CPU board

COPROCESSING UNIT CoCPU

LANX board External LAN Switch

ETHERNET LANSWITCH LANX8

General bell
Loudspeaker
Alarm
12V serviceable voltage
CPU board

PROCESSING UNIT CPU

PC (PM5, NMC)

Doorphone

MEX board (extension unit) 1

ADD-ON MODULE MEX

"Please wait" message
Background music

MEX board (extension unit 2)

MEX
ADD-ON MODULE

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/12

CPU - CPUE BOARDS HARDWARE

Configuration with SLANX4

CoCPU board + SLanX4 board

COPROCESSING UNIT CoCPU

CPU board

COPROCESSING UNIT CoCPU

OR

LANX board External LAN Switch

ETHERNET LANSWITCH LANX8

General bell
Loudspeaker
Alarm
12V serviceable voltage
CPU board

PROCESSING UNIT CPU

PC (PM5, NMC)

Doorphone

MEX board (extension unit 1)

ADD-ON MODULE
MEX
"Please wait" message
Background music

MEX board (extension unit 2)

ADD-ON MODULE
MEX

6/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

HARDWARE CPU - CPUE BOARDS

CONNECTING A HARD DISK

Hard disks are fitted using an XMEM board.

Hard disk
Support

XMEM/VOIP-1 board
CPU board

44-point connectors connected by a flat cable

Important : During installation, always take anti-static precautions (wristband, heelpiece, etc.) befo-
re handling the hard disk). Electrostatic discharges can shorten the life of the disk.

When going into stand-by mode, wait for red Power LED to stop flashing before you re-
move the module's CPU board. Extracting the disk before the switch to standby is
completed can destroy part of the disk or damage its contents. Never handle the
hard disk until the motor has stopped completely (about 4 seconds after the red Power
LED stops flashing).

CONNECTING A PLEASE-WAIT MESSAGE PLAYER

This is connected via the Audio CTRL output (control contact open when idle) and the Audio In input
of the AUDIO-IN connector.

Distribution panel PROCESSING UNIT CPU

AudCrtl A

Control AudCrtl B
circuit

Audio Audio In A
circuit
Audio In B

Power supply

Audio input characteristics:

- Input impedance 600 Ohms

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/12

CPU - CPUE BOARDS HARDWARE

Contact characteristics (same characteristics for the alarm and doorphone control contacts):

- Max. power 10 W
- Max. voltage 100 V
- Max. current 500 mA

CONNECTING A BACKGROUND MUSIC TUNER

This is connected via the Audio In input of the AUDIO-IN connector.

Distribution panel PROCESSING UNIT CPU

Audio In A

TUNER
Audio In B

Power supply

Audio input characteristics:

- Input impedance 600 Ohms

- Input level: access + 10 dBr

CONNECTING AN ALARM

The alarm is activated under the same conditions as TL forwarding (power outage or software com-
mand).

This is connected via the Alarm output (control contact closed when idle) of the AUDIO-OUT connec-
tor.

8/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

HARDWARE CPU - CPUE BOARDS

Distribution panel PROCESSING UNIT CPU

Alarm A
Alarm
device

Alarm B

Power supply

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/12

CPU - CPUE BOARDS HARDWARE

CONNECTING A DOORPHONE

The doorphone interface comprises an intercom and an optional doorstrike powered by the mains
supply through a SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) transformer.

It is connected via the DoorPhA and DoorPhB outputs (control contacts open when idle) of the DOOR-
PHONE connector.

Connecting an NPTT doorphone

- A single doorphone with doorstrike may be connected to the system.

- The system also allows for the connection of 2 doorphones without doorstrikes.

Distribution panel PROCESSING UNIT CPU

DoorPhA1

DOORPHONE
DoorPhA2

DoorPhB1
To door
keeper
DoorPhB2

Connecting Telemini and Universal Doorphones

These doorphones only require the use of a Z station interface.

- Several of these doorphones can be connected to the system; the limit is determined by the maxi-
mum number of analog stations the system can support.
- A system cannot have TELEMINI and UNIVERSAL doorphones at the same time.

10/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

HARDWARE CPU - CPUE BOARDS

CONNECTING A GENERAL BELL

Broadcast loudspeakers are connected via the CenRg output of the AUDIO-OUT connector.

Distribution panel PROCESSING UNIT CPU

CenRg A
General
call ringer

CenRg B

Power supply

CONNECTING A BROADCAST LOUDSPEAKER

Broadcast loudspeakers are connected via the Audio Out output of the AUDIO-OUT connector.

Distribution panel PROCESSING UNIT CPU

Aud Out A

Amplifier
Aud Out B

Power supply

- Output impedance: < 500 Ohms

- Output level: access + 3 dBr

USING THE 12V OUTPUT

The Ground and + 12V outputs on the AUDIO-OUT connector allow for the connection of an external
12V device with a maximum energy consumption of 150 mA (Rack 1 and Rack 2) or 300 mA (Rack 3).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/12

CPU - CPUE BOARDS HARDWARE

12/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE COCPU - COCPU@ BOARDS

File
CoCPU - CoCPU@ BOARDS
3

The CoCPU and CoCPU@ (CoProcessing Unit) boards offer applications such as Voice over IP, access
to the Internet and to Internet services.

Plugging on BACKX board

XMEM or VOIP

SDRAM
ON

VOIP
ASPEN 1 4

CoCPU
ON
-
IA
+ 1 4

WAN SLANX CoCPU@

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

COCPU - COCPU@ BOARDS HARDWARE

DAUGHTER BOARDS

The CoCPU (CoCPU-1 and CoCPU-2) and CoCPU@ boards can take the following daughter boards:

- VoIP/VoIP-1: (Voice Over IP): Gateway H323 with integrated Gatekeeper function; supports the
management of CODECs and DSPs for IP telephony and IP Trunk (IP trunk lines) applications.
- SLANX (LANX Switch) : 4 LAN Switch ports.
- WAN: Ethernet link allowing the connection of an external DSL modem or an external router.
DAUGHTER BOARDS CoCPU CoCPU@
VoIP/VoIP-1 YES NO
WAN NO YES
SLANX4 YES YES
HARD DISK NO YES

SDRAM CAPACITY

Capacity CoCPU CoCPU@ CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2

SDRAM32 YES NO NO
SDRAM64 NO NO YES
SDRAM128 NO YES NO

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

HARDWARE COCPU - COCPU@ BOARDS

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

COPROCESSING UNIT CoCPU

LAN

LAN

Unit1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Uplink CPU

UNIT1 UNIT2 UNIT3 UP-LINK

COPROCESSING UNIT CoCPU@

LAN WAN

LAN WAN

Unit1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Uplink CPU

UNIT1 UNIT2 UNIT3 UP-LINK

Available functions:

- LAN 10/100 base T Ethernet port (MDI-II/straight)

- WAN: Ethernet 10/100 Base T port (MDI-II/straight); connection to an ADSL modem (available
from version R1.1 onwards)
- UNIT1, UNIT2, UNIT3: ports on integrated LAN switch (MDI-X/crossover)
- UPLINK: integrated LAN switch uplink port (MDI-II/straight).
RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LAN/WAN outputs TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
Uplink outputs TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
Unit 1 to 3 outputs RX+ RX- TX+ TX-

MEANING OF THE LED INDICATIONS

COPROCESSING UNIT CoCPU

LAN

LAN

Unit1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Uplink CPU

UNIT1 UNIT2 UNIT3 UP-LINK

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

COCPU - COCPU@ BOARDS HARDWARE

COPROCESSING UNIT CoCPU@

LAN WAN

LAN WAN

Unit1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Uplink CPU

UNIT1 UNIT2 UNIT3 UP-LINK

Name Color Function

CPU Green CPU functioning LED (flashing)
LAN Green LAN functioning LED (flashes when there is traffic)
WAN Green WAN functioning LED (flashes when there is traffic); LED used if
an ADSL modem is connected, available from version R1
onwards
UNITS 1 - 4 Green LAN switch interfaces 1 to 4 functioning LED (flashes when there
is traffic)
UPLINK

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

HARDWARE COCPU - COCPU@ BOARDS

CONNECTION

The CoCPU boards are connected either to the CPU board (LAN port) or to a LAN switch port. See also
the General Diagram in the section on CPU-CPUe boards.

CONNECTING A HARD DISK (CoCPU@)

Hard disks are fitted using an XMEM board.

Hard disk
Support

XMEM/VOIP-1 board
CPU board

44-point connectors connected by a flat cable

Important : During installation, always take anti-static precautions (wristband, heelpiece, etc.) befo-
re handling the hard disk). Electrostatic discharges can shorten the life of the disk.

When going into stand-by mode, wait for red Power LED to stop flashing before you re-
move the module's CPU board. Extracting the disk before the switch to standby is
completed can destroy part of the disk or damage its contents. Never handle the
hard disk until the motor has stopped completely (about 4 seconds after the red Power
LED stops flashing).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

COCPU - COCPU@ BOARDS HARDWARE

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD

File
CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD
4

The CPU-1 board (Processing Unit)is based on the new tracking of the ASPEN CPU board and has the
following characteristics: 133 MHz processor, 32 MB Flash, 64 MB S-DRAM, DSP 5410.

The CPU-2 board used for Alcatel OmniPCX Office 3.0 has the same main characteristics as the CPU-
1 board. Only the 32 MB flash memory is replaced by a 64 MB flash memory.

Plugging on BACKX board

XMEM or
XMEM-1
VOIP-1

SDRAM

ASPEN ON

1 4

+
AFU or
AFU-1
HSL

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/10

CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD HARDWARE

DAUGHTER BOARDS

The CPU-1/CPU-2 boards can take the following daughter boards:

- HSL (High Speed Link): module interconnections

- XMEM, XMEM-1 (eXpend MEMory): memory extension + 2.5" hard drive connection
- AFU, AFU-1 (Auxiliary Function Unit): supporting auxiliary functions such as general bell, doorpho-
ne, audio In, audio Out, etc ... ; the AFU-1 board is required for the connection of the ISDN-EFM
box (T0/S0 forwarding).
- VoIP-1 (Voice Over IP): Gateway H323 with integrated Gatekeeper function; supports the mana-
gement of CODECs and DSPs for IP telephony and IP Trunk (IP trunk lines) applications.

Attention : The VoIP4-1 and VoIP8-1 boards implemented on a CPU board consume a
hardware resource used for slot 8 of the module. In this case, it is impossible to
add a board other than a LANXxx board in slot 8.

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT CPU-1

LAN: AUDIO-OUT: CONFIG

LAN FAN POWER

MODULE CPU
MODULE1 MODULE2 AUDIO-IN DOORPHONE

Available functions:

- LAN: 10/100 base T Ethernet port (MDI-II/straight)

- AUDIO-OUTloudspeaker, alarm and general bell interfaces; 12V output
- AUDIO-IN please-wait message and background music interfaces
- DOORPHONE doorphone interfaces
- CONFIG RS232 for MMC, NMC and PPP connections
- MODULE1HSL link to add-on module 1
- MODULE2HSL link to add-on module 2
RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LAN TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
AUDIO-OUT Audio Audio Alarm CenRg CenRG Alarm Ground +12 V
Out A Out B A A B B
CONFIG CTS DSR RX Ground Ground TX DTR RTS
MODULE1 TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
MODULE2 TX+ TX- RX+ RX-

2/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

HARDWARE CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD

AUDIO-IN Audio In Audio In Audio Audio

A B Ctrl A Ctrl B
DOORPHONE Door- DoorPh DoorPh DoorPh
Ph B1 A1 A2 B2

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/10

CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD HARDWARE

MEANING OF THE LED INDICATIONS

BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT CPU-1

LAN: AUDIO-OUT: CONFIG

LAN FAN POWER

MODULE CPU
MODULE1 MODULE2 AUDIO-IN DOORPHONE

Name Color Function

CPU-1 and CPU- Green CPU functioning LED (flashing)
2
POWER Red/Green - Mains operation: steady green LED
- Battery operation: steady yellow LED
- Idle: flashing red LED
FAN Red/Green - Both fans functioning: steady green LED
- 1 or both fans down: steady red LED
LAN Green LAN functioning LED (flashes when there is traffic)
MODULE Green Presence of HSL board

CONNECTING A HARD DISK

Hard disk
Support

XMEM/VOIP-1 Board
CPU Board

44 point connector linked by a flat cable

Hard disks are fitted using an XMEM-XMEM-1 board.

Important : During installation, always take anti-static precautions (wristband, heelpiece, etc.) befo-
re handling the hard disk). Electrostatic discharges can shorten the life of the disk.

4/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

HARDWARE CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD

When going into stand-by mode, wait for red Power LED to stop flashing before you re-
move the CPU-1 or CPU-2 board from the module. Extracting the disk before the
switch to standby is completed can destroy part of the disk or damage its con-
tents. Never handle the hard disk until the motor has stopped completely (about 4 se-
conds after the red Power LED stops flashing).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/10

CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD HARDWARE

CONNECTING A PLEASE-WAIT MESSAGE PLAYER

This is connected via the Audio CTRL output (control contact open when idle) and the Audio In input
of the AUDIO-IN connector.

BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT CPU-1

Distribution table
AudCrtl A

Command AudCrtl B
circuit

Audio In A
Audio
circuit

Audio In B

Power supply

Audio input characteristics:

- Input impedance 600 Ohms

Contact characteristics (same characteristics for the alarm and doorphone control contacts):

- Max. power 10 W
- Max. voltage 100 V
- Max. current 500 mA

CONNECTING A BACKGROUND MUSIC TUNER

This is connected via the Audio In input of the AUDIO-IN connector.

6/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

HARDWARE CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD

BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT CPU-1

Distribution table

Audio In A

TUNER
Audio In B

Power supply

Audio input characteristics:

- Input impedance 600 Ohms

- Input level: access + 10 dBr

CONNECTING AN ALARM

The alarm is activated under the same conditions as TL forwarding (power outage or software com-
mand).

This is connected via the Alarm output (control contact closed when idle) of the AUDIO-OUT connec-
tor.

BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT CPU-1

Distribution table

Alarm A
Alarm
device
Alarm B

Power supply

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/10

CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD HARDWARE

CONNECTING A DOORPHONE

The doorphone interface comprises an intercom and an optional doorstrike powered by the mains
supply through a SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) transformer.

It is connected via the DoorPhA and DoorPhB outputs (control contacts open when idle) of the DOOR-
PHONE connector.

Connecting an NPTT doorphone

- A single doorphone with doorstrike may be connected to the system.

- The system also allows for the connection of 2 doorphones without doorstrikes.

BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT CPU-1

Distribution table

DoorPhA1

DOORPHONE
DoorPhA2

DoorPhB1
To doorstrike
(latch)
DoorPhB2
220V

Connecting Telemini and Universal Doorphones

These doorphones only require the use of a Z station interface.

- Several of these doorphones can be connected to the system; the limit is determined by the maxi-
mum number of analog stations the system can support.
- A system cannot have TELEMINI and UNIVERSAL doorphones at the same time.

8/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

HARDWARE CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD

CONNECTING A GENERAL BELL

Broadcast loudspeakers are connected via the CenRg output of the AUDIO-OUT connector.

BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT CPU-1

Distribution table

CenRg A
General
Bell

CenRG B

Power supply

CONNECTING A BROADCAST LOUDSPEAKER

Broadcast loudspeakers are connected via the Audio Out output of the AUDIO-OUT connector.

BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT CPU-1

Distribution table

Aud Out A

Ampli
Aud Out B

Power supply

- Output impedance: < 500 Ohms

- Output level: access + 3 dBr

USING THE 12V OUTPUT

The Ground and + 12V outputs on the AUDIO-OUT connector allow for the connection of an external
12V device with a maximum energy consumption of 150 mA (Rack 1 and Rack 2) or 300 mA (Rack 3).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/10

CPU-1/CPU-2 BOARD HARDWARE

10/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE CPUE-1/CPUE-2 BOARD

File
CPUe-1/CPUe-2 BOARD
5

The CPUe-1/CPUe-2 boards (Processing Unit) are based on the Pentium III LP (Low Power) processor.

They have the following characteristics: 700 MHz processor, 32 MB NAND Flash, 256 MB S-DRAM,
DSP 5410 and 5402, RMA.

Plugging on BACKX-N board

4
ON

HARD DISK

PENTIUM III

SDRAM

HSL AFU-1

WAN
+
-

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

CPUE-1/CPUE-2 BOARD HARDWARE

DAUGHTER BOARDS

The CPUe-1/CPUe-2 boards are equipped with the following daughter boards:

- HSL (High Speed Link): module interconnections

- WAN: Ethernet link allowing the connection of an external DSL modem or an external router
- EtherWAN: for Internet access with ADSL/leased line with router
- AFU-1 (Auxiliary Function Unit): support for auxiliary functions: general bell, doorphone, audio In,
audio Out, etc.; this board also allows the connection of a forwarding T0/S0 ISDN-EFM box.
- HARD DISK: 2.5" hard disk.

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

e-BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT CPUe-1

LAN: WAN AUDIO-OUT: CONFIG:

LAN: WAN FAN POWER

MODULE CPU
MODULE1: MODULE2: AUDIO-IN: DOORPHONE: USB

Available functions:

- LAN: 10/100 base T Ethernet (MDI-X/crossover cable)

- AUDIO-OUTloudspeaker, alarm and general bell interfaces; 12V output
- AUDIO-IN please-wait message and background music interfaces
- DOORPHONE doorphone interfaces
- CONFIG RS232 for MMC, NMC and PPP connections
- MODULE1HSL link to add-on module 1
- MODULE2HSL link to add-on module 2
- USB: USB connector (not used in the current state of the product)
RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LAN outputs TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
AUDIO-OUT out- Audio Audio Alarm A CenRg CenRg Alarm B Ground +12 V
puts Out A Out B A B
CONFIG outputs CTS DSR RX Ground Ground TX DTR RTS
MODULE1 out- TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
puts
MODULE2 out- TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
puts
AUDIO-IN outputs Audio In Audio In Audio Audio
A B Ctrl A Ctrl B

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

HARDWARE CPUE-1/CPUE-2 BOARD

DOORPHONE Door DoorPH DoorPH Door

outputs PHB1 A1 A2 PHB2
USB outputs (not 0V D0- D0+ GND : Ground Ground Ground Ground
used)

MEANING OF THE LED INDICATIONS

e-BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT CPUe-1

LAN: WAN AUDIO-OUT: CONFIG:

LAN: WAN FAN POWER

MODULE CPU
MODULE1: MODULE2: AUDIO-IN: DOORPHONE: USB

Name Color Function

CPU Green CPU functioning LED (flashing)
POWER Red/Green - Mains operation: steady green LED
- Battery operation: steady yellow LED
- Idle: flashing red LED
- System shutdown: steady red LED
FAN Red/Green - Both fans functioning: steady green LED
- 1 or both fans down: steady red LED
LAN Green LAN functioning LED (flashes when there is traffic)
MODULE Green Presence of HSL board
WAN Green LED showing correct WAN operation (flashes when there is traf-
fic); LED used if an ADSL modem/cable modem is connected.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

CPUE-1/CPUE-2 BOARD HARDWARE

CONNECTING A PLEASE-WAIT MESSAGE PLAYER

This is connected via the AudioCTRL output (control contact open when idle) and the Audio In input
of the AUDIO-IN connector.

e-BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT AMIX 4CPUe-1

Distribution table
AudCrtl A

Command AudCrtl B
circuit

Audio In A
Audio
circuit

Audio In B

Audio input characteristics:

- Input impedance 600 Ohms

Contact characteristics (same characteristics for the alarm and doorphone control contacts):

- Max. power 10 W
- Max. voltage 100 V
- Max. current 500 mA

CONNECTING A BACKGROUND MUSIC TUNER

This is connected via the Audio In input of the AUDIO-IN connector.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

HARDWARE CPUE-1/CPUE-2 BOARD

e-BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT AMIX 4CPUe-1

Distribution table

Audio In A

TUNER
Audio In B

Audio input characteristics:

- Input impedance 600 Ohms

- Input level: access + 10 dBr

CONNECTING AN ALARM

The alarm is activated under the same conditions as TL forwarding (power outage or software com-
mand).

This is connected via the Alarm output (control contact closed when idle) of the AUDIO-OUT connec-
tor.

e-BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT AMIX 4CPUe-1

Distribution table

Alarm A
Alarm
device
Alarm B

Power supply

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

CPUE-1/CPUE-2 BOARD HARDWARE

CONNECTING A DOORPHONE

The doorphone interface comprises an intercom and an optional doorstrike powered by the mains
supply through a SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) transformer.

It is connected via the DoorPHA and DoorPHB outputs (control contacts open when idle) of the
DOORPHONE connector.

Connecting an NPTT doorphone

- A single doorphone with doorstrike may be connected to the system.

- The system also allows for the connection of 2 doorphones without doorstrikes.

e-BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT AMIX 4CPUe-1

Distribution table

DoorPhA1

DOORPHONE
DoorPhA2

DoorPhB1
To doorstrike
(latch)
DoorPhB2
220V

Connecting Telemini and Universal Doorphones

These doorphones only require the use of a Z station interface.

- Several of these doorphones can be connected to the system; the limit is determined by the maxi-
mum number of analog stations the system can support.
- A system cannot have TELEMINI and UNIVERSAL doorphones at the same time.

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

HARDWARE CPUE-1/CPUE-2 BOARD

CONNECTING A GENERAL BELL

Broadcast loudspeakers are connected via the CenRg output of the AUDIO-OUT connector.

e-BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT AMIX 4CPUe-1

Distribution table

CenRg A
General
Bell

CenRG B

CONNECTING A BROADCAST LOUDSPEAKER

Broadcast loudspeakers are connected via the Audio Out output of the AUDIO-OUT connector.

AMIX 4CPUe-1
e-BUSINESS PROCESSING UNIT

Distribution table

Aud Out A

Ampli
Aud Out B

- Output impedance: < 500 Ohms

- Output level: access + 3 dBr

USING THE 12V OUTPUT

The Ground and + 12V outputs on the AUDIO-OUT connector allow for the connection of an external
12V device with a maximum energy consumption of 150 mA (Rack 1 and Rack 2) or 300 mA (Rack 3).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

CPUE-1/CPUE-2 BOARD HARDWARE

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE COCPU-1/COCPU-2 BOARD

File
CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 BOARD
6

The CoCPU-1 (CoProcessing Unit) and CoCPU-2 boards ( present the following characteristics: 133
MHz Aspen processor, 32 MB NAND Flash, 64 MB S-DRAM, DSP 5410 and 5402, RMA.

They are necessary when using one of the two following functionalities: VoIP or RAS (no simultaneous
use).

Plugging on BACKX board

VOIP

SDRAM

ASPEN ON

1 4

SLANX4

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

COCPU-1/COCPU-2 BOARD HARDWARE

DAUGHTER BOARDS

The CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 boards can take the following daughter boards:

- VoIP/VoIP-1: (Voice Over IP) : Gateway H323 with integrated Gatekeeper function; supports the
management of CODECs and DSPs for IP telephony and IP Trunk (IP trunk lines) applications.
- SLANX (Switched LANX): 4 LAN switch ports.

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

COPROCESSING UNIT CoCPU-1

LAN WAN

LAN WAN

ON/OFF

UNIT 1 UNIT 2 UNIT 3 UP-LINK CPU CARTE

UNIT 1 UNIT 2 UNIT 3 UP-LINK

Available functions:

- LAN : 10/100 base T Ethernet port (MDI-II/straight)

- WAN : 10/100 base T Ethernet port (MDI-II/straight); ADSL modem connection
- UNIT1, UNIT2, UNIT3 : ports on integrated LAN switch (MDI-X/crossover)
- UPLINK : Integrated LAN switch uplink port (MDI-II/straight).
RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LAN/WAN outputs TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
Uplink outputs TX+ TX- RX+ RX-
Unit 1 to 3 outputs RX+ RX- TX+ TX-

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

HARDWARE COCPU-1/COCPU-2 BOARD

MEANING OF THE LED INDICATIONS

COPROCESSING UNIT CoCPU-1

LAN WAN

LAN WAN

ON/OFF

UNIT 1 UNIT 2 UNIT 3 UP-LINK CPU CARTE

UNIT 1 UNIT 2 UNIT 3 UP-LINK

Name Color Function

CPU Green CPU functioning LED (flashing)
LAN Green LAN functioning LED (flashes when there is traffic)
WAN Green Not used
UNITS 1 - 4 Green LAN switch interfaces 1 to 4 functioning LED (flashes when there
is traffic)
UPLINK

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

COCPU-1/COCPU-2 BOARD HARDWARE

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE MEX BOARD

File
MEX BOARD
7

The MEX board (Module EXpansion) performs the controller functions in the add-on modules.

Plug-in to BACKX board

HSL1

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

MEX BOARD HARDWARE

DAUGHTER BOARD

The MEX board is equipped with an HSL1 (High Speed Link) board for interconnecting with the basic
module.

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

MODULE EXPANSION MEX

FAN POWER

MAIN

Available functions:

- MAIN: HSL to basic module.

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MAIN outputs TX+ TX- RX+ RX-

MEANING OF THE LED INDICATIONS

Name Color Function

POWER Red/Green - Mains operation: steady green LED
- Battery operation: steady yellow LED
- Idle: flashing red LED
FAN Red/Green - Both fans functioning: steady green LED
- 1 or both fans down: steady red LED

CONNECTION

The MEX board is connected to the MODULE 1 or MODULE 2 connector on the CPU/CPUe board.
See also the General Diagram in the section on CPU-CPUe boards.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE BRA BOARD

File
BRA BOARD
8

The BRA board The BRA (Basic Rate Access) board provides the basic access points (2 x 64-Kbps B-
channels + 1 x 16-Kbps D-channel per access) for connecting the system to the ISDN digital public
network (point-to-point or multipoint T0 link) and, starting with version R2.0, to a private network
(point-to-point DLT0 link); 3 versions are offered:

- BRA2: 2 T0 accesses
- BRA4: 4 T0 accesses
- BRA8: 8 T0 accesses

With PM5 it is possible to define the operating mode access by access: T0 (ISDN) or DLT0 (QSIG). If
the choice is DLT0 (QIG), the following operating mode may be defined: master = Network (NT), slave
= User(TE)

Nota : Configuration in T0/DLT0 is done by access pairs; if an access (04-001-01 for example) is
configured in DLT0, the 2nd one (04-002-01) must also be configured in DLT0.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

BRA BOARD HARDWARE

Plug-in to BACKX board

OBC

FICA FICA FICA FICA

2 4 6 8

FICA FICA FICA FICA

1 3 5 7

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
8

HARDWARE BRA BOARD

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

ISDN ACESS - T0 BRA8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8765 432 1
Female RJ45, front

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs TX+ RX+ RX- TX-

CONNECTING A T0 ACCESS

The Alcatel OmniPCX system can be installed near the digital network termination or at a certain dis-
tance (up to 350 m), as required.

Connection without T0/S0 forwarding

Distribution panel ISDN ACCESS - T0 BRA8

Transmission

TX

DNT
RX
Reception

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

BRA BOARD HARDWARE

Connection with T0/S0 forwarding

In the event of a loss of tension or CPU malfunction, the ISDN-EFM box allows a T0 access to be
forwarded directly to a S0 station.

Nota : The AFU-1 board (daughter board of the CPU board) must be equipped so as to detect a
loss of tension.

Description of the ISDN-EFM box

X5
X4
X3
X2
X1

Not Used

BRA NT S0 CPU AUX

Connections

The ISDN-EFM box must be installed as close as possible to the system (3 m maximum). All the box
connections are made with straight RJ45-RJ45 cables.

Output connectors functions:

- BRA: connection of T0 access to be forwarded.

- NT: Connection of ISDN network termination.
- S0: connection of forwarding S0 station.
- CPU: connection to the CPU board's AUDOUT connector.
- AUX: connection of Audio out, Alarm, General bell and 12 V use auxiliaries; since AUX is a copy
of the CPU board's AUDOUTde connector, check the sheet of the CPU board in use for connection
recommendations.

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
8

HARDWARE BRA BOARD

12V, GND, Alarm

ISDN-EFM module
General call ringer

Not Used
Audio Out

ISDN
S0 Terminal
Network Termination

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

BRA BOARD HARDWARE

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE PRA BOARD

File
PRA BOARD
9

The PRA board (Primary Rate Access) board provides 1 primary access for connecting the Alcatel Om-
niPCX system to the ISDN digital public network or to private networks:

- PRA-T2, DASS2, DLT2: 30 x 64-Kpbs B-channels + 1 x 64-Kbps D-channel; 2048 Kbps.

- PRA-T1: 23 x 64-Kbps B-channels + 1 x 64-Kbps D-channel; 1544 Kbps
- T1-CAS: 24 x B-channels, including signalling; 1544 Kbps.
- PCM R2: 30 x 64 Kbps B-channels + 1 x 4 Kbps signalling channel; 2048 Kbps.

There are several connection options: T2 120-ohm symmetrical pairs and T1 100-ohm symmetrical
pairs. A coaxial 75-ohm connection is available using an external adapter kit.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

PRA BOARD HARDWARE

Plug-in to BACKX board

OBC
4

Citro‰n straps
(definition of
FALC board type)

BOARD TYPE DEFINITION (CITROEN STRAPS)

The board type is defined by the Citroën strap solder:

- T2 (ex-factory) :no solders

- T1 : solder on strap 1
- T1-CAS : solders on straps 2 and 3
- DLT2 : solder on strap 2
- DASS2 : solder on strap 3
- PCM R2 : solder on strap 4

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

T2 board example

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

HARDWARE PRA BOARD

ISDN ACCESS - E1 PRA-T2

BUSY RAI AIS

NOS CRC LOS

NETW II PBX X

8765 432 1
Female RJ45, front

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NETW outputs RX+ RX- TX+ TX-
PCX outputs TX+ TX- RX+ RX-

NETW: connection to public network DLT.

PCX: network operation (QSIG).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

PRA BOARD HARDWARE

ALARM LEDS

BUSY RAI AIS

NOS CRC LOS

T2 Name T1 Name Feature
BUSY BUSY B-channels busy (red LED lights up if at least 1 B-channel is busy)
RAI (ATD) RAI Remote frame alarm (red LED lights up on alarm)
AIS (SIA2M) AIS Too many "1"s in the 2-Mbit binary train (red LED lights up on
alarm)
NOS (MS) NSIG Absence of 2-Mbit signal (red LED lights up on alarm)
CRC (TE) CRC CRC error (red LED lights up on alarm)
LOS (PVT) NSYN Loss of frame alignment (red LED lights up on alarm)

In parentheses: French abbreviations

CONNECTION (120- OHM SYMMETRICAL PAIRS)

ISDN ACCESS - E1 PRA-T2

Distribution panel

Transmission

TX

DLT
RX
Reception

The PRA board is connected to a digital line termination (DLT) by 2 reinforced symmetrical pairs.

Cable impedance: 120 Ohms +/- 20% between 200 kHz and 1 MHz; 120 Ohms +/- 10% at 1 MHz.
We recommend using an L120-series cable (or the L204 equivalent).
The distance T2-DLT is limited by the amount of loss between the DLT and T2, which must not exceed
6 dB at 1024 kHz.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE ATA BOARD

File
ATA BOARD
10

The ATA (Analog Trunk Access) board serves to connect analog trunk lines (TL). 2 board versions are
available:

- ATA-2: 2 trunk lines

- ATA-4: 4 trunk lines
Plug-in to BACKX board

Quartz
DSLAC DSLAC
OBC

X4

X1 X2 X3

X1, X2, X3, X4 : plug-in connectors for MET daughter boards (pulse meter receivers); by referring
against the quartz implanted on the MET daughter boards, the set up of these boards must follow the
layout above.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

ATA BOARD HARDWARE

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

ANALOG TRUNK ACCESS ATA4

1 2 3 4 SLI PHONE

8765 432 1
Female RJ45, front
RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs 1 to 4 PEA PEB
SLI outputs ZA ZB
PHONE outputs ZSETA ZSETB

CONNECTING A TL

Without TL forwarding

ANALOG TRUNK ACCESS ATA4

Distribution panel
PEA
Analog
Public
Network PEB

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
10

HARDWARE ATA BOARD

With TL forwarding
In the event of a power cut or CPU failure, this solution forwards the analog line connected to device
1 on the ATA board to another analog set in the system.

ANALOG INTERFACES SLI16

ZA, ZB

ANALOG TRUNK ACCESS ATA4

Distribution panel
PEA
Analog Public
Network PEB

ZSETA
Analog
terminal
ZSETB

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

ATA BOARD HARDWARE

ADAPTATION TO UK PROTOCOLS

In accordance with the UK analogue public network, 2 types of ATA boards are available:

- ATA board (2 or 4 equipments) equipped with polarity inversion detectors.

- ATA LCG board (2 or 4 equipments) equipped with calibrated power failure detectors.

Protocol Board type Supported functionality

ATA ATA Detection release of Detection discon-
LCG remote nect of remote
"Loop calling unguarded clear" pro- YES YES NO NO
tocol
"Loop calling guarded clear" proto- NO YES YES NO
col
IP protocol YES NO NO YES

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE AMIX-1 BOARD

File
AMIX-1 BOARD
11

The AMIX-1 board (Analog Mixed Line) used to connect the analog public network (PSTN) to the PCX.
AMIX-1 has the following characteristics:

- 4 analog line accesses,

- a maximum of 8 UA interfaces,
- a maximum of 8 Z interfaces,
- an OBC system interface supporting AT, Z and UA signaling,
- protection features
- the PFCT (Power Failure Cut Through) feature which allows a local analog set to connect directly
to a network line in the event of power cut or software failure.

Nota : The AMIX-1 board is required to connect the Compact Edition modules to the analog public
network (PSTN). It can be used for modules 1, 2 and 3.

The AMIX-1 board can take the following 3 daughter boards:

- METCLI
- GSCLI
- CLIDSP

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

AMIX-1 BOARD HARDWARE

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

MIXED AMIX 4/4/4-1

ANALOG INTERFACES

ANALOG TRUNKS DIGITAL INTERFACES

: indicates the assignment ports for the PFCT (Power Failure Cut Through) feature: the Z2 plug
is connected to a Z set, the AT1 plug to the PSTN.

MIXED AMIX 4/8/4-1

ANALOG INTERFACES DIGITAL INTERFACES

ANALOG TRUNKS DIGITAL INTERFACES

MIXED AMIX 4/4/8-1

ANALOG INTERFACES

ANALOG TRUNKS DIGITAL INTERFACES

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
11

HARDWARE AMIX-1 BOARD

8765 432 1
Female RJ45, front

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AT outputs AT_B_RING AT_A_TIP
UA outputs UA_a UA_b
Z outputs Z_a Z_b

CONNECTING AN ANALOG STATION (Z)

For more information, refer to the SLI board document.

CONNECTING AN ALCATEL REFLEXES STATION

For more information, refer to the UAI document.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

AMIX-1 BOARD HARDWARE

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE UAI BOARD

File
UAI BOARD
12

The UAI board allows the connection of Alcatel Reflexes stations (UA). 2 board versions are available:

- boards without external power supply capability:

- UAI4: 4 UA interfaces
- UAI8: 8 UA interfaces
- UAI16: 16 UA interfaces

- boards with external power supply capability:

- UAI16-1:: 16 UA interfaces

Differences between the two board versions

The UAI16-1 board is equipped with 2 ASICs OSIRIS while the UAI4/8/16 boards are equipped with
ASICs CATS (one ASIC OSIRIS replaces 2 ASICs CATS).

The system software detects whether the board is equipped with CATS or OSIRIS; if the ASIC OSIRIS is
detected, the software can also detect whether the board is connected to an external power supply.

The UAI-16 board allows to remotely supply the terminals connected to the 16 interfaces from a EPS48
external power supply connected to interface 1 using an external adaptation power cable (splitter).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

UAI BOARD HARDWARE

BOARDS UAI4, UAI8 and UAI16

Plug-in to BACKX board

OBC

Interfaces UA 9 Interfaces UA 13

CATS CATS

CATS CATS

Interfaces UA 1 Interfaces UA 5

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
12

HARDWARE UAI BOARD

Output ports (board stiffener)

DIGITAL INTERFACES UAI16

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8765 432 1
Female RJ45, front

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs L1 L2

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

UAI BOARD HARDWARE

UAI16-1 board

Plugging on BACKX board

OBC

UA interfaces 1 to 8 UA interfaces 9 to 16

OSIRIS OSIRIS

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
12

HARDWARE UAI BOARD

Output ports (board stiffener)

DIGITAL INTERFACES UAI16-1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(DC-In)

8765 432 1
Female RJ45, front

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs 1 L1 L2 0V +48 V
Outputs 2 to 16 L1 L2

CONNECTING A REFLEXES STATION

Connection without external power supply

The terminals are equipped with a cable and a self-acting switch that plugs into the wall socket. Each
terminal is connected up by a pair of 0.5 or 0.6 mm diameter wires.

System - Reflexes station distances:

- 0.5 mm SYT type cable: 800 m (station without option) or 600 m (station with S0 or Z option)
- 0.6 mm 278 type cable: 1,200m (station without option) or 850m (station with S0 or Z option)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

UAI BOARD HARDWARE

DIGITAL INTERFACES UAI16

Distribution panel
L1 (4) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L2 (5)

Connection with external power supply

A splitter allows the separation of the UA peripheral connection and the EPS48 external power supply.

DIGITAL INTERFACES UAI16-1

Distribution table
L1 (4)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L2 (5)
Splitter

1 1

EPS48

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE SLI BOARD

File
SLI BOARD
13

The SLI or SLI-1 board (Single Line) allows the connection of 2-wire analog terminals (Z). 3 board ver-
sions are available:

- SLI4: 4 Z interfaces
- SLI8: 8 Z interfaces
- SLI16: 16 Z interfaces
Plug-in to BACKX board

OBC
QCIALA (Z13
QCIALA (Z5
QCIALA (Z1

QCIALA (Z9

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

SLI BOARD HARDWARE

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

ANALOG INTERFACES SLI16

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8765 432 1
Female RJ45, front

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs ZA ZB

CONNECTING AN ANALOG Z STATION

The terminals are equipped with a cable and a self-acting switch that plugs into the wall socket. Each
set is connected up with a pair of 0.5 or 0.6-mm wires (the maximum distance with 0.5-mm cabling
is 1.3 km).

Distribution panel ANALOG INTERFACES SLI16

ZA

2
1
4
3
5 6

ZB

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE LANX BOARD

File
LANX BOARD
14

The LanX board (Ethernet LAN Switch) serves to connect Ethernet terminals (IEEE 802.3 compatible). 3
board versions are available:

- LanX8

8 10/100 BT Ethernet ports (ports 1 to 7: MDI-X/crossover; Uplink: MDI-II/straight link)

- LanX16

16 10/100 BT Ethernet ports (ports 1 to 15: MDI-X/crossover; Uplink: MDI-II/straight link)

- LANX16-1

16 10/100 BT Ethernet ports (ports 1 to 15: MDI-X/crossover; Uplink: MDI-II/straight link); low
consumption. Contrary to the LANX8 and LANX16 boards that are seen by the system as CPU
boards, this LanX16-1 board, under a 40 V tension, is seen as an interface board (such as UAI,
SLI, etc.) and thus allows the limit number of usable boards to be increased; in order to find out
the limit values by module type, see the "Capacities and limits" sheet.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

LANX BOARD HARDWARE

Plug-in to BACKX board

OBC

Converter

KS8998 KS8998

LANX-2 boards
The LanX8-2 and LanX16-2 are second generation boards integrating respectively 1 or 2 Ethernet Gi-
gabit ports for a Lanswitch/Layer 2 configuration. Any port can be used as an Uplink, as all the ports
are auto MDI/MDIX.

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

LANX boards

ETHERNET LANSWITCH LanX16-1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 UP-LINK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
14

HARDWARE LANX BOARD

ETHERNET LANSWITCH LANX16

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 UP-LINK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ETHERNET LANSWITCH LANX8

5 6 7 UP-LINK

1 2 3 4

Each category-5 RJ45 connector has 2 green LEDs:

- LED A = link status and activity:

- LED off: link disconnected
- LED steady: link connected
- LED flashing: link active
- LED B = full duplex/collision:
- LED out: half Duplex
- LED steady: full Duplex
- LED flashing: collision:

Led A Led B

8765 432 1
Female RJ45, front

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Port outputs (ports RX+ RX- TX+ TX-
1 to 15)
Up-Link output TX+ TX- RX+ RX-

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

LANX BOARD HARDWARE

LANX-2 board

ETHERNET LANSWITCH LANX8-2

GE1 6 4 2

Port B

Port A

7 5 3 1

manages ports Ge1, 6, 4 and 2

manages ports 7, 5, 3 and 1

ETHERNET LANSWITCH LANX16-2

GE1 6 4 2 GE2 13 11 9

Port B

Port A

7 5 3 1 14 12 10 8

manages ports GE1, 6, 4, 2, GE2, 13, 11 and 9

manages ports 7, 5, 3, 1, 14, 12, 10 and 8

Unlike the first generation boards, the LEDs of the A and B ports are both located at the top of the
board. The LED display is as follows:

- Green LED (left) = link status and activity:

- LED off: link disconnected
- LED steady: link connected
- LED flashing: link active
- Yellow LED (right) = speed:
- off: low speed (10 or 100 Mb for Gigabit port, 10 Mb for the other ports)
- on: high speed (1 Gb for Gigabit port, 100 Mb for the other ports)

LANX-2 board

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ports 1 to 14 RX+ RX- TX+ TX-
GE1, GE2 TR0+ TR0- TR1+ TR2+ TR2- TR1- TR3+ TR3-

- Port 1 to 14: 10/100 BT ports.

- GE1, GE2: 10/100/1000 BT ports.

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
14

HARDWARE LANX BOARD

CONNECTION PRINCIPLES

Basic 10/100 BT connection

MDI-X MDI-II
1 1

2 2
RX TX

Straight link (twisted

pairs cable)
3 3

TX 6 6 RX

Hub, Switch Station, PC, IPPhone, or Uplink connector

MDI-X to MDI-X connection

MDI-X MDI-X
1 1

2 2
RX RX

3 3

6 6
TX TX
Crossover (twisted
pairs cable)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

LANX BOARD HARDWARE

CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

Alcatel
Server 1
SWITCH Ethernet 10/100 Mbits

Ethernet 10/100 Mbits

Up-Link
Server 2
ETHERNET LANSWITCH LANX8
PROCESSING UNIT CPU

Port 4

Port 3

Ethernet 10/100 Mbits

Port 2
Ethernet 10/100 Mbits

Host 1

Port 1

Host 2
Ethernet 10/100 Mbits

Host 3

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE APA BOARD

File
APA BOARD
15

The APA boards can only be used on systems running a software version prior to R2.0.

The APA board (Analogue Public Access) allows connecting analogue trunk lines (LR). 2 board versions
are available:

- APA-4: 4 LR interfaces
- APA-8: 8 LR interfaces

Plugging on BACKX board

OBC OBC

X5

DSLAC DSLAC

X60 X61 X62 X70 X71 X72

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

APA BOARD HARDWARE

X5: CLIDSP daughter board plugging connector (detection of CLIP signal).

X60, X61, X62, X70, X71, and X72: GSCLI daughter boards plugging connectors (Ground Start si-
gnalling).

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

ANALOG PUBLIC ACCESS APA8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8765 432 1
Front panel female RJ45
RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Output1 LB-Ring LA-Tip
Outputs 2 to 8 ZSETB ZSETA LB-Ring LA-Tip ZB ZA

CONNECTING A TL

Without TL forwarding

ANALOG PUBLIC ACCESS APA8

Distribution table
LA-Tip
Network
Public
Analog LB-Ring

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
15

HARDWARE APA BOARD

With LR forwarding
In the event of a loss of tension or CPU malfunction, this solution allows forwarding of the analogue
line, connected to the APA board's equipment 1, to an analogue station.

ANALOG PUBLIC ACCESS APA8

Distribution table

LA-Tip
Analog
Public LB-Ring
Network

ZSETA
Analog
Station
ZSETB

ANALOG INTERFACES SLI16

ZA, ZB

Nota : US connection features

- APA board equipped with Ground Start signalling: Ring is connected to the network's + po-
larity while Tip is connected to the - (earth in case of conventional battery).

- APA board equipped with Loop Start signalling: In case of a conventional battery, Tip is nor-
mally connected to the network equipment's earth and Ring to the network's - polarity. Neverthe-
less, maintenance operations may temporarily or permanently inverse these polarities: the
connection of each of the battery's terminals to earth cannot be ensured. In the case of a floating
battery, no network's terminal is connected to earth: the Tip and Ring outputs are floating.

CLIDSP BOARD EQUIPMENT

The signal necessary to manage the CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) is generated at the
CPU board level except in the following cases, which require a CLIDSP board (to be installed on con-
nector X5 of the board): US, UK and all countries using only Dual Tone (DT-AS) as alert signal.

The CLIDSP board will also be necessary to detect the CLIP in the on-hook state (later phase).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

APA BOARD HARDWARE

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE DDI BOARD

File
DDI BOARD
16

The DDI board (Direct Dialling Inward) allows the connection of analogue trunk lines with Multiple
Subscriber Numbers. 2 board versions are available:

- DDI-2: 2 SDA interfaces

- DDI-4: 4 SDA interfaces

Plugging on BACKX board

OBC

DSLAC

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

DDI BOARD HARDWARE

OUTPUT PORTS (BOARD STIFFENER)

DIRECT DIALLING INWARD DDI4

1 2 3 4

8765 432 1
Front panel female RJ45
RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs L- L+

CONNECTING AN SDA LINE

DIRECT DIALLING INWARDDDI4

Distribution table
L-
Analog
Public
Network L+

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

HARDWARE POWER SUPPLIES

File
POWER SUPPLIES
17

Power supplies of the PSxN family are mandatory when the system is equipped with a PIII
CPU board.

POWER SUPPLY PS1/PS1N

Power supply PS1/PS1N provides the different voltages required to operate a Rack 1 module and also
acts as a backplane board (slots 1, 2 and CPU).

Power supply connectors

for fans

SLOT 1

12V CPU fuse

(1A fast-acting)

F6.3AL/250V battery fuse

SLOT 2 (6.3A fast-acting, low breaking
capacity)

Battery connection
+BAT (red)
-BAT (black)
NEUTRAL
EARTH

Mains filter
connection
SLOT CPU
LIVE

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

POWER SUPPLIES HARDWARE

POWER SUPPLY PS2/PS2N

Power supply PS2/PS2N, which provides the different voltages required to operate a Rack 2 module,
comprises 2 boards:

- PCH2: charger board

- PCO2: converter board

NEUTRAL
Fan power supply connectors

Mains power connexion

LIVE

12V fuse for CPU

(1A fast-acting)

110V/230V selection: 3
-jumpers in 1-2: 110 V
Plug-in connectors -jumpers in 2-3: 230 V
1
on BACK2*

SWT
PCO2 Board

GND
Connection with
PCO2 board POWER-V12DC

Battery fuse F10AL/250V

(10 A fast-acting,
low breaking capacity)

-BAT (black)
SWT
GND
PCH2 Board
+BAT (red)
POWER-V12DC

Connection with Battery

PCH2 board connexion

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
17

HARDWARE POWER SUPPLIES

POWER SUPPLY PS3/PS3N

Power supply PS3/PS3N, which provides the different voltages required to operate a Rack 3 module,
comprises 2 boards:

- PCH3: charger board

- PCO3: converter board

NEUTRAL
Fan power supply connectors

Mains power connexion

12V fuse for CPU LIVE

(1A fast-acting)
1
110V/230V selection:
Plug-in connectors -2 jumpers in 1-2: 230 V 3
-2 jumpers in 2-3: 110 V
on BACK3 1

SWT
PCO3 board

GND
Connection with

POWER-V40DCN
PCH3 board

Battery fuse F6.3AL/250V

(6.3 A fast-acting,
low breaking capacity)

PCH3 board
SWT
GND -BAT (black)
POWER-V40DCN +BAT (red)

Connection with Battery

PCO3 board connexion

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

POWER SUPPLIES HARDWARE

BATTERIES

Equipment:

- Rack 1: 1 battery
- Rack 2: 2 batteries mounted in parallel
- Rack 3: 3 batteries mounted in series

Battery characteristics:

- sealed lead battery

- 1.2 Ah / 12 V
- fire resistance better than or equal to UL94-V2

Maintenance

To guarantee system shutdown without data loss in the event of a mains power failure or if the mains
plug is unplugged at the wall socket, replace the batteries every two years. This maintenance operation
is vital to guarantee sufficient power autonomy to allow the files to be saved before the system shuts
down.

In the case of only voice module, (without Hard Disk or CoCPU board), the autonomy time is equal to
20 minutes.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
17

HARDWARE POWER SUPPLIES

UPS (Uninterruptible Power Source)

A Pulsar ellipse UPS (Uninterruptible Power Source) increases the backup time generally ensured by
the system batteries. A maximum of 2 Alcatel OmniPCX modules can be connected to a UPS.

Cable provided with UPS

Mains power cable provided with

system (country-specific)

To mains
UPS power

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

POWER SUPPLIES HARDWARE

Equipment:
The following table indicates the UPS models to use with each Alcatel OmniPCX Office system for a
power autonomy of about 1 hour (40 minutes for the XL model used with a standard configuration).

System UPS 220 V UPS 110 V

Alcatel OmniPCX model S Pulsar ellipse 300 Pulsar ellipse 300 USB
Alcatel OmniPCX model M Pulsar ellipse 650S Pulsar ellipse 650 RS232
Alcatel OmniPCX model L Pulsar ellipse 1200S Pulsar ellipse 1200 RS232
Alcatel OmniPCX model XL Pulsar ellipse 1200S Pulsar ellipse 1200 RS232

Choice of UPS
The following table indicates for each Alcatel OmniPCX system (in extreme configurations) the con-
sumption that is used to choose a UPS from the various models offered by UPS manufacturers.

System Configuration Primary consumption

Alcatel OmniPCX model S 24 terminals 50 W
12 terminals + 1 CoCPU board 55 W
Alcatel OmniPCX model M 48 terminals 70 W
48 terminals + 1 CoCPU board 85 W
Alcatel OmniPCX model L 96 terminals 105 W
96 terminals + 1 CoCPU board 120 W
Alcatel OmniPCX model XL 192 terminals 210 W
192 terminals + 2 CoCPU boards 230 W

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
17

HARDWARE POWER SUPPLIES

EPS48 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

The EPS48 external power supply (48V - 1A) is designed to power the new UAI16-1 boards, thus ena-
bling the connection of power-hungry peripherals without a need for another module or for a bigger
module.

Plugged into the main power supply, a 2 m power cable with an 8 points RJ45 connector powers the
splitter used with the UAI16-1 board.

A green lamp indicates tension.

The EPS48 external power supply's connection into the main power supply must be located as close as
possible to the system and be easily accessible.

Output Points:

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs 0V 48 V

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

POWER SUPPLIES HARDWARE

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
Terminals

SECTION

TERMINALS

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

TERMINALS

Section Terminals

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 FILE 1

ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G TERMINALS FILE 2

MULTI-REFLEXES 4099 HUB FILE 3

BASE STATION FILE 4

MOBILE REFLEXES 100/200 HANDSETS FILE 5

IP TERMINALS FILE 6

PIMPHONY REFLEXES WORKSTATIONS FILE 7

VBTEL VISUALLY IMPAIRED OPERATOR STATION FILE 8

EARLIER GENERATION SETS FILE 9

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION TERMINALS (INDEX) TERMINALS

Section Terminals (Index)

ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G TERMINALS FILE 2

MOBILE REFLEXES 100/200 HANDSETS FILE 5

BASE STATION FILE 4

EARLIER GENERATION SETS FILE 9

IP TERMINALS FILE 6

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 FILE 1

MULTI-REFLEXES 4099 HUB FILE 3

PIMPHONY REFLEXES WORKSTATIONS FILE 7

VBTEL VISUALLY IMPAIRED OPERATOR STATION FILE 8

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

TERMINALS IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068

File
IP TOUCH SETS 4038 and 4068
1

BASIC DESCRIPTION

1-Overview
As part of the Alcatel professional range, these state-of-the-art IP phones are full-featured with inte-
grated IP connectivity and telephony, bringing you the converged power of data and voice over IP
(VoIP). Besides their optimized design, these terminals offer high-resolution, adjustable color or gray
screens, wide band audio, superior quality ring tones, wireless freedom, without mentioning the capa-
bility to support any web-based business application.

The IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068 offer the following advantages:

- Instant Business Communications

- Optimized Ergonomics

- Superlative sound quality

- Open to a whole new world of applications and services

- Unbeatable range of telephony features

2-Instant Business Communications

IP Touch sets 4038 and 4068 are always on, ready to provide the best communication service whene-
ver you need it and to connect to other devices and applications in real-time. You’ll find them fast and
easy to use, with feature buttons and interactive soft keys, making them the ideal focal point for all
your business communications.

3-Optimized Ergonomics
Attractive, innovative and intuitively designed, these terminals operate on the same simple, user-frien-
dly ergonomics found in the best mobile phones and PDAs, so that you won’t waste time accessing
their powerful features and services. Each phone comes complete with:

- Large, color or gray adjustable screen

- Programmable feature buttons

- Four-way navigator

- Context-sensitive keys

- Integrated alphabetic keyboard for functions such as text messaging and dial by name

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/20

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 TERMINALS

4-Superlative sound quality

IP Touch sets provide the very best sound quality thanks to a wide range of new enhancements:

- Compatibility with wide band audio, taking listening comfort to higher levels

- Full duplex hands-free speakerphone, including acoustic echo cancellation

- A comprehensive choice of truly polyphonic ringing melodies

IP Touch sets include a built-in port to use headsets, additional speakers or teleconferencing systems.

5-Open to a whole new world of applications and services

Both IP Touch sets are fully equipped to welcome outside applications via an XML interface, enabling
you to customise your communications infrastructure to the unique demands of your business. Users
can receive tailor-made applications – such as hosted or web-based - from customers or developers
at the turn of a software key. At the same time, they can keep pace with new communication features
from Alcatel, such as OmniTouch Unified Communications.

6-Unbeatable range of telephony features

The new terminals offer the full range of telephony services found in Alcatel’s OmniPCX servers – En-
terprise and Office - unbeatable in terms of functionality, features, reliability and Quality of Service.
IP Touch sets 4038 and 4068 are available in all countries where the associated IP-enabled Alcatel
OmniPCX system releases are launched. These sets are compatible from releases OmniPCX Office 3.1
and OmniPCX Enterprise 6.0.

HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

1-Overview
The IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068 are two new IP sets that are implemented in OmniPCX Enterprise
and OmniPCX Office systems. They are used from:

- R 6.0 for OmniPCX Enterprise systems

- R 3.1 for OmniPCX Office systems

For more information, refer to IPTouch sets 4038 and 4068 - Basic description

The IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068 offer the same features. The following differences exist between both
sets:

- Color and backlight features

- Bluetooth headsets

For more information, refer to table 3 : IP Touch set 4038 & 4068.

2/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

TERMINALS IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068

2-IP Touch 4038 & 4068 set description

This section describes the:

- Set equipment

- Set keyboard

- Set display

The following figure illustrates IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068.

OK Alarm

Four- Exit/Home
directional
keys

Display
soft keys

Help

Personal keys
F1 & F2

Message
End
Redial

End
Mute

Hands-
free
Headset
jack Volume

Alphabetic
Dialing keypad keyboard

Figure 1: IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/20

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 TERMINALS

2-1-Set equipment

The following table describes IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068.

Equipment IP Touch 4038 IP Touch 4068

Corded comfort handset Yes Yes
Hands-free station speaker Yes Yes
Dialing keypad Yes Yes
Alphabetic keyboard Yes Yes
Fixed function keys Yes Yes
Navigator Yes Yes
Programmable keys Yes Yes
F1 and F2 keys (with LEDs) Yes Yes
Display soft keys Yes (10) Yes (10)
Alarm (two-color screen LED) Yes Yes
Messages and incoming calls Yes Yes
(with orange LEDs)
Add-on modules Yes (optional) Yes (optional)
Wall mounted kit Yes (optional) Yes (optional)
Foot-stand 60º (“Big Foot”) Yes (optional) Yes (optional)
Bluetooth headset No Yes

Table 1: IP Touch set 4038 & 4068 equipment

2-2-Set keyboard

The IP Touch set 4038 & 4068 keyboard includes:

- A dialing keypad

- An alphabetic keyboard

- Function keys

- Programmable keys

- A navigator

Dialing keypad

The dialing keypad includes 12 keys.

4/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

TERMINALS IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068

Alphabetic keyboard

The alphabetic keyboard includes 34 keys.

The alphabetic keyboard exists in five versions: French, German, International, Scandinavian, and
American.

Function keys

The function keys include eight fixed keys.For more information, refer to the table below.

Key Action
END Terminates current communication
Hands–free (with green LED) Enables or disables the hands–free feature.
Short press activates the hands-free feature.

Enables to switch from handset to headset

Long press on the hands-free key activates the

Group Listening feature.

The hands-free function is a full duplex function

with echo cancellation and attenuation
Volume - In , they adjust the volume and contrast level

- + - The + key increases volume and contrast

- — - The — key decreases volume and con-

trast

- In , they adjust:

- the volume in communication mode

- the ringing level when the set rings

Redial Redials number automatically
Message (with orange LED) Provides access to:

- voice-mail services

- mini-message services
Exit/Home - Exits current application

- Long press switches back to home page

Mute (with green LED) Switches to mute mode

Table 2: IP Touch set 4038 & 4068 fixed keys

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/20

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 TERMINALS

Programmable keys

The programmable keys include:

- 40 programmable soft keys on the set itself. They are activated from the Perso tab, using the dis-
play soft keys.

- Two personal keys (F1 and F2)

Keys F1 and F2 allow to:

- Program the user's preferred functions such as forwarding assistant call, headset, specific call
number

- Access them rapidly

The keys are programmable from the graphical display PERSO tab. For more information on the gra-
phical display tabs, refer to paragraph Tabs below.

Navigator

The navigator includes:

- One 4–directional navigation device

- One central validation key (OK)

2-3-Set display

The table below lists the characteristics of the IP Touch set 4038 & 4068 display.

Characteristics IP Touch set 4038 IP Touch set 4068

Graphical display Yes Yes
Screen 100x160 pixels 240 x 320 pixels
Visible area size 78 x 51 mm (30.7 x 20.1 in- 73.52 x 55.64 mm (21.9 x 28.9
ches) inches)
Color 4–gray levels 4096 colors
Back light No Yes

Table 3: IP Touch 4038 & 4068 display

Tabs

The graphical display home page includes three tabs:

- The MENU tab which gives access to all the functions and applications accessible by users.
- The PERSO tab which includes up to 40 programmable keys.
- The INFO tab which provides information about phone status.

6/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

TERMINALS IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068

COMMISSIONING

1-Overview
This module presents all the actions required for commissioning IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068.

The following figure illustrates the IP Touch set 4038 & 4068 connectors.

LAN
connector
Power supply
PC connector

Add-on module
attachment

External ringing
signal connector

Add-on module
connector Headset
jack

Handset connector

Figure 2: IP Touch set 4038 & 4068 connectors

2-Commissioning the IP Touch sets 4038 and 4068

This section describes how to:

- Connect the IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068

- Initialize the IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068

- Connect optional equipment

- Program keys

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/20

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 TERMINALS

2-1-Prerequisites

None

2-2-Connecting the IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068

This section describes how to:

- Connect the IP Touch set to the LAN (Local Area Network)

- Connect power supply

Prerequisites

None

Connecting the IP Touch set to the LAN

To connect the set to the LAN:

1. Turn the set over.

2. Plug the RJ45 cable into the set LAN connector.

3. Connect the RJ45 cable to the LAN itself.

4. End.

Connecting power supply

The IP Touch set can be supplied from two sources:

- An AC/DC external adapter which is a –42V power supply

A female jack is used to connect the power adapter. The AC/DC external adapter is the same for
IP Touch and e-Reflex sets.

- Power over Ethernet (PoE)

The supply via Ethernet can be done via a 802.3af standard-compatible switch.

To supply power via an AC/DC external adapter:

1. Plug the appropriate cable into the set power supply connector.

2. Connect the plug to the main power supply.

Initialization starts.

3. End.

For more information about Power Patch panel, refer to Power Patch Panels - Hardware description

8/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

TERMINALS IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068

2-3-Initializing the IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068

This section describes how to:

- Choose the initialization mode

- Initialize the IP Touch set

Prerequisites

The IP Touch set must be connected to the:

- LAN

- Power supply

Choosing the initialization mode

The default mode is the dynamic mode.

To choose the initialization mode, refer to the table below.

If Then the chosen initializa- And

tion mode is
You have a DHCP server The dynamic mode Refer to table 5: Initialization
procedure
You do not have a DHCP server The static mode - Refer to table 5: Initialization
procedure

- Obtain from network admi-

nistrator:

- An IP address for the IP

Touch set
- The subnetwork mask
- The router address

- The TFTP server address

(master VoIP board ad-
dress)

Nota :The user needs to

know his set di-
rectory number.

Table 4: Initialization modes

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/20

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 TERMINALS

Initializing the IP Touch set

To initialize the IP Touch set, refer to the table below.

For an Then
initializa-
tion that is
Dynamic 1. Connect power supply.

2. Before initialization phase 5 starts, press I, then # key.

The Main menu appears.

3. If the set previously was in static mode, choose IP Par from the Main menu.

The IP Par menu appears

4. Choose Dynamic.

5. Press the upper left display soft key to save.

6. Press the upper right display soft key to exit the IP Par menu.

7. End.

10/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

TERMINALS IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068

Static 1. Connect power supply.

2. Before initialization phase 5 starts, press I, then # key.

The Main menu appears.

3. From the Main menu, choose IP Par.

The IP Par menu appears

4. Choose Static.

5. Enter:

5.1. IP address
5.2. Subnetwork mask
5.3. TFTP server address
5.4. Router address
5.5. VLAN number, if necessary

6. Press the upper left display soft key to save.

7. Press the upper right display soft key to exit the

8. IP Par

9. menu.

The set restarts from phase 1 with the new parameters.

10. End.

Nota :If an error message appears during initialization, disconnect power

adapter, then plug in again, so that the system restarts initializa-
tion.

Table 5: Initialization procedure

Restarting initialization

If you want to change a parameter value, restart initialization, as presented below.

To restart initialization:

1. Disconnect the IP Touch set power supply.

2. Plug it in again.

3. Execute the initialization procedure as presented in table 5: Initialization procedure

4. End.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/20

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 TERMINALS

2-4-Connecting optional equipment

This section describes how to:

- Connect an Add-On module (AOM) to the IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068

- Connect a headset

- Connect an external station speaker

- Connect additional equipment.

2-4-1- Connecting an Add-On module to the IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068

Add-On modules can be connected to the IP Touch sets 4038 & 4068.

Two types of Add-On modules exist and provide keys associated with icons:

- AOM10 provides 10 keys

- AOM40 provides 40 keys

Prerequisites

None.

Limits

The following limits apply to the IP Touch set 4038 & 4068 Add-On modules:

- A maximum of three AOMs 40 can be connected per IP Touch set

- Up to 120 additional keys are available per IP Touch set

- Module AOM10 is the last module located to the right side of the IP Touch set to which it is con-
nected.

Connecting Add-On modules

To connect Add-On modules:

1. Remove the tab located on the right side of the IP Touch set.

2. Plug the Add-On module RJ45 connector into the set RJ45 connector.

3. Insert the Add-On module attachments into the appropriate holes located on the right side of the
IP Touch set.

4. Screw the Add-on module to the IP Touch set.

5. End.

Nota : If the IP Touch set is on when you plug in an Add-On module, you must restart the set after
connection.

12/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

TERMINALS IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068

2-4-2- Connecting headsets

The headset jack is located on the left side of the IP Touch set.

The 3.5 mm female jack can receive a headset jack.

The hands-free key allows you to switch from handset to headset.

Prerequisites

None.

Connecting a headset

To connect a headset:

1. Plug the headset jack into the associated set connector.

2. End.

2-4-3- Connecting external station speakers

The external station speaker jack is located on the left side of the IP Touch set.

The 3.5 mm female jack can receive an external station speaker jack.

In order to take the external station speaker into account, the set customization for the jack has to be
set to “Loudspeaker”.

Prerequisites

None.

Connecting an external station speaker

To connect an external station speaker:

1. Plug the external station speaker jack into the associated set connector.

2. End.

2-5-Programming keys

This section describes how to:

- Program a key

- Program virtual keys (fast customization)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/20

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 TERMINALS

Programming a key

To program a key:

1. From the MENU tab, select Settings.

The Settings menu appears.

2. From the Settings menu, select Keys.

The Keys menu appears.

3. From the Keys menu, select Call key.

The Keys menu appears.

4. From the Keys menu, select Label

5. Enter the label to be associated with a specific key, then press OK.

The key is associated the desired label.

6. Enter the number to be associated with the key, then press OK.

The key is associated the desired number.

7. Press Exit to go back to home page.

8. End.

Programming virtual keys (fast customization)

To program virtual keys:

1. From the PERSO tab, select Call key

The Call key menu appears.

2. Select a key, then Label.

3. Enter the label to be associated with the selected key, then press OK.

The key is associated the desired label.

4. Enter the number to be associated with the key, then press OK.

The key is associated the desired number.

5. Press Exit to go back to home page.

6. End.

14/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

TERMINALS IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068

2-6-Relocating and retaining IP Touch sets

This section describes how to relocate and retain the same set.

In the procedures below, it is assumed that:

- there is one DHCP server

- no VLAN has to be configured.

Prerequisites

None.

Relocating and retaining the same set

To relocate and retain the same set:

1. Unplug the set.

2. Plug the set into connector at its new location.

3. End.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/20

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 TERMINALS

MAINTENANCE

1-Overview
This module describes:

- The error and information messages that appear during the starting phase.
- The Ethernet link table.

2-Error and information messages

The table below lists the error and information messages. It has the following format:
Short text = text displayed on the screen, in case of real error or for information.
Description = status/error description

Short text Description

END Starting phase is terminated (successful or un-
successful)
STARTED Step started
SUCCESS Step successful
FAIL Step failed
RETRYING Retrying step
NO MAC ADDRESS No Ethernet MAC address stored in flash
DHCP NOT RESPONDING DHCP Server is not responding
BAD IP ADDRESS IP address is incorrect
BAD ROUTER ADDRESS Router address is incorrect
ROUTER PING FAILED Router not responding to ping
BAD TFTP ADDRESS TFTP server address is incorrect
ADDRESSES MISMATCH Address, mask and router do not match
TFTP NOT RESPONDING TFTP server is not responding
TFTP SERVER ERROR TFTP server error
BAD FILE CONTENT Error found in downloaded file
FILE TOO LARGE File is too large (cannot be downloaded)
SAME VERSION FOUND The version retrieved is the same as the version
running
NEW VERSION FOUND New IP Touch software version found (down-
load)
FLASHING Flashing in progress
FLASHING FAILED Failed to flash downloaded binary

16/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

TERMINALS IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068

Short text Description

TRYING ANOTHER CPU Trying next address from configuration file
NO ETHERNET LINK Ethernet link not connected (LAN port only)
initializing First text message after hardware reset and co-
pyright information
1/5 network start phase 1 is running: the set is starting its network
interface
2/5 network setup Phase 2 is running: the set is looking for IP ad-
dresses
3/5 config download Phase 3 is running: the set is trying to get a
lanPCX file
4/5 binary download Phase 4 is running: the set is downloading a new
binary
5/5 connecting Phase 5 is running: the set is trying to talk to the
system

Table 6: Starting phase error messages

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/20

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 TERMINALS

3-Ethernet link table

The table below gives the real link state, depending on the device parameters. Invalid parameters ap-
pear as bold characters.

Link Device 1 Device 2 Device 3

1 Auto–negotiation Auto–negotiation 100–FULL
2 100–FULL Auto–negotiation 100–HALF
3 100–HALF Auto–negotiation 100–HALF
4 10–FULL Auto–negotiation 10–HALF
5 10–HALF Auto–negotiation 10–HALF
6 100–FULL 100–FULL 100–FULL
7 100–FULL 100–HALF 100–HALF
8 100–FULL 10–FULL No link
9 100–FULL 10–HALF No link
10 100–HALF 100–HALF 100–HALF
11 100–HALF 10–FULL No link
12 100–HALF 10–HALF No link
13 10–FULL 10–FULL 10–FULL

14 10–FULL 10–HALF 10–HALF

15 10–HALF 10–HALF 10–HALF

Table 7: Ethernet link table

When an invalid configuration is programmed, the switch is unable to detect it correctly. As a result,
the IP Touch set software can display speed and duplex settings that do not reflect the real link state.

It is not necessary to reset the terminal after changing the configuration.

18/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

TERMINALS IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068

BLUETOOTH FOR IP TOUCH SETS

1-Basic description

Overview

The Alcatel IP Touch 4068 set features Bluetooth® 1.1 class 3 (1mW) wireless technology. This tech-
nology uses the ISM 2.4 GHz radio frequency band.

All audio accessories enabled for Bluetooth® 1.1 and 1.2 wireless technology are supported by the IP
Touch 4068. The level of service provided is that of Bluetooth® 1.1.

The range of a Bluetooth accessory is around 10 meters. Optimum audio quality is obtained at up to
3 meters.

The Alcatel IP Touch 4068 is presumed compliant with the essential requirements of directive 1999/5/
EC of the European Parliament and Council (EC member states), and with section 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (United States) regulations. The set is designed and manufactured to
remain within the SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) radio transmission limits established by the different
countries concerned (FCC for the USA).

The ISM 2.4 GHz radio frequency spectrum is not used in the same way in all countries and may be
shared with other applications. The set must not be used with Bluetooth® wireless accessories in coun-
tries in which this technology is not authorized.

The Alcatel IP Touch 4068 may cause interference with other radio devices operating in the same fre-
quency band, notably Wifi 802.11b and 802.11g devices. This may result in poor transmission quality
(in particular, audio quality) when using such devices. Alcatel recommends that the two types of tech-
nology are not used at the same time.

Characteristics of the Bluetooth® wireless technology accessory

The audio quality obtained by accessory users depends on the technical characteristics of the accesso-
ry, notably acoustic coupling.

Alcatel recommends use of Bluetooth® headsets complying with recommendation TIA/EIA-810-A -

that specifies a minimum TCLw attenuation of 52 dB.

A headset that does not comply with the recommendation generates an unpleasant echo for the re-
mote party. To obtain technical information on your accessory, please contact your supplier.

Safety rules

Using a Bluetooth® wireless accessory may result in perceptible noise for persons with a hearing aid.

Accessories must not be used in areas with warning signs indicating that electrical devices or products
using radio frequencies must be switched off. Such areas commonly include hospitals, areas where
explosive products are stored or handled, and areas where flammable gases or vapors may be pre-
sent.
To limit any risk of interference, Alcatel recommends that persons with a pacemaker do not remain in
the proximity of the Alcatel IP Touch 4068 set when it is connected to a wireless accessory.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 19/20

IP TOUCH SETS 4038 AND 4068 TERMINALS

2-Installation procedure

Connecting the wireless accessory

Before using your accessory, it must be connected to the Alcatel IP Touch 4068. The procedure for con-
necting a standard accessory is described below. For specific instructions on how to connect your ac-
cessory, please consult the accessory user guide.

Attention : It is recommended to perform the connection operation in a location that is at least 3

meters from any other radio device using the same frequency band.

To connect the accessory:

1. Switch on the accessory.

2. Select connection mode on the accessory.

3. Run the detect feature on your Alcatel IP Touch 4068 set.

4. From the menu tab on the main page, successively select "Settings", "Set", "Bluetooth", "Add device".

5. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

6. End.

20/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

TERMINALS ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G TERMINALS

File
ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G TERMINALS
2

TERMINAL FEATURES

FEATURE DEDICATED DIGITAL SETS

FIRST EASY PREMIUM ADVANCED
Handset YES YES YES YES
Loudspeaker - YES YES YES
Buzzer YES - - -
1 x 20 character display - YES YES -
2 x 40 character display - - - YES
Pictograms associated with programma- - - 12 24
ble keys
Soft keys - - - 5
Programmable keys 8 8 12 24
Fixed function keys - 5 10 7
Navigator - - - YES
Numerical keypad keys 12 12 12 12
Green LED YES YES - -
Two-colored LED - - YES YES
Internal alphabetical keyboard - - YES YES
4090M or 4090L add-on module - - Optional Optional
Optional modules (plugware) External External Internal/ex- Internal/ex-
ternal ternal
Wall mounting Integrated Integrated Optional Optional
4097 CBL UA/DECT adapter - - Optional Optional

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G TERMINALS TERMINALS

Station 4004/FIRST Station 4010/EASY Station 4020/PREMIUM Station 4035/ADVANCED

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

TERMINALS ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G TERMINALS

4097 CBL ADAPTER

Alcatel Advanced sets can be equipped with a 4097 CBL UA/DECT adapter and can therefore com-
municate with the system over a DECT radio link. This device means you no longer have to worry about
cabling constraints. An RS232 link is also advisable for CTI applications.

The Advanced set and its adapter are jointly called Advanced DECT/4036.

The 4097 CBL adapter is powered by a 220V AC/42V DC mains adapter. This mains adapter is also
a power splitter. The base of the power socket must be positioned as close to the adapter as possible,
and must also be easily accessible.

Notas : This adapter can also be used with an Alcatel Premium set (internal installation) or First or
Easy sets (external installation).

Connection

UA Exit

External
CTI power supply
Port

(15m max)

CTI DC
UA link
Alcatel BS Radio UA
OmniPCX (3m max)

DECT link Adaptor 4020 or 4035 sta

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G TERMINALS TERMINALS

OPTIONAL MODULES (PLUGWARE)

The optional modules are modules which are inserted in the UA link, in series, between a PCX and a
dedicated UA set. They provide an interface for connecting terminals to the system.

Optional port
Alcatel
OmniPCX UA
UA Link UA Link
Optional Alcatel UA3G station
Module
Notas : The optional modules can also be used with Reflexes2G sets (the previous generation).

Alcatel Premium and Advanced sets have a slot under the panel for the optional module.

Optional port

Alcatel UA Optional
OmniPCX module
UA Link

4020 or 4035 station

The optional modules available are:

- 4093 ASY-CTI
- 4094 ISW
- 4095 AP

Notas : When the option is used in stand-alone as a TA (Terminal Adapter) interface, you have to
move the red jumper to the other connector position inside the module.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

TERMINALS ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G TERMINALS

4093 ASY-CTI module

This module allows the device to be connected to the system via a UA link, a PC-type peripheral device
by means of an RS232 link (CTI port) and an DTE data terminal (V24 port).

CTI Port

The RS232 link carries the signaling (up to 9600 bit/s) and allows telephony functions such as call ma-
nagement and call supervision.
The audio function is performed by the associated dedicated set.

V24 Port

The V24 port is regarded as a DCE and supports asynchronous V24 transmission up to 19200 bps
(ECMA 102) and 57600 bps (V14e). The electrical interface conforms to ITTCC recommendation V28.
This port is used to connect up the metering data management system (connection cable provided).

UA Exit

UA CTI V24 Port

Entry Port

Connection

up to 19,2 kbit/s (15m max)

DTE and 57,6 kbit/s (2m max)

(15m max)

DCE
CTI V24
Alcatel UA Link UA Link
UA UA
OmniPCX (3m max)
40XX station
V24-CTI Module

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G TERMINALS TERMINALS

4094 ISW module

This module connects an S0 terminal to the system via a UA link.

This optional module provides an S0 power bus which requires an external power supply (230V AC/
42V DC adapter), allowing terminals without their own power supply (ISDN terminals, etc.) to be con-
nected to the bus.
The mains supply transformer serves as a sectioning mechanism for the S0 interface. It must therefore
remain easily accessible.

The S0 bus can be a point to point or short passive bus covering 150 m (up to 5 terminals, of which a
maximum of 2 may be powered remotely). Operation is not guaranteed in the event of a power outa-
ge.

UA Exit

UA Entry S0 External
Port power
supply

Connection

150 m S0 station

ISDN Terminal

S0 Bus

S0 DC
UA Link UA Link
Alcatel UA UA
OmniPCX (3m max)
40XX station
S0 M d l

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

TERMINALS ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G TERMINALS

4095 AP module
This interface connects an analog peripheral such as a modem, teletext or answering machine to the
system via a UA link.

The optional module supplies the terminal (DTMF signaling, ringer) and therefore requires an external
power supply (230V AC/30V DC mains adapter).
The mains supply transformer serves as a sectioning mechanism for the AP interface. It must therefore
remain easily accessible. Operation is not guaranteed in the event of a power outage.

UA Exit

UA Entry AP External
Port power supply

Connection

(100m max)

AP DC

Alcatel UA Link UA Link

UA UA
OmniPCX (3m max)
40XX Station
AP Module

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G TERMINALS TERMINALS

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

TERMINALS MULTI-REFLEXES 4099 HUB

File
MULTI-REFLEXES 4099 HUB
3

Multi-Reflexes option 4099 connects up 3 Alcatel Reflexes terminals using just one UA system link; this
option makes it easier to install additional Reflexes terminals.

3 UA

UA/Reflexes 1 UA/Reflexes 2 UA/Reflexes 3 UA/PBX LED

Option 4099 separates out the 3 B-channels of the UA interface into 3 terminal interfaces.

Station interfaces

UA link
Reflexes 1

Option 4099

Reflexes

Reflexes 3

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

MULTI-REFLEXES 4099 HUB TERMINALS

The following terminals can be connected to option 4099:

- Alcatel Reflexes 2G sets with or without add-on modules (a maximum of 3 modules per option
4099).
- Alcatel Reflexes 3G sets with or without add-on modules or the 4091 CTI option (the 2 sub-groups
are mutually exclusive).
- a 4088 adapter with a V24 4083 ASM board.

The following terminals cannot be connected to option 4099:

- DECT 4070 IO/EO base stations

- Alcatel Reflexes 2G sets with options 4084 IS/ISW or 4085 AB and
- Alcatel Reflexes 3G sets with options 4093 ASY-CTI, 4094 ISW, 4094 ISW-CTI or 4095 AP.

Maximum distances from system to set

- 0.4-mm cable: 325 m

- 0.5-mm cable: 500 m
- 0.6-mm cable: 730 m

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

TERMINALS BASE STATION

File
BASE STATION
4

4070 IO/EO DECT BASES

The DECT 4070 IO/EO (internal/external) base station can be connected to:

- 1 UA interface: 3 DECT channels

- 2 UA interfaces: 6 DECT channels

Antennae
Local power supply
Screw terminal block

Impenetrable
plastic
Case

Screw for locking

cover

LED indicating Push button for

operational state opening cover

4070 IO 4070 EO

Maximum connection distances with remote power supply:

- 600 m with SYT 0.5 mm cable

- 850 m with LY278 0.6 mm cable

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

BASE STATION TERMINALS

Local Power Supply

It is possible to connect a local power supply (230V/42V – 150 mA adapter) to an accessible socket
on the lower part of the 4070 IO/EO base.

The local power supply is used in the following cases:

- main power supply not authorized on the line's wires (depending on specific installation require-
ments)
- to increase the cable length between the interface and the station
- reduction in the system's electrical consumption.

When the external power supply is connected, the base passes automatically to local power supply mo-
de. In the event of a power cut, the base is not supplied.

States of the correct operation LED

State of the base station State of the LED

No power supply (local or remote) or fault on base Off
Fault after auto-test, base not operational On
Auto-test OK, base station operational. Normal operation for 1s on / 1 s off
a base with 2 links.
Auto-test OK, base station operational. Normal operation for 1s on / 200 ms off
a base with one Master link only.
Master link not connected, local power supply or slave link 50 ms on / 50 ms off
connected.

Differences between 4070 and 4070 NG base stations

- Fast antenna diversity on 4070NG bases (for more details, see "Installing base stations" in the Mo-
bility section.

4070 PWT BASES

The 4070 PWT (Personal Wireless Telecommunications) bases constitute an adaptation of the bases to
the DECT standard for the North American market (essentially the United States).

The 4070 PWT bases are designed for an internal installation only (wall attachment) and they are me-
chanically identical to the 4070 IO bases. They conform to the "FCC part 15 A, B, C, D requirements"
standards.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

TERMINALS MOBILE REFLEXES 100/200
HANDSETS

File
MOBILE REFLEXES 100/200
5
HANDSETS

FEATURE Mobile Reflexes 100 Mobile Reflexes 200/

200 Ex
Graphic matrix display: 96 x 48 pixels YES YES
Backlighting NO YES
Vibrator NO YES (except Mobile
Reflexes 200 Ex)
Navigator YES YES
Headset socket YES YES
Loudspeaker YES YES
Belt clip YES YES
Color Dark green Aluminum
Battery pack Ni-MH Li-Ion

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

MOBILE REFLEXES 100/200 TERMINALS
HANDSETS

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

TERMINALS MOBILE REFLEXES 100/200

HANDSETS

CHARGERS

Mobile Reflexes handsets are listed separately from the various battery charging devices available. The
charger must therefore be ordered separately and selected from the models on offer, all of which are
compatible with the Ni-MH or Li-Ion batteries used in Mobile Reflexes handsets. The Mobile Reflexes
200 Ex handset does not support battery charging and therefore has to be used in conjunction with a
"Dual-desktop " charger (for recharging the battery outside the handset).

Whichever charger is used, the maximum charge time (battery connected to mobile) is identical: Mo-
bile Reflexes 100: 5 hrs; Mobile Reflexes 200/200 Ex: 3 hrs.
The "Corded" charger:

- the simplest model: calls can be made while the handset is on charge
- consists of a cable with a connector at one end and an AC/DC mains
adapter at the other.

The "Basic Desktop" charger:

- a simple model that acts as a base for the handset

- consists of a base unit with a built-in power supply cable terminated by
an AC/DC mains adapter.

The "Dual Desktop" charger:

- simultaneously recharges the handset battery and one other battery

- the charger comprises:
- a base unit with two slots (for the handset and additional battery) and
a battery charge indication light
- a removable power cable with AC/DC mains adapter.

Note: the max. charge time in the battery-only slot is 2h30.

The "Voice Desktop" charger:

- simultaneous battery charging and high quality hands-free communica-

tion functions
- the charger comprises:
- a one-slot support base with integrated loudspeaker and micropho-
ne, two volume adjustment buttons (+/-) and a call monitoring indi-
cator (on line, mute)
- a removable power cable with AC/DC mains adapter.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

MOBILE REFLEXES 100/200 TERMINALS
HANDSETS

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

TERMINALS IP TERMINALS

File
IP TERMINALS
6

FAST IP REFLEXES TERMINALS

Fast IP Reflexes terminals are Reflexes sets with a 4098 FRE ("IP Enabler") module. There are two mo-
dels:

- Fast IP Advanced Reflexes / 4037F

- Fast IP Premium Reflexes / 4022F

Mains power
IP ENABLER
4098 FRE
UA
PC LAN CPU

PC LAN

LAN

Characteristics

- The IP Enabler is connected to the LAN via an RJ45 connector (10 Mbps Ethernet link for IP Enabler
V1.0 and 10/100 Mbps for IP Enabler V1.5).

- The module is initialized in dynamic (DHCP) or static IP address mode by downloading the binary
into the IP Enabler from the master VoIP CoCPU board, which is treated as a TFTP server.

- The IP Enabler is then recognized by the PCX as a Reflexes terminal in its own right. Voice and si-
gnalling are encapsulated in UDP packets, enabling the Fast IP Reflexes terminal to communicate
with any other type of terminal: Reflexes stations, DECT handsets, analogue sets, Fast IP Reflexes
terminal, H.323 terminal or gateway H.323 (e.g. PC Netmeeting), Pimphony IP Edition, network,
etc.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

IP TERMINALS TERMINALS

4098 FRE Module (IP Enabler)

UA output
(to station)

PC LAN CPU

PC connection Leds Switch External power supply

LAN connection
The switch can be used to reset the module with the previous software version (only possible in boot
phase).

Function of the LEDs

- PC: green LED on steady when the PC link is active; orange LED lit if 100 BT, off if 10 BT.
- LAN: green LED on steady when the LAN link is active; orange LED lit if 100 BT, off if 10 BT.
- CPU: green LED blinking slowly when the module is active; on steady during the initialization pha-
se; blinking rapidly when downloading new software.

Connection

(max 15m )

PC DC
LAN link UA link
LAN LAN UA
(50m in 100 BT, (max 800m)
100m in 10 BT) 40XX station
FRE Module
Configuring the module

See the "Voice over IP" section for more details.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

TERMINALS IP TERMINALS

e-REFLEXES TERMINALS

This series includes 3 terminal models compatible with the IP and VoIP standards (they no longer re-
quire IP adapters):

- Advanced e-Reflexes (4035IP)

- Premium e-Reflexes (4020IP)
- Easy e-Reflexes (4010IP)

e-Reflexes terminals are downloadable.

The main technical features include:

- Ethernet 10BT (100 m) / 100BT (50 m).

- IP Standards (in the terminal): IP/UDP/TFTP/RTP/RTCP/ARP ...
- H323 Voice over IP.
- Voice compression: G711, G723, and G729.
- Quality of service: TOS diffserv and 802.1 pq.
- PC connectivity (except Easy e-Reflexes).
- Wall mounting possible.
- Local or LAN power supply.
- Full duplex “hands-free”.
- Access to telephone services as for a Reflexes UA station.

Connections

Z 1

IP network
e-Reflexes Terminal

To PABX
Terminal rear view

1 : PC 2 : IP network 3: mains

The e-Reflexes terminals are connected to:

- 1: a PC (optional). The PC is a workstation that uses the station's switch function (link through
straight RJ45 cable). The connecting PC does not power; it does not exist on the Easy e-Reflexes

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

IP TERMINALS TERMINALS

terminal.

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs TXB+ TXB- RXB+ A1 A2 RXB- B1 B2

- 2: the IP network (straight RJ45 cable).

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs RXA+ RXA- TXA+ TXA-

- 3: the main power supply for local power

Pin 1 2
Signal A 42 V- A 42
V+

Details of power supply through the network

RJ45 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Case 1 0V 0V -48 V -48 V
Case 2 -48 V -48 V 0V 0V
Case 3 0V 0V -48 V -48 V

In cases 1 and 2, the power supply is in ghost with data signals.

Case 3 corresponds to the power supply through the OmniPower Patch Panel.
Cases 1 and 2 correspond to a 803.3af compatible equipment.

Configuration
See the "Voice over IP" section for more details.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

TERMINALS PIMPHONY REFLEXES
WORKSTATIONS

File
PIMPHONY REFLEXES
7
WORKSTATIONS
For more information, you can also consult the PIMphony documentation supplied with the
CD ROM.

The standard Alcatel OmniPCX Office offering includes an integrated CTI server (TAPI 2.0) that opens
up a broad range of third party CTI applications.

PIMphony Reflexes is a PC-based workstation equipped with the following PIMphony applications:

- PIMphony Basic (free of charge)

- PIMphony Pro (requires a software key)
- PIMphony Team (requires a software key)
PIMphony Basic PIMphony Pro PIMphony Team
Complete set of telephony YES YES YES
features
Centralized call log YES YES YES
Integration of Contact Han- YES YES
dlers
'Visual Mailbox' interface YES YES
Unified messaging YES YES
Supervision features YES
Assistant Feature YES

For more information about the "Visual Mailbox", interface, consult " Visual Mailbox Interface" in the
"Integrated Voice Server" section.

They are installed from the CD-ROM provided in each system.

PIMphony Pro and PIMphony Team are supplied on a Try and Buy basis. The user can test both appli-
cations free of charge for 2 months.

If PIMphony is emulating an IP workstation, it can be used via an IP Comfort handset.

Connecting the Comfort handset

To connect the Comfort handset you need a full duplex sound card.

This handset system uses the loudspeaker and external mike for hands-free operation.
The handset also supports automatic on-hook and off-hook detection via the COM port. This system
requires a power supply, conveyed via the keyboard or mouse PS/2 connection.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

PIMPHONY REFLEXES TERMINALS
WORKSTATIONS

Keyboard or mouse: PS/2 socket

To keyboard or mouse
External mike
socket (PS/2) on PC
To mike socket
on PC 9-point COM port

Connection to LS socket on PC

Socket for external LS

IP handset

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

TERMINALS VBTEL VISUALLY IMPAIRED OPERATOR
STATION

File
VBTEL VISUALLY IMPAIRED OPERATOR
8
STATION
The VBTEL terminal is designed to act as a display for visually impaired operators, conveying the in-
formation presented on Reflexes terminals. There are 2 models:

- VBTEL 20: equipped with a piezoelectric Braille touchpad with 20 characters and 32 command
keys.
- VBTEL 40: equipped with a piezoelectric Braille touchpad with 40 characters and 32 command
keys.

The information read in Braille on the terminal enables the operator to use the system entirely via a
Reflexes terminal; all the operations (dialing, transfers, line seizures, etc.) are performed from the Re-
flexes terminal.

Power supply
Reflexes station

A1 A2 A3 A6 A7 A8

3 2 1 4 5 6

B1 B2 B3 B6 B7 B8

C1 C2 C3 7 8 C6 C7 C8

D1 D2 D3 D6 D7 D8

Description

The on button is located at the top left of the terminal.

The groups of 12 keys on the right and left side of the terminal make up the command keyboard; the
keys are designated by a row letter and a column number (columns 4 and 5 are not used).

The Braille keyboard, in the center, consists of 8 keys, of which the first 6 are the 6 Braille points in

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

VBTEL VISUALLY IMPAIRED OPERATOR TERMINALS
STATION

Perkins alphabetical order, the 2 others being the backspace (7) and space keys (8).

A set of 20 or 40 piezoelectric cells located above the Braille keyboard enables Braille characters to
be displayed. Each cell contains 8 points: points 1 to 6 serve to form the 64 characters of the Braille
alphabet; when points 7 and 8 are raised simultaneously, they represent the cursor.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

TERMINALS EARLIER GENERATION SETS

File
EARLIER GENERATION SETS
9

TERMINALS NOT SUPPORTED

The following terminals are not supported by Alcatel OmniPCX Office:

- Reflexes 1G sets
- DECT 4075, 4074B, 4074H and 4074 BEx mobile sets
- Alcatel 160 sets
- Alcatel 4120 sets (900A and 900B)

REFLEXES 2G 40XX* SETS

Reflexes terminals from the 2G range are supported by Alcatel OmniPCX Office for migration purpo-
ses.

*Depending on country/distribution network

FEATURE Characteristics
4003 4011 4012 4023 4034
Handset YES YES YES YES YES
Loudspeaker YES YES YES YES YES
Display - 1 x 20 1 x 20 2 x 20 2 x 40
Pictograms - 2x7 2 x 10 4x7 4x7
Soft keys and arrows - - - 3+1 10 + 1
Programmable keys 5 6 10 18 18
Fixed function keys 3 10 12 12 12
Numerical keypad keys 12 12 12 12 12
3-coloured LED - YES YES YES YES
4087 IFA internal alphabetical keyboard - - - YES YES
4087 EFA external alphabetical key- - - Optional Optional Optional
board
Interface: 4083 ASM or 4083 PCT, - - Optional - Optional
4084 IS/ISW or 4085 AB
4081L or 4081 M add-on module - - Optional Optional Optional
Wall mounting Optional - - - -

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/14

EARLIER GENERATION SETS TERMINALS

Station 4012
Station 4003 Station 4011

Station 4023 Station 4034

2/14 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

TERMINALS EARLIER GENERATION SETS

MOUNTING THE ADD-ON MODULES

A kit (a 10-cm cable with two 8-pin modular jacks) connects the 4081M or 4081L add-on modules to
4012, 4023 and 4034 sets (there is no limit on the number of add-on modules in the system).

Procedure

- Turn the set and the module upside down

- Connect the cable to the set and the module
- Join the module to the set using the 2 screws provided in the kit

The same method is used to connect the 2 modules to each other.

Fixing screw Feet

To the
other add-
on module

4081M 4081L
Station

CONNECTING UP AN EXTERNAL BELL

It is possible to connect, on the wall-mounted socket, an external call reinforcing bell to 4011, 4012,
4023 and 4034 sets.

The standard connecting cable is 3 m long and has 2 conductors. To connect an external bell, replace
this cable with an optional cable, 5 m long and with 4 conductors.

Available power: 2 mA under 5V (an adapter is therefore necessary).

1 : not used IL-

2 : external bell (positive pole)
3 : telephone line
4 : telephone line
5 : external bell (negative pole) 1 2 AP -
6 : not used ADAPTER
3 4 AP +
65 1
4 32 5 6
Female outlet Power supply
(view from underneath the set)

IL+ Wall-mounted socket

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/14

EARLIER GENERATION SETS TERMINALS

CONNECTING THE 4088 ADAPTER

The 4088 adapter is connected directly to an Alcatel UA set interface and enables the installation of
an optional 4083 ASM, 4083 PCT, 4084 IS/ISW or 4085 AB board.

Output pins of the 6-pin Modular jack for connection to UAI

1 -not used
2 -not used
Modular-jack 3 - IL+
4 - IL-
Link with UAI 5 - not used
Interface connectors 6 - not used

4/14 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

TERMINALS EARLIER GENERATION SETS

REFLEXES 2G 50XX * SETS

Reflexes terminals from the 2G range are supported by Alcatel OmniPCX Office for migration purpo-
ses.

*Depending on country/distribution network

FEATURE Characteristics
5010 5015 5018 5022 5028
Handset YES YES YES YES YES
Loudspeaker YES YES YES YES YES
Display - - 1 x 20 1 x 20 2 x 40
Pictograms - 2 x 10 2 x 10 2 x 10 4x7
Soft keys and arrows - - - - 10 + 1
Programmable keys 5 10 10 10 18
Fixed function keys 5 12 12 12 12
Numeric keypad keys 12 12 12 12 12
LED YES YES YES YES YES
Internal alphabetical keyboard - - - - YES
External alphabetical keyboard - - Optional - Optional
V24/MAC PC 5083, S0 (2B + D) - - Optional - Optional
5081/5082 or Z 5088 interface
40-key add-on module - - Optional - Optional

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/14

EARLIER GENERATION SETS TERMINALS

STATION 5010 STATION 5015 STATION 5018

STATION 5022 STATION 5028

6/14 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

TERMINALS EARLIER GENERATION SETS

OPTIONS FOR UA 2G SETS

4012, 4034, 5022 and 5028 sets on the Alcatel OmniPCX system can take an optional interface that
plugs into the rear of the set:

- 4083 (or 5083) ASM: V24 - MAC/PC option

- 4083 PCT: PC option
- 4084 (or 5081/5082) IS/ISW: S0 - MAC/PC option
S0 (2 B channels and 1 D channel) is available via a 4084 IS/ISW option installed on a 40XX set
which is connected to a DLC16 board (16, 8 or 4 devices).
S0* (1 B channel and 1 D channel) is available via a 4084 IS/ISW option installed on a 40XX set
which is connected to a DLC4/8 board with an S01B daughter board.
- 4085 (or 5088) AB: Z option

Connecting V24 and MAC/PC terminals

V24 terminals are connected using the X201 connector of board 4083 ASM installed in the set.

MAC/PC terminals are connected using connectors X401, X402 and X403 of boards 4083 ASM and
4084 IS.
X201 X401 X403 X402 X201 : V24 output 25-pin SUB D female connector
U103 U403 Female outlet DCD DSR RT TD
(view from the bottom of the station) S PG
SG CTS RD
REPROM REPROM

4083 ASM 13 1
Micro Micro
processor processor
25 14
U101 U401
TI RI DTR LL
Function Circuit Signal

Protection ground 101 PG

Transmitting data 103 TD

Receiving data 104 RD

Request to send 105 RTS

Clear to send 106 CTS

Data set ready 107 DSR

Signaling ground 102 SG

Carrier detection 109 DCD

Local loop 141 LL

Data terminal ready 108/1, 2 DTR

Call indicator 125 RI

Test indicator 142 TI

Maximum distances between terminal and set:15m at 19200 bps

2 m at 57600 bps

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/14

EARLIER GENERATION SETS TERMINALS

X401: 8 pin female connector for PCs

Female outlet Pin Signal Function Circuit

(view from the bottom of the station
1 PCRTS Request to send 105
7 (not used)
2 PCCTS Clear to send 106
8 (not used) 6 (not used)
3 PCTD Data transmission 103
4 PCSG Signalling ground 102
5 PCRD Data reception 104
5: 3 : PCTD
PCRD 6
2 : PCCTS 1 : PCRTS 7
4: 8
PCSG

X402, X403: 4 pin female connector for Macs

The maximum length of the ADB link is 5 m.

These two connectors enable the terminal and keypad to be connected up separately.

Connecting S0 terminals

Options 4084ISW and 4084 IS enable the connection of S0 terminals supplied remotely or otherwise.

The terminals are connected using the 8 pin connector (X301) of boards 4084 IS and 4084 ISW. The
type of bus is specified by the positioning of the X102 connector jumpers. X302 defines the termination
resistance of the 2 connection pairs.
1 X401 X403 X402 1 X104
X301 X301
U105 U406
B1 3 B1 3
A
X302 3
X102
1 4084 IS A
X302 3
X102
1
Jack for connecting the pow
supply
U102 U402 U102 To transformer
socket unit
REPROM REPROM REPROM
4084 ISW
U301 Micro Micro U301 Micro
processor processor processor
ISAC-S U101 ISAC-S U101
U401

X104: connector for the power supply

- 1: - 48 V - 2: + 48V

8/14 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

TERMINALS EARLIER GENERATION SETS

X301: connector for the S0 bus

- 1 and 2 - not used - 5 - TX -

- 3 - RX + - 6 - RX -
- 4 - TX + - 7 and 8 - not used

Short passive bus Long point-to-point bus (X102 across 1-2) (X102
across 2-3)

X302 X302
150 m
100 Ω 150 m
100 Ω 100 Ω

R R 100 Ω

Short point-to-point bus Extended bus (X102 across 1-2) (X102 across 2-3)

X302
100Ω R
X302
50 Ω 3m
1
3m
R 50 Ω

0m
15
100Ω R

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/14

EARLIER GENERATION SETS TERMINALS

Connecting analog terminals

The Z station interface is of type TNV (Telecommunication Network Voltage) with mains supply. The
connection distance of an analog terminal to this interface is limited to 20 meters.

The user of a set connected to this interface has the same operation possibilities as a user using a
classic Z interface (restriction: the set's Message LED cannot be used).
8-pin modular jack for Jack for connection to the power supply
connection to the analog To transformer socket unit
terminal
8 1
T350
TRANSFO
X102
X101 U201
CIALA - S
U451 REPROM
RMF COFIDEC

Micro- U502 U500

processor
4085 AB
U450

X101: 8 pin modular jack for connection to the analog terminal

- 1: GND - 5: L2 line wire
- 2: not used - 6: not used
- 3: not used - 7: not used
- 4: L1 line wire - 8: not used

X102: connector for the power supply

- 1: - 48 V - 2: + 48V

Various terminal cables

The cables below can be used for connecting terminals to UA sets (references 3AK..... represent the
group of 5 cables described in the table).

CABLE CONNECTORS REFERENCE LENGTH

S0 8 pin modular jack - 8 pin modular jack 1AB 04521 0024 3m
V24 DCE 25 pin SUBD male - 25 pin SUBD female 1AB 05412 0016 2m
V24 DTE 25 pin SUBD male - 25 pin SUBD male 1AB 05412 0018 2m
PC 8 pin mini din male - 9 pin SUBD female 1AB 07871 0003 2m
MAC 4 pin mini din male - 4 pin mini din male 9191500 2m

10/14 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

TERMINALS EARLIER GENERATION SETS

DECT 4074 HANDSETS

FEATURE DECT HANDSETS

4074 GB 4074 GH 4074GI 4074GC
Handset with adjustable volume YES YES YES YES
ON/OFF switch (or keys) YES YES YES YES
16 character display YES YES YES YES
Numeric keypad keys 12 12 12 12
Line keys 2 2 2 2
Programmable keys 2 2 2 2
Navigator keys YES YES YES YES
Headset socket -- YES YES --
Keypad backlighting -- YES YES --
Protective cover -- YES YES --
Integrated vibrator -- -- YES YES
Charger 4071BA 4071DA 4071 DA 4071BC
4071DA
Hands free -- -- -- YES

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/14

EARLIER GENERATION SETS TERMINALS

Fri 15 Mar 14:30 Fri 15 Mar 14:30

4074 GB/GC station 4074 GH/GI station

4071 DA charger 4071 BC charger

4071 BA charger

12/14 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

TERMINALS EARLIER GENERATION SETS

4073 GS SMART DECT HANDSET

FEATURE 4073 GS
SMART
Handset YES
On/Off Key YES
Display: 2 x 16 alphanumeric characters + 1 line of 8 icons YES
Numeric keypad keys 12
Navigator keys YES
Function keys 8
Vibrator YES

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/14

EARLIER GENERATION SETS TERMINALS

14/14 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
CALL SERVER : Telephone features

SECTION

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE

FEATURES

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Section CALL SERVER : Telephone features

RESOURCE KEYS (ASSOCIATED OPERATING MODES) FILE 1

TRUNK GROUPS FILE 2

HUNTING GROUPS FILE 3

OPERATOR STATIONS (OPERATOR GROUPS) FILE 4

SPECIFIC OPERATOR STATION SERVICES FILE 5

LINK CATEGORIES FILE 6

BARRING FILE 7

END OF DIALING DETECTION FILE 8

SPLITTING FILE 9

CALL DISTRIBUTION (DYNAMIC ROUTING) FILE 10

TIME RANGES FILE 11

NORMAL AND RESTRICTED SERVICE FILE 12

AUTOMATIC WELCOME (PRE-ANNOUNCEMENT) FILE 13

DIRECT DIALING INWARDS FILE 14

CLASS COMPATIBILITY FILE 15

ISDN SERVICES FILE 16

VN7 COMPATIBILITY FILE 17

CCBS – COMPLETION OF CALLS TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER FILE 18

SPECIFIC FEATURES OF SO STATIONS FILE 19

SPECIFIC NUMBERING PLANS FILE 20

ALTERNATIVE CLIP AND COLP NUMBERS FILE 21

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

FEATURES

APA BOARDS: CALLING PARTY IDENTIFIER FILE 22

BUSY GREETING ON VOICE MAILBOX FILE 23

BUSY TONE DETECTION FILE 24

MAKING/ANSWERING A CALL FILE 25

PRIORITY CALLS FILE 26

CAMP-ON ON BUSY STATION OR GROUP FILE 27

ANSWERING CAMPED-ON CALLS FILE 28

THREE PARTY CALLS FILE 29

INTERCOM INTRUSION FILE 30

FORWARDING FILE 31

MANAGER/SECRETARY SCREENING FILE 32

FORWARDING TO VOICE MAIL UNIT FILE 33

REMOTE FORWARDING FILE 34

EXTERNAL FORWARDING FILE 35

RENVOI PCX * FILE 36

AUTOMATIC CALLBACK ON BUSY TRUNK GROUP FILE 37

TRANSMISSION OF DTMF CODES (OR END-TO-END SIGNALING) FILE 38

CALL PICK-UP FILE 39

CALL PARKING/PARKED CALL RETRIEVAL FILE 40

PAGING FILE 41

MAIN PCX RECALL FILE 42

TEXT MAIL/DELAYED CALLBACK REQUEST FILE 43

STATION COMFORT FEATURES FILE 44

BACKGROUND MUSIC FILE 45

2/6 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Fiche

ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES SECTION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE

FEATURES

HEADSET FEATURES FILE 46

APPOINTMENT REMINDER/WAKE-UP CALL FILE 47

CALL MONITORING FILE 48

CUSTOMIZING STATIONS FILE 49

TEAMWORK FILE 50

ACCOUNT CODE/SUBSTITUTION FILE 51

ALLOCATION OF A TRUNK LINE FILE 52

METER TOTAL RECALL FILE 53

REMOTE SUBSTITUTION FILE 54

FAX CALL ROUTING FILE 55

FAX NOTIFICATION FILE 56

LIST OF SERVICES OFFERED FILE 57

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

FEATURES (INDEX)

Section CALL SERVER : Telephone features (Index)

FAX NOTIFICATION FILE 56

ACCOUNT CODE/SUBSTITUTION FILE 51

ALLOCATION OF A TRUNK LINE FILE 52

ALTERNATIVE CLIP AND COLP NUMBERS FILE 21

ANSWERING CAMPED-ON CALLS FILE 28

APA BOARDS: CALLING PARTY IDENTIFIER FILE 22

APPOINTMENT REMINDER/WAKE-UP CALL FILE 47

AUTOMATIC CALLBACK ON BUSY TRUNK GROUP FILE 37

AUTOMATIC WELCOME (PRE-ANNOUNCEMENT) FILE 13

BACKGROUND MUSIC FILE 45

BARRING FILE 7

BUSY GREETING ON VOICE MAILBOX FILE 23

BUSY TONE DETECTION FILE 24

CALL DISTRIBUTION (DYNAMIC ROUTING) FILE 10

CALL MONITORING FILE 48

CALL PARKING/PARKED CALL RETRIEVAL FILE 40

CALL PICK-UP FILE 39

CAMP-ON ON BUSY STATION OR GROUP FILE 27

CCBS – COMPLETION OF CALLS TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER FILE 18

CLASS COMPATIBILITY FILE 15

CUSTOMIZING STATIONS FILE 49

4/6 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Fiche

ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES SECTION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE

FEATURES (INDEX)

DIRECT DIALING INWARDS FILE 14

END OF DIALING DETECTION FILE 8

EXTERNAL FORWARDING FILE 35

FAX CALL ROUTING FILE 55

FORWARDING FILE 31

FORWARDING TO VOICE MAIL UNIT FILE 33

HEADSET FEATURES FILE 46

HUNTING GROUPS FILE 3

INTERCOM INTRUSION FILE 30

ISDN SERVICES FILE 16

LINK CATEGORIES FILE 6

LIST OF SERVICES OFFERED FILE 57

MAIN PCX RECALL FILE 42

MAKING/ANSWERING A CALL FILE 25

MANAGER/SECRETARY SCREENING FILE 32

METER TOTAL RECALL FILE 53

NORMAL AND RESTRICTED SERVICE FILE 12

OPERATOR STATIONS (OPERATOR GROUPS) FILE 4

PAGING FILE 41

PRIORITY CALLS FILE 26

REMOTE FORWARDING FILE 34

REMOTE SUBSTITUTION FILE 54

RENVOI PCX * FILE 36

RESOURCE KEYS (ASSOCIATED OPERATING MODES) FILE 1

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

FEATURES (INDEX)

SPECIFIC FEATURES OF SO STATIONS FILE 19

SPECIFIC NUMBERING PLANS FILE 20

SPECIFIC OPERATOR STATION SERVICES FILE 5

SPLITTING FILE 9

STATION COMFORT FEATURES FILE 44

TEAMWORK FILE 50

TEXT MAIL/DELAYED CALLBACK REQUEST FILE 43

THREE PARTY CALLS FILE 29

TIME RANGES FILE 11

TRANSMISSION OF DTMF CODES (OR END-TO-END SIGNALING) FILE 38

TRUNK GROUPS FILE 2

VN7 COMPATIBILITY FILE 17

6/6 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES RESOURCE KEYS (ASSOCIATED
OPERATING MODES)

File
RESOURCE KEYS (ASSOCIATED
1
OPERATING MODES)
DESCRIPTION

A resource key is used to take a line in order to make or receive a call.

When a station has at least two resource keys, it is said to be multiline. In this mode, the user presses
the resource key associated with the correspondent he wants to contact (using the shuttle call function,
for example). Multiline stations can also operate in Key system or PCX mode.
A station which does not have resource keys is said to be monoline. These resources (3) are "virtual".
In this mode, the user enters a code programmed in the "Features in Conversation" table, to activate
a function such as a shuttle call.

Characteristics of the different modes:

Type of subscriber Normal

Mode Monoline Key system PCX
Default resource keys 3 "virtual" resource keys 2 RGMints (**) 2 RGMints (**)

n (*) RSPs (**) 2 RSBs (**)

Simultaneous mana- 1 conversation 1 conversation 1 conversation
gement
1 hold (n+1) holds + camp- 3 holds + camp-ons
1 camp-on ons

(*) n = number of analogue lines and B channels (within the station key limit).

(**) see explanation overleaf.

CONFIGURATION

T Programming the resource keys on each station:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/BasestationsList -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Keys.
- by MMC-Station: Subscriber -> Key.

T Programming the monoline, multiline, "key system" or "PCX" mode:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

RESOURCE KEYS (ASSOCIATED CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
OPERATING MODES)

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List

-> Profiles.
- by MMC-PM5 (Easy view): Subscriber profiles
- by MMC-Station: TerPro.

T Authorize or cancel selection of an RSB if the external call arrives on a line which does not belong
to the trunk programmed for this key:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels -> SelRSBsig.
- By MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address s -> "SelRSBsig" -> Return -> Memory

ACTIVATION/USE

Incoming, the system uses the resource keys in the following order of priority:

- Incoming call RSP : Resource dedicated to an external interface

(external) if busy
RSD : Resource dedicated to a directory no.
if busy
RSB : Resource dedicated to a trunk (*)
if busy
RGMint/ext : Resource not dedicated (internal and external calls)
(*) Default operation (see section: "Configuration")

- Incoming call RSL : Resource dedicated to a directory no.

(internal) if busy
RGMint : Resource dedicated to internal calls
if busy
RGMint/ext : Resource not dedicated (internal and external calls)
Outgoing, a call can be made:

- without pressing a resource key (the system selects the most appropriate key as soon as the user
dials)
- by pressing a resource key (before dialing the number), whether:
- for an external outgoing call:
- an RSD (dedicated to a trunk or an "Automatic Route Selection")
- an RSB (dedicated to a trunk or an "Automatic Route Selection")
- an RSP (dedicated to an external interface)
- an RGO (dedicated to outgoing calls)
- an RGMint/ext (not dedicated)
- for an internal outgoing call:
- on an RSL (dedicated to a directory no): the system automatically dials the programmed num-
ber
- an RGMint (dedicated to internal calls)

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES RESOURCE KEYS (ASSOCIATED

OPERATING MODES)

- an RGO (dedicated to outgoing calls)

- an RGMint/ext (not dedicated)

Notas : The MMC-Station labels RGI, RGO and RGM (MMC station) are equivalent to RGX in MMC-
PM5 (+ definition of "Call Sense" field).

More details about the abbreviations RGM, RGO, RSL, etc. can be found in the glossary.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- A resource key manages only one communication at a time.

- Z and First Reflexes stations are monoline; all other stations are multiline.
- The Reflexes 2G 4003 can be either monoline or multiline.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

RESOURCE KEYS (ASSOCIATED CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
OPERATING MODES)

PROFILES FOR ALCATEL REFLEXES 3G STATIONS

The first Alcatel Reflexes station (call number 100) is the Operator station; this Advanced Reflexes sta-
tion is part of all active Operator Groups as well as the default Operator Group.

The second Alcatel Reflexes station is a Secretary terminal and the third is a Manager terminal. Only
Advanced or Premium Reflexes stations can provide the Manager/Secretary facility.

First Reflexes station profile

First Reflexes stations operate in monoline mode.

- All countries except USA

Message Forward

Pers. Dir Redial

Conference Cancel
Canceldbl.
dbl.call
call

Aut. callback Pickup

- USA

2nd call pickup Message

Redial Flashing

Shuttle Conference
Cancel dbl. call

Man. hold Handover

Easy Reflexes station profile

Easy Reflexes stations cannot be used as Manager, Secretary or Operator stations.

- All countries except USA

Int/Ext Int/Ext

Forward Redial

Message svt screen

Pers. Dir Handover

- USA

Int/Ext Message

Int/Ext Pers. Dir

Redial Conference

Man. hold Handover

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES RESOURCE KEYS (ASSOCIATED

OPERATING MODES)

Premium Reflexes station profiles

Key system mode

- All countries except USA

Operator station Manager Station Secretary Station Normal Station

Int/Ext Int/Ext Int/Ext Int/Ext Int/Ext Int/Ext Int/Ext Int/Ext

Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2

Line 3 AttDiv Line 3 Secretary. Line 3 Manager Line 3 Line 4

Line 4 NR mode Line 4 Screening Line 4 Screening Line 5 Line 6

svt. screen Conference svt. screen Conference svt. screen Conference svt. screen Conference

Forward Redial Forward Redial Forward Redial Forward Redial

- USA

Int/Ext Pick-up Int/Ext Secretary Int/Ext Manager Int/Ext Pick-up

Int/Ext Aut. callback Int/Ext Screening Int/Ext Screening Int/Ext Aut. callback

NR mode Forward Int/Ext Forward Int/Ext Forward Int/Ext Forward

AttDiv Intrusion Int/Ext DND Int/Ext DND Int/Ext DND

svt. screen Conference svt. screen Conference svt. screen Conference svt. screen Conference

Man. hold Handover Man. hold Handover Man. hold Handover Man. hold Handover

PCX mode

If an extension box is connected to the station, all the keys are "Call" keys (access to the public network
through main trunk group).

- All countries except USA

Differences from Key system mode:

- the first 2 line keys (Line 1, Line 2) are replaced by "Call" keys (access to the public network through
main trunk group).
- the other line keys are replaced by undefined call keys; these can be programmed with an internal
destination (station) or external destination (number preceded by public network access prefix).

- USA

The profile is identical to the Key System mode profile.

Advanced Reflexes station profiles

Key system mode

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

RESOURCE KEYS (ASSOCIATED CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
OPERATING MODES)

- All countries except USA

Operator station Normal Station

Int/Ext Int/Ext Line 11 Line 12 Int/Ext Int/Ext Line 11 Line 12

Line 1 Line 2 Line 13 Line 14 Line 1 Line 2 Line 13 Line 14

Line 3 Line 4 Line 15 AttDiv Line 3 Line 4 Line 15 Line 16

Line 5 Line 6 Forward NR mode Line 5 Line 6 Forward Call

Line 7 Line 8 Message ISDN Line 7 Line 8 Message ISDN

Line 9 Line 10 Pers. Dir Handover Line 9 Line 10 Pers. Dir Handover

Manager Station Secretary Station

Int/Ext Int/Ext Line 11 Line 12 Int/Ext Int/Ext Line 11 Line 12

Line 1 Line 2 Line 13 Line 14 Line 1 Line 2 Line 13 Line 14
Line 3 Line 4 Line 15 Secretary Line 3 Line 4 Line 15 Manager

Line 5 Line 6 Forward Screening Line 5 Line 6 Forward Screening

Line 7 Line 8 Message ISDN Line 7 Line 8 Message ISDN

Line 9 Line 10 Pers. Dir Handover Line 9 Line 10 Pers. Dir Handover

- USA

Operator station Normal Station

Int/Ext Message Line 1 Line 2 Int/Ext Message Line 1 Line 2

Int/Ext Line 3 Line 4 Int/Ext Pers. Dir Line 3 Line 4

Pers. Dir

NR mode Forward Line 5 Line 6 Int/Ext Forward Line 5 Line 6

AttDiv Intrusion Line 7 Line 8 Int/Ext DND Line 7 Line 8

Redial Conference Line 9 Line 10 Redial Conference Line 9 Line 10

Man. hold Handover Line 11 Line 12 Man. hold Handover Line 11 Line 12

Manager Station Secretary Station

Int/Ext Message Secretary Screening Int/Ext Message Manager Screening

Int/Ext Pers. Dir Line 1 Line 2 Int/Ext Pers. Dir Line 1 Line 2
Int/Ext Forward Line 3 Line 4 Int/Ext Forward Line 3 Line 4
Int/Ext DND Line 5 Line 6 Int/Ext DND Line 5 Line 6
Redial Conference Line 7 Line 8 Redial Conference Line 7 Line 8
Man. hold Handover Line 9 Line 10 Man. hold Handover Line 9 Line 10

PCX mode

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES RESOURCE KEYS (ASSOCIATED

OPERATING MODES)

- All countries except USA

The same differences apply with regard to Key System mode as for a Premium Reflexes set.

- USA

Operator station Normal Station

Int/Ext Message NR mode AttDiv Int/Ext Message Call Call

Int/Ext Call Call Int/Ext Pers. Dir Call Call

Pers. Dir

Int/Ext Forward Call Call Int/Ext Forward Call Call

Int/Ext Intrusion Call Call Int/Ext DND Call Call

Redial Conference Call Call Redial Conference Call Call

Man. hold Handover Call Call Man. hold Handover Call Call

Manager Station Secretary Station

Int/Ext Message Secretary Screening Int/Ext Message Manager Screening

Int/Ext Pers. Dir Call Call Int/Ext Pers. Dir Call Call
Int/Ext Forward Call Call Int/Ext Forward Call Call
Int/Ext DND Call Call Int/Ext DND Call Call
Redial Conference Call Call Redial Conference Call Call
Man. hold Handover Call Call Man. hold Handover Call Call

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

RESOURCE KEYS (ASSOCIATED CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
OPERATING MODES)

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES TRUNK GROUPS

File
TRUNK GROUPS
2

DESCRIPTION

Trunk groups are used to make calls to the network. A trunk group is made up of at least one analog
line or B channel.

Each bundle has:

- a directory number defined in the main numbering plan

- a management type: cyclic or sequential
- barring and traffic sharing link categories (see "Link Categories")

CONFIGURATION

T Configuring the trunk groups:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): External Lines -> Trunk Groups -> Details
- by MMC-Station: TrGp

T Defining the trunk group management type:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): External Lines -> Trunk groups
- by MMC-Station: TrGp

T Modifying the default traffic sharing link categories (value 1 to 16):

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
- for the users: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details
-> Barring
- for the trunk groups: External Lines -> Trunk Groups -> Details -> Link-Cat
- by MMC-Station:
- for the users: Subscr -> BarTyp (last 2 values)
- for the trunk groups: TrGp -> Catego

T Modify the "Traffic Sharing Matrix", if necessary, using MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
System Miscellaneous -> Traffic Sharing and Barring -> Traffic Sharing Matrix

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

TRUNK GROUPS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

T To specify whether or not to authorize all the users to seize an analog line with predetermined rou-
ting for outgoing calls:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels -> "TonPrRng"
- by MMC-Station:
Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "PRIOR_LRP" -> Return -> Memory

ACTIVATION/USE

To make a call to the network, a user can:

- dial a trunk group number

- press an RSD or RSB resource key (see "Resource keys")

If connection between the user and the trunk group is authorized (analysis of barring and traffic sha-
ring link categories: see "Link Categories" and "Barring"), the system selects a line (or channel) in the
trunk group as follows:

Management type cyclic sequential

Trunk line used in the trunk 1st free line following the last se- 1st free line (*), in the program-
group lected med order

(*) Priority is given to "outgoing" lines, then "mixed lines".

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The maximum number of trunk groups in a system is 120.

- 1 main trunk group
- the others being secondary trunk groups
- The maximum number of lines or channels in a trunk group is 120.
- The total number of lines/channels across all the trunk groups must not exceed 500.
- The trunk group with index 120 may be reserved for Operator Groups (see "Operator stations").
- For an outgoing call, an analog line with predetermined routing (LRP) can be used either exclusively
or in priority by the destination user of this LRP.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES HUNTING GROUPS

File
HUNTING GROUPS
3

DESCRIPTION

Creating Hunting Groups makes it possible to call several stations using a single directory number; a
single member of the group answers the call for the whole group.

Each group has:

- a directory number defined in the main numbering plan

- a parallel, cyclic or sequential management type
- an operation type, either "setup" (without supervision key, for calls destined for the group) or "si-
gnaling" (with supervision key)

CONFIGURATION

T Configuring the groups:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Hunting Groups
- by MMC-Station: Groups -> Subscr.

T Defining the group management type:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Hunting Groups
- by MMC-Station: Groups -> Subscr.

T To select the operating mode for (hunting AND operator) groups: with or without a "Group Super-
vision" programmed key:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Group called with signalisation mode

T Programming the "group supervision" keys on each station (one for every group to which the station
belongs):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Keys
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Keys

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

HUNTING GROUPS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

T To authorize the immediate group forwarding or withdrawal (see "Forwarding") of group calls from
the last member of a group (only with MMC-PM5 (Expert View)):
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design ->"Disconnect Last Group Member Allowed"

T Defining the dynamic routing parameters of a group:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Hunting Groups -> Dyn. Rout.
- by MMC-Station: Groups -> Hunt -> DynRou

T To authorize external calls to camp on the group, (MMC-PM5 only):

- call arriving on an analog interface (TL, ATL, DDI, etc):
External Lines -> Protocols -> Parameters -> "Ringing Mandatory": deselect the box to
authorize holding
- call arriving on a digital interface (T0, T2, etc) :
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> "Call waiting/Automatic Camp-on": select
the box to authorize camp-on

T To define the response in the event of failure – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
- call arriving on an analog interface (TL, ATL, DDI, etc):
External Lines -> Protocols -> Parameters -> from "Reaction on missing incoming digit"
to "Reaction on out of service"
- call arriving on a digital interface (T0, T2, etc):
External Lines -> Incoming Call Handling

T To define whether the Hunting Group is still considered free, depending on its status:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels -> "BusyGrpInd"
- by MMC-Station:
Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "BusyGrpInd" -> Return -> Memory

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES HUNTING GROUPS

ACTIVATION/USE

Depending on the management type chosen for the group, the system makes the stations ring as fol-
lows:

Management type parallel cyclic sequential

Stations rung all the free stations in the group 1st free station following the last 1st free station in the program-
selected ming order

For a group in SETUP mode, on all busy stations on all the stations in the group, if all are busy
the call is camped on

A busy station goes into idle the call with the highest priority is presented
status

To answer a call go off-hook or press Handsfree or the "Group Supervision" programmed key
For a group in SIGNALING if all stations are busy, on the first station in the group
mode, the call is camped on

External call for a

hunting group

NO Address YES The group is treated

“BusyGrpInd" = 1 ? depending on its status

YES Is the group

available?

The call is presented to the group or

camped on NO
If the preannouncement is not YES Is hold
activated, the calling party hears authorized (*) ?
the ringing tone (if it is activated,
see the corresponding file).
Dynamic routing (see file "call
distribution") is activated as well as NO
forwarding if present
Treatment of the failure
depending on the configuration

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

HUNTING GROUPS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The maximum number of groups in a system is 50 (Hunting Groups + Broadcast Groups + pickup
groups).
- The maximum number of stations in a group is 32.
- In SETUP mode and if the address "BusyGrpInd" = 1, the maximum number of calls camped onto
a Hunting Group is equal to the number of members in the group.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES OPERATOR STATIONS (OPERATOR
GROUPS)

File
OPERATOR STATIONS (OPERATOR
4
GROUPS)
DESCRIPTION

An operator station basically makes it possible to distribute calls arriving on the network. Such a station
has the following characteristics:

- camp-on always authorized

- intrusion always authorized
- access to certain programming features

Any station connected to the system can be an Operator Station, but, to have all the features of an
operator, the station must:

- be part of an Operator Group

- have one of the "operator" profiles (see "Resource keys" and "Station profiles"):
Operator profile in mode ... Key system PCX
Resource keys 2 RGMints 2 RGMints

n RSPs (*) 2 RSBs dedicated to the internal

trunk group
1 RAV (**)
Function keys Group supervision Group supervision

Normal/Restricted mode Normal/Restricted mode

LED (***) Traffic overload Traffic overload

(*) n = number of external interfaces; to monitor all the system's external interfaces, connect add-on modules to each operator station.

(**) Virtual Access Resource: used only for camped-on calls.

(***) The "overload" LED only applies to stations with a three-color LED (Reflexes range with the exception of 4003); it indicates:

- : level 1 traffic overload (1 call camped on).

- : station test.
- : level 2 traffic overload (one call camped on for at least 20 seconds, or more calls camped on than there are operators).
- : presence of a system message indicating a serious equipment fault or several less serious system messages.
- : presence of a message (voice, written) or presence of a call in the non answered calls repertory.

OS groups are managed in parallel.

All Operator Groups have the same call numbers (a single Operator Group is active during any par-
ticular time range (see "Time Ranges")).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

OPERATOR STATIONS (OPERATOR CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
GROUPS)

An Operator Group can have:

- stations
- the general bell (see "Connection of a general bell")
- 1 dissuasion message (see "Automatic Welcome /Pre-announcement")

Default Operator Group

This group (index 8):

- is available no matter what the time range

- can have up to 8 members including the general bell
- comes into service ... (see "Activation/Use")

General level

The general level is made up of:

- the Operator Group active in the applicable time range (may include the general bell)
- stations with the "General Monitoring" feature activated (see "Call Monitoring")

It is activated automatically:

- via the dynamic routing mechanism (see "Call distribution")

- via the operator recall mechanism (when a user's station in an external communication is switched
off or the activation of a service has failed)
- in accordance with the predefined settings, in the case of a misdial or when an ISDN access is com-
pletely busy.

By default, the following are programmed:

- OS groups are managed in parallel.

- Operator Groups of index 1 and 2, including the first station of the first board recognized by the
system
- the default group (index 8) including:
- the first station of the first board recognized by the system
- the general call bell

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES OPERATOR STATIONS (OPERATOR

GROUPS)

CONFIGURATION

T Configuring the Operator Groups:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Attendant Group List
- by MMC-Station: Groups -> OpGrp

T Modifying the internal call number of the Operator Groups:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Internal Numbering Plan
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> IntNum

T Programming the external call number of the Operator Groups (N.B.: base identical to that of an
internal call number):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Public Numbering Plan
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> PubNum

T Programming the operator profile:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert view): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Profiles
- by MMC-Station: TerPro -> Attend

T Assigning an Operator Group to each time range:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert view): Time Ranges
- by MMC-Station: TimeRa

T To select the management type for Operator Groups and Hunting Groups: with ("signaling" mode)
or without ("setup" mode) the "Group Supervision" programmed key:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels
-> "GrpCalWSig"
- by MMC-Station:
Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "GrpCalWSig" -> Return -> Memory

T To authorize the immediate group forwarding or withdrawal (see "Forwarding") of group calls from
the last member of a group (with MMC-PM5 only):
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> "Disconnect last Group Member allowed"

T Defining the dynamic routing parameters (see "Call distribution") for an Operator Group:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert view): Attendant Group List -> Dyn. Rout.
- by MMC-Station: Groups -> AttGrp -> DynRou

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

OPERATOR STATIONS (OPERATOR CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
GROUPS)

T To authorize external calls arriving on an analog interface (TLC, ATL, DDI, etc) to camp on the
group (or prevent them from doing so) – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
External Lines -> Protocols -> Parameters -> "Ringing Mandatory":

T To authorize external calls arriving on a digital interface (T0, T2, etc), to camp on the group (or
prevent them from doing so) – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> "Call Waiting/Automatic camp-on"

T To define the response in the event of failure – MMC-PM5 (Expert view) only:
- call arriving on an analog interface (TL, ATL, DDI, etc):
External Lines -> Protocols -> Parameters -> from "Reaction on missing incoming digit"
to "Reaction on out of service"
- call arriving on a digital interface (T0, T2, etc):
External Lines -> Incoming Call Handling

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES OPERATOR STATIONS (OPERATOR

GROUPS)

ACTIVATION/USE

Operator
call

Restricted mode The members

YES of the default
activated by an
operator ? operator
group ring

NO

Operator group
active during time
range

The free operators ring and the YES Is the group

call is camped on the busy available ?
operators

If the call is external, the stations

which have activated "general NO
monitoring" will also ring

If the pre-announcement is not

activated, the calling party hears internal Is the call external
the ringing tone (if it is activated, The call is released Internal or
see the corresponding field) external ?
Dynamic routing (see the "Call
Distribution" file) is activated
as well as forwarding if present

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

OPERATOR STATIONS (OPERATOR CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
GROUPS)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The maximum number of Operator Groups in a system: 8, default operator included.

- The maximum number of stations in an Operator Group: 8.
- Forwarding of the last member of the Operator Group (except for the default Operator Group) can
be authorized by programming.
- The destination of an immediate forwarding of Operator Group calls (see "Forwarding") does not
have the characteristics of an operator.

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES SPECIFIC OPERATOR STATION
SERVICES

File
SPECIFIC OPERATOR STATION
5
SERVICES
DESCRIPTION

An Operator Station can:

- switch the entire installation to normal or restricted mode, independently of the time range (see
"Normal/Restricted service (system level)")
- reserve a trunk group (the last) for exclusive use of the Operator Stations. Each O.S. in the active
group can use this trunk group for communications with the network.
- activate the background music, coming from a tuner on an external loudspeaker connected to the
system.
- activate forwarding of all internal and external calls intended for the O.S. group to a network des-
tination, defined by a common speed dial number or an internal destination, either:
- by switching the installation into restricted mode (using a programmed key)
- or using a programmed Attendant diversion key

This forwarding can also be automatically activated according to the time range.

The system can be used to program 3 different forwarding destinations:

- the first, for automatic activation by scheduling: this is valid for all time ranges
- the second, for manual activation, by switching the installation to restricted mode on one of the
O.S. in the active group
- the third, by using the operator calls forwarding key pre-programmed with the local or collective
speed dial number for which the calls are intended

Operator call diversion is activated and deactivated in accordance with the following descending order
of priority:

- by forwarding key
- by normal/restricted mode key
- by scheduling.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

SPECIFIC OPERATOR STATION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
SERVICES

CONFIGURATION

T For each time-range, define whether attendant diversion is activated when the OS switches ma-
nually to restricted mode – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
Time Ranges -> "All Days"

T To define the type of mechanism used to forward external incoming calls to a network number:
rerouting or joining (see "External Forwarding" for more details on the 2 types of forwarding):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 2 -> "External
Diversion Mode"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Joing -> Forwd

T When the selected mechanism for forwarding external incoming calls to a network number is "joi-
ning", fill out the connectivity matrix by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
Traffic Sharing and Barring -> Joining

T Program the number (internal or collective speed dial) to which the operator calls are forwarded
following automatic activation by scheduling – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
Time Ranges -> "Destination for time ranges"

T Program the number (internal or collective speed dial) to which the operator calls are forwarded
following manual activation with the "NRmode" programmed key – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
Time Ranges -> "Destination if restr. mode manually activated"

T On the OSs, program one or more "Attendant diversion" keys with a number (internal or collective
speed dial) to which the operator calls are to be forwarded:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Keys -> "Attendant Diversion"
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Key -> Option -> ExtFwd

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES SPECIFIC OPERATOR STATION

SERVICES

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined using MMC-PM5 (expert View) or MMC-Station

Switch to restricted mode When the system operates in normal mode, P.K.: NRMode + operator code

Reservation of last trunk group P.K.: Reserv + operator code

Broadcasting music on an ex- P.K.: BkgMus+ operator code

ternal loud speaker

Attendant diversion Automatic, by scheduling

or

P.K.: NRMode when installation is in "Normal" mode + operator code

or

P.K.: Attendant diversion + destination if necessary + operator code

CANCELLATION

By switching to normal mode When the system is in restricted mode, P.K.: NRMode + operator code

Reservation of last trunk group P.K.: Reserv + operator code

Broadcasting music on an ex- P.K.: BkgMus+ operator code

ternal loud speaker

Attendant diversion Depending on activation mode:

Automatic, by scheduling

or

P.K.: NRMode when installation is in "Restricted" mode + operator code

or

P.K.: Attendant diversion + operator code

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

SPECIFIC OPERATOR STATION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
SERVICES

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- There is no particular signal to indicate attendant diversion when it is activated by scheduling.

- The icon or the LED associated with the NRmode programmed key is lit when one of the O.S. has
used this key.
- The icon or LED associated with all of the "Attendant diversion" programmed keys signals activation
of forwarding by this key.
- No checks are run on the collective speed dial rights, the barring or the traffic sharing on forwar-
ding to an external number.
- When the O.S. call is the result of the dynamic routing mechanism (see "Incoming call distribution"),
the call is forwarded and the initial call destination and level 1 destination are released.
- When calls to the O.S. are forwarded:
- there is no overflow to the default O.S. group
- pre-announcement is not used.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES LINK CATEGORIES

File
LINK CATEGORIES
6

DESCRIPTION

Link categories enable the system to authorize or inhibit connection between an internal user and a
network subscriber.

There are 3 types of link category:

- speed dial rights: access to the collective speed dial numbers

- barring link category: access to dialing prefixes
- traffic sharing link category: access to bundles (see also file "Bundles")

Link categories are attributed as follows:

Type of Link Ca- Class Class Barring LC Traffic sharing

tegory LC
Attributed to ... each station each speed dial - each station - each station
number
- each trunk group - each trunk group
...depending on 1 value per mode 1 value per mode 1 value per mode 1 value per mode
the mode, nor-
mal or restric-
ted...
...and the type of 1 value per type of 1 value per type of 1 value per type of -
comm. (voice or communication communication communication
data)
Value authorized or 0 to 8 (*) 1 to 16 1 to 16
unauthorized, for
each class in the
collective speed
dial list

(*) Collective speed dial numbers with class = 0 are emergency numbers to which all of the stations have access.

CONFIGURATION

T Modifying the default speed dial rights:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

LINK CATEGORIES CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):

- for the users: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details
-> Collective Speed Dial
- for access: External Lines -> List of Accesses -> Details -> Speed Dial
- by MMC-Station:
- for access: Access -> RepEnt

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES LINK CATEGORIES

T Modifying the default barring link categories:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
- for the users: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details
-> Barring
- for the trunk groups: External Lines -> Trunk Groups -> Details -> Link-Cat
- for access: External Lines -> List of Accesses -> Details -> Link-Cat.
- by MMC-Station:
- for the users: Subscr -> BarTyp
- for the trunk groups: TrGp -> Catego
- for access: Access -> Catego

T Modifying default traffic sharing link categories:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
- for the users: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details
-> Barring
- for the trunk groups: External Lines -> Trunk Groups -> Details -> Link-Cat
- for access: External Lines -> List of Accesses -> Details -> Link-Cat.
- by MMC-Station:
- for the users: Subscr -> BarTyp (last 2 values)
- for the trunk groups: TrGp -> Catego (last 2 values)
- for access: Access -> Catego (last 2 values)

T To modify the "Barring Matrix" – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

Barring -> Barring Matrix

T To modify the "Traffic Sharing Matrix" – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

Barring -> Traffic Sharing Matrix

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

LINK CATEGORIES CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ACTIVATION/USE

Is the external
Yes call made by means No
of a collective
speed dial
Analysis of the speed number? Analysis of the user and trunk
dial rights of the station Group traffic sharing Lcs
and of the class of the in the traffic sharing matrix
speed dial number

Connection is authorized
The call is authorized
or unauthorized
or unauthorized

Analysis of the barring LCs of

the user and of the bundle in
the barring matrix

The matrix determines

the barring level
(1 to 6) (**)

(**) See "Barring"

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- Special case – transit: a call arriving on DLTx/Tx/TL/ATL is automatically routed by the system to a
DLTx/Tx/TL/ATL trunk group. In this case, the line used for the incoming call acts as a gateway with
respect to barring; its own link category is used rather than that of the trunk group to which it be-
longs.
- The emergency numbers predefined in the software on leaving the factory are valid regardless of
the barring mechanisms.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES BARRING

File
BARRING
7

DESCRIPTION

Barring comes into effect after the system has authorized connection between the user and the entered
trunk group (following analysis of the traffic sharing link categories: see "Link Categories").

Barring makes it possible to define whether an internal user (or an access, in the case of transit) is
authorized to make a call to the network, or not (other than by using the collective speed dial numbers),
depending on the prefix (i.e. the first few digits) of the called number.

To do this, the system uses barring link categories (see "Link Categories") and barring tables.

The system has 6 barring tables, numbered 1 to 6: each table corresponds to a level of barring and
can have "authorized" or "unauthorized" prefixes.

The system also uses two barring counters, C1 and C2:

- C1 states the maximum number of authorized digits if an authorized prefix has been recognized
or if there is no authorized prefix in the level of barring associated with the call. The default value
is 22.
- C2 states the maximum number of digits authorized if the dialed prefix is not programmed in the
level of barring associated with the call., while this level has at least one authorized prefix. The de-
fault value is 4.

CONFIGURATION

T Modifying the default barring link categories:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
- for the users: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details
-> Barring
- for the trunk groups: External Lines -> Trunk Groups -> Details -> Link-Cat
- for access: External Lines -> List of Accesses -> Details -> Link-Cat.
- by MMC-Station:
- for the users: Subscr -> BarTyp
- for the trunk groups: TrGp -> Catego
- for access: Access -> Catego

T To modify the "Barring Matrix" – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

Barring -> Barring Matrix

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

BARRING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

T Creating barring tables (adding a "!" authorizes or inhibits a complete barring level) – MMC-PM5
(Expert View) only:
Barring -> Barring Tables

T To authorize or deny access to the network by transfer, for each station – MMC-PM5 (Expert View)
only:
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details -> Features ->
"Transfer to External"

T To authorize or deny access to the network, for each station – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details -> Features ->
"Private Subscriber"

T To modify the length of barring counters – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

Barring -> Barring Tables

ACTIVATION/USE

Having determined the barring level of a call, the system compares the requested number as it is being
dialed, with the prefixes in the table associated with this level of discrimination:
External dialing

YES YES
No authorized
prefix ?

NO
NO

Max. number of
Circuit released
NO Authorized YES YES +
digits authorized
prefix
by C1 reached? fast busy tone sent
recognized ? to calling party

Max. number NO
NO
of digits authorized by Call setup
C2 reached? NO

YES YES

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES BARRING

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The 6 prefix tables altogether (or barring levels) can have over 100 prefixes.
- Each prefix has a maximum of 10 digits (0 to 9, * and #).
- A private subscriber cannot be connected to the network (nor receive calls from or make calls to
the network).
- The emergency numbers predefined in the software on leaving the factory are valid regardless of
the barring mechanisms.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

BARRING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES END OF DIALING DETECTION

File
END OF DIALING DETECTION
8

DESCRIPTION

On analog trunk lines, end of dialing detection makes it possible to define the moment when the
system can release the DTMF receivers and carry out the bi-directional switching of the line.

The system uses the end of dialing prefix table to ascertain the length (number of digits) of the numbers
transmitted. A counter, equal to or superior than 0, is associated with each prefix.

When a prefix has not been configured in this table, the system uses a reference counter.

On digital trunk lines, the trunk sends a message telling the system to carry out the two-way swit-
ching. By default, the system carries out this commutation after a time-out simulating going off-hook.

CONFIGURATION

T Programming the end of dialing prefix table:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> End of Dialing Table
- by MMC-Station: EODPfx -> EODial -> Prefix

T Modifying the reference counter value on all analog lines:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> End of Dialing Table
- by MMC-Station: EODPfx -> EODial -> RefCnt

T Modifying the off hook simulation time-outs:

- call on an analog interface (TL, ATL, DDI, etc): External Lines -> Protocols -> Analog Trunks
-> Timers -> Modify
- call on a digital interface (T0, T2, etc):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Timer
Labels -> "OffHookSim"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Timer -> "OffHookSim" -> Return -> Memory

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

END OF DIALING DETECTION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ACTIVATION/USE

Trunk line seizure

The system uses the

reference counter for Do the first digits correspond
all the lines and NO to a prefix configured in the YES The system uses the
detects end of dialing end of dialing table of prefixes counter value associated
when the counter ? with this prefix
value is reached

YES Dialing is said to be NO

NO CLOSED and the system Is the counter value
Is the counter value equal to 0 ?
equal to 0 ? detects end of dialing
when the counter
value is reached

YES

The 2-way communication After each transmitted digit, the system launches Dialing is said to be
is carried out and the off hook simulation time-out ; When his time- OPEN since the system
the user can enter the out has lapsed end of dialing is arbitrarily detected does not detect end of
features in conversation dialing

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- Maximum number of prefixes in the table of end of dialing prefixes: 20.

- Maximum number of digits per prefix: 6.
- This mechanism does not concern lines or trunks declared in the system as being connected behind
a PCX.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES SPLITTING

File
SPLITTING
9

DESCRIPTION

The splitting mechanism enables a user to dial a number on an analog trunk line or behind a PCX,
without having to wait for any dialing splits.

It is accessed:

- by manual dialing
- by automatic dialing (last number redial, temporary memory number, speed dial number)

Splitting can be of two types:

- tone detection: TONE in the splitting prefix table

- pause: PAUSE in the splitting prefix table.

The mechanism applies at three levels:

- During line seizure:

- if the splitting is TONE, dialing is possible as soon as the PCX has recognized the tone trans-
mitted by the trunk during a validation time-out. If, after expiry of a time-out, no tone has been
recognized, the system releases the line.
- if the splitting is PAUSE, dialing is transmitted after expiry of a programmable time-out, (diffe-
rent for private or public trunk lines).
- Intermediary splitting prefixes:
Dialing according to the prefixes in the splitting prefix table, is transmitted after tone detection or
after a splitting time-out with the same principles as for the line seizure.
- Splitting prefixes defined in the personal or collective speed dial numbers:
A personal or collective speed dial number can have one splitting character (symbolized by "!"). The
splitting method used (TONE or PAUSE) is the one programmed in the splitting prefix table.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

SPLITTING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

CONFIGURATION

T Programming the line seizure type of splitting:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Splitting Table
- by MMC-Station: EODPfx -> EODial -> Split -> TonDet

T Programming or modifying the splitting prefix table:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Splitting Table
- by MMC-Station: EODPfx -> EODial -> Split -> prefix

T To modify the pause time-out – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

External Lines -> Protocols -> Analog Trunks -> Timers -> Modify -> "Pause after Seizure
Trunk", "Pause after Seizure Main/Sat", "Pause Fractioning" (Part 2)

T To modify the tone detection time-out – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

External Lines -> Protocols -> Analog Trunks -> Timers -> Modify -> "Tone Detection"

T To modify the tone non-detection time-out – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

External Lines -> Protocols -> Analog Trunks -> Timers -> Modify -> "TO if no Tone De-
tection"

ACTIVATION/USE
Line seizure

NO TONE
Is the tone present Splitting = TONE or
and valid ? PAUSE ?

Pause
YES
Dialing is transmitted
The system after time-out
releases the line

NO
The system waits
YES with for the end of the
TONE Does the number pause time-out
Is the tone present contain a splitting
and valid ? then continues
prefix or a "!" ? YES transmitting the
with PAUSE dialing

YES NO
The system continues
transmitting the dialing

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES SPLITTING

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- Maximum number of prefixes in the table of splitting prefixes: 16.

- Maximum number of digits per prefix: 4.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

SPLITTING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CALL DISTRIBUTION (DYNAMIC
ROUTING)

File
CALL DISTRIBUTION (DYNAMIC
10
ROUTING)
DESCRIPTION

The system can automatically re-route:

- a call from the network and destined for the active Operator Group, or the default Operator Group
(see "Operator stations")
- a call arriving from the network and currently in transit
- a DDI call (Direct Dialing Inward) from the network and destined for a station or a Hunting Group
- an external call on a "personalized" or "reserved" line: all calls arriving on a personalized external
line are routed directly to a station or Hunting Group, depending on the system's normal or restric-
ted mode. Furthermore, a "personalized" line may be "reserved", i.e. a call on this line can neither
be picked up nor monitored
- an internal call
- a call from the private network

The system treats simultaneous calls destined for an Operator Group according to the following prio-
rities:

- external hold recall, delayed or otherwise

- internal hold recall, delayed or otherwise
- external callback
- external call
- internal callback
- call from an operator station
- internal call
- Operator Group call
- Hunting Group call

The system routes an internal incoming call depending on the following criteria:

- directory number of the destination station programmed in the main numbering plan
- type of call: private or not
- station accessible or not
- destination station resource keys (see "Resource keys")
- status of the resources: free or busy (see "Resource keys")
- features active on the destination set: internal forwarding (see "Forwarding"), monitoring (see "Call
Monitoring"), filtering (see "Manager/secretary screening"), external forwarding (see "External
Forwarding")
- dynamic routing parameters programmed for a resource, the station or the hunting group

The system routes an external incoming call depending on the following criteria:

- PCX forwarding activated by an operator (see "PCX forwarding")

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

CALL DISTRIBUTION (DYNAMIC CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
ROUTING)

- system in normal or restricted service (see "Normal / restricted service (system level)")
- dissuasion message programmed in the active Operator Group (see "Automatic welcome")
- welcome message transmitted or not (see Automatic Welcome (Pre-announcement))
- destination station directory number: programmed in the public, private numbering plan (see "In-
coming transit") or main only
- type of call: for a private subscriber or not
- station accessible or not
- destination station resource keys (see "Resource keys")
- status of the resources: free or busy (see "Resource keys")
- features active on the destination set: internal forwarding (see "Forwarding"), monitoring (see "Call
Monitoring"), filtering (see "Manager/secretary screening"), external forwarding (see "External
Forwarding")
- dynamic routing parameters programmed for a resource, the station or the hunting group
NB: the dynamic routing programming on a resource key is duplicated on all the resources of the
same type. To cancel this programming, erase all the keys of this type and re-program.

CONFIGURATION

T Configuring a "personalized" line i.e. a line with predetermined routing:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
- complete the DDI numbering plan: Numbering -> Public Numbering Plan
- associate the number programmed in the DDI numbering plan with the appropriate line in
normal and/or restricted mode: External Lines -> List of Accesses -> Details -> Call-
Dist.
- by MMC-Station:
- complete the DDI numbering plan: NumPln -> PubNum
- associate the number programmed in the DDI numbering plan with the appropriate line in
normal and/or restricted mode: Access -> CalDis

T Configuring a "reserved" line by attributing the feature "private subscriber" to the DDI number pro-
grammed for a personalized line:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Public Numbering Plan
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> PubNum

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
10

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CALL DISTRIBUTION (DYNAMIC

ROUTING)

T Defining the dynamic routing parameters for a resource key:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Keys -> Resource Key -> Dyn. Rout.
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Keys -> Modify -> Resou -> DynRou

T Defining the dynamic routing parameters for a station:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Dyn. Rout.
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> DynRou.

T Defining the dynamic routing parameters for a Hunting Group:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Hunting Groups -> Dyn. Rout.
- by MMC-Station: Groups -> Hunt -> DynRou.

T To select the active Operator Group with the general call ringer as level 2 destination:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): check the Gen. Bell to Gen. Level. box in the "Dynamic Routing"
window
- by MMC-Station: GenBel so that the display indicates "GENBELL" in capital letters

T To choose between the called party mail box and the automated attendant as destination level 1
when D1 is the directory number of the group containing the two voice mail accesses:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): VMU as Auto. Attendant (level 1):
- box selected: the automated attendant is called in D1
- box not selected: the destination station's mail box is called in D1
- by MMC-Station: VMUBeh -> Level 1:
- Level 1 = Auto-Sec: the automated attendant is called in D1
- Level 1 = Message: the destination station's mail box is called in D1

T To choose between the called party mail box and the automated attendant as destination level 2 if
the voice mail belongs to the Operator Group called in D2:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert view): VMU as Auto. Attendant (level 2):
- box selected: the automated attendant is called in D2
- box not selected: the destination station's mail box is called in D2
- by MMC-Station: VMUBeh -> Level 2:
- Level 2 = Auto-Sec: the automated attendant is called in D2
- Level 2 = Message: the destination station's mail box is called in D2

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

CALL DISTRIBUTION (DYNAMIC CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
ROUTING)

ACTIVATION/USE

Dynamic forwarding general principle

Incoming internal or external call

Initial destination (D0) rings

yes Has D0 answered

Conversation the call before
time-out T1 has
expired?

no
Destination level 1 (D1) also
rings

Has D0 or D1
yes answered the call
Conversation before time-out
T2 has expired?

no
Destination level 2 (D2) also
rings

The initial destination D0 can be:

- a station
- a Hunting Group
- the general level (see "Operator stations")

If D0 is a station or a Hunting Group:

- D1can be a station, a Hunting Group, the voice mail unit (mail box or automated attendant) or a
collective speed dial number
- D2 is the active Operator Group (see "Operator stations") with (only if the call is external) or without
the general call ringer programmed in this group

If D0 is the general level:

- D1 can be a station, a Hunting Group or a collective speed dial number

- D2 is the default Operator Group (see "Operator stations") with (only if the call is external) or wi-
thout the general call ringer programmed in this Hunting Group

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
10

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CALL DISTRIBUTION (DYNAMIC

ROUTING)

Dynamic routing and call forwarding (see "Forwarding")

Incoming call
(int/ext)

Yes Station in Destined for a Hunting group

immediate Yes
station or a in immediate
forwarding hunting group Hunting group forwarding?
? ?
No Station No Forwarding
Forwarding destination
destination rings
rings
DR active for
No the resource
D.R active No
for station ? signalling D.R active for
No the call? the group ?
Yes
Only forwarding D.R active for Yes
the forwarding Only initial Yes Only hunting
destination rings destination ? group rings
No called party
rings
No Is the hunting
Yes
group the
active operator
group ?

After T1,
destination level 1 Yes
also rings
Is D1 external
(by means of collective Only D1 After T1, destination
speed dial rings level 1
Yes also rings
no.s)?
No
After T2, general
level (*)
also rings After T1, destination
level 1 also rings Only forwarding
destination After T2, default
rings operator group
also rings
No

No D.R for After T2, active Internal for

operator group in warding
group? immediate for Yes destination
warding? ?
Operator group + its
Forwarding Yes Yes level 1 D.R destination
No + default operator
level 1 D.R destination group ring (+ possible
+ general General level Operator forwarding hunting group
level ring also rings destination + initial forwarding destination)
AfterT1', level 1 D.R destination
+ initial called
also rings party ring

D.R for No
active operator
group?

After T2', default

operator group Yes
also rings Initial called party +
After T1', level its level 1 D.R
1' destination destination+ general
also rings level ring

Forwarding destination + its

level 1 D.R destination +
general level + level 1 operator After T2', default
group D.R destination operator group
+ default operator group also rings
ring

D.R = Dynamic Routing

Initial called party + its
level 1 D.R destination + Supposing that the forwarding authorizations are granted
general level + level 1 (see file "Forwarding")
operator group D.R destination
+ default operator (*) If the immediate forwarding destination of the initial called party is
group ring the active operator group, the system rings the default operator group,
after T2

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

CALL DISTRIBUTION (DYNAMIC CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
ROUTING)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The sub-address and User to User Signaling (UUS) are not re-routed after a forwarding, a transfer
or a call pick-up.
- When dynamic routing is active but D1 or D2 is not programmed, or T1 or T2 is not used, the sys-
tem moves onto the next stage.
- The active and default Operator Groups may contain both integrated voice mail accesses (see cor-
responding file).
- Calls from the private network are handled with the INTERNAL call dynamic routing parameters.

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES TIME RANGES

File
TIME RANGES
11

Prior to version R2.0, the current time range was defined by the current hour during the day. Starting
with R2.0, the time ranges depend also on the day of the week and on holidays. This new set-up offers
more flexibility by allowing different time ranges depending on whether the company is closed (wee-
kend, holidays) or open.

DESCRIPTION

A day can be divided into a maximum of 7 time ranges each varying in duration. The time ranges
allow the definition of:

- the system's operating mode: N/R (see sheet "Normal/restricted service"). This mode is used in
the mechanisms of call distribution, discrimination, traffic sharing and integrated voice server
(Automated Attendant and Audiotex). The system's operating mode is also used to define each
user's operating mode (starting with R2.0, the mechanism described on the sheet "Normal/restric-
ted service" is no longer used).

- the active OS group (see "Operator stations" and "Specific operator services"): one of 8 possible
OS groups assigned to each time range.

- the OS group's call forwarding state: configured for each time range with the same recipient
for all ranges.

Time ranges are also used in pre-announcement and welcome messages functions.

CONFIGURATION

T To modify time ranges by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert view): Time ranges -> Start, N/R mode, Att. Grp., Att.div.

56 time ranges may be configured: 7 (by day) x 8 (days of the week + holidays).

Nota : By default, only data for the first 2 time ranges are defined from Monday to Friday; the de-
fault values vary by country.

The list of holidays is completely independent from the list defined in the ARS mechanisms.

The data defined for a day (time ranges and pre-announcement) may be copied in order
to assign them to one or several other data.

T Inhibiting, station by station, the switch to restricted service by time ranges (the station remains in
normal service):

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

TIME RANGES CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List

-> Details -> Features -> Part 2 -> Inhibition Time ranges .

Nota : The “Inhibit” flag makes it possible to remain in normal service in case the system switches
to restricted service by operator command (N/R mode key).

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES NORMAL AND RESTRICTED SERVICE

File
NORMAL AND RESTRICTED SERVICE
12

NORMAL AND RESTRICTED SERVICE - SYSTEM LEVEL

Description
System's operating mode: normal or restricted service is used in the following mechanisms:

- call distribution

- network lines discrimination

- network lines traffic sharing

- assignment of network lines for transmission of collective speed dial numbers

- Automated Attendant: normal service corresponds to the Automated Attendant opening hours, res-
tricted service corresponds to the closing hours. Depending on the time, the following services have
different parameters: company's welcome message, * question, language choice, direct call, menu
and sub-menus configuration, default function, etc.

- Audiotext: normal service corresponds to the Audiotex opening hours, restricted service corres-
ponds to the closing hours. Depending on the time, the following services have different parame-
ters: * question, language choice and information message identifier.

Switching from NORMAL MODE to RESTRICTED MODE and vice versa depends on the following pa-
rameters:

- the time (and therefore the time range)

- the Normal/Restricted mode function on the Operator Station

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

NORMAL AND RESTRICTED SERVICE CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Activation/Use

Switching to YES
RESTRICTED mode
by an OPERATOR?

NO

Normal Time range in Restricted

NORMAL or
RESTRICTED
mode?

OPERATOR HUNTING GROUP ASSOCIATED TO

THE TIME RANGE

RESTRICTED
MODE

Are all the operators

of the current group DEFAULT OPERATOR
forwarded or out of GROUP
NO YES
service?

Additional Information
When the switchover to restricted mode is carried out from an Operator Station, users who do not have
"Inhibition Flag" feature rights are forced into "user" restricted mode.

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
12

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES NORMAL AND RESTRICTED SERVICE

FORWARDING OF ALL EXTERNAL INCOMING CALLS

The system is made up of two public numbering plans, one of which is used in normal service while
the other is used in restricted service.

The restricted public numbering plan can be configured in such a way that certain DDI numbers are
redirected to external destinations (using the group directory or the ARS mechanism) while others (Fax
for example) reach their intended internal destinations.

Configuring the public numbering plan in restricted mode

The public numbering plan for restricted service mode can contain a maximum of 99 entries (0 by de-
fault).

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Restricted numbering plan

- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> ResNum

The configuration (beginning and end of range, base, NMT) is identical to that of the public numbering
plan for normal service mode (PubNum).

If the destination of the DDI number is the same in normal and in restricted service, the 2 numbering
plans must have the same configurations.

For more details, see “Numbering Plans" in the MMC-Station section.

Activation/Deactivation
Forwarding can be activated/deactivated from any station with an N/R Mode key. After pressing this
key, dial the operator code.

Notas :

It can also be activated by configuring the time ranges.

Example of use
Normal service public numbering plan

Start End Base Feature

120 170 120 Set
200 230 200 Set
500 525 500 Hunting Group

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

NORMAL AND RESTRICTED SERVICE CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Restricted service public numbering plan

Start End Base Feature

120 170 120 Set
200 210 0 Collective Speed Dial
211 211 10 Collective Speed Dial
212 212 10 Collective Speed Dial
213 230 200 Set
500 524 500 Hunting Group
525 525 10 Collective Speed Dial

Internal numbering plan

Start End Base Feature

8000 8010 0 Collective Speed Dial

Collective Speed Dial

Speed dial number Level Called number

8000 8 59242
8001 8 59243
....... .. ...........
8009 8 59251
8010 8 59252

In this example, the public numbering plan for restricted service uses the collective speed dial table.

The numbers 120 to 170 and 213 to 230 keep their normal destinations when the system is in restric-
ted service mode, as do calls to the range 500 to 524.

The external incoming calls to stations 200 to 209 are forwarded to the destinations defined by the
first 10 entries in the collective speed dial table (8000 to 8009). Calls to numbers 210, 211, 212 and
calls to group 525 are forwarded to the destination defined by the entry 8010 in the collective speed
dial table.

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
12

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES NORMAL AND RESTRICTED SERVICE

NORMAL AND RESTRICTED SERVICE - USER LEVEL

The normal/restricted service configuration for each user and for each time range is no lon-
ger available starting with R2.0; the system's normal/restricted operating mode is used (see
sheet “Time ranges”).

Description
Depending on the time range, the system operates in either normal or restricted mode. The service
mode affects the way in which the system distributes incoming calls and controls users' outgoing calls.

The installer can also configure the operation in "user" restricted mode for each station and in each
time range. ; starting with R2.0, this option is no longer available.

Configuration
T Define the time ranges during which a station operates in restricted service:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Barring -> "Time Ranges (outgoing traffic)"

T To specify whether or not to inhibit the switch to restricted service when the system is switched to
restricted service by an operator; see "Specific operator station services", in the "Telephone services"
section:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Features -> "Inhibition Flag"

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

NORMAL AND RESTRICTED SERVICE CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Activation/Use

Does the user

have "inhibit restricted
mode" feature YES
rights?

NO

NO
Is the user in
restricted mode during YES
the applicable time
range?

NORMAL USER SERVICE RESTRICTED USER SERVICE

and/or

NO NO
Set locked by user? Set locked by user?

YES YES

SERVICE LOCKED

Additional Information
A station in restricted service and unlocked (see "Station comfort features", "Telephone services" sec-
tion) switches to user normal service when the code for unlocking the station is entered: this station
can no longer be switched to restricted service but it can be locked.

Starting with R2.0, a noteworthy address "LockBypass" allows to override this mechanism:

- LockBypass = 1 (default value): mechanism described above

- LockBypass = 0: a user in restricted service mode who unlocks his locked station, switches back to
restricted service (as opposed to normal service); the user therefore has no means of switching from
restricted service to normal service.

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES AUTOMATIC WELCOME (PRE-
ANNOUNCEMENT)

File
AUTOMATIC WELCOME (PRE-
13
ANNOUNCEMENT)
DESCRIPTION

This feature makes it possible to send a spoken message to a network caller before connecting him to
the called party. The called party can be:

- a station
- a Hunting Group (see "Hunting Groups")
- an Operator Group (see "Operator stations")

The message can be sent to the caller either:

- before the destination station rings: this is mode 1

- while the destination station is ringing: this is mode 2

and, either:

- only if the called party is busy

- no matter what status the called party is in: free or busy

The system allows you to play up to 8 pre-recorded messages. These messages can be:

- welcome messages
- dissuasion messages
- voice prompts (for DISA transit for example)

The pre-announcement can be defined for:

- 15 DDI numbers (individual pre-announcement)

- all the system's users (general pre-announcement)

The installer can allocate a maximum of one message for each of the 7 time ranges.

CONFIGURATION

T Selecting the source for the please wait music:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Messages and Music -> Music on
Hold
- by MMC-Station: Voice -> MusSrc -> Stndrd, VoicPr or Tape

T Recording RAM welcome and dissuasion messages – MMC-Station only:

Voice -> RecMsg -> Msg1 to Msg8 -> Record

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

AUTOMATIC WELCOME (PRE- CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
ANNOUNCEMENT)

T Listening to recorded RAM welcome and dissuasion messages – MMC-Station only:

Voice -> RecMsg -> Msg1 to Msg8 or Music -> Listen

T Defining DDI numbers, for individual pre-announcement:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Numbering Plans -> Public Numbering Plan
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> PubNum

T Assigning welcome messages:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Misc. Subscribers -> Pre-announcement
- by MMC-Station: PreAnn -> Add -> Msg

T Defining the pre-announcement mode (none, mode 1 or mode 2) depending on the time range:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Misc. Subscribers -> Pre-announcement
- by MMC-Station: PreAnn -> Add -> Mode

T To define whether the message is sent only if the called party is busy, or regardless of status, de-
pending on the time range – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
Subscribers Misc. -> Preannouncement

T To modify the pre-announcement time-outs:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers -> Pre-announcement -> Timers
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Timers -> "AnsMsgTim" -> Return -> Memory

T To select transmission of ringing tone or "please wait" music (for a free station):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels
-> "TonPrRng"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "TonPrRng" -> Return -> Memory

T To select transmission of ringing tone or "please wait" music for a busy station:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels
-> "TonPrCmp"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "TonPrCmp" -> Return -> Memory

T To select transmission of ringing tone or "please wait" music for a Hunting Group (free or busy):
- by MMC-PM5 System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels -> "TonPr-
Grp"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "TonPrGrp" -> Return -> Memory

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
13

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES AUTOMATIC WELCOME (PRE-

ANNOUNCEMENT)

ACTIVATION/USE
External call to operator group destination
(see file "Normal/Restricted service (system level)")

Positioning on the operator group or

the default operator group

External DDI call to a station or

hunting group

yes Does the operator no

group have a welcome
message? The destination
rings
Dissuasion message sent and
line released
Is the called N°
yes configured with no Is general no
individual preannouncement
preannouncement in configured?
the current time
range ?
Distribution of message configured yes
as individual preannouncement

Distribution of message configured

as general preannouncement

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

AUTOMATIC WELCOME (PRE- CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
ANNOUNCEMENT)

Tree diagram operational after the system has determined the type of pre-announcement:

External incoming call

Caling party hears the ringing

Is the access Calling party hears the
tone (*) while the welcome YES NO
assigned to the ringing tone (*) during
message is sent to other calling
welcome message the “time-out before
parties then during the "time-out busy? preannouncement”
before preannouncement"

mode1 Preannouncement
mode2 mode1 mode2
Preannouncement
in mode1 or in mode1
2? or 2?

Automatic transmission Automatic transmission Automatic transmission of

Automatic transmission message and the called
of message to al of message
of message to all waiting station rings simultaneously.
waiting callers
callers and the called If the called party is out of
stations ring simultaneously. service, the calling party
If a called party is out of is released (***).
service, the corresponding
calling party is released. (***)
Is one of the YES Is the called YES
called parties party out of
out of service?
service?

NO NO
Call returns to the Call returns to the
operator group operator group

At the end of transmission, Do one or At the end of transmission,

the calling parties NO the calling party NO Does the called
several called parties hears the ringing tone party go off
hear the ringing tone or go off hook during
the "please wait" music. or the "please wait" hook during
(**) transmission? music. (**) transmission?

YES YES

Switch to conversation
for called parties that Switch to conversation
have gone off hook

(*) sent by the public exchange

(**) The ringing tone or the "please wait" music is heard:
- by a caller on an analog TL up until the "Release after pre-announcement (norm or restr mode)" time-out has lapsed
- by a caller on digital access up until the called party goes off hook.
(***) ISDN calls only

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
13

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES AUTOMATIC WELCOME (PRE-

ANNOUNCEMENT)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- Duration of default "please wait" music: 16 s

- Maximum duration of the customizable "please wait" music: 2 min by default and up to 10 min with
a hard disk
- Maximum duration of a welcome or dissuasion message: 16 s
- Maximum number of pre-announcement messages: 8
- The automatic welcome is not activated when the called party has activated text answering or pa-
ging
- An empty Hunting Group can no longer use the Automatic Welcome service.
- The automatic welcome only concerns voice type calls.
- The automatic welcome does not concern calls from the private network
- In mode 1, an external call released by the caller before being presented to the initial destination,
is not recorded in the repertory of unanswered calls.
- An external call on an analog line , received with transmission of the welcome message and re-
maining unanswered, is released by the system after a time-out.
- Metering units arriving during the transmission of the welcome message are assigned to the called
party.
- Under no circumstances will the external call receive two welcome messages.
- An error message appears on the station display when the automatic welcome cannot transmit the
message to the incoming call.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

AUTOMATIC WELCOME (PRE- CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
ANNOUNCEMENT)

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES DIRECT DIALING INWARDS

File
DIRECT DIALING INWARDS
14

DDI numbers can:

- contain up to 8 digits.
- use the numbering recovery mechanism described below.

NUMBERING RECOVERY

Description
When, in an existing installation, a new range of DDI numbers needs to be added, and the new se-
quence allocated by the public exchange overlaps the existing range, the installer can make use of the
"DDI with more than 4 digits" mechanism.

Exemple :

Consider an existing system with the DDI numbers (XX = any possible "intercity prefix", "intercity code"
and "recall prefix" – these can vary from country to country):

- XX 1 41 23 40 10 to XX 1 41 23 40 19 assigned to stations 120 to 129

- XX 1 41 23 41 00 to XX 1 41 23 41 19 assigned to stations 130 to 149

The exchange allocates the new range XX 1 41 33 40 15 to XX 1 41 33 40 24: these numbers are
assigned to stations 150 to 159.

As described below, the numbering plan does not allow:

- use of the whole DDI range available; in actual fact, in order to route a DDI number to a called
station, the system only analyzes the last 4 digits of the number received from the network and the
DDI sequences XX 1 41 23 40 10 and XX 1 41 33 40 15 have in common, the range of the last 4
digits 40 15 to 40 19.
- transmission of the exact number of the caller (see "ISDN services") since the system would require
two installation numbers (XX 1 41 23 and XX 1 41 33) in order to operate correctly, which is im-
possible.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

DIRECT DIALING INWARDS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Configuration
T Configuring the installation number:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Installation Numbers
- by MMC-Station: Global -> InsNum -> Public

T Filling in the substitution table:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> DDI Number Modification Table
- by MMC-Station: Num Pln -> PubNMT

T Completing the DDI numbering plan:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Public Numbering Plan
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> PubNum

Activation/Use
Functional analysis

A "DDI with more than 4 digits" mechanism is based on the analysis of all the received digits. They are
modified using a substitution table and analyzed by the Public numbering plan. Programming such a
mechanism requires you to have a global view of your DDI sequences.

Procedure to follow

- check the DDI sequences

- deduce the installation number by removing the "intercity prefix", "intercity code" if found
- deduce the minimum number of digits required to cover the DDI ranges
- analyze the remaining digits and create the DDI modification table
- configure the DDI numbering plan
- activate the mechanism

Application using the above example

- DDI sequences:
- 1st sequence: 1 41 23 40 10 to 1 41 23 40 19 for stations 120 to 129
- 2nd sequence: 1 41 23 41 00 to 1 41 23 41 19 for stations 130 to 149
- 3rd sequence: 1 41 33 40 15 to 1 41 33 40 24 for stations 150 to 159
- Deduction of the installation number:
Digits 1 41 are common to the 3 sequences of DDI numbers: these 3 digits will make up the ins-
tallation number. THE "INSTALLATION NUMBER" FIELD CAN BE LEFT EMPTY IF THERE IS NO
COMMON DIGIT.
- Deduction of the minimum number of digits to cover the DDI ranges:
1 or 2 digits, at least, are necessary in order to join a series of stations.
- 1st sequence: 1 41 23 40 1 0 to 1 41 23 40 1 9: 10 stations with 1 digit (0 to 9)
- 2nd sequence: 1 41 23 41 00 to 1 41 23 41 19: 20 stations with 2 digits (00 to 19)
- 3rd sequence: 1 41 33 40 15 to 1 41 33 40 24: 10 stations with 2 digits (15 to 24)
- analysis of the remaining digits (by removing the installation number and the digits necessary to

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
14

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES DIRECT DIALING INWARDS

cover the DDI ranges) and creation of the DDI modification table:
- 1st sequence: 1 41 23 40 10 to 1 41 23 40 19
- 2nd sequence: 1 41 23 41 00 to 1 41 23 41 19
- 3rd sequence: 1 41 33 40 15 to 1 41 33 40 24

The remaining digits are to be replaced by the substitution digits ,which, themselves, will be ana-
lyzed in the DDI numbering plan. To do this, apply the following rule:
Minimum number of digits to cover the DDI range + Length of the substitution number =
4 (i.e. the maximum number of digits as defined in the DDI numbering plan).
For example, one can:
- for the 1st sequence: substitute "23 40 1" by "810" (in fact, "810" + 1 digit from 0 to 9 = 4 digits)
- for the 2nd sequence: substitute "23 41" by "82" (in fact, "82" + 2 digits from 00 to 19 = 4 digits)
- for the 3rd sequence: substitute "33 40" by "83" (in fact, "83" + 2 digits from 15 to 24 = 4 digits)
- Creation of the DDI numbering plan (from the DDI numbers modification table):
Function Begin End Base

Station -- 9 120
Station -- -- 130

Station -- -- 150

Result of the above example

The DDI number received from the network (here, XX 1 41 33 40 20) is analyzed by the system as
follows:

- removal of any intercity prefix, etc... as well as the installation number: leaves the number 33 40
20.
- analysis of this number in the substitution table (the mechanism being authorized, this analysis is
carried out automatically for all DDI numbers received): the system deducts the number 8320
- analysis of the DDI number thus obtained in the DDI numbering plan: the system makes station
155 ring.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

DIRECT DIALING INWARDS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Additional Information
- Maximum number of entries in the modification table of DDI numbers: 18
- Maximum number of digits for an entry in the modification table of DDI numbers: 16.
- Maximum number of digits in a substitution number: 4.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CLASS COMPATIBILITY

File
CLASS COMPATIBILITY
15

DEFINITION

This feature allows information (from the public ISDN network or internal system network) to be pre-
sented on analog CLASS terminals connected to Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

In idle, when ringing or during a call, analog CLASS terminals have access to:

- date and time of the system

- CLIP (calling line identification)
- calling line identification restriction management
- caller's name (if available in the system directory)
- management of the Message LED

HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

- CLASS terminals connected to SLI boards

CONFIGURATION

T Specifying the analog station as a CLASS terminal:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Classiq. (class)
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Termnl -> Class

T Activating the name display:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> Name Display

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

CLASS COMPATIBILITY CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES ISDN SERVICES

File
ISDN SERVICES
16

DESCRIPTION

The default dialing mode on ISDN lines is digit by digit. At the press of a key, users can employ block
dialing to access a range of services:

- addition of a sub-address to the number dialed

- activation of calling line identification restriction, i.e. the caller's identity is not transmitted to the
called party
- for a station with soft keys only, transmission of user-to-user signaling (UUS), i.e. a text message
on a station with a display.

The "Calling Line Identification Restriction" function can also be activated in digit-by-digit dialing
mode for all stations (see "Making/Answering a call").

When a call is received, the "malicious call identification" service is available This service, availa-
ble by subscription to the network, involves the network operator recording certain call details either
during the communication or during the release phase after the caller has hung up, (numbers of both
parties; date and time of call; sub-address of caller if applicable).

The keypad dialing features offer access (in transparent fashion) to the services provided by the pu-
blic network operator (the functional services of the particular operator).

CONFIGURATION

T For each station, to specify whether or not to permanently activate "calling line identification res-
triction":
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Identity Secrecy"

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

ISDN SERVICES CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

T For each station, to specify whether or not to authorize reception of User to User Signaling:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Features -> "UUS Allowed"

T To modify the maximum time-out, after going on hook, for requesting recording of the caller's iden-
tity - MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
External Lines -> Protocols -> ISDN Trunk -> Layer 3 -> "T305 Disconnect Supervision"

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.:: Programmed Key - defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
F.K. : Fixed Key
S.K.:: Soft Key

Type of station Z Without With display, no soft With soft keys

display keys
Service

Activate calling line identification restriction before dia- -- P.K. CLIR P.K.: CLIR P.K.: CLIR
ling, in sequential or block dialing modes

Switch to block dialing mode -- -- F.K.: ISDN or P.K. F.K.: ISDN

BMdial

Delete digit preceding the cursor in block mode dialing F.K.: CLIR S.K.: Rubout
(number and sub-address)
Add a sub-address in block dialing mode -- -- P.K.: SubAdd S.K.: SubAdd

To validate the sub-address, in block dialing mode -- -- P.K.: SubAdd S.K.: OK

Add UUS, in block dialing mode -- -- -- S.K.: Text + n° of messa-

ge (from 0 to 27) (*)

Activation of calling line identification restriction, in -- -- -- S.K.: CLIR

block dialing mode

To set up the call in block dialing mode (with or without -- -- F.K.: ISDN or P.K. S.K.: Send
sub-address, with or without UUS). BMdial

Activate malicious call identification Function code S.K.: MCID

(*) Messages 1 to 27 are pre-defined in the system. Some of them have a variable part which must be
completed (return time, room number, etc.). Message n° "0" can be made up completely from the al-
phabetic keypad (up to 32 characters).

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
16

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES ISDN SERVICES

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- When the user has activated the block dialing mode, he cannot select a specific access via an RSP
(see "Resource Keys").
- In block dialing mode, if the dialing transmitted is incomplete, the line used is released as no digit
can be added to the dialing.
- Only a station with soft keys can receive UUS during an answered call. It can be consulted during
the conversation by pressing the "Msg" soft key.
- Malicious call identification is not available to stations behind a private network.
- Identification of a malicious call cannot be requested after a handover.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

ISDN SERVICES CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

KEYBOARD FACILITIES (KEYPAD DIALLING)

In certain countries, the public ISDN operator provides services that can be activated using the ETSI
ETS 300 122 protocol (in addition to these generic services, each public operator defines how these
services are handled in their national specifications).

To access these services, the system establishes transparent communications between the public ex-
change and the internal users, who can then key in codes and receive a response from the public ex-
change.
This service is available with all station types on an Alcatel OmniPCX system directly connected to the
public exchange (not through a private network).

Up to the version R2.0, the operator services can only be activated from the rest state of the set. From
the version R2.01, in addition to activation from the rest state, it is possible to activate the services of
the operator during the call (for instance using the "conference operator" service to set up a conference
with 2 outside parties while only using a single B channel)

Activation/Deactivation

From the rest state (to R2.0)

Operator services can be activated if the "Transparent access to system functions in idle state" flag is
active and if the user DID number is configured in the public dialling plan.

Nota : The placing of the flag is only necessary if the service codes are carried in the "Keypad Fa-
cility" information element; in some countries (Finland for instance), codes are contained in
the "Called party number" element and the placing of the flag is then ignored (codes are
issued without special processing).

To activate the service:

- by manual dialling: dial the ISDN trunk group seizure code, then press * or # followed by the
operator service code (22 figures maximum).
- by using a "Dialling" programmed key: this key is programmed with the trunk group seizure
code and all or part of the service code.
- by using a "Block dialling" programmed key.

During a call (from R2.01

Operator services can be activated during an outside party call (incoming or outgoing call on digital
line) if the "Access transparent to system functions in conversation" flag is active.

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
16

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES ISDN SERVICES

To activate the service:

- by using a programmed key "Simultaneous call system function": after pressing this key (the
icon or the led of the key indicates activation), dial the number of the 2nd correspondent (simulta-
neous call, the 1st correspondent is put on hold) or dial the feature access code (conference, alter-
nation on inquiry, cancellation of the simultaneous call) of the internal dialling plan desired; this
code will be converted into corresponding operator service code.

- by dialling the feature access code "Simultaneous call system function": this option is offered
to sets without programmed key (analogue sets).

Configuration
- To activate the service at system level:
- by DHM-PM5 (Expert View) : System features -> Features -> Access transparent to system
functions in idle state
- by DHM-PM5 (Expert View) : System features -> Features -> Access transparent to system
functions in conversation

- For each set concerned, create a service implementation key during call:
- by DHM-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Key -> Function = System simultaneous call function.

- Define the feature access code "Simultaneous call system function":

- by DHM-PM5 (Expert View) : Dialling plan -> Feature access code (service codes) -> Simul-
taneous call system function

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

ISDN SERVICES CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES VN7 COMPATIBILITY

File
VN7 COMPATIBILITY
17

This section lists the compatibilities between Alcatel OmniPCX Office and version VN7 of the French
ISDN network (RNIS).

BASIC CALLS

Basic calls (incoming and outgoing) are supported on the S0 and T0/T2 accesses.

COMPLEMENTARY SERVICES

The compatibility of complementary services varies according to whether the service is required on the
user side (S0) or on the network side (T0/T2)

Service S0 side compatibility T0/T2 side compatibility

AOC-E YES NO
Advice Of Charge at the
End of the call
AOC-D YES YES
Advice Of Charge Du-
ring the call
CLIP YES YES
Calling Line Identifica-
tion Presentation
DDI YES Not applicable
Direct Dialing In
MSN YES (in Point to Multipoint) YES
Multiple Subscriber
Number
TP Not applicable YES (locally, on the same access)
Terminal Portability
SUB YES (limited to 4 digits) YES (limited to 4 digits)
Sub-Address
CW NO NO
Call Waiting
HOLD NO YES

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

VN7 COMPATIBILITY CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

MCID YES (Reflexes and S0 terminals) YES

Malicious Call Identifi-
cation
UUS1 YES (limited to 32 characters) YES (limited to 32 characters)
User to User Signaling
CFB NO NO
Call Forwarding on
Busy
CFU YES (in Point to Point) YES
Call Forwarding Un-
conditional
CFNR NO NO
Call Forwarding on No
Reply
CD YES (in Point to Multipoint) NO
Call Deflection
CCBS YES (in Point to Point) NO
Call Completion on
Busy Subscriber
3PTY NO NO
3 Party conference
ECT NO NO
Explicit Call Transfer
CNIP NO NO
Caller Name Identifica-
tion Presentation

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CCBS – COMPLETION OF CALLS TO
BUSY SUBSCRIBER

File
CCBS – COMPLETION OF CALLS TO
18
BUSY SUBSCRIBER
DESCRIPTION

CCBS - Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber - is a complement of the ETSI service provided by the
system on T0/T2 public exchange connections.

This function can be considered like an extension of the "Automatic call back on busy set" service. CCBS
requires a service subscription with the operator offering this function and can be activated equally well
for an incoming call as for an outgoing call.

CONFIGURATION

T CCBS on outgoing call: authorize the set to use the service or not:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -
> Details -> Features -> "Callback"

T CCBS on incoming call: check the following settings:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):External Lines -> Incoming Call Handling -> Public Line -> On
Busy = Release System Misc. -> Feature Design -> Call Waiting/Automatic Camp-On
(not selected)
- by MMC-Station:
IncCal -> Public -> Busy -> ReacPu -> Release
Global -> CalExt -> Mode (Ext Call Waiting YES / No)

T Modify (or not) the timeout during which the CCBS is active in the system (30 minutes by default);
at the end of the timeout, the CCBS is cancelled:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Timer La-
bels -> "BookBusTim"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Timer -> "BookBusTim" -> Return -> Memory

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

CCBS – COMPLETION OF CALLS TO CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
BUSY SUBSCRIBER

T Modify (or not) the timeout during which the party requesting a CCBS on an outgoing call is rung
(25 seconds by default); at the end of the timeout the CCBS is cancelled:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Timer La-
bels -> "BookRecTim"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Timer -> "BookRecTim" -> Return -> Memory

CCBS ACTIVATION/CANCELLATION ON OUTGOING CALLS

When a call is made to a public network user B whose line is busy, CCBS enables a user A with an
Alcatel OmniPCX Office system to leave a call back request at the public exchange. When the public
exchange informs the Alcatel OmniPCX Office system that B is free, Alcatel OmniPCX Office calls back
A, and when A answers, it makes an automatic call back to B.

All stations (inclu- Without display (≠ Z) With display, no soft With soft keys
Type of station
ding Z) keys
Type of service

CCBS request Automatic call back re- P.K.: Automatic call- P.K.: ❏Cback S.K.: ❏Cback
quest code back request

CCBS cancellation Cancellation prefix P.K.: Cancel callback P.K.: ■Cback S.K.: ■Cback, before
or during callback

Attention :

Only one automatic call back request can be activated on a set: automatic call back to busy set, auto-
matic call back to busy trunk or CCBS. Any new CCBS request cancels the previous one.

CCBS ACTIVATION/CANCELLATION ON INCOMING CALLS

When a public network user (A) calls a busy Alcatel OmniPCX Office system set (B), A can activate the
CCBS service provided by the public exchange. When the Alcatel OmniPCX Office system informs the
public exchange that B is free, the public exchange calls back A, and when A answers it makes an
automatic call back to B.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
18

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CCBS – COMPLETION OF CALLS TO

BUSY SUBSCRIBER

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- CCBS cannot be activated on incoming calls to a group, or to a set with call forwarding activated
- CCBS is deactivated automatically in the following cases:
- CCBS on outgoing call:
- expiry of the timeout during BookRecTim; 25 seconds by default
- expiry of the BookBusTim timeout; 30 minutes by default
- expiry of the public exchange timeout T-CCBS6 (timeout during which the public exchange user
must free the line; 60 minutes)
- CCBS on incoming call:
- expiry of the BookBusTim timeout; 30 minutes by default
- expiry of the public exchange timeout T-CCBS5 (timeout during which the public exchange user
must free the line; 60 minutes)
- There is no second call back attempt if the line is busy when the CCBS call back is made. The CCBS
request is cancelled; another request can be made.
- A CCBS can be cancelled during the CCBS initiator call-back phase.
- CCBS is only available on the ISDN accesses of an Alcatel OmniPCX Office system; the service is
not available on a "slave" system accessing the network by break-out.
- CCBS is not supported by the T0 basic accesses configured in Point-to-Multipoint mode.
- A CCBS call-back cannot be intercepted.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

CCBS – COMPLETION OF CALLS TO CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
BUSY SUBSCRIBER

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES SPECIFIC FEATURES OF SO STATIONS

File
SPECIFIC FEATURES OF SO STATIONS
19

DESCRIPTION

The PCX provides the following services for S0 stations:

- suspension, which consists in suspending an internal or external communication in progress on a

basic access and picking it up later from the same S0 station relocated on the basic access or ano-
ther S0 station connected to the same basic access. The communication can be identified by a code
before being suspended. This code is used to locate the call.
- call waiting, which enables an S0 station to be informed that an external call is intended for it even
if no B channel is available on its basic access. The S0 station can ignore, reject or accept the call.
- malicious call identification subscription so that the network operator can be asked to record the
caller's identity during the communication or for a programmable time after going on hook.
- forwarding of calls on no answer, enables the internal and/or external calls to be routed to the
programmed destination.

CONFIGURATION

T To modify the default maximum suspension time-out – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 3 -> "Suspension"

T To authorize or inhibit camp-on on S0 stations – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> "Call Waiting/Automatic camp-on"

T To modify the maximum time-out, after going on hook, for requesting recording of the caller's iden-
tity – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
External Lines -> Protocols -> ISDN Trunk -> Layer 3 -> "T305 Disconnect Supervision"

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

SPECIFIC FEATURES OF SO STATIONS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ACTIVATION/USE

Activation of the various services depends on the S0 station ; refer to the station user guide.

cancellation

Cancellation of the various services depends on the S0 station; refer to the station user guide.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- A communication which is suspended and not retrieved after expiry of the suspension time-out is
released if internal and re-routed to the general level (see "Operator Stations") if external.
- A user cannot suspend a call if he or she already has a correspondent on hold.
- The user who suspended a call is charged for the entire communication, before suspension and
after retrieval.
- The number of calls suspended simultaneously is limited and depends on the size of the cabinet.
- Call waiting on an S0 station is limited by a non-modifiable time-out.
- The number of calls waiting on the same access is limited to 2.
- Malicious call identification cannot be requested after a call transfer or suspension.
- The user is informed by the network of the reason for the rejection of a malicious call identification
request.
- Apart from the caller's identity, the network records the time of identification request activation and
the number dialed by the caller.
- Multiple directory numbers: when an S0 option (Reflexes stations) is initialized, the system assigns
1, 2 or 3 directory numbers, depending on the country. With PM5, you can:
- add users for the S0 option (individually or in groups), up to the system capacity. There is no
automatic renumbering after adding users, so the installer should be careful to preserve the
coherence of the numbering plan;
- delete individual users (NB: the first user of an option cannot be deleted separately; deleting
the first user erases all the other users of the same option).

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES SPECIFIC NUMBERING PLANS

File
SPECIFIC NUMBERING PLANS
20

8 DIGIT NUMBERING PLANS

Station and hunting group call numbers, as well as collective speed dial numbers, can have up to 8
digits.

STAR NUMBERING

To use a 2, 3 or 4-figure default numbering plan, you can choose between a country-specific numbe-
ring plan or a generic numbering plan in which most codes (service codes or Features in Conversation)
start with *; this structure provides several ranges for allocating DDI numbers to sets.

The default star numbering plans are described in the following pages.

Configuration
T To select the default numbering plan:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Default Numbering Plan
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> Nbdigi

Notas : The default numbering plan can also be selected using PM5 EasyView once the system is
running.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

SPECIFIC NUMBERING PLANS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Codes common to all countries

Internal numbering plan

Functions 2-digit 3-digit 4-digit

Cancel all forwardings #21 #21 #21
Cancel "follow me" forwarding #27 #27 #27
Immediate call forwarding * 21 * 21 * 21
Forward on busy * 22 * 22 * 22
Do Not Disturb * 23 * 23 * 23
Forward to pager * 24 * 24 * 24
Group call forwarding * 25 * 25 * 25
Disconnect from group * 26 * 26 * 26
Rejoin the group # 26 # 26 # 26
Follow-me * 27 * 27 * 27
Selective forwarding * 28 * 28 * 28
Cancel callback #5 #5 #5
Voice Mail Unit (secret code) **6 **6 **6
Voice Mail Unit (secret code) *#6 *#6 *#6
Redial last number **0 **0 **0
Room status * 70 * 70 * 70
Lock/unlock * 71 * 71 * 71
Appointment reminder (prog.) * 72 * 72 * 72
Protect against intrusion * 73 * 73 * 73
Replace set * 78 * 78 * 78
Move set * 79 * 79 * 79
Individual call pick-up * 81 * 81 * 81
Pick up group * 82 * 82 * 82
General Call Answer * 83 * 83 * 83
Parked call retrieval * 84 * 84 * 84
Programming mode * 87 * 87 * 87
Text mail * 88 * 88 * 88
Group broadcast * 01 to *08 * 01 to *08 * 01 to *08
Subscriber calls 10 to 79 100 to 799 1000 to 7999

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
20

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES SPECIFIC NUMBERING PLANS

Seize secondary trunk groups * 50 to *53 * 500 to *534 * 500 to *534

Hunting Group calls * 54 to *59 * 540 to *565 * 540 to *565
Collective speed dial 8000 to 8999 8000 to 8999 8000 to 8999

Feature code table

Consulting camped calls *9 *9 *9

Trunk line allocation #11 to #17 #11 to #17 #11 to #17
Trunk allocation + MTR #21 to #27 #21 to #27 #21 to #27
Call Parking * 84 * 84 * 84
Malicious call identification * 89 * 89 * 89
Cancel enquiry *1 *1 *1
Shuttle *2 *2 *2
Conference *3 *3 *3
Intrusion *4 *4 *4
Automatic callback request *5 *5 *5
DTMF end-to-end signaling *6 *6 *6
Main PCX recall (calibrated loopbreak) *7 *7 *7

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

SPECIFIC NUMBERING PLANS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Country specific
Operator call and main trunk group seizure

Different codes for operator calls and for seizing the main trunk group apply in each country. This re-
sults in different ranges of subscriber numbers.

Country OS call Seize trunk 2/3/4-digit subs- Paging type

group criber
Austria 10 0 11/110/1100 prefix
Australia 9 0 10/100/1000 prefix
Belgium 11 0 12/120/1200 suffix
Switzerland 11 0 12/120/1200 prefix
Germany 10 0 11/110/1100 prefix
Denmark 9 0 10/100/1000 prefix
Spain 9 0 10/100/1000 suffix
Finland 9 0 10/100/1000 suffix
France 9 0 10/100/1000 suffix
Britain 0 9 10/100/1000 suffix
Greece 10 0 11/110/1100 prefix
Ireland 10 0 11/110/1100 prefix
Italy 9 0 10/100/1000 prefix
Netherlands 9 0 10/100/1000 prefix
Norway 9 0 10/100/1000 prefix
Portugal 9 0 10/100/1000 prefix
Sweden 9 0 10/100/1000 prefix
SMBI 10 0 11/110/1100 prefix

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
20

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES SPECIFIC NUMBERING PLANS

Paging type

Paging can be by prefix or by suffix.

Paging by prefix: the internal numbering plan has to have 2 codes: one for the "Prefix Paging Activa-
tion" function and one for the "Paging Answer Selective" function.
Paging by suffix: a "paging answer general " code is added to the internal numbering plan and a "suffix
paging activation" code is added to the features plan.

Paging by suffix: Internal numbering plan entries

Function 2-digit 3-digit 4-digit

Answer paging general * 85 * 85 * 85

Paging by suffix: features plan entries

Function 2-digit 3-digit 4-digit

Suffix paging activation * 86 * 86 * 86

Paging by prefix: internal numbering plan entries

Function 2-digit 3-digit 4-digit

Answer paging selective * 85 * 85 * 85
Prefix paging activation * 86 * 86 * 86

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

SPECIFIC NUMBERING PLANS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES ALTERNATIVE CLIP AND COLP
NUMBERS

File
ALTERNATIVE CLIP AND COLP
21
NUMBERS
CLIP and COLP are services that depend upon the public network (France: COLP is not provided)

These functions are provided by Alcatel OmniPCX Office systems connected to a public ISDN network
(T0/T2 access).

Definitions
CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation): identification number sent by the caller when making
an outgoing ISDN call.

COLP (Connected Line Presentation): identification number returned by the called party to the caller.

ALTERNATIVE SYSTEM CLIP

Description
This function is used to configure the calling number (CLIP) sent to correspondents on outgoing ISDN
calls. For example, it enables a company with several sites always to send the same number to external
called parties.

On an outgoing external call, the number transmitted is:

- the installation number completed by the DDI number of the caller (or the Operator Group num-
ber), if the "Alternative CLIP number" is not configured.
- the "Alternative CLIP number", if configured.
Calling line number(CLIP)
Calling line number
91255833111
Public Network (CLIP): 0800111000 Public Network

T0/T2 T0/T2

DDI number: 111 DDI number: 111

Installation number: 9125-5833 Installation number: 9125-5833
Alternative system CLIP : none
Alternative system CLIP : 0800111000

Without "Alternative CLIP number" With "Alternative CLIP number"

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

ALTERNATIVE CLIP AND COLP CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
NUMBERS

Configuration
T Configure the Alternative system number (22 digits maximum according to ISDN protocol):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Installation Numbers -> Alternative System
CLIP
- by MMC-Station: Global -> InsNum -> AltCLI

ALTERNATIVE CLIP/COLP NUMBERS

Description
This function enables CLIP/COLP numbers other than the users' DDI numbers (or Operator Group
number if a DDI number has not be specified for this set) to be sent.

Thus with a group of sets it is possible to configure CLIP/COLP numbers with the DDI number of the
group, and therefore to call the group rather than a specific set in the group.
CLIP/COLP number: CLIP/COLP number
Public network 9125583999 9125583111
Public network

T0/T2
T0/T2

DDI number: 111 DDI number: 111

Installation number: 9125583 Installation number: 9125583
Personalized CLIP/COLP number: 999 Personalized CLIP/COLP number: none

Without personalized CLIP/COLP number With personalized CLIP/COLP number

Configuration
T Configure the alternative CLIP/COLP number for each set (4 digits maximum) – MMC-PM5 (Expert
View) only:
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details ->Misc. ->Alterna-
tive CLIP/COLP number

Additional Information
- Simultaneous alternative system CLIP and alternative CLIP/COLP numbers: in this case, the alter-
native system CLIP is used whether or not there is an alternative CLIP/COLP number already defi-
ned.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES APA BOARDS: CALLING PARTY
IDENTIFIER

File
APA BOARDS: CALLING PARTY
22
IDENTIFIER
DESCRIPTION

The CLI (Calling Line Identification) function for APA (Analogue Public Access) boards allows the caller
number to be received through the analogue switched public network.

This function is based on the CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) additional service; the CLIP
information is transmitted via FSK (Frequency Shift Keying) asynchronous signals in on-hook mode
(bell).

The FSK signal can be detected in two different ways: centrally at the CPU level or locally via the APA
board (CLIDSP daughter board).
The central detection at the CPU board level is not available in the USA (local detection only via CLIDSP
daughter board on APA).

Public network
Caller (0711/8202 100)
switched
07118202100

Analog TL

Called

Example of FSK transmission in ringing phase:

1st ring 2nd ring

FSK data

1st long period

of silence

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

APA BOARDS: CALLING PARTY CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
IDENTIFIER

HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

Depending on the detection type, the system must be equipped with:

- local detection: the APA boards must be equipped with the CLIDSP daughter boards.

Nota : 5 APA boards per module, with or without CLIDSP daughter boards; one CLIDSP dau-
ghter board for 8 accesses.

- central detection: no special hardware. 6 incoming communications may be handled simulta-

neously.

CONFIGURATION

T Enable the service, line by line, through DHM-PM5 (Expert View) only:
External lines -> Details -> CLIP

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES BUSY GREETING ON VOICE MAILBOX

File
BUSY GREETING ON VOICE MAILBOX
23

DESCRIPTION

This feature makes it possible to immediately route an external incoming call to the called party's voice
mailbox if the line is busy (Busy degree 1 or degree 2). The caller hears a specific welcome message
and can, if he/she wishes, leave a message in the called party's voice mailbox.

Dynamic routing to the voice mailbox is immediate even when the dynamic routing timer is configured.

The service is activated if there is an incoming call to a busy set and:

- for all the sets if the "DynRoutBsy" flag = 1

- or if "DynRoutBsy" = 0, but only on the sets that have access to this function

CONFIGURATION

T To globally activate the service, or not:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels -> "DynRoutBsy"
- by MMC-Station:
Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "DynRoutBsy" -> Return -> Memory

0: service inactive
1: service active; all incoming calls to a busy user are immediately forwarded to the called party's
voice mailbox
T To activate the service or not, set by set – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details -> Dyn. Rout.

T Configuring the VMU grouping as Level 1 called party in the case of dynamic routing
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Dyn. Rout.
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> DynRou.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

BUSY GREETING ON VOICE MAILBOX CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Summary table

Service active (flag DynRoutBsy = 1) Service inactive (flag

DynRoutBsy = 0)
Called party busy Called party free
Routing to voice mail- IMMEDIATE NO NO
box
Level 1 dynamic routing Does not start T1 timer T1 timer
Level 2 dynamic routing Does not start T2 timer T2 timer

Call forwarding

Routing to a voice mailbox is not performed if the user called has programmed the forward function
on his/her set. The service becomes valid when the forward function is cancelled.

Forward on busy

If the user has programmed his/her voice mailbox as the destination of Call forwarding on busy, the
internal or external caller will also hear the message.

Default value

After a cold reset, the "DynRoutBsy" flag is set to 0 (service inactive) by default and set-by-set activation
is cancelled (active in France).

Attention :

The mechanism is also active if the destination of T1 dynamic routing is a set instead of the VMU. In
this case, the destination of dynamic routing will be rung immediately if the set called is busy.

There is no indication of service activation on the sets.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES BUSY TONE DETECTION

File
BUSY TONE DETECTION
24

DESCRIPTION

Offered starting with version R2.0 of the software, the tone detection mechanism allows analogue
network line connections to be released without back forwarding of releasing protocol (e.g. polarity
inversion). By default, the mechanism is active in all countries.

The tone detection is madeby the system's DSP (Digital Signal Processor); it may be enabled line by line
(APA or ATA interfaces).
This mechanism is used to allow analogue lines to be joined (external forwarding, external dynamic
routing, DISA transit, external transfer) without polarity inversion.

CONFIGURATION

T Enable, line by line, the tone detection mechanism through DHM-PM5 (Expert View) only:
External lines -> Analogue access -> Details -> Check "❏ Busy Tone Detection"

T Modify the automatic release's timeout value (or security timeout) of the lines in case of analogue
joining (without other release mechanism), through DHM-PM5 (Expert View) only:
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 5 -> Automatic Release for Analogue Tru-
nk-to-trunk joining

Values of the security timeout:

- from 1 to 127 hours.

- by default: 6 hours.
- 0 = no timeout.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The number of DSPs assigned to tone detection is limited to 6 per module; these resources are sha-
red among the various connected LR interfaces.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

BUSY TONE DETECTION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES MAKING/ANSWERING A CALL

File
MAKING/ANSWERING A CALL
25

DESCRIPTION

A call can be either:

- internal, or
- external.

MAKING A CALL
Only an internal call can have 3 types of destination:

- a station
- a station in a Hunting Group (operator or stations)
- all the stations in a Broadcast Group, in the case of a broadcast call

To make a call, the user can either choose to go off hook first (obligatory if the station does not have
a loudspeaker) or not.

Then, depending on the user's station, an internal or external call can be made either by:

- manual dialing:
- on the numeric keypad, or
- on the alphabetic keypad (Dial by name function:: concerns the programmed numbers in the
internal directory or the collective speed dial)
- pre-recorded dialing:
- direct call key
- repetition of last number/numbers retransmission list (function Bis) ; the last number transmit-
ted by the station is automatically memorized with its corresponding sub-address. This function
is provided for the stations without display screen regardless of the system's software version
and for the stations with display screen for software versions prior to R2.0. Starting with R2.0,
the stations with display screen may access a list of the last 10 numbers called (internal or ex-
ternal) and thus select in the list a number to be transmitted.
- transmission of the number stored in the temporary memory; the last number transmitted from
a station can be transferred from the "Redial" memory to a "temporary memory" Starting with
version R2.0, it is possible to save in this temporary memory any number incoming or outgoing
(see paragraph “Additional information” for more details)
- transmission of a personal speed dial number; it is possible to save numbers in this directory
(see paragraph “Additional information” for more details)
- call back a number in the directory of unanswered calls: this directory contains the unanswe-
red external calls, with or without User to User Signalling (see "ISDN Services") and the internal
calls with UUS (see "ISDN Services") automatically memorised by the system.
- for external calls only, transmission of a collective speed dial number (including emergency
numbers and collective speed dial numbers with speed dial rights = 0: see "Link Categories

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

MAKING/ANSWERING A CALL CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

file") created by MMC.

- for external calls only, transmission of an emergency number - one of 5 factory-preset num-
bers which cannot be modified by MMC. These numbers are different from those programmed
as collective speed dial numbers.

When making a call, the user can:

- protect the call (in particular data communications) against the camp-on tone and third party in-
trusion (see "Camp-on on busy station or group" and "Intercom intrusion on free"); these protections
are programmable for each station and for all the calls.
- opt not to disclose the caller's identity; this "Calling line identification restriction"can be activated
permanently by programming it into each station for all calls or it can be activated call by call,
using a programmed key.

Auto. call setup on going off hook: this service enables an authorised user to call a correspondent
pre-programmed by MMC, simply by going off-hook or pressing the Hands-free key, either immedia-
tely or after a timeout. The destination can be:

- an internal user (individual)

- a Hunting Group or Operator Group,
- an external user (by collective speed dial number)

Broadcast Call: this service enables an "emitting" user belonging to a Broadcast Group to send a spo-
ken message lasting no more than 20 seconds to the free stations in this group equipped with a louds-
peaker. The destination stations are unable to answer this message.

RECEIVING A CALL
An incoming call is signaled by ringing of the station. The ringing rate varies according to whether the
call is internal or external.

A monoline station (see "Resource keys") can only receive one call at a time. The user of this type of
station can only answer this call by going off hook.

A multiline station (see "Resource keys") can take several calls at once. The answer mode can be:

- manual: the user can select the call he wishes to answer and even ignore all incoming calls if he
wishes to make a call
- automatic: the system determines what type of call is at the station (see "Answering camped-on
calls")
- auto-answer or Intercom mode (on a set with the Hands-Free feature and for internal calls only):
the station "answers" the call with the highest priority after a specific ring tone, and goes into hands
free mode (see also "Headset Features").

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
25

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES MAKING/ANSWERING A CALL

CONFIGURATION

T To specify whether or not to authorize the "Automatic call setup on going off hook" feature for each
station:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations List
-> Details -> Misc. -> Hotline
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> AutoCa -> Active

T If the "Automatic call setup on going off hook" feature is authorized, define whether the call is im-
mediate or after a time-out and define the call destination for each station:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations List
-> Details -> Misc. -> Hotline
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> AutoCa -> Temp

T To modify the default time-out for the "delayed" automatic call setup on going off hook - MMC-
PM5 (Expert View) only:
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 3 -> "Timer for delayed off-hook Auto-
matic Call" (hotline)"

T To create the personal speed dial numbers for each station:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Pers. SPD.
- by MMC-Station: Subscriber -> Pers. SPD.
- by customization: Pers. SPD

T To create the collective speed dial numbers:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):Collective Speed Dial
- by MMC-Station: ComSpd

T To create the internal directory:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Directory
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Name

T For each station, all calls can be protected against intrusion and the camp-on tone:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Intrusion Protection" and "Warn tone Protection"

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

MAKING/ANSWERING A CALL CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

T For each station, the caller's identity can be restricted for all communications:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Identity Secrecy"

T To create the Broadcast Groups:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Broadcast groups
- by MMC-Station: Group -> Broadcast

T Broadcast on external loudspeaker:

This feature is not controlled by a software key. To realise this feature, the system must be fitted
with an AFU daughter board on the CPU/CPUe board (the hardware can be checked via PM5
menu -> Main CPU -> Details -> Daughter boards):

- In the Broadcast Groups menu, select one group and press Details.
- Press Add to add members into the group. If the system is equipped with an AFU daughter
board, we will find Loudspeaker subscriber in the list.

- Add Loudspeaker subscriber with attribute Receive or Send/Receive and all other subscri-
bers allowed to make/receive the broadcast message.

T The ringing time-out before going to hands free mode when intercom is activated can be modified
using MMC-PM5 Expert View (only):
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 3 -> "Timeout before connection in hand-
set mode"

T Define whether the Bis function (retransmission of the last number/list of retransmitted numbers)
relates to all the called numbers or only to the external numbers, via MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> ❏ External redial only

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.:: Programmed Key - defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
F.K. : Fixed Key
S.K.:: Soft Key
Prefix:Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
25

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES MAKING/ANSWERING A CALL

ACTIVATING THE SERVICES

Z Without dis- Without dis- 4011 With display, With soft

Type of station
play (≠ Z) play (≠ Z) no soft keys, keys
Type of service and without and with except 4011
Hands-Free Hands-Free
feature feature
Intercom mode -- -- P.K.: AutAns -- F.K.: Inter- F.K.: Auto-
com, or P.K.: answer
AutAns mode (inter-
com mode)

Communication protection Access F.K.: Data or P.K.: ProCom

Identification restriction -- P.K.: CLIR F.K.: ISDN +

S.K.: CLIR

Transfer to temporary memory -- P.K.: Temporary number S.K.: NbSave

Storage in an individual direc- -- F.K. i + selection ->Rep + index 0 to 9 + label S.K.: ->Rep
tory + S.K. asso-
ciated to num-
ber + label

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

MAKING/ANSWERING A CALL CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ANSWERING A CALL

Z Without dis- Without dis- 4011 With display, With soft

Type of station
play (≠ Z) play (≠ Z) no soft keys, keys
Type of service and without and with except 4011
Hands-Free Hands-Free
feature feature
In manual mode -- Press the resource key

In automatic mode Go off hook Go off hook Off hook or Go off hook Off hook or press F.K.: Hands-
press F.K.: free
Handsfree

In intercom mode -- Automatic -- Automatic connection

connection

MAKING A CALL

Z Without dis- DECT With display, no soft keys With soft

Type of station
play (≠ Z) keys
Type of service

Auto. call setup on going off Go off hook Go off-hook Go off hook Go off-hook or press F.K. Hands-free
hook or press F.K.
Hands-free

Dial by name -- -- F.K.: Dial by P.K.: Dirtry, then enter name, Enter the na-
name, then then F.K.: LS or Mute to con- me, then "Re-
enter name, firm turn"
then F.K.: Va-
lid

Bis (only one number) Access F.K. or P.K.: F.K.: Redial S.K.: Redial
Redial

Bis (list of numbers) -- -- F.K. or P.K. Bis + selection + F.K. Valid S.K.: Bis + se-
lection + S.K.
Redial

Temporary memory -- P.K.: Perso- F.K.: Personal speed dial + P.K.: TmpRep S.K.: NbSend
nal speed
dial + P.K.:
Temporary
number

Personal speed dial -- P.K.: Perso- F.K.: Personal speed dial + index 0 to 9 F.K.: Perso-
nal speed nal speed
dial + index 0 dial + S.K. as-
to 9 sociated with
number

Non answered calls repertory -- F.K.: Mail + F.K.: Mail or P.K.: TxtMsg + 2 F.K.: Mail +
2 + F.K.: Va- + F.K.: LS S.K.: Text +
lid S.K.: Read +
S.K.: Call

Collective speed dial numbers Access

(including emergency numbers)

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
25

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES MAKING/ANSWERING A CALL

Z Without dis- DECT With display, no soft keys With soft

Type of station
play (≠ Z) keys
Type of service

Emergency numbers not belon- Dial the emergency number

ging to the common speed dial
numbers

Broadcast call Broadcast P.K.: Direct call

Group num-
ber

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- To use the directory of unanswered calls in a parallel group of stations (see "Hunting Groups"), the
first station in the group, on creation by MMC, must be a station with a display.

- In "Answering a call: manual connection" mode, an automatic callback or a hold reminder have
priority: the user cannot answer another call.

- During group broadcasting, all the stations involved are considered to be busy.

- To stop broadcasting to his own station, a user can go off hook or press the "Release" key.

- A forwarded station receives the broadcast message.

- If all members of the called Broadcast Group are busy, the broadcast call will be unsuccessful.

- The first Z station is considered as a fax and is therefore protected by default against intrusion and
the camp-on tone.

- Specific to Brazil: The DDC Protection flag (accessible by Subscribers and Base stations List ->
Details -> Service category -> Part 2-> DDC Protection and by External Lines -> External Access
Table -> Details -> DDC Protection) makes it possible to reject all incoming calls which the caller
tries to charge to the called party (collect call).

- List of retransmitted numbers (R2.0): a retransmission list can include a maximum of 10 internal or
external numbers; this limit may be reduced depending on the keys' and directories' key pool use.

If a call arrives while the retransmission list is in use, the call is switched to standby.

- Temporary save of a number (R2.0): a number may be saved in the temporary memory under the
following conditions:

- when communication is in progress

- during a call phase.
- during review of the standby calls.
- during review of the unanswered calls directory (text mail).
- during use of the retransmitted numbers list.
A saved incoming external number in temporary memory cannot be directly retransmitted; the sei-
zure number of the trunk group used for the call must be dialled first.
Group call: as long as there is no answer, the group call is saved; after answering, the number of

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

MAKING/ANSWERING A CALL CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

the answering Station is saved.

If an incoming call arrives while saving a number (temporary memory or individual directory), this
call will be released (as during customisation).

- Saving a number in the individual directory (R2.0): a number may be saved in the individual direc-
tory under the following conditions:

- when communication is in progress

- during review of the unanswered calls directory (text mail).
- during use of the retransmitted numbers list.

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES PRIORITY CALLS

File
PRIORITY CALLS
26

DESCRIPTION

2 types of priority call can be made:

- a call from a bank alarm system

- a voice call (or a call through a preprogrammed key)

Call from a bank alarm system (automatic call)

The bank alarm device is connected to the PCX by means of an SLI-board Z interface.

The call is triggered by the Z subscriber going off-hook.

The external destination is called using a collective speed dial number. The call is subject to checks on
barring and traffic sharing link categories as well as collective speed dial rights (see "Link Categories").

The call takes priority over ordinary calls in progress. If all lines are busy, the system releases an ordi-
nary call in order to set up a priority call.

Call from a programmed key (manual call)

The call destination (collective speed dial number or external number) is associated with a program-
med key on a Reflexes or DECT terminal.

Priority levels are defined to ensure that an automatic or manual call cannot cut off a higher-level call.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

PRIORITY CALLS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

CONFIGURATION

T To declare the bank alarm system:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Misc. -> "Special Function = Bank Alarm"
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> SpeDev -> Choice -> Bank Alarm

T Define whether the call is a hotline call or normal:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Misc. -> "Hotline"
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> AutoCa -> Active

T Define the destination for the automatic call:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Misc. -> "Hotline" -> "Destination n°"
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> AutoCa -> Desti

T To activate or inhibit metering:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Metering

T Modify the bank alarm device's default speed dial rights, if necessary:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Collective Speed Dial

T Modify the default barring link categories, if necessary:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
- for the bank alarm device: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations
List -> Details -> Barring
- for the trunk groups: External Lines -> Trunk groups -> Details -> Link-Cat
- by MMC-Station:
- for the bank alarm device: Subscr -> BarTyp
- for the trunk groups: TrGp -> Catego

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
26

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES PRIORITY CALLS

T Modify the default traffic sharing link categories, if necessary:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
- for the users: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details
-> Barring
- for the trunk groups: External Lines -> Trunk groups -> Details -> Link-Cat.
- by MMC-Station:
- for the users: Subscr -> BarTyp (last 2 values)
- for the trunk groups: TrGp -> Catego (last 2 values)

T To create a priority call key:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Keys = Priority Call
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Keys

T Define the priority level (0 to 7 with 7 = highest priority):

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Misc.
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Prio

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

PRIORITY CALLS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

PRIORITY CALL MADE BY A USER

Is there a free
channel in the trunk NO The system looks for a B
Priority call group assigned to channel to release (*)
the alarm device

YES Search for busy B

NO
Can one of the B channel with lowest
channels be priority
released?

YES

The system releases the Busy channel B

communication (**) found with low
YES priority

NO
Is the release NO
request accepted
by the network?

YES

The system waits for the Call failure

The priority call is set up call to be released by the
network

The trunk group can also include analog lines (TL)

(*) only a basic call (i.e. not a call which is on hold or camped on, nor a call which is engaged in a three-party call, etc...).
(**) the released line cannot be assigned to a user who has left an automatic call-back request on a busy trunk group

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The bank alarm device cannot be connected to a Z interface behind a Reflexes station.
- Several priority calls can be set up simultaneously
- A priority call may fail if the public exchange is saturated, if the destination is busy or if it collides
with an incoming call during the "setup" phase.
- The event "R_PRIORITY_CALL" – specifying the number of the station on which the call was released
– is generated in the PCX history table whenever a call is released to make way for a priority call.
- The bank alarm device's directory number cannot be a private one.
- To avoid the system releasing a basic call on a B channel belonging to the trunk group assigned
to the bank alarm device, when a B channel is free in another trunk group, it is advisable to con-
figure all the accesses on a single trunk group.
- All calls made from an S0 terminal are considered as priority calls if a priority level >0 is defined

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CAMP-ON ON BUSY STATION OR
GROUP

File
CAMP-ON ON BUSY STATION OR
27
GROUP
DESCRIPTION

A user is automatically camped-on on the station he is calling when the following conditions are met:

- it is busy, in other words in conversation with a correspondent

- it has at least one resource free (see "Resource keys" file)
- it is not protected against camp-on
- the caller is authorized to camp-on

A user is automatically camped-on on a Hunting Group which he is calling when the following condi-
tions are met:

- it is in "setup" mode (see "Hunting Groups").

- all the stations in the group are busy, i.e. in conversation with a correspondent
- at least one of the stations in the group has a free resource (see "Resource keys" file)
- the stations in the group are not protected against camp-on
- the caller is authorized to camp-on

A caller camped-on can:

- release the call, possibly leaving a text message (see "Text mail/Call back request")
- leave an automatic callback request with the called party, if the station supports
- intrusion into the existing conversation, if the caller is authorized and if the station is not protected
against intrusion
- transfer his correspondent if on-hold (see "Conference")

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

CAMP-ON ON BUSY STATION OR CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
GROUP

CONFIGURATION

T To specify whether or not to protect a station against camp-on:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Camp-On Protection"

T To specify whether or not to protect a station against the camp-on tone:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Warntone Protection"

T To specify whether or not to authorize camp-on for a station:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Camp-On Allowed"

T To specify whether or not to protect a station against intrusion:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Intrusion Protection"

T To specify whether or not to authorize intrusion for a station:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Intrusion Allowed"

T To specify whether or not to authorize a station to leave an automatic call back request:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Callback"

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
27

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CAMP-ON ON BUSY STATION OR

GROUP

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
F.K.: Fixed Key
S.K.: Soft Key
Code: Code programmed in the "Features in Conversation" table

All stations including Without display (≠ Z) With display, no soft With soft keys
Type of station
Z keys
Type of service

Automatic call back request (*) Function code P.K.: Automatic call- P.K.: ❏Cback S.K.: ❏Cback
back request

Intrusion Function code P.K.: Intrusion P.K.: Intru S.K.: ❏Intru

(*) When the called party becomes free, the station which requested call back is rung. If it goes off
hook, the called party station rings in turn.

CANCELLATION
Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

All stations including Without display (≠ Z) With display, no soft With soft keys
Type of station
Z keys
Type of service

Automatic call back (**) Prefix P.K.: Cancel callback P.K.: ■Cback S.K.: ■Cback, before
or during callback

Intrusion Activation code P.K.: Intrusion P.K.: Intru S.K.: ■Intru

(**) The automatic call back request is also cancelled if:

- the person requesting call back does not go off hook within 15 seconds or presses the "Release"
key during these 15 seconds
- the called station does not release within 30 minutes.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

CAMP-ON ON BUSY STATION OR CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
GROUP

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- When camp-on is allowed and the called party is not protected against the camp-on tone, the cam-
ped caller hears the camp-on tone and the called party hears a single beep every 20 seconds.
- If the automatic call back request is accepted, the user hears the dial tone if he is off hook and
switches to the idle status in hands-free mode.
- An authorized station can only request a single automatic call back at a time.
- A station can only receive a single automatic call back request at a time.
- A call back request does not follow a call forwarding.
- The identity of the intruding station is displayed on the stations which are already in conversation.
- Intrusion is refused (the user then remains camped-on) if:
- the called party is in a conference call
- the called party is intruding on another conversation
- at least one of the stations is protected against intrusion
- An operator station always has the authority to camp on and to intrude.
- When the user intrudes while having a correspondent on hold, he returns to this correspondent by
canceling the intrusion then going on hook and returning to the call on hold.
- The first Z station is considered as a fax and is therefore protected by default against intrusion and
the camp-on tone.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES ANSWERING CAMPED-ON CALLS

File
ANSWERING CAMPED-ON CALLS
28

DESCRIPTION

When one or more callers (if the station has the necessary resources) are camped on a subscriber (see
"Camp-on on busy station or group"), the subscriber can either:

- consult the identity of the camped callers, if the station has soft keys
- answer (consult) one or more camped-on calls, without releasing the current communication, or
- answer a camped-on call by releasing its current communication. In this case, the system determi-
nes which camped-on call is presented to the station according to the priority of the calls camped-
on.

The level of priority depends on three criteria:

- the type of caller: internal, external or OS (for example, if a station has a caller camped on but has
no resources left, an OS call "breaks" the first camp-on and is itself camped on)
- the type of called party: Operator Group, Hunting Group or station
- the type of call: simple call, recall (for example after transfer failure, see "Conference") or hold re-
minder

The system allocates the following descending order of priority:

- external hold recall, delayed or otherwise

- internal hold recall, delayed or otherwise
- external callback
- external call
- internal callback
- call from an operator station
- internal call
- Operator Group call
- Hunting Group call

CONFIGURATION

T To specify whether or not to protect a station against camp-on:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Camp-On Protection"

T To specify whether or not to protect a station against the camp-on tone:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -
> Details -> Features -> "Warntone Protection"

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

ANSWERING CAMPED-ON CALLS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

T To specify whether or not to authorize camp-on for a station:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Camp-On Allowed"

ACTIVATION/USE
S.K.: Soft Key
Code: Code programmed in the "Features in Conversation" table

All stations including Without display (≠ Z) With display, no soft With soft keys
Type of station
Z keys
Type of service

Consultation of camped-on cal- -- S.K.: Queue

ler identities

Answer after consultation of -- S.K.: Answer(**)

identity (*)

Answer a camped-on call (*) Function code Resource key

(*) "Manual" answering of a camped-on caller entails exclusive hold (see "Three-party calls" file) of the current communication.
(**) When the identity of the caller to be consulted is displayed.

CANCELLATION

All stations including Without display (≠ Z) With display, no soft With soft keys
Type of station
Z keys
Type of service

Return to initial correspondent Enquiry or shuttle call Resource key of correspondent on hold
after consulting a camped-on cancellation code(*)
caller

(*) In the first case, the caller is released and in the second, placed on exclusive hold.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- A station which has activated paging or which is in a conference call (see "Conference") or intrusion
(see "Camp-on on busy station or group"), cannot answer a camped-on call.
- When consulting the identity of the camped-on callers, a station with soft keys can also consult the
User to User Signaling (UUS) of the caller (see "ISDN Services").

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES THREE PARTY CALLS

File
THREE PARTY CALLS
29

The operating mode, Europe or US, cannot be configured with MMC (station or PM5). This
mode is globally specified for the system when configured in the factory.

DESCRIPTION

3-party calls are:

- call enquiry, prior to the following:

- shuttle
- conference
- transfer

Enquiry/Hold

A station involved in an internal or external conversation can make a new internal or external call using
either:
- one of the means described in "Making/Answering a call"
- or by answering a camped-on call (see "Camp-on on busy station or group")
- or by picking up a call intended for another station (see "Call Pick-Up" and "Call Parking/Parked
Call Retrieval")

The current correspondent is automatically placed on hold by the system. This type of hold is said to
be "exclusive" because only the user which activated it can retrieve the correspondent.

A user can place a correspondent on exclusive hold when:

- he is in conversation with the correspondent
- he has called the correspondent and hears the ringing tone
- he has called the correspondent and hears the camped-on tone

"Manual" call holding is also possible. In this case, it is said to be "common" because all the users su-
pervising the resource on hold can retrieve the correspondent (RSP resource only).

A user can only place a correspondent with whom he is in conversation on common hold.

Hold recall: When a user goes on hook with a correspondent on hold, the system recalls the user.
This can be either immediate (overlooked hold) or time-delayed. When the hold recall is time-delayed,
the user can make an outgoing call or answer an incoming call: the hold recall will take place at the
end of the timeout or at the end of the new communication.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

THREE PARTY CALLS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Shuttle

This service enables the user to speak alternately with his correspondent on line and a correspondent
on hold.

Conference

This service enables an authorized user in an enquiry call to set up a call with two correspondents si-
multaneously.

Handover

This service enables a call to be setup between the correspondent on hold and the correspondent on
line. This latter was not necessarily in conversation with the user¡ Transfer can take place either:

- after conversation with the second correspondent

- when the user hears the ringing tone (the second correspondent has not answered)
- when the user is camped-on on the second correspondent's station
- when the user has activated paging for this second correspondent (who has not answered)
- during the routing phase of the second call, after dialing an external number

CONFIGURATION

T Choose between immediate or delayed hold recall:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. La-
bels -> "TimedHldEn"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "TimedHldEn" -> Return -> Me-
mory

T To modify the implicit value of the delayed hold recall time-out:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 3 -> Du-
ration of Hold Recall Ringing
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Timeout -> " OnHoldTim" -> Return -> Me-
mory

T For the system, specify whether or not the conference is authorized in the system and if it is, the type
of conference authorized:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 2-> Con-
ference (prohibited, internal only or Ext & Int)
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Confer

T To specify whether or not each station is authorized to take conference calls (by default , all stations
have this facility):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Features -> Conference

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
29

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES THREE PARTY CALLS

T For the system as a whole, to authorize or inhibit the transfer of incoming or outgoing trunk lines
to an outgoing network line (be careful with subscriber rights and trunk group link categories):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> "Transfer Ext/
Ext"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Joing. -> Transf

T To authorize transfer of an incoming or outgoing network line to an outgoing network line, for each
station:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> Part2 -> "Join incoming and Outgoing" and "Join Outgoing
and Outgoing"

T To define the type of system reaction in the event of transfer failure (operator or initiator recall, also
called "transfer master"):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> "Go to initiator
if transfer fails"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> MasRec -> Choice

T Modify the implicit value of the rerouting time-out at general level in the event of transfer failure:
- by MMC-PM5: System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Timer Labels -> "Trans-
feTim"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Timeout -> " TransfeTim" -> Return -> Me-
mory

T Authorize connection of two external lines by transfer (connection matrix):

Traffic Sharing and Barring -> Joining

T To specify whether or not to authorize transfer by going on-hook with a multiline station:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Transfer by on
hook

T To specify whether or not to authorize Ext/Ext transfer (intersite transfers) by going on-hook with a
Z station:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Transfer Ext/ext
by on hook

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

THREE PARTY CALLS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ACTIVATION/USE

Nota : The Reflexes stations with US profile (see also “Resources keys”) feature fixed keys (pre-pro-
grammed) Man. hold, Transfer and Conference; the stations with dynamic keys provide
dynamically the same keys depending on the context.
P.K.:: Programmed Key - defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
F.K. : Fixed Key
S.K.:: Soft Key
Code: Code programmed in the "Features in Conversation" table

Type of station Z Mono-line (≠ Z) Without display With display, no With soft keys
and multiline soft keys
Type of service

Call enquiry (Europe) F.K.: R + call Call

Call enquiry (US) F.K. Flash + call F.K. Man. hold + call

Exclusive hold (Europe) Automatic on enquiry, shuttle or reply to a camped-on call

Common hold (Europe) -- -- P.K.: Hold S.K.: Hold

Common hold (US) F.K. Flash F.K. Man. hold

Shuttle (Europe) Function code Resource key

Conference (Europe) Function code P.K.: Conferen- F.K. or P.K.: Conference S.K.: ❏Conf
ce

Conference (US) F.K. Flash + 2nd F.K. Conference F.K. Conference + 2nd party call or resource key + F.K.
party call + F.K. + 2nd party call Transfer
Flash + function + F.K. Conferen-
code ce

Transfer (Europe) On hook F.K.: Handover S.K.: Transf

Transfer (US) On hook F.K. Transfer + F.K. Transfer + Recipient resource key + F.K. Transfer
2nd party call +
F.K. Transfer

cancellation
P.K.:: Programmed Key - defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
F.K. : Fixed Key
S.K.:: Soft Key
Code: Code programmed in the "Features in Conversation" table

Z Monoline Without display With display, no With soft keys

Type of station
and multiline soft keys
Type of service

Call enquiry, Shuttle (Europe) F.K.: R + Code Code Cancel en- F.K.: End + resource key of initiator
Cancel enquiry quiry

Common Hold Retrieval or Voi- -- -- Resource key

ce Transfer (Europe)

Retrieving common hold (US) F.K. Flash F.K. Man. hold Resource key

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
29

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES THREE PARTY CALLS

Conference, with return to con- Function code P.K.: Conferen- F.K. or P.K.: Conference S.K.: ■Conf
versation preceding the confer- ce
ence (Europe and US)

Conference, with release of -- On hook

both correspondents (Europe
and US)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

THREE PARTY CALLS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- A correspondent on hold hears the please-wait music if external and the hold tone if internal.
- It is impossible to place on hold:
- a network call in the routing phase
- a broadcast call
- an intrusion
- a paging call
- At hold recall, the user's station rings and if he does not answer before the expiry of the hold recall
time-out:
- the call is returned to the general level if external
- the call is released if internal
- A shuttle call is refused when the user has intruded into a conversation, or is involved in a confer-
ence or paging call
- A user cannot put another correspondent on exclusive hold when he hears the ringing or camp-on
tone, only to return to the first correspondent on hold
- If one of the stations involved in a conference goes on hook and is not the initiator of this confer-
ence, the remaining two correspondents stay in communication
- The system allows 3 simultaneous conferences
- The services attributed to the stations must be of the "telephone" type, otherwise holding may be
refused.
- US special feature: the first time the Transfer or Conference key is pressed this is followed by an
ackonowledge tone then the dial tone (slutter dial tone); the 2nd time the Transfer key is pressed,
this is followed by an accept or reject tone (depending on the case); the second time the Confer-
ence key is pressed this is followed by a unique bip (1400 Hz - 1.5 seconds).

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES INTERCOM INTRUSION

File
INTERCOM INTRUSION
30

DESCRIPTION

When an internal user calls another internal user who does not answer, he can force the destination
station to switch to hands free mode, if it supports this function.

The intercom call ringing tune rings the destination station for a programmed length of time and the
latter switches automatically to hands free mode.

Notas :

For the activation of the "Intercom" function, see "Making/Answering a Call".

CONFIGURATION

T To specify whether or not to protect a station against intercom intrusion on free:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Intrusion Protection"

T To specify whether or not to authorize a station to activate intercom intrusion:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Intrusion Allowed"

T To modify the duration for the intercom call ringer:

- by MMC-PM5 System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Timer Labels -> "Auto-
AnsTim"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Timer -> "AutoAnsTim" -> Return -> Memory

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

INTERCOM INTRUSION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
S.K.: Soft Key

Type of station Z Without display and With display, no soft With soft keys
multiline keys

Activation of intercom intrusion -- P.K.: Intercom intru- P.K.: Forced S.K.: ❏Intru
on free when the user hears the sion on free
ringing tone

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The "Intercom Intrusion on Free" or "Forced" programmed key can be replaced by a macro pro-
grammed key "Macro1 = direct call of an internal number + intercom intrusion on free on the cal-
led station".
- The right to intercom intrusion is the same as that for intrusion (see "Camp-on on busy station or
group").

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES FORWARDING

File
FORWARDING
31

DESCRIPTION

Forwarding enables personal (individual) or group calls to be re-routed immediately. The type of calls,
internal and/or external, affected by the active forwardings can be selected by configuration.

- Follow-me: forwarding is activated from the destination station.

- Do Not Disturb : the user refuses all calls: internal calls are released and external calls are trans-
ferred to the operator station.
- Immediate group call forwarding : calls sent to all groups linked to the user are transferred to
another programmed destination number (in advance ot on activation of the service).
- Immediate call forwarding: individual calls are routed to another destination (whether set, group
or VMU) programmed in advance or on activation of the service).
- Forward to text answering : internal calls are released after display of a text message and ex-
ternal calls are routed to the operator station.
- selective forwarding : depending on the callers' identification (call number), the calls may or may
not be routed to a pre-programmed destination.
- Forward to pager: calls are routed to the called party's pager.
- Forward on busy : when the station is busy, calls are routed to another destination (programmed
in advance or on activation of the service).
- Withdraw from group: the user refuses calls intended for one or more Hunting Groups or Ope-
rator Groups to which he belongs.
Type of forwarding Incoming call type Initial desti- Personal or Final destination Feature rights
nation group
forwarding
follow me Internal/external Set personal internal station -

Do Not Disturb Internal Set personal - -

External Operator station

Immediate Internal Set personal int. or ext. station or -
group

GrpPic Group internal station

External Set personal Int. or ext. station (*) (*) Yes for external forwar-
station or group ding

GrpPic Group internal station

Text answering Internal Set personal - -

External Operator station

Selective Internal Set personal Int. or ext. station (*) (*) Yes
External

Paging Internal/external Set personal Paging "Bleep" -

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

FORWARDING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Type of forwarding Incoming call type Initial desti- Personal or Final destination Feature rights
nation group
forwarding

Forwarding on busy Internal/external Set personal Internal or external sta- Yes

tion or group

Withdraw from group Internal/external GrpPic Group - -

(*) External forwarding requires a particular configuration detailed in the "External Forwarding" file.

CONFIGURATION

T For each station, select the type of calls (local, external or both) to be forwarded:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Fwd. Rout -> "Diversion Apply"
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> DynRou -> Ext or Local

T For each station, program the caller lists for selective forwarding (CLIP diversion),and the internal
or external destination for each list. Lists can be unused, active (until deactivated by the station),
inactive (until validated by the station ), validated (programmed but not usable), negative or othe-
rwise (a negative list is one where forwarding is activated by subscribers other than those on the
caller list):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Fwd. Sel

T To specify whether or not to authorize forwarding of the last member of a group - MMC-PM5 (Ex-
pert View) only:
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design ->"Disconnect Last Group Member Allowed"

T For each station, external forwarding can be authorised by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "External forwarding"

T Specify the number of forwarding cascades (5 max., 5 by default) by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 5 -> "Maxi-
mum Number of Call Forwarding Cascading Levels"

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
31

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES FORWARDING

T Specify whether or not to authorise a new cascade in case of external forwarding by MMC-PM5
(Expert View) only:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 1 -> "Cas-
caded External Diversion"

In case of prohibition and if an external forwarding is detected:

- If it is the first forwarding, it is processed.

- otherwise, forwarding is refused and the current user is warned by a ring (i.e. the user who acti-
vated the external forwarding).

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.:: Programmed Key
F.K.:: Fixed Key
S.K.:: Soft Key
Prefix:Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Type of forwarding All stations including Z Without display (≠ Z) With display, no With soft keys
soft keys

Follow-me Prefix + station no. to be P.K.: Follow Me+ no. of P.K.: Follo+ n° of S.K.: Forward +
forwarded station to be forwarded station to be Follo-> + no. of
forwarded station to be
forwarded

Do Not Disturb Prefix P.K.: Do Not Disturb P.K.: DND S.K.: Divert +
DND
Immediate forwarding of per- Prefix + Destination no. F.K.: Divert or (pre-)pro- F.K.: Forward or S.K.: Forward +
sonal calls grammed (Master) indiv. (pre-)programmed Immed-> + Desti-
immediate forwarding M ImmD-> or Im- nation n°
+ Destination no. med-> (indiv.) +
Destination no.

Forward to text answering -- -- P.K.: Text-> S.K.: Forward +

Text->

Forward to pager Prefix P.K.: Paging P.K.: Page-> S.K.: Forward +

Page->

Forward on busy Prefix + Destination no. P.K.: Forward on busy P.K.: M busy-> or S.K.: Forward +
(master) + Destination Busy-> + Destina- Busy-> + Destina-
no. tion n° tion n°

Immediate forwarding of group Prefix + Destination no. P.K.: (Master) Immedia- P.K.: M Grp-> or Immed-> (group) +
callst te call forwarding Destination n°
(group) + Destination no.

Withdraw from group Prefix + no. of group to P.K.: Withdraw from P.K.: GrpWd + number of the group to
quit group + number of the quit
group to quit

Selective forwarding Prefix P.K.: Selective forwar- P.K.: SelFwd

ding

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

FORWARDING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

cancellation
P.K.:: Programmed Key
F.K.:: Fixed Key
S.K.:: Soft Key
Prefix:Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Type of forwarding All stations inclu- Without display (≠ With display, no soft With soft keys
ding Z Z) keys

All, except "withdraw from Prefix Cancel all P.K.: Cancel all P.K.: All S.K.: Forward + Cancl-
group" forwardings forwardings > + type of forwarding

Follow-me (from the destina- Prefix Cancel fol- Prefix Cancel fol- Prefix Cancel follow-me S.K.: Forward + Cancl-
tion station) low-me + no. of low-me + no. of + no. of forwarded station > + Follo-> + no. of
forwarded station forwarded station station to be forwarded

Rejoin the group Prefix + no. of P.K.: Withdraw P.K.: GrpWd + number of group withdrawn from
group to rejoin from group +
number of group
withdrawn from

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- Only one active individual forwarding is authorised per station: (activation of an individual forwar-
ding cancels and replaces the previous one).
- A station can simultaneously activate several forwardings: station forwarding + immediate group
forwarding + selective forwarding + as many group withdraws as is desired.
- Authorization to forward the last station of a group can be programmed (see "Configuration").
- The "follow-me" service can be cancelled from the destination station or the forwarded station.
- The "Withdraw from group" service is not available on S0 stations.
- A "Master forwarding" or "Selective forwarding" key (M. Immd', M. Busy', M. Grp') makes it possible
to activate or cancel the corresponding forwarding. Furthermore, the icon or LED associated with
this key, indicates when a forwarding is activated. All the preprogrammed or fixed keys are such
keys.
- The same station may have a "personal call forwarding" Master key and a "Group call forwarding"
Master key.
- A "text answering" forwarding can only be activated on a station with a display.
- The "local" type of calls to be forwarded includes internal calls as well as those coming from the
private network.
- Forward to text answering: when a network call from a station without UUS capability (a Z station
for example) arrives at a station that has activated forwarding to text answering, the call is forwar-
ded to the Operator station, which also receives the text message from the called station.

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
31

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES FORWARDING

- Prefixes for the forwarding functions in the numbering plans. The basic value may differ according
to the local version of the software; the following values apply in France:
- Forwarding: base 0 = cancel forwarding
- Forwarding: base 1 = immediate forwarding
- Forwarding: base 2 = forwarding on busy
- Forwarding: base 3 = do not disturb
- Forwarding: base 4 = forward to pager
- Forwarding: base 5 = group call forwarding
- Forwarding: base 6 = disconnect from group
- Forwarding: base 7 = rejoin group
- Forwarding: base 8 = follow me
- Forwarding: base 9 = cancel follow-me
- Forwarding: base 10 = selective forwarding
- Cascade forwarding (available from version R2.0): a call may be subject to a maximum of 5 indi-
vidual forwardings (5 by default, configurable by PM5):
- In case of external forwarding (of a local call, of an incoming call by joining or by re-routing),
the cascade may use public or private, analogue or digital lines.
- The cascade stops as soon as the authorised number is reached (thus avoiding loops).
- The cascade stops when it comes to a user in forwarding:
- Do Not Disturb.
- Text answering.
- Follow me.
- On the person search device.
- Screening: if the last forwarding authorised by the cascade number configuration concerns a
user in the process of screening, this additional forwarding is accepted.
- Group call forwarding: if the recipient of group call forwarding is himself forwarded, this
forwarding will not be processed.
- Forwarding on busy: the forwarding is processed even if the user is grade 2 busy (2 established
communications).
- Forwarding on the person search device: this forwarding is processed even if it means excee-
ding the authorised number of cascades.
- US special features: a “Do not disturb” forwarding is managed as an immediate forwarding on the
voice server.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

FORWARDING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES MANAGER/SECRETARY SCREENING

File
MANAGER/SECRETARY SCREENING
32

DESCRIPTION

The system can be used to create relations between manager-secretary stations so that the "secretary"
station can screen calls intended for the "manager" station, in other words, answer calls intended for
the manager station and then put the correspondents through if necessary.

In a manager-secretary relation, the "secretary station" can be a Hunting Group (see "Hunting
Groups").

All the stations in a manager-secretary relation must be multiline.

CONFIGURATION

T To create the manager-secretary relations:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Manager-secretary Relations
- by MMC-Station: TerPro -> MgrSec

T For each station, authorize the type of calls (local, external, or both) to be screened:
- by MMC-PM5: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details -
> Dyn. Rout. -> "Diversion Apply"
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> DynRou.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

MANAGER/SECRETARY SCREENING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined using MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station

Type of station Monoline Multiline without soft keys With soft keys
Service

By the manager or secretary -- P.K.: Screening P.K.: Filter

station

cancellation

Type of station Monoline Multiline without soft keys With soft keys
Service

By the manager or secretary -- P.K.: Screening S.K.: Filter

station

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- In order to differentiate between screened calls and direct calls to the secretary station:
- create a second directory number for the secretary
- program the screening with this second directory number
- create, on the secretary station, an RSD resource key programmed with this second number in
order to receive the screened calls there
- A secretary station can belong to several manager-secretary relations: the secretary station then
has a filter key (also on the corresponding manager's station) and an RSL key for each manager
station.
- A manager station can belong to several manager-secretary relations: the manager station then
has, for each secretary station, a filter key (also on each secretary station) and an RSL key.
- When the secretary station in a manager-secretary relation is a Hunting Group, the manager sta-
tion has a single filter key but as many RSL keys as there are members in the group.
- Any activation of individual forwarding on the secretary station or the manager station cancels and
replaces the previously active screening.
- Any request for activation of screening is rejected on a secretary station which has already activated
individual call forwarding.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES FORWARDING TO VOICE MAIL UNIT

File
FORWARDING TO VOICE MAIL UNIT
33

DESCRIPTION

Users can activate unconditional call forwarding or forwarding on busy for their own calls (see "Forwar-
ding"), diverting them to the integrated Voice Mail Unit.

If the voice mail unit is configured as an answering device, the callers can leave a spoken message.

CONFIGURATION

T Select the type of calls (local, external, or both) to be forwarded:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Dyn. Rout. -> "Diversion Apply"
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> DynRou -> "Div"

T For each station, program the forwarding keys:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Keys
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Keys

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key
F.K.: Fixed Key
S.K.: Soft Key
Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan
Type of station Z Without display With display, no With soft keys
S.K.s
Service

Immediate forwar- Prefix Immediate F.K.: Divert or (pre-)pro- F.K.: Divert or (pre- S.K.: Divert + Immed➨
ding of personal call forwarding of grammed (Master) indiv. )programmed M Im- + P.K.: Voice mail unit
calls to voice mail personal calls + immediate forwarding mD➨ or Immed➨
unit (VMU) function code Voice + P.K.: Voice mail unit (indiv.) + P.K.: Voice
Mail mail unit

Forwarding on busy Prefix Forward on P.K.: Forward on busy P.K.: Mbusy➨ or Bu- S.K.: Divert + Busy➨ +
to voice mail unit busy + function (master) + P.K.: Voice
sy➨ + P.K.: Voice P.K.: Voice mail unit
(VMU) code Voice Mail mail unit
mail unit

Message present Specific voice prompt + Specific dailtone + LED Flashing of 3-colour LED and icon corresponding to
on Reflexes without display F.K.: Mail

Access voice mail Prefix access voice P.K.: Access voice mail F.K.: Message + 1 F.K.: Mail + S.K.: Voice
mail

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

FORWARDING TO VOICE MAIL UNIT CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

CANCELLATION
P.K.: Programmed Key
F.K.: Fixed Key
S.K.: Soft Key
Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Type of station All stations inclu- Without display (≠ With display, no soft With soft keys
ding Z Z) keys
Type of forwarding

"Immediate" or "On busy" Prefix Cancel all P.K.: Cancel all P.K.: All S.K.: Divert + Cancl➨
forwardings forwardings

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

For more details on the Alcatel OmniPCX Office integrated Voice Mail Unit, see "Integrated Voice Mail
Unit".

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES REMOTE FORWARDING

File
REMOTE FORWARDING
34

DESCRIPTION

The remote forwarding service enables an employee who is outside of the business premises, or at
home to modify or cancel, from a DTMF dialing set, the unconditional internal or external forwarding
active on his station, as if he were at work.

Call to A or feature Station D

code to change the
state of A T2/T0/TL ATL/QSIG

T2/T0/TL

Station A forwarded
to B, C or D

Station B Station C

CONFIGURATION

T For each set, to authorize or deny use of the "Remote Substitution" feature:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Remote Substitution"

T To validate the service in the public numbering plan (operates without base or NMT):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Public Numbering Plan -> Remote Substitution
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> PubNum -> Disa

T To define the service access code – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

External Lines -> Remote substitution -> Access control code

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

REMOTE FORWARDING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

T To define the voice guidance message (none, message 1 to 8) – MMC-PM5 (expert View) only:
External Lines -> Remote Substitution -> Voice Guidance Message

T To define the system reaction if no DTMF receiver is available (Call Waiting or Release) – MMC-
PM5 (Expert View) only:
External Lines -> Remote Substitution -> Wait for DTMF Receiver

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
34

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES REMOTE FORWARDING

ACTIVATION/USE

Users can modify their station state remotely by:

- calling their station (necessarily in external forwarding mode). The user can then either modify the
immediate forwarding destination number or cancel forwarding, or
- dialing the feature code for "remote substitution". The user can then activate immediate forwar-
ding, modify the immediate forwarding destination number or cancel forwarding.

Does dialing YES

Analysis of the correspond to "remote
incoming dialing User gets ringing tone
substitution" code in
public NP?

NO
Has an
MF receiver been NO
Call the station using a assigned, after expiry The call fails
DDI number or a of time-out?
"personalized" line

YES

Voice guide or dial tone

NO Called station sent to the user
being forwarded to an external
number, authorization to use the
feature has been given?

The user dials :

YES - the access code
- the extension number
- the personal code (*)
User gets ringing tone

Has an NO
NO MF receiver been Is the dialing
correct? The call fails
assigned, after expiry
of time-out?
The call fails
YES YES

Voice guide for User gets dial tone

external forwarding The user dials:
- either the prefix for immediate
forwarding followed by the
destination no (**)
- or the prefix for forwarding
cancellation
NO YES
The station is User dials
called DTMF codes?

* For security reasons, this code must be different from the

default code User gets acknowledge tone and
** If the destination number is external, the acknowledge tone the call is released
is sent either upon reception of the end-of-dialing character
(#, by default) or upon expiry of the interdigit time-out

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

REMOTE FORWARDING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The "Remote Forwarding" feature uses elements of the "Remote Substitution" and "External Forwar-
ding" features; see both corresponding files.
- A single DTMF receiver is available at any given time.
- This service can be used to cancel the "Do Not Disturb (DND)" function.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES EXTERNAL FORWARDING

File
EXTERNAL FORWARDING
35

DESCRIPTION

When external forwarding is activated on a station, its internal and external personal incoming calls
are routed to a network destination, programmed in advance or at activation of the service.

For external incoming calls, the system can manage 2 types of external diversion:

- by joining: the incoming analog line (or B channel) is switched to the outgoing line (or B channel)
by the PCX, the latter handles the barring and traffic sharing link categories of the destination sta-
tion and the lines to be joined (see "Link Categories") and subsequently the connectivity matrix. Both
resources are busy during the entire duration of the call. This type of forwarding does not need a
subscription..
- by re-routing, for ISDN DDI calls only, and on subscription from the network operator: the system
informs the network that the station called is forwarded and specifies the destination. The network
then manages the forwarding (no busy lines). The system takes account of the barring and traffic
sharing link categories of the destination station and the trunk group programmed into the desti-
nation number.

For internal incoming calls, the system performs forwarding by joining.

CONFIGURATION

T For each station, program the forwarding keys:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Keys
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Keys

T For each station, external forwarding can be authorized:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details - Features -> "External Diversion"

T Define the type of mechanism used for forwarding an external incoming call to a network number,
re-routing or joining:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 2 -> "Exter-
nal Diversion Mode"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Joing -> Divert

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

EXTERNAL FORWARDING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

T When the selected mechanism for forwarding external incoming calls to a network number is "joi-
ning", fill out the connectivity matrix by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
Traffic Sharing and Barring -> Joining

T Define the type of identity retransmitted to the forwarding destination:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design ->"CLI for external
diversion" or "CLI is diverted party"

T To specify whether or not the caller hears a pre-announcement message before being forwarded
– MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
Subscribers Misc. -> Pre-announcement -> Voice Guidance for Diversion to External

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key
F.K.: Fixed Key
S.K.: Soft Key
Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

All stations including Z Without display (≠ Z) With display, no With soft keys
Type of station soft keys
Service

Immediate external forwarding Code + Destination n° (*) F.K.: Divert or (pre-)pro- F.K.: Divert or (pre- S.K.: Divert + Im-
grammed (master) indiv. )programmed M med➨ + Destina-
immediate forwarding ImmD➨ or Im- tion n° (*)
+ Destination n° (*) med' (indiv.) +
Destination n° (*)

(*) If not a collective speed dial number, the external n° must contain a trunk group number or an RSP
or RSB key

CANCELLATION

All stations inclu- Without display (≠ With display, no soft With soft keys
Type of station ding Z Z) keys
Service

Immediate external forwarding Prefix Cancel all P.K.: Cancel all P.K.: All S.K.: Divert + Cancl➨
forwardings forwardings

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
35

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES EXTERNAL FORWARDING

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- Any activation of an individual forwarding supersedes the previous one.

- If the station which activates the forwarding has a display, it will show the forwarding and the Des-
tination n°.
- The icon or LED associated with the "Forwarding selection" or "Master Forwarding" programmed
key indicates activation of forwarding with this key.
- The "Master Forwarding" or "Forwarding Selection" programmed key for individual calls can also
be used to cancel an external forwarding.
- When the link categories do not allow external forwarding:
- an external caller is re-routed to the O.S.
- an internal caller is released
- Two analog lines can only be joined if they are configured with Polarity Reversal and if the public
exchange sends the corresponding IP.
- When a digital line (ISDN or SIG) is forwarded, it is possible to select which identity is retransmitted
by the system to the forwarding destination, either that of the initial caller or that of the forwarded
station.
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features

✓ CLI for external diversion = Identity of caller

❏ CLI is diverted party

❏ CLI for external diversion = Identity of forwarded station

✓ CLI is diverted party

- The caller can hear a pre-announcement message before being forwarded (see "Configuration").
- A private station can neither activate an external forwarding nor be forwarded externally.
- Neither the possible UUS nor the sub-address (see "ISDN Services") are retransmitted to the forwar-
ding destination.
- External forwarding can not be activated with an account code.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

EXTERNAL FORWARDING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES RENVOI PCX *

File
RENVOI PCX *
36

* Depending on country; not available in France.

DESCRIPTION

All the external calls from the digital network (T0 or T2 accesses) intended for the stations in the instal-
lation can be re-routed to a destination on the network.

First of all, the system manager will have subscribed to "Call Forwarding Unconditional" (CFU) with the
network operator.

There are two subscription formulae:

- for fixed forwarding, i.e. the forwarding destination is programmed into the public exchange and
is always the same.
- for a variable forwarding, i.e. the forwarding destination is specified at activation of the service
and can thus be different at each activation.

Nota : PCX forwarding by CFU is only possible with a point-to-point link (ETSI).

Access to the service is controlled by a password, either:

- in the public exchange: the password given by the network operator is retransmitted to the public
exchange on activation of forwarding.
- in the system: the password is that of the system operator and is not retransmitted to the public
exchange.

To configure the service in the system (so that it correctly transmits the PCX forwarding activation re-
quest) the configuration in the public exchange must take account of the installation's digital links. This
can be of 3 types:

- configuration of type 0: all the digital links connecting the installation to the public exchange are
configured into a single "group" (equivalent to a trunk group) in the public exchange.
- configuration of type 1: the installation is connected to the public exchange by "groups" of links
and isolated digital links.
- configuration of type 2: the installation is connected to the public exchange by several "groups" of
digital links.

Depending on the type of configuration in the public exchange, it waits for one or more PCX forwar-
ding activation requests:

- in a type 0 configuration, a single activation request for the entire group of links
- in a type 1 configuration, an activation request for each link connecting the installation to the ex-
change
- in a type 2 configuration, an activation request for each group of links

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

RENVOI PCX * CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

The activation request is made via a trunk group containing one of the installation's digital links, defi-
ned either:

- on programming the "PCX forwarding" key and, failing which, at the time of service activation, in
a type 0 configuration
- only if the diversion is variable, at programming of the "PCX forwarding" key and, failing which,
at the time of service activation, in a type 1 or 2 configuration
- only if diversion is variable, on programming the "PCX diversion" key and, failing which, at the
time of service activation, in a type 2 configuration; However, in this type of configuration, the sys-
tem will not use this trunk group, but that programmed in address "PCXDBdl" which should contain
a single digital link for each of the "groups" in the public exchange allocated to the installation.

CONFIGURATION

T All configurations are performed under the address "PCXDivVar"

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. La-
bels -> "PCXDivVar"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "PCXDivVar" -> Return -> Memory

Byte 1 = Request type

- 00 = all accesses (default value)

- 01 = T0 by T0
- 02 = T0 group

Byte 2 = Keypad or facility

- 00 = facility (default value)

- 01 = keypad

Byte 3 = Password

- 00 = local password (default value)

- 01 = network password

Byte 4 = fixed or variable destination

- 00 = variable destination (default value)

- 01 = fixed destination

{0>" Octets 5 et 6 = Numéro de faisceau "<}0{> Bytes 5 and 6 = Trunk group number "<0}

- XX-XX = trunk group number used if the type is a T0 group (last trunk group by default)

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
36

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES RENVOI PCX *

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.:: Programmed Key - defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station

Station without display (except Z) Station with display

Type of station

Service

PCX forwarding P.K.: Div PCX + password (*) P.K.: PCX + password (*)

(*) dial also, if not already pre-programmed in the "forwarding" key, either:
- the directory nº of the trunk group containing the activation request if forwarding is fixed and of
type 1
- or the directory nº of the trunk group containing the activation request and the forwarding desti-
nation if forwarding is variable.

CANCELLATION

Type of station Station without display (except Z) Station with display

Service

PCX forwarding P.K.: Div PCX + password P.K.: PCX + password

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- Activation of PCX forwarding is signaled:

- on the displays of all stations in the installation
- for a type 1 configuration, by the icon or LED of the forwarded RSP keys.
- After activation of PCX forwarding, outgoing calls are still authorized.
- Two metering proofs are printed: one when the service is activated, the other when it is cancelled.
- The activation request for a "group" in which all the links are busy is rejected. The same applies to
an isolated link.
- For countries without this feature, PCX forwarding can be managed using a restricted public num-
bering plan in which every DDI number corresponds to a station which will divert to the outside.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

RENVOI PCX * CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES AUTOMATIC CALLBACK ON BUSY
TRUNK GROUP

File
AUTOMATIC CALLBACK ON BUSY
37
TRUNK GROUP
DESCRIPTION

When a user makes a network call (public or private) by:

- using an external RSD or RSB resource key (see "Resource Keys")

- dialing a trunk group number
- using the "Dial by Name" feature
- pressing a direct call key
- using the personal and collective speed dial numbers
- using the "Redial" and "Temporary Memory" features

and hears the busy tone for the selected trunk group, he can leave an automatic call back request
on this trunk group.

CONFIGURATION

T To specify whether or not to authorize a station to leave an automatic call back request:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Callback"

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
S.K.: Soft Key
Code: Code programmed in the "Features in Conversation" table

All stations (inclu- Without display (≠ Z) With display, no soft With soft keys
Type of station
ding Z) keys
Type of service

Automatic call back request (*) Function code P.K.: Automatic call- P.K.: ❏Cback S.K.: ❏Cback
back request

(*) When a line in the trunk group is released, the subscriber requesting callback is rung. When he
picks up the handset, he hears the dial tone. He then needs simply to dial the number without entering
the trunk group number.
When the automatic callback request was left following an automatically dialed call (by personal speed
dial, for example), the dialing is transmitted automatically by the system once the requester has answe-
red the callback.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

AUTOMATIC CALLBACK ON BUSY CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
TRUNK GROUP

CANCELLATION
Prefix: Code programmed in the "Features in Conversation" table

All stations (including Without display (≠ Z) With display, no soft With soft keys
Type of station
Z) keys
Type of service

Automatic call back (**) Prefix P.K.: Cancel callback P.K.: ■Cback S.K.: ■Cback, before
or during callback

(**) The automatic call back request is also cancelled if:

- the person requesting call back does not go off hook within 25 seconds or presses the "Release"
key during these 25 seconds
- no line in the trunk group becomes free within 30 minutes
- all the resources of the person requesting call back are busy
- after the person requesting the callback has answered, all the lines in the trunk group return to
busy.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- A user can leave only one type of automatic call back request at a time: on busy station or trunk
group.
- If the automatic call back request is accepted, the user hears the dial tone if he is off hook and
switches to the idle status in hands-free mode.
- An automatic call back request does not follow call diversion (not even a "Do Not Disturb").
- The system accepts as many automatic call back requests on a busy trunk group as it contains lines.
- Automatic call back cannot be picked up (see "Call pick-up").
- Automatic call back which the requesting party does not answer is not recorded in the directory of
unanswered calls.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES TRANSMISSION OF DTMF CODES (OR
END-TO-END SIGNALING)

File
TRANSMISSION OF DTMF CODES (OR
38
END-TO-END SIGNALING)
DESCRIPTION

A station can dial either:

- in decadic mode, or
- in DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequencies)

In order to use the services of a server or a telephone answering device, a station must use DTMF dia-
ling so that the PCX can forward the digits dialed to this server without analyzing them.

A DTMF dialing station does this implicitly since it generates the DTMF dialing itself.

A decadic dialing station must activate the DTMF end-to-end signaling function. The digits dialed
are then converted into DTMF dialing.

"DTMF end-to-end signaling" can be activated either:

- manually, during internal or external conversation

- automatically, via a pre-recorded number in which a "forced DTMF end-to-end signaling" cha-
racter is programmed, possibly followed by digits to be transmitted in DTMF:
- in the personal speed dial numbers (internal or external number)
- in the collective speed dial numbers (external number)
- on a direct call key (internal or external number)
- automatically, during an internal or external conversation, via DTMF end-to-end signaling pro-
gramming for each station or system.

CONFIGURATION

T To modify the value of the time-out during which DTMF end-to-end signaling is active:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Timer Labels -> "IntDgMfTim"
- by MMC-Station:
Global -> Rd/Wr -> Timers -> "IntDgMfTim" -> Return -> Memory

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

TRANSMISSION OF DTMF CODES (OR CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
END-TO-END SIGNALING)

T To modify the value of the time-out during which forced DTMF end-to-end signaling is active:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert view):
System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Timer Labels -> "ForceMFTim"
- by MMC-Station:
Global -> Rd/Wr -> Timer -> "ForceMFTim" -> Return -> Memory

T Create the Features in Conversation making it possible to activate the end-to-end signaling and to
resend the * in DTMF:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> FAC Numbering Plan
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> Code -> Funct -> "Send MF num"

T To specify whether or not to activate DTMF end-to-end signaling for a given station (service deac-
tivated by default):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> MF Transparency

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
S.K.: Soft Key
Code: Code programmed in the "Features in Conversation" table

Z decadic Without display With display, no S.K.s With soft keys

Type of stati
Service

Manual activation du- Code DTMF end-to- P.K.: DTMF end-to-end P.K.: ❏DTMF S.K.: ❏DTMF
ring communication end signaling signaling

Automatic activation By collective speed dial All types of pre-recorded All types of pre-recorded All types of pre-recorded
numbers dialing dialing dialing

cancellation

Type of station Z decadic Without display With display, no With soft keys
S.K.s
Service

When activation has Automatic deactivation on "IntDgMfTim" P.K.: DTMF end- P.K.: ❏DTMF S.K.: ■DTMF
been done manually time-out. to-end signaling

When activation was Automatic deactivation on "ForceMFTim" time-out when the system encounters the "/" character or manual
automatic deactivation by key.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
38

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES TRANSMISSION OF DTMF CODES (OR

END-TO-END SIGNALING)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- When "DTMF end-to-end signaling" is forced in a pre-recorded number, the digits then to be sent
in voice frequencies can be either pre-recorded or dialed by the user when he makes the call.
- The character symbolizing "Forced DTMF end-to-end signaling" is the slash ("/"). This character also
introduces a 5-second pause (non-modifiable) before sending the rest of the number in DTMF end-
to-end signaling; to introduce a 10 second pause: xxxx // xxxx.
- When a number with "Forced DTMF end-to-end signaling" is recorded in the "Redial" or "Temporary
number" memory, the number is transmitted and the end-to-end signaling service activated when
the content of these memories is recalled. However, the digits to be sent in voice frequencies are
not retransmitted if they were dialed by the user at the time of making the call.
- The number of "Forced DTMF end-to-end signaling" characters and digits to be sent in voice fre-
quency format depend on the total number of digits authorized in programming a speed dial entry
or call key and the number of digits forming the directory number of the called server.
- The system makes it possible to program the DTMF end-to-end signaling feature in conversation
which, when it is dialed, enables the activation of the end-to-end signaling and the transmission of
the character "**", frequently requested by the voice servers (see "Configuration").
- DTMF end-to-end signaling:
- when DTMF end-to-end signaling is active for the system or station in conversation, access to
the features in conversation is no longer offered (except for DTMF analog stations that have
access to these features via the intermediate of the "R" key).
- to carry out an enquiry call on a monoline station, DTMF end-to-end signaling must first be
cancelled by pressing on a key programmed "DTMF end-to-end signaling". A multiline station
uses a resource key.
- DTMF end-to-end signaling can be deactivated for the current call by pressing a soft key or
DTMF programmed key ■ (access to features in conversation and to enquiry calls is performed
as it was before activating this function).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

TRANSMISSION OF DTMF CODES (OR CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
END-TO-END SIGNALING)

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CALL PICK-UP

File
CALL PICK-UP
39

DESCRIPTION

When a station rings, another user can answer the call in place of the destination station. This call is
"picked up". There are various types of pick-up:

- a call to a station outside a pick-up group: this is an individual pick-up

- a call to a station within a pick-up group: this is a group pick-up
- a call arriving at the general level: this is a general call answer

CONFIGURATION

T To create the pick-up groups:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Pickup Groups
- by MMC-Station: Groups -> Pick Up

T To specify whether or not to authorize a station to pick up a call:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Call Pickup Allowed"

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

CALL PICK-UP CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
S.K.: Soft Key
Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Multiline All stations (in- Without display With display, no With soft keys
Type of station
cluding Z) (≠ Z) soft keys
Type of service

Individual pick-up (*) -- Code + n° of sta- P.K.: Individual P.K.: IndPic + nº S.K.: Pickup +
tion ringing pickup + nº of of station ringing S.K.: IndPic + nº
station ringing of station ringing

Group pick-up (*) -- Prefix P.K.: Group P.K.: GrpPic S.K.: Pickup +
pick-up S.K.: GrpPic

General call answer (*) -- Prefix P.K.: General P.K.: GenBel S.K.: Pickup +
Call Answer S.K.: GenBel

(*) If the pick-up is accepted, the user converses with the caller, if not, he hears the fast busy tone.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- A private subscriber can only pick up internal calls.

- A private call cannot be picked up.
- A call intended for a Hunting Group with cyclic or sequential management (see section "system fea-
tures" file "Hunting Groups") can be picked up like an individual pick-up.
- A call intended for a group of operator stations can only be picked up by individual pick-up.
- Prefixes for pick-up functions in the numbering plans: the basic value may vary depending on the
local software version. The French settings are as follows:
- Pick-up: base 0 = individual pick-up
- Pick-up: base 1 = group pick-up
- Pick-up: base 2 = general call pick-up

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CALL PARKING/PARKED CALL
RETRIEVAL

File
CALL PARKING/PARKED CALL
40
RETRIEVAL
DESCRIPTION

A user in conversation with an external correspondent can suspend this conversation and retrieve the
correspondent later on from the same station or another station in the installation.

CONFIGURATION

T Modify, if necessary, the default timeout before rerouting of the parked call (90 seconds) – MMC-
PM5 (Expert View) only:
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 3 -> "Time before parked call is rerouted"

The rerouting of parked calls depends on the contents of Incoming Call Handling -> Public Cal-
ler -> Go to Attendant or Release

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
S.K.: Soft Key
Code: Code programmed in the "Features in Conversation" table

Type of station All stations including Without display With display, no soft With soft keys
Z keys
Service

Parking of an external corres- Prefix (*) P.K.: Call Parking (*) P.K.: Park (*) S.K.: Park (*)
pondent

Parked call retrieval Prefix Call Parking + P.K.: Call Parking + P.K.: Park + nº of sta- S.K.: Pickup + S.K.:
nº of station from nº of station from tion from which the call Park + nº of station
which the call was par- which the call was par- was parked from which the call was
ked ked parked

(*) If the request is accepted, the external correspondent is placed on hold and hears the please-wait
music.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

CALL PARKING/PARKED CALL CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
RETRIEVAL

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- When a user is involved in a conference or an intrusion, call parking is refused.

- An internal call cannot be parked.
- When the external correspondent is parked for more than the default value of 90 seconds, the call
is routed to the general level (see "Operator Station").
- The system allows as many parked calls as there are network lines.
- Prefix for the Call Parking function in the numbering plans = Pick-up prefix + base 3. (For France:
the basic value may vary according to the local version of the software).

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES PAGING

File
PAGING
41

DESCRIPTION

An authorized user can inform another internal user with a portable receiver (or "bleep") that he is
trying to contact him on the telephone.

Paging is carried out depending on the paging device connected to the PCX, either:

- by suffix, i.e. after calling the user to be paged, with the latter not answering the telephone
- par "mode 4" prefix: the caller dials the paging prefix then, depending on the device, makes a voice
announcement or dials a pager number. The called party dials the paging answer number
- by "mode 2" prefix (using the ESPA protocol): the caller dials the paging number followed by the
number for the device (it is a good idea to make pager numbers match station numbers). The cal-
led party dials the answer number followed by his station number.

CONFIGURATION

T To specify whether or not to authorize a station to carry out paging by suffix:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> "Paging"

T To program the "bleep" numbers for users with pagers:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Misc. -> "Paging Code/Phone Card Password"
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Paging

T To configure the type of paging device connected to the PCX – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> "Paging Type"

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

PAGING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

T To modify the paging no-answer time-out value if required out – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 2 -> "Maximum Waiting Time for Paging"

T If necessary modify the value of the paging device busy time-out – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 3 -> "Maximum Connection Time for Pa-
ging"

T To define the paging activation code:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Internal Numbering Plan -> Paging Activation

T To define the answer code:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Internal Numbering Plan -> Paging Answ.
(Gen.)

T For "by suffix" paging, configure the analog line to which the paging device is connected:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): External Lines -> Trunk List -> Details -> "Paging"
- by MMC-Station: Access -> Paging

T For "by prefix, mode 4" or mode 2" paging, configure the SLI interface to which the paging device
is connected:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Misc. -> "Special Function"
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> SpeDev

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
41

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES PAGING

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan or the "Features in Conversation" table

All stations including Without display With display, no soft With soft keys
Type of station
Z keys
Service

Paging by suffix, in ringing Prefix Paging by suffix P.K.: Paging by suffix P.K.: Page (*)
phase, the correspondent cal- (*) (*)
led does not answer

Paging by prefix, mode 4 Prefix Paging by pre- P.K.: Paging by prefix P.K.: PgPfx + nº of pager(**)
fix + nº of pager(**) + nº of pager(**)

Paging by prefix, mode 2 Prefix Paging by pre- P.K.: Paging by prefix P.K.: PgPfx + nº of station paged (*)
fix + nº of station pa- + nº of station paged
ged (*) (*)

Answering paging by suffix Prefix Selective pa- P.K.: Selective paging P.K.: PgaSel + nº of station paged
ging answer + nº of answer + nº of station
station paged paged

Answering paging by prefix, Prefix General Paging P.K.: General Paging P.K.: PgaGen
mode 4 Answer Answer

Answering paging by prefix, Prefix Selective pa- P.K.: Selective paging P.K.: PgaSel + nº of station paged
mode 2 ging answer + nº of answer + nº of station
station paged paged

(*) The requesting party stays on line and waits for the paged party to answer. Conversion of the set
number into paging receiver number is carried out by the system, which informs the paging device.
(**) The requesting party stays on line and waits for the paged party to answer.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- A user can only activate a single paging operation at a time.

- For the "by suffix" type of paging, the system allows 4 simultaneous answer attempts by default.
- Paging must be answered before the "Maximum Waiting Time for Paging" time-out expires.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

PAGING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES MAIN PCX RECALL

File
MAIN PCX RECALL
42

DESCRIPTION

If a user wishes to use the services offered by the analog network operator, he must transmit a calibra-
ted loopbreak over the line.

This procedure must also be followed when the system is connected to a PCX of larger capacity via
analog network lines.

CONFIGURATION

T For each analog network line, configure the value of the calibrated loopbreak using MMC-PM5
Expert View (only):
External Lines -> List of Accesses -> Details -> "Cut off Type"

T To modify the default value for the activation of the time-out for the calibrated loopbreak if no fi-
gure has been transmitted:
- by MMC-PM5 System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels -> "IntClLp-
Tim"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "IntClLpTim" -> Return -> Memory

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
F.K.: Fixed Key
S.K.: Soft Key
Code: Code programmed in the "Features in Conversation" table

Type of station Z Without display With display, no soft With soft keys
keys

Main PCX recall F.K.: R. + Code (*) P.K.: Main PCX recall P.K.: ❏PCX. (*) S.K.: ❏PCX. (*)
(*)

(*) the system then transmits a main PCX recall to the local PCX and the following digits.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

MAIN PCX RECALL CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

CANCELLATION

Type of station Z Without display With display, no soft With soft keys
keys

Cancel main PCX recall Automatic (*) P.K.: Main PCX recall P.K.: ❏PCX. S.K.: ■PCX.

(*) after the expiry of a time-out of:

- 5 seconds, programmable, if no figure has been entered

- 10 seconds if a figure has been entered (normal time-out for figures)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

The "Main PCX Recall" programmed key or "❏PCX" key can be replaced by a macro command pro-
grammed key "Macro3 = Main PCX recall + transmission of a number or code".

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES TEXT MAIL/DELAYED CALLBACK
REQUEST

File
TEXT MAIL/DELAYED CALLBACK
43
REQUEST
DESCRIPTION

Text mail
A user who has a station with display can send a text message to another internal user who has a dis-
play and Message LED, either:

- whilst out of communication

- during call setup phase, whatever the called party's status

The system offers 27 pre-programmed messages. Some of these include a variable part (for example,
a date or room number, etc.) that has to be filled in. A user who has a station with soft keys can also
create a complete message using the alphabetic keypad.

When the recipient has a station without a display (but with a Message LED), the text message becomes
a "delayed callback request".

Starting with version R2.0 of the software, the number of the text message sender may be saved (tem-
porary memory or individual directory) (see also “Making/Answering a call”).

Delayed call-back request

A user whose set does not have a display but which has a "Delayed call-back request key" can leave a
delayed call-back request for another user whose set has a Message LED. The call-back request can
only be left in call setup phase as long as the called party has still not answered.

CONFIGURATION

T To modify the pre-defined messages - MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

System Miscellaneous -> Messages and Music -> Mailing Messages

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

TEXT MAIL/DELAYED CALLBACK CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
REQUEST

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.:: Programmed Key - defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
F.K. : Fixed Key
S.K.:: Soft Key
Prefix:Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Z Without With display, no S.K.s With soft keys

Statio
display (≠
Service Z)
or Function

Choice of text -- -- F.K.: Mail or P.K.: Ms- F.K.: Mail + S.K.: Text + no. of destination if requested + S.K.:
message (*) gLED + 3 + Destination MsgNo +Message no.
no. if requested + F.K. i
+ 3 + Message no.

Modify lan- -- -- F.K. i + 4 S.K.: Lang

guage for the
message

To validate -- -- F.K.: LS S.K.: OK

the chosen
message

To validate -- -- F.K.: LS S.K.: OK

the variable
part
Read text -- -- F.K.: Mail +3 F.K.: Mail + S.K.: Text + S.K.: Read
messages re-
ceived (*)

Send a de- Code P.K.: De- --

layed call- +1 layed
back request callback
request +
1

Presence of a Flashing LED Mes- Flashing 2-colour LED and Message

text message sage
or delayed
call-back re-
quest

Answer a de- Prefix P.K.: De- --

layed call- layed
back request call-back
request

(*) When the set is idle, the system gives priority to "reading" the messages received (voice messages
first, then text).

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- On a Z station intended to receive a delayed call-back request, a "virtual" "Master Mailing" key must
be configured with MMC-PM5 (Expert View), or an "MsgLed" with MMC-Station.
- Calls from external Z users to stations in text answering diversion mode are forwarded to the Ope-
rator Station; the text message is shown on the OS display.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES STATION COMFORT FEATURES

File
STATION COMFORT FEATURES
44

DESCRIPTION

User comfort involves:

- the ability to cut oneself off from the other party, i.e. to deactivate the microphone (in the handset
or the hands-free function) by activating "mute".
- for a station with display, the option of reading the number assigned to the station (and, if it exists,
the number assigned to the V24, S0, or Z option) and the associated name programmed into the
internal directory using the "Station Identity" function
- the option of preventing use of one's own station (programming, making external calls, access to
text messages and non-answered calls directory, activation and cancellation of call forwarding) by
activating locking of the station of the latter.
- the ability to use the station's loudspeaker with amplified reception and to adjust the volume.
- for Reflexes stations, the option of adjusting the conversation volume at the handset.
- the option to choose the time display format: european or US format.

CONFIGURATION

T On each station, the personal code can be modified by customization only.

T For Reflexes stations, to specify whether or not to authorize adjustment of the handset volume:
- by MMC-PM5: System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Timer Labels -> "
GainCtrlON"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> " GainCtrlON" -> Return -> Me-
mory

T For stations with display, choose the time display format: Europe or US
- by MMC-PM5: System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Timer Labels -> "Ti-
meAmPm" with 00 = European format, 01 = US format
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "TimeAmPm" with 00 = European
format, 01 = US format -> Return -> Memory

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

STATION COMFORT FEATURES CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.:: Programmed Key - defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
F.K. : Fixed Key
S.K.:: Soft Key
Prefix:Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Z Without dis- Without dis- With display, no S.K.s With soft

Type of station play, without play, with keys
"mute" F.K.: "mute" F.K.:
and/or wi- and/or with
thout LS LS
Service

Communication mute -- -- F.K.: CLIR F.K.: CLIR

Station identity (and option) -- -- -- 2 presses on key i

Lock Prefix + per- P.K.: Lock/Unlock + perso- P.K.: Lock + personal code S.K.: Lock
sonal code nal code + personal
code

Amplified reception -- -- F.K.: LS or F.K.: LS

F.K.: LS+

Adjust the handset volume -- -- F.K.: LS- and LS+

cancellation

Z Without dis- Without dis- With display, no S.K.s With soft

Type of station play, without play, with keys
"mute" F.K.: "mute" F.K.:
and/or wi- and/or with
thout LS LS
Service

Communication mute -- -- F.K.: CLIR F.K.: CLIR

Unlock Prefix + per- P.K.: Lock/Unlock + perso- P.K.: Lock + personal code S.K.: Lock
sonal code nal code + personal
code

Amplified reception -- -- F.K.: LS or F.K.: LS

F.K.: LS-

(*) Mute is also deactivated at the end of the communication.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
44

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES STATION COMFORT FEATURES

DATE AND TIME DISPLAY

The date and time display format can be defined using the "TimeAmPm" flag: European format (flag
= 00) or US format (flag = 01).

Date display
European format: Wed 22 May.

US format: 05/22/02

Time display

European format Format

00:00 to 00:59 12:00 am to 12:59 am
01:00:00 to 11:59:00 01:00:00 am to 11:59:00 am
12:00:00 to 12:59:00 12:00 pm to 12:59 pm
13:00:00 to 23:59:00 01:00:00 pm to 11:59:00 pm

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

STATION COMFORT FEATURES CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES BACKGROUND MUSIC

File
BACKGROUND MUSIC
45

DESCRIPTION

When a radio or cassette recorder is connected to the system, a user can activate the broadcast of
music through the loudspeaker on his station when it is idle.

ACTIVATION/USE

Type of station Without loudspeaker With loudspeaker

Service

Background music -- F.K.: LS or LS+

Adjust the volume -- F.K.: LS+ and LS- or LS+/-

cancellation

Type of station Without loudspeaker With loudspeaker

Service

Background music -- F.K.: LS or LS+

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

The transmission of the music is stopped automatically when a call arrives on the station or when the
user makes a call.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

BACKGROUND MUSIC CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES HEADSET FEATURES

File
HEADSET FEATURES
46

DESCRIPTION

The user of a station with the Handsfree function can use a headset, connected instead of the handset
(for a wired station) and use the functions normally accessible from his or her station.

"Headset mode" must be activated by station customization.

To answer a call, three connection modes can be used, either:

- manual: the user answers the call manually by pressing the resource key signaling the call or the
Handsfree key
- a hotline call: the system determines what type of call is at the station (see "Answering camped-on
calls")
- in automatic Intercom mode: after ringing, the station "answers" the call of highest priority by swit-
ching to hands free mode.

CONFIGURATION

T To modify the time-out before connection in automatic mode – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 3 -> "Time before auto. conn. in headset
mode"

T To activate headset mode (MMC-Station Administrator session only)

Subscr -> nº of station -> Headst -> Choice

Nota : Headset mode can also be activated by customizing the stations; see "Customizing Stations"
for how this is done, depending on the type of Reflexes station.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

HEADSET FEATURES CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
F.K.: Fixed Key

Type of station Without Hands-Free feature, With Hands-Free feature

Service

Answer a call manually -- Resource Key or F.K.: Handsfree

Activate automatic answer -- F.K.: Intercom or P.K.: AutAns or In-

mode (*) tercom

(*) When a caller is camped-on on the station in automatic answer mode, the user goes into conver-
sation with the caller after pressing the "End" key and the transmission of a beep.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES APPOINTMENT REMINDER/WAKE-UP
CALL

File
APPOINTMENT REMINDER/WAKE-UP
47
CALL
DESCRIPTION

A user can have his station ring at a time he can program himself. This is the "Appointment Reminder"
function in the case of companies and the "Wake-Up" call in the case of a hotel (in the various num-
bering plans, it is referred to as "Wake-Up").

The "Appointment reminder" can be activated either:

- every day at the programmed time: this is a "permanent" appointment

- or only once in the 24 hours following programming: this is a "temporary" appointment.

CONFIGURATION

T To program the time of the appointment or wake-up call for a station:

S.K.: Soft Key

Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Type of station Without display With display, no soft keys With soft keys
Service

Permanent appointment reminder -- Key i + function "Appmnt" S.K.: Appmnt + S.K.: Param
then function " Perm + 4-digit + 4-digit permanent call time
permanent call time

Temporary appointment reminder Prefix Wake-up activation + Key i + function "Appmnt" + S.K.: Appmnt + 4-digit tem-
4-digit wake-up call time 4-digit temporary reminder porary reminder time
time

T To define the number of times temporary appointment reminders/wake-up calls should be repea-
ted (3 by default):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Other Labels
-> "WakeUpRetr"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "TonPrCmp" -> Return -> Memory

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

APPOINTMENT REMINDER/WAKE-UP CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
CALL

T To define the ringing duration (15 seconds by default):

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Debug La-
bels -> "TmAppAnTim (temporary appointment) or PmAppAnTim (permanent appoint-
ment)"

T To define the timing between 2 wake-up calls (1 minute by default):

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Debug La-
bels -> "TmAppWaTim (temporary appointment) or PmAppWaTim (permanent appoint-
ment)"

T To define the timing between 2 groups of 5 wake-ups when there are too many simultaneous re-
quests (2 seconds by default):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Debug La-
bels -> "InAnnAppTim"

T To define the reaction in the event of a problem with a wake-up call on a room station (Hotel ver-
sion)
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Other Labels
-> "WakUpPrbRg"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "WakUpPrbRg" -> Return -> Memory

If YES is selected, the reception station rings with a specific call tone and the display shows "Wake-
up problem ".

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
47

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES APPOINTMENT REMINDER/WAKE-UP

CALL

ACTIVATION/USE

At the appointment or wake-up time, the station rings and the display shows the appointment.

Ringing stops when the user acknowledges the appointment reminder or wake-up call, for example by
going off hook. If there is no acknowledgement, the station rings for 15 seconds (default setting) and
then again one minute later (also by default) and then a third time (by default) after a further minute.

Whether acknowledged or not, a temporary appointment reminder or wake-up call is cancelled and
a permanent appointment reminder is retained for the following day at the same time.

CANCELLATION
S.K.: Soft Key
Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Type of station Without display With display, no soft keys With soft keys
Service

Permanent appointment reminder -- Key i + function " Appmnt" S.K.: Appmnt + S.K.: Perm
then function " Perm" + F.K.: S.K.: Clear + S.K.: OK
"Cancellation" + F.K.: "OK"
Temporary appointment reminder Prefix Wake-up activation Key i + function " Appmnt" S.K.: Appmnt + S.K.: Temp +
then function " Temp" + F.K.: S.K.: Clear + S.K.: OK
"Cancellation" + F.K. "OK"

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- When the station is busy at the time the appointment reminder or wake-up call is made, the station
does not ring but the user hears a specific tone.
- To avoid traffic overload, stations that have placed wake-up call requests are called in groups of
5, with a default time lapse of 2 seconds between 2 groups
- Number of analog stations called simultaneously: maximum of 4 per SLI board
- You can consult the appointment reminder/wake-up call status for each station in: Subscribers/
Basestations List -> Details -> WakUp.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

APPOINTMENT REMINDER/WAKE-UP CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES
CALL

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CALL MONITORING

File
CALL MONITORING
48

DESCRIPTION

A user can help one or more other users to manage their communications, by means of:

- supervision of one or more resource keys on these users' stations, with or without supervised call
ringing: the incoming calls on the supervised resource key are signaled in the same way as on the
associated supervision key
- the selective monitoring: the user also receives the calls intended for the selected directory num-
bers
- subscriber monitoring: the user also receives all the calls for the station monitored
- general monitoring: the user also receives external calls intended for the operator stations

CONFIGURATION

T For a Z station wishing to use general monitoring, program a virtual key using MMC-PM5 (Expert
View):
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details -> Virtual Key ->
"General Monitoring"

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Type of station Z Without dis- Without display and multiline With display
Service play and mo-
noline

Supervised call ringing -- -- P.K.: Supervision melody or P.K.: Supervision

Ring melody or Ring

Selective monitoring -- -- P.K.: Selective monitoring P.K.: Monit

Answer calls from selective monito- -- -- P.K.: Selective monitoring P.K.: Monit when
ring when the associated LED flashes the associated LED
or icon flashes
Subscriber monitoring -- -- P.K.: SubMon or Subscriber monitoring

Answer calls from subscriber monito- -- -- Off-hook or press "Hands Free"

ring

General monitoring Prefix Pro- P.K.: General monitoring P.K.: GenMon

gramming
mode + 6 (*)

Answer calls from General monitoring Go off hook Go off hook P.K.: General monitoring when P.K.: GenMon when
associated LED or icon flashes associated LED or
icon flashes

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

CALL MONITORING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

(*) If a "General Monitoring" virtual key is programmed on the station.

CANCELLATION
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Type of station Z Without display Without display and multili- With display
Service and monoline ne

Supervised call ringing -- -- P.K.: Supervision melody or P.K.: Supervi-

Ring sion melody or
Ring

Selective monitoring -- -- P.K.: Selective monitoring P.K.: Monit

Subscriber monitoring -- -- P.K.: SubMon or Subscriber monitoring

General monitoring Prefix Programming P.K.: General monitoring P.K.: GenMon

mode + 7

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- A "Selective Monitoring" programmed key can monitor up to 8 directory numbers (a user can have
several directory numbers for a single station: for example, an internal number defined in the main
numbering plan, and an external number defined in the DDI numbering plan. Thus, in order to
monitor both internal and external calls, both directory numbers must be programmed on one or
two selective monitoring keys).
- A station can have several selective monitoring keys.
- Selective or subscriber monitoring of a group of stations is impossible. However, when subscriber
monitoring is active for a station belonging to a parallel or sequential group, the group calls for
this station are monitored.
- Selective monitoring does not work for diverted or monitored calls.
- Subscriber monitoring does not work for calls coming from automatic call back on busy station or
trunk group, or from those coming from master recall if transfer fails.
- When all the station resources are busy, new monitored calls are lost.
- A programmed "subscriber monitoring" key can be used to monitor up to 8 directory numbers (if a
station has several call numbers, simply program one of them on a "subscriber monitoring" key for
all the numbers on this station to be monitored).
- So that a Z station can use general monitoring, the installer must configure a "virtual" General Mo-
nitoring key on it.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CUSTOMIZING STATIONS

File
CUSTOMIZING STATIONS
49

DESCRIPTION

Customization only affects the station on which it is performed (you cannot customize remote stations).

Switching to Customization mode

Depending on the type of station, press Custo (2nd page, Advanced Station in Idle) or i + 5, or dial
the "Programming Mode" function code.

The following pages describe the tree structures available for each type of station; navigation is done
using soft keys or codes (with the help of voice guides).

Additional Information
- Answer Only mode: activating or deactivating "Answer Only" mode does not modify the greeting
in the voice mailbox ; the user has to select the appropriate default message or re-record a new
one that corresponds to the selected mode of operation.
- Destination number (personal assistant or message notification):
- external numbers must include the network access prefix
- external numbers are subject to barring controls
- if the pre-defined number is invalid or barred, the call is automatically put through to the des-
tination mailbox (personal assistant) or is not connected (remote notification).
- Time ranges: on initialization, the start time is 00:00 and the end time is 24:00
- Customization validation key: OK for stations with soft keys, # for stations without soft keys, 9 for
decadic stations.

Other available features:

- i key + key programmed with a specific parameter: modify the parameter value.
- Repertory key + i key: program personal speed dials.
- i key + Appmnt key: program a reminder call.
- i key + Divert key: program call types to be forwarded.

Nota : For a detailed description of how to set up these functions (passing from one function to
another, deleting a value, etc), refer to the user guide for the relevant terminal.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

CUSTOMIZING STATIONS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Stations with soft keys

Mailbox: welcome message

MBXANN LISTEN Listen to (personal or default) greeting

NAME RECORD Record user's name RECORD Re-record

STOP Stop recording (End)

DEFAULT NO Keep recorded personal greeting

YES Delete recorded greeting; select default greeting

CUSTOM PAUSE Pause recording

RECORD Record personal greeting
RECORD Re-record
SELECT Mailbox utilization mode:
MODE standard or answering-only
STOP Stop recording (End)
OK Validate current selection

Personal assistant
PERATT ON/OFF SELEC Activate/deactivate personal assistant

OK Validate current selection

MENU INTNUM Route to internal number MODIFY Modify destination number

EXTNUM Route to external number DISABL Deactivate selection

OK Validate current selection

HANDY Route to mobile station

OPERAT Route to operator station Activate/deactivate

MODIFY
Station settings OK Validate current selection
PHONE MELODY MELODY Choose ringing tune

LEVEL+ Set ringing tune volume

CNTRST SCREEN Set display contrast

ICON Set icons contrast

HEADST SELECT Activate/deactivate headset mode

OK Validate current selection
Custom options
OPTION LANG SELECT Select user language from available options

CODE Change personal code (enter old code followed by new code)

Remote message notification

NOTIF ON/OFF SELECT Activate/deactivate notification of new messages

OK Validate current selection

NUMBER
Number of the station to notify

SCHED Applicable time range for notification

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
49

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CUSTOMIZING STATIONS

Stations without soft keys but with displays

Mailbox: welcome message

1 MBXANN Record personal greeting 8 PAUSE Pause
1 CUSTOM 1 RECORD

2 LISTEN Listen to (personal or default) greeting * RECORD Re-record

# STOP Stop recording (End)

3 DEFAULT 1 YES Delete recorded greeting; select default greeting

2 NO Keep recorded personal greeting

4 NAME 1 RECORD Record user's name * RECORD Re-record

# STOP Stop recording (End)

5 MODE 1 RECORD Mailbox in standard mode (answering and recording)

2 SIMPLE Mailbox in answering-only mode

Personal assistant
2 PERATT 1 ON/OFF 1 ON Activate personal assistant

2 OFF Deactivate personal assistant

Modify destination
1 INTNUM 1 MODIFY number
2 MENU Route to internal number
2 DISABL Deactivate selection
2 EXTNUM Route to external number
Validate current
# OK selection
3 HANDY Route to mobile station

4 OPERAT Route to operator station 1 MODIFY Activate/deactivate

Station settings
3 PHONE 1 MELODY 1 MELODY Choose ringing tune # OK Validate current
selection
2 LEVEL+ Set ringing tune volume

2 CNTRST 1 ICON Adjust display contrast

3 HEADST 1 ACTIVE Activate headset mode

2 INACT Deactivate headset mode

Custom options
4 OPTION 1 CODE Change personal code (enter old code followed by new code)

2 LANG 1 to 4 Select user language from available options

3 1 ACTIVE Activate voice prompts on station

VOICE

2 INACT Deactivate voice prompts on station

Remote message notification

5 NOTIF 1 ON/OFF 1 ON Activate remote notification of new messages

2 OFF Deactivate remote notification of new messages

2 NUMBER Number of the station to notify

3 SCHED Applicable time range for notification

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

CUSTOMIZING STATIONS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Stations without displays or soft keys

Mailbox: welcome message

1 Record personal greeting 8 Pause
1
Re-record
2 Listen to (personal or default) greeting *
Stop recording (End)
#
1 Delete recorded greeting; select default greeting
3
Keep recorded personal greeting
2
Re-record
4 Record user's name *

Mailbox in standard mode (answering and recording) Stop recording (End)

5 1 #
Mailbox in answering-only mode
22
Personal assistant
2 1 1 Activate personal assistant

Deactivate personal assistant

2
Route to internal number Modify destination number
2 1 1

2 Route to external number Deactivate selection

2
3 Route to mobile station Validate current selection
#
Route to operator station Activate/deactivate
4 1
Station settings #
Validate current selection

3 1 1 Choose ringing tune

2 Set ringing tune volume

# Confirm current tune

Deactivate headset mode

3 1
Activate headset mode
2
Custom options
Change personal code (enter old code followed by new code)
4 1
to
2 1 4 Select user language from available options

Remote message notification

5 1 1 Activate remote notification of new messages

2 Deactivate remote notification of new messages

2 Number of the station to notify

Applicable time range for notification
3
Programming the personal directory
to Internal/external n° to be saved On-hook
6 0 9

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
49

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES CUSTOMIZING STATIONS

Analog Z stations

Mailbox: welcome message

8 Pause
1 1 Record personal greeting

* Re-record
2 Listen to (personal or default) greeting
# Stop recording (End)

3 1 Delete recorded greeting; select default greeting

2 Keep recorded personal greeting

4 Record user's name * Re-record

5 1 Mailbox in standard mode (answering and recording) # Stop recording (End)

2
2
Personal assistant
2 1 1 Activate personal assistant

Deactivate personal assistant

2
Route to internal number 1 Modify destination number
2 1
2 Route to external number Deactivate selection
2
3 Route to mobile station
# Validate current selection

4 Route to operator station 1 Activate/deactivate

# Validate current selection

Custom options
Change personal code (enter old code followed by new code)
4 1

2 1 4 Select user language from available options

Remote message notification

5 1 1 Activate remote notification of new messages

2 Deactivate remote notification of new messages

2 Number of the station to notify

Applicable time range for notification

3

Activating general call monitoring (OS help)

6 1

Deactivating general call monitoring

7 1
Decadic stations use the 9 key for validation; the functions accessible with the * key are not available
(even though they are announced)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

CUSTOMIZING STATIONS CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES TEAMWORK

File
TEAMWORK
50

DESCRIPTION

Teamwork simplifies the call management of all the members in a "work group" by equipping each
station with:

- as many RSL keys as there are members in the group less one. Each RSL is programmed with the
number of one of the other members of the group. These keys enable:
- monitoring of the other stations, i.e. knowing whether they are free or occupied
- direct calls to other members of the group
- one or more selective call monitoring keys (one key makes it possible to monitor up to 8 directory
numbers) (see "Call Monitoring")
- a group call pick-up key (see "Call pick-up")

CONFIGURATION

T To create a work group – MMC-Station only:

TerPro -> TeamWk -> Add

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- Group call pick-up is used when selective call monitoring is deactivated for the station which is rin-
ging.
- A work group is "virtual", i.e. there is no directory number. To remedy this, it is preferable to create
a Hunting Group with parallel management (see "Hunting Groups").
- By adding monitoring resource keys to the other stations in the work group, each member of the
group can monitor the other member's calls.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

TEAMWORK CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES ACCOUNT CODE/SUBSTITUTION

File
ACCOUNT CODE/SUBSTITUTION
51

DESCRIPTION

Account code
An account code makes it possible to charge the cost of an external communication to a client account.

During a communication, a dedicated station can modify the account code or add one ; a Z station
cannot.

All the account codes are configured in the account code table. For each account code, the installer
can state:

- whether or not the client account is identified by a name which can be printed on the metering sta-
tement instead of the name of the call initiator
- whether or not the initiator of the call is to be identified by his directory number
- whether or not the initiator of the call must enter a password, either:
- his personal code, if the user's identity is required ("User-ID" field in MMC-PM5 = User)
- the personal code of the station on which the call is made, if the user's identity is not required
("User-ID" field by MMC-PM5 = No)
- whether the barring and traffic sharing link categories (see "Link Categories" and "Barring") used
for the call are:
- those of the 'set' on which the call is made
- those of the 'Guest' (MMC-PM5 label), i.e. of the station identified for this call
- the barring link category of the client account (between 1 and 16) and traffic sharing link cate-
gory of the station on which the call is made
- no barring: no barring link category but the system uses the traffic sharing link category of the
station on which the call is made
- the number of digits of the external number, masked on the metering statement:
- all: all the digits are masked (priority field in relation to the "Mask last 4 digits" field in the "Me-
tering Printout" menu)
- 0, 1, ...,9: from 0 to 9 digits masked (priority field relative to the "Mask last 4 digits" field in the
"Metering Printout " menu)
- default: value of the "Mask last 4 digits" field in the "Metering Printout" menu (either 0 or 4 digits
masked).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

ACCOUNT CODE/SUBSTITUTION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

Furthermore, an account code can be:

- defined: in this case, it is composed exclusively of digits (e.g. "987654")

- partially defined: in this case, it is composed of digits and asterisks (e.g.: "1345*****"), the asterisks
represent the variable part ; the number of digits in the account code entered must be equal to the
number of digits of the defined and asterisk part
- variable: in this case, it is composed exclusively of asterisks ; the number of digits in the account
code entered must be equal to the number of asterisks.

When an account code is entered, the system checks first of all, whether it exists as a "defined" code,
if not, a "partially defined" code, and finally as a "variable" code.

The installer can configure a code for activating the "Account Code" service in the main numbering
plan. The "Base" field can be either:

- empty: in this case, the user enters the code associated with the client account himself
- 4 digits long, 0000 to 9999: in this case, the base refers to an account code configured in the ac-
count code table. The four digits of the base can correspond either to the 4 digits of a defined ac-
count code or to a variable code of 4 asterisks.

Substitution
This makes it possible to authorize a user to make an external call from any station in the installation,
even barred or locked, as if he were making the call from his own station.

Substitution is a particular account code case for which:

- the user's identity is required

- barring and traffic sharing link categories are those of the "guest"
- the password may be required.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
51

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES ACCOUNT CODE/SUBSTITUTION

CONFIGURATION

T To create the code for activating the "Account Code" feature in the internal numbering plan:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Internal Numbering Plan ->"Account Code
New"
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> IntNum -> Accoun

T To create the account code table:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Traffic Sharing and Barring -> Account Code Table

T Select the name printed on the metering ticket ; that of the client account or of the initiator of the
call – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:
Metering -> Printout -> Fields -> "Subscriber Name"

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Type of station Z Without display With display

Service

Before setting up the call Prefix New account code + P.K.: New account code(*) + P.K.: AccNew (*) + account
account code if necessary + n° account code if requested + code if requested + directory
directory (if identity required) directory n° if identity reques- nº if identity requested + per-
+ personal code if required + ted + personal code if reques- sonal code if requested + ex-
external n° ted + external n° ternal nº

During communication -- P.K.: Account code during P.K.: AccCom + account code
communication + account if requested + directory nº if
code if requested + directory identity requested + personal
nº if identity requested + per- code if requested + external nº
sonal code if requested + ex-
ternal nº

(*) the programmed keys, such as the numbering plan activation prefix, can contain the desired ac-
count code.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

ACCOUNT CODE/SUBSTITUTION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The system rejects all calls with an account code using the default personal code.
- An account code can have up to 16 digits or asterisks.
- Partially defined account codes in formats "12**34", "1***6**" or "**88" are forbidden.
- FORCED ACCOUNT CODE: the installer can authorize the user to only make external calls using
an account code, by:
- assigning barring link categories specific to the account code on one hand and to the user on
the other
- configuring account code parameters in the following manner: the user's identity is required,
barring and traffic sharing link categories are those of the "station" and a password is also re-
quired
- The "New Account Code" and "AccNew" programmed key can be replaced by "Macro2" keys con-
taining the external code .
- The account code is not memorized with the number in the Last Number Redial and Temporary
memories.
- An account code can be modified several times during communication and until the user enters a
"defined" or "partially defined" code.
- Masking of several or of all the digits in the external number dialed makes it possible to keep a call
confidential.
- The "names" of the account codes do not figure in the internal directory.
- An account code remains active after activation of a paging, after a recall in the case of a transfer
failure, after a call parking, a call pick-up, a forwarding or a transfer.
- The "Account Code" field can only be printed on statements with 132 columns.
- An S0 station cannot use these services.
- What not to do – example of an ineffective account code configuration: the user's identity is requi-
red, the barring and traffic sharing link categories are those of the "guest" and the personal code
may or may not be required.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES ALLOCATION OF A TRUNK LINE

File
ALLOCATION OF A TRUNK LINE
52

DESCRIPTION

An authorized user can lease one of the trunk lines in the main trunk group to another barred user so
that he may make a single external call. This user keeps his call confidential since he dials the number
himself.

The authorized user must be in an internal communication with the user before leasing him the line.

The authorized user can also:

- select the barring level assigned to the call made after allocation of the line: no barring or level 1
to 6
- lease a line with metering reminder (see "Meter Total Recall")
- assign an account code to the communication that the other user is about to make (see "Account
Code")

CONFIGURATION

T To specify whether or not to authorize a station to allocate one of the lines in the main trunk group:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details -> Features -> Part 2 -> "Trunk Allot"

T For each station, to specify whether or not to program the keys for trunk line allocation, with or
without meter total recall:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details -> Keys -> "Trunk Allot" or "Trunk Allot MTR"
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Keys -> "AllotN" or "AllotM"

T To create the features in conversation for allocation of the trunk line, with a barring level from 1 to
7 (level 7 being "no barring"), with or without meter total recall:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
Numbering -> FAC Numbering Plan -> "Trunk Allot (1 to 7)" or "Trunk Allot MTR (1 to 7)"
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> Code -> "AllotN Cat (1 - 7)" or "AllotM Cat (1 - 7)"

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

ALLOCATION OF A TRUNK LINE CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
Prefix: Code programmed in the internal numbering plan

Type of station Z Without display (except Z) With display

Service

During a local communication, the Prefix Trunk allocation with P.K.: Trunk allocation with P.K.: Trunk allocation with
authorized user uses... or without MTR, and with or or without MTR, and with or or without MTR, and with or
without barring without barring (*) without barring (*)

then the other user... hears the public network dial tone and makes the external call

If a meter total recall has been re- -- -- the authorized user's station
quested... rings and the display indicates
the metering

(*) Addition of an account code and the associated parameters must be done before activation of the
"trunk allocation" service.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The authorized user and the beneficiary user of the service must be connected to the same PCX.
- The beneficiary user of the service must have an available resource for the external communication.
- Meter total recall can only be requested on a station with display.
- If the service is refused, the beneficiary user hears the fast busy tone.
- The service is refused if the beneficiary station is locked or private without authorization to transfer.
- The allocated line is an analog trunk line or a digital access.
- The beneficiary user cannot use block dialing mode after trunk allocation.
- An S0 station cannot activate the service nor be a beneficiary user of the service.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES METER TOTAL RECALL

File
METER TOTAL RECALL
53

DESCRIPTION

A user who has a station with a display can request to be called back automatically to find out the cost
of an external communication made by another system user.

Meter total recall can be activated either:

- manually: in this case, meter total recall is requested before a single external call is setup.
- automatically, for each station in the installation: in this case, meter total recall is activated after all
the external calls on "monitored" stations.

The ringer for a meter total recall is the same as that for an appointment reminder.

CONFIGURATION

T To create the prefix for activating "Meter Total Recall" in the internal numbering plan:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
Numbering -> Internal numbering plan -> "Meter Total Recall"
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> IntNum -> Funct -> "MTR

T To specify whether or not to authorize the printing of a metering ticket during a meter total recall:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels -> "MTR_Print"
- by MMC-Station:
Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "MTR_Print" -> Return -> Memory

T To specify whether or not to monitor a station after each external communication:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details -> Metering ->Monitoring

T For each station, define the meter total recall destination for all external communications:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View):
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details ->Metering -
>Metering Total Recall ->Destination n°
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details -> Metering -
>Metering Total Recall ->Active

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

METER TOTAL RECALL CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ACTIVATION/USE
P.K.: Programmed Key – defined by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) or MMC-Station
S.K.: Soft Key

Type of station Without display With display, no soft keys With display, with soft keys

Service

Activating in manual mode, during -- P.K.: MTR + external nº + F.K.: Transfer

communication (local)

Activating in manual mode, when -- P.K.: MTR + external nº then, when the outside party answers, internal
idle nº + F.K.: Transfer

Activating in automatic mode -- Automatic

During recall, reading the directory -- P.K.: Read + P.K.: Read + if required
nº of the "monitored" station

Printing a metering ticket -- 2 S.K.: Print.

Stopping the ringer and keeping -- 1 S.K.: MTR-OK

the metering information on the
display

Acknowledging the meter total re- -- 1 S.K.: MTR-OK

call

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The recall is presented for 25 seconds ; if the recall is not acknowledged, the system temporarily
cancels the recall: it is presented again after any operation carried out on the station.
- If the destination station for the recall is busy, the metering information is temporarily displayed
and a sound signal is transmitted. As soon as it is free, the destination station for the recall should
receive the metering information.
- When a station is the destination for several meter total recalls, the one which has been there the
longest is presented first.
- The service can only be used on external lines providing metering information (hence, not on ana-
log ATLs).
- A meter total recall does not follow a call forwarding.
- A "meter total recall" can be combined with a "trunk allocation" (see corresponding file).
- The character "#" precedes the number of the metering ticket printed on a meter total recall.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES REMOTE SUBSTITUTION

File
REMOTE SUBSTITUTION
54

DESCRIPTION

The remote substitution service enables an employee who is outside of the business premises or at
home to call a correspondent on the public network from a DTMF set (via the TL/T0/T2 access) or a
user on a remote PCX on the same private network (via the ATL or the QSIG accesses) as if he were at
work.

The user must pay for the call to the system; the company is charged for the call between the system
and the external correspondent.

PUBLIC
NETWORK

Caller Called
T2/T0/TL ATL/QSIG
T2/T0

Called
Set carrying the
communication

CONFIGURATION

T To authorize or deny access to the service, for each station:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Features -> Part 2 -> "Remote Substitution"

T To validate the service in the public numbering plan (operates without base or NMT):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Public Numbering Plan -> Remote Substitution
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> PubNum -> Disa

T To define the service access code – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

External Lines -> Remote substitution -> Access control code

T To define the voice guidance message (none, message 1 to 8) – MMC-PM5 (Expert View) only:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

REMOTE SUBSTITUTION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

External Lines -> Remote Substitution -> Voice Guidance Message

T To define the system reaction if no DTMF receiver is available (Call Waiting or Release) – MMC-
PM5 (Expert View) only:
External Lines -> Remote Substitution -> Wait for DTMF Receiver

ACTIVATION/USE

No. received ="Remote YES

Analysis of the incoming Substitution" service in Ringing tone sent to
dialing the Internal Numbering calling party
Plan?

NO After time-out NO
expiry, MF receiver Call failure
Assigned?

DDI Call YES

Voice Guidance Message or

dial tone
The user dials
- the access code
- the number of the set
- the personal code *

NO
Correct dialing? Call failure

YES
* For security reasons this personal code
must be different from the default code
Dial the number requested
on the public network

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- The traffic sharing and barring link categories are those of the local user.
- A single DTMF receiver is available at any given time.
- Metering: Every call generates 2 statement lines: one line for the incoming call (with Type = inco-
ming transit call using remote substitution <SI), the other is for the outgoing call (with Type =
outgoing transit call using remote substitution IS>).

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES FAX CALL ROUTING

File
FAX CALL ROUTING
55

DESCRIPTION

This feature enables Alcatel OmniPCX Office users to receive voice and fax calls on the same number:
their correspondents use a single number for either function. Once configured:

- all voice calls make the set ring;

- all fax calls are routed to the associated fax number. A text message advises the user that a fax has
arrived.

Modem type calls are also detected ; these calls are answered by the recipient (modem connected to
an analog access) or by an integrated modem if configured in the OS group. The call is refused if no
modem is present.

Public network Private network

External Fax and stations Internal Fax and stations

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

This feature requires that a destination fax number be configured for every user wishing to take ad-
vantage of this service; the number is attached to the station's DDI number in the public numbering
plan.

A greeting (general pre-announcement) has to be configured to keep the correspondent waiting during
the fax detection phase.

Handling calls to the OS group

- If the general pre-announcement message is configured, every incoming call is assessed for pos-
sible routing.
- There is no need to associate a fax or modem number; fax calls are routed to the first analog in-
terface in the system and modem calls to the integrated modem (default configuration).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

FAX CALL ROUTING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

ISDN CONNECTION

Incoming call from user XXX

NO Fax number
associated?

YES

NO Service for this

Service for this NO
call = Fax 2/3
call = VOICE? or Fax 4?

YES
NO

NO Detection of YES
fax signals by
DSP?

The call rings station Call is routed to the

XXX associated fax number

Notas :

If the service is not active (no associated fax number), any call with a service other than VOICE will be
refused (service incompatibility).

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
55

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES FAX CALL ROUTING

ANALOG CONNECTION

Incoming call from user XXX

NO Fax number
associated?

YES

NO Detection of fax
signals by DSP?

YES

The call rings station XXX Call is routed to the

associated fax number

Notas :

If the service is not active (no associated fax number), fax calls (with VOICE service) are put through to
the user station.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

FAX CALL ROUTING CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

CONFIGURATION

T Enter the destination fax number:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Numbering Plans -> Public Numbering Plan
-> Fax
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> PubNum -> FaxRou

T Assigning welcome messages:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers Misc. -> Preannouncement
- by MMC-Station: PreAnn -> Add -> Msg

T To define the pre-announcement mode (none, mode 1- before call distribution or mode 2- during
call distribution) in accordance with the time range:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers Misc. -> Preannouncement
- by MMC-Station: PreAnn -> Add -> Mode

Notas :

It is always the general pre-announcement that is used for fax call routing, even if there is a personal
pre-announcement message configured.

Whatever the pre-announcement configuration, the message will be broadcast once and once only,
always before call distribution.

The "Busy" flag (accessed via PM5 -> Subscribers Misc. -> Pre-announcement ->Details) does not
apply to fax call routing.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- Fax call routing cannot be used simultaneously with CCBS.

- Fax call routing can be used simultaneously with fax notification (see that section): in this case, the
user receives 2 messages signaling the receipt of a fax.
- There may be a slight delay between the moment the call reaches the system and the moment it is
put through to the station or fax; this is due to the workload on the DSPs in charge of fax detection.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES FAX NOTIFICATION

File
FAX NOTIFICATION
56

DESCRIPTION

The fax notification service informs users (whose stations have displays and Message LEDs) when they
have just received a fax.

CONFIGURATION

T Program the "Fax Notification" table by creating the Fax n° <-> Subscriber n° links with:
- fax numbers from the internal, public or private numbering plans
- subscriber numbers from the internal numbering plan.
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers Misc. -> Fax Notification for Subscribers
- by MMC-Station: Global -> FaxTab -> ReSubs and FaxNum

ACTIVATION/USE

When a fax has been received, the system displays the message: "Incoming Fax" on the recipient subs-
criber's station (depending on the configuration of the "Fax Notification" table) along with the number
of the receiving fax machine.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- A subscriber can supervise several fax numbers.

- A fax n° can be supervised by several subscribers.
- The "Fax Notification" table is limited to 30 entries.
- To deactivate fax notification on a subscriber station, break the Fax n° <-> Subscriber n° link con-
figured in the "Fax Notification" table.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

FAX NOTIFICATION CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES LIST OF SERVICES OFFERED

File
LIST OF SERVICES OFFERED
57

4003 4011 4012 4023 4034 Z DECT

First Easy Pre- Advan-
Station mium ced
Service

Account code before setting up a call • • • • • • •

Account code during communication • • • • • •
Amplification of the handset audio • • • • •
Amplified reception • • • • •
Answering a call (automatic connection) • • • • • • •
Answering a call (manual connection) • • • • •
Answering camped-on calls • • • • • • •
Appointment reminder • • • • •
Auto. call setup on going off hook • • • • • • •
Auto-answer mode (intercom mode) • • •
Automatic call-back request on busy station • • • • • • •
Automatic call-back request on busy trunk • • • • • • •
group

Background music • • • •
Block dialing mode • • • • •
Broadcast call (receive) • • • •
Broadcast call (send) • • • • • • •
Call by collective speed dial number • • • • • • •
Call parking and parked call retrieval • • • • • • •
Call pick-up within a group • • • • • • •
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) • • • • • • •
Camp-on on busy station or group • • • • • • •
Cancel all active forwardings • • • • • • •
Common hold (and retrieval) • • • • • •
Communication mute • • • • •
Conference • • • • • • •

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

LIST OF SERVICES OFFERED CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

4003 4011 4012 4023 4034 Z DECT

First Easy Pre- Advan-
Station mium ced
Service

COnnected Line identification Presentation • • • • •

(COLP)

COnnected Line identification Restriction • • • • • • •

(COLR)

Connection handover •
Consultation of camped-on caller identities • •
Contrast of the display and icons • • • •
Deferred call-back request (leave a) • • • • • • •
Deferred call-back request (receive a) • • • • • if LED •
Dial by name • • • • •
Digit-by-digit dialing mode • • • • • • •
Direct internal or external call by program- • • • • • •
med key

Display correspondent's name or number • • • • •

Display date and time • • • • •
Do Not Disturb (DND) • • • • • • •
DTMF end-to-end signaling • • • • • • •
Dynamic routing • • • • • • •
Enquiry call • • • • • • •
Exclusive hold (and retrieval) • • • • • • •
External forwarding • • • • • • •
Fax Notification • • • • •
Follow-me • • • • • • •
Forced DTMF end-to-end signaling • • • • • • •
Forward on busy • • • • • • •
Forwarding to pager • • • • • • •
Gain switch forcing • • • • •
General monitoring • • • • • •
Handsfree • • • •
Headset mode manual or automatic res- • • •
ponse

Identity of the station (number and name) • • • • •

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
57

CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES LIST OF SERVICES OFFERED

4003 4011 4012 4023 4034 Z DECT

First Easy Pre- Advan-
Station mium ced
Service

Identity of the sub-device connected to the • • • •

station

Immediate forwarding of group calls • • • • • • •

Immediate forwarding of personal calls • • • • • • •
Indication of the cost of a communication • • • • •
Individual call pick-up • • • • • • •
Intercom intrusion on free • • • • • •
Internal group call • • • • • • •
Internal station call • • • • • • •
Intrusion • • • • • • •
Keypad dialing features • • • • •
Main PCX recall (calibrated loopbreak) • • • • • • •
Malicious call identification • • • • • • •
Meter total recall • • • • •
Non answered calls repertory • • • • •
On-hook dialing • • • • •
PCX forwarding • • • • • • •
Paging • • • • • • •
Personal Assistant • • • • • • •
Personal code • • • • • • •
Personal speed dial numbers • • • • • •
Private call • • • • • • •
Programmable function keys • • • • • •
Protection of a call against camp-on and • • • • • • •
camp-on tone

Redial (last emitted number redial) • • • • • • •

Release-reseize • • • •
Remote forwarding • • • • • • •
Remote substitution • • • • • • •
Roaming •
Screening (manager station) • • • •

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

LIST OF SERVICES OFFERED CALL SERVER : TELEPHONE FEATURES

4003 4011 4012 4023 4034 Z DECT

First Easy Pre- Advan-
Station mium ced
Service

Screening (secretary station) • • • •

Seamless handover •
Select the display language • • • • •
Select the ringing tune and adjust its volume • • • • • •
level

Select the type of alphabetical keyboard • •

Select the type of calls to be forwarded • • • • • •
Selective forwarding • • • • • • •
Selective monitoring • • • •
Shuttle • • • • • • •
Station lock/unlock • • • • • • •
Sub-address • • • • •
Supervised call ringing • • • • •
Supervised transfer • • • • • • •
Switch to normal or restricted mode •
Teamwork • • • • •
Temporary memory • • • • •
Text answering • • • •
Text mail • • • • •
Transfer of two external lines • • • • • • •
Trunk allocation • • • • • • •
Unassigned night answer • • • • • • •
Unsupervised transfer (on camp-on) • • • • • • •
Unsupervised transfer (on no answer) • • • • • • •
User-to-User Signaling (receiving) • • • • •
User-to-User Signaling (sending) • •
Voice mail unit • • • • • • •
Wake-up • •
Withdraw from group • • • • • • •

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
CALL SERVER : Integrated Voice Mail Unit

SECTION

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED

VOICE MAIL UNIT

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE

MAIL UNIT

Section CALL SERVER : Integrated Voice Mail Unit

OUTLINE FILE 1

SYSTEM OPERATION FILE 2

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS FILE 3

"VISUAL MAILBOX" INTERFACE FILE 4

EXTERNAL VOICE MAIL UNIT FILE 5

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE

VOICE MAIL UNIT (INDEX) MAIL UNIT

Section CALL SERVER : Integrated Voice Mail Unit

(Index)

"VISUAL MAILBOX" INTERFACE FILE 4

EXTERNAL VOICE MAIL UNIT FILE 5

OUTLINE FILE 1

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS FILE 3

SYSTEM OPERATION FILE 2

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE OUTLINE
MAIL UNIT

File
OUTLINE
1

ENVIRONMENT

The voice server (or VMU: Voice Mail Unit) is an integrated Alcatel OmniPCX Office application which
offers the following functions:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

OUTLINE CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

Message reviewing
Mailbox initialization - Previous/Next
- Replay
- Record name - Clear
- Entering Password - Sending a copy
- Callback
- Pause
- Forward/Back

Conversation reviewing

- Previous/Next
- Replay
- Clear
- Sending a copy
Voice server - Callback
Alcatel OmniPCX Office
Sending/forwarding messages

Message screening

Recording of
conversations

Distribution lists

Personal Assistant

Automated Attendant

Customizing the mailbox

Statistics
- Greeting/Name
- Number of calls forwarded/mailbox - Notification (signaling)
- Number of calls forwarded/personal assistant - Answer Only/recording mode
- Number of messages / mailbox - Personal Assistant
- Memory / mailbox capacity - Language
- Password

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE OUTLINE

MAIL UNIT

AVAILABLE FEATURES

BASIC SERVICES
- Voice Mail Unit: all the standard voice mail features are provided, including filtering, personal
assistants, and a mailbox for every user.
- VMU ports: 2 ports are provided for voice mail access in Connected mode; they are included in
the VMU group (1st system group) and in the default OS (Operator Station) group.
- Message storage capacity: 20 minutes

OPTIONAL SERVICES
The following services can be accessed with the appropriate software licenses:

- VMU ports: up to 8 ports; each new port is added to the VMU group and the default OS group
automatically (or by the installer).
- Message storage capacity: the message storage capacity can be extended up to 80 minutes with
an XMEM64 board and up to 200 hours with a hard disk.
- Automated Attendant
- Audiotex
- Distribution lists
- Recording of conversations

Nota : If the Automated Attendant is not open, calls go through to the general mailbox.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

OUTLINE CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

OPERATING MODES: CONNECTED/APPLICATION/CSTA

Application mode (or VMU user with the Mail key)

This mode can only be used by Alcatel OmniPCX Office system subscribers. The voice server is not
affected by incoming calls, but is activated like any other system application - in this case, by a Mail
key or by dialing the Mail code defined in the internal numbering plan.

If the required DSP resources (monitoring, recording, and MF detection for analog terminals) are una-
vailable, the server will not be activated.

User interface

In this mode, the method for navigating through the voice server menus depends on the type of termi-
nal:

- 4023, 4034 and Advanced stations : all operations are performed using soft keys and are gui-
ded by hints on the display.
- 4011, 4012, Easy and Premium stations: all operations are performed using the keypad and
are guided by hints on the display as well as by voice prompts and the dynamic menu called up by
the i key.
- 4003, First and analog stations: all operations are performed using the keypad and are guided
by voice prompts.

Port allocation

Analog ports are not used in Application mode.

Connected mode (or user with VMU group access code)

In this mode:

- the VMU is accessed by dialing the VMU group directory number (in France, 500).
- the Automated Attendant is accessed by dialing the OS group (in France, 9)
- Audiotex is accessed via the numbering plans DDI and internal.

If the required DSP resources (monitoring, recording, silence/noise, DTMF) are unavailable, the acti-
vation of the server is postponed and the user is camped on.

User interface

In this mode, navigation is performed with the aid of voice prompts, whatever type of terminal is used.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE OUTLINE

MAIL UNIT

Port allocation

The CPU board provides from 2 to 8 ports, meaning that up to 8 users in Connected mode can simul-
taneously access the Voice Mail Unit, the Automated Attendant and Audiotex.

Port addresses: 91-001-1 to 91-008-1; all ports are seen at all times; those that are not "In Service"
are seen as "Out of Service".
Each service is called up using the number of a group containing one or more ports. A same port can
be assigned to one or more groups.

Reaction on VMU busy

If the server is called by a port directory number, the system recognizes two kinds of busy status:

- 1st-degree busy (up to 2 calls on the same port): new calls are camped on until the port is released.
- 2nd-degree busy (more than 2 calls on the same port): new calls are immediately rejected.

If the server is called by a group number, the call distribution mechanisms on group busy are applied;
the caller is camped on the group, depending on the number of terminals in the group.

CSTA mode
This is the mode used when the server is accessed via the CSTA interface; for details of how this mode
is used, see “Visual Mailbox Interface".

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

OUTLINE CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

SYSTEM LIMITS

Global constraints (dependent on software keys)

- 2 to 8 VMU ports
- Storage capacity: 20 minutes (CPU), 80 minutes (with XMEM64) or 200 hours (with hard disk)
- 2 to 4 languages

Voice mail unit

- 250 user mailboxes + 1 general (or common) mailbox
- up to 51 distribution lists (including one broadcast list for all users)
- recording times are limited:
Service Limit Default value
Welcome message Max.30 seconds, and depen- None
ding on available memory:

- basic CPU: 250 seconds

- with XMEM64: 1000 se-
conds
- with hard disk: 8750 se-
conds
Mailbox name Max. 5 seconds None
Message recording Max. 180 seconds 120 seconds
Recording a conversation Unlimited Depends on voice server stora-
ge capacity
Remote notification message Max. 20 seconds

- access to certain features may be barred or dependent on access rights

Service Barring Access right
Remote message notification YES YES
Remote consultation of a mail- N/A YES
box after message notification
Recording a conversation N/A YES
Personal Assistant YES for external destinations NO
Remote Configuration N/A YES for the configuration of re-
mote notification parameters

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE OUTLINE

MAIL UNIT

Automated Attendant
- recording times are limited:
Service Limit Default value
Enterprise welcome message Max. 120 seconds None
Announcement menus and sub- Max. 120 seconds None
menus
Good-bye message Max. 20 seconds None

Audiotex - information messages

- up to 50 information messages
- recording times are limited:
Service Limit Default value
Enterprise welcome message Max. 20 seconds None
Good-bye message Max. 20 seconds None
Information message Max. 240 seconds 120 seconds

CONFIGURATION TOOLS

The voice server is configured using the system configuration tool PM5. The configurator PC must
have a sound card to record the welcome messages and the Automated Attendant menus (for more
information, see "Voice prompts management" in the section "PM5: System configuration").

If the PC does not have a sound card, the MMC-station can be used to record enterprise welcome mes-
sages and good-bye messages, Automated Attendant menus and sub-menus, Audiotex messages, dis-
tribution list names and the welcome message for the general mailbox.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

OUTLINE CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SYSTEM OPERATION
MAIL UNIT

File
SYSTEM OPERATION
2

ACCESS TO THE VMU OR TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

Access in connected mode (GP 500)

VMU answer: dial

the box number

Enter the mailbox

number * key

Enter a Access to Automated

password (4 digits) Attendant

Access to the Automated Attendant

user mailbox menu

# key

Nota : You can switch from the VMU to the Automated Attendant at any time by pressing the * key
and back again by pressing the # key.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/18

SYSTEM OPERATION CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

Description
The Automated Attendant is only accessible in voice server Connected mode:

- by dialing the enterprise's public number (outgoing call);

- or by dialing the VMU group number (internal call) or the directory number for the VMU port. The
user then presses the * key to access the Automated Attendant Main menu;

- or exclusively by dialling the VMU group number if the Mailbox Consultation flag (PM5 -> Voice
Processing -> General Parameters -> Mailbox Consultation) is inactive;

- By dynamic routing:

- level 1: an internal or external call is routed through to the user's mailbox if it exists. If not, the
"no mailbox" default function is activated and the call goes through to the Automated Attendant.
- level 2: an external call is routed through to the OS group; if there is no answer, the default OS
group is used and the call goes through to the Automated Attendant (provided the VMU ports
are included in the default OS group).
- level 1 or 2: if the "Auto. Attendant (lev.1)" or "Auto. Attendant (lev. 2)" flags are activated at the
station's dynamic routing level.

The Automated Attendant greets the caller with the enterprise welcome message and transfers the call
to the appropriate destination. To establish communication, all the possibilities open to the caller are
set out in a Main voice menu and/or submenus.

The Automated Attendant can be customized to suit the individual requirements of the enterprise. For
this reason, the range of options available during working hours is different from that offered out of
hours. There are consequently two Automated Attendant menus, completely independent from each
other. The switch between the "Opening Hours" menu and the "Closing Hours" menu can be made
either manually by the Administrator (by forcing restricted or normal mode) or automatically, accor-
ding to a pre-programmed schedule defined in the system opening hours settings (opening hours =
normal mode, closing hours = restricted mode).

The Automated Attendant is multilingual: the voice prompt language can be selected by the caller.

Nota : Only the menus of the main language can be customized.

Call processing example

For a more detailed look, let's take the example of a caller picked up by the Automated Attendant.
First of all, he hears the enterprise welcome message. Then he is instructed to press the star key (op-
tional).

The "Press Star" question is a specific function for establishing whether the correspondent has a set with
a voice frequency keyboard.
He can then select the language for the voice prompts (optional).
The caller now comes to the Automated Attendant Main menu, in which specific menus are assigned
to the keyboard keys. He can choose from the proposed Main menu functions:

2/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SYSTEM OPERATION

MAIL UNIT

- Free dialing: the caller is prompted to dial an internal destination number.

- Transfer to subscriber: the caller is routed to a predefined internal number.

- Transfer to operator station: the caller is routed to the OS.

- External transfer: the caller is routed to an external number. If the transfer recipient is not available,
the transfer fails and the call returns to the Automated Attendant main menu.

Remarque : external transfer is applied after configuration of a speed dial number in PM5 (Voice
Processing/Automated Attendant/Automated Attendant Menu/Transfer to Station/
Group).

- Information message: the caller hears an information message that may be chained with other in-
formation messages.

- General mailbox: the caller is routed to the general mailbox.

- Leave a message: the caller is prompted to enter a mailbox number in order to leave a message.

- Mailbox: the caller is routed to a predefined mailbox.

Notas :

The possibilities available on initialization are specific to each country.

Example of Automated Attendant structure

System call

Enterprise welcome message + optional question

Press * key + select language (option)

Automated Attendant

0 - Not used
1 - Free dialing
2 - Transfer to station
3 - Transfer to OS Mailbox
4 - Information message Record
welcome
5 - Leave a message Mailbox message
message
6 - Mailbox n°
7 - Common mailbox
8 - Release
9 - Sub-menu

Default function
The "Default function" is obtained when the caller fails to choose a function from the proposed list or
when the application cannot interpret his choice (the caller may not have a voice frequency terminal).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/18

SYSTEM OPERATION CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

On initialization, the default function is "Transfer to Attendant".

Direct call
The Automated Attendant can be used at a simple level, replacing the Main menu with a single pos-
sibility. The Direct Call function routes the caller directly to a predefined function after the welcome
message and the optional "Press Star" and "Select Language" questions.

Consulting a mailbox
Once he has got through to the Automated Attendant, the caller can access his mailbox directly (if he
has one) by pressing the # key and entering his subscriber number and password. For a more detailed
description, see the "Consulting a mailbox" section under "Services available to users".

Notas :

This possibility is not announced by the voice server.

Configuration
T To record the 2 welcome messages (opening hours/closing hours):
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Automated Attendant -> Greeting ->
Opening Hours/Closing Hours-> Voice Prompt - Greeting
- By MMC-Station: VMU -> AutoAt -> Day or Night

T To record the good-bye message:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Automated Attendant -> Goodbye ->
Voice Prompt - Goodbye
- By MMC-Station: VMU -> AutoAt -> Gdbye

T To enable/disable the "Press Star" question:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Automated Attendant -> Greeting ->
Opening Hours/Closing Hours -> "Press Star" question

T To enable/disable the "Select Language" question:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Automated Attendant -> Greeting ->
Opening Hours/Closing Hours -> "Select language" question

T To define the "Direct Call" function (opening hours/closing hours):

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Automated Attendant -> Greeting ->
Opening Hours/Closing Hours -> Single function AA

T To define the action to be taken in the event of transfer to a non-existent mailbox or in answering-
only mode:

4/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SYSTEM OPERATION

MAIL UNIT

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Automated Attendant -> Greeting ->
Opening Hours/Closing Hours -> Mailbox function

T To define the "Default" function (opening hours/closing hours):

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Automated Attendant -> Greeting ->
Opening Hours/Closing Hours -> Automated Attendant function

T Choose the type of transfer:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. La-
bels -> "AATypTrf" = 0 if blind transfer or = 1 if semi-supervised transfer"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> "AATypTrf = 0 if blind transfer or =
1 if semi-supervised transfer" -> Return -> Memory

Additional Information
- 2 types of transfers are offered: semi-supervised transfer or blind transfer.

- Semi-supervised transfer: The Automated Attendant only transfers calls to available internal users:
- if the user does not answer: the call is transferred and dynamic routing is activated.
- if the user is busy (grade 1 or 2): the call is not transferred and the user is returned to the Auto-
mated Attendant Main menu.

- Blind transfer: The Automated Attendant transfers calls to available internal or busy grade 1 users:

- if the user does not answer: the call is transferred and dynamic routing is activated.
- if the user is grade 1 busy: the call is transferred and put on hold: the call on hold is indicated
on the destination set display.
- if the user is busy grade 2: the call is not transferred and the user is returned to the Automated
Attendant Main menu.

- For outside transfers, there is no grade 1 busy state; if the transfer recipient is not available, the
transfer fails and the call comes back to the Automated Attendant Main menu.

- Role of the * key

- on connection to the Automated Attendant: the enterprise welcome message and the "Press
Star" question are skipped and the caller is prompted to select his preferred language (if con-
figured) or is put through directly to the Main menu.
- while listening to an information message:
- if the caller accessed the information message from the Automated Attendant Main menu,
pressing the * key while listening to the message brings him back to the Main menu, where
all the options are listed anew;
- if the caller accessed the information message from one of the Automated Attendant sub-
menus, pressing the * key while listening to the message brings him back to the sub-menu,
where all the options are listed anew.

- Role of the # key

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/18

SYSTEM OPERATION CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

- on connection to the Automated Attendant: the caller can consult his mailbox (if he has one);
the enterprise greeting, "Press Star" question and "Select Language" question are skipped.
- while listening to an information message: enable the user to skip the message.

6/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SYSTEM OPERATION

MAIL UNIT

AUDIOTEX

Description
An Audiotex consists of a sequence of information messages.

2 mutually independent Audiotex services are provided: one for opening hours, the other for the com-
pany's closing hours.

One can switch between them either manually or automatically, using the same time ranges as defined
in the Alcatel OmniPCX Office system.

Activation
Audiotex can be accessed in either of 2 ways (if a menu is available for access to an information mes-
sage):

- by an external call - dialing the Audiotex DDI number, or

- by an internal call - dialing the internal number for the Automated Attendant.

System call

Enterprise welcome message + optional question

Press * key + select language (option)

Audiotex

Information message 1
+
Information message 2
+ Transfer to Operator Station
Information message 3 (Optional)

When the caller dials the DDI number for the Audiotex service, he automatically hears the enterprise
welcome message. The next two stages are optional:

- He is asked to press the * key to check that he has a voice frequency terminal (this option can be
configured by PM5);
- Then he can select his preferred language for navigating in Audiotex (configurable using PM5).

Finally he will be put through to the first information message; this message may be chained with
others or followed by forwarding to the OS, for example.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/18

SYSTEM OPERATION CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

Default function
The default function is obtained when the application cannot interpret the numbers dialed by the caller
(for example, at the end of an information message, the caller is prompted to dial the number of the
person he wants to contact). This default function is identical to the one used for the Automated Atten-
dant and must be configured from within the Automated Attendant (see "Default function" in the "Auto-
mated Attendant" chapter).

Role of the * and # keys

- * key:
- on connection to Audiotex: the company's welcome message and "Press Star" question are skip-
ped and the caller is prompted to select his preferred language (if configured) or is played the
first information message.
- while listening to a message: the voice server is released after playing a good-bye message.
- # key: skips the current information message and moves on to the next

Message configuration
T To set the first information message:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Information Messages -> Audio Text

T To set the information messages:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Information Messages

Number of configurable messages: 50

The various functions at the end of the welcome message are only available with PM5:
- Not used: if the caller is in the Automated Attendant, then he is returned to the previous level;
if the caller is in Audiotex, the good-bye message is played and the voice server is released.
- Free dialing: the caller is prompted to dial an internal destination number.
- Transfer to subscriber: the caller is routed to a predefined internal number.
- Transfer to operator station: the caller is routed to the OS.
- Information message: the caller is played an information message.
- General mailbox: the caller is routed to the general mailbox.
- Leave a message: the caller is prompted to enter a mailbox number in order to leave a messa-
ge.
- Mailbox: the caller is routed to a predefined mailbox.
- Release: the call is released after playing a good-bye message.

8/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SYSTEM OPERATION

MAIL UNIT

T To record the information messages:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Information Messages
- By MMC-Station: VMU -> InfMsg

T To record the 2 welcome messages (day and night):

- By MMC-Station: VMU -> AudTx -> Day or Night

T To record the good-bye message:

- By MMC-Station: VMU -> AudTx -> Gdbye

T To enable/disable the "Press Star" question:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Information Messages ->Audio Text ->
Opening Hours/Closing Hours -> "Press Star" question

T To enable/disable the "Select Language" question:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Information Messages ->Audio Text ->
Opening Hours/Closing Hours -> "Select language" question

Configuration of the Audio Text DDI number in the numbering plan

1. Open a PM5 session.

2. Go to the Numbering Plan window by clicking on Numbering Plan and then on Numbering
Plans.

3. Select the Restricted public numbering plan tab.

4. From the Function drop-down menu, select AudioText.

5. Complete the fields:

- Start and End: these fields contain the DDI call number of the system Audio Text service con-
sisting of 8 characters maximum from 0 to 9, * and #.

- Base: in general, the base is equal to the internal directory number of the automated attendant.
It is used to ensure correspondence between the DDI number of the Audio Text and the internal
directory number (IDN) of the automatic attendant. This correspondence is based on the for-
mula IDN = DDI number of Audio Text service - Start + Base.

All incoming calls are routed to Audio Text. The caller is played the welcome message, then the
information message. He can then access the services configured.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/18

SYSTEM OPERATION CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

MANAGING MAILBOXES

Description
On initialisation, every subscriber in the installation is automatically allocated a mailbox(except ana-
log Z stations).

Each mailbox can operate in any of 3 modes. The operating mode of each mailbox is configured by
the installation Administrator (standard mode on initialization):
- Mailbox in standard mode
This mode provides access to a range of functions. The owner can switch between standard mode
and answering-only mode, but not into guest mode.
- Mailbox in guest mode
This mode, designed for Hotel use, offers more limited functions. Only the "Leave Message" and
"Consult Message" functions are available; any caller can leave a message to be consulted by the
guest, but under no circumstances can the guest send any messages. The password is only required
when the guest consults his mailbox remotely. The guest cannot switch his mailbox into standard
or answering-only mode.
- Mailbox in answering-only mode
This mode can be adopted by users who don't want to receive messages; the caller hears only the
welcome message but cannot leave a message, then the server releases the call (if a personal gree-
ting has been recorded).
The owner of a mailbox in answering-only mode can switch it into standard mode and vice versa
(see "Customization"), but not into guest mode.

First consultation
When the mailbox is used for the first time, the messaging service must be activated from the terminal
in Application mode. The user is then asked to enter a password and register his name; the mailbox
is then initialized.

If the user accidentally activates the voice mail unit in Connected mode, he will find that he is refused
access to his mailbox.
Subsequent consultations can be made in Application mode or Connected mode (see "Operating mo-
des: Connected/Application/CSTA")

Nota : The password is only required if the parameter Password required for mailbox consul-
tation (PM5 -> Voice Processing -> General Parameters) is validated; if not, the password
is not necessary.

Deleting a mailbox
The Administrator can delete mailboxes. If the mailbox contains messages (read or unread), these are
kept for X minutes and can be consulted by the user in Application mode; if the mailbox is allocated
to someone else within the period of X minutes, the messages are lost.

{0>" Suppression des boîtes vocales "<}67{> Deleting mailboxes "<0}

From version R2.0, you may use PM5 to delete the mailboxes of all the selected users: Subscribers/
Basestations List -> Del. Mailboxes

10/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SYSTEM OPERATION

MAIL UNIT

Dead mailbox timeout durations:

- System is in "Business" mode: timeout X = 5 minutes

- System is in "Hotel" mode: timeout X = 50 minutes

This value can be modified in PM5 (unit = 100 milliseconds; min value = 0; max value = 32767 i.e.
about 54 minutes): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Timer Labels -> DeadM-
bTo

Non-Existent Mailbox function

This function offers the following possibilities in the event of a call being forwarded or put through by
the Automated Attendant to a non-existent mailbox:

- Not used: the caller is routed to the Automated Attendant (default setting).
- Free dialing: the caller is prompted to dial an internal destination number.
- Transfer to subscriber: the caller is routed to a predefined internal number.
- Transfer to operator station: the caller is routed to the OS.
- Information message: the caller is played an information message chained with the welcome mes-
sage.
- General mailbox: the caller is routed to the general mailbox.
- Leave a message: the caller is prompted to enter a mailbox number in order to leave a message.
- Mailbox: the caller is routed to a predefined mailbox.
- Release: the call is released after playing the good-bye message.

Nota : This function is also activated for mailboxes in Answer Only mode when the user has not
personalized the greeting.

Configuration
T To define the type of each mailbox:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Mailbox -> Options -> Mailbox Mode
- By customization: MbxAnn -> Mode -> Select

T To define the action to be taken in the event of transfer to a non-existent mailbox or in answering-
only mode:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Automated Attendant -> Greeting ->
Opening Hours/Closing Hours -> Mailbox function

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/18

SYSTEM OPERATION CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

Voicemail for attendant groups

On initialisation and unlike the handsets, there is no automatic allocation of voicemail to groups.
From version R2.0, it is possible to allocate, by PM5, a voicemail to each group via the configuration
of a virtual terminal; virtual terminals correspond to physical addresses 96-001-01, 96-002-01, etc.).

The virtual terminal is configured in diversion on the group concerned; in fact the group is called by
the directory number of the terminal.

Remote customisation enables a name to be allocated to a voicemail, a welcome message to be re-

corded or the password to be changed (the default password is used to access the mail in on-line mode
while the mailbox is not initialised).
Should the current password be lost, it is possible, for a virtual terminal to retrieve the default password
by PM5 ->List of Subscribers/Basestations ->Details -> Personal code -> Reset.

The allocation of a Voicemail unit key to each dedicated handset of the group enables these handsets
to:

- be alerted to a new message in the group voicemail.

- to check the group voicemail; while voicemail is not initialised, access by this key prompts the start
up of the initialisation sequence (change of password and saving of the name).

Dynamic routing must be configured to direct unanswered calls to the VMU (500) group.

Configuration

T To create virtual terminals (one per group):

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Add -> check "Virtual Terminals" and enter the number

T To allocate a voicemail to each virtual terminal:

- By DHM-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations Lists -> List of Subscribers/Base sta-
tions -> Details -> Voicemail -> "Yes" to the question "Subscriber XXX does not have
voicemail, do you wish to create one?

T To allocate to each attendant group a Voicemail unit key:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Function Key = Voicemail Unit.

Nota : After a cold reset, ensure voicemail is reallocated to the virtual terminals in an or-
derly fashion, that is, to the related groups following the order of creation prior to
the reset.

12/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SYSTEM OPERATION

MAIL UNIT

MANAGING THE GENERAL MAILBOX

Description
On initialization, a general (or common) mailbox is created. This mailbox, accessible in consultation-
only mode from the operator station, enables the messages left there to be forwarded to other users
in the installation.

The caller accesses the general mailbox via the Automated Attendant or Audiotex, providing the Ge-
neral mailbox function has been configured by the Administrator.

Activation
The general mailbox is accessed from an operator station or from another station belonging to the
installation (equipped with soft keys) by:

- pressing the fixed Mail key

- pressing the GalMbx soft key
- enter the Operator/Attendant password ('help1954' by default).

Nota : For stations with soft keys and with a number pad, proceed as follows:

- press the fixed Mail key.

- press the Voice key.
- press the Return or code * key.
- enter the general mailbox number (= operator/attendant call number as defined in the internal
numbering plan, 9 for example).
- enter the Operator/Attendant password ('help1954' by default).

Nota : To access the general mailbox in Connected mode from inside or outside the company, it
is necessary to change the operator's password so that it contains numbers only (correspon-
ding to Q23 frequencies) and no letters.

Additional Information
- Not being assigned to any individual subscriber, the general mailbox cannot be customized; only
the welcome message can be configured.
- For the operator, there is no difference in the way general mailbox and private mailbox messages
are notified.
- As with other mailboxes, the general mailbox can only be consulted by one station at a time.
- When the operator forwards messages left in the general mailbox, the transfer data (identification,
date and time) are those of the initial message.
- The operator station can use the general mailbox in the dynamic routing, attendant diversion and/
or restricted mode services; then, the Automated Attendant will be used with a direct call to the ge-
neral mailbox access. The operator can redirect the external incoming calls to the general mailbox.
Different solutions are available (in all cases, the Automated Attendant will be dedicated to the di-
rect function "General Mailbox"; to do this, it is mandatory to record (by PM5 -> Automated Atten-
dant) a welcome message and to activate the Direct Access = General mailbox function):
- dynamic routing after X seconds to the general mailbox in the event of no answer from
the operator: to do this, program for the OS group nº 1 (or the current group within the time

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/18

SYSTEM OPERATION CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

range) a level 1 dynamic routing to group 500 (default group containing the VMU accesses)
with a timeout of X seconds. It is also possible to program a level 2 dynamic routing at general
level if the VMU accesses are configured in OS group nº 8.
- Immediate forwarding to general mailbox:
- 1st solution: use OS Forwarding towards the group containing the VMU accesses (group
500 by default).
- 2nd solution: use restricted mode provided the VMU accesses are in OS group nº 8.

Configuration
T To record the general mailbox welcome message:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Mailboxes -> General Mailbox -> Voi-
ce Prompt - General Mailbox
- By MMC-Station: VMU -> GalMbx

14/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SYSTEM OPERATION

MAIL UNIT

DISTRIBUTION LISTS

Description
Distribution lists enable users to send and copy messages to all the members on the list simply by dia-
ling the list name or number.

The system allows for a maximum of 51 lists to be compiled:

- 1 general broadcast list (number 000); this list is used to send a message to every voice mailbox
in the system
- 50 distribution lists (001 to 050)
- distribution lists can only be configured by the installation Administrator.

Configuration
T To configure the distribution lists by means of users' directory numbers:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Mailboxes -> Distribution Lists
- By MMC-Station: VMU -> List

Notas :

The content of distribution lists cannot be deleted or modified by the users.

T To record the distribution list names:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Mailboxes -> Distribution Lists
- By MMC-Station: VMU -> List -> Record

T To key in the distribution list names:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Mailboxes -> Distribution Lists
- By MMC-Station: VMU -> List -> Edit-> Name

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/18

SYSTEM OPERATION CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

STATISTICS

Description
The statistics are intended for:

- the administrator or operator (i.e. the person responsible for managing the messaging service on
the client side)
- the maintenance service (the distributor, for example).

The statistical function gathers data on the voice server and how it is used. The counter readings cor-
respond to the server activity since the last Reset.

Depending on the results, appropriate changes can be made to the settings in order to improve the
service.

Statistics on the Automated Attendant

T To read and reset the counters:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Statistics -> Automated Attendant

- Number of calls received by the Automated Attendant (= number of times the welcome message
was heard).
- Duration of calls for the Automated Attendant.
- Number of failed calls (no response to the "Press Star" question or no caller selection in the Auto-
mated Attendant Main menu).

Nota : All of these counters can be reset using the Reset function.

Statistics on Audiotex
T To read and reset the counters:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Statistics -> Audiotex

- Number of calls received by Audiotex (= number of times the welcome message was heard).
- Length of calls for Audiotex.
- Number of aborted calls (no response to the "Press Star" question or no selection by caller in the
Audiotex main menu).

Nota : These statistics are provided for opening and closing hours. All of these counters can be
reset using the Reset function.

16/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SYSTEM OPERATION

MAIL UNIT

Information messages statistics

T To read and reset the information message counters:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Statistics -> Information Messages

- Number of times each information message was heard (via the Automated Attendant or Audiotex).

Mailbox statistics
T To read and reset the mailbox counters for all subscribers:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Statistics -> Mailboxes

- Number of calls received by each subscriber (= number of times the welcome message was heard).
- Number of calls received by the personal assistant of each terminal.
- Number of messages left by callers.
- Length of recording of the messages not read by each subscriber.
- Length of recording of the messages read by each subscriber.
- Length of recording of conversations by each subscriber.

Statistics on VMU resources

T To read and reset the counters:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Statistics -> Resources

- Cumulative total for voice messages as a percentage of available memory capacity.

- Record of use over the last 7 days.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/18

SYSTEM OPERATION CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

HOTEL FEATURES

This chapter deals exclusively with the features provided in Hotel mode (as opposed to Business mode,
which concerns all the other chapters).

Check-in
When guests check in, they are automatically allocated a mailbox; its mode of operation (guest mode),
the password, and the language used for the voice prompts are all assigned automatically on check-in.

On consulting the mailbox for the first time, the guest must enter a password and register his or her
name. Until the name has been registered, the guest cannot consult his or her mailbox.

Consulting the mailbox

First consultation

Until the user name has been registered, the guest cannot access his or her mailbox. The first consul-
tation must be in Application mode (by dialing the Mail code or pressing the Mail key); the guest is put
directly through to his mailbox and must only register his name.

Subsequent consultations

The mailbox can subsequently be consulted in Application mode or in Connected mode (by dialing the
VMU or port number).

In Connected mode, the guest has to enter his mailbox number followed by his password. The pas-
sword may be read by the operator station via the "Hotel" key.
In Application mode, the guest is directly connected to his messages.

The messages received are automatically played back in sequence. The guest can replay messages
and use the Return, Pause, Next or Delete functions. Messages that have been listened to but not de-
leted are kept.

Check-out
When the guest checks out, the mailbox is automatically unallocated if it contains no messages. If any
messages remain, they are kept for 50 minutes, after which time the mailbox is definitively deleted.
They can be consulted in all modes.

18/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS
MAIL UNIT

File
SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS
3

USER INTERFACES

Description
The interface available for using the voice server depends on the type of terminal:

- stations without displays (First, 4003, 5010, 5015, and Z): voice prompts only; the options
offered by the voice prompts are selected using the keypad.
- stations with displays but without soft keys (Easy, Premium, 4011, 4012, 5018, 5022, and
DECT): voice prompts as well as display menus (using the keypad to navigate.
Voice prompt guidance can be disabled with the Customization function (it is enabled on initiali-
zation).
- stations with soft keys (Advanced, 4023, 4034, and 5028): navigation exclusively with soft
keys, depending on the menu displayed.

Specific functions
The # key can be used for:

- confirming the previous data

- skipping the current voice prompt and moving on to the next (e.g. skipping a mailbox greeting to
go straight to the recording stage, or skipping a message in order to access the processing options:
replay, delete, call back, send a copy, etc.).
- consulting a mailbox from within the Automated Attendant.

Nota : For decadic stations, the 9 key is used in place of the # key.

The * key can be used for:

- deleting an item of data

- returning to the previous menu.
- returning to the Automated Attendant menu from the Mailbox menu.

The 0 key can be used to access any additional menu options when a user consults his or her mailbox.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/20

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

Configuration
T To set the maximum waiting time for a response from the user (input a value, for example: 5 se-
conds by default, configurable from 5 to 15 seconds in 1-second increments):
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> General Parameters -> Timeout for
user's response

T To set the number of times the server should repeat messages requiring a response from the user
(to input a value, for example): 2 by default, configurable from 0 to 5:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> General Parameters -> Number of
warnings if no response

INITIALIZING MAILBOXES

Description
Mailboxes are initialized by their owners when they entering their individual passwords and register
their names. These operations are performed when the mailbox is first opened (Application mode
only).

Mise en service

Service Sets without soft keys Sets with soft keys (SK)
Initialization on first access F.K.: Mail FK (or "Mail" code) + F.K.: Mail FK + Password + Re-
Password + Record name cord name

Additional Information
- On first opening the mailbox: while recording the name, the user can (these options are displayed,
but not announced in the voice prompt):
- restart the recording from the beginning (* key);
- stop and terminate the recording (# key).

2/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS

MAIL UNIT

CONSULTING A MAILBOX (STANDARD MODE)

The diagram on the next page summarizes the mailbox consultation stages and options.

Description
This service enables users to call their mailbox and listen to any messages received (whether new or
already heard), listen to recorded conversations, send messages or remotely configure some mailbox
parameters (see appropriate paragraph).

This service is protected by a password (the same as for the subscriber). In Application mode however
consultation is possible without a password, depending on the state of the mailbox consultation flag
(PM5 -> Voice Processing -> General Parameters -> Mailbox Consultation). The default value
is no password.

Mise en service
Users access their mailboxes:

- in Application mode:
- sets with a fixed Mail key: using this key (or the appropriate code)
- stations with displays: Voice key + password
- stations without displays: password.
- stations without a fixed Mail key: Mail service code or programmed key + password

Additional Information
- The new message notification mode (voice prompt on going off-hook, LED or icon) depends on the
type of terminal; for analog sets with a LED, a virtual key has to be created. Conversation recor-
dings are not notified.

- Number of messages/conversations:
- stations with display: the number of messages (old and new) and the number of conversations
recorded are displayed at the start of the consultation.
- stations without displays:
- case 1: mailbox containing new messages only: a voice prompt indicates the number of new
messages.
- case 2: mailbox containing old messages only: a voice prompt indicates the number of messa-
ges already heard.
- case 3: mailbox containing new and old messages: only the number of new messages is an-
nounced.
- case 4: the number of conversations is never announced.

- When accessing the mailbox (Connected or Application mode) the "Mailbox -> Please enter the
mailbox number" menu can be opened by pressing the * key before entering the password (this
enables users to access their chosen mailbox).

- Email notification of new voice message:

In R2.0 (e-Business solutions only), an Email (HTML format, or text format if display with HTML is
not possible) is sent when a new message is left in the mailbox. The voice mail is sent as an atta-

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/20

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

chment in the form of a .WAV file (16 bits, 8 kHz). A voice mail that has been listened to via e-mail
is still regarded as a new message when consulting the mailbox.

Via the WBM, access the User Settings window. In the Voice messages field of the Absence tab,
check the Display voice message as an attachment (WAV) box to be notified when a voice mes-
sage is deposited in the box and to listen to it. For more information, see the User and User groups
section.

4/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS

MAIL UNIT

Application mode Connected mode

Fixed Key Code or
Messaging Messaging programmed Directory N°
(or code) key of VMU group

Voice
Enter mailbox N°
Yes

Yes
Default
password
Yes Enter a
Default password (4 digits)
password No
Password: only if managed by PM5 -> No
No Voice Processing -> General Parameters Name
recorded
Enter your password

Yes

Name No
recorded Enter your name Invalid entry

Yes

Possibilities
offerred during
Consulting mailbox message
playing
1 - Messages (read and unread)
2 - Conversations
1 - Listening
3 - Sending a message
2 - Clear
9 - Remote configuration
3 - Call
4 - Next
N°
5 - Previous
mail
6- Copy
box?
7 - <<
N° 8 -Pause
mail 9 - >>
box?

Recording
Message
(option)
Recording
Message

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/20

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

PLAYING BACK MESSAGES

Description
If at least one message has been left, the user can play back the messages in his mailbox, using a
range of possible functions (delete, next, replay, send a copy, call back, etc).

Messages are played back in two series: the new messages first, then the old ones. Each series is in
chronological order.

Caller identification
While the messages are played back, the terminal display indicates:

- the name of the caller - if known, and if the user has the corresponding feature rights
- otherwise, the caller's number
- **** if the caller has activated the CLIR or “Secrecy" service
- “Unknown" if the caller number is not recognized by the system.

The identity of the caller is never announced.

Date and time

The date and time of arrival are displayed on the terminal and announced before the message is
played back.

Call-back
When the caller's identity is known to the system (Calling Line Identification Presentation), this service
enables the user to immediately call back correspondents (whether internal or external) who leave a
message. The call-back number can contain a maximum of 20 digits. Call-back can be requested whi-
le still listening to the message, or afterwards.

There are several possibilities:

- Internal call: internal callers can be called back without restriction.
- If the VMU was activated in Connected mode, the transfer is of the semi-supervised type:
- if the user does not answer: the call is transferred and dynamic routing to the called-back sta-
tion is activated.
- if the user is busy (degree 1 or 2): the call is not transferred and the user is returned to the mes-
sage playback menu.
- If the VMU was activated in Application mode, the transfer is of the blind type: the application
transfers the call regardless of caller status and immediately goes on-hook; if the call-back fails,
the user has to hang up and call back the VMU (or press Redial).
- External call: the call-back of external callers is governed by barring mechanisms. The VMU trans-
fers the call when the connection is established (correspondent off-hook) or simulated.

6/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS

MAIL UNIT

SENDING MESSAGES

Description
From the consultation menu, the user can send a voice message directly to the recipient's mailbox by
performing the following operations:

- pressing the Send soft key or dialing code 3

- defining the destination(s) for the message
- recording the message; validating the message sends it to its destination.

Defining the destination

The destination can be:

- the user's name (display terminals only)

- a distribution list name (display terminals only)
- the user's directory number (up to 8 digits)
- a distribution list number (000 to 050).

Notas :

If the terminal has soft keys, the user can browse the destination list. He can then:
- go to the next member
- go back to the previous member
- delete a member
- delete all the members in the list
- insert a distribution list.

Recording the message

While recording the message, the user can pause (key 8) and then continue the recording (key 8
again). He can also stop the recording (# key) or start over from the beginning (* key). These options
are available even though they are not announced (they are displayed, however).

SENDING COPIES OF MESSAGES

Description
This function is identical to sending a message except that the user can also add an introduction (a
comment telling the recipient that the message is a copy).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/20

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

FILTERING MAIL

Description
This function enables users, with the terminal on idle, to monitor messages being left and answer a
call if desired.

Activation/Deactivation

Service Activation/Deactivation
To activate filtering P.K.: VMU: Filtering + Password
Deactivate filtering P.K.: VMU: Filtering
Deactivate call monitoring P.K.: VMU: Filtering: stops monitoring and deactivates filtering.

Fixed End key: monitoring of the filtered call is deactivated; the user
cannot replay the message currently being filtered, but filtering re-
mains active for other incoming calls, which can still be monitored.

Additional Information
- The set's speaker is automatically activated when the message is left.
- This function is only available for idle sets with programmable keys and a loudspeaker.
- The messages that can be filtered correspond to calls to users with fixed or dynamic routing on their
lines; messages sent from a mailbox cannot be filtered.
- The general mailbox cannot be filtered; messages sent from the "Mailbox" menu cannot be filtered.
- Filtering can only be activated for a single message at a time.
- If filtering is activated while a message is being left, there is no effect.
- The call can be answered by pressing the “Hands Free" key or going off-hook. The part of the mes-
sage left before answering is wiped. After going back on hook, filtering remains active for any new
incoming call.

8/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS

MAIL UNIT

REMOTE NOTIFICATION (OR SIGNALLING)

Description
This feature notifies users when someone has left a message for them; a call is emitted by the voice
server. When the recipient answers, he can consult his mailbox directly, if the service is active.

Notification can be validated for a given time period.

Configuration
T To enable external notification, for each subscriber:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Voice Mailbox -> Notification -> check ❏ The subscriber is allowed to
activate notification

In the case of external notification, the call is subject to barring mechanisms.

T To activate remote notification of messages in mailbox, for each subscriber:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Voice Mailbox -> Notification -> check ❏ Notification activated
- By customization: Notif (or 5) -> On/Off (or 1)

T To set the internal or external destination to be notified, for each subscriber (in the case of external
numbers: 22 digits max., including trunk code):
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Voic Mailbox -> Notification -> -> Caller Number
- By customization: Notif (or 5) -> Desti (or 2)

T To define the type of notification, for each subscriber (with or without consultation of mails):
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Voice Mailbox -> Notification -> Notification type

T To define the applicable time range for notification, for each subscriber:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Voice Mailbox -> Notification -> Activate notification
- By customization: Notif (or 5) -> Sched (or 3)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/20

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

T To define, for all subscribers, the delay before the 2nd and 3rd notification call (the default values
are country-specific):
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Mailboxes -> Misc.-> Notification: Mi-
nutes till second/third alert

RECORDING A CONVERSATION

Description
This function enables authorized users to record ongoing telephone conversations. The recorded con-
versation is stored, with its date and time stamp, in the user's mailbox.

Activation/Deactivation

Type of station Sets without soft keys Stations with soft keys
Service
To activate recording P.K.: VMU: Conversation Re- S.K.: Record SK with pause and
cording or dial the function code re-record options
Deactivate recording (the P.K.: VMU / Conversation Re- S.K.: Stop
conversation continues) cording or dial the function code

Configuration
T To authorize conversation recording, for each subscriber:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Voice Mailbox -> Options -> check ❏ Recording of conversation al-
lowed

T To program a key with the “Conversation recording" function:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/BasestationsList -> Subscribers/Basestations List
-> Details -> Keys -> Voice Mail: Conv. rec..

Additional Information
- The maximum recording time depends on the server's memory capacity.

10/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS

MAIL UNIT

PLAYING BACK RECORDED CONVERSATIONS

Description
This function enables authorized users to listen to the conversations they have recorded, using replay,
delete, send a copy, call-back, etc.

Conversations are played back in reverse chronological order.

Activation/Deactivation

Type of station Sets without soft keys (with dis- Stations with soft keys
Service play)

To activate playback Fixed Mail key + 1 + Password + Fixed Mail key + Voice SK + Pas-
2 sword + Conv SK

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/20

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

Personal assistant

Description
Incoming calls forwarded to the voice server are routed to the user's mailbox or the user's personal
assistant (depending on the configuration).

If the call is forwarded to the personal assistant, the caller is put through to the Main menu, enabling
him for example to leave a message (so that he can be called back) or to be transferred to the reci-
pient's mobile terminal.
For the caller, forwarding to the mailbox or personal assistant is guided by voice prompts only.
If the personal assistant is activated:
- the caller is informed that the person cannot be reached
- he then listens to the various options offered by the personal assistant (transfer to the operator sta-
tion or to a predefined internal/external destination)
- then he hears the voice prompt for his chosen option.

Forwarding to the personal assistant is immediate, and is activated from the set customization menu;
the personal assistant voice prompt is pre-recorded and cannot be customized.

Call to a station
forwarded to its personal assistant

Yes

Personal Assistant
1 Welcome
1 - Mailbox message Recording
2 - Colleague of of a
3 - Mobile message
mailbox?
4 - Outside
5 - Attendant

Notas : Option 1 - Mailbox is proposed automatically, even if the personal assistant has not been
configured, whenever the function is validated.

Even if the personal assistant has not been validated, the Operator station can still be rea-
ched by dialing the attendant (operator) number during the mailbox announcement (blind
transfer to OS).

12/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS

MAIL UNIT

Configuration
T To activate the personal assistant, for each subscriber:
- By customization: Assist (or 2) -> On/Off (or 1)

T To configure, for each subscriber, the options proposed by the personal assistant (in the case of
external numbers: 22 digits max., including trunk code):
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Voice Mailbox -> Personal Assistant -> Transfer to colleague, ope-
rator, outside or mobile
- By customization: Assist (or 2) -> Menu (or 2)-> IntNum, ExtNum, Mobile or Operat (or 1,
2, 3 or 4)

T To enable an internal or external caller who gets through to a personal assistant to reach an outside
number; if these parameters are not configured correctly, the external transfer fails (see "Additional
information"):
- For each VMU port: flags "Join Incoming/Outgoing" and "Join Incoming/Outgoing" are
inactive (default values)
- For each user authorised to effect joinings (and the external forwarding via the personal assis-
tant will also be authorised):
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations
List -> Details -> Features -> Part2 -> check "Join incoming/Outgoing" and "Join
Outgoing/Outgoing"

- For the system as a whole:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Features -> Feature Design -> check Transfer Ext/Ext

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Features -> Feature Design -> check Transfer Ext/Ext
by on-hook

Additional Information
- Blind transfers are used.
- If the external/external transfer fails, the system's response will depend on the configuration and in
particular on the Go to initiator if transfer fails flag (accessible via PM5 under System Miscel-
laneous -> Feature Design):
- If the flag is not positioned (the default setting for France, Italy and Spain), the call is routed to
the OS;
- If the flag is positioned (the default setting for all other countries), the voice server is called back
in Automated Attendant mode. If the Automated Attendant is not open, the call goes through
to the general mailbox.
- Destination number:
- external numbers must include the network access prefix

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/20

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

- an external number is scrutinised with user traffic discrimination and redistribution checks for
which the personal assistant is active (this is applied from the software version R2.0; previously,
access rights of VMU ports VMU were used).
- if the predefined number is invalid or barred, the call is returned to the personal assistant menu.

14/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS

MAIL UNIT

CUSTOMISATION

Description
Customization allows users to define their own set, voice mail and personal assistant settings.

Switching to Customization mode

Depending on the type of station, press Custo (2nd page, Advanced Station in Idle) or i + 5, or dial
the “Programming Mode" function code.

The following pages describe the tree structures available for each type of station; navigation is done
using soft keys or codes (with the help of voice guides).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/20

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

Stations with soft keys

Mailbox: welcome message

MBXANN LISTEN Listen to (personal or default) greeting

NAME RECORD Record user's name RECORD Re-record

STOP Stop recording (End)

DEFAULT NO Keep recorded personal greeting

YES Delete recorded greeting; select default greeting

CUSTOM PAUSE Pause recording

RECORD Record personal greeting
RECORD Re-record
SELECT Mailbox utilization mode:
MODE standard or answering-only
STOP Stop recording (End)
OK Validate current selection

Personal assistant
PERATT ON/OFF SELEC Activate/deactivate personal assistant

OK Validate current selection

MENU INTNUM Route to internal number MODIFY Modify destination number

EXTNUM Route to external number DISABL Deactivate selection

OK Validate current selection

HANDY Route to mobile station

OPERAT Route to operator station Activate/deactivate

MODIFY
Station settings OK Validate current selection
PHONE MELODY MELODY Choose ringing tune

LEVEL+ Set ringing tune volume

CNTRST SCREEN Set display contrast

ICON Set icons contrast

HEADST SELECT Activate/deactivate headset mode

OK Validate current selection
Custom options
OPTION LANG SELECT Select user language from available options

CODE Change personal code (enter old code followed by new code)

Remote message notification

NOTIF ON/OFF SELECT Activate/deactivate notification of new messages

OK Validate current selection

NUMBER
Number of the station to notify

SCHED Applicable time range for notification

16/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS

MAIL UNIT

Stations without soft keys but with displays

Mailbox: welcome message

1 MBXANN Record personal greeting 8 PAUSE Pause
1 CUSTOM 1 RECORD

2 LISTEN Listen to (personal or default) greeting * RECORD Re-record

# STOP Stop recording (End)

3 DEFAULT 1 YES Delete recorded greeting; select default greeting

2 NO Keep recorded personal greeting

4 NAME 1 RECORD Record user's name * RECORD Re-record

# STOP Stop recording (End)

5 MODE 1 RECORD Mailbox in standard mode (answering and recording)

2 SIMPLE Mailbox in answering-only mode

Personal assistant
2 PERATT 1 ON/OFF 1 ON Activate personal assistant

2 OFF Deactivate personal assistant

Modify destination
1 INTNUM 1 MODIFY number
2 MENU Route to internal number
2 DISABL Deactivate selection
2 EXTNUM Route to external number
Validate current
# OK selection
3 HANDY Route to mobile station

4 OPERAT Route to operator station 1 MODIFY Activate/deactivate

Station settings
3 PHONE 1 MELODY 1 MELODY Choose ringing tune # OK Validate current
selection
2 LEVEL+ Set ringing tune volume

2 CNTRST 1 ICON Adjust display contrast

3 HEADST 1 ACTIVE Activate headset mode

2 INACT Deactivate headset mode

Custom options
4 OPTION 1 CODE Change personal code (enter old code followed by new code)

2 LANG 1 to 4 Select user language from available options

3 1 ACTIVE Activate voice prompts on station

VOICE

2 INACT Deactivate voice prompts on station

Remote message notification

5 NOTIF 1 ON/OFF 1 ON Activate remote notification of new messages

2 OFF Deactivate remote notification of new messages

2 NUMBER Number of the station to notify

3 SCHED Applicable time range for notification

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/20

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

Stations without displays or soft keys

Mailbox: welcome message

1 Record personal greeting 8 Pause
1
Re-record
2 Listen to (personal or default) greeting *
Stop recording (End)
#
1 Delete recorded greeting; select default greeting
3
Keep recorded personal greeting
2
Re-record
4 Record user's name *

Mailbox in standard mode (answering and recording) Stop recording (End)

5 1 #
Mailbox in answering-only mode
22
Personal assistant
2 1 1 Activate personal assistant

Deactivate personal assistant

2
Route to internal number Modify destination number
2 1 1

2 Route to external number Deactivate selection

2
3 Route to mobile station Validate current selection
#
Route to operator station Activate/deactivate
4 1
Station settings #
Validate current selection

3 1 1 Choose ringing tune

2 Set ringing tune volume

# Confirm current tune

Deactivate headset mode

3 1
Activate headset mode
2
Custom options
Change personal code (enter old code followed by new code)
4 1
to
2 1 4 Select user language from available options

Remote message notification

5 1 1 Activate remote notification of new messages

2 Deactivate remote notification of new messages

2 Number of the station to notify

Applicable time range for notification
3
Programming the personal directory
to Internal/external n° to be saved On-hook
6 0 9

18/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS

MAIL UNIT

Analog Z stations

Mailbox: welcome message

8 Pause
1 1 Record personal greeting

* Re-record
2 Listen to (personal or default) greeting
# Stop recording (End)

3 1 Delete recorded greeting; select default greeting

2 Keep recorded personal greeting

4 Record user's name * Re-record

5 1 Mailbox in standard mode (answering and recording) # Stop recording (End)

2
2
Personal assistant
2 1 1 Activate personal assistant

Deactivate personal assistant

2
Route to internal number 1 Modify destination number
2 1
2 Route to external number Deactivate selection
2
3 Route to mobile station
# Validate current selection

4 Route to operator station 1 Activate/deactivate

# Validate current selection

Custom options
Change personal code (enter old code followed by new code)
4 1

2 1 4 Select user language from available options

Remote message notification

5 1 1 Activate remote notification of new messages

2 Deactivate remote notification of new messages

2 Number of the station to notify

Applicable time range for notification

3

Activating general call monitoring (OS help)

6 1

Deactivating general call monitoring

7 1
Decadic stations use the 9 key for validation; the functions accessible with the * key are not available
(even though they are announced)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 19/20

SERVICES AVAILABLE TO USERS CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

Remote Configuration

This function (choice 9 in the Mailbox consultation menu) is controlled by a software key.

The remote configuration feature allows users who mainly work outside the company to configure
some items in their mailbox. It belongs to mailbox consultation and is only offered in Connected mode.
Various options are offered, including:

- Recording the mailbox welcome message

- Activation/deactivation of the personal assistant: Configuration of the personal assistant: configu-
ration and activation of the routing to an internal, external or mobile destination number or to the
operator station.
- Changing Password.
- Remote message notification (only available if the user is entitled to use this functionality): activa-
tion/deactivation and configuration of internal or external destination.
Nueva grabación
Nueva grabación
Parada de la grabación (fin)
Parada de la grabación (fin)

9
1 1 1

2 *

4 1

#
Assistant personnel
Asistente personal

2 1 Activación/desactivación del asistente personal

#

2 1 Enrutado hacia un número interno 1

2 Enrutado hacia un número externo
2
3 Enrutado hacia un teléfono móvil
#
Enrutado hacia el teléfono de operador
4 1

3 # Anular

Confirmar
#

Notificación remota de mensajes (señalización)

4 1 Activación/desactivación de la notificación remota de nuevos mensajes #

Número del teléfono a avisar

2

20/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE "VISUAL MAILBOX" INTERFACE
MAIL UNIT

File
"VISUAL MAILBOX" INTERFACE
4

OVERVIEW

Description
The "Visual Mailbox" interface gives Alcatel OmniPCX Office users access to mailboxes via the PC-
based application PIMphony. It provides:

- easier and more intuitive navigation thanks to the services offered by the integrated voice server;
- direct access to voice server functionality without having to manipulate the telephone.

The main services available are:

- Backup messages/conversations on the PC

- Consult new mail
- Consult recorded conversations
- Insert into Outlook
- Send mail
- Record new messages.
Copy messages with or without adding a comment.

The "Visual Mailbox" interface can be used either:

- on the telephone terminal, or

- on the PC, if it has a sound card.

Environment

LAN

User workstation

The user workstation consists of:

- a Z, DECT or Reflexes terminal (connected to the system by a UA, DECT, analog or IP link) and a
PC connected to the LAN (the system must also be connected to the LAN);
- or simply a multimedia PC (PIMphony IP Edition) connected to the LAN.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

"VISUAL MAILBOX" INTERFACE CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

SERVICES PROVIDED

The application enables you to initialize and configure the password required for access to the messa-
ges window.

Mailbox supervision
The "Mailbox" icon in the toolbar indicates whether all the messages have been heard or whether there
is at least one new message.

Clicking the icon opens the "Visual Mailbox" window, containing information on all the messages and
conversations stored in the mailbox:
- date and time of message
- type of message: voice mail or recorded conversation
- caller identity: name registered in PIMphony, PCX name or number
- the length of the message
- message status: new or old.

The information list is updated dynamically each time a message arrives in, or is deleted from, the
mailbox, or changes status from "new" to "read". This is represented by 2 distinct icons: the application
also synchronizes the status of the LED on the set (signaling the presence or absence of new messages).

Handling messages
Messages/conversations are viewed in list form in the "Visual Mailbox" window.

A set of static buttons are available for:

- deleting items
- playing them back
- copying them, with or without a comment
- recording a new message
- creating or displaying the caller's Outlook file
- calling back the person who left the message (if their identity is linked to the voice message).

Dynamic buttons appear during playback.

Remote notification of new messages (copy to Outlook mail client)

The "Follow Me" function enables authorized users to receive e-mail on the local PC to advise them that
a new message has arrived in their mailbox.

The voice message is inserted as an attachment to a new message in the main Outlook message list.

This option is configurable.

This function requires Outlook to be installed locally.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE "VISUAL MAILBOX" INTERFACE

MAIL UNIT

MANAGING THE TERMINAL

Entering VMB mode

The terminal acts as the audio input/output for recording and playback services.

When a new voice mail is detected, the server informs the terminal (the LED flashes) and the PC (the
"Mailbox" icon changes state). Pressing the "Listen" key in the "Visual Mailbox" window has the following
effect:

- the terminal goes directly to Hands Free mode; alternatively, it rings and the user has to pick up
the receiver. The user then hears the new message.
- the display is updated ("Visual Mailbox").
- all the terminal keys except End, Loud+, Loud-, off-hook and on-hook are disabled.
- the terminal is now considered busy (incoming calls entrants are camped on); with PIMphony, calls
can still be taken.

Quitting VMB mode

The terminal quits this mode after:

- going on-hook or pressing END

- closing the VMB window
- after an inactivity timeout of 2 min 30 sec.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

"VISUAL MAILBOX" INTERFACE CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE EXTERNAL VOICE MAIL UNIT
MAIL UNIT

File
EXTERNAL VOICE MAIL UNIT
5

From version R1.1 onwards, an External Voice Mail Unit ("external VMU"), using the VPS protocol, can
be utilized in place of the integrated voice server.

The external VMU is connected to the Alcatel OmniPCX Office system by analog links (SLI boards).

The following integrated voice server features are no longer available when an external VMU is used:

- Personal Assistant
- conversation recording
- voice mail filtering
- Audiotex
- integrated Automated Attendant
- general mailbox
- visual mailbox (PIMphony)

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

Activating the external Voice Mail Unit

Activating the external VMU has the following effects:

- The keys and other data defined for the integrated voice server are not used by the external VMU;
- on each terminal, the number of messages received is set at 0 and the Message LED is off.

Reactivating the integrated voice server

When reactivated using PM5, and provided the settings are coherent, the voice server takes up from
where it left off (with all statuses and voice mail recorded) before the switch to the external VMU.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

EXTERNAL VOICE MAIL UNIT CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

CONFIGURATION

The integrated voice server is used by default.

With PM5 (but not with MMC-station), the integrated voice server can be deactivated in order to ope-
rate with the external VMU. This deactivation has to be confirmed; using the external VMU calls for the
following additional adjustments:

- defining the links between the external VMU and the SLI equipment
- allocating the external VMU ports to the OS group and VMU group
- checking that the VPS codes are compatible with the numbering plan
- reprogramming the VMU access keys
- adapting the dynamic routing settings to the VMU for each user with a mailbox.

T To deactivate the integrated voice server:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Activate Voice Processing -> ❏ Deactivate
Voice Processing -> click Yes to confirm

T To specify the SLI equipment for connection to the external VMU:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List

-> Details -> Misc -> Special function = Voice Mail Unit

T To check, for each SLI device, that camp-on on busy is authorized and that it has intrusion and
warntone protection:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List

-> Details - > Features -> check ❏ Camp-On Allowed, ❏ Intrusion Protection ❏ Warn-
tone Protection

T To add the directory numbers of the Voice mail equipment to the OS group in order to run the Auto-
mated Attendant function with the external VMU:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): List of operator groups -> Details -> Modify -> Add

T To create a VMU group:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): List groups -> Details -> Modify -> Add

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE EXTERNAL VOICE MAIL UNIT

MAIL UNIT

T For Reflexes terminals and analog sets with a Message LED: to create a "Voice Mail" key (virtual in
the case of analog terminals) assigned with the VMU group number:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List

-> Details -> Keys -> Function Keys = Voice Mail Unit (or Vir. keys -> check ❏ Voice
Mail Unit and enter the VMU group number)

T To adapt dynamic routing of level 1 and/or 2 (forwarding to general level): if the box is checked,
the call is forwarded to the Automated Attendant on the external VMU; otherwise it goes through
to the user's mailbox.

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List

-> Details -> Dyn. Rout. -> check or uncheck ❏ VMU as Auto. Attendant (lev 1) and/or
❏ VMU as Auto. Attendant (lev. 2)

T To check the coherence of the internal numbering plan for the "Mail Booking" and "Cancel Mail
Booking" functions (used by the VPS protocol):

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Numbering Plans -> Internal Numbering Plan

T To check the values of the other VPS codes defined by labeled addresses relative to the numbering
plan:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Other labels
-> VMCodBsyTo, VMCodCall, VMCodCnsTo, VMCodDiaTo, VMCodDirCl, VMCodFwdCl,
VMCodOosTo, VMCodRecCl, VMCodRecal, VMCodRelea, VMCodRgToE, VMCodRngTo

T To return to integrated voice server mode (check that the settings are coherent!):

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Voice Processing -> Activate Voice Processing -> ❏ Activate
Voice Processing

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

EXTERNAL VOICE MAIL UNIT CALL SERVER : INTEGRATED VOICE
MAIL UNIT

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

For systems operating with an external VMU, the following particularities needed to be taken into con-
sideration:

- Message notification: as with the integrated voice server, the presence of new messages is signaled
by icon/LED or by voice prompt on going off-hook, depending on the type of terminal.

- Number of messages: with the external VMU, users are not shown the number of messages:

- sets with displays: the sign "+1" means at least one message is available;

- sets without displays: on picking up the handset, the user hears a specific tone signaling the
presence of new messages.

- Consulting the mailbox: mailbox consultation is still accessed by pressing the Mail key or by dialing
the Mail function code; on connection to the external Voice Mail Unit, the user is guided by the voice
prompts (soft key navigation is no longer available).

- Customization: all the voice server options contained in the customization tree structure are disa-
bled.

- General Mailbox soft key: the display on terminals in the OS group no longer offers a soft key for
calling the general mailbox.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
CALL SERVER : Mobility

SECTION

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

Section CALL SERVER : Mobility

GENERAL FILE 1

INSTALLING 4070 IO/EO BASE STATIONS FILE 2

CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FILE 3

IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES HANDSETS FILE 4

IMPLEMENTING REFLEXES DECT SETS FILE 5

IMPLEMENTING 4074 GX HANDSETS FILE 6

IMPLEMENTING 4073 GS SMART HANDSETS FILE 7

TRAFFIC COUNTERS FILE 8

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION CALL SERVER : MOBILITY CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

(INDEX)

Section CALL SERVER : Mobility (Index)

IMPLEMENTING 4073 GS SMART HANDSETS FILE 7

CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FILE 3

GENERAL FILE 1

IMPLEMENTING 4074 GX HANDSETS FILE 6

IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES HANDSETS FILE 4

IMPLEMENTING REFLEXES DECT SETS FILE 5

INSTALLING 4070 IO/EO BASE STATIONS FILE 2

TRAFFIC COUNTERS FILE 8

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY GENERAL

File
GENERAL
1

ETSI STANDARD

The DECT protocol is based on pico-cellular technology (cells of 30 to 150 m depending on the envi-
ronment) allowing high traffic throughput: up to 10000 E/km2.

The frequency band used is between 1880 MHz and 1900 MHz (UHF) i.e. a passband of 20 MHz.
These 20 MHz are split into 10 radio channels.

The passband of a radio channel is 1.728 MHz and radio channels are spaced 2 MHz apart to avoid
interference between adjacent channels.
The DECT system is based on the use of FDMA (frequency multiplexing) and TDMA (time multiplexing)
techniques. It thus has a maximum capacity of 120 simultaneous communication channels (10 radio
frequencies x 12 time slots).

GAP (Generic Access Profile): part of the DECT protocol required for interworking by cordless handsets
from different manufacturers.

PRINCIPLES

The DECT features integrated into the Alcatel OmniPCX Office system allow for the creation of a wire-
less PCX.

The DECT features are offered by 4070 IO/EO base stations connected to UA Reflexes interfaces (UAI
boards).

A radio base station can support up to 6 communication channels simultaneously, on 2 UA links.

The base stations have a range of:

- 150 meters over open ground

- 30 to 50 meters horizontally and 7.5 meters vertically in an enclosed space

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

GENERAL CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

DECT UA/GAP SYSTEM

A DECT system managing the UA/GAP (Generic Access Profile) protocols allows simultaneous use of
the following cordless handsets:

- DECT UA + GAP cordless handsets (Mobile Reflexes, 4073 GS, 4074 Gx handsets; Reflexes DECT
sets)
- third party DECT GAP cordless handsets (the available features may differ).

PUBLIC
NETWORK

Base 3

Cell

Operator station
Base 2

DECT set: Alcatel

Base 1
Mobile Reflexes, 4073,
4074 or
Reflexes DECT sets or
GAP DECT set
Coverage area

Intercell handover zone

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY GENERAL

AVAILABLE FEATURES

Mobility management

- roaming
- intracell handover (on the same base station)
- intercell handover (between base stations).

System access and dynamic channel selection

Before making or receiving calls, the handset must obtain information about the environment in which
it is being used to ensure that it does in fact have access to the system.

To enable the handset to synchronize itself with the system, each base station is always active on at
least one radio channel (the dummy bearer), broadcasting information concerning the system and its
identity.

Any handset will thus be able to recognize the system coverage area in which it is working. When on
standby, each handset is tuned to the nearest base station, receptive to search messages indicating an
incoming call.

Channels are allocated dynamically when requested by the handset. Once synchronized with the sys-
tem, the handset decides on the most appropriate channel for a communication. It chooses the least
disrupted of the free channels.

Inter- and intra-cell handover procedures

The coverage radius of a DECT radio base station forms a "cell".

Intercell handovers to another cell are commanded by the handset when the signal from the active
base is weak and there is a stronger base in the vicinity. During the communication, the mobile re-
quests an appropriate available channel from the second base. Once the second link has been esta-
blished, it releases the first one, maintaining the communication on the second base.

If transmission errors arise, an intracell handover is performed on the same base station towards a
higher quality channel.

GAP MODE: GENERAL

By default, Alcatel DECT GAP handsets operate in proprietary mode (i.e. like Reflexes sets); third party
DECT GAP handsets usually operate in basic mode (though some may operate in advanced mode):

- basic mode: this mode offers a reduced level of operation (no enquiry call, no call waiting, no dis-
play management, etc.)
- advanced mode: this mode offers access to a level of operation essentially equivalent to that of an
analog Z terminal (all functions defined by feature access codes).

With PM5, the mode of each set can be modified individually at the registration stage.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

GENERAL CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY INSTALLING 4070 IO/EO BASE
STATIONS

File
INSTALLING 4070 IO/EO BASE
2
STATIONS
CONNECTION

The Alcatel 4070 IO base station is designed for internal installation in the building, while the Alcatel
4070 EO base station is designed for external installation.

A base station may be connected to 1 or 2 UA links (UAI boards) and allows 3 or 6 simultaneous con-
nections with DECT/GAP terminals.

The need for three or six communication channels depends on the number of cordless stations and on
the DECT traffic to be managed.
In the event of a two-cable connection:
- use two interfaces neighbouring a UAI board
- use the odd interface for the master link and the other for the slave link.

Both cables should have the same length. The first interface of the system's UAI16 board should not
be used since the operator station uses those points.

Wiring

1: L1
UAI -3
2 : L2
3 : L1 DIGITAL INTERFACES UAI16
Distribution table
UAI -4 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4 : L2

4 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Terminal block

Local Power Supply

- The mains adapter serves as a sectioning device

- The surface socket must be installed as close to the base as possible and must be easily accessible.

CONFIGURATION

Nota : Differences between 4070 and 4070 NG base stations:on DECT 4070 base stations,

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

INSTALLING 4070 IO/EO BASE CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
STATIONS

the change of antenna occurred when the error rate was in excess of a specific limit. On
DECT 4070 NG bases, in addition to the change of antenna described above, there is a
fast antenna change call "Fast antenna diversity"; this change occurs automatically as soon
as the mobile sets receive levels becomes too weak.

- Define the length of the line: because the connection distances between the modules and the base
stations (1200m max.) differ, you must compensate by making the propagation length more or
less identical. The following choices are available:

- short line: 0 to 400 m (default value)

- medium line: 400 to 800 m
- long line: 800 to 1,200 m
By MMC PM5, select: Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations List -> IBS
Master -> Details -> Line Length.

This programming operation is necessary to install the base station. If modified during use, the
base station will be reset (regardless of any communication in progress).
In case of a mixed environment (4070 and 4070 NG bases), the installer may change the antenna
diversity on several base stations at the same time.

- Define the number of antennae used: it may be necessary to cancel antenna diversity for specific
needs.

By MMC PM5, select: Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations List -> IBS
Master -> Details -> Antenna Diversity -> No Diversity = 1 antenna (4070 and 4070 NG
bases); Slow Diversity = 2 antennas (4070 and 4070 NG bases); Fast Diversity = 2 antennas (4070
NG bases only).

In the event of modification during use, the base station will be reset (regardless of any communi-
cation in progress).

- Define the DECT frequencies used: A 4070 IO/EO base station can operate with 1, 2, 4, 5, 8 or
10 frequencies. When booted up, all 10 frequencies are available (configuration varies according
to the system's software version).

Configuration before R2.0

By MMC-PM5, select: System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Debug Labels ->
"Dect_Freq" -> enter the 2-byte value corresponding to the mask for the desired frequencies.

The default value of the mask is 03FF (all 10 frequencies used); this value must only be modified
under particular installation conditions, normally outside Europe.
PROGRAMMING EFFECT ON SYSTEM
Value of mask ( “Dect_Freq" Chosen fre- Mask validated by the system Validated fre-
address) quencies quencies

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY INSTALLING 4070 IO/EO BASE

STATIONS

Hex Binary Num- Range Hex Binary Num- Range

ber ber
03FF 0000 0011 1111 10 1 - 10 0000 0011 1111 10 1 - 10
1111 1111
003F 0000 0000 0011 6 1-6 0000 0000 0000 4 1-4
1111 1111
0282 0000 0010 1000 3 2, 8, 0000 0000 1000 2 2, 8
0010 10 0010
0000 0000 0000 0000 0 none 0000 0011 1111 10 1 - 10
0000 1111
003C 0000 0000 0011 4 3-6 0000 0000 0011 4 3-6
1100 1100

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

INSTALLING 4070 IO/EO BASE CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
STATIONS

Configuration using R2.0 (the labelled address "Dect_Freq" is no longer operational).

By MMC-PM5, select: System Miscellaneous -> DECT Frequency Plan -> select the desired
frequencies (frequencies between 1880 and 1898 MHz are suggested with 2 MHz increments).

Carry out a warm reset of the system, or reboot each base station individually.

INSTALLING THE BASE STATIONS

To install the base stations, follow the steps below:

- position the base stations (depending on the result of the coverage studies)
- connect the base stations
- power down the system
- by MMC-PM5:
• if necessary, modify the numbering plan and the account codes table
• give a name to each station installed
• if necessary, modify the value associated with the "Line length" parameter
• create the DECT accesses then declare the type of station (DECT UA) or use automatic registra-
tion (DECT GAP)
• the default value being the same for all the systems, modify the PCX ARI value by configuring
it with the ARI from the manufacturer
• complete the system settings (trunk groups, call barring, etc).

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM

File
CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM
3

Configuring the system's DECT mobile functionality consists in programming the ARI number and the
GAP authentication code (if necessary). Both of these parameters must be completed before registering
a set on the system.

Before starting the DECT configuration, the numbering plan must be defined and the hardware con-
figuration (installing interface boards, recognizing sets, etc) completed.

ARI NUMBER

The ARI (Access Right Identifier) number identifies the system uniquely to mobiles. It contains 11 octal
digits (base 8). This number, assigned to an ETSI base by the installer, must be entered on installing
the system.

It is structured as follows:

- the ARC (Access Right Code) specifies the usage environment (private, public, etc); in the case of
Alcatel OmniPCX Office, a type-B ARI is allocated by the DECT protocol (ARC = 1, non modifiable)

- the EIC (Equipment Installer Code) is the number assigned by ETSI to each maker or distributor
offering DECT systems

- the FPN/S (Fixed Part Number/Subnumber) is a number entered by the installer: each system ins-
talled by the same installer must have a different number.

1 0 0 0 0 4 3 6 0 7 4
001 000 000 000 000 100 01 1 110 000 11 1 1
ARC EIC FPN FPS
ARI

- To enter the system ARI number with PM5 (Expert View):

Select: System Miscellaneous-> DECT ARI/GAP Authentication-> enter the ARI number (the sys-
tem deduces the EIC, FPN and FPS fields automatically).

- To enter the system ARI number with MMC Station:

Select DECT -> ARI -> enter the ARI number and validate by clicking OK

Important : The ARI number must be modified by the installer (in accordance with the above rules)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

before registering any DECT sets.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM

GAP AUTHENTICATION

This service secures data exchange between the system and the DECT GAP handsets.

An authentication code can be sent by the mobile to the system during the registration procedure. This
code is then compared with the one configured in the system. If it matches, the registration of the set
can continue; if not, it is stopped.

- To define an authentication code with PM5 (Expert View):

Select: System Miscellaneous-> DECT ARI/GAP Authentication-> check ❏ Activate GAP
Authentication -> enter a code of between 4 and 8 digits in Authentication code

- To define an authentication code with MMC Station:

Select DECT -> AuthCd -> enter a code of between 4 and 8 digits and validate by clicking OK

Select DECT -> Authen -> activate or deactivate with Choice and validate by clicking OK

REGISTERING A GAP HANDSET

DECT sets are identified by their IPUI N (International Portable User Identity type N). Each handset has
a different IPUI N number, used when the set is declared to the system.

In the case of a DECT GAP handset, the IPUI N and ARI parameters are exchanged automatically du-
ring the registration procedure. It is through these parameters that the system recognizes the handset,
and vice versa.

Procedure with PM5

Select: Subscribers/Basestations List-> Subscribers/Basestations List-> Add -> add the requi-
red number of DECT accesses by selecting DECT handsets and the number of devices, then vali-
date by clicking OK

Select Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> GAP Reg. -> The
GAP registration procedure is under way when the Register GAP Handsets window appears.

On the mobile

Launch the registration procedure on the handset (refer to the accompanying documentation).

As soon as the mobile's IPUI number appears, select an unassigned number mobile and click Assign.
The IPUI number, preceded by the mobile number, then appears in the Assigned Handsets window

Procedure with MMC Station

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

Select DECT -> Add -> GAP -> The message "In Progress…" is displayed; the registration proce-
dure is under way.

Launch the registration procedure on the handset (refer to the accompanying documentation).

When the mobile's IPUI number appears, validate by clicking OK.

The mobile is registered and a number is automatically assigned to it.

Basic GAP and Advanced GAP

In certain instances, the handset shown in the Unassigned IPUIs window may be a GAP type set; if so,
you can select the preferred mode: basic or advanced.

Select the IPUI number and click Modify Mode.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES
HANDSETS

File
IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES
4
HANDSETS
REGISTERING THE HANDSET

In new sets, the battery included is factory pre-charged. When the terminal is brought into service, the
residual charge level is usually enough to power the registration stage.

Fit the battery into the handset and check that the level of charge is adequate (full or half-charge icon);
if not, put it on charge.

Start the registration procedure on the PCX.

When the system is ready, continue with the handset.

Step A

Turn on the handset by a long press on and observe the screen display.

- If the set is new (never been assigned) and has enough battery charge, the display shows "SYSTEM

1 Auto install ?" ; go to Step B.

- If the set does not display "SYSTEM 1 Auto install ?", it is already assigned on another system; go
to Step C.

Step B
- If the installation doesn’t use the authentication function (AC code), go directly to Step D for the
simplified procedure.
- If the system uses an authentication code, configure the AC code as described below, and move
on to Step D to complete the association process.
AC Code
Launch Configure
subscription? AC Code?

Select "AC" option Dial the "AC" code

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/10

IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
HANDSETS

Step C

Select the "installa- Dial the code

tion" function (314987)

Select a free system Select the "Install" function

and proceed with step B

Step D
Launch the registration procedure.

SYSTEM 1
Launch Subscription
subscription? running…

Launch the association process

After registration, the set switches automatically to the main language of the PCX.

2/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES

HANDSETS

UNINSTALLING HANDSETS

It may be necessary to uninstall a handset when it is no longer used on the system or when the terminal
is replaced. The operation must be performed simultaneously on the system and on the terminal.

IMPORTANT

We recommend performing the operation on the terminal (as described below) before deleting it from
the system. If this sequence is reversed, it is still possible to delete data from the terminal, but this has
to be done outside the radio coverage area.
Password?

Select the "installa- Dial the code

tion" function (314987)

Uninstall SYSTEM 1
Edit name Remove
Read PARK Subscription?

Select the system to Validate the "Unins- Confirm the uninstall

be uninstalled tall" option operation

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/10

IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
HANDSETS

UTILIZATION / AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

Basic terminal functions (accessible in GAP or AGAP mode)

- Lock / unlock keypad (long press on )

- Activate/deactivate keypad beep, key beep, radio beep, vibrator * back lighting **
- Quick switching from ringer to vibrator * (long press on )
- 3-level reception volume adjustment with storage of the most recent setting
- Registration possible on 5 different GAP systems
- Special radio test function (see "Radio Test Mode ")

* Mobile Reflexes 100

** Mobile Reflexes 200/200 Ex

Functions specific to simplified GAP mode

In GAP mode, the following functions should be available (unless inhibited by system constraints):

- Manual language selection for the local menu

- Choice of ringing tunes
- Personal speed dial
- Local redial
- DTMF end-to-end signaling
- Calibrated loop

Functions specific to AGAP advanced mode

Outline of the main functions available, built into the PCX:

- Diversion and cancel diversion

- Audio and text message consultation
- Dial by name / collective speed dial
- Personal speed dial (system numbers)
- Automatic language configuration
- Choice of ringing tunes
- Interactive features in conversation

4/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES

HANDSETS

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS

Reading the handset software version number

Password?

Select the "installa- Dial the code

tion" function (314987)

Read version
n°

Note: each terminal model has its own identification prefix: 70 xxxx for Mobile Reflexes 100 models
and 60 xxxx for the Mobile Reflexes 200 models.

Reading the handset IPEI number (handset ID)

Password?

Select the "installa- Dial the code

tion" function (314987)

Read the IPEI

Resetting the EEPROM

This function restores the terminal to its factory settings, i.e. associated with no system and containing
no saved data.

- Turn the handset off and on again, simultaneously pressing On-hook, Off-hook and i.

- Select EEPROM Reset and validate.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/10

IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
HANDSETS

Quitting battery security mode

The set can activate automatic security mode on the battery in the event of a short circuit, a critically
flat battery (after several weeks without charging) or an excessive charge voltage. Some of these inci-
dents may arise when the handset suffers a violent impact.

When security mode is activated, the mobile is powered down and will not come back on.
To deactivate security mode:
- remove the battery and replace it in the mobile
- place the handset (turned off) on the charger
- press the handset "on" key without removing it from the charger.

RADIO TEST MODE

Activating radio test mode

To activate radio test mode:

- turn off the mobile by a long press on

- turn it back on by pressing simultaneously on , and
- when the display comes on, do a long press on

The screen displays the state and reception level measurements.

6/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES

HANDSETS

Description of radio test mode functions

STATE / RSSI (state / reception level)

Mobile transmission status

L: mobile synchronized with system (no communication established)
C: DECT link active between base station and mobile (in communication)

Frequency (0 to 9) used for transmission

In the example: frequency number = 3.

Time interval (0 to 11) used for transmission (displayed as 0 to B

in hexadecimal)
(In the example: time interval number = 3.

L F:3 S:3 B:11 0 Identifier of the base station on which the mobile is synchronized
RSSI->017/11H:-49
M:0 ->051/33H:-59
(RPN number). In the example: RPN = 11.

0 = mobile free to perform handovers between all system base stations

1 = mobile restricted to using a single base station (no handover)

Reception level (in -dBm) of the 2 base stations that the mobile picks up
best. In the example, base 11 is received at -49 dBm and base 33 at
-59 dBm. There are two display modes:
- rapid measurement (over 16 frames)
- average measurement (over 256 frames)
You can switch between measurement modes with a long press on *.
NB: the max. RSSI level displayed is around -42 dBm
(beyond this threshold the figures are insufficiently accurate).

1 = average measurement
0 = rapid measurement
You can switch between measurement modes with a long press on *.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/10

IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
HANDSETS

IDENTITY (system RFPI number) / CONNECTION STATUS

System RFPI number (DECT identifier)

- in hexadecimal -> first line
RFPI 1E798F0F15 - in octal -> second ligne
171743607425
No base locking

Mobile connection status:

- restricted to one station “Lock to XXX/XXX”
- “No base locking” means that the mobile can automatically choose
between base stations on the same system. A long press on # switches
from locked mode (one base only)
to unlocked mode (handover authorized between all system bases).

8/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES

HANDSETS

QUALITY (reception quality)

A:xx Number of CRC errors detected in field A

(measured over 120 frames and displayed in hexadecimal)

X:xx Number of CRC errors detected in field X

(measured over 120 frames and displayed in hexadecimal)

Z:xx Number of CRC errors detected in field Z

(measured over 120 frames and displayed in hexadecimal)

B : 017/11H R:-49
A:0A X:00 Z:00 0 0 = mobile free to perform handovers between all system base stations
SYN:00 Q/15:16 0 1 = mobile restricted to using a single base station (no handover)

0 = rapid measurement
1 = average measurement

transmission quality index (preceded by base station identifier).

The index corresponds to the number of frames received without error
(graded out of 16). There are two display modes:
- rapid measurement (over 16 frames)
- average measurement (over 256 frames)
You can switch between measurement modes with a long press on *.

Number of synchronization errors reported by the mobile

(measured over 120 frames and displayed in hexadecimal)

Note: the quality index gives an objective picture of the communication quality in order to determine
the practical range limits (depending on the distance from the handset and the nature of the environ-
ment).

In practice, you have to select this function (preferably the averaged measurement), set up a call, and
observe the index value (Q): at a given location, the quality can be considered good if the value dis-
played is equal to or greater than 12 on a stable basis.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/10

IMPLEMENTING MOBILE REFLEXES CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
HANDSETS

CONNECTION STATUS (synchronization)

Mobile connection status:

LOCK TO BASE
- synchronized on a system (LOCK) -> first line
Unlocked xx - Unlocked xx means that the mobile can automatically choose
between base stations on the same system. A long press on # switches
from locked mode (one base only)
Wed 16 Aug 11:00 to unlocked mode (handover authorized between all system bases)

This function makes it easier to determine the coverage area of a base station.

10/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING REFLEXES DECT SETS

File
IMPLEMENTING REFLEXES DECT SETS
5

INSTALLING A REFLEXES DECT SET

The registration of a Reflexes DECT set (with the 4097 CBL option) is performed by radio data exchan-
ge with the system. Before attempting the association, it is therefore important to check that the DECT
bases are operational and that the sets are located in a zone with adequate coverage.

In order to limit traffic during installation of the sets, it is advisable to register the Reflexes DECT sets
in sequence, one after the other.

Notas :

The DECT-GAP authentication procedure (described in file 3) is not available with Reflexes DECT sets.

REGISTRATION PROCEDURE FOR A NEW SET

New sets are delivered from the factory without any registration data; they are brought into service
using a simplified procedure.

After adding a DECT set, go into GAP registration mode (MMC-Station or MMC-PM5) and initialize
the association procedure up to "Subscription running".
Then switch on the set's power supply, connecting the transformer block to the mains and check the
red indicator LED at the back of the set: the LED should emit a short series of "long ON/short OFF"
flashes, then go out as soon as the set is synchronized with a base station.
At this point, the registration request is performed automatically by the set. The terminal identifier ap-
pears on the system's MMC and the operator only needs to validate the directory number and confirm
the registration.
Note: after the registration phase, if the directory number of a Reflexes DECT set has to be changed,
its power supply block must be disconnected, then reconnected, after the modification has been made
in the system.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

IMPLEMENTING REFLEXES DECT SETS CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

REGISTRATION PROCEDURE FOR A PREVIOUSLY REGISTERED SET

If, during a registration attempt, the red indicator LED flashes "short ON/ long OFF", this means that
the set contains configuration data. To delete the data, proceed as follows:

- disconnect / reconnect the power supply;

- 2-3 seconds after switching on the power supply again, enter the following sequence of digits on
the keyboard: *#*86734#*# (which corresponds to the alphabet code *#*UNREG#*# using the
number keys); the first character must be entered within 10 seconds;
- again disconnect / reconnect the power supply; automatic registration as described in the para-
graph above is initialized.

General conditions of installation

- location: this office set must be located in an environment with limited risk of electro-magnetic dis-
turbance and which allows for good quality radio transmission. For example, avoid placing the set
near items such as dense metal structures, television, fluorescent strips, halogen lamps, PC moni-
tors, etc.
- PCX limits: a Reflexes DECT set is considered both as a Reflexes line set and a DECT terminal. The
installation must include a Reflexes corded set in order to perform the Operator function.
- radio operation: the Reflexes DECT set operates in dynamic DECT link mode (just like a conven-
tional DECT mobile) or static mode (just like a corded set). The communication channel is set up
with the base station each time there is a need to exchange data with the PCX. At the end of an
exchange, when the set is in stand-by mode, the radio link and communication channel resources
are released and made available to the base station.
- coverage study: this is performed in the conventional way, just as for a system equipped with
DECT mobile terminals. Apart from the specific use of the terminal as a static office set, it is recom-
mended that a sufficient radio level be maintained in order to guarantee excellent communication
quality.
- limits for standard traffic needs: the maximum number of Reflexes DECT terminals that can ope-
rate in the same zone is the following:
- for a zone covered by one radio base station (NOTE 1)
- 4070IO/EO base station with 3 channels: 4 sets
- 4070IO/EO base station with 6 channels: 12 sets
- for a zone covered by a group of co-located base stations (NOTE 2)
- cluster of two 4070IO/EO base stations with 6 channels: 30 sets
- cluster of three 4070IO/EO base stations with 6 channels: 50 sets

Notas :

1. irrespective of the model of the DECT set (any type of 4074, or Reflexes DECT)
2. the topology of co-located base stations is a specific solution that makes it possible to increase traffic
capacity in a given zone: this specific zone is thus identically covered by the various base stations that
make up the cluster. To set up a base station cluster it is necessary to make sure that the DECT sets are
compatible with this topology, which requires an overflow function not available on some DECT set
models.

Remarques :

- Operating and programming limits at system level (inherent in the dynamic DECT link opera-

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING REFLEXES DECT SETS

ting mode of Reflexes DECT sets).

- Avoid allocating Reflexes DECT sets to hunting groups; however, if the use of this type of set is ine-
vitable, limit their number to 4 per group.
- Number of Reflexes DECT sets in manager-secretary configurations: 4 manager sets and 4 secre-
tary sets.
- Do not allocate Reflexes DECT sets to broadcast groups.
- Do not use Reflexes DECT sets as call monitoring sets (selective or general) nor to monitor resour-
ces.
- Programming the RSP keys is impossible on Reflexes DECT sets.
- Status signaling (free or busy) for sets monitored on RSL keys is unavailable except for sets allocated
to manager-secretary configurations.
- Background music is not available on Reflexes DECT sets.
- After a time change made by MMC or after reception of the time sent by the public exchange, it is
possible that this modification will not be taken into account immediately by all the Reflexes DECT
sets; in this case, a simple user action (going off-hook, making a call, etc.) is enough to reset the
time synchronization on the display.

MOVING A REFLEXES DECT SET

To move a Reflexes DECT set, it is necessary to disconnect the mains power supply block before ins-
talling it in another place.

Reconnect the set for normal use (the set's number and programming will be kept).
Make sure the terminal is relocated in a zone with an adequate radio reception level, one that can
cope with the traffic requirements.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

IMPLEMENTING REFLEXES DECT SETS CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

DECT MODULE 4097 CBL INDICATOR LED

The red indicator LED at the back of the Reflexes DECT terminal shows the operational status of the
module at any given moment:

LED constantly lit (ON) 4097 CBL module defect

LED unlit (OFF) The module power supply is switched off or the module is cor-
rectly synchronized with a base station
Flashing long ON / short OFF The module is not registered with the system and is searching for
radio synchronization
Flashing short ON / long OFF The registered module is searching for radio synchronization

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING 4074 GX HANDSETS

File
IMPLEMENTING 4074 GX HANDSETS
6

Fri 15 Mar 14:30

4074GB
GAP

REGISTERING A 4074 GX HANDSET

System: consult the system administrator or user manual to obtain all the necessary details. Attention
should be paid to the start up procedure; also check whether registration requires a particular access
code (authentication code) to be entered on the station.

Set: the 4074 Gx can be programmed to manage up to 5 different DECT systems (labeled SYS1 to
SYS5). As a general rule, the first entry (SYS1) is reserved for your Alcatel PCX and must not be modi-
fied. New data relating to another GAP system must be introduced on a free entry (SYS5 for simplicity).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

IMPLEMENTING 4074 GX HANDSETS CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

Simplified registration procedure

This method can be used if the PCX does not use an authentication code or if the code is 0000. In case
of doubt, you can always try to use this method; if it doesn’t work, then the specific code procedure
must be used.

- Activate the registration phase on the fixed system

- Switch on the 4074 Gx: long press on
- 7 (long press): PASSWORD is displayed
- Key in the code 123456 followed by OK (long press): displays 1: SYSTEM NUMBER
- OK: displays ENTER 1-5: 1
- 5 then OK: displays 1: SYSTEM NUMBER
- 6 then OK: displays SUBSCR. #5 OK?
- OK: displays subscr. Running

Specific code registration procedure

The GAP system uses an authentication code with a value different from 0000.

- Activate the registration phase on the fixed system

- Switch on the 4074 Gx: long press on
- 7 (long press): PASSWORD is displayed
- Key in the code 123456 then OK (long press): displays 1: SYSTEM NUMBER
- OK: displays ENTER 1-5: 1
- 5 then OK: displays 1: SYSTEM NUMBER
- 3: displays 3: CONFIG SYSTEM
- OK: displays 1: TERMINAL TYPE
- OK: displays SYS 5 TYPE: FREE
- t (4 times): displays SYS 5 TYPE: UNDEF
- OK: displays 1: TERMINAL TYPE
- 7: displays 7: AC
- OK: displays SYS 5AC: 0000
- Type the authentication code followed by OK: displays 1: TERMINAL TYPE
- ➘ on the navigator: displays 1: SYSTEM NUMBER
- 6 then OK: displays SUBSCR. #5 OK?
- OK: displays Subscr. Running

Registration completed/failed

After a few seconds (one or two minutes maximum), if the registration is successful, the radio field icon
and subsc. accepted are displayed. The 4074 Gx terminal is now ready to function in GAP mode with
the new system.

In the case of failure, if after several minutes the message subsc. accepted is not obtained, or if the
message subsc. Rejected appears, switch off the terminal (long press on ) and restart the process.

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING 4074 GX HANDSETS

PROGRAMMING THE PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ON A 4074 GX

HANDSET

It is possible to compile a directory of 12 numbers maximum (names and telephone numbers); pro-
gramming is carried out when the station is idle.

Press , the display is positioned on the first entry. To select another entry press 1 to 9, 0, * or # or
use the navigator's t or s keys.

To enter a name, press (the ? symbol flashes). Enter the name (8 characters maximum) by pres-
sing once or several times on the appropriate key (marked with letters of the alphabet).

For example, pressing on 2 ABC displays A. Pressing several times on this key successively displays B
C a b c 2.

To enter a number, press ➘ (the ? symbol flashes). Enter the number (20 digits maximum) with the
keypad.

To insert a pause in a number do a long press on the 1 key (a dash appears on the display).
To insert a flashing character, press t (an "R" appears on the display).

When entering a name or number the s key enables you to delete the last character entered. Pressing
repeatedly it deletes the whole entry.

To validate programming press OK; the programmed name is displayed. To return to idle, press the
red key.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

IMPLEMENTING 4074 GX HANDSETS CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

USING A 4074 GX HANDSET

Except for specific cases, the operations described above correspond to the options offered by the
4074 Gx in liaison with the obligatory features available on a fixed GAP system.

Automatic radio cell transfer

This feature, offered by the 4074 Gx, allows you to move from one base station to another without
interrupting communication. Nevertheless, this possibility depends on the fixed system's own limits,
particularly its capacity to manage several bases.

Role of the display

When calling from the handset, the figures dialed on the keypad are displayed. When receiving a call,
the display indicates the caller's number, if the fixed system offers this feature, otherwise the display
remains empty.

Receiving a call

An incoming call is signaled by the station's ringing tone as well as the flashing green lights and the
icon on the display.

To answer the call, . To go off hook and end the communication,

Calling by dialing manually

, then dial the number on the keypad. The line seizure icon lights up on the display. It is also pos-
sible to dial the number directly; in this case, the line is seized automatically.

Calling by personal speed dial

Press : the display shows the first entry in the directory.

To dial this number press OK. To select a different entry use the navigator's t or s keys then validate
the number to be dialed by pressing OK.

Last number redial

When the set is idle, do a long press on the key.

Flashing (calibrated cutoff)

Press t. When you press the Flashing key, the letter R appears on the display. Depending on the options
offered by the fixed system, the flashing feature can be an essential step in activating other options
(example: transferring communication to another station).

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING 4074 GX HANDSETS

SELECTING A FIXED SYSTEM

Programming the system entries

Your 4074 Gx set can be programmed to operate on 5 different DECT systems. The first entry is ge-
nerally reserved for use with your main Alcatel system. To allocate the other entries, it is recommended
that you respect a descending order saving the most frequently used systems on the entries correspon-
ding to the lower numbers (entries 2 to 5).

Automatic/manual selection

When the systems used are installed on remote sites (far away from each other and without overlap
zones), the system is selected automatically when the set is turned on. In contrast, when fixed systems
share geographic zones, system selection can be modified by the user in the following way:

- 9 (long press): displays 1: SYSTEM NUMBER

- OK: displays ENTER 1-5: X (X: value between 0 and 5 indicating the number of the active system).
- Y (Y: value between 1 and 5 representing the number of the new system to be used): displays EN-
TER 1-5: Y
- OK: displays 1: SYSTEM NUMBER
- t: displays 2: TERMINAL TYPE
- t: displays 3:SYS TO LOCK ?
- OK: displays SYS Y OK ?
- OK:the station's green light starts flashing and the radio field icon disappears temporarily. After a
few seconds, when the handset has homed in on the new system, the green light goes off and the
radio field icon reappears. The display indicates 1: SYSTEM NUMBER.
- to return to idle state. Your station is ready to operate on the selected system.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

IMPLEMENTING 4074 GX HANDSETS CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

DEFAULT FUNCTION OF PROGRAMMABLE KEYS

The 4074 has 2 programmable keys.

On creating the handset, the system creates the following keys by default:

Fri 15 Mar 14:30

Line key

Message
Conference

Line key

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING 4073 GS SMART
HANDSETS

File
IMPLEMENTING 4073 GS SMART
7
HANDSETS

The handset can be linked with 3 different systems, although it can only operate with one system at a
time.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

IMPLEMENTING 4073 GS SMART CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
HANDSETS

REGISTERING THE HANDSET

For new handsets, the battery included is factory pre-charged; the level of charge is sufficient to register
the terminal. Fit the battery into the handset and check that the level of charge is adequate (full or half-
charge icon); if not, put it on the charge base.

Start the registration procedure on the PCX. When the system is ready, continue with the handset.

Step A

Long press on i to turn on the handset.

If the set is new (never been assigned) and has enough battery charge, the display shows "Auto install
system 1-OK ? ", there are two possibilities:

- if the installation doesn’t use the authentication function (AC code), go directly to step C for the
simplified procedure

- if the system uses an authentication code, press briefly on the "On-hook" key, and move
on to step B.

If the set does not display "Auto install system 1-OK ? " (it is already assigned on another system), go
to step B.

Step B

Long press on '#', for enter in the handset's local menu.

Press briefly on 't', to enter the 'System' sub-menu.

Press briefly on 'OK' to enter the 'Install' sub-menu.

Use the navigator to select a free position for the system to occupy (1, 2 or 3).

Press briefly on 'OK' to validate.

Enter the AC code, if the system uses one; otherwise go to step C.

Step C

Press briefly on 'OK' to validate and launch the registration request

When the set identifier appears on the MMC system window, validate the entry to complete the ope-
ration. Registration becomes effective once the set has been turned on and off, or after an outgoing
call has been made (the call attempt will fail).

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING 4073 GS SMART

HANDSETS

USING THE HANDSET

The 4073 GS Smart operates at optimal effectiveness with a DECT PCX from the Alcatel OmniOffice
range: under these conditions, the handset uses an advanced proprietary protocol (AGAP) which gives
it access to a large number of PCX functions.

It can nonetheless be used in reduced operating mode (GAP mode) on DECT GAP systems.

Functions specific to the terminal (accessible in either operating mode)

Lock / unlock keypad (long press on "On-hook" key)

- Activate/deactivate keypad beep, key beep, radio beep, vibrator

- Quick switching from ringer to vibrator (long press on 8).
- 3-level reception volume adjustment with storage of the most recent setting
- Registration possible on 3 different GAP systems
- Manual or automatic system selection
- Special radio test function (see "Radio Test Mode ")

GAP reduced mode

These functions should be available (unless inhibited by system constraints):

- Manual language selection for the local menu

- Choice of ringing tunes
- Personal speed dial list: 10 internal numbers
- Redial
- DTMF end-to-end signaling
- Calibrated loop

AGAP advanced mode functions

Outline of the main functions available:

- Diversion or cancel diversion key

- Audio or text message consultation key
- Dial by name key
- Personal speed dial key (10 system numbers)
- Automatic language configuration for the local menu
- Choice of ringing tunes
- Features in conversation:
- Taking waiting calls by a long press on 'OK'
- Broker function by a long press on '->'
- Transfer by a long press on 't'
- 3-party conferencing by a long press on 's'
- Redial
- MF codes
- Calibrated loop

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

IMPLEMENTING 4073 GS SMART CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
HANDSETS

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS

Reading the handset software version number

- Long press on '#' to enter the handset's local menu

- Press briefly on 'ok' to go into 'mobile'

- Press briefly on '#' to display the handset software version

Typical display: "POCKET PRO DECT 4-0-42-17".

Reading the handset IPEI number (handset ID)

- Long press on '#' to enter the handset's local menu

- Press briefly on 'ok' to go into 'mobile'

- Press briefly on '*' to display the handset's IPEI number

Typical display: "IPEI: 0810700014881 "

Resetting the handset (restoring the factory settings)

To delete the handset configuration data (recordings, customization, etc.):

- Long press on 'i' to turn off the handset

- Press simultaneously on 'On-hook', '#' and 'i' until the display lights up

- Long press on 6, until the display turns itself off again.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING 4073 GS SMART

HANDSETS

RADIO TEST MODE

Presentation
The terminal software has a "radio test" mode for gauging the radio transmission parameters. This test
mode is restricted to technical personnel: it is essential for coverage studies, or for maintenance ope-
rations on existing sites.

Note: thanks to this function, the 4073 GS Smart can be used with existing coverage tools.

Limitations of radio test mode

The radio test mode is active in idle mode or in communication. The second line of the display is used
for radio measurement values; some of the function keys are rendered inoperative (only the simple call
setup function is maintained).

The available measurement functions serve to monitor handovers performed by the handset, to identify
local base stations and to measure the perceived reception level on the 2 closest base stations. There
is also a new function which provides an objective quality index for any given call in order to validate
the practical range limits.

All 4073 GS Smart terminals include the measurement function; no provision is made for after-sales
re-calibration. Depending on the tolerance of the components, the theoretical maximum variation of
RSSI measurements is +/- 7 dBm between several handsets. In practice, the RSSI measurement varian-
ce over several 4073 GS Smart terminals is generally within +/- 3dBm.

Entering and quitting radio test mode

To enter radio test mode (the handset must already be registered on the system):

- Long press on 'i' to turn off the handset

- Press simultaneously on 'On-hook', 'S' and 'i' until the display starts up (2nd line: "STATE-RSSI-QUA
").

To quit radio test mode:

- Long press on 'i' to turn off the handset

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

IMPLEMENTING 4073 GS SMART CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
HANDSETS

Structure of radio test mode menus

Home menu STATE RSSI QUALITY

STATE-RSSI-QUA L F:1 S:5 B:01 RSSI 01:xx 03:xx QUAL 01:xx

Identity menu Hex. ID Octal ID

IDENTIFY RFPI1e798f0f05 31171714360744

Quality menu Transmission errors Synchronization errors QUALITY

QUALITY A:xx X:xx Z:xx SYNC:xx QUAL 01:xx

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY IMPLEMENTING 4073 GS SMART

HANDSETS

Description of radio test mode functions

STATE

L F:1 S:5 B:01

Identifier of the base station on which the mobile is synchronized (specific RPN number linked to the
base station connection board slot). In the example: RPN = 01

Time interval (0 to 11) used for transmission. Display (0 to b in hexadecimal). In the example: time
interval number = 5

Frequency (0 to 9) used for transmission. In the example: frequency number = 1

Mobile transmission state.

L: mobile synchronized to the system (no communication established)
C: DECT link active between the base station and the mobile (in communication).

RSSI (reception level)

RSSI 01:xx 03:xx

Reception level (in – dBm) of the 2 base stations picked up most clearly by the mobile.

There are two display modes:

- rapid measurement (on 16 frames). Obtained by briefly pressing 'Speed Dial'
- averaged measurement (on 256 frames). Obtained by a long press on 'Speed Dial'.

QUAL (transmission quality)

QUAL 01:xx

Transmission quality index (preceded by base station ID n°).

The index corresponds to the number of frames received without error.

There are two display modes:
- rapid measurement (on 16 frames). Obtained by briefly pressing 'Speed Dial'
- averaged measurement (on 256 frames). Obtained by a long press on 'Speed Dial'

Note: this function gives an objective picture of the communication quality in order to determine the
practical range limits of a base station (depending on the distance from the handset and the nature of
the environment).

In practice, you have to select the QUAL function (preferably the averaged measurement), set up a call,
and observe the quality index value: at a given location, the quality can be considered good if the value
displayed is equal to or greater than 12 on a stable basis.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

IMPLEMENTING 4073 GS SMART CALL SERVER : MOBILITY
HANDSETS

IDENTITY (system identity)

RFPI 1e798f0f05

System RFPI number: in hexadecimal.

31171714360744

System RFPI number: in octal.

QUALITY (global DECT quality)

A:xx X:xx Z :xx

Z:xx Number of CRC errors detected in field Z (Value measured on 120 frames and displayed in
hexadecimal).

X:xx Number of CRC errors detected in field X (Value measured on 120 frames and displayed in
hexadecimal).
A:xx Number of CRC errors detected in field A (Value measured on 120 frames and displayed in
hexadecimal).

SYNC:xx

SYNC:xx Number of synchronization errors reported by the mobile. (Value measured on 120 frames
and displayed in hexadecimal).

QUAL 01:xx

Transmission quality index (preceded by base station ID n°). See previous page: the index corresponds
to the number of frames received without error. There are two display modes:

- rapid measurement (on 16 frames). Obtained by briefly pressing 'Speed Dial'

- averaged measurement (on 256 frames). Obtained by a long press on 'Speed Dial'

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY TRAFFIC COUNTERS

File
TRAFFIC COUNTERS
8

The Alcatel OmniPCX Office PCX manages a set of DECT traffic counters. These specific counters are
mainly used to ascertain that there are enough DECT devices in an installation (correct quantity and
location given the traffic to be handled, number of communications per handset, etc.). They can also
be used during active maintenance, for example to monitor any link loss problems with a radio base
station or handset.

DECT counters are read with MMC-PM5, using the labeled addresses (this displays the content of a
specific memory area in table form).

The address System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Other Labels -> DectCntOn
activates or deactivates the traffic counters when using the system:

- 01 : active counters (CAUTION: incrementingthe counters may have an impact on the response
time of an alreadyheavily loaded system)
- 00 : inactive counters (default value)

GENERAL OPERATION

To measure the DECT traffic, 7 counters are associated with each active DECT base station (connected
and in service) and another 6 are associated with each DECT handset. Each of these counters gives
specific traffic data. When there is a cold system reset, the content of the counters is automatically reset
to zero.

The counters associated with the radio base stations (" base station counters") and those associated
with the handsets (" handset counters") are placed in two separate tables.

The start address of each of these tables varies from one system to another, depending on the software
version. This address must therefore be read beforehand by the usual means:" Memory Read/Write
-> Debug Labels":

- the start address of the base station counters is given by the label DectBasCnt
(005BED0 in the next example).
- the start address of the handset counters is given by the label DectHdsCnt
(0053CBC4 in the next example).
Debug Labels

Label: Address Rel: Len: Value: Format Hex.

DectHdsCnt 0053CBC4 2 0A 01 01 35
DectBasCnt 005BED0 2 5C 01 0B 00

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

TRAFFIC COUNTERS CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

Remarques :

- In MMC-PM5, the content of a traffic counter is always a hexadecimal (base 16) value encoded
over several consecutive addresses. To obtain the corresponding decimal value, the values dis-
played must be converted manually (see following examples).
- On the first initialization, during the installation startup, all the addresses corresponding to the
DECT counters contain the value zero (00 hex.). Only the addresses "position" and "device" con-
tain a fixed value other than zero at this stage.
All counters are automatically reset to zero when there is a cold system reset. It is however possible
to reset one or more base station or handset counters manually, by assigning the value 00 to the
corresponding addresses.

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
8

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY TRAFFIC COUNTERS

BASE STATION COUNTERS

Byte
Content
nbr

1 board position
2 device
Start address
given by 3 a nbr calls
content of
4 b
nb = (b x 256) + a
pointer
DectBasCnt
5 a nbr simult calls
6 b nb = (b x 256) + a

7 a
nbr saturations
8 b nb = (b x 256) + a

9 a
saturation time (ms)
10 b

11 c nb = ((((d x 256) + c) x 256) + b) x 256) + a

12 d

13 a nbr inter handovers

b nb = (b x 256) + a
14
15 a
nbr intra handovers
16 b nb = (b x 256) + a

17 a nbr links lost

18 b nb = (b x 256) + a

19 position next board

device

DESCRIPTION OF FIELDS

Board position:

The first byte indicates the position as follows:

- the first figure of the byte + 1 indicates the Xth board of UA type (AMIX-1, MIX or UAI).
- the second figure + 1 indicates the physical position of the board.

A Rack 3, by way of example:

- Slot 1 = UAI16: the master link of the base station is connected to port 15.
- Slot 2 = MIX484: the master link of the base station is connected to port 1
- Slot 3 = SLI4: no DECT base station.
- Slot 4 = UAI16: the master link of the base station is connected to port 5.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

TRAFFIC COUNTERS CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

3 base stations will therefore be detected in the labeled addresses:

- 0e for the 1st base station with 0 + 1 = 1 (1st UA board in the system) and e + 1 = 15 (port 15
on the board).
- 10 for the 2nd base station with 1 + 1 = 2 (2nd UA board in the system) and 0 + 1 = 1 (port 1
on the board).
- 24 for the 3rd base station with 2 + 1 = 3 (3rd UA board in the system) and 4 + 1 = 5 (port 5 on
the board).

Device:

Base index in hexadecimal on the board.

N° of calls:

The cumulative total of calls achieving connected status on the base station in question.

N° of simultaneous calls:

The maximum number of simultaneous communications recorded on the base station.

N° of saturations: total (sat1 + sat2)

sat1 = number of times all the channels in the base station were in simultaneous use.
sat2 = number of times all the available channels were in simultaneous use.

Saturation time:

The cumulative time (in ms) for sat1 saturations.

N° of inter handovers:

The cumulative total of handovers between the base station and another base station.

N° of intra handovers:

The cumulative total of intra handovers performed on the base station.

N° of links lost:

The total number of radio links cut off accidentally.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
8

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY TRAFFIC COUNTERS

Example: How to read the base station counter table

Numeric Addresses

Address Len:
Read
005BED0E 512

0A 01 B2 03 05 00 02 00 ....... Write

005BED0E 0A 01 B2 03 05 00 02 00 ....... Modify

005BED16 3A 79 00 00 83 00 4C 01 .......
005BED1E 1A 00 0C 03 43 01 03 00 .......
005BED26 00 00 00 00 00 00 22 20 .......
005BED2E 3B 00 0C 00 FF FF FF FF .......
005BED36 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF .......
005BED3E FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF .......
005BED46 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF .......
005BED4E FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF .......
005BED56 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF .......
005BED5E FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF .......
005BED66 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF .......

Return

For the minimum length of the memory area to belisted, assume 18 bytes per base station, hence:
(minimum valueto be entered in "Length" field) = 18 x total numberof base stations.

In the example, the results recorded for the first base station are as follows:

- board position 0Ahex (10 dec); slot number 6 (main module)

- device : 01 hex (1 dec); first device on the UAI board
- n° of calls : 03 B2 hex (946 dec)
- n° of simult calls: 00 05 hex (5 dec)
- n° of saturations: 00 02 hex (2 dec)
- saturation time: 00 00 79 3A hex (31.034 seconds)
- n° of inter handovers: 00 83 hex (131 dec)
- n° of intra handovers 01 4C hex (332 dec)
- n° of links lost: 00 1A hex (26 dec)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

TRAFFIC COUNTERS CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

HANDSET COUNTERS

Byte
nbr Content

1 position (fixed value = 5C h)

2 device
Start address given by
content of pointer 3 a
DectHdsCnt nbr links
4 b nb = (b x 256) + a
5 a nbr calls
6 b nb = (b x 256) + a

a nbr coms lost

7
8 b nb = (b x 256) + a

9 a nbr links lost

nb = (b x 256) + a
10 b

11 a nbr inter handovers

12 b nb = (b x 256) + a

13 a
nbr intra handovers
14 b nb = (b x 256) + a

15 position
16 device

DESCRIPTION OF FIELDS

Position:

The virtual slot: its valueis always 5C (92 in decimal).

Device:

The handset index (in order of creation).

N° of links:

The cumulative total of radio links established by the handset.

N° of calls:

The cumulative total of calls achieving connected status on the handset in question.

N° of coms lost:

The number of communications cut off in conversation (lost signal).

N° of links lost:

The total number of radio links cut off accidentally.

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
8

CALL SERVER : MOBILITY TRAFFIC COUNTERS

N° of inter handovers:

The cumulative total of handovers performed by the handset between two base stations.

N° of intra handovers:

The cumulative total of handovers performed by the handset on the same base station.

Example: How to read thehandset counters table

Numeric Addresses

Address Len:
Read
0053CBC4 50

Write
5C 01 0B 00 02 00 00 00 R......

0053CBC4 5C 01 0B 00 02 00 00 00 R..... Modify

0053CBCC 00 00 00 00 00 00 5C 02 . . . . . .R .
0053CBD4 45 00 2E 00 08 00 10 00 .......
0053CBDC 04 00 05 00 52 03 00 00 ....R..
0053CBE4 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .......
0053CBEC 00 00 52 04 00 00 00 00 ..R....
0053CBF4 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ..

Return

For the minimum length of the memory area to belisted, assume 14 bytes per handset, hence: (mini-
mum value to beentered in "Length" field) = 14 x total number ofhandsets.

First handset : position:5C h (92 dec)

device : 01 h (1 dec). See Subscriber menu in MMC-PM5 to read the corresponding

directory number.
n° of links : 00 0B h (11 dec)
n° of calls : 00 02 h (2 dec)
n° of coms lost: 00 00 h
n° of links lost: 00 00 h
n° of inter handovers: 00 00 h
n° of intra handovers 00 00 h

Second handset: position: 5C h (92 dec)

device : 02 h (2 dec)
n° of links : 00 45 h (69 dec)
n° of calls : 00 2E h (46 dec)
n° of coms lost: 00 08 h (8 dec)
n° of links lost: 00 10 h (16 dec)
n° of inter handovers : 00 04 h (4 dec)
n° of intra handovers 00 05 h (5 dec)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

TRAFFIC COUNTERS CALL SERVER : MOBILITY

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
CALL SERVER : Voice on IP

SECTION

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

Section CALL SERVER : Voice on IP

SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES FILE 1

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION FILE 2

DIMENSIONING - LIMITS FILE 3

MAINTENANCE FILE 4

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

(INDEX)

Section CALL SERVER : Voice on IP (Index)

DIMENSIONING - LIMITS FILE 3

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION FILE 2

MAINTENANCE FILE 4

SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES FILE 1

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES

File
SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES
1

SERVICES

Alcatel OmniPCX Office provides 2 services that can be combined:

1. Voice over IP is based on the Integrated H.323 Gateway, the core of Voice over IP (VoIP), which
allows communication between the conventional telephony world and the data world.

2. IP telephony enables an enterprise to share its data infrastructure (local IP network) between the
data world and the telephone world by means of an adapter known as an "IP Enabler" which con-
nects up an Alcatel Reflexes station on the LAN and/or a Windows application on a Multimedia PC
(PIMphony IP Edition) to simulate a LAN PC station. The level of service offered by the IP Enabler is
identical to that of standard Reflexes stations. For more information about Pimphony IP Edition,
consult the "Installation - configuration" file in the "Voice over IP" section.

Remarque : The IP Enabler is a TSC-IP 4098 RE/FRE add-on module in the case of a Fast IP Reflexes
station; e-Reflexes stations (Advanced, Premium and Easy) have an integrated IP mo-
dule*.

The Voice over IP services are provided by a daughter board VoIPx-1 on main CPU and/or several
(max. 6 boards) CoCPU/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 (CoProcessing Unit) boards, daughter board VoIPx-
1.This board integrates an H.323 gateway which has the following main characteristics:

- from 4 to 96 DSP channels for the H.323 gateway and IP Telephony services (DSP channels for
coding / decoding the audio signal).
- supports the audio compression algorithms G711, G729a and G723.1.
- IP communications in Full Duplex mode.
- a V2-compatible H.323 gateway that complies with the following recommendations:
- supports Q.931/Q932 signaling.
- supports the H.225 v2 protocol for establishing signaling channels between H.323 gateways
(including Fast Connect).
- use of the H.245 v4 protocol to monitor communications: establishing channels, negotiating
the Codec, etc.
- RAS signaling for communications with the H.323 internal gatekeeper (H.323 v2) ot to the out-
side (authentication, authorization, bandwidth management).
- H.450.1, H.450.2, H.450.3 : additional services (transfer, forwarding).
- use of RTP/RTCP to send audio signals in real time.
- supports the T38 protocol (Fax over IP): a Fax (or Data) type call can be routed via the voice channel
over IP.
- echo suppression.
- Gain improvement
- tone generation and detection
- silence suppression (VAD). Note: do not activate voice detection on an IP station with Codec G711.
The gateway also integrates an H.323 v2 gatekeeper that provides the following functions:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/14

SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

- RAS (Registration Admission Status) server.

- protection and authentication of recording sequences (H.235).
- testing the presence of remote H.323 gateways (ICMP or H.323 packets).

Nota : All communications and VoIP signals transit through the VoIP CoCPU board, except in the
case of communications between a PC and PIMphony IP or between IP stations (where only
signalling transits via the CoCPU).

Quality of Service (QoS)

Mechanisms in the system's ARS determine whether a VoIP call to a remote H.323 gateway can be
made without degradation of the bandwidth (see "Installation - Configuration" File).

The aim of quality of service in the network sense is to provide "end-to-end" QoS for all the audio IP
packets.

To achieve this, the system supports the IP ToS (IP Type of Service): each IP VoIP packet contains a 3-
bit precedence field indicating a level of priority. This information can be used by the network equip-
ment (routers, gateways, etc.) to assign a level of priority to the IP voice packets with respect to the IP
data packets. Alcatel OmniPCX Office also supports "DiffServ" (RFC 2475).

Nota : End-to-end quality of service can only be guaranteed if all the items of equipment in the
network are IP ToS or DiffServ compatible.

Environment tests

The H.323 gateway (CoCPU bpard equipped with VOIPx daughter board) is connected either to a
10Mbps Ethernet LAN or 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet LAN via an RJ45 cable (caeégory 5); the IP Enablers
provide a 10 Mbps Ethernet connection (IP Enabler V1: 4098 RE) or 10/100 Mbps (Enabler V1S: 4098
FRE) - and integrate a 2-port Hub (V1) or switch (V1S) allowing chaining with a PC.

2/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES

Combination between IP Telephony and IP Trunk: "RTP Proxy" service

In the case of a call between an IP terminal to a remote H.323 gateway via an IP H.323 network, this
service offered from the R2.01 version enables the audio quality of the call to be optimised.

This service avoids any unnecessary compression/decompression of voice packets; the mechanism of
previous versions (see table below) used to include the decompression of incoming packets in e-dia-
tonis, switching via the PCM bus then a new PCM/IP compression in the outgoing channel.

This mechanism is applied in calls from a handset, IP or not, connected to an Alcatel OmniPCX Office
system towards an IP terminal, remote or not, from another Alcatel OmniPCX Office system.

Nota : The "RTP Proxy" function only applies if the Codecs are identical (same Codec for IP handsets
and IP trunks for instance). If the Codecs are different, the former mechanism will be ap-
plied, namely: "incoming" call on the gateway, IP/PCM decompression and PCM/IP recom-
pression for the "outgoing" call with a different Codec.

Router/ Alcatel OmniPCX

Firewall Office
Alcatel OmniPCX Network H.323
Office

Z (101) IP LAN IP (211)

Station
IP LAN

Compression

Decompression

Audio joining through a proxy

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/14

SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

H.323 GATEWAY SERVICE

This service can be implemented in 2 ways:

- use of the service and IA board of Alcatel OmniPCX Office as a router to Internet with built-in Proxy
and Firewall.

- using an external router to the Internet or to a dedicated link providing the same level of service as
the Office R42 range.

Nota : In the following diagrams, Alcatel OmniPCX Office is used for the Internet connection con-
figuration and the external router is used for other types of connection (leased line, ADSL,
etc.).

The Alcatel OmniPCX Office H.323 Gateway service can be implemented in either of 3 contexts:
- H.323 gateway integrated into a standalone configuration.
- H.323 gateway integrated into an H.323 zone.
- Gateway managed from another Alcatel OmniPCX Office system

H.323 gateway integrated into a standalone configuration

In a stand-alone configuration the integrated gatekeeper is alive; it is masked to the exterior and can-
not be managed from the LAN.

Netmeeting
H.323 area

@IP
Always-on connection:
@IP1
Alcatel OmniPCX or Callback
WAN IP network
@ IPn
(Gatekeeper
deactivated ) R H.323
@IP @IP
@IP

@IP
R G
@IP
@IP @IP
ISDN / RTC
H.323 gateway

LAN
Netmeeting without
security plug-in

Company
@IP : address IP
G : gateway H.323 compatible
R : Router IP/Proxy/Firewall

4/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES

Gateway in a H.323 zone

In a network topology like the one below, the H.323 gateway of Alcatel OmniPCX Office can be inte-
grated into an H.323 zone managed by an external gatekeeper.

Netmeeting
H.323 area

@IP
Always-on connection:
@IP1
Alcatel OmniPCX or Callback
WAN IP network
@ IPn
(Gatekeeper
deactivated ) R H.323
@IP @IP
@IP

@IP
R G
@IP
@IP @IP
ISDN / RTC
H.323 gateway

LAN
Netmeeting

Company
@IP : IP address
G : gateway H.323 compatible
R : Router IP/Proxy/Firewall

In this configuration, the gatekeeper integrated into Alcatel OmniPCX Office must be deactivated and
the network administrator must supply the IP address of the external gatekeeper.

Nota : The ARS table must always contain all the IP addresses.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/14

SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

Gateway managed from another Alcatel OmniPCX Office system

Alcatel OmniPCX Office

@IP
(Gateway only)

@IP1
Always-on connection
Alcatel OmniPCX
WAN IP network
@ IPn
(Gatekeeper and Gateway)

R H.323
@IP @IP
@IP

Alcatel OmniPCX Office

(Gateway only)

ISDN / RTC
Netmeeting
LAN

Company
@IP : IP address
G : gateway H.323 compatible
R : Router IP/Proxy/Firewall

In this configuration, the H.323 gateway is managed by a Gatekeeper which is integrated into another
Alcatel OmniPCX Office system and which therefore has its own gateway. This configuration is suitable
for small installations (less than 10 gateways and 50 PC/H.323 terminals).

This requires configuration of numbering plans in full for all systems. All the H.323 items (remote sys-
tem, PC, H.323 terminals) should be defined in the ARS tables of all systems. The Gatekeepers inte-
grated into other Alcatel OmniPCX Office systems should be inhibited and the IP address of these
systems' external Gatekeeper should be the same as that of the master system.

Fax over IP (FoIP)

The Fax over IP services are available when a Fax is detected in an H.323 communication. When this
happens, the Audio channels are closed and T38 sessions are initialised to transmit or receive Fax pac-
kets (IFP - Internet Fax Packet).

Alcatel OmniPCX Office only allows T38 sessions over UDP. In order to ensure the reliability of the UDP
transmission, the packets are sent several times to ensure that the information reaches its destination;
this mechanism is called "UDP Redundancy".
Furthermore, in order to reduce bandwidth use, a mechanism (framing) allows the compression of
packets of the same type.

The Fax over IP (FoIP) service does not require any particular configuration of the ARS table. A Fax com-
munication is considered a transparent H.323 communication for the ARS mechanisms.

6/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES

H.450 Services
The following services are supported:

H.450 Service Supported level

H.450.1 : generic functional protocol for additio- Supported
nal H.323 services
H.450.2 : call transfer Supervised transfer: supported
Unsupervised transfer:
- if the destination is an Alcatel OmniPCX Of-
fice: supported
- if the destination does not support this featu-
re, a transfer by joining is made by forwar-
ding Alcatel OmniPCX Office
H.450.3 : call forwarding Immediate diversion: supported (including PO
forwarding)
Other forwarding: not supported
H.450.4 : warning Not supported
H.450.5 : Call parking/pick-up Not supported
H.450.6 : call signalling on the called station Not supported
H.450.7 : camped-on call signalling Not supported
H.450.8 : advanced display and information Not supported

Optimising the resources

The H450 protocol allows not to use the voice coding resources on Alcatel OmniPCX Office. In case
of transfer or forwarding request, the two initial calls are released and replaced with a single direct
call between the two parties. Thus, the bandwidth consumption is decreased and all the DSP resources
used for the initial calls are released on the Alcatel OmniPCX Office performing the forwarding or the
transfer.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/14

SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

IP TELEPHONY

This service does not require any specific external equipment (IP and/or Proxy/Firewall Router), unless
it is provided for Remote/Home Workers.

Pimphony
@IP
MultiMedia

Remote worker
Alcatel OmniPCX @IP1
@ IPn Pimphony
(DHCP Server) MultiMedia
Permanent connection VPN
@IP
R Public @IP WAN IP network
@IP

IP ENABLER

@IP
R

@IP @IP @IP

IP ENABLER
ISDN / PSTN IP ENABLER IP ENABLER
@IP

LAN
Pimphony
MultiMedia Home worker
Company
@IP : IP Address
R : IP/Proxy/Firewall router
VPN Server
The IP router (R) connected to the Intranet can be a simple IP router. The reservation of bandwidth is
"guaranteed" if this router supports IP ToS (DiffServ).
The number of remote IP Enablers or PIMphony IP subscribers depends on the line bandwidth (not
more than 2 simultaneous communications for 64 Kbps, not more than 5 for 128 Kbps).

HOME WORKER (remote IP Telephony via a VPN)

IP ENABLER

Home Network
IP ENABLER

Alcatel OmniPCX
Internet
R/F R/F
Permanent
connection VPN Permanent
connection IP ENABLER

ISDN / PSTN Pimphony IP

LAN
R/F: IP/Firewall router with permanent
connection (leased line, ADSL,
Company modem cable) +VPN Server

8/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES

The connection between the Home Worker and the Internet must be 'always-on' (ADSL, cable, etc.). It
is indispensable to have an IP/Proxy/Firewall router or VPN server on the Home Worker side.
The IP router (R/F) at the front end of the VPN must offer Proxy/Firewall and VPN server functionality
(IPSec with 3DES encryption for interoperability with the system's built-in router).
The number of remote IP Enablers or PIMphony IP subscribers depends on the line bandwidth (not
more than 2 simultaneous communications for 64 Kbps, not more than 5 for 128 Kbps).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/14

SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

REMOTE WORKER (PIMphony IP via a VPN)

IP ENABLER

Remote Worker
IP ENABLER

Pimphony IP
Alcatel OmniPCX
Internet
R/F
Permanent dial-in
connection VPN Connection

ISDN / PSTN
Pimphony IP

LAN R/F: IP/Firewall router with permanent

connection (leased line, ADSL,
Company modem cable) +VPN Server

The connection between the remote PC (PIMphony IP Edition) and the Internet is of the "dial-on-de-
mand" type (V90 analog, ISDN or ADSL modem). The remote PC first establishes a connection with
the nearest access provider, then a PPTP connection with the company's VPN server.

PC with Microsoft NetMeeting

The remote NetMeeting PC establishes a PPTP connection with the company's VPN server.

10/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES

TOPOLOGIES

This section describes typical IP network architectures for implementing the Alcatel OmniPCX Office
Voice over IP services.

The following topology is recommended for connecting up an Alcatel OmniPCX Office R2.1:

Alcatel OmniPCX
Internet
CPUe-1 board (Internet Access)

CoCPU VoIP Board (Voice over IP)

IP WAN
LAN switch IP Router Intranet/Extranet
10/100 Mbps
10/100 Mbps

10/100 Mbps

Server

LAN switch

10/100 Mbps

The bandwidth of an Ethernet LAN can be 10 or 100 Mbps. If the network operates at 100 Mbps, ad-
ding terminals operating at 10 Mbps risks downgrading the bandwidth used by VoIP and hence audio
quality: you might need to isolate these devices on external LAN switches hooked up to the system.
CoCPU boards are connected to the local client network using a LAN switch; this solution helps reduce
Ethernet traffic on the CoCPU board.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/14

SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

Multi-site configurations

A multi-site configuration is possible via an extended Intranet or an Internet VPN.

H.323 gateway integrated into an extended Intranet

Alcatel OmniPCX
Extended Intranet
R R
Permanent
connection

ISDN / PSTN

LAN
G : H.323- compatible gateway
R : IP router with permanent
Company connection

The IP router (R) connected to the Intranet can be a simple IP router. The reservation of bandwidth is
"guaranteed" if this router supports Ipv4 ToS (DiffServ).

H.323 gateway integrated into a VPN

Alcatel OmniPCX
Internet
R/F
Permanent VPN Permanent
connection connection
G

ISDN / PSTN

LAN R/F IP/Firewall router with permanent

connection (leased line, ADSL,
modem cable) +VPN Server
Company
The IP router (R/F) at the front end of the VPN must offer Proxy/Firewall and VPN server functionality
(IPSec with 3DES encryption for interoperability with the system's built-in router).

12/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES

IP telephony in an extended Intranet

Pimphony IP
IP ENABLER

@IP

IP ENABLER

Alcatel OmniPCX
R R
Permanent
connection

Pimphony IP IP ENABLER

ISDN / PSTN

LAN
R/F: IP/Firewall router with permanent
Company connection (leased line, ADSL,
modem cable) +VPN Server

Nota : See also the Home Worker and Remote Worker topologies described earlier.

PIMphony IP through RAS (Remote Access Server)

IP ENABLER

IP ENABLER
Pimphony IP
Alcatel OmniPCX

RAS ISDN / PSTN

ISDN / PSTN Pimphony IP

LAN
RAS : Remote Access Server
Company

The RAS is equipped with a pool of modems or a T0 / T2. The RAS client PC is authenticated by a PAP/
CHAP authentication procedure, then is called back by the RAS (call back).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/14

SERVICES AND TOPOLOGIES CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

PC with Microsoft NetMeeting

A NetMeeting PC can connect to the company via the VPN (PPTP connection on Internet) or directly by
an RAS connection via the telephone network (PSTN/ISDN).

14/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION

File
INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION
2

INSTALLATION GUIDE

Preliminary

A few precautions must be taken when inserting a machine into a local network to ensure the lasting
compatibility and quality of the network.
The starting point for the integration and configuring of the PCX on a LAN is the knowledge of the
network structure, its characteristics and the equipment. After that it is necessary to collect the signifi-
cant parameters and characteristics of the LAN.
Below is a non-exhaustive list of the parameters to be collected:

CPU Board

- Hostname : DNS name or alias of the board.

- IP Address: IP address of the board.
- IP Subnet Mask : subnet mask of the LAN.

General

- Number of IP trunk DSP channels: number of channels associated with remote H.323 gateway ac-
cess.
- Number of IP subscriber DSP channels: number of channels associated with the IP Telephony ser-
vice.
- Quality of service: type of quality of service to be implemented according to the LAN equipment.

Gatekeeper

- Gatekeeper integrated into the PCX: use of an integrated gatekeeper or not.

- Identification of gatekeeper: IP address of external gatekeeper.

DHCP

- Activate the integrated DHCP server: use of the integrated DHCP server or not.
- Dynamic Range: dynamic IP address range for IP telephony (IP Enabler) or for PCs.

Remarque : In the case of a configuration involving Alcatel OmniPCX Office with Internet Access ser-
vices, the DHCP server is configured in WBM (Web Based Management).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/22

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

INSTALLING THE VoIP-1 CPU BOARD

You can install up to 6 CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 boards (2 max. in the main module, 3 in the add-on mo-
dules) connected to a given Ethernet LAN via RJ45 connectors. Each board has its own IP address.

If several boards are installed, one of them is the "master" board: its IP address and software charac-
teristics serve as a reference. The other CPU boards are known as "slaves".

Remarque : Two systems equipped with CPU boards must not be connected to the same LAN. They
must be separated by a router or VLAN-compatible LAN switch. When the system starts,
the CPU board performs a Bootp query and will connect to the main CPU board which
answers this query first.

Default IP addresses

Main CPU equipped with a VoIP-1 daughter board

- Master CPU: 192.168.92.246

- CoCPU (5): from 192.168.92.248 to 192.168.92.252

Use of CoCPU only

- Master CPU: 192.168.92.248

- CoCPU: from 192.168.92.249 to 192.168.92.253

Remarque : Whatever the configuration, there is at least one master board and up to 5 slave boards:

The CPU boards can only be inserted when the system is powered down.

General software configuration

The general configuration defines the minimum parameters to be set regardless of the VoIP service to
be implemented:
- H.323 gateway only.
- IP telephony only.
- H.323 gateway and IP telephony.

CoCPU board with VoIP-1

If VoIP-1 on main CPU

General network parameter settings

- CPU hostname: DNS name or alias of the board (optional parameter).

- CPU IP address: IP address of the board.
- IP Subnet Mask : subnet mask of the board.
- Always master.

Configuring the parameters of a CPU board using PM5 impossible

2/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION

General network parameters

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Hardware and Limits -> IP Boards-> Boardstab

Significant parameters:

- Default router address: IP address of the CPUe, CPUe-1 or CPUe-2 (Internet Access) board or
of the external router.
- IP of subnet mask: subnet mask containing the PCX.

These fields are necessary to access the WAN.

Configuring the DSPs (optional)

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System -> Voice on IP -> VoIP: Parameters -> DSP tab

It is recommended not to change these parameters.

Meaning of parameters:

- Law Mode: Law A or Law µ compression (read only).

- Echo Cancellation: cancellation of the echo (no by default).
- Voice Active Detection: cancellation of silence (yes by default).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/22

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

CONFIGURING THE INTEGRATED H.323 GATEWAY

H.323 Gateway : this application layer forms the interface between the IP telephony (H.323 stack) and
switched telephony worlds (Alcatel OmniPCX Office PCX call manager).

Configuring the PCX as the H.323 gateway

After an initialization by default all the DSPs are assigned to the pool of VoIP subscriber channels (IP
telephony).
In a pure H.323 gateway configuration, all the DSPs of the PCX VoIP daughter boards will be used for
"IP network" accesses.
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System -> Voice on IP -> VoIP: Parameters -> Général tab

Number of VoIP access channels (IP trunks):Number of channels for VoIP IP access, i.e. 1 DSP
channel for 1 "network access". .

Quality of IP service: selection of the type of QoS used for the remote H.323 gateway VoIP calls.

If all the network equipment items support the IP ToS, one can choose an IP priority from 1 to 7:

If all the network equipment items are "DiffServ" compatible, one can choose from:
- DiffServ PHB Best Effort Forwarding (BE) (priority bits: 00000000 ),
- DiffServ PHB Expedited Forwarding (EF) (priority bits: 10111000 ).

Nota : Each DSP placed in the "VoIP access" pool is considered as a "network access" by the PCX,
i.e. 1 VoIP DSP = 1 B-channel. As there can be a maximum of 6 VoIP daughter boards,
each with 16 DSPs, there can be no more than 96 VoIP access DSPs, i.e. 96 "IP" B-channels.

Network accesses (T0, T2, analogue TL, DLT0, DLT2) + VoIP Accesses ≤ 120

Configuring the gatekeeper (optional)

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System -> Voice on IP -> VoIP: Parameters -> Gatekeeper tab

- Integrated gatekeeper: the Gatekeeper is integrated by default into the PCX (box is ticked); if not,
fill in the Gatekeeper's identification.
- IP Address: if the PCX is a gateway in an H.323 zone, one must use an external gatekeeper that
is the manager of the H.323 zone it covers, indicating its IP Address provided by the network ad-
ministrator.
- Reset Code : allows the resetting of a password on NetMeeting PCs that have a safety Plug-in.

4/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION

Configuring the Gateway timeouts (optional)

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System -> Voice on IP -> VoIP: Parameters -> Gateway tab

NB: The parameters have standardized values, do not change them without prior analysis.

- RAS Request Timeout: maximum authorized response time for an RAS request ("Registration, Ad-
mission, Status") made to the gatekeeper; between 10 and 180; default value = 20.

- Remote Gateway Presence Timeout: determines the presence of a remote Gateway; value
between 10 and 600; default value = 50.

- Connect Timeout: maximum authorised time interval between initialisation and connection; value
between 10 and 1200; default value = 500.

- H.245 Request Timeout: maximum authorized response time for an H.245 request; value
between 10 and 60; default value = 40.

- H323: End of dialing timeout: default value = 5

Configuration of T38 parameters for Fax over IP (optional)

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System -> Voice on IP -> VoIP: Parameters -> Fax tab

- UDP Redundancy: number of Fax data packets forwardings; value between 0 and 2; default value
= 1.
- Framing : number of data packets in the same frame; value between 0 and 5; default value = 0.
In fact, the number of packets is equal to the number in this field + 1.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/22

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

REMOTE H.323 GATEWAY

Configuring outgoing communication (ARS table)

The choice of routing a telephone communication between a public network access or a VoIP access
and the busy trunk overflow feature are defined in the ARS table.
Like conventional outgoing telephone calls, a VoIP call is subject to the ARS mechanisms: link catego-
ries, ARS time slot management, overflow on busy, etc.
In the diagram below sites A and B are Alcatel OmniPCX Offices. Site C is a remote system integrating
an H.323 ga-
teway.
100 Site A Site B 200
Public network subscriber
N5 03 90 67 76 90

ISDN / RTC

Alcatel OmniPCX @IP1 @IP2 Alcatel OmniPCX

@IPn @IPn
WAN
R R

LAN LAN
112 237

Internal numbering: 100 to 149

Public numbering: 03 88 67 71 00 Internal numbering: 200 to 250
03 88 67 71 50 G Public numbering: 04 72 35 42 00
04 72 35 42 49

G : H.323 compatible gateway

Site C
405
R : IP/Proxy/Firewall
- @IP1 : IP address of the master VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board at site A - @IPn: IP address of slave
board(s)
- @IP2 : IP address of the master VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board at site B, example: 192.189.50.120

Base call

The site A stations call the site B stations by dialing their internal numbers:
Internal numbering plan (site A):
Function Start End Base NMT Priv
Secondary trunk 2 2 ARS Keep Yes
group

6/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION

ARS Table – ARS Table:

Networ Access Range Substitute List. Trunk Called Par- Comment

k group list ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Priv. 2 00-49 2 4 Het H.323 to site B

- The "Called(ISVPN/H450)" field has the value "Heterogeneous" by default. the notions of ISVPN do
not apply to VoIP calls. This field is used for H450. If the remote is known to manage H450 transfer
and/or forwarding services, this parameter can be set to "Homogenous".
- The "User Comment" field enables a comment to be associated with the ARS input (20 characters
maximum).

Nota : The IP parameters in the ARS table are accessed by right-clicking and selecting "IP parame-
ters".

Destination IP Type IP address Hostna- Gateway Gateway Bandwidth Gateway

me Alive Pro- Alive Ti- Alive Sta-
tocol meout tus
Gateway Static 192.189.50.120 option ICMP 300 128 Kbits Enabled
(5 calls)

- The "Destination" field of an ARS input to VoIP accesses must be of the "Gateway" type (H.323 ga-
teway).
- For a "Gateway" destination, the "IP Type" must be a static IP address (non-modifiable field).
- The "IP Address" field must be that of the remote H.323 gateway. In the example, this value cor-
responds to the IP address of the master VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board at site B.
- The "Host name" can be used instead of the IP address of the remote gateway's Gatekeeper. Re-
quires a DNS server.
- Gateway Alive Protocol / Gateway Alive Timeout:
The integrated gateway tests the presence of the remote gateway every 300 seconds (Gateway Ali-
ve Timeout, from 0 to 3600 seconds). The test protocol (Gateway Alive Protocol) used by default is
ICMP: the H.323 test protocol can only be used if the remote gateway is H.323 V2-compatible¡

Nota : Gateway Alive Timeout : if this field is at 0, the "Gateway Alive Protocol " mechanism is in-
hibited. This option is to be used in the specific situation where it is impossible to use ICMP
or H.323 to test for the presence of the remote gateway; but in this case, there is no means
whatsoever of knowing whether the remote gateway is alive or out of service.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/22

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

- Gateway Bandwidth / QoS: for each ARS input to a remote H.323 gateway, a bandwidth must be
reserved for the Voice over IP to the remote H.323 gateway. The number of simultaneous commu-
nications that can be held depends on this value:
Bandwidth Number of simultaneous commu-
nications possible
None No communication possible De-
fault value
55.6 Kbps 1
64 Kbps 2
128 Kbps 5
256 Kbps 10
512 Kbps 20
≥ 1024 Kbps > 20

Example: if the total bandwidth corresponding to the data rate to a remote gateway is 256 Kbps and
the mean traffic level is 50%, it is wise to define a bandwidth of 128 Kbps for Voice over IP.

Remark concerning the quality of service - QoS

If we take our example, site A can make H.323 calls to sites B and C. One assumes that the bandwidths
reserved for Voice over IP at the LAN/WAN gateways of each site are:
- bandwidth reserved for VoIP on site A: 1024 Kbps (20 calls or more)
- bandwidth reserved for VoIP on site B: 128 Kbps (5 simultaneous calls)
- bandwidth reserved for VoIP on site C: 64 Kbps (2 simultaneous calls)
In this configuration one sees that it is possible to make 7 simultaneous calls from site A to the remote
H.323 gateways: 5 to site B and 2 to site C.
7 DSPs can therefore be assigned in the "VoIP access" pool for site A (7 being the number of DSPs nee-
ded to call sites B and C simultaneously).
However, let us assume that there is no ongoing communication between sites A and C, and that 5
calls are established between A and B. The total number of VoIP network access DSPs consumed in
PCX A is 5: therefore 2 DSPs remain available to establish two other calls to site B.
Yet in this example we exceed the bandwidth reserved for Voice over IP at the LAN/WAN gateway of
site B: the quality of service is no longer guaranteed.
To avoid downgrading the VoIP service, the system uses the "Gateway Bandwidth" field of the ARS table
associated with the input to the remote H.323 gateway of site B, which will be configured at 128 Kbps
(5 calls), as quality indicator (QoS): although there are still 2 DSPs available, the PCX will refuse a 6th
call to site B.

Nota : This service is not available if an external gatekeeper is used.

8/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION

Nota : To optimize management of this ARS table parameter, it is vital to have information about
the bandwidth available (reserved) for VoIP calls that is as precise as possible.

- Gateway Alive Status: this regularly updated read-only field indicates the status of the remote ga-
teway:
- Alive: remote gateway present
- Deactivated: remote gateway absent / out of service.
It can, however, turn out to be judicious to deactivate the mechanism if one is sure of network reliability,
in order to reduce the traffic.

Incoming call

An incoming "VoIP access" call is analyzed in the private numbering plan. In our example:
Private numbering plan of site B:
Function Start End Base NMT Priv
Local call 200 249 200 No

Forcing a public call to the H.323 gateway

LCR : Least Cost Routing

When a site A subscriber dials the public number of the site B station, the call can be forced to the VoIP
network accesses:
Internal numbering plan of site A:
Function Start End Base NMT Priv
Main trunk group 0 0 ARS Drop No

ARS Table – ARS Table:

Networ Access Range Substitute List. Trunk Called Par- Comment

k group list ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub. 04723542 00-49 2 4 Het H.323 to site B

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/22

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

Overflow

When a site A subscriber calls a site B station by its internal number, ARS routing enables the calls to
be re-routed to the public network when it is no longer possible to call via the VoIP accesses. The fol-
lowing criteria render a "VoIP access" trunk group inaccessible:
- the VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board of site A is out of service.
- no more DSPs associated with the VoIP accesses are available.
- the remote H.323 gateway is out of service (VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board of site B out of service).
- the quality of service (QoS) to the remote gateway is poor (exceeding of the possible simultaneous
communication threshold for the bandwidth reserved for Voice over IP for this remote H.323 ga-
teway).
ARS table of site A: Network
Calling the site B station by its internal number:
Networ Access Range Substitute List. Tru- Called Comment Destination
k nk group Party
list (ISVPN/
H450)
Priv. 2 00-49 2 4 Het H.323 to site B Gateway
04723542 1 Het ISDN Access No IP

Calling the site B station using its public number:

Networ Access Range Substitute List. Tru- Called Comment Destination

k nk group Party
list (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub. 0472354 00-49 2 4 Het H.323 to site Gateway
2 B
04723542 1 Het ISDN Access No IP
Pub. 0472354 50-99 04723542 1 Het ISDN Access No IP *
2

* : As the public numbers 04723542 50 to 99 do not belong to site B, they must be routed to the public
network.

Break In

The break-in service enables the PCX to re-route a public number from site A to site B. In our example,
the public network subscriber dials the number 03 88 67 71 50 which is routed to station 250 on site B:

Public numbering plan (site A):

10/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION

Function Start End Base NMT Priv

Secondary trunk 7150 7150 ARS Keep No
group

ARS Table – ARS Table:

Networ Access Range Substitute List. Trunk Called Par- Comment

k group list ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub. 0388677150 250 4 Het H.323 to site B

Reminder: it is vital for the PCX "Installation number" field to be configured; e.g. for site A: 388677100.

Break Out

The break-out service enables proximity calls to be made. In our example a site A station dials a public
number starting with 04, the call is routed to site B via the H.323 gateway, then routed to the public
network from site B, configuration:
Internal numbering plan of site A:
Function Start End Base NMT Priv
Main trunk group 0 0 ARS Drop No

ARS table of site A: Network

Networ Access Range Substitute List. Tru- Called Comment Destination

k nk group Party
list (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub. 04 004 4 Het H.323 to site Gateway *
B
04 1 Het ISDN Access No IP *
*

* : as the prefix 0 is dropped in the internal numbering plan, 004 must be substituted for 04,

** : this sub-line allows overflow to the public network lines of site A if the VoIP access calls are inac-
cessible.
As an incoming VoIP access call is analyzed in the private numbering plan, the following must be pro-
grammed in the private numbering plan of site B:
Function Start End Base NMT Priv
Main trunk group 0 0 0 Drop No

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/22

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

IP TELEPHONY

Nota : Configuration procedures are identical for a station equipped with an external IP
Enabler or with an integrated IP module.

IP Enabler connection hardware

The IP Enabler is an optional interface (4098 RE/FRE) that plugs into the back of Fast IP Reflexes stations
(in the case of e-Reflexes Advanced, Premium and Easy stations, the IP module is integrated in the sta-
tion). It is then connected as shown below:

Mains power
IP ENABLER
4098 FRE
UA
PC LAN CPU

PC LAN

LAN

- The IP Enabler is connected to the LAN via an RJ45 connector with 10 Mbps Ethernet access for IP
Enabler V1.0 (4098 RE), and 10/100 Mbps for IP Enabler V1S (4098 FRE).
- Initialisation, through static or dynamic IP addressing via DHCP, involves downloading the binary
file into the IP Enablers from the master VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board, which is considered as a
TFTP server.
- The PCX then considers an IP Enabler as a "fully-fledged" Reflexes station. Voice and signaling are
encapsulated in UDP packets and enable communications:
- IP Phone with UA / DECT / analog stations and network accesses.
- IP Phone with IP Phone.
- IP Phone with an H.323 terminal or an H.323 gateway (e.g.: NetMeeting PC).
- IP Phone with a PIMphony IP Edition.

Nota : The bandwidth of an Ethernet LAN can be 10 or 100 Mbps. If the network operates at 100
Mbps, adding terminals operating at 10 Mbps risks downgrading the bandwidth and hence
VoIP performance quality: it might be necessary to isolate these terminals on external LAN
Switches.

12/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION

CONFIGURING AN IP ENABLER

Depending on the network topology, the configuring of the IP Enablers can be:
- Completely automatic, if they are on the same subnet as the PCX: simply connect the IP Enabler to
the LAN and connect the power supply unit. The DHCP server allocates the dynamic IP addresses
and the TFTP server integrated into the CPU/CPUe board downloads the binary into the IP Enabler.
- Manual, if the IP Enablers are connected to a different subnet of Alcatel OmniPCX Office, or if the
DHCP server integrated into the VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board is deactivated: in this case the three
IP parameters and the TFTP server address have to be entered on the terminals.

General IP Telephony parameter settings

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> VoIP -> Parameters -> General tab

Significant parameter:

Number of VoIP-Subscriber Channels: number of channels dedicated to IP subscribers: 1 channel

= 1 access.

These channels are used by the IP Enabler for communications between the IP Enabler and the system
terminals and client PC H.323 IP Enabler.

Activating/deactivating the DHCP server

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous-> VoIP ->Parameters -> DHCP tab

Significant parameters:

Enable Integrated DHCP Server: the box is ticked by default, it is the internal DHCP that assigns the
IP addresses dynamically; otherwise, the DHCP is inhibited and the IP addresses have to be entered
manually.

Dynamic Range: IP addresses range managed by the DHCP server.

Start IP Address: start of the address range.

End IP Address: end of the address range.

Nota : - No address in the range must be assigned to any other LAN equipment¡

- The DHCP server integrated to the H.323 gateway (CoCPU IP) only manages IP Enablers.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/22

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

IP Enabler connected to the same Subnet as the PCX

The IP Enabler is connected to the same LAN as the PCX and the integrated DHCP server is activated:
the recording sequence is automatic. This sequence is displayed on the station display and runs in 6
phases. Each phase is represented by a flashing block on the display:
- Phase 1: IP initialization
- Phase 2: downloading of the configuration file (TFTP)
- Phase 3: downloading of the binary file (TFTP)
- Phase 4: binary flashing (not systematic). Note: the binary is only flashed when there is a change
of version in the TFTP server (VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board).
- Phase 5: downloading of the starting file
- Phase 6: establishing of UA signaling

At the end of phase 6, the station is initialized and appears on the list of terminals of the MMC-PM5.

Nota : Creation of the station is automatic, the system automatically assigns the first free directory
number (it is not necessary to create an IP terminal beforehand).

If an error occurs during the initialization sequence, a specific error message "Error x.yy" is displayed:
see "Maintenance" File.

14/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION

IP Enabler connected to another subnet than the PCX

The following example shows the cases where IP Enablers have to be installed manually:
- The IP Enabler (A) is connected to the same subnet as the H.323 gateway (VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1
board), but the integrated DHCP server is not active: manual initialization will be necessary.
- The IP Enablers (B and C) are not connected to the same subnet as the PCX: the registration se-
quence will have to be manual (even if the Alcatel OmniPCX Office integrated DHCP server is ac-
tive).

- @IP 1 : IP address of the master VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board(e.g. 192.168.90.110)

- @IP n : IP address of the slave VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board (1 to 5 boards)(e.g.
192.168.90.111)
- @IP RA : IP address of the router, subnet A side(e.g. 192.168.90.1)
- @IP RB : IP address of the router, subnet B side(e.g. 192.168.75.1)
- @IP RC : IP address of the router, subnet C side(e.g. 192.168.122.10)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/22

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

CONFIGURATION

An IP Enabler has a configuration interface that can be used to program the IP parameters to establish
the link with the PCX if necessary. The configuration menu is accessed by pressing the i and # keys in
succession, immediately after connecting the IP Enabler mains power adapter. The following com-
mands are used in the menus:
- # : validation and return to previous menu;
- 0 : return to previous menu / exit;
- * : cancellation and return to previous menu;
- HP- and HP+ keys: previous screen / next screen (signalled by the symbols ` / ).

Access to the configuration menu is inhibited as soon as phase 5 of the initialization sequence begins.

Access the configuration menu by pressing the i then # keys in succession, immediately after connec-
ting the IP Enabler mains power adapter.

Main menu (Advanced IP Phone):

1 . MA C Ad d r e s s 3 . V e r s i o n s

2 . I P P a r a me t e r s 4 . Ot h e r s

- 1. Mac Address : display of the MAC address of the IP Enabler/IP set (read only).
- 2. IP Parameters : display and modification of the IP parameters: see details below.
- 3. Versions : the versions of the various set elements are displayed: hardware, software, boot.
- 4. Others : miscellaneous displays: text descriptions of error messages (status info); indication of 2
software versions available and the number of the current version (Partition).
- 5. IP Memory: enables the IP configurations to be stored globally and to restore them afterwards.
The current configuration is always used as source or as destination of the operation; if the current
configuration is dynamic, these are the parameters of the flash that will be copied or deleted.
- 6. Ethernet Links: display and change of parameters of the Ethernet link(s) of the IP Station (2 links,
PC and LAN on e-Reflexes Premium and Advanced; only one link, LAN on e-Reflexes Easy Station).
For each link, it is possible to alter the speed and the duplex (if the auto negotiation mode is selec-
ted, it is then used for the 2 parameters).
- the speed: 10 Mbits/s, 100 Mbits/s or auto negotiation mode.
- duplex: half-duplex, full-duplex or auto negotiation mode.

Accessing the IP parameters menu: Option 2 - Parameters

- Press key 1 to switch from Dynamic mode to Static mode:

- Access the IP address configuration menu, option 2. Enter the IP address of the IP Enabler and con-
firm by pressing # (validation and return to previous menu) or quit by pressing *. Example:
- IP Enabler A : 192.168.90.100
- IP Enabler B : 192.168.75.6
- IP Enabler C : 192.168.122.201

Nota : An address such as 192.168.75.6 will have to be entered as follows: 192 168 075006. To
confirm the data entry, press #, the display returns to the previous menu.

16/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION

- Access the subnet mask configuration menu, option 3. Enter the subnet mask and confirm by pres-
sing # (validation and return to the previous menu). Example:
- IP Enabler A : 255.255.255.0
- IP Enabler B : 255.255.255.0
- IP Enabler C : 255.255.255.0
- Access the default router configuration menu, option 4. Enter the IP address of the default router
and confirm by pressing # (validation and return to previous menu). In our example:
- IP Enabler A : @IP RA = 192.168.90.1
- IP Enabler B : @IP RB = 192.168.75.1
- IP Enabler C : @IP RC = 192.168.122.10
- Access the TFTP server configuration menu, option 5. Press # to enter the IP address of the TFTP
server and confirm by pressing # (validation and return to previous menu). In our example:
- IP Enabler A : 192.168.90.110
- IP Enabler B : 192.168.90.110
- IP Enabler C : 192.168.90.110
- NB: Choice 6 (Main CPU Address) is not used.
- Press 7 (VLAN id): To switch the e-Reflexes from the mode without VLAN to the mode with VLAN
(Virtual LAN), press 1 then program the VLAN value (decimal value between 0 and 4095). To deac-
tivate the VLAN, press 1 again.
- After configuring the 4 parameters, return to the main menu by pressing 0, then validate the con-
figuration by selecting 0 again in the main menu, the display will propose the confirmation screen
"Save modification":
- press " * " to cancel and restart the configuring procedure
- press " # " to save the parameters, the terminal will display the 2 screens "Modification saved"
and "IPPhone will reset" in turn before reinitializing itself:

Nota : The IP Enabler power supply must not be disconnected during this phase.

- On restarting the IP Enabler will perform 6 registration phases:

- Phase 1: IP initialization
- Phase 2: downloading of the configuration file
- Phase 3: downloading of the binary file
- Phase 4: flashing of the binary
- Phase 5: downloading of the starting file
- Phase 6: establishing of IP signaling
At the end of phase 6, the station is initialized and the terminal appears in the list of the PM5 stations.
Creation of the station is automatic, the system automatically assigns the first free directory number (it
is not necessary to create an IP terminal beforehand).
If an error occurs during the initialization sequence, a specific error message "Error x.yy" is displayed:
see "Maintenance" File.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/22

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

CONFIGURATION FROM AN EXTERNAL DHCP

The following minimum parameters must be configured:

- IP Enabler 4098 RE/FRE:

- IP address
- Subnet mask
- Router address
- TFTP address (DHCP option code 066)
- "Vendor Specific Information" option: this field is not to be configured (the IP Enabler uses this
field to give priority to an Alcatel server. In the absence of an Alcatel server, it accepts the offer
from another server).

- e-Reflexes stations:

- IP address
- Subnet mask
- Router address
- TFTP address (DHCP option code 066)
- "Vendor Specific Information" option.
- If the e-Reflexes station is configured in DHCP Alcatel only, this option's value must be set
at "a4200.0"
- Recommended configuration: if the e-Reflexes station is configured in DHCP (non Alca-
tel), this option is not to be configured.

18/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION

PIMPHONY IP EDITION

A PC equipped with PIMphony IP is considered by the PCX as an IP subscriber, in the same way as an
IP Enabler. No specific programming is needed.
After installing the PIMphony IP software on a PC (conventional installation procedure by Wizard), a
"Multimedia PC" type IP terminal is automatically created in the list of subscribers, with the first free
directory number. Unlike the IP Enablers, Alcatel OmniPCX Office does not manage the IP address of
a Multimedia PC; only a MAC address is registered at the first connection. No software (firmware) is
transferred between the system and PIMphony IP during the registration procedure.
Registration is an "uncovered" mechanism based on the IP protocol: the PC generates a Multicast re-
quest and waits for the reply from a VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board. During the reply / registration pha-
se, the VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board indicates its IP address to the PC and the PC transmits its Ethernet
address (MAC Address) to the PCX.
If there is no reply (e.g. IP routing problems), the PC generates the Multicast request several times, and
if no reply is obtained, PIMphony IP enters a "failure" mode. The user is then asked to indicate the IP
address of the master VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board; if the address is incorrect, another request is ma-
de.
Once registration has been performed, the IP address of the VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board is stored
in the Windows register base and will be used for all future connections. If a problem arises, such as
a change in the IP address of the VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1 board, a new registration sequence (Multicast
request) is initiated.
After initialization of PIMphony IP, IP connectivity must be permanent, otherwise the PCX considers the
PC to be out of service.

Nota : A "Multimedia PC" in the subscribers list is a PC equipped with PIMphony IP Edition.

A "netmeeting PC" does not appear in the subscribers list; it is considered as an "external
private number" and requires an entry in the ARS table.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 19/22

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

PC H.323

A PC equipped with NetMeeting can establish PC - Station and Station - PC communications. Only the
base station can be called with a PC equipped with NetMeeting.
A NetMeeting PC is not seen by the PCX as an IP Enabler but as a private directory number by the PCX,
and requires a specific entry in the ARS table to be authenticated and have access to the PCX services.
A NetMeeting PC uses a DSP from the "VoIP access (IP trunks)" pool for these communications with the
PCX and with a remote H.323 gateway.
A call to a NetMeeting PC is transparent for the user.
The configuration of a NetMeeting PC can be either:
- Static: its IP address serves as a reference, or
- Dynamic: the number (or the range) in the ARS entry is used for the connection.

NetMeeting PC in "static" configuration

PC with static IP addressing (permanent): authentication is based on the IP address of the PC.
ARS Table – ARS Table:
Netwo Access Range Substitute List. Trunk Destina- IP Type IP address Hostname
rk group list tion
Priv. 258 258 4 PC Static 192.189.50 option
.120

- The "network" field must be "Private" when a PC is involved.

- In the case of a static IP address, only one PC can be registered, therefore there is only one directory
number: "prefix" field = "substitute", the "ranges" field is empty.
- List of trunk groups: corresponds to the index of the table containing the VoIP access trunk group,
- The destination field must be "PC" and its IP addressing type is static,
- IP address field: contains the IP address of the PC,
- None of the other parameters, Gateway Alive Protocol, Gateway Alive Timeout, etc., are applicable
in this configuration.

Notas : - only the "Destination - IP Type - IP Address" fields are obligatory. The "Hostname" field
is optional and requires a DNS server on the network. None of the other IP fields in the ARS
table are applicable.

- during communications in the PCX, the name associated with PC no. 124 (Remote PC) will
be used except where a name has already been registered in the PCX directory for no. 124.

In the case of a network structure, do not forget to configure the entries in the private numbering plan:

Function Start End Base NMT Priv

Secondary trunk 258 258 ARS Keep Yes
group

20/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION

NetMeeting PC in "dynamic" configuration

- Dynamic addressing: authentication of the PC is based on its directory number (125 to 126) and
a password.
Netwo Access Range Substitute List. Trunk Destina- IP Type IP address Hostname
rk group list tion
Priv. 26 0-5 26 4 PC Dynamic -- --

- The "network" field must be "Private" when a PC is involved.

- In the case of a dynamic IP address, several PCs can connect: "prefix" field = "substitute", the "ran-
ges" field contains the range of private numbers assigned to the PCs.
- None of the other parameters, IP Address, Hostname, Gateway Alive Protocol …, are applicable
in this configuration.

In the case of a network structure, do not forget to configure the entries in the private numbering plan:

Function Start End Base NMT Priv

Secondary trunk 260 265 ARS Keep Yes
group

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 21/22

INSTALLATION - CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

22/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP DIMENSIONING - LIMITS

File
DIMENSIONING - LIMITS
3

SYSTEM DIMENSIONING

DSP channels required for IP Trunk services

Number of DSPs = Number of VoIP network accesses = 96 max.

DSP channels required by VoIP services

The number of DSP channels (VoIP ports) required depends on the system configuration and the VoIP
services to be implemented.

The main situations are as follows:

- H.323 gateway only: the number of DSP channels is equal to the number of IP network accesses.

Nota : The desired number of DSP channels can be limited by the bandwidth reserved for VoIP
accesses. Example: if the reserved bandwidth is 64 Kbps, only 2 calls can be made si-
multaneously; the number of VoIP accesses can thus be limited to 2 channels.

- IP Telephony only: The number of DSP channels needed is indicated in the following paragraph.

- Conventional telephony (Reflexes / DECT / Z, etc.) and IP Telephony: The number of DSP channels
needed is indicated in the following paragraph

- H.323 gateway and IP Telephony: The number of DSP channels needed is indicated in the fol-
lowing paragraph. The number of DSP channels equals the desired number of IP network accesses.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

DIMENSIONING - LIMITS CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

Calculating the mean number of DSPs required (IP Telephony)

Number of IP Phone Pool

DSP channels
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35 Pool
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
4 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 180 200

IP terminals

The following table indicates the mean number of DSPs required depending the number of IP Enablers
(IP terminals) one wishes to install. The mean number of DSPs required is called "A":
Number 4 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45

IP Enablers
Number of DSPs 4 5 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
(A)

Number 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95

IP Enablers
Number of DSPs 24 25 26 28 29 31 33 34 35 37
(A)

Number 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145

IP Enablers
Number of DSPs 39 41 43 44 46 48 49 51 52 54
(A)

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP DIMENSIONING - LIMITS

Number 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195

IP Enablers
Number of DSPs 55 57 58 60 61 63 64 66 67 69
(A)

Number 200

IP Enablers
Number of DSPs 70
(A)

The mean number A must be reduced by the number of network accesses one wants to have in this
system. A new value, called B, is calculated from the following formula:

B = Total number of network accesses - int.(B1/10) + int.(B2/20)

- B1 represents the total number of non-IP subscribers in the system (the number of IP Enablers in
the system is not included)
- B2 represents the total number of IP Enablers in the system.
- Int(B1/10) represents the whole number resulting from dividing B1 by 10 and int(B2/20) the whole
number resulting from dividing B2 by 20.

From the values A and B one obtains:

Mean number of DSP channels required for VoIP services = Min(A, absolute value of B)

Where Min(A, B) means: the smaller of the two values A and B.

Nota : The total number of DSP channels to be implemented for IP Telephony and/or IP network
accesses will be increased to the next higher value out of the possible combinations of DSPs
present in the system (reminder: a VoIP daughter board supports 4, 8 or 16 DSPs; the sys-
tem contains from 2 to 96 DSPs, varying every 2, except for 92).

In the case of IP telephony and IP trunk mixing, simply total the DSPs.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

DIMENSIONING - LIMITS CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

Configuration examples

H.323 gateway only

- 1 Operator station (non-IP)

- 40 Reflexes stations (non-IP)
- 5 T0 accesses
- 6 VoIP network accesses (example: 2 to a site A with a bandwidth = 64 Kbps and 2 accesses to a
site B with a bandwidth = 64 Kbps plus 2 other channels for NetMeeting PCs).
As all the DSP channels are associated with the H.323 gateway (no IP telephony), the number of DSP
channels needed for this configuration corresponds to the number of VoIP accesses, i.e. 6 (increased
to 8).

Small IP Telephony configuration

- 1 Operator station (non-IP)

- 20 IP Enabler stations
- 3 T0 (=6 channels)
In this case the mean number of DSPs associated with the 20 IP Enablers is: A=12.
B = 6 - 0 + 1 = 7.
The mean number of DSPs needed for this configuration is: Min(12, 7) = 7 (increased to 8).

Large IP telephony configuration

- 1 Operator station (non-IP)

- 70 IP Enabler stations
- 1 T2 access with 30 channels
A = 29 ; B = 30 – 0 + 3 = 33.
The mean number of DSPs needed for this configuration is: Min(29, 33) = 29 (increased to 32).

Mean configuration in mixed telephony: IP and conventional telephony

- 1 Operator station (non-IP)

- 25 IP Enabler stations
- 25 DECT stations
- 6 T0 accesses
A = 14 ; B = 12 – 2 + 1 = 11.
The mean number of DSPs needed for this configuration is: Min(14, 11) = 11 (increased to 16).

Mean configuration in mixed telephony: IP and conventional telephony

- 1 Operator station (non-IP)

- 5 IP Enabler stations
- 40 conventional Reflexes stations
- 6 T0 accesses
A = 5 ; B = 12 – 4 +0 = 8.
The number of DSPs needed for this configuration is: Min(5, 8) = 5 (increased to 8).

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP DIMENSIONING - LIMITS

Medium configuration for mixed telephony + H.323 gateway

- 1 Operator station (non-IP)

- 5 IP Enabler stations
- 40 conventional Reflexes stations
- 4 T0 accesses
- 5 VoIP network accesses
A = 5; B = (8+5) - 4 + 0 = 9.
- The number of DSP channels needed for IP telephony is: Min(5, 9) = 5.
- The H.323 gateway requires 5 additional DSP channels.
The mean number of DSPs needed for this configuration is 10 (increased to 16).

Bandwidth

In an H.323 gateway configuration, a bandwidth can be associated with each ARS table entry to a
remote H.323 gateway.

Number of DSPs depending on communication type:

- PIMphony IP or IP Phone
- IP Phone - IP Phone : 0 DSPs
- IP Phone in conference: 1 DSPs
- IP Phone or PIMphony IP - Reflexes station or analog/ISDN network: 1 DSPs
- IP Phone or PIMphony IP - PC H323 or H323gateway (IP trunk): 2 DSPs
- PC - PC : 0 DSPs
- PC with internal H323 gateway - PC with internal H323 gateway: 1 DSPs

The following table indicates the potential number of simultaneous communications depending on the
bandwidth reserved for Voice over IP calls:

Data rate (bandwidth) Number of simultaneous com- CODEC used

munications possible
55.6 Kbps (or less) 1 G.723.1/G729a
64 Kbps 2 G.723.1/G729a
128 Kbps 5 G.723.1/G729a
256 Kbps 10 G.723.1/G729a
512 Kbps 20 G.723.1/G729a
≥ 1024 Kbps Depends on the number of IP G.723.1/G729a
trunks

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

DIMENSIONING - LIMITS CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

LIMITS & RECOMMENDATIONS

VoIP services

Voice over IP services require a software key.

VoIPx-1 on main CPU

- Main CPU always master VoIP board

- maximum 5 VoIP CoCPU boards in addition

- VoIP4-1 or VoIP8-1 on main CPU

- Maximum capacity 88 VoIP channels

VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 board

There can be a maximum of 6 boards in a system: one "master" board and five "slave" boards.
The "master" VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 board will be the first board seen by the system. If a
VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 board is added to the system, it will be considered as a "slave"
board.
A VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 board is equipped with a daughter board of 4, 8 or 16 DSPs
maximum.
An Alcatel OmniPCX Office can contain a maximum of 96 DSPs.
If there is more than one VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 board in a system, each of the Ethernet
ports of each board must be connected to the LAN and they must be connected to the same subnet.
It is possible to combine VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 boards with a different number of DSPs: if
the system combines the IP Telephony and H.323 Gateway services, it is strongly recommended for
the board with the largest number of DSPs to be the "master" board and that its IP address should be
used as the reference for the remote H.323 gateways.
The VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 boards are to be connected via a LAN Switch: this solution re-
duces Ethernet access traffic.

DSP channels

After a cold reset, all the DSPs of the VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 board are assigned to the VoIP
subscriber channel pool by default. The DSP allocation can be modified using MMC-PM5.
Any DSP allocated to the VoIP access pool is removed from the VoIP subscriber pool: it will therefore
no longer be available for IP telephony. Conversely, a DSP from the VoIP subscriber pool will not be
able to be used for H.323 gateway calls.

IP Enabler

The theoretical limit on the number of IP Enabler + PIMphony IP stations that can be connected is 200,
however:
- it is obligatory for the operator station to be a Reflexe station connected to a UA link, which means
that at least one UAI board must be installed in the system,
- the IP Enablers are "deducted" from the limit on Reflexes stations.

The Ethernet access of an IP Enabler is at 10 Mbps (IP Enabler V1/4098 RE) or 10/100 Mbps (IP Ena-

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP DIMENSIONING - LIMITS

bler V1S/4098 FRE).

"VoIP Access" channels: H.323 gateway

A DSP channel of a VoIP CoCPU/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 board assigned to the pool of VoIP access chan-
nels is considered by the system to be a public network access, that is to say "1 B channel".
Alcatel OmniPCX Office can have a maximum of 120 public network accesses: the maximum number
of DSPs assigned to the VoIP access pool is 96.
Network accesses (T0, T2, DLT2, DLT0, TL) + VoIP accesses ≤ 120

ARS entry

The number of entries in the ARS table with a remote H.323 gateway as destination is limited to 500.
The number of entries in the ARS table that make reference to a PC (individual entry or with a range)
is limited to 150.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

DIMENSIONING - LIMITS CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP MAINTENANCE

File
MAINTENANCE
4

VoIP SERVICES - CoCPU BOARD

System with a single CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board

If the CoCPU board equipped with daughter board is out of service, none of the VoIP services (H.323
gateway and IP Telephony) is available.
Resetting the H.323 gateway (CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board reset) releases all on-
going communications on the H.323 gateway; reinitializing the IP telephony service resets all the IP
Enablers and the communications in progress on the Multimedia PCs.
Modifying the IP address associated with the CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board resets
the board and all the ongoing VoIP services.

System with several CoCPU boards equipped with VoIP daughter board

If the "master" CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board is out of service, all the VoIP services
(H.323 gateway and IP Telephony) are temporarily unavailable. The PCX "switches" the VoIP services
over to a "slave" CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board: the PCX assigns it the IP address
of the faulty board (reference address for the VoIP services: H.323 gateway, TFTP server, etc.), thereby
enabling the VoIP services to be maintained (the number of possible VoIP communications will however
be limited to the number of DSPs remaining).
After replacing the faulty CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board, it will automatically be
assigned the old IP address, which is now free, of the new "master" CoCPU board equipped with VoIP
daughter board: the new board will be "slave"; the PCX does not return to the pre-failure configuration.

Nota : It is recommended that the "master" CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board of
a PCX should be the one that has the largest number of DSPs. For systems with 2 boards,
such as a CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board with 16 DSPs and a CoCPU
board equipped with VoIP daughter board with 4 DSPs, if the 4-DSP CoCPU board equip-
ped with VoIP daughter board has become the system "master" board following a fault af-
fecting the 16-DSP CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board, then you should
return to the original configuration after replacing the 16-DSP CoCPU board equipped with
VoIP daughter board by unplugging the 4-DSP CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter
board for a few minutes.

The CoCPU boards equipped with VoIP daughter board cannot be plugged or unplugged
on a powered-up system.

If a "slave" CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board is out of service, all the VoIP services will
be redirected to the "master" CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board. However, the number
of possible VoIP communications will be limited to the number of DSPs remaining.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

MAINTENANCE CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

IP TELEPHONY

Loss of IP connectivity

It takes several seconds for loss of connection to be detected: the IP Enabler attempts to restore the
connection for several seconds. During this period the user may observe a slowing in the station dis-
plays resulting from repeated restoring and loss of connections.

Multimedia PC

If the "keep alive" mechanism detects a problem between a NetMeeting PC and the system (PCX reset,
CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board reset, IP connectivity problems), NetMeeting sends
the user an error message: the user can either quit the application or wait to be reconnected.

IP Enabler V1 (4098 RE) / V1S (4098 FRE): error messages

The following table gives the different causes of errors during the implementation of an IP Enabler V1
/ V1S (the "Num" field represents the number of the error message displayed on the station):
Num LABEL MEANING
1.01 NoMacAddress There is no MAC Address in the flash memory.
1.02 NoDhcpServer No response from the DHCP server.
1.03 BadLocalIpAddress Incorrect IP address.
1.04 BadTftpIpAddress Incorrect IP address of the TFTP server.
1.05 BadRouterIpAddress Incorrect IP address of the router.
1.06 RouterNotResp No response to the "ping" of the router.
1.07 IpInitError IP Enabler initialization error.
1.08 EtherInitError Ethernet interface initialization error.
1.09 IpDupli xxxxxxxxxxxx IP address duplicated with the MAC address equipment
xxxxxxxxxxxx.
2.01 LoadCfgNotResp TFTP server not responding: impossible to download the confi-
guration file.
2.02 LoadCfgRemoteError Loading of the configuration file: remote-end error.
2.03 LoadCfgLocalError Loading of the configuration file: local error (e.g.: memory al-
location error).
2.04 LoadCfgContentError Configuration file not supported by the hardware.
3.01 LoadBinNotResp TFTP server not responding: impossible to download the binary
file.
3.02 LoadBinRemoteError Remote-end error during downloading of binary file (e.g.: no bi-
nary file in the server, CPU not operational).
3.03 LoadBinChecksumError Error in binary file downloading: the calculated checksum dif-
fers from that in the file header.

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP MAINTENANCE

Num LABEL MEANING

3.04 LoadBinLocalError Downloading of the binary file: local error.
3.05 LoadBinHeaderError Downloading of the binary file: length error, the size of the file
differs from that indicated in the file header.
3.06 LoadBinFileTooLarge Downloading of the binary file: the size of the file exceeds the
capacity of the flash memory.
3.07 LoadBinGetErBadFile Downloading of the binary file: incorrect file name.
3.08 LoadBinNotSupported Binary file not supported by the hardware.
4.01 BinUpdateFailed Failure when placing the binary file in the flash memory.
5.01 LoadStartNotResp TFTP server not responding: impossible to load the starting file.
5.02 LoadStartLocalError Local error in the starting file (e.g.: memory allocation error).
5.03 LoadStartRemoteError Remote-end error in the starting file (e.g.: incoherent port num-
ber).
5.04 LoadStartContent Error Incorrect content of starting file.
6.01 UaLinkLost Loss of the UA signaling link with the PCX (e.g.: master VoIP Co-
CPU/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 board out of service).
6.02 AomNotSupported AOM refused. Incorrect version of the Add On Module.
9.09 InternalError Internal error in the IP Enabler.

Nota : Messages 2.04, 3.08, 5.04 and 9.09 are specific to the IP Enabler V1S.

e-Reflexes stations: error messages

The following table gives the different causes of errors during the implementation of an IP V2 station
(the "Num" field represents the number of the error message displayed on the station):
Num PHASE F/B E/W/S MEANING
1.00 Net_Init S Start of the network initialization phase.
1.01 Net_Init S Network initialization OK.
1.03 Net_Init E Network initialization failure.
1.04 Net_Init B E There is no MAC Address in the flash memory.
2.00 Get_Addr S IP address received and/or start of the control pha-
se.
2.01 Get_Addr S Control phase/address reception OK
2.02 Get_Addr S New attempt following an error during reception
of IP parameters in dynamic mode.
2.03 Get_Addr F E IP parameters reception failure.
2.05 Get_Addr W DHCP server not responding in dynamic mode.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

MAINTENANCE CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

Num PHASE F/B E/W/S MEANING

2.06 Get_Addr B E Incorrect local IP address.
2.07 Get_Addr B E Incorrect router IP address
2.08 Get_Addr W Router does not respond to the ping.
2.09 Get_Addr B E Incorrect TFTP server IP address.
2.10 Get_Addr B E Terminal in static mode without an IP address.
2.21 Get_Addr B E Fatal error during IP parameters control.
2.24 Get_Addr B E Inconsistency between address, mask and router.
3.00 Load_Config_File S Start of the configuration file downloading phase
(lanPCX.cfg)
3.01 Load_Config_File S Downloading of the configuration file OK.
3.02 Load_Config_File W New attempt following an error during downloa-
ding of the configuration file.
3.03 Load_Config_File E Configuration file downloading failure.
3.11 Load_Config_File W TFTP server not operational.
3.12 Load_Config_File W Error on the server (impossible to find the file, ...
3.15 Load_Config_File E Incorrect content in downloaded file.
3.21 Load_Config_File E Unknown error during downloading of configura-
tion file.
4.00 Load_Binary_File S Start of downloading phase of binary file
(binipph1)
4.01 Load_Binary_File S Downloading phase of binary file OK (loaded or
not).
4.02 Load_Binary_File W New attempt following an error during downloa-
ding of the binary file.
4.03 Load_Binary_File E Binary file downloading failure.
4.11 Load_Binary_File W TFTP server not operational to provide the binary
file.
4.12 Load_Binary_File W Error on the server (impossible to find the file, ...
4.14 Load_Binary_File E The binary file is too big and cannot be downloa-
ded.
4.15 Load_Binary_File E Error during downloading of binary file (connec-
tion error, ...).
4.16 Load_Binary_File E Error in binary file header (name, length, ...).
4.17 Load_Binary_File W Version found in CPU identical to current version.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP MAINTENANCE

Num PHASE F/B E/W/S MEANING

4.18 Load_Binary_File W A new version has been found in CPU and will be
downloaded.
5.00 Load_Binary_File S Flashing phase of new version OK.
5.01 Load_Binary_File S Start of flashing phase of a new version.
5.03 Load_Binary_File E Failure of new version flashing.
6.00 Load_Start_File S Start of the starting file downloading phase (startts-
cip).
6.01 Load_Start_File S Downloading phase of the starting file OK.
6.02 Load_Start_File B W New attempt following an error during downloa-
ding of the starting file.
6.03 Load_Start_File B E Starting file downloading failure.
6.11 Load_Start_File W TFTP server not operational to provide the starting
file.
6.12 Load_Start_File W Error on the server (impossible to find the file, ...
6.20 Load_Start_File W Go to next CPU to download binary and starting fi-
les.
0.22 Fin S Initialization and downloading OK (OK or not).
X.23 All W Ethernet link does not seem to be connected.

F: fatal error (followed by reset)

B: blocking error
S: fonctionnement normal
E: error
W: mise en garde

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

MAINTENANCE CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

VoIP SERVICES ALARM MESSAGES

The NMC (Network Management Center) application Alcatel 4740/4760 enables the following alarm
messages specific to Voice over IP to be retrieved:
- Reset of xxxxx CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board (message identical to those of the
other boards in the system).
- xxxxx CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board out of service.
- Diagnosis: reset and/or replace the board.
- DSP of xxxxx CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board out of service.
- Diagnosis: reset and replace the CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board if the fault
persists or recurs.
- Ethernet interface of xxxxx CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board out of service.
- Diagnosis: check the connection to the LAN and possibly the LAN components (Hub, switch,
etc.).
- Ethernet interface of xxxxx CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board in service.
- Remote gateway xxxxx Out of Service.
- Diagnosis: check the IP connectivity with the remote gateway (LAN, intermediate IP router) and
the status of the remote gateway.
- Remote gateway xxxxx In Service.

- Automatic overflow: too much traffic to/from remote gateway xxxxx.

- Diagnosis: if this alarm occurs frequently, the bandwidth associated with this remote gateway
in the ARS table and the number of DSPs assigned to VoIP accesses must be increased if pos-
sible.
- Automatic overflow: VoIP call to/from gateway xxxxx refused because "not enough VoIP access
channels available".
- Diagnosis: if this alarm occurs frequently, the dimensioning of the DSPs must be reviewed:
either the bandwidth in the ARS table must be increased, or the number of DSPs assigned to
VoIP accesses must be increased, or another CoCPU board equipped with VoIP daughter board
must be added.

- IP Telephony failures: no more DSP channels available.

- Diagnosis: if this alarm occurs frequently, the number of DSPs assigned to the IP subscriber pool
must be increased (either by reducing the number of VoIP access DSPs or by adding a CoCPU
board equipped with VoIP daughter board).
- The IP Enabler cannot be initialized because of a DHCP server fault (no IP addresses available).
- Diagnosis: increase the number of IP addresses in the DHCP server range (this range of IP ad-
dresses must be greater than or equal to the number of IP Enablers to be installed).

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP MAINTENANCE

VOIP SERVICES – TRAFFIC COUNTERS

The VoIP services feature the following specific traffic counters accessible via MMC-PM5 in the menu:
System Miscellaneous -> VoIP -> Traffic counters:

"General" tab:

- Number of incoming H.323 calls.

- Number of outgoing H.323 calls.
- Number of transiting H.323 calls (Break In, Break Out).
- Number of outgoing H.323 calls to H.323 gateway xxxxx refused because "insufficient bandwidth".
- Number of incoming H.323 calls to H.323 gateway xxxxx refused because "insufficient bandwidth".
- Number of outgoing H.323 calls to H.323 gateway xxxxx refused because "remote gateway out of
service".
- Number of outgoing H.323 calls to remote gateway xxxxx refused because "all VoIP access chan-
nels busy".
- Number of incoming H.323 calls to gateway xxxxx refused because "all VoIP access channels busy".
- Number of failed IP Telephony (audio) communications: all the DSP channels reserved for IP Tele-
phony are busy.

"Gateways" tab:

These counters indicate the number of VoIP calls to each of the remote H.323 gateways refused for the
following reasons:
- Overflow on outgoing VoIP calls: CoCPU board(s) equipped with VoIP daughter board out of ser-
vice.
- Overflow on outgoing VoIP calls: no more bandwidth available.
- Incoming VoIP calls refused: no more bandwidth available.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

MAINTENANCE CALL SERVER : VOICE ON IP

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
CALL SERVER : Private networks

SECTION

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE

NETWORKS

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

Section CALL SERVER : Private networks

THE NETWORK OFFERING FILE 1

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS FILE 2

EXAMPLES USING ARS FILE 3

METERING - ISVPN+ FILE 4

CLOCK SYNCHRONISATION FILE 5

BASIC ACCESSES CONFIGURATION FILE 6

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION CALL SERVER : PRIVATE CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

NETWORKS (INDEX)

Section CALL SERVER : Private networks (Index)

BASIC ACCESSES CONFIGURATION FILE 6

CLOCK SYNCHRONISATION FILE 5

EXAMPLES USING ARS FILE 3

METERING - ISVPN+ FILE 4

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS FILE 2

THE NETWORK OFFERING FILE 1

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS THE NETWORK OFFERING

File
THE NETWORK OFFERING
1

Global offering

Depending on the medium (or protocol) used, placing Alcatel OmniPCX Office systems on private
networks offers the following main services:

- calls on ISDN, QSIG and VPN lines: CLIP/COLP services, conversion into private dialling for
outgoing and incoming calls.
- Public or Private ISVPN: in addition to the previous services, optimization of transfers and forwar-
ding, additional information (transmission of the name, busy status, forwarding).
- ISVPN+: with regard to ISVPN services, addition of metering information.
- IP Networking: setting up an IP network using the existing data network to carry voice data at lower
cost; for more details see the "Voice over IP" section.

The table below shows the principles of use for the various protocols, depending on the amount of
traffic and the requested level of service.

Integration of services

ISDN Heterogeneous ISVPN Public ISVPN

Voice VPN Public VPN + ISVPN
traffic
QSIG Private ISVPN

ISVPN+
Voice + data traffic IP Networking

A private network can be homogenous or heterogeneous:

- homogenous: all the PCXs in the network belong to the same family (Alcatel OmniPCX Office, Al-
catel Office or Alcatel OmniPCX 4400).
- heterogeneous: the PCXs in the network belong to different families (Alcatel and others).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/20

THE NETWORK OFFERING CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

DEFINITIONS

MASTER/SATELLITE CONFIGURATION

Only the master system has an operator station and external access connected to the public network.
The satellite system uses the master system's external resources. Several satellite systems can be con-
nected to the same master system.

PUBLIC
NETWORK

SATELLITE
Alcatel OmniPCX Office PRIVATE
OR OTHER PABX MASTER
NETWORK

OPERATOR

PEER TO PEER CONFIGURATION

In this topology, the 2 Alcatel OmniPCX Office systems each have their own Operator Station and their
own external accesses.

PUBLIC
NETWORK

PRIVATE
NETWORK

OPERATOR

OPERATOR

2/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS THE NETWORK OFFERING

DIGITAL PROTOCOLS

The following protocols can be used:

- QSIG_BC (QSIG Basic Call): protocol managing exchanges between private networks at basic
communication level.
- ISVPN: Alcatel proprietary protocol = standard ISDN protocol + additional information by means
of UUS (User to User Signalling).
- on public lines: public ISVPN
- on leased lines: private ISVPN
- ISVPN+: Alcatel proprietary protocol = ISVPN + additional information contained in the UUS. This
protocol can only be used with Alcatel OmniPCX Office/Office systems. The additional information
can only be used by an Alcatel 4740 or Alcatel 4760 Management Center.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/20

THE NETWORK OFFERING CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

ENVIRONMENTS

Nota :

The DLT-TL interconnection must be implemented with precaution in order to avoid any TL blocking
(e.g. a break-in by transfer between a TL without polarity inversion and a DLT joining on a remote user
forwarded to an external number by another TL; in this case, there is no release of communications
on these TLs).

VPNs ON PUBLIC LINKS

These virtual networks are specific to the country and the network operator. In these networks, which
use the public operator protocols (analog or ISDN), private and public calls are routed on the same
lines. Among these networks are:

- Fiat in Italy: analog or ISDN protocol

- Transgroupe (Collisée Performance) in France: ISDN protocol only

PUBLIC
NETWORK

VPN

TL/T0/T2

Characteristics of Transgroupe dialling (France only)

- public numbers are preceded by 0.

- private numbers are defined in a private numbering plan: closed dialling from 5 to 10 digits) with
short numbers as an option (10 to 15, 160 to 169, 36XX).

4/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS THE NETWORK OFFERING

MULTI-OPERATOR IN A DIRECT ENVIRONMENT

The system has 2 direct accesses with different operators. With the ARS mechanisms, this environment
enables:

- use of the cheapest operator to call a correspondent.

- overflowing through the other operator when the cheapest one is unavailable.

OPERATOR OPERATOR
1 2

TL/T0/T2

INDIRECT OPERATOR

This environment makes it possible to redirect calls to operators offering attractive rates, for interna-
tional calls or calls to GSM for example.

Depending on the analysis of the requested number, the ARS automatically redirects the call, transpa-
rently for the user, to another indirect substitution network and then retransmits the destination number
as follows:
- seizure of a line in the network of the main operator
- dialing the access code or the number of the indirect operator
- waiting for an intermediary tone (or pause)
- switching into transparent MF dialing
- optional transmission of the account code (waiting for a 2nd tone or pause)
- optional waiting for a second intermediary tone (or pause)
- dialing the destination call number

INDIRECT
OPERATOR
PUBLIC NETWORK

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/20

THE NETWORK OFFERING CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

ISVPN ON LEASED/PUBLIC LINKS

Using the proprietary ISVPN protocol on leased digital links makes it possible to connect an Alcatel
OmniPCX Office system with an Alcatel OmniPCX 4400 system or another Alcatel OmniPCX Office/
Office system.

T2
PUBLIC
NETWORK
T0

LEASED DIGITAL LINK

(DLT0/DLT2 IF Alcatel OmniPCX Office)

or T0/T2 if Alcatel OmniPCX 4400)

QSIG-BC

The QSIG protocol on digital leased links can be used for interconnecting an Alcatel OmniPCX Office
with a system from another manufacturer if compatible with QSIG_BC (Basic Call).

PUBLIC
NETWORK

OTHER
DIGITAL LEASED LINK MANUFACTURER'S
(DLT0 or DLT2) PABX

6/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS THE NETWORK OFFERING

Features

OPTIMIZED FORWARDING AND TRANSFER (digital networks only)

The path used by a call can be optimized in the following cases:

- immediate forwarding
- external dynamic forwarding
- external forwarding of operator calls
- transfer

Optimized immediate forwarding

Optimization of the path is carried out by rerouting the call.

- Optimisation of the path between 3 nodes

NETWORK

A
C

A (1st node) calls B (2nd node) forwarded on C (3rd node). The result of the optimization corresponds
to a direct call from A to C.

- Optimisation of the path between 2 nodes

B
NETWORK

A (1st node) calls B (2nd node) forwarded on C (1st node). The result of the optimization corresponds
to a local call from A to C.

Nota :

If the forwarding destination calls the forwarding initiator, then the forwarding is overridden.
A parameter (PM5 -> System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Part 5) allows to define the maxi-
mum number of successive forwardings (transmissions threshold: 5 by default).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/20

THE NETWORK OFFERING CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

Optimized transfer

The optimization mechanism is applied when the 2 external correspondents are on the same ISVPN
node; the transfer can be monitored (connected) or not (on ringer).

Situation: B (master) is in communication with 2 correspondents (A and C) on the same system.

A
B

Optimisation: the 2 communications are released and resynchronized on the remote system: a local
call is made from A to C.

NETWORK

A B

NETWORK FORCING (forced dialing)

For reasons of cost, a call from a public network user can be made to use private links as a priority,
followed by public lines if the private network is completely busy (ARS configuration).

OVERFLOW

When a destination can be joined in several ways and one of the paths fails (no more resources availa-
ble for example), the ARS automatically tries to take another path (private network -> public network
or vice versa, from one public operator to another).

Overflow is controlled by the barring and traffic sharing mechanisms.

Overflow can also be applied to data communications.

8/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS THE NETWORK OFFERING

BREAK-IN / BREAK-OUT (INCOMING TRANSIT / OUTGOING TRANSIT)

Break-in and break-out services make it possible to carry out inter-establishment communications from
a private network; this is realized with the use of lines leased between 2 or more PCXs belonging to
this private network.

Break-in (Incoming Transit)

This service corresponds to the transit of incoming calls from the public network to a private network
via leased lines; thus, an external correspondent can join a private network user who is not connected
to the same system as the line on which the call is routed.

Break-in can be implemented in 2 ways:

- automatically by DDI numbers

- manually by the operator (joining by transfer)

PUBLIC
NETWORK

Non DDI call DDI call

PABX B
PRIVATE NETWORK
(LEASED LINES)

OPERATOR PABX A
BREAK-IN

For the caller, it is also possible to set up a simple directory (a single group of numbers to call all users
from one or several sites).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/20

THE NETWORK OFFERING CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

Manual break-in

This is a joining by transfer between an incoming T0/T2 access or a TL and a leased line.

In this case, the external correspondent accesses the line leased between PCXs A and B only through
an operator (or a station); the operator of PCX A puts the caller on hold, establishes an enquiry call
communication (seizure of the leased line + number of the remote subscriber) then carries out a trans-
fer.

Settings:

T According to the environment (analog/digital), authorize the various joinings between external
lines:
- by DHM-PM5 (Expert View), select: System Miscellaneous-> Traffic Sharing and Barring -
> Joining ->check the boxes to authorize the necessary joinings.

T At system level, authorize external/external transfers: select

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) select: System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> check Trans-
fer Ext/Ext

T For each station, authorize external/external manual transfers: select

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View) select: Subscribers/Base stations List-> Subscribers/Base sta-
tions List -> Details-> Features -> check "Join Incoming and Outgoing" and "Join Outgoing
and Outgoing".

Automatic break-in

The public network correspondent joins a remote system subscriber using his DDI number. This service
is only offered for calls routed on T0 or T2 and on customized TL (analognetwork line under call dis-
tribution).

Configuring with MMC-PM5:

The numbering plan for public incoming calls and ARS mechanisms enable correspondence between
the DDI number coming from the public network and the subscriber (or hunting group) directory num-
ber in the private network.

Nota :

- if the break-in call fails, the call is handled depending on the configuration of the analog protocol
or the table corresponding to incoming calls for digital leased lines (forwarded to operator or re-
leased).
- manual call pick-up (with RSP key) from a member of the operator hunting group is impossible in
call phase (before remote connection or re-routing to operator).
- distribution of a welcome message on a break-in call is impossible.

10/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS THE NETWORK OFFERING

Break-out/Proximity break-out

- Break-out (Outgoing Transit)

A break-out makes it possible for the user of PCX A to call, via leased lines, a public network user by
using lines external to PCX B.

- Proximity break-out

A proximity break-out is a special use of the break-out: a call to the public network can be guided in
order to exit via the public accesses which are closest to the destination.

Example: a PCX A user (STRASBOURG) calls C (PARIS); the call is redirected on the private network
between PCXs A and B (PARIS) in such a way that it exits via B's public accesses.

This feature makes it possible to offer communications which are advantageous from a cost point of
view; there are 2 ways of calling a public user from A:
- direct call by the public network; in this case, the communication is charged as a national commu-
nication.
- exit via B; thanks to the line leased between the 2 PCXs, only the part of the call from PCX B is
charged as a local communication.

PUBLIC
C NETWORK
T2/T0

BREAK-OUT

PABX A
PRIVATE NETWORK
(LEASED LINES)

PABX B

The following break-outs are possible:

- incoming call on leased line -> ISDN

- incoming call on leased line -> analogue public network

The break-out can be implemented in 2 ways:

- automatically
- manually (transfer by operator for example)

The ARS tables can be programmed so that the automatic break-out mechanism is used (overflow or
forcing on the private network).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/20

THE NETWORK OFFERING CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

There is no operator recall in the following cases of failure (the call is released):

- the trunk group is busy

- ISDN releases the call, the time-out for awaiting the 1st digit or interdigit having elapsed

TRANSIT

T0 ISDN
PABX OTHER
PUBLIC MANUFACTURER
NETWORK
PABX A

PABX C
T0
QSIG LEASED
ISVPN LEASED LINE
LINE

LEASED LINE
PABX B LINE PABX D

PCX B enables the transit of the following communications:

- from a user A to users of PCXs C and D

- from the public network to users of PCXs C and D

These communications are established by:

- public or private break-in -> private

- private break-out -> private or public

The transit system acts as an access between the different protocols used; the level of service offered
depends on the protocols implied in the communication:

- QSIG <-> ISVPN: services offered by QSIG

- ISVPN on public line <-> ISVPN on leased line: ISVPN services
- ISDN <-> ISVPN or QSIG: ISDN services

12/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS THE NETWORK OFFERING

CENTRALIZED OPERATOR

An incoming call, in transit on a PCX or transferred whilst ringing (unsupervised transfer) on a leased
line, which is not answered after a certain amount of time, is automatically re-directed to the operator
of the system which received the call.

The CENTRALIZED OPERATOR, the name given to this feature, is organized around the PCXs connec-
ted to the network over leased lines. One of the PCXs, configured as the "Master", will have the CEN-
TRALIZED OPERATOR STATION. The other "Satellite" PCXs may also have local operators.

DDI call TL/DDI (option)

(station B)
SATELLITE SYSTEM
MASTER SYSTEM
Leased line
B

A
Call from B

LOCAL
OPERATOR

CENTRALIZED OPERATOR

Environment

When installing this feature on a PCX network, the following must be taken into account:

- A specific programming procedure, performed for each PCX in the network, makes it possible to
configure a Master PCX and Satellite PCXs. The operator of the PCX configured as the Master be-
comes the Centralized Operator.
- Only incoming calls issued from the T0 or T2 network interfaces of the Master PCX go through the
centralized operator mechanism. Nevertheless, Satellite PCXs can be equipped with network junc-
tors and a local operator thus enabling autonomous management of their traffic.
- An incoming call routed to the centralized operator benefits from the welcome message mecha-
nism, if it is active.
- The display on the centralized operator is usually provided for incoming calls which are routed to it.
- An incoming call which is considered as "non telephone" by the system, is not subject to the cen-
tralized operator mechanism. For example, an incoming T0 ISDN call a G4 Fax service.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/20

THE NETWORK OFFERING CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

Configuring a network with external lines on only one PCX

ISDN
DLT0/DLT2
PABX 1 PABX 2

Centralized
Operator

To redirect the call to the centralized operator, there are two possible solutions: the "ReroutOpe" func-
tion of the transit system (PCX1), or dynamic routing/attendant forwarding of PCX2.

Using ReroutOpe:

- Configure a timeout value before re-routing through PCX1:

System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels -> ReroutOpe.

Default value: 00 00: rerouting of in transit calls towards the centralized operator is inactive.

Configuration example: ReroutOpe = C8 00 (no 100 ms, 20 seconds).

An call in transit towards the satellite, in the event of no reply, will be rerouted to the centralized ope-
rator on PCX1 after 20 seconds (PCX1 releases the line to PCX2).

Nota : Only DDI calls routed directly to PCX2 (break-in) fall under ReroutOpe timeout (this mecha-
nism does not apply to a network line under call distribution).

If PCX2 users are using dynamic routing (for example towards the Voice Mail unit), the Re-
routOpe timeout value must be superior to the dynamic routings used by PCX2 users.

Dynamic routing/Attendant group routing:

It is also possible to re-route calls from PCX1 to PCX1 using dynamic routing on PCX2 stations and the
Attendant group routing function within the time ranges of PCX2.

- Configuring a collective speed dial number in PCX2 (n° 8000 for example) with PCX1's operator as
destination.
The trunk group assigned to this number must be an homogenous logical direction for optimization to
be effective.
Time ranges -> Destination for time ranges = 8000; Attendant Diversion = Yes within
forwarding time ranges

- Configuring PCX2 stations supporting dynamic routing on attendant group:

Subscribers/Basestations List -> Station (choose station) ->Details -> Dyn routing -> Ti-
meout T2 = XX ; External calls column - Level 2 : check "Use Timer 2", "Forwarding to gene-
ral level" and "Diversion apply".

14/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS THE NETWORK OFFERING

This configuration offers the same operation as ReroutOpe timeout but is more flexible for choosing
which calls are rerouted or not to the centralized operator:

- by choosing dynamic routing of PCX2 users, it is possible to choose which calls, internal or external,
are rerouted to the centralized operator.
- this configuration can be customized for each station (for example by suppressing dynamic routing
at general level for an analog device equipped with a fax.
- It is possible to choose different re-routing timeouts (T1, T2) for each user.

Configuring a network with external lines on each PCX

ISDN

DLT0/DLT2
PABX 1 PABX 2

Centralized
Operator

If there is no local operator in PCX 2, use the programming shown in the previous example (dynamic
routing/attendant group routing).

When there is a local operator in PCX 2, in addition to the attendant diversion to PCX1 using the at-
tendant group diversion by time range function described earlier, it is possible to perform a forced di-
version using the "Attendant Diversion" function.

- to program an "Attendant Diversion" key.

Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscriber (select OS) -> Details -> Keys -> Type = Func-
tion Key -> Function = Attendant Diversion, Number = 8000 (speed dial n° corresponding
to a call to the centralized operator).

Set up from the Operator:

- press the "Attendant Diversion" key

- operator code (help1954 by default); the LED associated with the key flashes.
- to cancel: same operation

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/20

THE NETWORK OFFERING CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

Call handling

The table below describes the reactions of a centralized operator network with or without a satellite
local operator.

SITUATION SAT. WITHOUT LOCAL OPER. SAT. WITH LOCAL OPER.

The call no. in the satellite does The centralized operator is The time-out (ReroutOpe) starts
not exist or is incomplete rung up

The local operator is rung

No connection rights The called party is released
The called party is released The time-out (ReroutOpe) starts up

The set is rung

The called party is grade 1 busy The time-out (ReroutOpe) starts The time-out (ReroutOpe) starts
up up

If the satellite has the right to If the satellite has the right to
camp on, then the call is cam- camp on, then the call is cam-
ped on; if not, the centralized ped on; if not, the local opera-
operator is rung tor is rung if the destination's
dynamic routing is inferior to
the "ReroutOpe" timeout.
The called party is grade 2 busy The centralized operator is The time-out (ReroutOpe) starts
rung up
The call no. is out of service
The called party is in DND The local operator is rung
The time-out (ReroutOpe) expires The call is directed to the centralized operator
The incoming call is transferred to The time-out (TransfeTim) starts up
the satellite
The set is rung
The time-out (TransfeTim) expires Depending on configuration of "Master recall" to the centralized
operator the call is:

- either routed to the centralized operator

- or routed to the initiator of the transfer. When the time-out
(Duration of Hold Recall Ringing) has lapsed, the call is di-
rected to the centralized operator

Nota : By default, the "ReroutOpe" timeout is equal to 00 00; for a re-routing to the central opera-
tor after 20 seconds for example, the configuration must be "ReroutOpe" = C8 00.

For normal operation, the "ReroutOpe" timeout must be inferior to the dynamic routing ti-
meouts of the slave system.

16/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS THE NETWORK OFFERING

EXTERNAL FORWARDING OF OPERATOR CALLS

This service makes it possible to forward all operator calls (local calls, public and private incoming
calls, operator recalls, dynamic forwardings) to a public or private external destination.

For a more detailed description, see the relevant section in "Telephone Features".

AUTOMATIC CALL-BACK ON BUSY TRUNK GROUP

If a call goes through ARS mechanisms and if all the configured trunk groups are busy, it is possible
to activate an automatic call-back request on a busy trunk group. The user is called back as soon as
a line in the first trunk group (traffic sharing) proposed by the ARS mechanisms is released.

DISTRIBUTION IN A PRIVATE DIGITAL NETWORK

- The handling of external calls (on public lines) and internal calls (on leased lines) can be configured
differently.
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: External lines-> Incoming Call Handling. For each type
of line, you can define the actions (call released or forwarded to the operator) in the following
situations:
- depending on whether the caller is public or private
- called party busy 2nd degree
- other called party status (in Do Not Disturb forwarding, out of service, recall situation fol-
lowing a transfer failure)
- misdial

In the case of unanswered calls on leased lines, the dynamic forwarding mechanisms of an internal
(local) call relative to the called set are applied.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/20

THE NETWORK OFFERING CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

PRESENTATION OF CALLS

- Presentation to the called party

You can select the presentation mode for private calls:
- presentation as local call:
- internal ringer
- number of the caller not memorized in the directory of last callers (except if the call has a UUS)
- no welcome message option
- presentation as external call:
- external ringer
- number of the caller memorized in the directory of last callers
- welcome message option
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design -> Private
Call Presentation

- Presentation to the caller

On the caller's set, the display always shows the number dialed by the user (not the one after modifi-
cations by the ARS).

The number can be replaced by the name (name received if ISVPN, or name in the personal or collec-
tive speed dial numbers).

- Handover

In case of a transfer within an ISVPN network, the ISVPN subscribers' displays are handled as if they
were in the same system. Especially after a transfer of an incoming call from user A to user B in a dif-
ferent node, the display of B indicates the external caller rather than the user A.

- Diversion/Dynamic routing

If an incoming call to subscriber A is diverted to subscriber B in a different node, the call is presented
to B with the name of A on the display (or, failing that, the number of A).

CALLED PARTY STATUS

During an outgoing call, the ISVPN protocol makes it possible to signal to the caller whether the called
party is busy; the called party's busy status is only indicated by a message on the caller's display; there
is no audio indication (the caller always hears the call-back tone transmitted by the network).

INTRUSION

When the remote correspondent is grade 1 busy, the ISVPN protocol makes it possible to intrude on
this set (unless it is protected against intrusion).

18/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS THE NETWORK OFFERING

INFORMATION DISPLAYED

ISVPN on leased lines

Example:

T0
ISDN

Station D (0388677700)

Node 51 T0
03886751XX Node 52 Node 50
ISVPN
ISVPN

Station B (5101)

CENTRALIZED Station A
OPERATOR (500)

Station C (5135)

Call Number dialed Number transmit- Caller's display Called party's dis-
ted play
A -> C 5135 (private network 5135 on leased line Name of C Name of A
call)
B -> C 5135 (local call) 5135 Name of C Name of B
B -> 9 (private network 9 on leased line Name of operator Name of B
OPER. call)
B ->D 00388677700 (public 0388677700 by 0388677700 or 0388675101
network call) break-out name of D (if mana-
ged locally)

Forwarding

For a call on digital lines (ISDN or QSIG) and if the called party is forwarded, it is possible to define,
using MMC-PM5 (Expert View), the identity which is transmitted to the rung set:

- either that of the caller (set B in the example)

- or that of the called set (forwarded set A)
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: System Miscellaneous -> Feature Design ->check one
of the 2 boxes ❏ CLI for external diversion or ❏ CLI is Diverted Party.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 19/20

THE NETWORK OFFERING CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

SUMMARY TABLE

Features VPN ISVPN ISVPN QSIG ISVPN+

"Public" "Priva-
te"
Differentiation between public and private YES YES YES YES YES
calls
Internal or external incoming call handling YES YES YES YES YES
Break-in/break-out -- -- YES YES YES
CLIP/CLIR YES YES YES YES YES
COLP/COLR -- -- -- YES YES
Non answered calls repertory YES YES YES YES YES
Sub-addresses YES YES YES YES YES
Display of caller -- YES YES -- YES
Optimization of the transfer -- YES YES -- YES
Optimization of forwarding -- YES YES -- YES
Indication of forwarding on the centralized -- YES YES -- YES
operator
Transporting of the name in UUS -- YES YES -- YES
Intrusion -- YES YES -- YES
Information on metering sent to the master in -- -- -- -- YES
Master/Satellite configurations

20/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS

File
PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS
2

OUTLINE

ARS is a mechanism which, during the routing of a call:

- forces the use of the most appropriate path according to the number dialed.
- chooses another path if the most appropriate one is overloaded.

This mechanism is applied independently of the type of:

- trunk group: public or private

- support: analog or digital
- call: voice or data

ARS is completely transparent for the user; the number dialed is, if necessary, modified automatically
according to the chosen itinerary.

Nota : If the ARS mechanism modifies the number dialed by the user:

- the station's display shows the number dialed by the user.

- It is the emitted number (modified by the ARS) which is analyzed in the discrimination.
- the charge ticket shows the emitted number (modified by the ARS).

The ARS mechanism can be applied for the following calls:

- outgoing call with manual dialing:

- without specific line seizure
- with specific public line seizure
- using resource keys assigned to a trunk group
- outgoing call with automatic dialing:
- call keys
- personal and collective speed dial numbers, call by name
- last number redial, temporary memory number
- last callers directory
- all types of forwarding and routing to an external destination
- VPN configurations (Transgroupe/heterogeneous network) for converting a public number into a
private number (incoming call) or vice versa (outgoing call).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/20

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

CONFIGURING ARS PARAMETERS

ARS is implemented when the "Base" field is empty for the "Main trunk group seizure" and "Secondary
trunk group seizure" features in the main numbering plan and the numbering plans for private and
public incoming calls.

Main numbering plan

Start End Base Feature NMT Private

XXXX XXXX Main trunk group Keep or Yes/No
Drop
XXXX XXXX Secondary trunk groups Keep or Yes/No
Drop

Base: if this field is empty, the call is of type ARS; if not, it is a trunk group call.

NMT :this field defines whether the digits defined in the "Start" and "End" fields are absorbed or con-
served.
Priv: this field is a reference for the "Network" parameter in the ARS table:
- Yes: the outgoing number in the numbering plan is compared to the entries in the ARS table with
"Network" = Private.
- No: the outgoing number in the numbering plan is compared to the entries in the ARS table with
"Network Identifier" = Public, Urg. or Code auth.

After analysis and possible modification by the NMT, the outgoing digits in the numbering plan are
entered in the ARS table.

Number ARS Number

dialled TABLE transmitted

ARS TABLES

The installer determines the numbers or parts of numbers in front of the ARS handling. For each des-
tination defined by a prefix, it creates a "trunk group list". For each index in the list, it is possible to
assign one or several trunk groups and commands for modifying the dialing.

The ARS prefix replaces the external seizure prefix. On recognition of the prefix, the system determines
the associated "trunk group list". The ARS mechanism therefore uses the route by activating the call on
the corresponding trunk group. If the trunk group is busy, the next programmed route is used.

Nota : In some instances, the equivalent French acrostic "ADL" may be found instead of "ARS".

2/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS

USE OF THE VARIOUS TABLES

- The various parameters required for ARS mechanisms are configured using MMC-PM5 (Expert
View) only
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Numbering plan -> Automatic Routing Selection. ->
then configure the following tables:
- ARS table
- Trunk groups list
- Hours table
- Day table
- Providers / Destinations
- Authorization codes
- Tone/Pause
- ARS miscellaneous

- Structure of the main tables:

ARS table
Called
Network Prefix Range Substitute TrGp list Note
(ISVPN/H450) Optional
fields
Pub 885040 0-3 ; 6-7 51 1 Het

Trunk group list Fields and tables for multi-operator mode

List Index Dir N° Char. Service Access Authorization code Tone/Pa

Prov/Destination prefix use

1 3 503 T FT_NATIONAL 131 02 08

Authorization code table

Tone/Pause Table

- Dimensions:

Max. number of prefixes (= number of lines in each of the 2 tables): 500

Max. number of entries in the trunk group lists (= number of lines in each of the 2 tables): 500

Max. number of ranges: 500

Max. number of entries in the ARS table: 500 (entries in the prefix table + trunk groups + time ranges:
500 max; one entry in the prefix table with 2 ranges or with a sub-line counts for 2 entries.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/20

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

ARS TABLE

Base fields:

These fields are necessary and sufficient for the majority of network topologies.

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub 885040 0-3 ; 6-7 51 2 Het.

885040 1

As many trunk group lists as are authorized can be allocated to each prefix; by default no prefix is
defined.

Network: this network identifier defines the prefixes as public prefixes (Pub), private prefixes (Priv), pu-
blic emergency numbers (Urg) or public access codes (Code auth.).

Prefix: an empty field (default value) corresponds to the numbers which do not correspond to any pre-
fix for the network identifier concerned.
Range: this is used both for outgoing and incoming calls; there is no range for public emergency num-
bers or public access codes. It is possible to enter several ranges (separate them using the ";" character)
within the authorized limits (see previous page).

Replace: the ARS prefix can be modified by the contents in this field.

- prefix = empty; replace = empty: transparent dialing in the ARS table

- prefix = empty; replace = XXX: addition of digits XXX
- prefix = XXX; replace = empty: absorption of digits XXX
- prefix = XXX; replace = XXX: no modification (no addition nor absorption)
- prefix = XXX; replace = YYYY: replace XXX by YYYY

TrGp List : this field defines the index for one or several selected trunk group lists. Priority is given to
the trunk groups in the first list, in the order of programming, then to the second list, and so on.

Called party (ISVPN/H450) :the called party belongs to a homogenous network (Alcatel OmniPCX
or Alcatel 4400) or a heterogeneous network (systems made by different manufacturers).
Note: the information entered in this field is memorized in the system.

Optional fields:

Metering Caller Called/PP

Priv Pub
Overflow Pub Pub

4/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS

Metering: only significant for a centralized metering application (NMC), this field is only used for en-
tering additional information in the metering data:

- field empty
- overflow
- network (private network forcing)
- VPN
- VPN + network
- VPN + overflow

Description of the "Caller" and "Called" parameters

The following fields are to be filled in for specific network topologies (in the majority of cases, the de-
fault values are sufficient). These fields concern the coding and contents of the data sent in a call.

Caller: the caller's number corresponds to the private numbering plan (the caller's private number,
made up from the private installation number, must be transmitted) or to the public numbering plan
(the public number is made up from the public installation number).

Called/PP: the sent called party's number is public or private (field reserved mainly for VPNs; "Type of
dialing plan" in the setup: Public Network).

Important : Use of default values in the "Caller" and "Called" fields.

For appropriate use of default values in these fields, the installer must take the following remarks into
account:

- The type of line must be configured correctly.

- by MMC-PC, select: External Lines -> External Lines ->select line -> Details ->select or
deselect ❏ Public Trunk):
- a DLT2/DLT2/VOIP access must be configured as a private line (default value)
- a T0 or T2 access must be configured as a public line (or a private line if linked with an
Alcatel OmniPCX 4400 system)

- On a private link, the caller's private number is transmitted by preference; nevertheless, if the pri-
vate number is not available, the public number (break-out only) or the private installation number
(call in the private network) is transmitted.
On a public link, the caller's public number is transmitted; if it is not available, no caller identifica-
tion is supplied.
- The default values are to be used for all outgoing calls to the public network (the 2 fields are public)
and for all calls in the private network (the 2 fields are private).
On the other hand, it is recommended to use specific values for VPN calls (the 2 fields are private
whilst the external line is public) or when the Alcatel OmniPCX Office is connected by a line leased
to a particular system.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/20

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

Possible combinations

This paragraph describes the significant combinations for the "Caller" and "Called" fields according to
the network environment of an Alcatel OmniPCX Office system.

- for an outgoing call on a leased link (QSIG): only the following fields are significant:
- caller = private or public
- called = private (heterogeneous and homogenous values are also used).
- for an outgoing call on public link:
- caller = private or public
- called = values according to the table below:
Called/PP Called Par- Use
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Public Homoge- Internal call from a user in a private network (homogenous ISVPN)
nous
Public Heterogen. Outgoing call to the public network or internal call from a user in the pri-
vate network (heterogeneous ISVPN)
Private Heterogen. Internal call from a user in the private network (heterogeneous VPN) or
outgoing call to the public network by VPN private dialing (ISDN user also
declared in VPN)
Private Homoge- Internal call from a user in a private network (homogenous VPN)
nous

TRUNK GROUP LISTS

Each trunk group list can have as many trunk groups as are authorized within the global limits.

The "Access digits", "Authorization code" and "Tone/pause" fields are specific to MULTI-OPERATOR
MODE.

Example:

TrG Index TrGp. Char. Provider / Destina- Access di- Authoriza- Tone/Pause
p list tion gits tion code
1 1 0 FT LOCAL
3 503 T FT LOCAL 131 02 02

List: identifier for each trunk group list (see table of prefixes).

Index: this field makes it possible to select one or several trunk groups identified by an index (1 to
120); for a list with several trunk groups, priority is given to the first index. LOCAL is used when no
trunk is used to call the destination and allows to configure this entry as an internal call.
N°: this field automatically displays the directory number of each trunk group in the list.
Char: this field defines a character used in metering or on set displays (for example: T for Transgrou-

6/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS

pe).
Provider/destination: the operator name used depends on the time range (see below).
If a label is defined for a trunk, the control system checks the validity of the label for the considered
time range. If it is valid, the trunk group is selected if it respects the traffic sharing conditions. If not,
there will be an overflow to the next trunk group. The presence of a label in this field implies the con-
figuring of time slots, groups of days, etc.
Access digits: this field defines the code for accessing an indirect network.
Auth. Code ID: index (1 to 24) in the "customer code" table.
Tone/Pause: index (1 to 8) in the "Tone/Pause" table

Nota : Using the "Provider" field requires a complete programming of the ARS time ranges.

NETWORK SERVICE PROVIDERS

This table defines the names of the various network service providers associated with a trunk group list
for each time range. The table can also receive internal destinations.

TIME RANGES

The use of time ranges in the ARS allows the operator to select the route offering the best cost condi-
tions at any given instant. Access to the operator can be direct (e.g. Cégétel) or indirect (e.g. Espadon).

Start End Day group Provider / Provider / Provider / Provider /

Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 3 Destination 4
08:00 1 FT LOCAL ESPADON CEGETEL
2 CEGETEL
3
12:00 1 FT LOCAL
2
3

The table defines different time ranges and to associate providers with each day group in each range;
it is also possible to enter internal destinations (the same as are indicated in the "Provider / Destina-
tions" table).
4 providers can be associated with each combination of time range/day groups. If 2 labels out of the
4 relate to the same destination, the associated trunk groups must be different so as to enable overflow
if one of the providers is busy.
If no provider is defined for a given combination, a route will be selected from amongst the trunk
groups without associated provider labels, independently of the time ranges. The same mechanism
applies for the days in the week or bank holidays not associated with a day group.
It is recommended to put one trunk group without provider in each trunk group list to be able to flow
the call in all possible cases of figures.
Total number of time ranges: max. 500 (including the entries of the prefix and of the trunk group ta-
bles)..

DAY GROUPS

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/20

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

This table defines an operating mode (carrying out a day group) for each day of the year.

- Days of the week:

In order to simplify management, the 7 days of the week are split into 7 groups (for example: the 5
working days = groupe 1, Saturday and Sunday = groupe 2)

Day of the week Day Month Year Day group

Monday 1
Tuesday 1
Wednesday 1
Thursday 1
Friday 1
Saturday 2
Sunday 2
14 7 * 2
1 5 * 2
30 3 1997 2

- Bank holidays:

There is no need to define the year for fixed bank holidays (* character = each year); for variable bank
holidays, indicate the year (using 4 figures).

Nota : The data contained in this table can also be entered using MMC-Station.

AUTHORIZATION CODES (MULTI-OPERATOR MODE ONLY)

This table (24 entries of up to 10 characters) defines the secret access codes between the networks of
different operators.

8/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS

"TONE/PAUSE" (MULTI-OPERATOR MODE ONLY)

This table (8 entries max.) is indicated by the "Tone/Pause" parameter of trunk group lists. It defines
the reactions when a call is redirected to an indirect network: pause duration or tone detection, auto-
matic switch over to MF dialing.

Example:

Index Time/Tone before Auth.(ms) Time/Tone after Auth (ms) Force MF

1 Tone 8 No
2 Tone Yes

Time/Tone: the following values are possible:

- Tone: if value = Tone, the PCX waits for the dial tone before transmitting the dialing on the line.
Waiting for the tone is only possible on analog lines.
- XXX: the PCX waits XXX milliseconds (from 8 to 20000, in multiples of 8 ms) before transmitting the
dialing on the line.

Force MF: after the access code, the network which is called indirectly can receive the digits in a si-
gnaling mode different from the one on the line in use. If the value in this field is YES, then all dialing
transmitted after the access code is MF.

ARS MISCELLANEOUS (MULTI-OPERATOR MODE ONLY)

2 flags are proposed:

- Manual direct access: this flag is only analyzed if the "Prefix" field in the ARS table relates to a public
access code (code auth). If the dialed number has a public access code and if the flag is not autho-
rized, the call is rejected.
- Automatic indirect access: this flag is analyzed when the "Access digits" field in a trunk group list is
filled in. When the flag is not authorized, the next line in the trunk group list is analyzed.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/20

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

BASIC PRINCIPLES FOR UNDERSTANDING ARS MECHANISMS

For a particular prefix, it is possible to define several ranges

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute

Priv 36 0-1 ; 22-23 ; 444-555 ; 6666-7777 03887766
Priv 36 24-25 ; 87-97 03884433
Priv 36 - 03881100

36123 dialled -> selection of the first entry (123 belonging to the range 0-1).

368899 dialled -> selection of the second entry (8899 belonging to the range 87-97).
3699 dialled -> selection of the third entry (99 not belonging to any range defined for the prefix 36).

If a range covers other prefixes for outgoing calls, the first range corresponding to the digits
dialed is selected

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute

Priv 36 5-6 ; 888-999 03887766
Priv 36 88-99 03884433
Priv 36 55-56 03881100

3655 dialled -> selection of the first entry (55-66 included in 5-6).

36889 dialled -> selection of the first entry (888-999 included in 88-99).

Different ranges cannot be defined between the fields "Prefix" and "Substitute"

36 [01-03] cannot be replaced by 03886777[51-53] -> 3 entries have to be created in the ARS table.

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute

Priv 3601 0388677751
Priv 3602 0388677752
Priv 3603 0388677753

10/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS

As soon as a prefix is recognized and if the digits dialed do not belong to the range, there is
no overflow from one prefix to another

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute

Priv 7 1000-7299 7
Priv 77 300-320 1

77299 dialled -> recognition of prefix 77: 299 not belonging to the range defined for this prefix, the
dialled number is not taken into account by the ARS mechanisms (even though this number corres-
ponds to entry 7[1000-7299]. To remedy this situation, configure the following ARS table:

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute

Priv 7 1000-6999 7
Priv 77 000-299 77
Priv 77 300-320 77

Pay attention to overlaps in the "Substitute" field

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute

Priv 36 00-99 03887766
Priv 3588 - 0388776688

There is an overlap between 03887766[00-99] and 0388776688. For incoming calls, there are 2
possible conversions of the public number 0388776688 into private numbers: 3688 and 3588. For
example, to convert the public number into the private number 3688, configure the ARS as follows:

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute

Priv 36 00-87 03887766
Priv 3588 88-88 03887766
Priv 3689 89-99 03887766

For incoming calls, the public number received, 03887766XX is converted into the private number
35[88-99] if XX does not belong to the range 00-87.

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute

Priv 36 00-87 03887766
Priv 35 03887766

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/20

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

ARS INTERACTIONS WITH OTHER SERVICES

LINE ALLOCATION

This feature is incompatible with ARS mechanisms.

BARRING AND TRAFFIC SHARING

The traffic sharing mechanism within a trunk group list or between trunk group lists can be used to
authorize overflow between trunk groups for specific users.

When barring prohibits dialing on the selected trunk group, no overflow is possible and the call is re-
leased.

EMERGENCY NUMBERS

This paragraph only concerns the emergency numbers defined when the system is initialized (numbers
installed in ROM).

ARS table base fields:

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Urg - - - XX

The only possible configurations for emergency numbers ("Network" field = Urg.) are:

- prefix = empty; replace = empty: transparent dialing in the ARS table

- prefix = empty; replace = XXX: addition of digits XXX (useful for break-out)

The traffic sharing and barring mechanisms are not applied to emergency numbers (as with collective
speed dial numbers).

If the emergency number is dialed after line seizure, the call goes through the ARS mechanisms if the
line figures among the trunk groups in the ARS tables; if not, the number is transmitted on this line
directly.
If the ARS table has no entry for emergency numbers, the trunk group associated with the default public
prefix is used, if there is one; if not, the main trunk group is used.

12/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS

INTERNAL ARS DESTINATIONS

ARS mechanisms can handle internal destinations.

INTERNAL CALL FORCING

When a user tries to call a correspondent (connected to the same Alcatel OmniPCX Office system or
belonging to the same private network) by dialing the correspondent's public number, the ARS mecha-
nism converts the public number into an internal number, and an internal call is made.

Configuration example

PUBLIC
NETWORK

Index 1 trunk group

Index 2 trunk group NDI : 884072

Node 2
Node 1

User 2102
User 2103
User 1101

"ARS Table" configuration:

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub 8840722 100 - 200 2 4
Pub 8840721 100 - 200 1 1

"Trunk group list" configuration:

TrG Index TrGp. Char. Provider / Destina- Access di- Authoriza- Tone/Pause
p list tion gits tion code
1 2 500
4 LOCAL ---

In this example:

- the public call from user 2102 to user 2103 (by dialing 08840722103) is converted into a local
call by replacing 8840722 by 2; the system therefore sends the number 2103.
- the public call from user 2102 to user 1101 (by dialing 08840721101) is converted into a local

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/20

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

call by replacing 8840721 by 1; the system therefore sends the number 1101 over trunk group 2
(as the 2 sets do not belong to the same PCX).

14/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS

SELECTING THE DESTINATION ACCORDING TO THE TIME

It is also possible to route a call to different internal destinations depending on the date and time. This
is achieved using overflow mechanisms between trunk group lists with the same index.

Configuration example

"ARS Table" configuration:

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Priv 5000 102 100

103 200

"Trunk group list" configuration:

TrG Index TrGp. Char. Provider / Destina- Access di- Authoriza- Tone/Pause
p list tion gits tion code
100 LOCAL User 102
200 LOCAL User 103

"Time Ranges" configuration:

Start End Day group Provider / Provider / Provider / Provider /

Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 3 Destination 4
00:00 12:00 1 User 102
12:00 00:00 1 User 103

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/20

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

"Day Groups" configuration:

- All the days of the week are assigned to day group 1.

"Providers / Destinations" configuration:

Providers / Destinations
User 102
User 103

In this example, if an internal user dials 5000: a call made between 0 and 12.00 hours will be put
through to set 102 and a call made between 12.00 and 0 hours will be put through to set 103.

- between 0 and 12.00 hours: trunk group list 100 is selected; 5000 is replaced by 102 and user
102 is called.
- between 12 and 0 hours: first of all trunk group list 100 is selected; 5000 is replaced by 102. Over-
flow occurs in the ARS table and the second entry (trunk group list 200) is selected. 5000 is replaced
by 103 and user 103 is called.

16/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS

REROUTING ON OPERATOR BUSY

Definition
When a call cannot get through because the operator is busy, this mechanism automatically reroutes
it via another operator.

The rerouting mechanism is totally transparent to the user (no specific tone or display).

The mechanism is only offered for calls routed by ARS over ARS trunk groups (ISDN trunk groups only).

Automatic rerouting when the operator is busy is activated by the triggers defined by the "BsyPrvCaus"
flag and refers to the ARS table settings.

Configuration example
In this example, at any moment of the week calls starting by 089 are processed by the operator Mo-
bilcom, and by Teldafax if Mobilcom is busy. If Teldafax is also busy, these calls will be processed by
the preselected operator Telekom.

All other external calls (calls not starting with 089) are processed by Telekom.

PRESELECTED
OPERATOR
(TELEKOM for exemple)
OPERATOR 1
(MOBILCOM for
example)

Trunk group 1 Trunk group 2

OPERATOR 2
(TELDAFAX for
example)

"Dialing plan" configuration:

- "Secondary trunk groups seizure" function: Start, End = 0; Base = ARS; NMT = Absorbed. All calls
starting with 0 are ARS calls and the subsequent figures are analyzed by the ARS tables.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/20

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

"ARS Table" configuration:

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub 089 089 1 Het Operator
Pub 2 Telekom

"Trunk group list" configuration:

TrG Index TrGp. Char. Provider / Destina- Access di- Authoriza- Tone/Pause
p list tion gits tion code
1 1 0 Mobilcom 01019 None None

1 0 Teldafax 01030 None None

1 0 None None None

2 1 0 None None None

"Time Ranges" configuration:

Start End Day group Provider / Provider / Provider / Provider /

Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 3 Destination 4
00:00 00:00 1 Teldafax Mobilcom None None

2 None None None None

3 None None None None

"Day Groups" configuration:

- All the days of the week are assigned to day group 1.

"Providers / Destinations" configuration:

Providers / Destinations
Mobilcom
Teldafax

18/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS

Configuration
- Define the activation causes for the mechanism (5 causes maximum, FF indicating the end of the
list of causes)
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Labels -
> Misc. Labels -> "BsyPrvCaus"
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Address -> " BsyPrvCaus" -> Return -> Me-
mory

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 19/20

PRINCIPLES OF ARS MECHANISMS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

20/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS EXAMPLES USING ARS

File
EXAMPLES USING ARS
3

ELEMENTARY CONFIGURATIONS

BREAK-IN

A public user calls a user of a remote system B by break-in in system A .

PUBLIC
NETWORK
0388677700 com
pose 0388697985

A
B Node 41 QSIG_BC

7185
Public installation number: 03 88 697900
SDA: 7901 SDA range: 7900 -7949
SDA range: 7950 - 7999 Range: 7900 - 7949

Public numbering plan of A

Start End Base Feature NMT Private

7900 7949 100 Set - no
7950 7999 - Secondary trunk group Keep No

ARS table of A

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub 03886979 - 41 1 Homoge-
nous

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/10

EXAMPLES USING ARS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

Private numbering plan of B

Start End Base Feature NMT Private

4150 4199 100 Set - Yes

BREAK-OUT

Set 500 in system A (node 50) calls user 0388677700 on the public network. The ARS mechanisms
force the call to use the private network. If the private network is busy, the start call will be made on
the network access of A .

PUBLIC
NETWORK
0388677700

List 1 trunk group

00388677700

A 50
B Node 51
QSIG_BC
List 2 trunk group

Station 500 dials 00388677700

Main numbering plan of A

Start End Base Feature NMT Private

0 0 ARS Main trunk group Absorb No
51 51 ARS Secondary trunk group Keep Yes

2/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS EXAMPLES USING ARS

ARS table of A

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub - - - 1 Heterogen.
Priv 51 - 51 2 Homoge-
nous
Pub 038867 - 0038867 2 Homoge-
nous
- 038867 Overflow
Heterogen.

CONVERSION BETWEEN PUBLIC AND PRIVATE NUMBERING PLANS

Case 1: Peer to peer - ISVPN and overflow

This configuration corresponds to a call in an ISVPN heterogeneous network or an overflow on a public

link when the private QSIG-BC link is busy.

0384273045
PUBLIC
NETWORK

TrGrp 0
TrGrp 0

QSIG_BC
A
B
TrGrp 1 TrGrp 1

SDA: 0388697901 SDA: 0388677710

3101 3210

ARS table of A for overflow mechanism

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub 32 - 32 1 Heterogen.

00 - 99 03886777 0 Heterogen.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/10

EXAMPLES USING ARS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

Case 2: Peer to peer - private network forcing

ARS table of B

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub 03886979 - 31 1 Heterogen.

00 - 99 03886979 0 Heterogen.

In this configuration, if user 3210 calls a user of A with his public number (0388697901), the call is
forced to use the private link with the private number 3101.

4/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS EXAMPLES USING ARS

Case 3 : master/satellite

In this configuration, the DDI numbers in A are managed remotely by B ; a public numbering plan
in A is therefore not necessary if:

- B can convert a private number into a public number (for outgoing call by break-out).
- B can convert the private number of the connected set into a public number (incoming call by
break-in).
- B can convert the public DDI number of a user of A into a private number (incoming DDI call
by break-in destined for a user). A ).

PUBLIC 0384273045
NETWORK

1 0
QSIG_BC

public NDI : 0388677700

A B
DDI : 0388677711 DDI : 0388677710
3111 3210

Main numbering plan of B

Start End Base Feature NMT Private

0 0 - Main trunk group Absorb No

Public numbering plan of B

Start End Base Feature NMT Private

7700 7710 100 Set - -
7711 7720 - Secondary trunk group Keep No

ARS table of B

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub 03886777 11 - 20 31 1 Heterogen.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/10

EXAMPLES USING ARS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

Nota : Private -> public conversion requires the full public number (ABPQMCDU) to be entered in
the ARS (and not only the MCDU).

In B , these settings make the following services available:

- break-in: a public network subscriber dials 0388677711. B receives the call and analyses 7711
in the DDI numbering plan. The full number is handled by the ARS table and converted into the
private number 3111. B can now make a private call on the QSIG link and join with the incoming
public call.
- private network forcing: for example, user 3210 dials the number 00388677711; the ARS converts
this public number into the private number 3111.
- break-out: user 3111 calls 0384273045; he dials 00384273045. The caller's number sent on the
QSIG link is the private number 3111. In B , 3111 is converted by the ARS into the public number
0388677711.

6/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS EXAMPLES USING ARS

TRANSGROUPE VPN

PUBLIC NETWORK Public subscriber

0388697985
TRANSGROUPE
Public subscriber known
by the Alcatel OmniPCX Office
Trunk groups 1 and 2 system by the VPN number : 691234

PABX B
NDI : 88678000
A TRANSGROUPE : PIN = 688000 NDI : 388677700
TRANSGROUPE : PIN = 667000

688123 667712

The Alcatel OmniPCX Office B system, as a member of Transgroupe (PIN = 667000) must be confi-
gured to:

- make direct private calls without prefix (internal destination).

- make public calls after dialing an outgoing prefix (0) with automatic insertion of the outgoing prefix
on Transgroupe (0).

Main numbering plan of B

Start End Base Feature NMT Private

0 0 - Main trunk group Absorb No
68 68 - Secondary trunk group Keep Yes
69 69 - Secondary trunk group Keep Yes

ARS table of B

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub - 0 1 Heterogen.
Priv 68 - 68 2 Heterogen.
Priv 69 - 69 2 Heterogen.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/10

EXAMPLES USING ARS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

- Trunk group list 1

TrGp list Index TrGp. Char. Access di- Authoriza- Tone/Pau-
gits tion code se
1 1 - - - - -

- Trunk group list 2

TrGp list Index TrGp. Char. Access di- Authoriza- Tone/Pau-
gits tion code se
2 1 - T - - -

The table below summarises the different types of possible outgoing calls with the values entered in
the "called party number" and "caller number" fields (PCX B ).

Outgoing calls Called party number Caller number

Call to public network Number dialled: Public NDI + MCDU DDI:
0388697985 388677700 + 7712

Num. plan: public Num. plan: public

Internal call in Transgroupe Number dialed: 688123 Internal prefix + MCDU
DDI: 667000 + 7712
Num. plan: private
Num. plan: private
Call to public network by Transgroupe Number dialed: 691234 Internal prefix + MCDU
DDI: 667000 + 7712
Num. plan: private
Num. plan: private

8/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS EXAMPLES USING ARS

MULTI-OPERATOR CONFIGURATION

Code for accessing network 1 : 111

Business code : 3333
NETWORK 0 NETWORK 1
0XXXXXXX 1XXXXXXX
Code for accessing network 0 : 000
Business code : 4444
Trunk group 1
Trunk group 2

When a number beginning with 1XXXXXXX (belonging to network 1) is dialed from network 0, the ac-
cess prefix 111 and the client code 3333 are sent from network 0 to network 1.

Main numbering plan

Start End Base Feature NMT Private

0 0 - Main trunk group (ARS) Absorb No

ARS table

Network Prefix Ranges Substitute TrGp list Called Par- User com.
ty (ISVPN/
H450)
Pub - 1 Heterogen.
Pub 0 - 0 2 Heterogen.
Pub 1 - 1 3 Heterogen.

- Trunk group list 1

TrGp list Index TrGp. Char. Access di- Authoriza- Tone/Pau-
gits tion code se
1 1 - - - - -

- Trunk group list 2

TrGp list Index TrGp. Char. Access di- Authoriza- Tone/Pau-
gits tion code se
2 1 - - - - -
2 - - 000 01 -

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/10

EXAMPLES USING ARS CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

- Trunk group list 3

TrGp list Index TrGp. Char. Access di- Authoriza- Tone/Pau-
gits tion code se
3 2 - - - - -
1 - - 111 02 -

Authorization code table

Index Authorization code

01 4444
02 3333

When the user dials 0 0XXXXXXX, the ARS table forces the use of network 0 and sends the number
0XXXXXXX; the overflow mechanism allows the use of network 1 and sends the number 000 4444
0XXXXXXXX.

When the user dials 0 1XXXXXXX, the ARS table uses public trunk group 2 and sends the number
1XXXXXXX; the overflow mechanism allows the use of public trunk group 1 and sends the number 111
3333 1XXXXXXXX.
Any number beginning with 0X, where X is other than 0 or 1, uses public trunk group 1 (the default).

10/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS METERING - ISVPN+

File
METERING - ISVPN+
4

ISVPN+ is used for a network of Alcatel OmniPCX Office systems linked together by digital leased lines
with the QSIG-BC protocol.

The principal use of ISVPN+ is for centralized metering.

PUBLIC
NETWORK

MASTER CENTRALIZED
METERING
APPLICATION

QSIG
QSIG
QSIG

For all incoming and outgoing calls made within the network, the master system (the one connected
to the public network) gathers the required information and sends it to a centralized metering appli-
cation. The following information is transmitted to the master system:

- outgoing call: all the data presented in the following paragraph is managed at the caller's system
level then transmitted to the master system. The flags characterizing the call are accumulated throu-
gh the different systems during transmission to the master.
- incoming call: the number "transmitted" to the called party and the various flags are generated by
the master system. During the setup of a communication with the called party, the flags characte-
rizing the call are accumulated through the different systems. The number of the charged caller,
the metering node number and the accumulated flags are forwarded to the master system with the
connection message.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

METERING - ISVPN+ CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

DATA TRANSMITTED

This paragraph describes the information which is transmitted to the master system by the other sys-
tems in the network; this data is conveyed by the QSIG protocol UUS.

Global data: Node number

This datum (unique value 0 to 127; by default: 255) identifies the system in the network.

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: External Lines -> Protocols -> ISVPN Protocol ->
Node Number. This information is only used by the metering application (not used in a tele-
phone context). The node number indicated is the one to which the charged user is connected.

Data relative to each communication

- "transmitted" number: number resulting from the NMT conversion of the number dialed after ana-
lysis in the main numbering plan (or NMT conversion of the number received after analysis in the
incoming public call numbering plan); it is thus possible to compare the number sent (to the ARS
table) by the system with the original number dialed.
- charged user: This datum depends on the type of call:
- outgoing call or break-out: caller
- incoming call or break-in: user having answered the call; this user may be different to the called
user (forwarding, call pick-up, etc.)
- transfer: user who is the destination of the transfer
- flags characterizing an ARS call:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Numbering -> Automatic Routing Selection -> ARS
Table -> Option: Metering:
- forcing onto private network (private): this flag indicates whether an outgoing call has
been rerouted onto leased lines by the ARS.
- overflow: this flag indicates whether the trunk group used for the current call has been ob-
tained after overflow by the ARS.

- complementary services: This data indicates the services activated in order to carry out the current
call:
- substitution (DISA transit)
- use of the ARS table
- homogenous ISVPN call
- VPN call (Transgroupe for example)
- supplementary network facility: indirect access to an operator
- on-line metering request in the event of break-out

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS METERING - ISVPN+

EXAMPLES

Local call in the network

A (5212) calls B (4103) by dialing 4103.

PUBLIC
NETWORK

10 20 MASTER

52
41

B
CENTRALIZED METE
A RING
4103 5212 APPLICATION

Information transmitted:

- Charged user: 5212

- Number of the metering node: 20
- Transmitted number: 4103

Break-in

A public network user calls A (4103) by dialing 0388408003. A is forwarded on B (4142).

PUBLIC
NETWORK

0388408003

10 20 MASTER

41
52
4103

CENTRALIZED METE
A RING APPLICATION

4103
4142

Information transmitted:

- Charged user: 4142

- Number of the metering node: 10
- Transmitted number: 4103

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

METERING - ISVPN+ CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

Break-out

A (4103) calls C (8012) by dialing 8012.

80 PUBLIC
NETWORK
C
30
0388677712
8012

10 MASTER
20
52
41

8012

CENTRALIZED
A METERING
APPLICATION
4103

Information transmitted:

- Charged user: 4103

- Number of the metering node: 10
- Transmitted number: 8012

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS CLOCK SYNCHRONISATION

File
CLOCK SYNCHRONISATION
5

SYNCHRONIZATION IN MODULES

Nota : The digital accesses (T0, T2, etc.) in an add-on module can under no circumstances serve
as synchronizing accesses for the system (it is impossible to feed the clock back from an
add-on module to the basic module CPU over an HSL link).

If the system includes digital accesses, then there are several eventualities:

- Case 1: No access in main module, all accesses are in an add-on module:

- The accesses will try to supply the clock to the system, and the system will refuse.
- System message 51 - Clock Problem; the system operates on the local clock.
- Case 2: There is a T2 in the add-on module and a non-permanent level 1 T0 in the basic module:
- If the T0 is in communication, its level 1 is therefore established and it is the T0 which provides
the clock for the system.
- If the T0 is not in communication, the T2 access will attempt to supply the clock to the system
when it synchronizes with the network public (as in case 1). The clock supplied by T2 will be
refused; a message 51 is generated; the system operates on the local clock.
- Case 3: There is a permanent T0 or a T2 in the basic module. Regardless of the accesses present
in the add-on modules, the clock is supplied by one of the accesses in the basic module.

Conclusion: You need to equip at least one digital access in the basic module (and if possible, a per-
manent level 1 T2) with a priority higher that that of all accesses present in the system.

(*) : Depending on countries, T0 accesses have a permanent or non permanent level 1. In case 2, if a
T0 board (with access to a permanent level 1) is present in the main module and a T2 access is present
in the add-on module, the system will take the clock provided by the T0 if the highest priority has been
assigned to the T0. Reminder: 0 = highest priority, 254 = lowest priority.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

CLOCK SYNCHRONISATION CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

SYNCHRONIZATION IN NETWORKS

To avoid loopbacks in the synchronization paths, you need to define a hierarchy of network nodes.

DEFINITIONS

- Pilot node (= level 1): node with the most interfaces to the public network; preferably a T2.
- Level 2: node with at least one synchronizing link coming from a pilot node.
- Level 3: other nodes.

PRIORITY NUMBERS

To be able to modify and enlarge a network, you should construct a tree diagram for the synchroni-
zation of each node in the network.

A priority number must be assigned (P) to each node.

For the clock priority settings for the ISDN/QSIG boards to be taken into account, the system requires
a warm reset.

France Type: T0 with non permanent activation of level 1

Germany Type: T0 with permanent activation of level 1

YES
Pilot NO

node?

YES NO
Public
access?

If public T2: 0 If public T2: 0 If link from Lev.1: 10

If permanent T0: 1 If permanent T0: 9 If link from Lev.2: 20
If non permanent T0: 9 If non permanent T0: 19 If link from Lev.3: 30
If link from Lev.2: 20 If link from Lev.1: 10 Other links: Non Synchronizing
If link from Lev.3: 30 If link from Lev.2: 20
Other links: Non Synchronizing If link from Lev.3: 30
Other links: Non Synchronizing

Nota : A "Non synchronising" access (PM5 -> External lines -> Digital access details -> field "syn-
chronising clock" not validated) means that the access receives the system clock and trans-
mits it to the remote equipment.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS CLOCK SYNCHRONISATION

Principles which must be respected:

- to avoid 2 nodes from the same level synchronizing each other, assign priority 255 to the links
between the 2 nodes on the system (synchronizing) side and a smaller priority value on the slave
(synchronized) side.
- a node can only be enslaved on another node having an identical or lower hierarchic level.
- for any given node, assign a single priority number to links of the same type (T2, T0, leased lines).
- for any given node, a T2 link must always be assigned a smaller priority number than a T0 link.

EXAMPLES

T2

Permanent T0
P=0
LEVEL
P=1 1
Node 1 Node 1
P = NS (pilot) Non permanent T0 (pilot)
P = NS

P = 10 P = NS
P = 11 P = 19

P = NS P = 20
Node 2 Node 3 LEVEL Node 2 Node 3
2

P = NS P = NS
P = 10

P = 20 P = 21

Node 4 Node 4
LEVEL
3

Network with 4nodes and 3 hierarchical Adding a link between nodes 1 and 4
levels (existing configuration not
modified)

NS: Non Synchronizing

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

CLOCK SYNCHRONISATION CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

RESTRICTIONS

The 2 configurations below present situations which lead to operational restrictions.

PUBLIC NETWORK

Non permanent T0
Non permanent T0

PABX A QSIG link PABX B

master slave

Synchronization of the QSIG on PCX B has priority over the synchronization of the T0 on PCX B:

- a subscriber belonging to A is in an external communication (simultaneously or not with subscribers

on B) -> no problem.
- no external communication in A: A operates on the local clock.
A subscriber belonging to B makes an external call: B remains synchronised on A and is therefore
not synchronous on the public network -> no data transmission from B to the network.

Synchronization of the T0 of PCX B has priority over the synchronization of the QSIG:

- a subscriber belonging to B is in an external communication (simultaneously or not with the subs-

cribers on A) -> no problem.
- a subscriber belonging to B is in an external communication: A operates on the local clock -> no
data transmission between B and A via the QSIG link.
- no external communication in A or B: A and B operate on their local clocks -> no data transmission
between B and A via the QSIG link.

PUBLIC NETWORK

Non permanent T0

PABX A QSIG link PABX B slave

master with DECT

B is synchronized via the QSIG link of PCX A:

- a subscriber on A is in an external communication -> no problem.

- no external communication in A: A operates on the local clock; this clock is supplied to B -> DECT
problems in B.
- if B has a non-permanent T0 link, the DECT problems will be compounded by the problems from
the previous case.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS BASIC ACCESSES CONFIGURATION

File
BASIC ACCESSES CONFIGURATION
6

From R2.0 version, digital accesses of BRA boards can be configured in T0 (with EDSS1 protocol on
public lines) or DLT0 (with Q-SIG protocol on transparent private lines or public lines).

Nota : Digital accesses of MIX boards cannot be configured in DLT0.

All the accesses of the same DLT2/DLT0 board (digital leased lines) can be used to connect
several PCXs as long as they are all masters or slaves.

The German ISDN network provides a particular S0-FV (S0-FestVerbindung) access (similar
to using a DLT0 access) to establish private connections between 2 PCX: levels 1 and 2 are
managed as BRA accesses (the PCX is always in User mode) while the protocol is managed
at level 3.

INITIALISATION

T0
- Number of B-channels: 2 bi-directional, 0 incoming, 0 outgoing ; cannot be modified
- Protocol :EDSS1 ; may be modified in QSIG to create a DLT0 basic access on a BRA board or a
S0-FV access on a MIX board of the German market.
- Layer 1 / Layer 2 Mode: User (TE); cannot be modified while Protocol = EDSS1.
- Synchronisation priority: 10 ; modifiable
- TEI Management: Point-to-point ; fixed TEI = 0 ; modifiable
- Network type: Public ; modifiable.

DLT0
Initialisation in DLT0 mode occurs when TO (EDSS1) accesses switch to DLT0 (QSIG) via PM5.

- Default number of B-channels: 1 bi-directional, 0 incoming, 0 outgoing

- Protocol: QSIG; may be modified in EDSS1 to redefine a T0 basic access on a BRA board.
- Layer 1 / Layer 2 Mode: User (TE); modifiable in network (NT).
- Synchronisation priority: 210 ; modifiable
- TEI Management: Point-to-point ; fixed TEI = 0 ; modifiable
- Network type: Private; modifiable.

Nota : When access is configured in network, synchronisation parameters are no longer modifia-
ble. Access is synchronised by its system and transmits the clock to the remote system.

CONFIGURATION

All configurations are carried out by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): External lines -> External Access Ta-
ble -> Digital Access: Details

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

BASIC ACCESSES CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : PRIVATE NETWORKS

Conversion of a T0 access into a DLT0 access

When booted up, all accesses by BRA boards are configured as T0 accesses. Conversion of a T0 access
into a DLT0 access is carried out by PM5 (see screen below) in modifying the following parameters for
each access:

- Protocol = QSIG
- Layer 1 / Layer 2 Mode = User (default value if the QSIG protocol is used) or Network.

This change results in the following parameters:

- Synchronising clock: Yes if User, or No (in grey) if Network.

- If User: Yes
- If Network: No (in grey)
- Synchronisation priority:
- If User: 210
- If Network: No (in grey)
- B-channels specialisation:
- If User: Allocation = Descending; Collision = Slave
- If Network: Allocation = Ascending; Collision = Master
- Number of B-channels: 1
- Public Network: No (in grey)
- TEI Management: Point-to-point (in grey)
- Automatic TEI negotiation: Non (in grey)
- Fixed TEI: 0 (in grey)

In User, validation (OK key) only relates to the selected access while in Network, validation also relates
to the associated access.

Conversion of a DLT0 access into a T0 access

The return of a DLT0 access to a T0 access is carried out by PM5 (same screen as before) in modifying
the following parameters:

- Protocol = EDSS1
- Layer 1 / Layer 2 Mode = User (in grey).

This change results in the following parameters:

- Synchronising clock: Yes.

- Synchronisation priority: 10
- B-channels specialisation: Allocation = Ascending; Collision = Master (in grey)
- Number of B-channels: 2
- Public network: Yes
- TEI Management: Point-to-point
- Automatic TEI Negotiation: No
- Fixed TEI: 0

Nota : Some modifications require a warm reset (must be performed at the PM5 prompt).

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
CALL SERVER : Hotel

SECTION

CALL SERVER : HOTEL

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

CALL SERVER : HOTEL

Section CALL SERVER : Hotel

OVERVIEW FILE 1

CONFIGURATION FILE 2

RECEPTION SET FEATURES FILE 3

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION CALL SERVER : HOTEL CALL SERVER : HOTEL

(INDEX)

Section CALL SERVER : Hotel (Index)

CONFIGURATION FILE 2

OVERVIEW FILE 1

RECEPTION SET FEATURES FILE 3

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : HOTEL OVERVIEW

File
OVERVIEW
1

ENVIRONMENT

RECEPTION Features available with the HOTEL key :

Advanced Reflexes station - check-in (name, ddi n°, deposit, wake-up, ...)
- room consultation, modification
- pre check-out and check-out (bill, ...)
- room status (free, occupied, cleaned, ...)

Visualization on the RSL key :

- room status (free or occupied)
- station status (free or occupied)
- room status (clean or not)
- problem with room status or wake-up alarm

BOOTH Using the features :

- metering total recall
- trunk allot

Metering :
- metering reminder ticket or
- assignment of charges to a room

PRINTING Hotel printing :

- room status ticket
- client information ticket
- client global bill ticket

System printing :
- metering ticket
- wake-up ticket
- metering total recall (booth)

ROOM Client :
Reflexes Dect, - DDI N°, wake-up, message, ...
Z stations - room service call

Room status :
- room free or occupied
- room cleaned or not
- problem identification

ROOM SERVICE

- service on an RSD key

- display of the client’s name, language
and room n°

VOICE - allocation of a voice mail box to each room

MAIL - automatic reset of the voice mail box contents at check-in
- automatic allocation of the client’s language and password
to the mailbox

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

OVERVIEW CALL SERVER : HOTEL

Sets in the installation

The sets of the installation are divided up according to their types and roles:

- Reception and Operator: Advanced Reflexes (or 4034) obligatory, fitted with add-on modules
- Administration and Rooms: Reflexes, DECT, Z
- Room Service: Reflexes
- Booths: Reflexes, Z

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : HOTEL OVERVIEW

HOTEL INSTALLATION

When the system is brought into service, the PM5 Easy View session allows you to specify that the ins-
tallation is a hotel installation. By doing this, the system automatically creates predefined profiles (Re-
ception set, phone booth, room sets, administration sets, etc) described below:

- the first set is the Operator Station; this 4034/Advanced set in PCX mode belongs to all active ope-
rator groups as well as the default operator group.
This set has the profile of a Reception set: it has a direct call key for the booth station and, on the
add-on-modules, a direct call key for each room set in the installation (up to 80 sets).
- the Reflexes sets are administration sets.
- the Z sets (except fax machines and booths) are room sets.
- dynamic routing level 1 for administration sets: any unanswered call is routed to the voice mail unit
after 12 seconds.
- dynamic routing level 2 for administration sets: any unanswered external call is routed to the ope-
rator group after 24 seconds; for room sets, this mechanism only applies after customer check-in.
- OS calls overflow to general level (default operator group) after 24 seconds; for room sets, this
mechanism only applies after customer check-in.
- the first Z interface is configured to connect a fax machine (VOICE and FAX2/3 services; no dyna-
mic routing; protection against camp-on, intrusion and camp-on tone).
- the second Z interface is configured to connect a booth station (automatic call setup on going off-
hook, delayed by 3 seconds, meter total recall at the operator station).
- the internal numbering plan is programmed with the prefixes for "room status," "room service" and
"wake-up programming".
- the public numbering plan (if the public numbering system is "open") contains 2 ranges of DDI
numbers: one for the OS, the other for the administration sets, the booth and the Z interface of the
fax machine; the DDI numbers correspond to the internal call numbers of the sets.
The remaining ranges can be used for the room sets.
- the table of features in conversation is programmed with the default codes for the features "DND
override", "trunk allot" and "meter total recall".
- all the programmable keys on Easy, Premium and Advanced sets are modifiable by the user (or by
the installer).

Using the pre-defined profiles of the PM5 Easy View session means you can avoid some of the system
programming described in the "Configuration" section.

See the "Starting Up" section of the installation manual for a description of the PM5 Easy View session;
this session also enables you to configure some of the key Hotel application parameters (the DDI num-
bers, for example) right from the initialization stage.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

OVERVIEW CALL SERVER : HOTEL

FEATURES

The main services proposed are listed below.

Administrative aspects:
Room Status

Room Status (free, occupied, cleaned, problem with room).

Check-in

Name, language, allocation of a DDI nº, opening of the line, barring level (external outgoing calls),
prepayment (metering credit), wake-up call, printout of an information ticket, etc.

Consultation of an occupied room

Guest prepayment status (metering credit), consultation of the guest's mail box (text mail, voice mail,
Reception call-back request), printout of an information ticket, etc.

Pre-checkout and Check-out

Closing of the line, printout of a bill, room status, resetting of the parameters, etc.

The pre-checkout enables a guest to settle the telephone bill the day before an early morning depar-
ture, for example (external outgoing calls no longer possible), whilst at the same time keeping the fea-
tures programmed on the phone (wake-up call, message, DDI Nº, DND, etc).

METERING

Specific parameter settings for calculating the cost of communications on guest sets and booths.

Standard parameter settings for calculating the cost of communications on administration sets.
Surcharge for guest communications set up with the help of Reception.
Printout of a metering ticket with VAT.

New voice mail integrating the hotel features

Allocation of a voice mail box to each room.

Automatic reset of the contents of a voice mail box at check-in.

Automatic allocation of the guest language and password to the voice mail box.

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

CALL SERVER : HOTEL OVERVIEW

Telephone aspects:
Programming of the wake-up call either by the guest or by Reception

Password

Service enabling Reception to assign guests a password.

The password can be used by guests to lock their set (prohibit external calls), to remotely access their
voice mail box and to establish communications with protected account codes.

Room Service

Certain services are accessible by a simple call: bar, dry cleaning, breakfast, for example.

Phone booth

Use of features: Trunk Allot (with meter recall) or Metering Total Recall.

During a metering total recall: printout of a metering ticket or allocation of charges to a set in the ins-
tallation.

DND OVERRIDE

Service enabling Reception to override DND.

Account code with substitution

Service enabling a subscriber to set up a communication on one set with the account code allocated
to another set.

The user establishes communication in the following way: account code prefix + account code +
nº of the substitution set (optional) + password (optional) + prefix for accessing the trunk group
+ called party's nº

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

OVERVIEW CALL SERVER : HOTEL

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : HOTEL CONFIGURATION

File
CONFIGURATION
2

PARAMETERS TO BE CONFIGURED

This chapter presents the main parameters that need to be configured for the hotel application.

Installation numbers

- Enter the installation number, the intercity code and the international access prefix

Numbering plans

- Internal numbering plan, enter the:

- station numbers: administration, rooms, booths, fax, etc.

- prefixes: wake-up call, main and secondary trunk group, Room status (see System Parame-
ters), Reception call, etc.

- Public numbering plan, enter the:

- station DDI numbers: administration, Reception, fax, etc.

- room set DDI numbers (see the VisFr and VisAl features in System Parameters)

- Feature access codes, enter the suffixes for: enquiry call, shuttle call, DND override (see System
Parameters), conference, etc.

Set categories

- Declare the sets: "Administration", "Guest" or "Phonebooth" (see the Class feature in System Para-
meters)

Reception set

- Create a "Hotel" key (see the Hotel feature in System Parameters)

- Create the "RSL" keys for the sets: rooms, booths, etc. (see the RSL feature in System Parameters)

Room service station

- Create the numbers for the service in the internal numbering plan

- Create a "RSD" key for each service on the Room service station (see the RSD feature in System
Parameters)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/18

CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : HOTEL

Phone booth

- Configure the phone booth by using the features:

- "Automatic call setup (on reception) on going off-hook" (or bar the line in order to exclude out-
side calls. To call out, the user dials the call number for reception).

- "Metering total recall" in automatic mode (or using the manual mode from the Reception set)

- Configure the Reception set by using the features:

- "Trunk allot" (use, for example, barring table nº2 which only authorizes local calls)
- "Trunk allot with metering total recall" (use, for example, table nº4 which authorizes national
and international calls)

- "Metering total recall" in manual mode

- Authorize the feature rights: "trunk allot" and "metering total recall"

- Position the flag "metering total recall if there is no charge" (see the Metering total recall feature
in System Parameters)

Analog room sets

- Allocate a "voice mail" virtual key to the analog sets which will light the LED when there is a call-
back request from Reception or from the voice mail unit

Barring tables

- Check the link category on the sets installed

- Check the link category on the trunk group and network lines

Hotel Parameters

- Configure the parameters: "Wake-up", "DDI", "Language", "Barring", "DND", "Exit time" and "Check-
in" (see Customizing the configuration screens)

- Configure the Room status parameters (see Configuring room status)

Guest metering

- Configure the parameters: "Deposit", "Currency" and "VAT" (see Customizing the configuration
screens)

- Configure the parameters: "Room status" print out, Thank-you messages, VAT, Cost of communi-
cations, Surcharge and Cut-off (see the Metering features in System Parameters)

2/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : HOTEL CONFIGURATION

SYSTEM PARAMETERS

The following flow chart shows the required system parameters; they are only accessible in the installer
session.

Keys → Call → DNDovr→

→ Option → Hotel
→ Resou → RSL
INSTAL SUBSCR → RSD
Class

COUNT Extens → Call → Reset

Accoun → Param1 → UserId

GLOBAL
Rd/Wr → Memory

IntNum → Funct → RoomS

Code →Funct → DND override
NUMPLN PubNum → Funct → VisFr

Param1 → VAT
METER Visit → Cost → Cost 1, Cost 2, Cost 3, Ovload
→ UnitTh → Unit1T, Unit2T, Beep

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/18

CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : HOTEL

DND OVERRIDE
This service enables an authorized subscriber (Reception) to override a set's DND (Do Not Disturb) sta-
tus. It is activated either with a function key or with a feature access code.

- To assign a feature access code to the service:

- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> Code -> Funct -> DND override
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> FAC Numbering Plan -> DND Override

- To assign the service to a key:

- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Keys -> Call -> DNDovr
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers -> Details -> Keys
-> Function key -> DND Override

- Authorize the service on the calling party set:

- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> SubPro -> Featur -> High
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers -> Details -> Fea-
tures -> Part2 -> check DND override allowed

- Protect the called party against the service:

- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> SubPro -> Featur -> High or Middle
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers -> Details -> Fea-
tures -> Part2 -> check Protection against DND override

HOTEL KEY
This feature enables Reception to enter the hotel application in order to enter, consult and/or print
guest data.

- To assign the feature to a key:

- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Keys -> Option -> Hotel
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers -> Details -> Keys
-> Function key -> Hotel Menu

4/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : HOTEL CONFIGURATION

RSL KEY
The Reception set must be equipped with add-on modules. The modules are programmed with RSL
resource keys (essentially room Nºs) which allow Reception:

- to call a set in the installation directly

- to receive a call on the resource from a set in the installation
- to see the busy status of a set in the installation
- to find out the occupation status of a room (free or occupied)
- to view a problem with a room wake-up call
- to view the status of a set's ringer (internal or external call)
- to find out the status of a room (cleaned or uncleaned)
- to view a problem with the room

Notas :

The new features are accessible if the set has a Hotel key. They are detailed in "Reception set features".
- To assign RSL keys to the Reception set:
- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Keys -> Modify -> Resou -> RSL -> enter a directory nº (that of
a room set, for example)
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers -> Details -> Keys
-> Resource Key -> Local Call -> enter a directory nº (that of a room set, for example)

RSD KEY
To call Room Service, the user dials a number corresponding to a service (the "breakfast" service for
example). This number must be known by the system and must be assigned to the "Room Service" sta-
tion.

- To assign service numbers to the "Room Service" station:

- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> IntNum -> Subsc feature-> nºof the service in Begin and End -
> directory nº of the "Room Service" station in Base
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Internal Numbering Plan -> Subscriber feature
-> nºof the service in Start and End -> directory nº of the "Room Service" station in Base

The "Room Service" station is programmed with RSD resource keys which have the nºs of the services.
It has a display showing the name, directory nº and language of the caller.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/18

CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : HOTEL

- To assign RSD keys to the "Room Service" station:

- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Keys -> Modify -> Resou -> RSD -> enter a service nº (the
"breakfast" service, for example)
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers -> Details -> Keys
-> Resource key -> DDI call -> enter a service nº (the "breakfast" service, for example)

CLASS
This feature assigns one of the following categories to each set in the installation: "Administration",
"Guest" or "Phonebooth".

- To assign a role to the set:

- by MMC-Station: Subscr -> Class -> assign Administration set, Guest set or Phone booth
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers -> Details -> Ho-
tel -> assign Admin, Guest or Phonebooth

Default value: Administration

CALL COUNTERS
This feature enables Reception to find out the number of charged calls made from a set in the instal-
lation and to reset the counter.

In the Hotel application, the call counter is automatically reset on check-in; the number of calls (char-
ged communications) is given as a reminder on the printout of the "Guest Global Bill Ticket" and on
the "Client Information Ticket".

- To read and reset a set's call counters:

- by MMC-Station: Count -> Extens -> Call to read the counter and -> Reset to reset it
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers -> Details -> Me-
tering to read the counter and -> Reset to reset it

This feature also allows you to edit, on the screen, the call and cost counters for sets.

- To read the call and cost counters for all the sets:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Metering -> Metering Counters

6/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : HOTEL CONFIGURATION

ACCOUNT CODES
Use of this service involves a new parameter, USER-ID, which makes it possible to carry out "substitu-
tion" (charging to the account code of a set other than the one being used). This parameter means
modifying the BARRING field and specifying the PROTECTION field.

- To select whether or not to assign an identification request for substitution to the account code:
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Accoun -> Param1 -> UserId ->select NO no identification or
YES with identification
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Traffic Sharing and Barring -> Ac-
count Code Table -> User-Id -> select none no identification or User with identification

- To assign a barring category to the account code (see also the table below):
- by MMC-Station:
Global -> Accoun -> Param2 -> Barrin -> select None, a category between 1 and 16, SET
or GUEST
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Traffic Sharing and Barring -> Ac-
count Code Table -> Bar.Lvl. > select none, a category between 1 and 16, set or guest

The table below shows, depending on the link category assigned to the account code, the system reac-
tions on the various link categories.

Link categories Traffic Sharing (LC3) Barring Matrix(LC2) Collective Speed

of the system Dial Rights (LC1)
Account code,
Possible barring level

LC3 of the set (*) LC2 of the set (*) LC1 of the set (*)
Guest LC3 of the guest (*) LC2 of the guest (*) LC1 of the guest (*)
Forced barring Cat. LC3 of the set (normal Fixed category Cat. LC1 of the set (*)
1..16 service) 1..16
None (no barring) LC3 of the set (normal Call not barred LC1 of the set (*)
service)

* Link Categories service operation: Normal or Restricted

Remarques :

- if the account code is with "Identification" then the nº of the substitution set is to be entered
- if the account code is with password, the password expected by the system is either that of the set
in use or that of the substitution set

The user establishes communication in the following way: account code prefix + account code +
nº of the substitution set (optional) + password (optional) + prefix for accessing the trunk group
+ called party's nº

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/18

CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : HOTEL

METER TOTAL RECALL

The meter total recall (MTR) mechanism can recall the service beneficiary even if there is no charge.

- Recall the service beneficiary in all cases:

- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Addres ->enter 01 in MtrNoCharg -> Memory
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Other Labels
-> enter 01 in MtrNoCharg

Default value: "00" (no recall if no charge)

WAKE-UP CALL
In the case of a wake-up problem, the system alerts Reception by sending a message and a ringing
tone to the set which is repeated approximately every 30 seconds.

- Inhibiting the ringing and visual alarm mechanism:

- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Addres ->enter 00 in WakUpPrbRg -> Memory
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Other Labels
-> enter 00 in WakUpPrbRg

Default value: "01" (alarm activated)

Notas :

With the hotel application, it is always possible to visualize a guest wake-up problem on the RSL keys
on the set at Reception (see "Hotel Features").

8/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : HOTEL CONFIGURATION

ROOM STATUS AFTER CHECK-OUT

After check-out the room is automatically switched to "uncleaned" status.

- Inhibiting the status changing mechanism:

- by MMC-Station: Global -> Rd/Wr -> Addres ->enter 00 in UnclChkOut -> Memory
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Other Labels
-> enter 00 in UnclChkOut

Default value: "01" (switch to "uncleaned" status after check-out)

NUMBERING PLANS
Room Status

The "Room Status" feature in the internal numbering plan allows you to define the "Room Status" prefix
for the installation.

- To create the "Room Status" prefix:

- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> IntNum -> RoomS feature
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Internal Numbering Plan -> Room Status fea-
ture

DND override

The "DND Override" feature in the "features in conversation" table serves to define the suffix for acces-
sing the "DND Override" service.

- To create the "DND Override" service:

- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> Code -> Funct -> DND Override
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> FAC Numbering Plan -> DND Override

VisFr (DDI Deallocated)

The "DDI Deallocated" feature of the DDI numbering plan groups together all the DDI numbers assi-
gned to the rooms in the hotel. The feature's base is 9. 9.

- To assign the DDI nºs to the Reception set:

- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> PubNum -> VisFr feature -> enter all the numbers in Begin and
End, enter 9 in Base
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Public Numbering Plan -> Guest DDI deallo-
cated feature -> enter all the numbers in Start and End, enter 9 in Base

Remarques :

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/18

CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : HOTEL

- a DDI nº allocated to a room at check-in automatically switches from "DDI Deallocated" to "DDI
Allocated"
- likewise, a DDI nº which is no longer assigned to a room at check- out automatically returns to its
initial function, "DDI Deallocated". This mechanism allows you to route all the DDI calls for free
rooms to the Reception set.

VisAl (DDI Allocated)

The "VisAl (DDI Allocated)" function in the DDI numbering plan adds a DDI nº to all the DDI nºs which
are reserved for rooms and assign it directly to a room.

- To add a room DDI nº:

- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> PubNum -> VisAl feature-> enter the DDI number in Begin and
End, enter the directory nº of the room in Base
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Public Numbering Plan -> Guest DDI allocated
feature -> enter the DDI number in Start and End, enter the directory nº of the room in Base

Notas :

As the previous note states, this DDI nº will automatically switch to "DDI Deallocated" on check-out. It
will thus rejoin all the DDI nºs reserved for rooms.

10/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : HOTEL CONFIGURATION

METERING
Room Status Tickets

This feature allows you to define whether a "Room Status Ticket" or "Statement" should be printed auto-
matically when a room changes status.

- To select whether or not to print out a "Room Status Ticket" or "Statement" automatically:
- by MMC-Station: Meter -> Ticket -> List -> select RST for automatic printout or rst for no prin-
tout
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Hotel -> Metering -> select Print
Room Status Ticket... for automatic printout

Default value: rst (no automatic printout)

A "Room Status Ticket" or "Statement" includes:

- the room nº
- the date and time of the status change
- the "Room status change" label
- a value (1 to 4 digits) representing the room status (free or occupied, problem nº)
- the name of the guest

Notas :

The Hotel application allows you to:

- program a precise time at which all rooms (or only those which are occupied) switch automatically
to the "uncleaned" status,
- automatic switching, after check-out, of a room to "uncleaned" status.

These two operations do not involve the transmission of a "Room Status Ticket" or "Statement".

Conclusion String

This feature allows you to enter a thank-you message of up to 40 characters printed at the bottom of
the "Guest Global Bill Ticket" or the "Guest Information Ticket".

- To enter the thank-you message:

- by MMC-Station: Meter -> Ticket -> Conclu
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Hotel -> Metering -> Guest Ticket
Footnote

Default value: THANKS FOR COMING

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/18

CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : HOTEL

VAT

This feature allows you to enter the VAT rate to calculate the cost of communications.

The total VAT as well as the VAT rate are printed on the "Guest Global Bill Ticket", the "Phone Booth
Bill" and the "Guest Information Ticket".

Notas :

The Hotel application also allows you to program the VAT.

- To program the VAT rate:
- by MMC-Station: Meter -> Param1 -> VAT
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Administration -> Hotel -> Metering -> Value Added Tax

Default value: depends on the country

Visit: cost of the guest communication without VAT

First, the "Visit" feature enables the system to calculate the cost of communications (without VAT) made
from the "Guest" or "Booth" sets in the installation.

Three basic metering and two cost thresholds can be programmed.

- To enter the first, second and third basic metering values:

- by MMC-Station: Meter -> Visit -> Cost -> assign a value (integers then decimals) to Cost1 ,
Cost2 and Cost3
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Hotel -> Metering -> assign a value
(integers then decimals) to Charge Rate 1 , Charge Rate 2 and Charge Rate 3

- To enter the first and second thresholds used for the 2nd and 3rd basic metering values:
- by MMC-Station: Meter -> Visit -> UnitTh -> assign a value (in minutes) to Unit1T and Unit2T
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Hotel -> Metering -> assign a value
(in minutes) to Threshold 1 and Threshold 2

With the "Visit" feature you can now assign a surcharge to communications set up by the operator and
transferred to "Guest" and "Phonebooth" sets.

- To enter the surcharge:

- by MMC-Station: Meter -> Visit -> Cost -> assign a value (integers then decimals) to Ovload
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Hotel -> Metering -> assign a value
(integers then decimals) to Additional Services

Finally, the "Visit" feature allows you to cut off the active (metered) communication and prohibit other
communications when a guest's overall communication cost reaches the prepayment total.

- To cut off the active communication:

12/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : HOTEL CONFIGURATION

- by MMC-Station: Meter -> Visit -> UnitTh -> assign a value (number of pulses) other than 0
to activate the mechanism in Beep
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): System Miscellaneous -> Hotel -> Metering -> select Cut if pre-
payment consumed to activate the mechanism, select a value (number of pulses) in Beep at
credit threshold

Using the feature:

The system converts the guest's prepayment total into meter pulses (metering credit). When the mete-
ring credit reaches the value programmed in "Beep ", the system transmits a sound signal (succession
of beeps) to the guest, for each pulse received.

When the metering credit is exhausted, the communication is cut off.

Default value:

- COST1, COST2 and COST3 = 0

- THRESHOLD1 and THRESHOLD2 = 0
- OVERLOAD = 0
- BEEP THRESHOLD = 0 (no communication cut off)

PRINTING THE GUEST'S TICKET AUTOMATICALLY

The automatic print of the "Guest Information Ticket" after the guest has checked in or the "Guest Glo-
bal Bill Ticket" after check-out can be deleted.

- Inhibiting the automatic print mechanism:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Admin -> Hotel -> Parameters -> deselect Print Check-In/
Check-Out Ticket

Notas :

It is always possible to print the tickets manually with the hotel application.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/18

CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : HOTEL

CUSTOMIZING THE CONFIGURATION SCREENS

The application requires a customized configuration, dedicated to the environment in which it is situa-
ted, in order to present the check-in screens, the guest consultation screens and the check-out screens
as well as to calculate the cost of communications and activate the default features.

The application is customized using the default screens, which must be configured. These screens are
accessible from Reception sets with a "Hotel" key or through MMC-PM5 (Expert View).

Notas :

Only programming which is done via a terminal is presented in this document. In MMC-PM5 (Expert
View), the relevant data are proposed when you select System Miscellaneous -> Hotel -> Parame-
ters or Metering.
- To configure the default screens:
- Reception set: Hotel key -> DEFVAL

The display presents the following flowchart menu.

HOTEL KEY DEFVAL WAKEUP Wake-up time

DDI Allocating a DDI number

LANG Default language
DEPOSI Metering credit
BARRIN Room set barring
MONEY Local currency
DND Activate Do Not Disturb function
EXTIME Quit the application
VAT VAT rate
CHECIN Check-in chain
Wake-up time - WAKEUP
This feature allows you to choose whether or not to define a default time for a wake-up call.

Enter 06: 45 for example, or press CLEAR --: -- so as not to have a default wake-up call.
Validate.

Allocating a DDI number - DDI

This feature allows you to allocate a DDI nº by default.

Press CHOICE to select "DDI ALLOCATION BY DEFAULT" or "NO DDI BY DEFAULT". Validate.

14/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : HOTEL CONFIGURATION

Default language - LANG

This feature allows you to select a language by default.

Press CHOICE to select one of the languages offered. Validate.

Note: the language is automatically assigned to the guest's voice mail box and set (if it has a display).

Metering credit - DEPOSI

This feature allows you to choose whether or not to activate the "prepayment request" (metering credit)
menu and enter a total corresponding to a default prepayment.

Enter a total or press CLEAR to inhibit the menu. Validate.

Notas :

When the menu is activated, a line reserved for the prepayment total is printed on the "Guest Global
Bill Ticket" and on the "Guest Information Ticket".

Room set barring - BARRIN

This feature allows you to define a default barring for room sets.

Press CHOICE to select "INTERNATIONAL", " NATIONAL", "LOCAL" or "NO EXTERNAL". Validate.

Notas :

By MMC-PM5, under System Miscellaneous -> Hotel -> Parameters, the default barring on room
sets takes the values 1 for "INTERNAL", 2 for "CITY", 3 for "NATIONAL" or 4 for "INTERNATIONAL"

Local currency - MONEY

This feature allows you to enter the country's monetary unit.

Enter EUR for example. Validate.

Notas :

The monetary unit is printed on the "Phone Booth Bill", the "Guest Global Bill Ticket" and on the "Guest
Information Ticket".

Activate Do Not Disturb function - DND

This feature allows you to activate or deactivate the Do Not Disturb feature by default.

Press CHOICE to select "ACTIVE" or "INACTIVE". Validate.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/18

CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : HOTEL

Quit the application - EXTIME

This feature enables the Reception set to exit the Hotel application automatically if no action is carried
out during the set time.

Enter 20 (minutes) for example. Validate.

VAT rate - VAT

This feature allows you to enter the country's VAT rate.

Enter 20.60 for example. Validate.

Notas :

The cost of communications with VAT, the total VAT, and the VAT rate are printed on the "Phone Booth
Bill", the "Guest Global Bill Ticket" and the "Guest Information Ticket".

Check-in chain - CHECIN

This feature allows you to program the order in which six consultation screens – the ones most often
used during check-in – appear (maximum of six from a choice of eight).

Position yourself on the field to be modified using NEXT or PREV then press CHOICE to select "DEPOSIT",
"NAME", "WAKEUP", "DND", "LANGUAGE", "DDI", "BARRING", "PASSWORD" or "__" (no screen). Vali-
date.

Notas :

The consultation screens which are not selected remain accessible at the end of check-in.

16/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

CALL SERVER : HOTEL CONFIGURATION

CONFIGURING ROOM STATUS

Configuring room status allows you to define whether all the rooms, or only those which are occupied,
switch manually or automatically (at a programmed time) to "UNCLEANED" status.

- To enter the Room Status menu:

- Reception set: Hotel key -> Status -> Global

The display below shows the possible functions.

All busy rooms Unclean at 07:30

Return Rooms Now Time Apply

The first line of the screen recalls the configuration of the Room Status which may be as follows: Only
occupied rooms switch to "Uncleaned" status at 7:30

Rooms concerned- ROOMS

This feature allows you to define the rooms which will switch to "UNCLEANED" status.

Press ROOMS to select "ALL BUSY ROOMS" or "ALL ROOMS". Validate.

Conditions - NOW, TIME

This feature allows you to define whether the rooms concerned (those in the "ROOMS" menu) switch
to "UNCLEANED" status automatically or manually.

- Manual switch, press NOW

- Automatic switch, press TIME then enter 06: 30 for example, or press CLEAR --: -- to cancel the
time. Validate.
Validate the operation.

Notas :

The feature is activated either immediately (manual mode), or at the time defined by the settings (auto-
matic mode).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/18

CONFIGURATION CALL SERVER : HOTEL

18/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

CALL SERVER : HOTEL RECEPTION SET FEATURES

File
RECEPTION SET FEATURES
3

The Hotel application is the direct interface between the guest and Reception. It manages a range of
services such as check-in, room consultation (message, prepayment deposit, etc), check-out and room
status.

The application is accessible on the Reception set (set equipped with a Hotel key) whether it be free, in
communication or ringing.

CHECK-IN

- To select a free, cleaned room:

- Reception set: Hotel key -> RSL key or directory nº of the room

Depending on how the programmed consultation screens are chained, you must:

- fill in the "empty" fields (the NAME of the guest for example)
- modify the fields which do not correspond to the default values (the LANGUAGE for example)
- validate all the check-in screens as and when they are presented.

Validating the last consultation screen is equivalent to exiting CHECK-IN; the room is considered oc-
cupied, and a "Guest Information Ticket" is printed automatically.

Below are the screens which correspond to check-in (maximum of six screens from a choice of eight):

- Deposit: deposit total (metering credit) or select NOPREP (no prepayment)

- Guest name: guest name (10 characters maximum)
- Wake-up time: wake-up time or select CLEAR : no alarm
- DND Status : to activate (DND) or deactivate (dnd) the "Do Not Disturb" function
- Language : choice of language
- DDI number: allocation of a DDI Nº, select CHOICE to allocate a new one
- External calls: line barring, select CHOICE to allocate a new one
- Password: allocation of a password, select CHOICE to allocate a new one

Notas :

All the consultation screens, including those not selected, are grouped together in the room consulta-
tion screens once the check-in is completed.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/12

RECEPTION SET FEATURES CALL SERVER : HOTEL

ROOM CONSULTATION

The application allows you to consult and modify a guest's data.

- Select an occupied room:

- Reception set: Hotel key -> RSL key or directory nº of the room

Notas :

To exit the application, press the Release key F F.

To consult another room without quitting the application, select an RSL key or enter a directory nº .

The display presents the guest data for the selected room. The data is displayed over three screens.

Torelli It 07:30 dnd + 7 EUR 211

Print WakeUP DND Deposi CheOut >
Torelli It 07:30 dnd + 7 EUR 211

< Name Lang Messag DDINum Barrng >

Torelli It 07:30 dnd + 7 EUR 211

< Passwd

The first line of each screen gives:

- the name of the guest

- the guest's language
- the guest's wake-up call time (if programmed) and warning of any problem with the wake-up call
- the guest's DND (do not disturb) feature status
- the guest's prepayment status (signs + for "credit" and - for "debit") and the monetary unit used
- the segment , off or lit, representing the guest's mail status (text mail, voice mail and Reception
call-back request)
- the directory number of the room

The second line of each display enables Reception to consult and/or modify guest data, or to print out
an information ticket.

2/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : HOTEL RECEPTION SET FEATURES

Print guest information ticket - PRINT

Press PRINT to print out the "Guest Information Ticket" which includes:

- the name of the guest

- the room nº
- the language
- the password
- the DDI nº
- the barring status
- the guest's overall deposit total (metering credit)
- the total remaining to be paid by the guest (debit) or to be reimbursed by the hotel (credit); total of
the deposit paid minus the cost of the communications
- the VAT rate and the total VAT corresponding to the cost of the communications
- the number of communications made
- the active or inactive status of the DND feature
- the guest's mail status (messages present or not: text, voice and Reception call-back request)

Wake-up call time and status - WAKEUP

WAKEUP allows you to read and modify the guest's wake-up call time and consult the guest's wake-up
call status.

Reading the wake-up call time:

The room consultation screen allows you to read the guest's wake-up alarm time.

Modifying the time:

Press WAKEUP. Enter 06: 45 for example or press CLEAR --: -- so as not to have an alarm. Validate.

Consultation of the alarm status, several choices are possible:

- LEFT-HAND SEGMENT OF THE ROOM RSL KEY

On the add-on module for example, the left-hand segment of a flashing room RSL key signals an
undefined problem with the wake-up alarm.
- ROOM OCCUPATION SCREEN
The consultation screen of a room signals whether a wake-up time is programmed or whether there
is an undefined problem with the wake-up call. Example:
- 06: 45: programmed wake-up time; wake-up time active if : (colon) flashes
- 06: 45: programmed wake-up time; wake-up time inactive if no character flashes
- --: --: no programmed wake-up time (problem with wake-up call if all segments flash)
- 06: 45: programmed wake-up time and problem with wake-up call if all characters flash

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/12

RECEPTION SET FEATURES CALL SERVER : HOTEL

- WAKE-UP CALL STATUS

Press WAKEUP; the wake-up call status will then be one of the following:
- active: the wake-up call is active
- --- (inactive): the wake-up call is inactive
- busy: problem – the set was busy during the three attempts
- unanswered: problem – the set did not answer during the three attempts
- inaccessible: problem – the set was inaccessible during the three attempts
- WAKE-UP CALL
In the case of a wake-up problem, the system alerts Reception by sending a message and a ringing
tone to the set, repeated approximately every 30 seconds.

Do Not Disturb - DND

This feature allows you to read the status of the guest's DND feature and modify it.

Reading the status of the DND (Do Not Disturb) feature:

The room consultation screen allows you to read the DND status directly:

- DND: feature active

- dnd: feature inactive

Modifying the DND feature:

Press DND -> CHOICE to select "ACTIVE" or "INACTIVE". Validate.

Metering credit - DEPOSI

This feature allows you to read the guest's credit (after calculation of the cost of the guest's communi-
cations) and to enter the amount of a new deposit.

Guest credit (with use of metering credit only):

The room consultation screen allows you to read the guest's account. It is either:

- + xxxxx EUR: positive (in credit)

- - xxxxx EUR: negative (in debit)

Amount of a new deposit (with use of metering credit only):

Press DEPOSI and enter a new amount.

Validate the operation; the system recalculates the total deposit and the remaining credit.

Checking out a guest - CHEOUT

See "Guest Check-out ".

4/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : HOTEL RECEPTION SET FEATURES

Guest name - NAME

This feature allows you to read the name of the guest and modify it.

Reading the name:

The room consultation screen allows you to read the name of the guest.

Modifying the name:

Press NAME and modify the name (10 characters maximum); validate the operation.

Guest language - LANG

This feature allows you to read the guest's language and modify it.

Reading the language:

The room consultation screen allows you to read the guest's language.

Modifying the language:

Press LANG -> CHOICE to select one of the languages offered. Validate.

Note: the language is automatically assigned to the guest's voice mail box and set (if it has a display).

Voice mail status - MESSAG

This feature allows you to read the guest's message status (message left or not), it enables the operator
to leave the guest a call-back request (activation of the message LED) and find out the type of mes-
sage left for this guest (operator call-back, voice mail or text mail).

Reading the guest's mail:

The room consultation screen allows you to find out whether a message has been left for the guest.
To the right of the display and before the room nº, a segment provides information on this status:

- at least one message is waiting for the guest:

- no message is waiting for the guest:

Operator call-back request:

The operator can leave a call-back request on the guest's set. Press MESSAG -> CHOICE to:

- activate a call-back request:

- cancel the call-back request:

Validate the operation.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/12

RECEPTION SET FEATURES CALL SERVER : HOTEL

Reading the type of message left:

The operator can find out the type (voice or text message) of message left for the guest.

Press MESSAG and analyze the display according to the headers presented:
- OPERATOR: operator call-back request: or no call-back:
- VOICE: voice message waiting: or no message:
- TEXT : text message waiting: or no message:

Guest DDI number - DDINUM

This feature allows you to read the guest's DDI nºand select another one.

Reading the DDI nº:

Press DDINUM , the screen displays the guest's DDI nº.

Selecting another DDI nº for the guest:

Press DDINUM -> CHOICE , the system allocates another DDI nº. Validate.

Barring - BARRNG
This feature allows you to read and modify the barring for the guest's set.

Reading the barring:

Press , the screen displays the guest's barring level.

BARRNG

Modifying the barring:

Press BARRNG -> CHOICE to select "INTERNATIONAL", " NATIONAL", "LOCAL" or "NO EXTERNAL". Validate.

Guest password - PASSWD

This feature allows you to read the guest's password and select another.

Reading the password:

Press PASSWD , the screen displays the guest's password.

Selecting another password:

Press PASSWD -> CHOICE , the system assigns another password. Validate.

Note: The password is automatically assigned to the guest's voice mail box and set. The guest can use
it to:
- lock the set (block outside calls)
- make calls using a protected account code (with or without substitution)
- read his or her voice mail remotely

6/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : HOTEL RECEPTION SET FEATURES

CHECK-OUT

The application allows you to free a room.

- Select an occupied room then the Check-out menu:

- Reception set: Hotel key -> RSL key or directory nº of the room -> CheOut menu

The following appears on the display:

Torelli It + 7 EUR 211

Print PreOut CheOut

The first line shows:

- the name of the guest

- the guest's language
- the guest's prepayment status (signs " +"for credit and " -" for debit) and the monetary unit used
- the directory number of the room

The second line enables Reception to print out an information ticket and perform "Pre-checkout" as well
as Check-Out.

Print out a guest's telephone bill - PRINT

Press PRINT ; the bill indicates:

- the name of the guest

- the room nº
- the guest's total deposit (metering credit)
- the number of communications made
- the total cost of the communications
- the VAT rate and the total VAT corresponding to the cost of the communications
- the total remaining to be paid by the guest (debit) or to be reimbursed by the hotel (credit); total of
the deposit paid minus the cost of the communications

Pre-checkout of a guest - PREOUT

This feature enables a guest to settle the telephone bill the day before an early morning departure, for
example, (external outgoing calls are then no longer possible) whilst at the same time keeping the fea-
tures programmed on the phone (wake-up call, message, DDI Nº, DND, etc).

Press PRE CHECK-OUT to activate the pre-checkout features.

Caution: The pre-checkout cancels the guest's amount "Remaining to be paid", see the table below.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/12

RECEPTION SET FEATURES CALL SERVER : HOTEL

Check-out of a guest - CHEOUT

This feature enables Reception to make a room free; see the table below.

Press CHEOUT to reset the room's parameters; a "Guest Global Bill Ticket" is printed automatically.

The following table and analysis show the role of each of the features.

Wake- Messa- DND Forwar DDI Bar- Room Pas- Name Re-
up ge d allo- ring Status sword mai-
cation ning
to be
paid
Pre- / / / / / No ex- / / / ---
chec- ternal
kout call
Check- Reset 1 hour Reset Reset Reset No ex- Free / Reset Room ---
out ternal Unclea nº
call ned

Analysis of the table:

- / : this symbol means that the feature remains unchanged from the previous report.
- No external call: new room set barring. The set will return to its default configuration upon check-
in.
Active communications, ringing, calls on hold etc. are cut off immediately upon activation of "PRE-
CHECKOUT" or "CHECK-OUT".
- --- in the "Remaining to be paid" column: the total remaining to be paid by the guest (debit) or
reimbursed by the hotel (credit), resulting from the cost of the communications and the deposit gi-
ven, is erased.
The guest's call counters, partial metering counter and partial cost counter are reset only upon
check-in (input of a new guest) or by system command.
- Reset: reset of the features. The Wake-up, DND and Barring features return to their default value
upon check-in.
- 1 Hour: new messages are kept for 1 hour. Check-in resets the voice mail box.
- Free / Uncleaned: the room is assigned "Free" and "Uncleaned" status.
- Room nº: the guest name is replaced by the room number (directory update).

8/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : HOTEL RECEPTION SET FEATURES

ROOM STATUS

The Room Status feature enables:

- the Room Manager: to inform Reception of the status of rooms

- Reception to:
- find out the status of a room
- change the status of a room
- see the status of the rooms on the Reception set (segments of an RSL key)
- print a Room Status ticket or statement

Use of Room Status by the Room Manager

The Room Manager informs Reception of the status of the rooms (cleaned, uncleaned, with or without
problem) by using the room set to dial the "Room Status" code corresponding to its status.

- To enter the Room Status code for a room:

- On the room set: Room Status prefix + 0 (cleaned) or 1 (uncleaned) + if necessary, Nº of
problem (3 digits max.; enter 000 to cancel the previous problem ).

Use of Room Status by Reception

Reception enters the Room Status menu then selects "Global" or a room RSL key.

- To enter the Room Status menu:

- Reception set: Hotel key -> Status

Notas :

To exit the application, press the F F Release key.

To consult the status of another room, select an RSL key.
To return to room consultation, enter a directory nº

HOTEL KEY STATUS GLOBAL All rooms Unclean now

All busy rooms Unclean timer

RSL / ROOM Clean/Unclean

Erase problem

Read problem

Free / Busy

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/12

RECEPTION SET FEATURES CALL SERVER : HOTEL

Configuring Room Status - GLOBAL

The grayed area represents the Room Status configuration. On the use of this service to switch rooms
to "Uncleaned" status immediately or at a preset time, see "Configuring Room Status" in the "Configu-
rations" section.

ROOM STATUS – RSL KEY OR DIRECTORY Nº

The RSL key or directory nº allows you to read and modify the Room Status of a room. There is:

- its "Cleaned" or "Uncleaned" status

- its problem number, if there is indeed a problem
- its free or busy status (read only).

Reading the status of a room:

The screen displays the three types of status above.

Notas :

The CHECK-IN, PRE-CHECKOUT and CHECK-OUT operations do not reset the room problems.

Modifying room status:

- Press CLEANS to select "UNCLEANED" or "CLEANED"

- Press NOPROB to erase the problem
- Press PROBLM to enter a problem nº, 012 for example, and validate
Validate the operation.

Printout of a Room Status Ticket or Statement

A Room Status Ticket or Statement can be printed automatically when a room changes status.

Below is an example of a "Room Status Statement".

ALCATEL
USER LINE HOUR TAXES FACILITIES -- USER NAME

TYPE DATE DURATION SERV. DIALLED NUMBER --

A122 03/06/97 08:31 ROOM STATUS CHANGE 0034 TORELLI

The field ROOM STATUS CHANGE is specific and includes the following data:

- the first digit indicates the room status: 0=room CLEANED or 1=room UNCLEANED
- the other digits (3 maximum) represent the problem number, if there is one.

10/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

CALL SERVER : HOTEL RECEPTION SET FEATURES

Function of the RSL key segments

The three-segment display associated with each RSL key not only allows you to see the telephone status
(normal operation), but also provides at-a-glance information on the overall status of the room (free,
occupied, cleaned, uncleaned or problem with wake-up call or room).

To access these types of status, the set must have a Hotel key. Each segment has a function:

- the first segment (on the left-hand side) indicates the free or occupied status of the room as well as
a possible wake-up call problem
- the second segment indicates the telephone status of the room set
Note: if the segment is flashing, this indicates an internal or external call
- the third segment indicates the "cleaned" or "uncleaned" status of the room as well as a possible
problem with the room

The table below sums up this information.

Segment N°

1st segment 2nd segment 3rd segment

Status

Room free Station free Room cleaned

Not lit

Room occupied Station busy Room uncleaned

Lit

Flashing Wake-up problem Station ringing Room problem

ROOM SERVICE

To call Room Service, the user dials a number corresponding to a service (the "breakfast" service for
example). This number, recognized by the system, is assigned to the "Room Service" station on an RSD
key.

The "ROOM SERVICE" station has a display enabling the Room Service operative to read the name,
directory nº and language of the caller.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/12

RECEPTION SET FEATURES CALL SERVER : HOTEL

12/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
e-SERVER : Internet applications

SECTION

E-SERVER : INTERNET

APPLICATIONS

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

Section e-SERVER : Internet applications

GENERAL DESCRIPTION FILE 1

WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT FILE 2

USERS AND USER GROUPS FILE 3

INTERNET ACCESS FILE 4

INTRANET FILE 5

VPN FILE 6

E-MAIL FILE 7

THE WEB COMMUNICATION ASSISTANT FILE 8

CONTROL INTERNET UTILIZATION FILE 9

SECURE INTERNET ACCESS FILE 10

ANTI-VIRUS FILE 11

SECURITY FILE 12

ADMINISTRATION TOOLS FILE 13

OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL FILE 14

TROUBLESHOOTING FILE 15

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION E-SERVER : INTERNET E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

APPLICATIONS (INDEX)

Section e-SERVER : Internet applications (Index)

ADMINISTRATION TOOLS FILE 13

ANTI-VIRUS FILE 11

CONTROL INTERNET UTILIZATION FILE 9

E-MAIL FILE 7

GENERAL DESCRIPTION FILE 1

INTERNET ACCESS FILE 4

INTRANET FILE 5

OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL FILE 14

SECURE INTERNET ACCESS FILE 10

SECURITY FILE 12

THE WEB COMMUNICATION ASSISTANT FILE 8

TROUBLESHOOTING FILE 15

USERS AND USER GROUPS FILE 3

VPN FILE 6

WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT FILE 2

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS GENERAL DESCRIPTION

File
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1

INTRODUCTION

Alcatel OmniPCX Office is a voice/data convergence product intended for small and medium-sized
enterprises. Alcatel OmniPCX Office can be administered locally or remotely and can be integrated
into any LAN on a single site or a multiple site.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office is an all-in-one solution that offers a shared and secure Internet access, built-
in remote access applications, e-mail service as well as access security and control.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office allow you to manage the following elements:

- the LAN,

- client terminals (PC) that can be used to access Internet resources,

- the remote client stations that can access the LAN via a VPN or RAS.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office has a complete website to install and manage Internet access. It integrates a
TCP/IP environment. The range of services proposed for are configured by means of an Internet na-
vigator (Internet Explorer, Netscape Navigator...).

The administration tools and the integrated software programs are used to configure the network pa-
rameters (IP addresses, masks, domain names and DNS, routing tables...) corresponding to the ins-
talled hardware.

This section deals successively with the environment, the hardware and the Internet services.

ENVIRONMENT

With Alcatel OmniPCX Office, several computers can be connected to the company's LAN and access
Internet services and applications through a shared Internet connection. The proposed Internet services
are available even if Internet access is not established through Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

Internet access via Alcatel OmniPCX Office

Alcatel OmniPCX Office is used to connect to the Internet by four types of access.

- ISDN
- DSL modem
- Cable Modem
- External router

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

GENERAL DESCRIPTION E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

ISDN Access

The ISDN functionality provides shared Internet access (T0 or T2) that is limited to two B channels. Con-
nection is usually by "call on demand", but can also be "permanent". The authorised bandwidth varies
between 64 Kbps and 128 Kbps.

DSL modem access

The DSL modem functionality allows connection of Alcatel OmniPCX Office to Internet via an external
DSL modem connected to the system by means of the WAN interface (second Ethernet interface of the
CPUe-1/CPUe-2 boards). The connection is "permanent" or "on demand": The authorised bandwidth
is between 64 Kbps and 2 Mbps.

Cable Modem access

The Cable Modem functionality allows connection of Alcatel OmniPCX Office to Internet via a cable
modem connected to the system by means of the WAN interface (second Ethernet interface of the
CPUe-1/CPUe-2 boards). The connection is "permanent" or "on demand": The authorized bandwidth
varies according to the IAP.

External router access

The External Router functionality uses an external router to manage the connection to the Internet. The
router is connected to Alcatel OmniPCX Office via the WAN interface (second Ethernet interface of the
CPUe-1/CPUe-2 boards). The Internet connection can be any type, e.g. ISDN, ADSL modem, cable
modem or leased line. The authorised bandwidth is between 64 Kbps and 10 Mbps.

Nota : for the description of the Alcatel OmniPCX Office sub-systems, refer to the "Hardware" sec-
tion.

Indirect Internet access

LAN server

In "LAN Server" functioning, Alcatel OmniPCX Office does not offer Internet access. When connected

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS GENERAL DESCRIPTION

to the company LAN, the LAN server offers all the services available on Alcatel OmniPCX Office, with
the exception of the firewall. Internet access is achieved through another interface.

Remarque : the configuration description can be found in the "Internet Access" file.

HARDWARE

The necessary hardware on Alcatel OmniPCX Office is:

- a CPUe-1 or CPUe-2 board.

- an ISDN T0 or T2 connection or IP connection (WAN daughter board).
- a client station connected to the LAN;
- a LAN switch (LANX8, LAN X16 or external switch).

The items required on the client terminal are:

- the latest release of the PM5 software for the administrator.

- an Internet browser: Internet Explorer (release 6 or later), Netscape Navigator (release 7 or la-
ter) or Mozilla (release 1.1 or later).

SERVICES

The services available with Alcatel OmniPCX Office Internet access depend on the hardware and
software keys purchased.

The following services are available:

- Internet Access: the system offers several possibilities for connecting to the Internet Service Provi-
der (ISP):

- Connection on demand: connection to the ISP is established on the basis of user demand (In-
ternet access, sending e-mails, etc.) and cut off when there is no more traffic. The bitrate options
are: static (64 Kbps, 128 Kbps) or dynamic (bandwidth on demand from 64 to 128 Kbps) in
the case of ISDN. For ADSL, the bitrates are different and vary according to the IAP.
- Connection on demand with callback: the IAP sends a signal to Alcatel OmniPCX Office that
establishes the connection by return. This mechanism is validated using the ISDN caller ID: only
authorized caller numbers can be called back. This type of connection must be used when im-
plementing VPN services on an ISDN link (see the "VPN" section for more details).

- Always-on connection: a permanent link to the ISP.

The authentication protocols used are PAP/CHAP (ISDN and DSL Modem/Cable Modem). In the
case of the External Router, if Alcatel OmniPCX Office does not communicate directly with the IAP.

- Connection protocol:

- ISDN: MPPP, PPP

- DSL modem: PPTP or PPPoE or IP over Ethernet
- Cable Modem: PPTP or PPPoE or IP over Ethernet

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

GENERAL DESCRIPTION E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- External router: OmniPCX Office communicates with the IAP via the external router. The proto-
col used depends on the external router.

- LAN Functions: DNS server and DHCP integrated, as well as the routing table.

- NAT: address translation is used to internally store private IP addresses and to use only one public
address.

- Protection by integrated firewall: the integrated packet filtering and IP address translation func-
tions offer protection to the LAN against the Internet.

- Antivirus: the anti-virus software protects the electronic messaging as well as the HTTP and FTP
flows. This software is hosted on a server connected to the same LAN as Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

- Access control: Alcatel OmniPCX Office offers control solutions for user access by integrated
proxy. In addition to controlling web access, it generates the associated statistics (users, protocols,
URLs, etc).

- Integrated cache: this function speeds up Internet requests, thereby reducing the cost of access to
the telephone network.

- E-mail server: enables users to have a personal e-mail address within the company. You can
create as many e-mail accounts as required, within the limits of the system itself, while optimizing
the corresponding Internet traffic. Depending on the IAP, the e-mail reception protocols are as fol-
lows:

- SMTP

- POP3

- VPN: this solution authorizes secure connections to the LAN via the Internet infrastructure. This
means distant users can benefit from all the resources on the LAN. Each VPN can manage accom-
modate several remote sites. The existing possibilities are:

- Remote access to the LAN via Internet ("Client to LAN" configuration, PPTP protocol and IPsec)

- Access between two LAN ("LAN to LAN" configuration, IPSec protocol)

- Dynamic DNS: it enables the automatic update of a domain name and a machine name when
the IAP assigns a new IP Address. This service is in particular used in the event of a permanent con-
nection (DSL Modem), to connect a remote worker to a machine with a dynamic IP Address. The
update of the association table Domain Name/IP Address is handled by an ASP.

Alcatel does not provide the list of supported ASP's. The client must contact the installer to use this
functionality.

- Web Communication Assistant: a Web application designed for Alcatel OmniPCX Office end
users to help them manage in-house corporate communication (e-mails and voice messages).

All these services are configured via a secure Web interface; Web-based Management (WBM). For
more information about WBM, refer to the "Web Based Management" section.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT

File
WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT
2

Web-Based Management (WBM) is an Alcatel OmniPCX Office Internet service administration tool.

The WBM operates with Internet Explorer (release 6 or later), Netscape Navigator (release 7 or later)
or Mozilla (release 1.1 or later). It uses a secure Web interface. The secure transfer protocol, HTTPS,
ensures the identification of the transmitter and the receiver, the integrity and the privacy of the exchan-
ged data.

WBM can be used directly via the LAN, or remotely from the WAN if this option is enabled.

WBM is an intuitive interface which simplifies navigation of the product functions. Depending on the
selected software keys, one of the following two menus is available:

- a reduced menu. This menu is available when only the RAS software key has been chosen.

- a complete menu. This menu gives access to all the Alcatel OmniPCX Office Internet services.

This section deals successively with the administration levels, the presentation of the interface and con-
necting to WBM.

ADMINISTRATION LEVELS

The WBM has two administration levels:

1. Administrator level

The administrator configures all the Alcatel OmniPCX Office Internet services.

To use the WBM at administrator level, you must log on using:

- either a user account belonging to a group that has administrator rights.

- or the default "admin" account.

2. Operator level

To facilitate Alcatel OmniPCX Office administration and enable administrators to delegate certain
tasks, the WBM can be administrated by a local administrator called an operator.

Remarque : the operator administration level is not available for the reduced menu.

To use the WBM at operator level, you must log on using:

- either a user account belonging to a group that has operator rights.

- or the default "operator" account.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

Remarque : the operator has limited rights.

What are the operator's tasks?

An operator can only manage routine tasks. S/he cannot modify service configuration.

The main tasks are:

- User management.

- Supervision of system information and statistics.

- Configuration of time ranges and the voice mail, as well as backup management.

The following table lists all the Alcatel OmniPCX Office Internet services. For each service, it indicates
whether or not the operator is authorized to configure the associated tasks via the WBM.

TASKS OPERATOR
Access to the Welcome Page Authorised
Users and users' groups
Creating users Authorised
Changing a user's properties, Authorised
Deleting one or more users Authorised
Transferring a user to a group without administrator rights Authorised
Transferring a user to a group with administrator rights Not allowed
Creating an operator Authorised
Changing properties of other operators Authorised
Deleting one or more other operators Authorised
Changing the group of another operator Authorised
Creating, changing and deleting an administrator Not allowed
Changing an administrator's group Not allowed
Creating and managing a group of users Not allowed
Changing the properties of a group of users Not allowed
Creating, modifying and deleting a group of users Not allowed
Intranet
Configuration of the intranet is not authorized
Internet Access
Configuration of Internet access is not authorized
E-mail

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT

E-mail server configuration Not allowed

Distribution list management
Adding a new mailing list Authorised
Deleting one or more mailing lists Authorised
Changing the properties of a mailing list Authorised
E-mail server functioning test Not allowed
Making Internet access secure
Managing firewall rules Not allowed
Controlling Internet use
Configuring the proxy Not allowed
URL filters management Not allowed
Time ranges management
Changing the properties of the global time range Authorised
Changing the properties of existing time ranges Authorised
Adding a time range Not allowed
Deleting a time range Not allowed
VPN
VPN configuration is not authorized
Anti-virus
Anti-virus configuration is not authorized
Security
Changing the operator password Authorised
Changing the administrator password Not allowed
Administration
Access to the dashboard Authorised
Backup Management
Backup management (program or delete a back and perform a ma- Authorised
nual backup)
Configuration of the backup system. Not allowed
Restoring a backup Not allowed
Test management Not allowed
Access to general information (software key, hardware component, configu- Not allowed
ration file and drivers)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

INTERFACE DESCRIPTION

The main characteristics of the interface are:

- The use of hyperlinks, tables, buttons and wizards,

- direct access to a contextual online help,

- verification of information prior to validation,

- the possibility of choosing the display language (French, English, German, Italian, Spanish, Portu-
guese or Dutch). The language is configured in the Web navigator.

The screens
The WBM interface contains three screen types:

1. The wizard screens

They allow rapid simple configuration of the Internet services. The administrator can access the fol-
lowing wizards:

- Connection
- User
- ACD
- E-mail
- VPN Tunnel
- VPN Customer
- Backup
- Anti-virus
- RAS

Remarque : the operator can only access the User wizard.

2. the administration screens

These screens are accessed by clicking on the corresponding hypertext link in the navigation bar.
The administration screens give access to the lists of:

- Users per group

- Connection profiles
- Time Ranges
- URL filter
- Mailing lists
- Teleworker and VPN services
- Certificates and revocation lists
- Firewall rules
- Backups performed
- System information
- Test tools
- Software keys

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT

From the administration screens you can access the configuration screens.

3. the configuration screens.

The following screens are associated with the administration screens: Users, User Groups, Con-
nection Profile, Time Range, URL Filter, Firewall Rule and Mailing List.

The following screens are used to directly configure the associated features:

- Proxy
- E-mail
- RAS
- Network
- Firewall
- Backup
- Anti-virus

Description of the configuration and administration screens

The configuration and administration screens are divided into four areas:

1. The general information banner

It is made up of the current configuration title and the other configurations that can be accessed
from this page.

2. The navigation bar

It is divided into sub-sections each representing a characteristic of Alcatel OmniPCX Office. Click
on one of the menu options to get to the appropriate configuration screen.

3. The online help

Online help can be accessed directly on the right-hand side of each screen.

4. The screen body

The screens may be a single area or offer several tabs. Click on a tab to display its content. If all
the tabs cannot be displayed on the same screen, navigation arrows can be used to move from
one tab to another. Various windows can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlinks on any given
page.

Some common actions

The following actions are common to all the screens.

To delete or move several elements in a list, use the check boxes to the left of the elements and click
on the Delete selection or Move selection button (in the middle of the screen).

To delete or add only the element corresponding to the line, click on the hypertext link Add or Delete.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

CONNECTION TO WBM

For an administrator or operator, the procedure for connecting to the WBM is as follows:

1. Open the Web navigator.

2. Enter the following address in the Address field of the Web navigator:

https://<Alcatel OmniPCX Office>/admin

where <Alcatel OmniPCX Office>is the machine's IP address or name.

You go to the Web-Based Management - Authentication page.

3. In the Administrator/operator authentication area, type in either:

- A user name belonging to a group that has administrator rights or "admin", followed by the
associated password.

- A user name belonging to a group that had operator rights or "operator" followed by the asso-
ciated password.

4. Click on Connect. Your service connection is established.

Depending on your profile (administrator or operator), the WBM Administrator Home Page or
the WBM Operator Home Page is displayed directly. It presents a summary of the system's acti-
vity.

How to disconnect
To disconnect, click onDisconnect in the navigation bar. Your connection has been deactivated.

Remarque : after 30 minutes of inactivity, disconnection is automatic.

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS USERS AND USER GROUPS

File
USERS AND USER GROUPS
3

The concepts of users, user groups and associated configurations will be treated in sequence in this
section.

WHAT IS A USER?

In Alcatel OmniPCX Office, a user is defined by a username and its associated password. The userna-
me and password are the user's ID card, which will be asked for in the following circumstances:

- By the e-mail server, in order to enable the user to collect mail from his local mailbox;

- By the proxy, if configured to require authentication (see Proxy chapter), in order to clear the user
for Internet access;

- By the PPTP server, if the user wants to access the local network via the Internet (see VPN chapter);

- For the VPN IPsec clients PPTP and IPsec on L2TP access.

- For access to the file server.

- For Intranet publication (web server).

- To access the WBM configuration tool.

- To use the Web Communication Assistant.

WHAT IS A USER GROUP?

In Alcatel OmniPCX Office, each user is associated to a group. A profile is defined for each group. A
profile is a set of privileges attributed to a group of users. The administrator may modify privileges at
any time.

There is no limit to the number of groups that an administrator can create. However, in order to sim-
plify the configuration and optimize the time, the following groups are predefined:

- administrators,
- operators,
- remote workers,
- unlimited accesses,
- professional accesses,
- free time accesses,
- without Web access.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

USERS AND USER GROUPS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

USERS AND USER GROUPS CONFIGURATION

The configuration of users and user groups involves two main tasks:

- creating users,

- creating user groups

CREATING A USER
Click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants' icons appear.

1. Click on the User's Assistant icon. The User Wizard window displays.

2. Complete the following fields:

- First name: the user's first name (optional)

- Name: the user's last name
- User name: this field is completed automatically. The user name takes the form First Na-
me.Surname. The user uses this name to log on to the Web Communication Assistant. This
name is also used to create the user's e-mail address.
- Password: the user's password
Remarque : passwords must comply with the following rules:
- comprise 6 to 8 characters
- comprise at least one upper-case letter
- comprise at least one non alphanumeric character
- Confirm Password

- Telephone number: the telephone number is used when a phone set is associated with the
user, e.g. to use the Web Communication Assistant.

3. Click on Next. A new window appears.

4. In the drop-down menu, select the group where you wish to put the new user.

5. Click on Next. The License allocation window appears.

6. Select Yes from the Web Communication Assistant drop-down menu to assign a license from
the Web Communication Assistant to the user and give him/her the right to use all the applications.
Only the right to use nomad mode requires specific activation; this is done by checking the Nomad
mode box.

7. Click on Next. The Résumé window appears, showing the user's various characteristics.

8. Click on Finish.

Remarque : depending on your system's configuration (mainly the RAS and e-mail functions), other
screens may appear in this assistant.

CREATING A USER GROUP

Click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants' icons appear.

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS USERS AND USER GROUPS

1. Click on the Group Assistant icon. The Group Wizard window is displayed.

2. In the Group propertiesfield, input the name of the group you want to create.

3. Click on Next. A new window appears.

4. In the Group rightsfield, check the box or boxes matching the rights you wish to attribute to the
group. The available choices are:

- Web site access (HTTP): this field enables Internet access control if the authentication request
function is active in the proxy (see Proxy/Cache chapter). If this box is checked, it means that
the user has access to the Web sites authorised by the proxy filters (see Proxy/Cache chapter).
Depending on the rights granted to the group to which he/she belongs, a user may or may not
access the Web sites (for more details, please refer to the "Make Internet Access More Secure"
sheet.
- File transfers (FTP): the user may transfer files. This service is available if you have chosen a
access control policy based on the groups.
- Local Mailbox: the user has a local mailbox.
- Intranet Publishing: the user may publish files on the Intranet.

- Remote Access (VPN/RAS): users can connect to Alcatel OmniPCX Office from a notebook
and establish a VPN tunnel to the local network via the Internet.

5. Click on Next. The Résumé window appears, showing the various characteristics of the user
groups you have created.

6. Click on Finish.

USERS AND USER GROUPS MANAGEMENT

The management of users and user groups involves the following tasks:

- modifying a user's properties,

- modifying user group properties,

- adding one or several users or user groups,

- deleting one or several users or user groups,

- changing one or several user groups.

In order to access the Users and Groups Managementwindow, click Users in the navigation bar.
This window comprises two areas:

• The Users List area, which shows all the defined users, sorted by group.

• The Pre-configured Groups area shows all the empty groups.

MODIFYING A USER'S PROPERTIES

1. Click the user's last name. The User Settings window displays. This page includes the following

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

USERS AND USER GROUPS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

tabs: Settings, E-mails, Vacation, Forwards, Aliases, Voice messages, Licenses, Remote Ac-
cess.

2. Click on the Settings tab. This tab allows verifying or modifying all the parameters input during a
user's creation.

Remarque : if you change this user's group, he/she inherits all the rights of the new group.

3. Click on the E-mails tab. This tab allows verifying or modifying the user's e-mail parameters.

4. Click on the Vacation tab. This tab allows inputting an absence message.

4.1. Check the Send an e-mail for vacation box to enable this service.

4.2. In the field E-mail subject, input the subject of your e-mail.

4.3. In the field E-mail content, input the content of your e-mail.

4.4. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

5. Click on the Forward tab. This tab allows inputting the e-mail addresses where the user's mail is
to be sent on; a copy can be kept at the user's base address.

5.1. In the E-mail forwarding area, check the box:

- Forward all my e-mails to activate this service.

- Keep a copy before forwarding to keep a copy at the e-mail's initial recipient.

5.2. In the Forward address area, fill in the New address field by inputting your e-mails' desti-
nation address.

5.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

6. Click on the Aliases tab. This tab allows configuring an alias. An alias is another name for the
same user (for more details, please consult the E-mail sheet).

6.1. In the Aliases area, fill in the following field:

- New Alias: allows customising the user with an alias.

6.2. Click the button Add. The new alias appears in the Existing aliases list.

6.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

Remarque : Click Delete to delete an existing alias.

7. Click on the Voice Mess. tab. This tab is used to define the method for voice message notification.

7.1. Check the Voice message notification box if you want to be notified by e-mail when you
receive a voice message.

7.2. In the Notification e-mail address field, enter the e-mail address to which the notification
e-mail should be sent.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS USERS AND USER GROUPS

7.3. Check the Attach voice message as an attachment (.WAV) box if you want the voice mes-
sage to be attached to the notification e-mail. The voice message is sent as an audio .WAV file.

8. Click on the License tab. This tab is used to assign a license from the Web Communication Assis-
tant to the user, together with the right to use nomad mode.

8.1. Select Yes from the Web Communication Assistant drop-down menu if you want to assign
the license to the user.

8.2. Check the Nomad mode box if you want to assign the right to use nomad mode.

9. Click on the Remote Access tab. This tab allows configuring a remote access.

9.1. In the Call-back area, select your call-back method. Three choices are available:

- No callback

- Dynamic

- Static

9.2. In the IP Address Allocation area, you have two choices:

- dynamic: the RAS server manages the IP address negotiation.

- Static: input the IP address associated to the user in theIP Address field.

9.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

MODIFYING A USER GROUP PROPERTIES

1. Click your choice of user group name. The Group Settings window displays. This page comprises
five tabs: Settings, Rights, Control, Alert and Voice mess.

2. Click on the Settings tab. This tab allows verifying or modifying all the parameters input during
user group creation.

3. Click on the Rights tab. This tab is used to define the user group rights. Check the Box or boxes
matching the rights you wish to attribute to the group. The available choices are:

- Access to web sites (HTTP)

- File transfer (FTP)
- Local mailboxes
- Authorise e-mail sending for vacation
- Authorise e-mail forwarding
- Intranet Web authoring
- Remote access (VPN / RAS)
- Administrator privilege
- Operator privilege
- E-mail notification of voice messages

4. Click on the Control tab. This tab is used to define the control policy relating to the user group.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

USERS AND USER GROUPS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

4.1. In the Time range selection area, select the time range assigned to the group in the Time
range drop-down menu.

4.2. In the Web site control area select the control type in the Control Policy drop-down menu,
i.e.:

- All sites except forbidden sites

- Authorized sites only
- No control

Remarque : when you select All sites except forbidden sites or Authorized sites only, you
have access to the Forbidden sites filters and Authorized sites filters lists respec-
tively. Check or uncheck the boxes to the left of the sites per your choices.

5. Click on the Alert tab. This tab allows defining the receipt policy relating to alert messages. An
alert message is sent when the space on the disk containing the e-mail exceeds the threshold value.
This value is 100 MB by default.

6. Click on the Voice Mess. tab. This tab is used to define the mode for voice message reception no-
tification.

6.1. In the E-mail notification options area, check the box or boxes corresponding to your cho-
sen notification options. The available choices are:

• Attach the voice message as an attachment (.WAV)

• Listen to the message on the phone with a hypertext link
• Automatically erase the message on the system

6.2. In the Incoming calls area, check the box or boxes corresponding to the mode for handling
incoming calls. The available choices are:

• Send an e-mail when an incoming call occurs

• Hang up incoming calls

ADDING A USER OR USER GROUP

Click Add in the user list to add a user.

Click on the Group Assistant icon to add a user group.

DELETING ONE OR SEVERAL USERS

Deleting a user or a user group

Click the corresponding Delete hypertext link.

Deleting several users or user groups

1. Select the users or user groups by checking the box preceding the user's or the user group's name.

2. Click Delete the selection.

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS USERS AND USER GROUPS

CHANGING GROUP FOR ONE OR SEVERAL USERS

1. Select users by checking the box preceding the user's name.

2. Select the user group to which they will belong from now on.

3. Click the button Move the selection.

Remarque : when a user is moved from group A to B, s/he loses the rights of group A and gains
the rights of group B.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

USERS AND USER GROUPS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS INTERNET ACCESS

File
INTERNET ACCESS
4

Setting up shared Internet access on a client station involves a number of stages:

- Installation of Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

- Creating and configuring an Internet connection

- Configuring the client station

SUBSCRIPTION TO A ISP

The essential information

A subscription with an ISP is necessary to access the Internet. After you have subscribed, the ISP sends
you back essential information for installing you Internet access. This information must be entered
when configuring Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

The information required to install the Internet access varies according to the type of connection to be
established.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/12

INTERNET ACCESS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

ISDN connection Connection DSL mo- External Router Con- LAN server
dem/Cable modem nection
User name Authentication: Router's IP address Router's IP address

Password - User name System's IP address Primary and secondary

DNS IP address or Rou-
Telephone num- - Password Network mask ter IP address
ber
IP parameters Primary and secondary
Bandwidth name server
- IP address of rou-
Connection type ter modem
- Network mask
IP address
- IP address of the
Primary and se- WAN interface
condary name
server Protocols

- IP over Ethernet
- PPTP

- PPPOE

Name server

- IP address of rou-
ter modem
- Primary DNS

- Secondary DNS

Description
All this information is described below.

- Connection account

This account is used when identifying the connection to the ISP. This account is unique, and enable
users to authenticate on connection to the access provider by entering the account name and as-
sociated password (except for External Router and LAN Server connections).

- "User name": account issued by the access provider. This account is used in the PAP/CHAP
authentication process on connection to the ISP. This account, a form of security used by the
access provider, must be entered only once in Alcatel OmniPCX Office. It must not be confused
with the user identifier and password: these are entered in the browser when requesting access
to the Web, and enable verification of the number of users with access to Internet resources.
There are two levels of authentication:

- authentication (client station) managed by Alcatel OmniPCX Office for each Internet user in
the company.

2/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS INTERNET ACCESS

- authentication (Alcatel OmniPCX Office) managed by the access provider. Internet access
is shared by all the users; This process is unique and transparent for all users.

- "Password": password associated with the connection's user name.

- Access provider's telephone number

- "Telephone number": the telephone number dialed for connection to the ISP.

- "Emergency phone number": may or may not exist, depending on the chosen access provider.
This number is used when the main number is unavailable.

- Bandwidth

The allocated bandwidth corresponds to the throughput between Alcatel OmniPCX Office and the
access provider for an ISDN type connection. The larger the bandwidth, the faster the data trans-
mission (and the greater the connection costs). Three choices are possible in the number of B chan-
nels used:

- "1 64 Kbps B channel": the connection uses a single B-channel (static mode).
- "2 128 Kbps B channels": uses two B-channels statically. This doubles the connection cost.

- "on demand (64-128 Kbits/s)": uses two B-channels dynamically. The charge rates are identical
to those for the 128 Kbps mode, but the traffic is optimized as a function of bandwidth requi-
rement. The bitrate at the ISP must correspond to 128 Kbps access. This option cannot therefore
be chosen if the connection to the access provider is set at 64 Kbps.

- Type de connection

The type of link between Alcatel OmniPCX Office and the access supplier can be established with:

- "On demand call": the channel or channels are called up in response to user demand and auto-
matically timed out when there is no more traffic. This type of connection avoids unnecessary
charges when there is no traffic.
- "Permanent": the connection between the IAP and Alcatel OmniPCX Office is permanent, it is
like using a leased line from the telephone operator.

- "Callback": this option is chosen when a client terminal outside the LAN wishes to access Alcatel
OmniPCX Office via Internet (See Section VPN). It allows Alcatel OmniPCX Office to dial auto-
matically the call number of the ISP in order to establish connection.

- IP address allocation

The IP address is allocated to Alcatel OmniPCX Office by the access provider. This address is public.
If the access provider manages the IP address negotiation, the "dynamic" option must be checked,
otherwise enter the assigned IP address. A fixed IP address is needed for always-on connections
and VPN use.

- DNS servers

This information corresponds to the IP addresses of the DNS servers on the premises of the access
provider. These servers are used to translate site names into IP addresses.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/12

INTERNET ACCESS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- "Address of primary DNS server".".

- "Address of secondary DNS server".

- Connection protocol

This information is provided by the ISP for a DSL modem/Cable Modem type connection. In this
case, a point-to-point connection is established between OmniPCX Office and the DSL modem/
Cable Modem. Two types of communication protocols are available to manage this connection.

- PPPoE: this protocol is used to send PPP packets over Ethernet. This protocol allows "permanent"
or "on-demand call" type connections.
- PPTP: this protocol consists of establishing an IP tunnel between Alcatel OmniPCX Office and
the modem. This protocol allows only "permanent" connections.

- IP over Ethernet: this protocol is used to send IP packets over Ethernet. It allows only "permanent"
connections.

- Connection properties

To define the connection parameters, the ISP gives the following elements:

- "WAN interface IP address": this is the IP address of the WAN interface. This parameter must be
consistent with the IP address of the router, the DSL Modem or the Cable Modem.
- "DSL modem/Cable modem address" or "Router address": this is the IP address of the Router,
the DSL Modem or the Cable Modem

- "Network mask": parameter determining the range of the network.

CONFIGURATION OF AN INTERNET CONNECTION

There are several ways to configure an Internet connection:

• creation of an ISDN type connection,

• creation of a DSL modem type connection,

• creation of a Cable Modem type connection,

• creation of an External Router connection,

• creation of LAN Server connection,

CREATION OF AN ISDN TYPE CONNECTION

Click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants' icons appear.

1. Click on the Connection Assistant icon. The Assistant connection window displays.

2. In the Profile identification area, fill in the following field:

- Profile name: this name identifies the new Internet connection managed by Alcatel OmniPCX

4/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS INTERNET ACCESS

Office. The profile groups together all the parameters associated with the connection. It is best
to give it a name that represents the newly created connection - the name of the access provi-
der, for example.

3. Check the Configure this profile as the active profile box if the profile you are creating is to be
active (default value).

4. Click on Next. A new window appears.

5. In the Connection type area, click ISDN.

6. Click on Next. A new window appears.

7. In the ISDN connection parameters area, fill in the following fields:

- ISP phone number: enter the telephone number dialled when connecting to the IAP. Must in-
clude any external line prefix for calling outside the company.
- ISDN bandwidth: select the bandwidth type in the drop-down menu. Three choices are pos-
sible for the number of B channels used:

- 64 kbps static (1 B channel)

- Dynamic 64/128 Kbit/s (1-2 B channels): this option must not be chosen if the connection
to the access provider is 64 Kbits/s.

- 128 kbps static (2 B channels)

- Connection mode: three choices are possible:

- Dial on demand

- Dial on demand - call-back allowed

- Permanent connection

8. Click on Next. A new window appears.

9. In the Authentication parameters area, fill in the following fields:

- Account name: enter the account name sent by the access provider.
- Password: input the password associated to the connection's account name.

- Confirm the password: enter the same password as was just entered. This confirmation filters
out typing errors.

10. Click on Next. A new window appears.

11. In the IP Address Allocation area, you have two choices:

- Dynamic Allocation: the ISP manages the IP address negotiation.

- Fixed IP address: input the IP address provided by the ISP in thePublic IP Address field.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/12

INTERNET ACCESS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

12. In the ISP's DNS area, you have two choices:

- Dynamically find the ISP DNS: the DNS resolution is automatic during connection.

- Set the ISP's DNS: input the IP address for the ISP's primary DNS in the ISP's primary DNS
field. We recommend keeping automatic DNS resolution.

13. Click on Next. The Summary window displays. This stage is used to verify the connection pro-
perties.

14. Click Finish to validate the parameters. Click Previous to return to the previous screens and mo-
dify the desired parameters.

CREATION OF A DSL MODEM/CABLE MODEM TYPE CONNECTION

Click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants' icons appear.

1. Click on the Connection Assistant icon. The "Connection Assistant" window displays.

2. In the Profile identification area, fill in the following field:

- Profile name: this name identifies the new Internet connection managed by Alcatel OmniPCX
Office. The profile groups together all the parameters associated with the connection. It is ad-
visable to enter a name that is representative of the created connection, such as the name of
the access provider.

3. Check the Configure this profile as the active profile box if the profile you are creating is to be
active.

4. Click on Next. A new window appears.

5. In the Connection type area, click DSL Modem (requires 2 Ethernet interfaces).

6. Click on Next. A new window appears.

7. In the DSL Connection Parameters area, chose the protocol used in the drop-down list Connec-
tion's Protocol:

T PPPoE (direct Ethernet connection)

7.1. In the Connection Mode field, select On Demand if your access is not permanent.

7.2. Click on Next. A new window appears.

7.3. In the Authentication parameters area, fill in the following fields:

- Account name: enter the account name sent by the access provider.

- Password: input the password associated to the connection's account name.

- Confirm the password: enter the same password as was just entered. This confirmation
filters out typing errors.

6/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS INTERNET ACCESS

7.4. Click on Next. A new window appears.

7.5. In the IP Address Allocation area, you have two choices:

- Dynamic Allocation: the ISP manages the IP address negotiation.

- Fixed IP address: enter the IP parameters supplied by the ISP.

7.6. In the ISP's DNS area, you have two choices:

- Dynamically find the ISP DNS: the DNS resolution is automatic during connection.

- Set the ISP's DNS: input the IP address for the ISP's primary DNS in the ISP's primary DNS
field. We recommend keeping automatic DNS resolution.

7.7. Click on Next. The Summary window displays. This stage is used to verify the connection
properties.

7.8. Click Finish to validate the parameters. Click Previous to return to the previous screens and
modify the desired parameters.

T PPTP (tunnelling)

7.9. Click on Next. A new window appears.

7.10. In the DSL Modem Connection area, fill in the following fields:

- WAN interface IP address: input the IP address of the WAN interface.

- IP address of the DSL modem: enter the IP address of the external modem.

- Subnet mask: enter the defined mask.

7.11. Click on Next. The Summary window displays. This stage is used to verify the connection
properties.

7.12. Click Finish to validate the parameters. Click Previous to return to the previous screens and
modify the desired parameters.

T IP over Ethernet

7.13. Click on Next. A new window appears.

7.14. In the ISP's DNS area, you have two choices:

- Dynamically find the ISP DNS: the DNS resolution is automatic during connection.

- Set the ISP's DNS: input the IP address for the ISP's primary DNS in the ISP's primary DNS
field. We recommend keeping automatic DNS resolution.

7.15. Click on Next. The Summary window displays. This stage is used to verify the connection
properties.

7.16. Click Finish to validate the parameters. Click Previous to return to the previous screens and

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/12

INTERNET ACCESS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

modify the desired parameters.

CREATION OF AN EXTERNAL ROUTER TYPE CONNECTION

Click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants' icons appear.

1. Click on the Connection Assistant icon. The "Connection Assistant" window displays.

2. In the Profile identification area, fill in the following field:

- Profile name: this name identifies the new Internet connection managed by Alcatel OmniPCX
Office. The profile groups together all the parameters associated with the connection. It is best
to give it a name that represents the newly created connection - the name of the access provi-
der, for example.

3. Check the Configure this profile as the active profile box if the profile you are creating is to be
active.

4. Click on Next. A new window appears.

5. In the IP Address Allocation area, you have two choices:

- Dynamic Allocation: the ISP manages the IP address negotiation.

- Fixed IP address: enter the IP parameters supplied by the ISP.

6. Click on Next. A new window appears.

7. In the ISP's DNS area, you have two choices:

- Dynamically find the ISP DNS: the DNS resolution is automatic during connection.

- Set the ISP's DNS: input the IP address for the ISP's primary DNS in the ISP's primary DNS
field. We recommend keeping automatic DNS resolution.

8. Click on Next. The Summary window displays. This stage is used to verify the connection proper-
ties.

9. Click Finish to validate the parameters. Click Previous to return to the previous screens and mo-
dify the desired parameters.

CREATION OF LAN SERVER CONNECTION

Click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants' icons appear.

1. Click on the Connection Assistant icon. The "Connection Assistant" window displays.

2. In the Profile identification area, fill in the following field:

- Profile name: this name identifies the new Internet connection managed by Alcatel OmniPCX
Office. The profile groups together all the parameters associated with the connection. It is best
to give it a name that represents the newly created connection - the name of the access provi-
der, for example.

8/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS INTERNET ACCESS

3. Check the Configure this profile as the active profile box if the profile you are creating is to be
active.

4. Click on Next. A new window appears.

5. In the Connection Type area, click No Direct WAN Connection (LAN Server).

6. Click on Next. A new window appears.

7. In the Default Gateway area, fill in the following field:

- Default gateway: enter the IP address of your router.

8. Click on Next. A new window appears.

9. In the ISP's DNS area, fill in the following fields:

- ISP's primary DNS: enter the IP address of the access provider's primary DNS or the router's
IP address if the access provider's DNSs are configured in the router.

- ISP's secondary DNS: enter the IP address of the access provider's secondary DNS or the rou-
ter's IP address if the access provider's DNSs are configured in the router. The configuration of
a secondary DNS server is optional.

10. Click on Next. The Summary window displays. This stage is used to verify the connection pro-
perties.

11. Click Finish to validate the parameters. Click Previous to return to the previous screens and mo-
dify the desired parameters.

To configure access to other ISP's, repeat the above procedure starting from the Assistants menu. So
it is possible to create several connections to various ISP with different types of connection.

MANAGING THE INTERNET CONNECTIONS

The management of Internet connections involves five main tasks:

- selecting the active profile,

- adding an Internet connection profile,

- deleting one or several Internet connection profiles,

- refining the Internet connection profile,

- testing the connection.

In order to access the Connections Managementwindow, click Connection in the navigation bar.
This window comprises two areas:

• The Selecting the Active Connection Profile area, which shows the active profile.

• The Connection Profiles List area, which shows the list of profiles managed by the system, as well

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/12

INTERNET ACCESS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

as the active Internet connection.

SELECTING THE ACTIVE PROFILE

1. In the Selecting the Active Connection Profile area, select the active profile in the Active Profile
drop-down list.

2. To activate the selected profile, click Apply.

3. In order to test the connection corresponding to the active profile, click Test. You access the test
screen described in the "Test the Connection" section.

ADDING A CONNECTION PROFILE

In the Connection Profiles' List area, click Add. You access the first Connection assistant screen.

DELETING ONE OR SEVERAL CONNECTION PROFILES

You can only delete an inactive connection profile.

Deleting a connection profile

In the Connection Profiles' List area, click on the Delete hypertext link corresponding to the the pro-
file you wish to delete.

Deleting several connection profiles

1. In the Connection Profiles' List area, select the profiles by checking the box next to the profile
name.

2. Click Delete the selection.

REFINING THE ACTIVE PROFILE PARAMETERS

1. In the Connection Profiles' List area, click the profile name you wish to modify. The Connection
Settings window is displayed.

Remarque : Depending on the selected connection (ISDN, DSL Modem, External Router or LAN
Server), the tabs may be different. However, you still have access to tabs relating to pro-
file, connection type, connection authentication, DNS and service quality (QoS).

2. Click on the Profile tab. This tab allows verifying or modifying the profile's characteristics.

3. Depending on the selected connection type, click the DSL or ISDN or External Router or LAN
Server tab. This tab allows modifying the connection's characteristics.

Remarque : In the DSL or ISDN tab, you may check the Allow VJ (Van Jacobson) compression
box. It corresponds to the compression of the IP headers. Check that box if the ISP sup-
ports this function.

4. Click the Authentication tab. This tab allows verifying or modifying the authentication's characte-
ristics.

10/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS INTERNET ACCESS

5. Click the IP/DNS tab. This tab allows modifying the DNS and the IP addresses' allocation charac-
teristics.

6. Click the QoS tab. This feature allows you to activate or deactivate the Quality of Service (QoS)
feature. By enabling this feature, you give priority to voice traffic on IP. The mechanism used is
based on the principles given in the Diffserv standard. The system is based on a particular value
of the "Type de service" field of the IP header of VoIP packets, which must be different from the value
of the "best effort" field so that the QoS takes it into account. For further information refer to the
on-line help. There are three possibilities:

- Click No QoS if you do not wish to enable this function.

- Click QoS with predefined bandwidth and select the value of the bandwidth of the Internet
access from the dropdown menu.

- Click QoS with configured bandwidth, if none of the predefined values is suitable, and in-
dicate the value of the bandwidth of the internet access in the field. Select the unit for the band-
width from the dropdown menu.

7. Click on Apply to validate the data or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

TESTING THE CONNECTION

Click Connection Test in the general information banner or the Test button in the Selecting the Ac-
tive Connection Profile area. The connection test runs all the stages involved in connecting to an ISP,
and gives the causes and related solutions to solve the problem if the connection fails. The following
tests are run in sequence:

- Initial state test: the system checks that the active ISP is in "Enabled" mode and that the connection
can be established in the set time ranges.

- Call to the ISP's telephone number, or ping to the DSL modem, the Cable Modem and the Router.

- Authentication check: the system tests the authentication of the login and password in accordance
with the protocol supported by the ISP (PAP/CHAP). This verification is performed during a connec-
tion using ISDN or DSL modem.

- IP address negotiation: the system sends back the IP addresses of Alcatel OmniPCX Office, and of
the router on the IAP's premises. This negotiation is tested during a connection using ISDN, DSL
Modem and Cable Modem type connection.

- Testing the remote address by pinging the ISP's router. This checks that the router is working pro-
perly.

- DNS configuration check: this test is used to verify that the DNS configuration entered in the system
is correct and, if not, it is used to dynamically locate the DNS servers present on the IAP's premises.

- Resolution of the IP address for the URL "www.ietf.org": checks that DNS resolution is working cor-
rectly.

- DNS ping: this test is carried out if DNS resolution isn't working. It ascertains whether the problem
is due to an incorrect IP address or to the DNS service itself.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/12

INTERNET ACCESS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- Ping on www.ietf.org: tests the accessibility of a site present on the Internet.

CONFIGURING THE CLIENT STATION

To be able to use Alcatel OmniPCX Office's shared Internet access, the client station must be configu-
red. Modifications have to be made to the network (TCP/IP) configuration and the browser settings.

TCP/IP configuration
Alcatel OmniPCX Office is a routing element between LAN and Internet. Alcatel OmniPCX Office needs
to be configured as the default gateway on the client station to access the Internet.

Exemple : Configuring a Windows 98 client station

- Right-click the Network neighbourhood icon, and choose the Properties option from the context
menu.

- In the Network window, double-click the TCP/IP icon under the Configuration tab.

- Enter Alcatel OmniPCX Office's IP address in the New gateway area ( Gateway tab of the TCP/
IP properties window).

- Click Add and then click OK to close the windows.

- Re-boot the client station to validate the changes.

Nota : This configuration is valid only if Alcatel OmniPCX Office is the main router in relation to
the client station. For other network configurations, contact the company's system adminis-
trator.

Configuring the web browser

The web browser has to be configured to recognize the existing LAN.

Exemple : Configuring Internet Explorer 5.0

- Run an Internet Explorer session.

- Choose Internet Options... in the Tools menu.

- Click the Connections tab of the Internet options window.

- Click LAN settings...

- Change the options in the Local network (LAN) settings window.

- Click OK to validate the changes.

Nota : If the proxy server is active on Alcatel OmniPCX Office, enter the IP address of the main
CPU, otherwise enter the IP address of the client's proxy server.

12/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS INTRANET

File
Intranet
5

An Intranet is a set of Internet services internal to a local network, i.e. accessible only from a local
network's station and hidden from the outside.

Integration of Alcatel OmniPCX Office in the LAN requires the following functions :

- management of domain names (DNS server),

- dynamic management of IP addresses (DHCP server).

Alcatel OmniPCX Office provides two services to the LAN users :

- Make accessible and publish Web pages (Web server).

- Share files between users (file server).

What follows is a general description of how these services and functions work, before dealing with
their configuration in Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

INTEGRATION FUNCTIONS

The internal network of a company, or LAN, comprises various elements such as servers, clients sta-
tions, routers, etc. To be effectively integrated into a LAN, these devices are subject to integration rules
that govern the definition of an IP address plan, the adoption of domain names and naming conven-
tions, etc.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office provides features that facilitate integration into a LAN, whatever topology it
may present. These features correspond to name management (DNS) and dynamic management of
IP addresses (DHCP server) services.

DHCP server
This server enables an IP address to be allocated dynamically on the LAN.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/10

INTRANET E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

OmniPCX
(integrated DHCP server)

Router

DHCP clients

There are two types of IP address:

- public addresses: these addresses are unique on the Internet.

- private addresses: these addresses are assigned in a LAN, recognised in the LAN, but not routed
on Internet.

Using private addresses in a LAN allows total freedom of choice in allocating addresses. A host name
can have a fixed IP address, or it can be assigned one dynamically by a DHCP server each time it con-
nects to the LAN. There are several stages in the LAN connection process (see diagram above):

1. the DHCP client connects up to the LAN, and requests an IP address allocation. This request is
made by sending out ("broadcasting") a DHCP request over the LAN.

2. the DHCP server on the LAN receives the request and allocates an available IP address from the
pre-defined range of addresses;

3. the allocated IP address is sent to the DHCP client;

4. the DHCP client accepts the IP address.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office provides DHCP server functionalities. The following parameters can be con-
figured:

- The value range of IP addresses that the DHCP can allocate. These IP addresses are allocated for
the network's computers and VoIP stations.

- The lifespan or "lease" of a dynamically allocated IP address.

When integrating into a LAN, two types of situation are encountered:

2/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS INTRANET

- A DHCP server does not exist: if a DHCP server is required, an address plan must be defined
with a range of fixed addresses for the specific network elements (servers, printers, routers, etc.)
and a range of DHCP-attributable addresses for the client stations.

- A DHCP server already exists. In this case Alcatel OmniPCX Office requires no particular DHCP
configuration.

Remarque : LANs can accommodate more than one DHCP server, so long as their IP address ran-
ges don't overlap.

DNS server
DNS servers handle the correspondence between an IP address and the host name of a machine. DNS
servers perform two main functions:

- DNS caching for the resolution of names external to the LAN.

The cache is updated whenever DNS servers other than Alcatel OmniPCX Office resolve a DNS
request. This means that if an identical request is received, it can be resolved directly by Alcatel
OmniPCX Office without calling on the DNS servers at the ISP. The request is thus resolved faster,
with a corresponding reduction in communications costs. The Alcatel OmniPCX Office's DNS also
has a negative cache for saving name resolution failures. The lifespan of the information in the
cache is kept short so that the user can make a new attempt at resolving these names;

- Resolution of local host names with a fixed IP address on the LAN.

These names are resolved provided the elements have been entered in Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

Resolving DNS requests from client stations involves several stages (see diagram):

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/10

INTRANET E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

DNS Servers

ISP DNS Servers

OmniPCX
(integrated DNS server)

- The client station emits a DNS request (Step 1).

- The host name - DNS server IP address correspondence table is consulted (Step 2). If the host name
is found, the DNS server sends the corresponding IP address back to the client station (Step 3). If
not, the request is relayed to the ISP's DNS servers (Step 4).

- The ISP's DNS servers are consulted. If the request is resolved, the servers send the corresponding
IP address back to the DNS server on the LAN (Step 6). The LAN DNS server updates the DNS cache
to take account of the request (Step 7), and proceeds from Step 3.

- If the request can't be resolved by the ISP's DNS servers, it is relayed to other DNSs on the Internet
(Step 8). At this stage, the request is continuously relayed until a DNS server manages to resolve
the host name (Step 9). The resolved IP address is then returned to the ISP's servers (Step 10), from
whence it follows the same route as before.

LAN SERVICES

Alcatel OmniPCX Office provides two services to LAN users: a Web server and a file server.

Web Server
With its integrated Web server, Alcatel OmniPCX Office provides Intranet Web server functionality on
the LAN. Only LAN elements have access to the Web server.

The two Intranet Web server functions are:

4/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS INTRANET

1. Allow access, for all LAN users, to the previously stored Web pages.

2. Publish, for the privileged users, static pages or pictures.

The Web pages comprise text files and picture files. To publish them, the Web pages text files must be
transferred to the appropriate directories or files on the Web server. Three protocols are used:

- FTP (File Transfer Protocol): this protocol is used to transfer text files.

- CIFS (Common Internet File System): if you use the Windows systems' network neighbourhood.

- WebDAV (Web-Based Distributed Authoring and Versioning). This is an extension of the HTTP pro-
tocol that allows users to edit and manage collaborative files on Web sites. WebDAV is an IETF
proposal for a standard (RFC 2518). Most Web sites' management tools are compatible with Web-
DAV. Under Windows, WebDAV is available through the "Web Folders". Contrary to FTP or CIFS,
WebDAV manages file locks in order to avoid publishing conflicts between users.

The usual publishing tools such as Microsoft Office Frontpage, Adobe Golive or Macromedia Dream-
weaver support these three protocols.

File server
A file server allows saving users' files on the local network and sharing them between users.

The main features of a file server include:

- centralized management of files,

- information sharing,

- private access to information from any LAN station.

The file server uses the CIFS protocol. With this protocol, a user is able to find one or several files on
the network and to read or edit them. Editing is possible only if the file is not already open by another
user.

INSTALLATION GUIDE

1. Connect the CPU card using an Ethernet cable:

- Either to an available RJ45 socket on the company LAN;

- Or to the internal switch in the Alcatel OmniPCX Office cabinet. This switch can then be con-
nected to another switch if Alcatel OmniPCX Office has several switches.

2. If necessary, change the default IP addresses (192.168.92.246 for CPUe-1) and the mask of the
sub-network to IP addresses that are compatible with the existing LAN (for more information, con-
tact the company's network and system administrator). The IP addresses of the different cards can
be accessed through the heading PM5 -> PCX Client -> Hardware and limits-> IP cards.

3. Internet access configuration:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/10

INTRANET E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- Either via the Internet navigator of a customer terminal connected to the LAN by entering the IP
address of the CPU Main or CoCPU@ card in the address bar.

- Or via the PM5 software, from the PM5 -> PCX Client -> Internet access configuration me-
nu.

INTRANET CONFIGURATION

To configure the Intranet, click on Network in the navigation bar. The Network Parameters window
displays. This window has the following tabs:

- Intranet
- DNS
- DHCP
- Routing Table
- Dynamic DNS

1. Click on the Intranet tab. This tab displays the required information to publish on the Intranet site
and to share files using Microsoft's network neighbourhood.

1.1. In the Network Information area, fill in the following fields:

- Host name of this system: give it a name to personalise it. The default setting is iaccess.

- Workgroup or domain: allows your server to be integrated in a Microsoft network.

- WINS Server: if your network is equipped with a WINS server, you can indicate its name.
With this server, you can save domain names and therefore save the file server.

1.2. In the Intranet Publishing area, choose the publishing protocol (with or without file locking
mechanism) that you wish to use to publish Web pages on your Intranet:

- FTP and CIF (no locking mechanism)

- WebDAV (locking mechanism)

1.3. In the Intranet Web site / file server area, two hypertext links provide access to the Intranet
server's Web pages or to the file server's files.

1.4. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

2. Click on the DNS tab. This tab displays the required information to configure your DNS server.

2.1. In the DNS area, fill in the following field:

- DNS Domain Name: input the internal domain name used on the LAN. The default setting
is company.world.

2.2. In the New association name / IP addressarea, you may add an entry in the associations'
list. This list includes all the host names on the LAN with a corresponding fixed IP address. Each

6/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS INTRANET

new element entered with its IP address and host name will be added to the Alcatel OmniPCX
Office DNS table. To add an entry, fill in the following fields:

- IP Address: fixed IP address of the host on the LAN.

- Name: name associated to this IP address.

Then, click on Add. The new configured element is added to the associations already defined.
Repeat the operation as many times as there are associations to define. The new validated as-
sociations name / IP address can then be deleted by clicking Delete.

Important : This list includes all the LAN hosts, except the DHCP clients.

2.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

3. Click on the DHCP tab. This tab displays the required information to configure your DHCP server
and define the ranges of IP addresses.

3.1. In the DHCP area, fill in the following field:

- DHCP lease time: the lapse of time after which an IP address allocated to a DHCP client
that logs off is made available to another DHCP client. The shorter the lease time, the easier
it will be to redistribute the IP address pool dynamically to the client stations.

3.2. In the New IP address rangearea, you may add an entry in the list of IP address ranges
allocated to the LAN elements. These ranges are defined by a "begin" IP address and an "end"
IP address. They are allocated to the computers, IP phone terminals and VPN clients. To add
an entry, fill in the following fields as required:

- Begin IP range: Input the range's beginning IP address.

- End IP range: Input the range's ending IP address.

- Type of range: select a range type in the drop-down list. Two choices are possible:

• Computer: for attribution to PCs.

• VoIP Stations: for IP telephone sets

Click Add to validate. The newly configured range is added to those already defined; Repeat
the operation as many times as there are ranges to define. After validation, ranges can be de-
leted by clicking Delete.

3.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

4. Click on the Routing Table tab. This tab displays the required information to configure Alcatel
OmniPCX Office's routing table.

4.1. In the Routing Tablearea, you may add an entry in the list of routes defined on your network.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/10

INTRANET E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

This routing table allows Alcatel OmniPCX Office to rout the various IP packets it receives to-
wards their respective destinations (server or router in the LAN, PC, etc.). To add an entry, fill
in the following fields:

- Destination: input the destination's IP address after applying the subnet mask.

- Subnet mask: input the subnet mask associated to the destination's address.

- Gateway: input the gateway's IP to be contacted in order to reach the destination's IP ad-
dress.

- Access type: LAN only.

- Comment: comment for identifying the route entered.

Click Add to validate. The newly configured route is added to those already defined. Repeat
the operation as many times as there are ranges to define. After validation, ranges can be de-
leted by clicking Delete.

4.2. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

Exemple : Configuration of the routing table with three subnets present on the LAN.

Router 1
Sub-network 155.132.3.X

Sub-network 155.132.2.X

Router 2

Sub-network 155.132.1.X

ISP

OmniPCX

In the architecture corresponding to the diagram above, routers 1 and 2 must be entered into
the Alcatel OmniPCX Office routing table in order to reroute to the LAN the requests for desti-
nations other than the Internet. Two entries should thus be added to the "Additional Routes" ta-
ble:

- One route for the 155.132.2.0 subnet with the following entries: 155.132.2.0 (Destination),
router 2 IP address (Gateway), 255.255.255.0 (Mask).

8/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS INTRANET

- One route for the 155.132.3.0 subnet with the following entries: 155.132.3.0 (Destination),
router 1 IP address (Gateway), 255.255.255.0 (Mask).

5. Click on the Dynamic DNS tab. This tab displays the required information to configure your Dy-
namic DNS.

5.1. In the Choice of current ASP area, select the ASP profile you wish to use in the drop-down
list. Three types of operation are possible:

- If you select an ASP profile, the field Current ASP Parameters must be filled in.

- If you select Generic, the field Generic ASP Parameters must be filled in.

- If you select None, no field displays.

5.2. In the Current ASP Parameters area, fill in the following fields:

- Domain Name: input the domain name registered with the ASP.

- Account Name: input the account name provided by the ASP.

- Password: input the password provided by the ASP.

- Confirm the password.

5.3. In the Generic ASP Parameters area, fill in the following field:

- URL: The generic ASP uses our standard method to update the host's IP address. The update
requests are sent back to the inputted URL.

5.4. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

CONFIGURING THE CLIENT STATION

To bring in the Alcatel OmniPCX Office's LAN services, you have to change the TCP/IP configuration
on the client stations. at two levels:

- reconfiguration as DHCP client.

This is only necessary where there was no DHCP server on the LAN beforehand and Alcatel Om-
niPCX Office is configured as a DHCP server. If the client station keeps a fixed IP address, then the
Alcatel OmniPCX Office's IP address must be entered as the default gateway.

- Insertion of the domain name and of the Alcatel OmniPCX Office's IP address as the DNS service.

Exemple : Configuring a Windows XP client station

1. In the control panel, click on the Network Connections icon.

2. Right-click on Local Network Connection .

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/10

 INTRANET E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

3. Choose Properties from the context-sensitive menu that pops up.

4. Double-click on Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

5. Modify the settings as shown below.

6. Close the windows by clicking OK .

7. Reboot the computer to register the modifications.

Check this
option if the station
is a DHCP client

Enter the IP address of

Alcatel OmniPCX Office

Enter the IP address of

Alcatel OmniPCX Office

10/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS VPN

File
VPN
6

OUTLINE

A virtual private network (VPN)is an extension to a private network incorporating one or more public
network links such as the Internet. These links conserve the characteristics of a private point-to-point
link by encapsulating data by means of tunneling protocols. Authentication methods are used to main-
tain the security of the private network. The confidentiality of the data carried by these links is guaran-
teed by ciphering methods. The idea behind VPNs is to offer companies exactly the same services as
a private link at far less cost by utilising a public infrastructure.

Alcatel OmniPCX offers two types of VPN:

- A remote-access VPN connection called "VPN Client to LAN"

- A router-to-router VPN connection called "VPN LAN to LAN"

Description
The remote user can connect up to the company LAN from fixed or mobile terminals. In this case, the
user logs on to the Internet via the nearest point of presence and requests the creation of a VPN tunnel
between his terminal and OmniPCX.

VPN Client
ISP
ISP Internet VPN
VPN ISP
Server VPN Client

Security of exchanges is insured at several levels and by several functions, such as data ciphering,
authentication at both ends and monitoring of user access to resources.

For the creation and management of a tunnel, the client and the server must implement the same pro-
tocol. Three types of protocols are supported by Alcatel OmniPCX Office:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/22

VPN E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- the PPTP protocol (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol). It is a data link layer protocol on the OSI
(Open Systems Interconnection) model.

- The L2TP protocol (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol). It is also a data link layer protocol on the OSI.

- The IPSec protocol (IP Security Protocol). It is an OSI model network layer protocol. This protocol
provides, between the client and the server (IKE), key exchange, IP packets ciphering (ESP) and data
authentication (AH and ESP) services.

When the VPN client issues a connection request, the authentication protocol, client IP address and
data ciphering method can all be negotiated with the VPN server (depending on the protocol used).

The different types of VPN client

The remote user is termed the "VPN client" and OmniPCX the "VPN server". In all cases, the user must
belong to the "Teleworkers" group or a group with "remote rights". Three types of clients are supported
by Alcatel OmniPCX Office:

- the PPTP client,

- The Microsoft IPSec client (L2TP on IPSec),

- the IPSec client.

PPTP client

The PPTP client uses the PPTP protocol to establish a VPN to its company. In this configuration, it seems
that the client belongs to the LAN.

- Authentication

The protocol proposed by Alcatel OmniPCX Office is MS-CHAP (Microsoft Challenge Handshake
Authentication Protocol) version 2. Unless the client can provide this type of authentication, con-
nection is refused.

- Client IP address

The IPCP (Internet Protocol Control Protocol) negotiation process with the VPN server allocates an
intranet IP address to the client. This address is preconfigured on Alcatel OmniPCX Office (refer to
the "Configuration" section).

- Ciphering of data

The data ciphering method used by OmniPCX is MPPE (Microsoft Point to Point Encryption) with
continuous RSA RC4 encoding and 40-bit or 128-bit ciphering keys. Connection attempts will be
rejected if the client cannot use these methods.

- Data tunneling

After data ciphering, a PPP header is added to create the PPP frame. The latter is then encapsulated
with a modified GRE header (Generic Routing Encapsulation RFC 1701 and 1702). The resulting
frame is itself encapsulated with an IP header.

2/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS VPN

Microsoft IPSec client

The Microsoft IPSec client is integrated in Windows from the XP release. For the 98, NT and Millennium
releases, the client can be downloaded from the Microsoft site. This approach makes it possible to se-
cure client/gateway remote access on the Internet by means of:

- the L2TP protocol for data tunneling,

- IPSec which guarantees confidentiality and data integrity by encrypting traffic.

The services provided by L2TP are user authentication and assignment of IP addresses to the client.
Since this protocol is based on the PPP protocol, authentication (up to user level) is ensured by the MS-
CHAP protocol (Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) and the client's IP addressing
by the IPCP protocol (Internet Protocol Control Protocol).

IPSec provides data integrity, data origin authentication and confidentiality services as defined in the
"Other IPSec client" section.

Other IPsec client

"Other IPSec client" refers to any client using IPSec for data tunneling and data ciphering. This gives
the tunnel a very high level of security.

The security services are:

• data integrity
• data origin authentication
• confidentiality

The IPsec standard defines two extensions to the IP protocol to provide these services: AH (Authentica-
tion Header) for data integrity and authentication, and ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) for data
integrity and authentication and confidentiality.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office only supports ESP. Data confidentiality is provided by the ciphering algorithms
DES, 3DES and AES. Data authentication and integrity use the algorithms HMAC-MD5 and HMAC-
SHA-1.

When the IPsec connection is established, the machines authenticate each other thanks to:

- the Pre-Shared secret key(PSK) method

- the public keys method. Using PKI (Public Key Infrastructure), public keys management system, ma-
kes the administrator's task easier (for more information, see the PKI section)

In certain cases, it is preferable to also perform an authentication of the user. To do this, Alcatel Om-
niPCX Office supports the extended authentication method (Xauth). The user must then enter his/her
user name and password.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/22

VPN E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

VPN LAN to LAN

Description
The idea behind a LAN VPN-to-LAN is to provide a secure connection between two remote sites while
using a shared or public infrastructure. It utilizes a router-to-router connection on which all packets are
encrypted and secured using negotiated methods.

Internet

I SP I P

VPN - Gateway VPN VPN - Gateway

The tunneling protocol used by Alcatel OmniPCX Office is IPSec (Internet Protocol Security, RFC 2401
2402 2406). This is a network layer protocol based on the OSI model (Open Systems Interconnection),
whose principle consists in encrypting the IP packets and then encapsulating them in an additional IP
header before sending them to an IP network.

In the case of a VPN LAN to LAN, security services offered by IPSec are the same as those presented
in the "VPN Client to LAN" section. It is important to note that Alcatel OmniPCX Office allows:

- to secure either the whole LAN or part of the LAN,

- to manually configure security profiles according to the remote entity to insure a better interopera-
bility.

SECURITY PROFILES

For all VPN connections using IPsec, the IKE protocol (Internet Key Exchange) is used to negotiate se-
curity settings, authenticate the systems and compute the data integrity and authentication keys.

The IKE protocol involves two negotiation phases that establish two Security Associations (SA). One SA
groups all the security parameters (algorithms, keys, IP addresses) protecting a given connection (for
more information, see the "Interoperability with other IPSec gateways" section). For each SA, the IKE
protocol allows a system to send several propositions to the remote entity. These proposals are com-
binations of the ciphering, hashing and key computation algorithms.

There are then two possible cases:

4/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS VPN

- the remote entity selects the first proposition that meets its criteria and the connection is established,

- no proposition is selected and the negotiation fails.

The list of propositions for both SA (ISAKMP and IPSEC SA) is stored in the user-configured security
profiles.

When configuring a VPN LAN to LAN, the administrator selects the security profile to use.

The Microsoft L2TP/IPsec clients and other IPsec clients must use the predefined profile, called "IPsec
client".

Remarque : Alcatel OmniPCX Office implements the "traversal NAT" function, which makes it possi-
ble to establish IPsec VPN's via devices that modify the systems' IP addresses. This func-
tion does not require any configuration. Detection of the NAT and negotiation of use of
this mechanism are performed automatically during establishment of the connection.

PKI MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PKIs (Public Key Infrastructure) are a public key management system used to manage important lists
of public keys and to ensure their reliability. A PKI infrastructure provides the following services:

• manufacturing of public keys,

• certification of public keys and publication of digital certificates,
• revocation of certificates,
• management of the certification function.

CERTIFICATE
On administrator demand, the certification authority issues a digital certificate associating a public key
with the identity of a user or a system. The public key on the certificate corresponds to a confidential
private key, known only to the holder of the certificate. The data encrypted with the private key can only
be decrypted by the corresponding public key, and vice-versa. This makes it possible to provide the
electronic signature service used for VPN authentication.

Certificates must be obtained during system configuration. The VPN client and the VPN server request
certification from the same certification authority. The certificates are exchanged during the IKE nego-
tiation to allow the systems to verify the remote electronic signature. If this verification is successful,
establishment of the connection is authorized.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office supports two methods for obtaining a certificate:

- The "off-line" or manual method: the certificate request is stored in a PKCS#10 format file. The
administrator must submit this file to the certification authority. The certification string containing
the CA's certificate and the system's certificate must then be imported manually into Alcatel Omni-
PCX Office.

- The "on-line" or automatic method: the SCEP protocol (Simple Certificate Enrolment Protocol) is
used to submit the certificate request to the certification authority, and the certification string is re-
covered and automatically installed.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/22

VPN E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

Regardless of the method used, the key pair is automatically generated on the system before the cer-
tificate request is sent.

Since certificates are not renewed automatically, the administrator must request a certificate again be-
fore the current certificate's period of validity ends.

Remarque : The whole of the certification string must be imported into the system. It will not be pos-
sible to verify a certificate if the certificate of an intermediate authority or the certificate
of the root CA are not found.

The certificates and keys are stored on protected files and are therefore linked to a CPU.
If the board is changed, the certificate must be requested again.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office supports certificate revocation lists (CRL). They are regularly updated by the
certification authorities and contain the list of certificates that must not be accepted (e.g. because the
holder has left the company). These lists can be imported into the system manually or automatically,
and will be scanned when a VPN is established to verify the validity of the remote system's certificate.

PKI ACCESS CONTROL LISTS (ACL)

VPN access control lists (ACL) are used for certificate-based authentification. They allow the adminis-
trator to manage authorization of access to the VPN service. This is particularly necessary in cases of
a PKI where the certification authority is used to issue certificates for several different uses (for example,
VPN or protection of e-mail), or for several enterprises (PKI managed by a services supplier). This con-
trol is not however necessary when the certification authority issues certificates only within the scope of
the enterprise and for the VPN service. In this case, verifying the validity of the certificate is sufficient.

Access control is based on filters which are applied to the Identity field of the certificate presented by
the remote access. These filters can specify all or part of a distinctive name X.500, and can be used,
for example, to authorize access only for the personnel in the Marketing Department of enterprise ABC
located in France (ou=Marketing, o=ABC, c=fr).

ACL MANAGEMENT

ACL DEFINITION

1. In order to access the ACL managementwindow, click VPN/RAS in the navigation bar. The
VPN/RAS management window opens, click on the ACL management link to display the ACL
lists.

This window shows the ACLs defined and the type of action which can be performed.

Remarque : click Delete to delete an ACL.

2. Click Add to set the parameters of a new ACL. A new window appears with the tabs Identification
and Description.

- Identification: used to give the ACL a name. This name is used by the administrator to identify
the ACL. It is taken into account by the IPSec client, or by the Tunnel configuration if authenti-
fication is certificate-based. Enter the name of the ACL.
- Description : used to define one or more filters. A filter is made up of a list of one or more

6/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS VPN

attribute/value pairs, for example "o=EnterpriseName, c=fr". Access will be authorized if the
Identity field of the certificate of the remote system contains all the attribute/value pairs speci-
fied in one of the ACL filters.

Remarque : missing attributes can be added by listing them, and then clicking Add to confirm
them.

A complete identity does not have to be specified.

Exemple : the filter "o=EnterpriseName, c=fr" will authorize access to all the certificates issued
for EnterpriseName in France, for example, certificates of which the identity is
"cn=Jean Dupont, ou=Marketing, o=EnterpriseName, c=fr" or "cn=John Smith,
ou=Research, o=EnterpriseName, c=fr".

ACL SELECTION

ACLs can be used for site-to-site tunnels and IPSec VPN clients.

Selecting an ACL for site-to-site VPN configuration

1. Click onVPN/RAS in the navigation bar.

2. In the Site-to-site IPSec tunnel, click on the name of the tunnel to be configured.

Remarque : the tunnel must be created first.

3. In the Authentification tab, click on Certificate, then select an ACL from the suggested list.

Selecting an ACL for an IPSec client VPN

1. Click onVPN/RAS in the navigation bar.

2. In the Remote access services area, click IPSec. The IPSec client parameters window appears.

Remarque : the support of IPSec VPN clients must be configured first before the parameters can
be accessed.

3. In the Authentification tab, click on Certificate, then select an ACL from the suggested list.

Remarque : all IPSec clients will share the same ACL.

CONFIGURATION

CREATING A TUNNEL
Click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants' icons appear.

1. Click on the VPN Wizard icon. The VPN Tunnel Wizard window appears.

2. Enter the name of the tunnel you are creating.

3. Click on Next. A new window appears.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/22

VPN E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

4. In the Remote Settings area, fill in the following field:

- Public IP Address: IP address provided by the remote entity.

- Remote Subnet: enter an IP address or an IP address and a subnet mask.

5. In the Security Profile area, select the required security profile in the drop-down menu.

6. Click on Next. A new window appears.

7. The Authentication Mode is used to define the authentication mode used during the data tunne-
ling. There are two possibilities:

- Pre-Shared Key (PSK). In this case, the following fields must be filled in:

- Secret key value

- Key confirmation

- Certificate

8. Click on Next. The Summary window appears, showing the various characteristics of the tunnel
you have created.

9. Click on Finish.

CONFIGURATION OF VPN CLIENT SUPPORT

Click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants' icons appear.

1. Click on the VPN Client Wizard icon. The VPN Client Wizard window appears.

2. Select the type of client you want to create, by clicking on:

- PPTP protocols to configure support for PPTP clients.

- IPSec protocols to configure support for Microsoft IPSec clients or other IPSec clients.

T Configuration of PPTP client support

1. In the New IP address range area, if no IP range is defined for the PPTP client, fill in the following
fields:

- Start of IP range: start of the IP range allocated to VPN clients.

- End of IP range: end of the IP range allocated to VPN clients.

Remarque : If a range is already created, the following window is accessed directly.

2. Click on Next. A new window appears.

3. In the Microsoft LAN integration area, if your LAN is equipped with a WINS server, enter its IP
address.

8/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS VPN

Remarque : If a WINS server address has already been configured in the system, the following
window appears directly.

4. Click on Next. The Summary window appears, showing the various characteristics of the PPTP
client you have created.

5. Click on Finish.

T Configuration of IPSec client support

In this case, you can configure:

• another single IPSec client.

• a single Microsoft IPSec client.
• a Microsoft IPsec client and another IPSec client.

1. Configuration of "other IPSec client" support

1.1. In the Supported IPSec client protocols area, check the Other IPSec clients box only.

1.2. Click on Next. A new window appears.

1.3. The Authentication Mode is used to define the authentication mode used during the data
tunneling:

- Certificate

- Pre-Shared Key (PSK). In this case, fill in the Secret Key Value and Confirm Secret Key
Value fields.

Remarque : The choice is not exclusive. You can choose one of the authentication modes or
both of them.

1.4. Click on Next. The Summary window appears, showing the various characteristics of the
other IPSec client you have created.

1.5. Click on Finish.

2. Configuration of Microsoft IPSec client support

2.1. In the Supported IPSec client protocols area, check the Microsoft IPSec client (L2TP over
IPSec) box only.

2.2. In the New IP address range area, if no IP range is defined for the other Microsoft IPSec
client client, fill in the following fields:

- Start of IP range: start of the IP range allocated to VPN clients.

- End of IP range: end of the IP range allocated to VPN clients.

Remarque : If a range is already created, the following window is accessed directly.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/22

VPN E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

2.3. Click on Next. A new window appears.

2.4. In the Microsoft LAN integration area, if your LAN is equipped with a WINS server, enter its
IP address.

Remarque : If a WINS server address has already been configured in the system, the following
window appears directly.

2.5. Click on Next. A new window appears.

2.6. The Authentication Mode is used to define the authentication mode used during the data
tunneling:

- Certificate

- Pre-Shared Key (PSK). In this case, fill in the Secret Key Value and Confirm Secret Key
Value fields.

Remarque : The choice is not exclusive. You can choose one of the authentication modes or
both of them.

2.7. Click on Next. A new window appears.

2.8. Click on Next. The Summary window appears, showing the various characteristics of the IP-
Sec client you have created.

2.9. Click on Finish.

3. Configuration of support for Microsoft IPSec clients and "other IPSec Client" clients at the same time

3.1. In the Supported IPSec client protocols area, check the Microsoft IPSec client (L2TP over
IPSec) and Other IPSec clients boxes.

3.2. In the New IP address range area, if no IP range is defined for the other Microsoft IPSec
client client, fill in the following fields:

- Start of IP range: start of the IP range allocated to VPN clients.

- End of IP range: end of the IP range allocated to VPN clients.

Remarque : If a range is already created, the following window is accessed directly.

3.3. Click on Next. A new window appears.

3.4. In the Microsoft LAN integration area, if your LAN is equipped with a WINS server, enter its
IP address.

Remarque : If a WINS server address has already been configured in the system, the following
window appears directly.

3.5. Click on Next. A new window appears.

10/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS VPN

3.6. The Authentication Mode is used to define the authentication mode used during the data
tunneling:

- Certificate

- Pre-Shared Key (PSK). In this case, fill in the Secret Key Value and Confirm Secret Key
Value fields.

Remarque : The choice is not exclusive. You can choose one of the authentication modes or
both of them.

3.7. Click on Next. A new window appears.

3.8. In the IPSec area, check the Use extended authentication if you want to use a reinforced
authentication.

3.9. Click on Next. The Summary window appears, showing the various characteristics of the Mi-
crosoft IPSec client clients and of the other IPSec client you have created.

3.10. Click on Finish.

VPN ADMINISTRATION

VPN management comprises two main tasks:

- VPN clients administration, comprising:

- management of the PPTP client service,

- management of IPSec clients,
- remote access configuration.

- Tunnel administration, comprising:

- modifying a tunnel's properties,

- adding one or several tunnels,
- deleting one or several tunnels,
- testing a tunnel.

Attention : If the tunnel-initiating gateway is deemed to be the VPN client and the remote gateway
the VPN server, then the Internet connection (if used) on the server side must be a "Call-
back" or "Permanent" connection with a fixed IP address. No such restrictions apply on
the client side. However, if both sides happen to initiate the VPN tunnel, then the restric-
tion applies to them both.

In order to access the VPN/RAS Managementwindow, click VPN/RAS in the navigation bar. This
window comprises two areas:

- The Remote Worker Services area, with three hypertext links giving access to the VPN Client wi-
zard for creation of PPTP or IPSec clients.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/22

VPN E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- The Site to site IPSec tunnels area, which lists already created tunnels.

MANAGING THE PPTP CLIENT SERVICE

1. In the Remote Worker Services area, select PPTP. The PPTP Client Settings window appears.
This page comprises two tabs: Activation and IP Range.

2. Click on the Activation tab. In the Service activation/deactivation area, check the PPTP Client
box in order to activate the service.

3. Click on the IP Range tab. This tab is used to define a new IP address range.

3.1. In the New IP address range area, fill in the following fields:

- Start of IP range: start of the IP range allocated to VPN clients.

- End of IP range: end of the IP range allocated to VPN clients.

3.2. Click Add. The range thus created appears in the table located under the New IP address
range area.

3.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

MANAGING IPSec CLIENTS

1. In the Remote Worker Services area, select IPSec. The IPSec Client Settings window appears.
This page comprises several tabs: Activation, Authenticationand IP Range and IPSec.

Remarque : The IPSec tab is only accessible if support for the other IPSec clients is activated.

2. Click on the Activation tab. This tab is used to activate or deactivate support for the proposed client
protocols.

3. Click the Authentication tab. This tab is used to define the authentication mode to use for data
tunneling:

- Certificate
- Pre-Shared Key (PSK). In this case, fill in the Secret Key Value and Confirm Secret Key Va-
lue fields.

Remarque : The choice is not exclusive. You can choose one of the authentication modes or
both of them.

4. Click on the IP Range tab. This tab is used to define a new IP address range.

4.1. In the New IP address range area:

Complete the following fields:

- Start of IP range: start of the IP range allocated to VPN clients.

12/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS VPN

- End of IP range: end of the IP range allocated to VPN clients.

Select Range type, IPSec client or L2TP client in the drop-down menu.

4.2. Click Add. The new range is added to the others in the table. Restart the operation for each
range to define.

5. Click on the IPSec tab. This tab is used to activate the following options:

- Local Settings
- Remote Settings
- Extended Authentication

5.1. The Local Settings are is used to modify the part of the LAN the client will have access to, or
else to force the client to send all its traffic in the VPN. This option prevents access to the public
network when the client is connected to its company. The security of the local network is rein-
forced. Select:

- Restrict traffic to a sub-network to restrict traffic to a specific sub-network. Fill in the Local
Subnet field

- Use this system as the client's default gateway to force all traffic through Alcatel Om-
niPCX Office for security reasons.

5.2. In the Remote Settings area, check the Assign a private address to the client box so that
Alcatel OmniPCX Office automatically assigns an IP address from the company's LAN for the
duration of the connection. It is then necessary to configure a range of "IPsec client" IP addres-
ses.

Remarque : The client must support the "ISAKMP Configuration Method" extension

5.3. In the Extended Authentication area, check the Use extended authentication box to ac-
tivate the option. The client must enter his/her name and password to establish the connection.

Remarque : The client must support the extended authentication method (Xauth).

REMOTE ACCESS CONFIGURATION

In the Remote Worker Services area, select RAS. The RAS Wizard appears. For more information,
consult the "RAS" section.

MODIFYING A TUNNEL'S PROPERTIES

1. Click on the tunnel name. The VPN Tunnel Settings window appears. This page comprises several
tabs: Identification, Security and Authentication.

2. Click on the Identification tab. This tab is used to verify or modify the tunnel's name.

3. Click on the Security tab. This tab is used to verify or modify the tunnel's security parameters.

3.1. In the Local Settings area, fill in the local Subnet field by entering an IP address or an IP
address and a subnet mask or * to authorize all sources.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/22

VPN E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

3.2. In the Remote Settings area, fill in the following field:

- Public IP Address: IP address provided by the remote entity.

- Remote Subnet: enter either an IP address or an IP address and a subnet mask.

3.3. In the Security Profile area, select the required security profile in the drop-down menu.

4. Click the Authentication tab. This tab is used to verify or modify the tunnel's authentication para-
meters.

4.1. In the Authentication Mode area, check the box:

- Certificate

- Pre-Shared Key (PSK). In this case, fill in the Secret Key Value and Confirm Secret Key
Value fields.

5. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

ADDING A TUNNEL
Click on Add in the list of tunnels or click on the VPN Client Wizard icon.

DELETING ONE OR SEVERAL TUNNELS

Deleting a tunnel

Click the corresponding Delete hypertext link.

Deleting several tunnels

1. Select the tunnels by checking the box preceding the tunnel's name.

2. Click Delete the selection.

TESTING A TUNNEL
Click the corresponding Test hypertext link.

SECURITY PROFILE MANAGEMENT

Security profile management comprises several main tasks:

• modifying a profile,
• adding one or several profiles,
• deleting one or several profiles,

To access the Security Profile Management window:

1. Click onVPN/RAS in the navigation bar. The VPN/RAS Management window appears.

2. Click on the Security Profile Management hypertext link in the VPN/RAS Management window.

14/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS VPN

The Security Profile Management window appears. This windows consists of a table listing all
the existing profiles.

Remarque : By default, three profiles (IPSec client, Standard Security and High Security) are pre-con-
figured. The IPSec client profile is non erasable and the Standard Security and High Se-
curity clients are only erasable if they are not used by a tunnel or a client.

MODIFYING A PROFILE'S PROPERTIES

1. Click on the profile name. The Security Profile Settings window appears. This page comprises
several tabs: Identification, ISAKMP SA and IPSec SA.

2. Click on the Identification tab. This tab is used to verify or modify the security profile's name.

3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

4. Click on the ISAKMP SA tab. This tab is used to configure the ISAKMP SA (Security Association),
which is used to secure the connection between the two gateways. This parameter is used during
phase 1 of the IKE protocol. For each SA, one must define the type of ciphering, the integrity algo-
rithm, the Diffie Helmann group and the SA lifetime. In the Phase 1: ISAKMP area, you can:

- Create a new proposition by clicking on Add and selecting the protocols used from the drop-
down menus. Then, click on Apply to validate the data. The new ISAKMP SA thus created is
added to the list.
- Delete an existing proposition by clicking on the Delete hypertext link corresponding to the
ISAKMP SA you want to delete. This ISAKMP SA is automatically deleted from the list.

- Change the propositions order of submission for approval by clicking on the up or down ar-
rows.

5. Click on the IPSec SA tab. This tab is used to configure the IPSEC SA security association, which is
established during phase 2 of the IKE protocol. This security association is used to convey informa-
tion in a secure way between both LANs. This tab consists of two areas:

- the Pfs area which is used to activate "Perfect forward secrecy".

- the Phase 2: IPSec SA which is used to define the type of ciphering, the integrity algorithm, the
Diffie Helmann group and the SA lifetime.

6. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

ADDING A PROFILE
Click on Add in the list of security profiles. The Security Profile Management window is accessed
directly. To define the new security profile, fill in the Identification, ISAKMP SA and IPSec SA tabs,
as explained above.

DELETING ONE OR SEVERAL PROFILES

Important : The IPSec client client cannot be erased and the Standard Security and High Security
clients are only erasable if they are not used by a tunnel or a client.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/22

VPN E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

Deleting a profile

Click the corresponding Delete hypertext link.

Deleting several profiles

1. Select the profiles by checking the box preceding the profile's name.

2. Click Delete the selection.

PKI LIST MANAGEMENT

PKI list management comprises several main tasks:

• modifying PKI parameters;

• adding a new certificate,
• managing revocation and certificate lists.

In order to access the PKI Managementwindow, click PKI in the navigation bar. This window compri-
ses three areas:

• The Certificates area displays a list of all the certificates in existence or awaiting authorization.

• The Certificate Revocation Lists area displays the list of revoked certificates, regularly updated
by the certification authorities.

• The Import a new PKI file area which is used to import a new file.

ADDING A NEW CERTIFICATE

1. In the Certificates area, click on Enrol. The Enrolment window appears.

2. In the Distinguished name area, fill in the following fields to obtain a certificate name:

- Common name: enter, for example, the product name.

- Unit: enter, for example, the name of your service.
- Organization: enter, for example, the name of your organization.

- Country: enter your country's initials (as defined in the ISO 3166 standard).

3. In the Enrolment method area, two methods are available to import a new certificate:

T Offline Enrolment: a file, containing the information required for obtaining a certificate, is sa-
ved an a floppy disk or on the hard disk. This file is then sent on the site of a certification autho-
rity. When the certificate is obtained, it is imported in Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

T Online Enrolment: the new certificate is directly requested from the certification authority via
the Internet.

Remarque : In this case you have access to the additional tabs Protocol and Certificate.

3.1. Complete the following fields:

16/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS VPN

- CA's URL: enter the certification authority's URL.

- CAMD5 Print: this field is optional. The CAMD5 print enables the system to verify the
authenticity of the CA's certificate.

- Password: this field is optional. If you have obtained a password, the certificate delivery
will be quicker.

3.2. Click on the Protocol tab. This tab is used to change the advanced parameters of the certifi-
cation authority's server, if there is an interoperability problem with the CA.

Remarque : For any change, consult your CA's administrator.

3.3. Click on the Certificate tab. This tab is used to add SubjectAltName and Key use extensions
to the certificate request, if required by the certification authority.

Remarque : For any addition, consult your CA's administrator.

4. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

MANAGING CERTIFICATE REVOCATION LISTS

1. Click on the PKI hypertext link, the PKI CRL Settings window appears. This window has several
tabs: CRL Settings, Notifications.

2. Click on the CRL Settings tab. This tab is used to configure the settings of certificate revocation lists.

2.1. In the CRL Usage area, there are three possible choices:

- Use valid CRL only

- Use CRL even if expired

- Do not use CRL

Important :It is however recommended to check the Use valid CRL only box in order not to
reduce security.

2.2. In the CRL update mode area, there are three possible choices:

- Manual update: manual importation of the list from a file obtained from the certification
authority.

- Automatic update using URL: by entering the URL of the certification authority's site, the
list is automatically updated.

- Automatic update using certificate: the certificate presented by the remote entity indica-
tes where to find the relevant revocation list. If the certificate does not contain a URL, you
can fill in the Backup URL field.

2.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

3. Click on the Notifications tab. This tab is used to configure an e-mail address to receive notifica-

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/22

VPN E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

tions of expiry of the current certificate. In the PKI Certificate Notifications area, select the type
of notification required. Three choices are available:

- Do not use notifications for PKI certificates: no notification is given when the current certi-
ficate expires.
- Use a specific e-mail address: an e-mail address is configured to receive notifications of the
current certificate's expiry. In the E-mail Address field, type in the notification reception ad-
dress.

- Use the general e-mail address for notification: notifications of certificate expiry are sent
to the general e-mail address configured by the administrator. For more information, consult
the "Administration tools" section.

18/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS VPN

INTEROPERABILITY WITH OTHER IPSEC GATEWAYS

IPsec Tunnel establishment phases

The IKE (Internet Key Exchange) protocol is used to establish secure IPsec connections. There are two
phases in the protocol.

IKE phase 1

Phase 1 purpose is to establish a bi-directional secure connection between the two IPsec gateways,
which is associated to an ISAKMP SA (Security Association). During this phase, the peers negotiate a
set of parameters to use for:

• making this connection secure (ciphering and hashing algorithms),

• creating keys,
• mutual authentication.

The standards define two modes for Phase 1, namely Main Mode and Aggressive Mode. In the case
of a VPN LAN to LAN, Alcatel OmniPCX Office only handles the principal mode sometimes called
ID PROTECT.

IKE phase 2

The Phase 1 secure channel is then used to negotiate security settings for a particular mechanism, e.g.
IPsec ESP in our case. This is the Phase 2 of IKE, and it allows establishing IPSEC SA, which will further
be used to convey data securely between the two LANs.

The mode used for IKE Phase 2 is always Quick Mode.

Interoperability troubleshooting
This section describes the points in the IKE negotiation where interoperability problems are likely to
arise. Information about the Alcatel OmniPCX Office features should help tuning the peer device's IP-
sec configuration and make the secure connection happen.

Foreword

The configuration of the IPsec VPN feature has been voluntary simplified on Alcatel OmniPCX Office
to feet the "Plug-and-Play" aspect and ease of configuration of product. Integration of pre-configured
security profiles usually avoids having to modify the negotiated parameters for SA establishing. Thus,
for a LAN to LAN connection between two Alcatel OmniPCX Office, it is enough to select the same
security profile to ensure inter-working. Equally, the pre-configured security profile for IPsec clients can
be used "as is" for interoperability with Microsoft IPsec clients.

Interoperability with other products must also be ensured, since Alcatel OmniPCX Office supports all
the IPSec functionalities defined as mandatory by IETF standards. When the default security profiles are
not suitable, configuration of one of the two systems to be interconnected will have to be modified. In
the case of the Alcatel system:

- in the case of a VPN LAN to LAN, it is always possible to create or to modify the security profiles in
order to adapt to a specific configuration of the remote gateway.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 19/22

VPN E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- In the case of IPSec clients other than Microsoft clients, the "Ipsec client" security profile must be
edited in order to add the parameters required by the client.

SA settings negotiation

A security association gathers the settings that are used to secure a connection. They contain algo-
rithms, keys, peers addresses, etc ... As explained in the previous section, a SA negotiation is perfor-
med in each of the two IKE phases. They both follow the same negotiation scheme, explained
hereafter.

During negotiation, the initiator of the connection sends a list of proposals, i.e. a combination of SA
settings it can accept. The responder then selects an acceptable proposal, and tells the initiator about
this choice.

Proposal
Selection
3DES DES
SHA MD5 DES
RSASig Pre-shared MD5
DH Group 2 DH Group 1 IKE parameters Pre-shared
negotiation DH Group 1

Choice 1 Choice 2

- Phase 1 SA settings

The table below depicts the settings being negotiated during phase 1, and the possibilities offered by
Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

Settings Purpose Supported in Alcatel OmniPCX

Office
Ciphering algorithm Data confidentiality DES

3-DES

AES
Hash function Data authentication + integrity SHA-1

MD5
Diffie-Helman Group Key computation Group 1 (Oakley MODP768)

Group 2 (Oakley MODP1024)

Group 5 (Oakley MODP1536)

20/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS VPN

Authentication method IPsec peers authentication Pre-Shared secret key(PSK)

Certificates
SA lifetime Time before re-negotiation of Maximum 24 hours
this SA

- Phase 2 SA settings

The same settings as in Phase 1 are negotiated, except the authentication method. The mechanism
used to protect traffic for the VPN is always ESP. Encapsulation is performed by tunnel mode,
except for the Microsoft IPSec client where the transport mode is used.

Important : AH is not used on Alcatel OmniPCX Office. It is possible to configure separate Diffie Hel-
man groups for Phase 1 and Phase 2, but it is highly recommended to set the same
group for both phases.

Peers identity checking

Before Phase 2 can begin, the peer devices must authenticate each other. For this purpose, they use
the method defined during the Phase 1 SA negotiation to compute some data that can be derived only
thanks to a secret (shared secret or digital signature if the certificates are used). This data is sent with
an identity payload that identifies the IPsec gateway.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office does not allow configuration of peer's identities, hence identities are always
the WAN IP addresses of the system in the case of an authentication by shared key (PSK), or the "dis-
tinguished name" in the case of an authentication by certificates.

When using the PSK method, it must be ensured that the remote system is configured to send its IP
address to identify itself (often referred as "local id" settings), and also uses an IP address to identify
the remote Alcatel OmniPCX Office system. Such a configuration is shown in the next figure.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 21/22

VPN E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

Protected Subnets

192.168.168.32/255.255.255.240
WAN Public IP addresses
10.0.20.0/255.255.255.0

Main Office 212.25.53.212

Branch Office
193.193.28.19
Internet
OmniPCX Office
IPsec gateway
IPsec Gateway

LocalSubnet = 192.168.168.32 Local Subnet = 10.0.20.0

Local Mask = 255.255.255.240 Local Mask = 255.255.255.0
(Local ID = 212.25.53.212)* Local ID = 193.193.28.19

Remote Gw = 193.193.28.19 Remote Gw = 212.25.53.212

Remote Subnet = 10.0.20.0 Remote Subnet = 192.168.168.32
Remote Mask = 255.255.255.0 Remote Mask = 255.255.255.240
(Remote ID = 193.193.28.19)* Remote ID = 212.25.53.212

* These parameters are not configurable on the

Alcatel OmniPCX Office

Phase 2 identities

There is also an identity payload exchange during Phase 2, but this one only refers to the subnets being
protected. Both parties send the IP settings of the subnets (both local and remote) that are going to be
protected by this tunnel. These settings must match on the two sides for the exchange to be valid.

Debugging tools
A VPN test tool for VPN LAN to LAN is available from the Alcatel OmniPCX Office web-based mana-
gement tool (WBM): VPN/RAS -> Site to Site VPN. This tool is used to detect the most common pro-
blems, by giving an indication on the possible origin of the failure and the associated solutions.

If the tunnel is established, the test gives information on the negotiated parameters, which are used to
protect the data. For example, ESP-3DES[168]-HMAC-MD5 for a tunnel using the ESP protocol, 3DES
ciphering with a 168-bits key, and the MD5 hash algorithm.

22/22 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS E-MAIL

File
E-MAIL
7

INTRODUCTION

Alcatel OmniPCX Office is used to offer an electronic messaging solution for all users in a company.
To do this, it supports various configurations:

- it can be the company's messaging server,

- it can be integrated into the company network if it already has a messaging server,

- it can facilitate access to an external messaging server.

These various possible configurations are described below:

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Scenario 1: ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE IS THE MESSAGING SERVER

For the description of the available e-mail addresses (Stand alone, PO3, IMAP4 or SMPTP
subscription), see the ANNEX 2 at the end of this file.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office makes available to each user a local letter box, and manages the flow of mes-
sages between users of the local network and those to and from the Internet. The protocols used by
this server are SMTP, to send messages, and POP3 or IMAP4, to manage mail boxes.

Remarque : The IMAP4 protocol (Internet Message Access Protocol) is an alternative to the protocol
POP3. It offers many more possibilities, including:

- check e-mail directly on the server, without having to download the messages,
- retrieve all, or part of, the attributes of a message,
- know the contents of a message before downloading it,
- organize the mail on the server.

Two possibilities must be considered:

- POP3 subscription: the IAP stores the mail messages (POP3 accounts),
- SMTP subscription: the IAP does not store the mail box.

1 - POP3 SUBSCRIPTION: THE IAP STORES THE MAIL MESSAGES (POP3 ACCOUNTS)

Each user has available:

- a private mail box with the IAP,

- a mail box on Alcatel OmniPCX Office (local).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/20

E-MAIL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

It is Alcatel OmniPCX Office messaging server that downloads the mail to the local mail boxes for each
IAP connection or at pre-defined time intervals.

This principle, known as POP3 caching, makes it possible to optimise the FAI connections: a user is
not authorised to access his mail box directly with the FAI (since this would automatically create a con-
nection), he has access only to his local mail box.

Users

LAN
INTERNET

OmniPCX FAI server

Office

Periodic
exchanges

In addition to private mail boxes for each user, the IAP can also store a default mail box. This box,
which is optional, receives all the e-mails for an addressee who does not have a private mail box. Al-
catel OmniPCX Office retrieves the contents of this mail box and distributes it to different local mail
boxes depending on the addressee. This function is called Multidrop.

Nota : Refer to case 1 - B of the Using the E-mail Assistant section

The mode of operation is as follows:

• Outgoing mail

The mail sent by a user is "entrusted" to Alcatel OmniPCX Office that sorts it in accordance with the
following criteria:

- If the recipient's e-mail address corresponds to an address linked to a local user, the message
is deposited in the addressee's local mail box.

- In all other cases, the message is stored temporarily in Alcatel OmniPCX Office, then sent du-
ring the next connection or by default, at time intervals pre-defined in the Configuration -
>Email [Main tab] menu, the Activity field of the mail.

• Incoming mail

2/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS E-MAIL

The mail deposited in the mail boxes with the IAP(user letter boxes or default letter boxes) is retrie-
ved by Alcatel OmniPCX Office during the first connection following the depositing operation, or a
pre-defined time intervals (as described above), and routed to local mail boxes. Each user will then
be able to retrieve his mail in Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

Important : The type of connection can be "on demand", "on demand with callback" or "permanent".
Alcatel OmniPCX Office's IP address can be static or dynamic.

2 - SMTP SUBSCRIPTION: THE IAP DOES NOT STORE MAIL BOXES

Mail boxes exist exclusively in Alcatel OmniPCX Office, and mail intended for users must be deposited
directly in these boxes.

In the case of a non-permanent connection, this procedure is not possible for mail coming from the
Internet without an additional service to store messages temporarily. This service, provided by many
ISPs, is known as "SMTP relay".

There are two possibilities, depending on whether or not the ISP provides an SMTP relay service:

T SMTP relay service provided by the ISP

Nota : Refer to case 1 - A - a of the section on Using the E-mail Assistant

INTERNET
Users

LAN
ed
OmniPCX Office ne ctio
ne
stab
lish

if con
smis
sion FAI server
tran
ect
Dir on
ssi
mi
ns
t tr a
rec
Di
Job queue
Smart hosting

Transmission on connection

The mode of operation is as follows:

- Incoming mail

The SMTP relay service consists of temporarily storing messages intended for Alcatel OmniPCX

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/20

E-MAIL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

Office users in a queue, then transferring them to local mail boxes as soon as the connection
is established, or on explicit request from Alcatel OmniPCX Office by virtue of the ETRN (Exten-
ded Turn) command.

Nota : If the ETRN box has been checked, this command will be sent to the IAP's SMTP server
whenever a connection is made (on expiry of the "mail activity" time or voluntary con-
nections). The command will be ignored by the IAP in principle if the latter does not
provide this service.

- Outgoing mail

Outgoing company mail and mail intended for the Internet can also be relayed by the IAP SMTP
server, and this service is called “smart hosting”.

Important : The type of connection can be "on demand", "on demand with callback" or "permanent".
Alcatel OmniPCX Office's IP address must be static. The company must have its own do-
main name.

T No SMTP relay service provided by the IAP (direct SMTP connection)

Nota : Refer to case 1 - A - b of the section on Using the E-mail Assistant

Users

LAN INTERNET

OmniPCX
Office

Alcatel OmniPCX Office is the main messaging server, the mail from the Internet is deposited di-
rectly into the users' local mail boxes.

Important : The connection type must be "permanent". Alcatel OmniPCX Office's IP address must be
static. The enterprise must have its own domain name.

4/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS E-MAIL

Scenario 2: A MESSAGING SERVER ALREADY EXISTS ON THE LAN

If the company is connected to the Internet via Alcatel OmniPCX Office, it is used as the gateway
between the LAN and the Internet for the exchange of messages. In such cases, the user must specify:

- The e-mail server's IP address on the LAN

- The protocol used for e-mail messages coming from the IAP: SMTP or POP3 depending on the IAP's
operating mode..

Scenario 3: THE MESSAGING SERVER IS HOSTED ON THE IAP

There is no messaging server in the company (Alcatel OmniPCX Office or LAN).

Alcatel OmniPCX Office is used as the gateway between LAN and Internet. To enable the exchange of
e-mails between the client PCs on the LAN and the Internet, the firewall rule “e-mail” must be opened
(see chapter on making Internet access secure).

Users

LAN
INTERNET

OmniPCX FAI server

Office

PROPOSED SERVICES

When Alcatel OmniPCX Office is the messaging server, the following services are available:

- alias management,

- multi-domain management,

- routing to external users,

- Proxy POP3 server,

- Anti-virus

- Alert messages

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/20

E-MAIL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

Alias management
This service is used to provide several recipient names per user.

When Alcatel OmniPCX Office receives messages, a recipient name / mail box correspondence table
allows the messaging server to distribute the messages to suitable local mail boxes. For each local mail
box this correspondence table contains the various recipient names that can be used to reach it.

This service is available:

- as an SMTP subscription, either with or without the SMTP relay service,

- as a POP3 subscription, only if the IAP hosts a default mail box and if Alcatel OmniPCX Office has
multidrop management enabled.

Multi-domain management
This service is used to manage several domain names for the same company. A main domain name
and one or more secondary domain names are defined in the IAP and in Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

This service is available irrespective of the chosen subscription (POP3 or SMTP).

- as a POP3 subscription: the messages are sorted in the IAP and directed to the user mail boxes
hosted on the IAP. This means the messages are already sorted when Alcatel OmniPCX Office re-
trieves them and forwards them to the local mail boxes.

- as an SMTP subscriber: Alcatel OmniPCX Office sorts the messages when received; all messages
whose address includes a pre-defined domain name (main or secondary) are accepted, and routed
to users' local mail boxes.

Routing to external users

When Alcatel OmniPCX Office is the messaging server, it is possible to define uses as “remote wor-
kers”. These users have a personal mail box stored with the IAP, but they do not have a local mail box
on Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

The mail intended for them is routed as follows:

- mail from the company

Alcatel OmniPCX Office recognises the address and routes the message to the IAP. The mail is sto-
red in the remote user's personal mail box in the IAP, and is retrieved by the remote worker when
he logs onto the IAP server.

- Mail from the Internet

The mail is stored in the remote user's personal mail box in the IAP, and is retrieved by the remote
worker when he logs onto the IAP. This mail is not retrieved by Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

This service is available only in the case of a POP3 subscription:

6/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS E-MAIL

Proxy POP3 server

The Proxy POP3 server (bypass server) allows a remote worker connecting to the company's LAN to
check his mail box hosted on the IAP without being configured as an Alcatel OmniPCX Office user. To
do this, simply create an e-mail account on the e-mail client, including the following characteristics:

- POP3 account with the IAP = POP3server:account

- Password for POP3 account with the IAP = password

Anti-virus
The anti-virus is only active when Alcatel OmniPCX Office is the e-mail server. For more information
about how the anti-virus functions, consult the "Anti-virus" section.

Alert messages
There are two types of alert messages:

- alert messages on total disk space,

- alert messages on user disk space,

An alert message can be sent to the administrator when the disk space reserved for e-mails exceeds a
specific rate. This rate and the administrator's address are configured in the e-mail settings.

MESSAGING SERVERS CONFIGURATION

The messaging server can be:

• Internal to the system.

• External on the LAN.
• Neither internal to the system not external on the LAN. In this case, it suffices to start the E-mail
wizard.

INTERNAL E-MAIL SERVER CONFIGURATION

To configure an internal messaging server, click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants' icons
appear.

1. Click on the E-mail wizard icon.

2. In the Location of the E-mail Server area, check the box:

- Internal e-mail server on the system

3. Click on Next. A new window appears.

4. In the Internal e-mail server operating mode area, there are three possible choices:

T If your ISP stores your personal mailboxes

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/20

E-MAIL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

4.1. Check the With ISP mailboxes (POP3) box

4.2. Click on Next. A new window appears.

4.3. In the POP3 Settings area, fill in the POP3 server name field.

4.4. Click on Next. A new window appears.

4.5. In the Domain name for e-mails area, there are two possible choices:

- check I have my own domain name if you have your own domain name

- check I have to use the ISP domain name if you must use the ISP's.

In either case, enter the relevant domain name.

4.6. Click on Next. A new window appears.

4.7. In the Anti-virus Settings area,

- check No anti-virus e-mail scanning, if you do not wish to have you e-mails checked for
viruses

- check External anti-virus e-mail scanning if you do. In Anti-virus location, enter the IP
address of the equipment on which the anti-virus software is installed.

4.8. Click on Next. The Summary area lists all the options you have chosen.

T If your ISP stores your mailboxes and manages a default mailbox

4.1. Check the With ISP mailboxes and use of a default mailbox (Multidrop) box

4.2. Click on Next. A new window appears.

4.3. In the POP3 Settings area, fill in the POP3 server name field.

4.4. In the Default mailbox settings (Multidrop) area, fill in the following fields:

- Default POP3 account: name of the mailbox (POP3 account) created in the ISP in order to
receive any e-mail not addressed to personal mailboxes.

- Password: each mail box (POP3 account) created in the ISP is password protected. Alcatel
OmniPCX Office uses this password to download the mail before distributing it to users.

- Confirm password

4.5. Click on Next. A new window appears.

4.6. In the Domain name for e-mails area, fill in the following field:

- My domain name: this domain name is necessarily public (registered and declared with
the authorities that manage Internet domain names).

8/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS E-MAIL

4.7. Click on Next. The Summary area lists all the options you have chosen.

T If your ISP does not store your personal mailboxes

4.1. Check the Without ISP mailboxes (POP3) box

4.2. Click on Next. A new window appears.

4.3. In the Domain name for e-mails area, fill in the My domain name field:

4.4. Click on Next. The Summary area lists all the options you have chosen.

EXTERNAL E-MAIL SERVER CONFIGURATION

To configure an external messaging server, click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants'
icons appear.

1. Click on the E-mail wizard icon. The E-mail Wizard window displays.

2. In the Location of the E-mail Server area, check the box:

- External e-mail server on the LAN

3. Click on Next. A new window appears.

4. In the External e-mail server on the LAN area, fill in the E-Mail server IP address field

5. In the External e-mail server operating mode area, there are two possible choices:

- POP3/IMAP4 accounts

- SMTP relay

6. Click on Next. The Summary area lists all the options you have chosen.

7. Click on Finish. The E-mail Settings window appears.

E-MAIL CONFIGURATION

To configure the e-mail, click on E-mail in the navigation bar. The E-mail Management window dis-
plays. This window comprises three areas:

- the E-mail server operating mode area, which lists the characteristics of the mail server configu-
red via the wizard. Click on the Test button or the E-mail test hypertext link to launch the operating
test. When the test is complete, the E-mail window appears and shows the test results.

- the User list area, which lists all the users created who have a local mailbox with their e-mail ad-
dress. Click on the user name to access the E-mail tab of the User Settings window. For more
information about these settings, see the User and User groups section.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/20

E-MAIL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- the Mailing lists area, which shows all the mailing lists. When the users and the messaging ac-
counts have been created, Alcatel OmniPCX Office is used to create and manage the mailing lists.
A distribution list holds several electronic addresses under the same name, which allows users to
fill in the name of the list as the recipient of a message (name of a service for instance), rather than
having to fill in all the addresses of the individuals concerned.

MAILING LIST
Mailing lists management comprises the following tasks:

• adding a new mailing list,

• deleting one or several mailing lists,
• modifying mailing list properties,

Click on E-mail in the navigation bar. The E-mail management window appears, with the Mailing
list area showing.

ADDING A NEW MAILING LIST

1. Click Add The Mailing List Wizard window appears. It comprises the following tabs: Settings,
Members and E-mail.

2. Click on the Settings tab. In the Mailing List Name area, enter the name of the mailing list.

3. Click on the Members tab. This tab is used to create the mailing list members.

3.1. In the New Members area, there are two possible choices:

- Select Add a defined user if the member you want to add to the list is a user defined in
the system. Select the user(s) in the drop-down menu.

- Select Add an e-mail address if the member you want to add to the list has an external e-
mail address. Enter this e-mail address in the E-mail Address field.

3.2. Click on the Add button to validate the new member's addition. The new members appear in
the list located below the New Members area.

4. Click on the E-mail tab. This tab is used to configure the e-mail settings of the mailing list.

4.1. The E-mail Server Operating Mode area lists the characteristics of the e-mail server confi-
gured via the wizard.

4.2. The Mailing List e-mail address area gives the mailing list address which will be used to
send e-mails to this list. This address cannot be modified.

4.3. In the External POP3 mailbox area, fill in the following fields:

- POP3 mailbox name

- Password

10/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS E-MAIL

- Confirm password

Remarque : This area is only displayed in POP3 configuration or POP3 multidrop configura-
tion with a mailbox dedicated to the mailing list.

5. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

DELETING ONE OR SEVERAL MAILING LISTS

To delete a mailing list, click on the corresponding Delete hypertext link.

To delete several mailing lists: select the mailing lists by checking the box located before the mailing
list name and click on Delete selection.

MODIFY A MAILING LIST PROPERTIES

Click on the mailing list name of your choice. The Mailing List Settings window appears. This page
comprises three tabs: Settings, Members and E-mail. For more information on configuring this tab,
see the Add a new mailing list section.

E-MAIL SETTINGS
To configure the e-mail, click on E-mail in the navigation bar. The E-mail Management window dis-
plays. Click on the E-mail Settings hypertext link, the E-mail Settings window appears. This window
comprises several tabs:

- Location
- Mode
- Domains
- Greeting
- Alerts

1. Click on the Location tab. This tab displays the information required to locate the e-mail server
and to define the reception and distribution period for external e-mails.

1.1. The Location of the E-mail Server area indicates the location (internal or external) of the e-
mail server configured via the wizard.

1.2. In the E-mail Exchange area, fill in the following field:

- Exchange every (min): used to define the reception and distribution period for external e-
mails.

1.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

2. Click on the Mode tab. This tab displays the information necessary to define the e-mail server's
operating mode.

2.1. In the Internal E-mail Server Operating Mode area, select one of the three following mo-
des according to the contract agreed with your ISP.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/20

E-MAIL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

T If you select the With ISP mailboxes (POP3) mode, fill in the following areas:

- Incoming E-mail by specifying the name of the POP3 server.

- Outgoing E-mail by specifying whether you choose the direct sending mode or the use of
your IAP's SMTP server to relay outgoing mail. (This service is also called Smart Hosting)

T If you select the With ISP mailboxes and use of a default mailbox (Multidrop) mode,
fill in the following areas:

- Incoming E-mail by specifying the name of the POP3 server.

- Outgoing E-mail by specifying whether you choose the direct sending mode or the use of
your IAP's SMTP server to relay outgoing mail. (This service is also called Smart Hosting)

Click on Switch to the default account to access a new window comprising two areas:

• Default mailbox settings (Multidrop): used to configure the default mailbox used.

• Multidrop Envelope Field: In the case of a POP3 subscription with Multidrop option, Al-
catel OmniPCX Office needs to know which enveloped field is being used. Alcatel OmniPCX
Office uses the default parameter X-Envelope-To. If a different parameter is used, select the
User-defined option and enter the parameter in the adjacent text entry area.

Nota : The IAP must provide the parameter used. If this should happen, you can send a
message to a mailbox using the default account, and consult the message header to
find the parameter used.

T If you select the Without ISP mailboxes (SMTP) mode, fill in the following area:

- Server by specifying the name of the SMTP server, as well as the use of ETRN and smart
hosting

2.2. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

3. Click on the Domains tab. This tab displays the information required to define several domain na-
mes for e-mail accounts managed by Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

3.1. The Domain name for e-mails area is used to define your main domain name. Two choices
are possible:

- Select I have to use the ISP domain name if you do not have your own domain name
and enter the domain name provided by your ISP.

- If you do, select I have my own domain name and enter the public domain name (regis-
tered and declared with the authorities that manage Internet domain names).

In this case, it is possible to add a secondary domain name by typing the new name in the
New Secondary Domain Name area and clicking on the Add button. To delete a domain
name, select the name to be deleted from the Domain Name field and click on the Delete
button of the Secondary Domain Names area.

12/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS E-MAIL

3.2. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

4. Click on the Greeting tab. This tab is used to define the message sent to a user during the creation
of his or her mailbox.

4.1. In the Greeting message area, fill in the following fields:

- E-mail subject

- E-mail content

4.2. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

5. Click on the Alerts tab. This tab is used to configure an e-mail address to receive alert notification
and to define the type of alerts that trigger notifications. When the conditions are fulfilled, these
alerts are sent every day at 4 a.m. and 4 p.m., until the situation returns to normal.

5.1. In the E-mail address for alert notification area, select the required type of notification.
Three choices are available:

- Do not use alerts on the E-mail Disk Space: notification of the alert is not given.

- Use a specific e-mail address: an e-mail address is configured to receive notifications of

alerts when the hard disk filling threshold is reached. In the E-mail Address field, type in
the notification reception address.

- Use the general e-mail address for notification: notifications of alerts are sent to the
general e-mail address configured by the administrator. For more information, consult the
"Administration tools" section.

5.2. In the Notification Alert area, select the types of alerts by checking the:

- Global Disk Space Alert box to send a message when the e-mail disk space exceeds the
level defined in the Disk Space Used(%) field.

- User Disk Space Alert to send a message when the user threshold is reached. For more
information, consult the "User and User Groups" file in the "Modifying a Users' Group Pro-
perties".

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/20

E-MAIL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

ANNEX 1: SUMMARY OF THE DIFFERENT CONFIGURATIONS

SUPPORTED

Scenario 1: Alcatel OmniPCX Office is the messaging server

The IAP stores the mail messages (POP3 accounts)

Is an e- Type of Internet IP address required E-mail services required from the Notes
mail server connection that can IAP
software be used
key requi-
red?

YES - Demand Dial - Dynamic Hosting of electronic messaging with If the company does not have its
- Callback - Static POP3 accounts customised for own domain name (company.com)
- Permanent con- users, and possibly a default ac- and uses the IAP name (IAP.com),
nection count (multidrop). you must fill in the IAP's Main Do-
main Name field.
With a POP3 subscription, the com-
pany can have its own domain
name (company.com) or can use the
IAP's (IAP.com).

With a POP3 multidrop subscription,

the company must have its own do-
main name (company.com)

T Protocol supported in this configuration:

SMTP SMTP

ALCATEL OMNIPCX
E-MAIL CLIENTS ISP/INTERNET
POP3 OFFICE POP3

14/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS E-MAIL

The IAP does not store mail boxes

The company uses an SMTP messaging relay service (SMTP subscription).

Is an e- Type of Internet IP address required E-mail services required from the Notes
mail server connection that can IAP
software be used
key requi-
red?

YES - Demand Dial - Static SMTP electronic messaging relay If the company uses an SMTP mes-
- Callback service. saging relay service from its IAP, you
- Permanent con- must select Without ISP mailboxes
nection The enterprise must have its own do- (SMPT)
main name.

T Protocol supported in this configuration:

SMTP SMTP

ALCATEL OMNIPCX
E-MAIL CLIENTS SMTP FAI/INTERNET
POP3 OFFICE

The company does not use an SMTP messaging relay service(without SMTP subscription).

Is an e- Type of Internet IP address required E-mail services required by the Notes

mail server connection that can IAP
software be used
key requi-
red?
YES - Permanent con- - Static The enterprise must have its own do- There is no help for incoming traffic
nection main name. if the line or the system are tempora-
rily out of order.

T Protocol supported in this configuration:

SMTP SMTP

ALCATEL OMNIPCX INTERNET

E-MAIL CLIENTS SMTP
POP3 OFFICE

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/20

E-MAIL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

Scenario 2: a messaging server already exists on the LAN

Is an e- Type of Internet IP address required E-mail services required from the Notes
mail server connection that can IAP
software be used
key requi-
red?
NO - Demand Dial - Dynamic Depends on the e-mail server used If the company uses an SMTP mes-
- Callback - Static in the company. The IAP services saging relay service from its IAP, the
- Permanent con- supported by Alcatel OmniPCX Offi- smtp relay field must be checked,
nection ce in this configuration are as fol- or else you must select POP3/
lows: IMAP4 Accounts.

- hosting of POP3 accounts

- SMTP messaging with or wi-
thout relay service

T Protocol supported in this configuration:

SMTP

ALCATEL OMNIPCX FAI/INTERNET

E-MAIL SERVER
POP3 or IMAP4 OFFICE

OR
SMTP

ALCATEL OMNIPCX
E-MAIL SERVER FAI/INTERNET
SMTP OFFICE

Scenario 3: the messaging server is hosted on the IAP

Is an e- Type of Internet IP address required E-mail services required from the Notes
mail server connection that can IAP
software be used
key requi-
red?

NO - Demand Dial - Dynamic Hosting of electronic messaging with

- Callback - Static as many POP3 accounts as users.
- Permanent con-
nection

T Protocol supported in this configuration:

SMTP
ALCATEL OMNIPCX FAI/INTERNET
E-MAIL CLIENTS POP3 or IMAP4 OFFICE

16/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS E-MAIL

ANNEX 2: SUMMARY OF THE AVAILABLE EMAIL ADDRESSES

This annex presents a summary of available Email addresses when Alcatel OmniPCX Office is the mes-
saging server (scenario 1).

WHAT IS AN E-MAIL ADDRESS?

An e-mail address must have the format user_part@domain_part. It has two parts:

1. User_part

2. Domain_part

User_part

This is usually somebody's name. It may also be the name of a department, team, office, etc. The user
part can be more than a simple string.

Exemple : "john.smith" or "research.team"

Domain_part

The domain part indicates the company's Internet address. For a company, "company.com" corres-
ponds to the domain part of the address, and ".com" corresponds to the domain. The domain part can
be more than a simple string.

Exemple : "research.company.com"

".com", the last part of the address, tells more about what kind of institution the address belongs to, or
what part of the world it's from.

Exemple :

- ".com" is usually a company or commercial institution

- ".gov" means a government site.
- ".net" means gateways and other administrative hosts for a network.
- ".org" groups private organizations who don't easily fit into other categories.

USER PART MANAGED BY OMNIPCX OFFICE

1. Login

The login of an Alcatel OmniPCX Office account comprises the user's first name and last name.
The login has the following form: name.surname.

Exemple : The Alcatel OmniPCX Office account login for JHN SMITH is "john.smith".

2. User part of a POP3 email address:

- User managed by Alcatel OmniPCX Office: the user has a POP3 account on the IAP's e-mail
server. An e-mail address in the format user_part@domain_part is associated with this ac-
count with this specific format Most often, the IAP administrator has been able to configure the

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/20

E-MAIL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

user part and uses the convention First Name.Surname.

- External User: external users are only available if the Alcatel OmniPCX Office email server
mode is configured in POP3. An external user has his private POP3 mailbox by the ISP/ASP.

Remarque : Alcatel OmniPCX Office does not manage this mailbox. It is not polled by the Al-
catel OmniPCX Office e-mail server.

The user part of the external user's email address should be in accordance with the address
defined by the ISP/ASP's administrator.

3. User's alias

Alcatel OmniPCX Office administrator can define for each user, one or more aliases. An alias is
an alternative name for a user.

Exemple : user aliases for "john.smith" could be "jsm", "johns", etc.

4. Mailing List Name

A mailing list contains one or more user's login and/or one or more email addresses. If an email
is sent to this mailing list, the message will be broadcast to every member belonging to this list.

Exemple : Members of the "rd_team" mailing list: "john.smith", "pierre.dupont","marine.du-

[email protected]".

DOMAIN PART MANAGED BY ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

1. Name of the company's Local Area Network (LAN)

This may be the company's name (company.com). This name can be configured using WBM.

In the table below this name is identified by Internal_domain_part.

2. Company's Public Domain Name

There are two possible cases:

- The company has bought a domain name part from an IAP. This is the name of the company's
public domain, or domains.

In the table below this name is identified by External_domain_part.

- The company hasn't bought a domain name part. The ISP defines the domain part. Very often,
the domain name part corresponds to the name of the ISP.

Exemple : Wanadoo uses "wanadoo.fr" in France and the user John SMITH will have for email
address "[email protected]".

In the table below, this name is identified by ISP_domain_part.

AVAILABLE E-MAIL ADDRESSES

The table below lists all the available e-mail addresses.

18/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS E-MAIL

User part E-mail from LAN E-mail from ISP

STAND ALONE (System without Internet Access)
user login@internal_domain_part not possible
user alias useralias@internal_domain_part not possible
Mailing Lists mailinglist@internal_domain_part not possible
External user not relevant not relevant
SMTP SUBSCRIPTION
user login@internal_domain_part login@external_domain_part
login@external_domain_part
user alias useralias@internal_domain_part useralias@external_domain_part
useralias@external_domain_part
Mailing Lists mailinglist@internal_domain_part mailinglist@external_domain_part
mailinglist@external_domain_part
External user not relevant not relevant
POP3 SUBSCRIPTION WITH BOUGHT PUBLIC DOMAIN NAME PART
user with login@internal_domain_part user_part@external_domain_part
POP3 ac- login@external_domain_part
count user_part@external_domain_part
user without login@internal_domain_part not possible
POP3 ac- login@external_domain_part
count
user alias useralias@internal_domain_part not possible
useralias@external_domain_part
mailing list mailinglist@internal_domain_part mailinglist@external_domain_part
with POP3 mailinglist@external_domain_part
account
mailing list mailinglist@internal_domain_part not possible
without POP3 mailinglist@external_domain_part
account
External user receives e-mail directly via the ISP: user_part@external_domain_part
user_part@external_domain_part
POP3 SUBSCRIPTION WITH ISP DOMAIN NAME PART
user with login@internal_domain_part user_part@isp_domain_part
POP3 ac- user_part@isp_domain_part
count
user without login@internal_domain_part not possible
POP3 ac-
count

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 19/20

E-MAIL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

User part E-mail from LAN E-mail from ISP

user alias useralias@internal_domain_part not possible
mailing list mailinglist@internal_domain_part mailinglist@isp_domain_part
with POP3 mailinglist@isp_domain_part
account
mailing list mailinglist@internal_domain_part not possible
without POP3
account
External user receives e-mail directly via the ISP: user_part@isp_domain_part
user_part@isp_domain_part
POP3 SUBSCRIPTION WITH MULTIDROP CAPABILITIES
user with login@internal_domain_part user_part@external_domain_part
POP3 ac- login@external_domain_part
count user_part@external_domain_part
user without login@internal_domain_part login@external_domain_part
POP3 ac- login@external_domain_part
count
user alias useralias@internal_domain_part useralias@external_domain_part
useralias@external_domain_part
mailing list mailinglist@internal_domain_part mailinglist@external_domain_part
with POP3 mailinglist@external_domain_part
account
mailing list mailinglist@internal_domain_part mailinglist@external_domain_part
without POP3 mailinglist@external_domain_part
account
External user receives e-mail directly via the ISP: user_part@external_domain_part
user_part@external_domain_part

20/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS THE WEB COMMUNICATION
ASSISTANT

File
THE WEB COMMUNICATION
8
ASSISTANT
The Web Communication Assistant is a Web application designed for Alcatel OmniPCX Office end
users to help them manage in-house corporate communication (e-mails and voice messages).

The Web Communication Assistant provides the following services:

1. E-mail management via the Webmail.

2. Voice mail management.

3. Using the "call" application.

4. Configuration of user parameters and nomad mode.

The main advantage of the Web Communication Assistant is that it gives teleworkers access to all these
services, from any workstation on the company's LAN or via the Internet.

The Web Communication Assistant uses a secure Web interface enabling it to function with Internet
Explorer (release 6 or later), Netscape Navigator (release 7 or later) and Mozilla (release 1.1 or later).
The HTTPS secure transfer protocol ensures the identification of the transmitter and the receiver, the
integrity and the privacy of the exchanged data.

This section deals in succession with the license, the services provided, the association between the user
account and the phone set, connection to the Web Communication Assistant and the relevant confi-
gurations.

THE LICENSE

By granting a user a Web Communication Assistant license, you give him or her the right to use all of
its associated applications, i.e.:

- e-mail via the "e-mails" application.

- the "voice mail" application

Remarques : if a user tries to access these services without a license, access will be refused.
It is not necessary to have a license to access the user's configuration settings.

The final customer buys as many licenses as there are users of Web Communication Assistant. The
administrator or operator manages the number of licenses attributed via WBM.

THE SERVICES PROVIDED

The Web Communication Assistant gives access to the applications described below.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

THE WEB COMMUNICATION E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS
ASSISTANT

The "e-mails" application

This application is used to manage e-mails on a PC, by accessing the mail server. The mail server must
be Alcatel OmniPCX Office. The user must have access to a local E-mailbox, and must have a Web
Communication Assistant license.

You can use this application to:

- send, receive, consult and organize your e-mails.

- Personalize this application's settings.

The "voice mail" application

This application is used to manage your phone set's mailbox using a multimedia PC, i.e.:

- Consult and listen to voice mail.

- Call back the person who left the message.
- Delete voice mail.

- Personalize this application's settings.

The user must first configure his internal mailbox, i.e. record his name and configure his password on
his phone set.

The "call" application

This application uses the Web interface to make calls.

The "preferences" application

This application is used to modify the user settings, i.e.:

- Personalize the Web Communication Assistant.

- Change the password giving access to the Web Communication Assistant.
- Manage the user account settings.
- Specify the number of the user's phone set.

- Managing the parameters of nomad mode.

ASSOCIATION BETWEEN THE USER ACCOUNT AND A PHONE SET

To have access to the "voice mail" application from any PC, it is necessary to create an association
between the user account and the user's phone set.

This association is defined by either the administrator or the user.

The association is defined by the administrator

The administrator only enters the number of the phone set associated with the user account when the
system is configured using the WBM.

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
8

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS THE WEB COMMUNICATION

ASSISTANT

Remarque : the administrator never enters the password of the phone set.

The association is defined by the user

When the association is defined by the users, two cases may arise:

- If the administrator has already entered the number of the phone set associated with the user ac-
count, the user only enters the password.

- If the administrator has not already configured the number of the phone set associated with the
user account, a window is displayed telling the user that his phone has not been identified and as-
king him to identify himself using his phone number and the password associated with the voice
mailbox.

The administrator can change the settings of an association or delete an association.

Remarque : the association of the user account and the phone set makes it possible to secure access
to these services (password).

DECLARATION OF A NOMAD SET

From release 3.0 of Alcatel OmniPCX Office, nomad mode can be used to replace a company set with
an external set. To do this, the mode must be configured and the set declared a nomad set.

Nomad operation completes the WCA by offering a telephone application when you are outside the
company. Nomad mode allows an employee on a business trip to use a GSM, a set in the home, a
hotel set, etc. to:

- Answer a call.

- Listen to a voice mail (via the WCA application).

- Set up a call (via the WCA application).

The workstation of a nomad set requires:

- A virtual terminal,

- A nomad PC outside the company with the application WCA,

- A nomad set outside the company (GSM, hotel set, etc.),

- A fixed set in the company.

Use
An IP connection is essential between the nomad application and the system. The caller can either be
an internal set or an exteranl party.

Incoming call

- The user has enabled nomad mode.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

THE WEB COMMUNICATION E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS
ASSISTANT

- The internal or external party calls the nomad worker on a company set connected to the system.

- The nomad application presents the incoming call and the caller hears the ring back tone.

- The system automatically calls the nomad set and if the call is answered, sets up a call between the
2 parties.

Outgoing calls

- The nomad user via the WCA nomad application requests a call from the system. The system then
calls the nomad set and if the call is answered, calls the requested number. After a few seconds,
the ring back tone is heard on the nomad set and the system automatically connects the 2 parties.

Listening to the voice mailbox

Voice mails can be consulted:

- Directly on the PC with the nomad WCA application.

- On the nomad set (via the WCA application).

Configuration

Software keys (PM5)

For nomad mode, an e-business solution with access to WCA services and Nomadic subscribers is es-
sential.

Creating a nomad set (PM5)

To use nomad mode you need to create a virtual set in the list of users before using the User wizard
via WCA. The virtual sets must be called Virtual Nomadic (respect upper/lower case and the space
between the words; virtual sets do not operate without this name). The default values of these sets can
be kept.

Attention : Check that the barring on virtual sets allows them to reach the numbers of the "Nomad"
sets.

Creating a user (WBM)

To create a user with rights to the WCA and to nomad mode:

1. Access the User wizard window.

2. Complete the fields then click Next.

3. Give the user's group then click Next.

4. Give the licenses assigned to the user then click Next.

5. Click End to validate the data and display the summary.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
8

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS THE WEB COMMUNICATION

ASSISTANT

Configuring the nomad set

After creating the user, a new icon is displayed in the right corner when connecting to the system via
WCA with login and password.

1. Click this icon to start the nomad set configuration wizard.

2. Enter the password associated with the company set then click Next.

3. Give the name of the nomad set then click Next.

4. Give the call number of the nomad set, adding the public network access code then click Next.

5. Click End to enable nomad mode.

Attention : If the message "Cannot enable nomad mode since there are no more virtual terminals
available" is displayed, the virtual set has not been created. In this case, refer to "Crea-
ting a nomad set (PM5)".

Nomad mode preferences

Once the activation procedure is finished, the new icon with the name of the nomad set is displayed
in the right corner of the screen.

- Click this icon to modify the nomad mode preferences.

- Click "Go to nomad mode preferences" to add up to five nomad sets.

Important : Clicking on the nomad mode icon enables nomad mode; all calls intended for the
company set will now be routed to the nomad set. The dotted line between the 2 sets of
the icon changes into a continuous line.

Click the icon again to disable nomad mode.

Important :

- When the WCA connection is finished, nomad mode is disabled automatically. If the browser is
closed immediately, nomad mode will be disabled after 2 minutes.

- Wwhen nomad mode is enabled, "Nomad mode" is displayed on the company set.

- Personal forwarding of the company set takes priority over nomad mode, even if "Nomade mode"
is displayed. Forwarding still operates. By enabling nomad mode via WC, a warning message will
be displayed if personal forwarding is enabled on the company set.

- Dynamic forwarding can be used simultaneously with nomad mode (pay attention to the time delay
which must not be too short: you must add the time to route the call to the nomad set).

- The company set remains blocked while nomad mode is enabled (it cannot be used).

- Maximum number of nomad users: 15.

- IP terminals cannot be nomad sets.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

THE WEB COMMUNICATION E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS
ASSISTANT

- GAP sets are not supported as internal sets.

HOW TO CONNECT TO THE WEB COMMUNICATION ASSISTANT

To connect to the Web Communication Assistant, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Web navigator.

2. Enter the following address in the Address field of the Web navigator:

https://<Alcatel OmniPCX Office>

where <Alcatel OmniPCX Office>is the machine's IP address or name.

The Web Communication Assistant's welcome page is displayed.

3. Type in your user name and password in the appropriate fields.

4. Click on Connect. Your service connection is established. You access the Welcome Page

By default the welcome page displays the "preferences" application, i.e. the user settings. You can
access the other application by clicking on the e-mails and voice mail icons in the tool bar.

Remarque : the session remains active for 24 hours after the last activity.

How to disconnect
To disconnect, click on the quit icon in the tool bar.

ADMINISTRATION OF THE WEB COMMUNICATION ASSISTANT

To make the Web Communication Assistant accessible to users, the administrator must configure the
following items:

1. Via the WBM

- Configuration of Alcatel OmniPCX Office as the mail server.

- Creation of an Internet user account.
- Allocation of a license to a user.
- Association between the user account and the phone set.

2. Via PM5.

- Access to an active internal voice mailbox

Configuration via the WBM

Configuration via the WBM makes it possible to:

1. Configure Alcatel OmniPCX Office as the mail server

To configure Alcatel OmniPCX Office as the mail server, consult the "Electronic Messaging" file

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
8

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS THE WEB COMMUNICATION

ASSISTANT

2. Create a user account via the User wizard.

When creating the account, you can:

- Specify the number of the phone set associated with the user account

- Assign a Web Communication Assistant license and the right to use nomad mode to the user.

To read the detailed procedure, consult the "Users and User Group" file.

3. Change a user's settings via the Settings tab in the User Settings window.

To read the detailed procedure, consult the "Users and User Group" file.

Configuration via PM5

Access to an active internal voice mailbox is configured via PM5. To read the detailed procedure, con-
sult the "Diversion to voice mailbox", section "Call server: Telephone features".

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

THE WEB COMMUNICATION E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS
ASSISTANT

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS CONTROL INTERNET UTILIZATION

File
CONTROL INTERNET UTILIZATION
9

To control the internet utilisation in the company, Alcatel OmniPCX Office comprises a proxy server.
The proxy server requires a software key. In this section, we shall deal in turn with the description of a
proxy server and the associated configurations.

DESCRIPTION

A proxy server is an application that gathers requests from client stations and transmits them to a re-
mote server. The remote server's response is then relayed back to the local PCs. The server, which ma-
nages communications, can provide the following services:

- Record everything it does, with a view to compiling statistics on the access of user groups.

- Filter access according to the requested URLs.

- Filter previously connected users.

Proxy servers can also handle caching: i.e. storing the most recently downloaded or used files on a
local disk for easier availability. This means a file need only be downloaded once from a web site, and
will then be transferred locally at much greater speed in response to identical requests. The main ad-
vantage lies in reducing traffic to and from the Internet, and in reducing the connection costs incurred
by Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

Remarque : Where the proxy license is available, the web access (HTTP, HTTPS and Gopher proto-
cols) and file transfer (FTP protocols) services must go through the proxy, unless a rule
is added to the firewall rule editor.

FEATURES

Alcatel OmniPCX Office includes a HTTP and FTP proxy server with all of the control features listed
below.

Web browsing
In the case of the mode with authentication, the user will be asked for a user name and a password
each time s/he starts a navigation session on the Internet. In the case of the mode without authenti-
cation, access to the Web is immediate. If user control is active, then accounts without the necessary
rights will be rejected.

An Internet navigation session is defined by the launch of a browser (Internet Explorer, Netscape Na-
vigator), access to one or more web sites, and the closure of the browser.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

CONTROL INTERNET UTILIZATION E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

URL filter
The URL filters are used to control the Internet access of certain user groups to certain web sites. The
principle is to block specific URLs according to a list generated by the administrator. This control is ap-
plied to individual groups of users.

If the control is active, three alternatives are available:

1. Offer free access to all web sites.

2. Prohibit specific URLs (Forbidden sites filters).

3. Give restricted access (Authorized sites filters).

Nine URL filters are defined by default, but the administrator can create additional filters. In order to
simplify filter management, they can be downloaded either manually or automatically (every week or
month) to Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

Time range
Here, a time range for Internet access is determined for each day of the week, either for the system
itself, or for individual groups of users.

File transfer
This control makes it possible to restrict the ability of one or two user groups to download files from
the Internet by blocking the FTP protocol. Downloading is only permitted via HTTP.

Statistics
Alcatel OmniPCX provides a tool enabling the Administrator to get an overview of Internet activity, and
compile statistics using log file data based on several criteria, namely user groups, services and desti-
nations. These statistics describe web access in terms of:

- User groups: statistics on Internet use.

- services used: statistics on the traffic for each service (HTTP or FTP).

- Web sites: the list of web sites visited.

Remarque : Access Control is only possible when the proxy option is selected.

PROXY CONFIGURATION

Click onProxy in the navigation bar. The Proxy/Cache Settings window appears. This window con-
sists of two tabs:

- Parameters
- Controls

1. Click on the Settings tab. This tab displays the information needed to configure the proxy.

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS CONTROL INTERNET UTILIZATION

1.1. In the area Control Policy, you can define your proxy's operating mode. Two choices are
possible:

With authentication:

• Click on Group rights and controls: (authentication required) .

• In the drop-down list with the exception of, select the sites to be accessible without authen-
tication. This option allows you to steer clear of the authentication and access certain sites,
such as sites for updating anti-virus software.

Without authentication:

• Click on Proxy global rights and controls: (no authentication).

• In the area Proxy Global Rights, tick the boxes Access to web sites (HTTP) or File trans-
fer (FTP), depending on which rights you wish to attribute.

1.2. In the area Advanced Settings, include the following field:

- Proxy port :the port number to which the HTTP and FTP requests from the client stations
are sent. The default number is 8000.

1.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

2. Click on the Control tab. This tab displays the information needed to set the control policy. The
control policy will be saved, but not active, in the mode without authentication.

2.1. The policy control is set in the area Web site control. In the drop-down list Control policy,
three alternatives are available:

- If you select All sites except the forbidden sites, you can access the Forbidden sites fil-
ters list. You can select one or several sites by ticking the box(es) in front of the site name.

- If you select Authorised sites only, you can access the Authorized sites filters list. You
can select one or several sites by ticking the box(es) in front of the site name.

- If you select No control, all sites will be accessible.

2.2. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

URL FILTERS MANAGEMENT

The management of URL filters consists of four main tasks:

- Adding a URL filter,

- deleting one or several URL filters,

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

CONTROL INTERNET UTILIZATION E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- changing the settings of a URL filter,

- updating a URL filter.

To access the window URL Filter Management, click on URL Filters in the navigation bar. This win-
dow comprises two areas:

• The Forbidden sites filters area, which shows all of the filters for the forbidden sites.

• The Authorized sites filters area, which shows all of the filters for the authorized sites.

For these two lists, the following operations are configured in the same way.

ADDING A URL FILTER

1. Click Add The URL filter settings window appears.

2. In the URL filter name area, fill in the following field:

- URL filter name: type the name you want to assign to the filter.

3. In the URL filter type area, choose the type of URL filter. Three choices are available:

- If you select Manually edited URL filter, you can access the Manual URL filter updating
area. This service allows you to manually edit a URL filter. Complete the following field:

- URL filter content: type the URL filtering objects. Refer to online help to determine specific
syntaxes.

- If you select Local download, you can access the Manually uploaded URL filter area. This
service allows you to manually upload a new edition of the URL filter. Complete the following
field:

- URL filter file: Type the access path to the file which contains the URL filtering objects or
click Browse... to search your workstation and select the file containing the URL lists.

- If you select Automatically uploaded URL filter, you can access the Automatic URL filter
upload area. This service, which allows you to automatically upload a new edition of the URL
filter, requires a subscription with an ASP. Complete the following fields:

- URL: Type the URL to upload.

- Account name

- Password

- Periodicity: choose how often you want the new version to be downloaded: every week or
month.

4. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS CONTROL INTERNET UTILIZATION

DELETING ONE OR SEVERAL URL FILTERS

Only URL filters that are not activated can be deleted.

Deleting a URL filter.

Click the corresponding Delete hypertext link.

Deleting several URL filters.

1. Select the URL filters by ticking the box in front of the filter name.

2. Click Delete the selection.

CHANGING THE SETTINGS OF A URL FILTER

1. Click on the filter name you want to change. The URL filter settings window is displayed.

2. In the URL filter name area, check or modify the characteristics of the filter.

FORCING THE UPDATE OF A URL FILTER

You can force the update of automatically updated URL filters by clicking on Update.

TIME RANGES MANAGEMENT

The management of time ranges consists of four main tasks:

- Time range selection,

- adding a time range,

- deleting one or several time ranges,

- changing the settings of a time range,

Remarque : The system's time range always takes precedence over a group's defined time range.

To access the URL Filter Management window, click on URL Filters in the navigation bar. This win-
dow comprises two areas:

• The Time range selection area.

• TheTime range list area.

SELECT A GLOBAL TIME RANGE

1. In the Select a time range zone, choose a time range in the Global time range drop-down me-
nu.

2. Click Apply to validate.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

CONTROL INTERNET UTILIZATION E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

ADD A GLOBAL TIME RANGE

1. Click Add in the Time range list area. The Time range settings window displays.

2. In the Time range name area, fill in the following field:

- Time range name : type the name you want to assign to the time range.

3. In the Ranges area, for each day enter:

- in the left-hand field: the morning time range

- in the right-hand field: the afternoon time range

Type the time range in the left field if the time range is continuous. The format is hh:mm-hh:mm.

4. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

DELETING A TIME RANGE

Only time ranges that are not activated can be deleted.

Deleting a time range

Click the corresponding Delete hypertext link.

Deleting several time ranges

1. Select the time ranges by ticking the box in front of the time range.

2. Click Delete the selection.

CHANGING THE SETTINGS OF A TIME RANGE

1. Click on the name of the time range you want to change. The Ranges window displays.

2. Check and/or modify the characteristics of the time range.

3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

CONFIGURING THE CLIENT STATION

To use the Alcatel OmniPCX proxy it is necessary to configure the Internet navigator on the client works-
tations.

The browser needs to be instructed that HTTP and FTP requests are to be sent to the proxy: to this end,
it is given the IP address of the proxy server (the OmniPCX IP address, on the LAN side) and the desti-
nation port number, which must correspond to the one entered in OmniPCX (Settings -> Proxy/Ca-
che -> Main -> Proxy Port Number).

Internet Explorer configuration example

After launching Internet Explorer, the proxy settings can be reached by opening the Tools -> Internet

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS CONTROL INTERNET UTILIZATION

Options menu and clicking on LAN Settings in the Connections tab. Check the Use Automatic
Configuration Script box and enter the following address in the Address field:

- http://<@CPU_IA>/proxy.pac

<@CPU_IA> represents the IP address or the name of the Internet Access CPU.

Exemple : http://192.168.92.247/proxy.pac

or

http://iaccess.company.world/proxy.pac

The default name for the IA CPU is iaccess.<domaine_name>.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

CONTROL INTERNET UTILIZATION E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS SECURE INTERNET ACCESS

File
SECURE INTERNET ACCESS
10

As Alcatel OmniPCX Office is the gateway between the company LAN and the Internet, it has to gua-
rantee Internet access for LAN users while protecting all machines on the LAN from external intrusions.
It is for this purpose that it incorporates the firewall and NAT (Network Address Translation) features.

OmniPCX Office
NAT

Internet
Firewall
LAN

What follows is a general description of how these functions work, before dealing with their configu-
ration in Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

FIREWALL

In order to secure the Internet access, Alcatel OmniPCX Office has a certified firewall, which allows to:

- Protect the LAN against external intrusions.

- Protect Alcatel OmniPCX Office against external intrusions and intrusions coming from the LAN.

- Limit the availability of Internet Access.

Description
The firewall integrated into Alcatel OmniPCX Office uses a connection memory system (Connection
Tracking), based on the packets filtering method. In addition to filtering the data packets according to
their origins, destination, protocol and port, Connection Tracking examines the context of the data
flow. This firewall in particular saves the previous connection states and therefore controls continuously
that the circulating data are part of a previously open and authorised session.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

SECURE INTERNET ACCESS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

The firewall is enabled as soon as the system starts and stays enabled as long as it runs; the system is
therefore permanently protected. The firewall configuration adapts itself, in a transparent manner for
the administrator, whenever the configuration of the product and its services is modified. The main
parameters affecting the firewall's configuration include:

- The software key's content.

For example, if the Proxy software key is present, it is impossible to access the Internet or to down-
load a file without going through the proxy, unless you explicitly authorize bypass of the Proxy by
activating the "Web access" and "File transfer" rules in the rules editor.

- Certain Internet access configuration options:

- Option to use the Alcatel OmniPCX Office e-mail server or another e-mail server.
- The availability of Internet services from the WAN.

- The VPN availability.

Filtering rules' editor

The rules' editor allows you to define, modify, enable, disable and delete rules. Each rule describes a
traffic (source, destination, ports and protocols) and its associated action (accept or reject). Upon re-
quest, an alarm message concerning the state of the system (accepted or rejected) is issued. The rules
editor also makes it possible to change the ordering of the rules, determining the order in which the
rules are examined when a packet is received. This order is therefore particularly important when a
packet can be processed by two distinct rules. The online help provides all the details about the exact
possibilities for configuring the rules and their syntax.

Attention : The administrator takes responsibility for using the filtering rules' editor, as they may be
compromising the network's safety. In this case, the firewall certification is no longer
guaranteed.

This tool enables the administrator to define his or her own security rules for the data flow between the
LAN and Internet, i.e.:

- the outgoing flow: traffic initiated by the LAN and flowing to the WAN.

- the incoming flow: traffic initiated by the WAN and flowing to the LAN.

Flows destined for the system are managed transparently by the firewall according to the availability
and configuration of the system's services.

The outgoing flow

An outgoing flow rule filters the packets according to their origin and destination addresses, their pro-
tocol and their destination port. Unlike incoming flow rules, an outgoing flow rule behaves in the same
way whether or not the NAT is activated.

The incoming flow

The incoming flow rules make the services hosted by the LAN servers accessible from Internet. The
incoming flow rules are considered differently depending on whether or not the NAT is activated.

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
10

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS SECURE INTERNET ACCESS

- When the NAT is deactivated, an incoming flow rule is considered as an outgoing flow rule, i.e. a
packet filter applying to its origin, destination and type.

- When the NAT is activated, the rule only filters the packet's origin address and type. If the packet
is accepted, the rule redirects it to the machine on the LAN whose address is indicated in the des-
tination field. The packet is redirected using the "port forwarding" mechanism (see the NAT sec-
tion).

Predefined rules

The predefined rules in the firewall configuration may be deleted or modified and new rules may be
added. Predefined rules are proposed by default to facilitate configuration. In this case certain proto-
cols are incompatible with NAT, when they transmit the stations' IP addresses or original port number
in a devious way (generally through the OSI application layer) and thus generate incoherent ports or
addresses.

The table below lists the preconfigured rules available, which group certain protocols according to the-
me. All these protocols are compatible with the NAT.

Pre-configured rules Application/Protocol Functionality

HTTP/HTTPS Web search

Web browsing rule Gopher Web search in text mode

Wais Database search
File transfer rule Ftp (active and passive) Download file
News Groups rule Nntp/Nntps News group
Remote Connection rule Telnet/ssh Remote connection
E-mail rule SMTP Send/Receive mail
POP3/IMAP4 Receive mail
Quicktime Multimedia (audio/vidéo)

Multimedia rule CUSEEME Video-conferencing

Windows Media Multimedia (audio/vidéo)
Real G2 Audio Multimedia (audio)
Instant messaging rule MSN Messenger Service Instant messaging
ICQ & AIM Instant messaging
Connectivity test rule Ping / Traceroute Network tests
Netbios Protocol Rule Netbios Disk mounting (SMB), name re-
solution

The "Web browsing" and "File transfer" rules are automatically declared on the first start-up if the Proxy
software key is not available.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

SECURE INTERNET ACCESS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

The predefined rules of the Firewall rules editor group the above-mentioned protocols by theme (mes-
saging, multimedia, instant messaging...). When a preconfigured rule is activated, all the machines on
the LAN can exploit the protocols associated with this rule on the Internet. By editing these pre-confi-
gured rules, you can restrict:

- The LAN machines able to access the service, by limiting the source addresses and/or,

- the servers accessible on the Internet, by limiting the destination addresses.

Firewall events log

The firewall events are saved separate from other events linked to the system (for example in case of
dysfunction). The packets saved include:

- Packets coming from the WAN and rejected by the firewall.

- Packets starting a new connection and stopped by an entry into the rules' editor, whose role is to
trace the packets.

Firewall Rule Settings

The various firewall rule settings include:

- Protection of the WAN interface. By deactivating this setting it is possible to delete filtering of the
flows from the WAN to the LAN. This adjustment setting is useful when instead of being directly
connected to the Internet, the WAN is connected to a company network protected by another fi-
rewall.

- Disabling the NAT, in case of an external router connection, for example.

- Accessibility of the services giving Internet access from the WAN, i.e. the DNS server, the mail server
(SMTP, POP3, IMAP4), the Web proxy, the Intranet Web server and the FTP server. This adjustment
setting is useful for example in the case of an External Router connection.

- Access to a Web configuration from the WAN, in case of external router connection or remote
maintenance, for example.

Remarque : When the configuration, service or LAN are opened up to Internet, the system is exposed
to external attack.

NAT (Network Address Translation)

Presentation
NAT is a mechanism devised to palliate the shortage of web addresses. It enables a group of compu-
ters in a local network to access the Internet using a single IP address, in this case that of Alcatel Om-
niPCX Office, which makes it appear as the only system using the Internet connection.

Remarque : Alcatel OmniPCX Office only has the IP address officially provided by the active ISP at
any given time. The correlation of addresses in the NAT process is always of the type:
n local addresses to 1 public address.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
10

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS SECURE INTERNET ACCESS

Operation
Computer X, located on the LAN, is instructed that Alcatel OmniPCX Office is its default gateway.

When a packet arrives in Alcatel OmniPCX Office from computer X, it is assigned a new available sour-
ce port number, and the OmniPCX Office IP address is declared in the packet header, without ove-
rwriting the original header. It then sends the changed packet to Internet.

When a packet arrives in Alcatel OmniPCX Office from the Internet, if the destination port number is
one of the source ports assigned in the preceding stage, then the header is again modified to restore
the original port numbers and IP addresses, and the packet is passed on to machine X.

Advantages
These advantages are:

- flexibility in the private address plan of the LAN;

- the shared use of a single public IP address for any number of private addresses in the LAN;

- Increase in security via concealment of the company network from Internet.

Restrictions
There are two types of restriction:

1. An Alcatel OmniPCX Office user (see the "Users and User Groups" file) is the client of an Internet
service. The predefined rules comprise all the protocols compatible with the NAT.

The table gives a non-exhaustive list of the applications or protocols that are incompatible with the
NAT and are not supported.

Application/Protocol Functionality
Applications H.323 Internet telephony
IRC Instant messaging
Archie FTP search

2. A computer on the local network hosts a service for clients on the Internet (i.e. acts as a web server).

The functioning principle of the NAT prohibits this type of topology. However, thanks to Alcatel
OmniPCX Office's port forwarding feature, a server located on the LAN is made accessible from
Internet, if the protocols concerned remain compatible with the NAT. This forwarding is configured
using the firewall rules for incoming flows (see the "Filtering rules' editor" section). When messaging
is configured in "server hosted on the LAN" mode, the appropriate rules are automatically added
to the firewall rules' editor.

MANAGEMENT OF THE FIREWALL RULES

The firewall rules are defined for the outgoing and incoming flows. We refer to outgoing rules and

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

SECURE INTERNET ACCESS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

incoming rules. Incoming and outgoing rules are configured in the same way.

Management of the firewall rules, whether incoming and outgoing, comprises the following tasks:

- adding a rule,

- modifying a rule's properties,

- deleting one or several rules,

- enabling one or several rules,

- disabling one or several rules.

The procedures below are described in the case of outgoing rules. They are identical for incoming ru-
les, except when the NAT is activated.

Important : It is recommended to read the online help available before starting to configure the fi-
rewall rules.

Accessing the Firewall Rules' Editor window (incoming or outgoing)

Click on Firewall in the navigation bar. The Firewall Rules' Editor - Outgoing Rules window is dis-
played. This window comprises two areas:

- The Enabled Outgoing Rules area, which lists all the enabled firewall rules.

- The Disabled Outgoing Rules area, which lists all the disabled, but already created, firewall ru-
les.

Remarque : To access the incoming rules, click on the hypertext link Incoming Rules. You access
the Firewall Rules' Editor - Incoming Rules window, identical to the Firewall Rules'
Editor - Outgoing Rules window.

ADDING A RULE TO THE FIREWALL

1. Click Add:

- either in the Enabled Outgoing Rules area so that the new rule is enabled,

- or in the Disabled Outgoing Rules area so that the new rule is created but not enabled.

The Firewall Outgoing Rules' Settings window is displayed.

2. In the Rule definition area, fill in the following field:

- Rule Number: defines the order of the rules (see online help).
- Rule name: allows customising the rule by giving it a name.
- Source: see online help.
- Destination: see online help.
- Destination protocol and port: see online help.

In the Firewall action drop-down menu, select the action associated to the defined traffic. Four

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
10

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS SECURE INTERNET ACCESS

choices are available:

- Accept

- Accept and log

- Reject

- Reject and log

3. In the Comment area, enter the comment explaining the rule's objective.

4. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

Remarque : Depending on your choice during step 1, the new firewall rule appears in the Enabled
Rules or Disabled Rules area.

MODIFYING A FIREWALL'S RULE PROPERTIES

A firewall rule can be edited, whether it is enabled or disabled.

1. Click the name of the rule you wish to edit. The Firewall Outgoing Rules' Settings window is
displayed. You have access to all the selected rule's settings.

2. You can modify the following areas' fields:

- Rule definition area

- Comment area

as defined in the "Adding a firewall rule" section.

3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

DELETING ONE OR SEVERAL FIREWALL RULES

A firewall rule can be deleted, whether it is enabled or disabled. When the firewall rule is deleted, it
disappears from the Enabled Outgoing Rules or Disabled Outgoing Rules areas.

Deleting a rule

Click the corresponding Delete hypertext link.

Deleting several rules

1. Select the firewall rules by checking the box preceding the rule's name.

2. Click the Delete the Selection button.

ENABLING ONE OR SEVERAL FIREWALL RULES

When you enable a rule, it disappears from the Disabled Outgoing Rules area and it appears in the
Enabled Outgoing Rules area.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

SECURE INTERNET ACCESS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

Enabling a rule

In the Disabled Outgoing Rules area, click the corresponding Enable hypertext link.

Enabling several rules

In the Disabled Outgoing Rules area:

1. Select the rules by checking the box preceding the rule's name.

2. Click the button Enable the Selection.

DELETING ONE OR SEVERAL FIREWALL RULES

When you disable a rule, it disappears from the Enabled Outgoing Rules area and it appears in the
Disabled Outgoing Rules area.

Disabling a rule

In the Enabled Outgoing Rules area, click the corresponding Disable hypertext link.

Disabling several rules

In the Disabled Outgoing Rules area:

1. Select the rules by checking the box preceding the rule's name.

2. Click the Disable the Selection button.

CHANGING THE FIREWALL SETTINGS

Important : It is recommended to read the online help available before taking any action concerning
the firewall.

1. Click on Firewall in the navigation bar. The Firewall Rules' Editor - Outgoing Rules window is
displayed.

2. Click the Firewall Settings hypertext link. The Firewall Settings window appears.

3. In the Firewall protection scope area, you can disable control of the firewall filtering the packets
passing between the LAN and the WAN, by unchecking the WAN-LAN Filtering box.

4. In the Services and configuration accessibility area, check the:

- Services accessible from WAN box, if you want to make Internet services accessible from the
WAN.

- Configuration accessible from WAN box, if you want to make configuration of Internet ser-
vices accessible from the WAN.

5. In the Network Address Translation area, check the Nat enabled box if you want to allow the
work station to have Internet access using a single public IP address.

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS ANTI-VIRUS

File
ANTI-VIRUS
11

An anti-virus software is an application or application suite that detects viruses and suppresses them.

This service is not provided by Alcatel OmniPCX Office. The anti-virus software is installed on a dedi-
cated LAN server and protects the following solutions in Alcatel OmniPCX Office:

- E-mail
- Web page transfer (HTTP protocol)

- File transfer (FTP protocol)

Remarque : The dedicated must have a static IP address.

The same anti-virus software can be used for E-mail, file transfers and Web page transfers. The anti-
virus software for e-mail and HTTP/FTP flows can function on two different servers.

Remarque : It is not recommended to use the dedicated server as a client station. In this case, a spe-
cial configuration is needed.

In the sections below, a general presentation is given of how to protect e-mails and the HTTP/FTP flows
against viruses, and then we explain how to configure this protection on Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office e-mail protection

The anti-virus software is only enabled when Alcatel OmniPCX Office is the mail server.

Incoming e-mails (including attached files) are sent directly to the anti-virus server and tested. Non-
infected e-mails are forwarded to the recipients.

Protection of HTTP and FTP flows

The Web pages and files transferred by FTP are sent directly to Alcatel OmniPCX Office, and then tes-
ted by the anti-virus software. Non-infected Web pages and files are forwarded to the recipients.

Remarque : It is impossible to bypass the anti-virus software. If the dedicated hardware or software
is out of service, the customer cannot access Internet, or transfer files.

For the HTTP flow, if a virus is detected an alert window is displayed during navigation on Internet. For
the FTP flow, if a virus is detected the program indicates that they system has detected a virus. In both
cases, the administrator can be informed.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

ANTI-VIRUS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

CONFIGURING AN EXTERNAL ANTI-VIRUS SOFTWARE

To configure an external anti-virus software:

1. Click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants' icons appear.

2. Click on the Anti-Virus Wizard icon. The Anti-Virus Wizard window is displayed.

3. In the External anti-virus on the LAN area, check the:

- E-mail verification box to enable the anti-virus for e-mails.

- HTTP/FTP flow verification box to enable the anti-virus on HTTP and FTP flows.

4. Type in the address of the dedicated PC connected to the LAN in the:

- Location of e-mail anti-virus field, if you've enabled the anti-virus for e-mails.

- Location of the HTTP/FTP anti-virus field, if you've enabled the anti-virus for HTTP and FTP
flows.

5. Click on Next. The Summary window displays. This window lists all the options you've chosen.
Click Previous to return to the previous screens and modify the desired parameters.

6. Click Finish to validate the parameters. The Anti-virus Management window is displayed,
showing the configuration of your anti-virus software.

TESTING THE EXTERNAL ANTI-VIRUS SOFTWARE

To test the external anti-virus software:

1. Click on Anti-virus in the navigation bar. The Anti-virus Management window is displayed.

2. Click the Test button. The test runs all the stages for configuring an external anti-virus software,
and gives the causes and related solutions to solve the problem if the test fails.

- For configuration of an e-mail anti-virus software, the test verifies in succession:

- the OmniPCX Office SMTP server
- the ISP SMTP server name
- the ISP SMTP server
- the OmniPCX Office POP3 server
- the ISP POP3 server name
- the ISP POP3 server
- the address of the external anti-virus software
- the SMTP connection with the anti-virus software
- For configuration of an anti-virus software for HTTP/FTP flows, the test verifies in succession:
- the address of the external anti-virus software
- the connection with the HTTP anti-virus software
- the connection with the FTP anti-virus software

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
11

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS ANTI-VIRUS

SETTING ANTI-VIRUS PARAMETERS IN ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

To set the external anti-virus software parameters:

1. Click on Anti-virus in the navigation bar. The Anti-virus Management window is displayed.

2. Click the Anti-virus Settings hypertext link. The Anti-virus Settings window is displayed. It has
the following tabs:

- E-mail
- HTTP/FTP

3. Click on the E-mail tab. This tab is used to activate or deactivate the anti-virus software for e-mails.

3.1. If you select None, the anti-virus software is not activated.

3.2. If you select External anti-virus on the LAN, the anti-virus software is activated. Enter the
address of the dedicated PC connected to the LAN in the Anti-virus Location field.

3.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes. The
Anti-virus Management window is displayed.

4. Click on the HTTP/FTP tab. This tab is used to activate or deactivate the anti-virus software for
HTTP/FTP flows.

4.1. In the HTTP/FTP Anti-virus area, select:

- None if you don't want to activate the anti-virus software.

- External anti-virus on the LAN, if you want to activate the anti-virus software. Enter the
address of the dedicated PC connected to the LAN in the Anti-virus Location field.

- Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

4.2. In the FTP Clients area, check the Authorizes FTP connections via the anti-virus proxy
box if you want to transfer files between FTP clients and Internet via the anti-virus proxy.

4.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes. The
Anti-virus Management window is displayed.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

ANTI-VIRUS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS SECURITY

File
SECURITY
12

To protect the Alcatel OmniPCX Office Internet services, the following protection mechanisms are in-
tegrated into the system:

1. Passwords.

2. Passive security.

3. Active security.

The protection mechanisms provided by Alcatel OmniPCX office make it possible to implement an ac-
tive and passive approach to security. However, to guarantee the LAN's global security, you must:

- Consider the security of all the LAN's elements, and not just the point of access (e.g. a modem
connected to Internet via a PC destroys the security model).

- Use an appropriate methodology (e.g. vulnerability monitoring).

This section deals successively with the different security mechanisms.

PASSWORDS

The administrator and operator passwords giving access to the WBM from the LAN, are defined by
default.

It is impossible to access the WBM from the WAN with the "admin" or "operator" accounts. To access
the WBM from the WAN, you must create a user that has administrator or operator rights.

When migrating from an installation implementing an R1.X or R2.0 solution to an installation imple-
menting an R2.1 solution, the administrator password is restored and the operator password takes the
default value.

To make the system secure, it is possible to change the administrator and operator passwords via the
WBM.

1. Click on General in the navigation bar. The General window displays.

2. Click on the Password tab.

3. In the Operator password area, fill in the following fields:

- Old password
- New password

- Confirm password

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

SECURITY E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

4. In the Administrator password area, fill in the following fields:

- Old password
- New password

- Confirm password

5. Click Change to validate the changes.

Remarque : If the old password is entered incorrectly, the Web-Based Management - Error win-
dow is displayed, giving the causes and the solutions to the problem.

PASSIVE SECURITY

Passive security comprises all preventive actions that protect Alcatel OmniPCX Office against any at-
tack. The following actions are available:

1. Utilization of the defined password format.

2. Resetting of the administrator password.

3. Closure of the system to the WAN.

Utilization of the defined password format

The administrator, operator and user passwords must comply with the following rules:

- comprise 6 to 8 characters,
- comprise at least one upper-case letter,
- comprise at least one non alphanumeric character.

The password format is verified when it is crated or changed in the WBM.

Resetting of the administrator password

When a password is lost, the administrator can reset it by deleting the existing password.

Resetting of the administrator password can be configured by PM5 (Expert view). Proceed as follows:

1. PM5 -> System Miscellaneous -> Password

2. Select IA in the Level drop-down menu and click on Reset.

Remarque : PM5 cannot reset the operator password. However the administrator can change the
operator password via WBM. For more information, consult the "Passwords" section.

Closure of the system to the WAN

By default, Alcatel OmniPCX Office is not open on the WAN. This prevents any risk of piracy. If Alcatel
OmniPCX Office is opened on the WAN, the firewall protects the system against any attack. For more
information about the firewall, consult the "Making Internet access secure" file.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
12

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS SECURITY

ACTIVE SECURITY

Active security groups together the actions that actively control attacks that are external in origin.

Authentication failed
After 5 consecutive authentication failures, Alcatel OmniPCX Office puts the relevant PC in quarantine
for 30 minutes. During this time, the firewall blocks any request emanating from this PC.

Every authentication failure is logged in a log file. This file contains the PC's IP address and the user
account. These log files are accessed via the WBM dashboard. To access the WBM dashboard, consult
the "Administration" file.

Remarque : Every attempt to connect with an administrator, operator or user account undergoes this
process.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

SECURITY E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS ADMINISTRATION TOOLS

File
ADMINISTRATION TOOLS
13

This section deals successively with notification by e-mail, hard disk management (partition, backup
and restore), statistics on system activity and on the Internet services made available, and configuration
of these services on Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

E-MAIL NOTIFICATION

This service makes it possible to configure in a uniform way all the notifications originating from e-mail
services (notifications of user disk space threshold) and PKI certificates (notifications of current certifi-
cate's expiry).

The administrator configures a general e-mail address for all notifications, and if necessary a specific
address for each service concerned. For more information, consult the "E-mail" and "VPN" sheets.

The general e-mail address can be:

- the address of a user

- a broadcasting list
- an external address
- a user alias

The administrator is able to configure an e-mail address to receive the e-mails automatically sent to
the postmaster (e-mail alias that groups all the e-mail addresses of users who have administrator ri-
ghts). These alerts give notification of service malfunctioning.

HARD DISK MANAGEMENT

Alcatel OmniPCX Office's hard disk contains all the data pertaining to the offered Internet services, i.e.:

• e-mail messages
• file server files
• Intranet Web server files
• Voice mail messages
• URL filters.

Hard disk partition

Partitioning a hard drive is convenient because it allows a better organization of the data through as-
signing a storage space to each feature of the Alcatel OmniPCX Office and slicing the hard disk into
several virtual sub-sections.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office has two types of partitions. Fixed-size partitions for the applications, and va-
riable sized partitions, depending on the size of the selected hard drive.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/10

ADMINISTRATION TOOLS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

The following partitions have been created on the Alcatel OmniPCX Office hard drive:

• one partition for the software,

• one for swap,
• one partition for the file server,
• one for the electronic messaging,
• one partition for the proxy,
• one for voice mail,
• one for the Intranet.

Data backup and restoration

To avoid losing data after a hard drive crash, Alcatel OmniPCX Office is equipped with a backup me-
chanism for all existing files. This mechanism also creates backup files for the configuration of tele-
phony and Internet services. The backup is done on network equipment.

In the event of a hard disk replacement, all data are restored on the new hard disk from the last backup
operation.

The backup can be manual or automatic. If it is automatic, the administrator programmes how often
and at what time the backup is carried out. Data restoration is manual.

INFORMATION AND STATISTICS

The administrator can obtain advanced statistics on system activity over a period of time or at a given
time, and on application aspects, thanks to the statistics tool integrated in Alcatel OmniPCX Office.
These data can be accessed through the WBM interface. These statistics are shown in tables with the
possibility of accessing graphics allowing the user to view the evolution over time.

Two types of information are accessible via WBM:

- Snapshot information: system activity measures saved in real time.

- Statistics : information stored on the Alcatel OmniPCX Office's hard disk (system activity statistics
and applications statistics).

Snapshot information can be viewed in tables. These statistics can be viewed in graphics (by day or
fortnight) or in tables.

Snapshot information
System activity information shown in the statistics tool relate to:

- System information,

- management of the memory and swap, as well as the processor load,

- hard disk utilisation (partition),

- network traffic.

2/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
13

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS ADMINISTRATION TOOLS

Statistics
Statistics on the Internet services offered by Alcatel OmniPCX Office are stored in log files. Three types
of statistical analysis are available:

- Statistics on HTTP resources access: Proxy server (HTTP or FTP protocol) and Intranet Web server.

- Statistics on e-mail service.

- Statistics on the various connection types: Internet connections (DSL or ISDN modem), VPN and RAS
connections.

Log file export

Log files (alert messages) contain the raw data. The following types of log files are available:

- E-mail server logs.

- Proxy server logs.

- System event logs.

- Security event logs.

- The logs sent to telephony.

Remarque : These alert messages are also indicated on the Network Management Center (NMC).

ACCESS TO THE DASHBOARD

Click on Dashboard in the navigation bar. The System Dashboard window appears. This window
has the following tabs:

- Statistics
- Information
- System
- Partitions
- Network

1. Click on the Statistics tab. This tab shows system application statistics. Three types of statistics are
defined:

- Connection statistics: to access those statistics, click on the hyperlinks in the Internet connec-
tions, VPN Connections or RAS Connections areas.

- The Available statistics table lists connection indexes with the appropriate counters.

- For each month, the hyperlink makes it possible to access the monthly connection details.
In case of VPN or RAS connections, the hyperlink list may contain an additional link (User
connections) for the analysis period. In those cases, the page contains an additional table
listing all users who have established a connection along with their statistics. The Summary
table contains a counter-based summary. The Daily Connections graphic represents all

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/10

ADMINISTRATION TOOLS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

days of the month when connections have been established. The histograms correspond to
the connection duration, and they are labelled in hours. The Connection List table lists all
connections established in the course of the month. The "Status" column shows a successful
connection.

- E-mail statistics: to access those statistics, click on the See e-mail statistics hyperlink in the
Internet utilisation area.

- The Mailbox sizes table lists the local mailboxes with their sizes. The Available statistics
table lists the months for which statistics are available.

- For each month, the hyperlink makes it possible to access the monthly index details. The
Summary table contains a counter-based summary. The Daily Messages graphic shows
the times at which the mail server has been accessed the most. The first table lists machines
with which the local server has processed the most messages: the transmitting machines
first, then the external servers. The other two tables show the accounts which received most
of the e-mail messages, and those which transmitted the most.

- Webalizer statistics: to access those statistics, click on the Proxy statistics and Intranet web
statistics hyperlinks in the Internet utilization area.

2. Click on the Information tab. This tab shows system statistics. They are specific to the hardware
configuration and the software version. Therefore, they remain unchanged as long as Alcatel Om-
niPCX Office is running. They are gathered as Alcatel OmniPCX Office boots up.

3. Click on the System tab. This tab shows system snapshot information. This information shows the
system status at a given moment.

- Click on the CPU Loads, Memory used or Swap used hyperlinks to open the System Graph
window. Each graphic shows the evolution for the dynamic data period.

- If necessary, use the Automatic scaling option.

- The drop-down list allows the user to choose between an hourly synthesis and a daily syn-
thesis.

- Click on the Process hyperlink to open the Process Tree window. The process tree is mainly
used to identify errors.

- The Close button causes the window to close.

- The Refresh button allows the data to be updated.

- Click on the Refresh button to update the dynamic information.

- Check the Auto-refresh box to automatically update the data every 7 seconds.

4. Click on the Partitions tab. This tab lists the partitions on the system, their mount points, capacities
and occupancy rate.

- Click on the partition-related hyperlinks to open the System Graph window. Each graphic
shows the partition occupancy over time.

4/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
13

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS ADMINISTRATION TOOLS

- If necessary, use the Automatic scaling option.

- The drop-down list allows the user to choose between an hourly synthesis and a daily syn-
thesis.

- Click on the Refresh button to update the partition rates.

5. Click on the Network tab. This tab displays detailed information on the network interface usage.

- Click on the interface-related hyperlinks to open the System Graph window. Each graphic
shows the network traffic over time.

- If necessary, use the Automatic scaling option.

- The drop-down list allows the user to choose between an hourly synthesis and a daily syn-
thesis.

- Click on the Refresh button to update the information.

BACKUP CONFIGURATION

The backup configuration consists of three main tasks:

- Configuration of the backup system,

- manual backup management,

- modification of the backup system.

CONFIGURATION OF THE BACKUP SYSTEM

Click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The six wizard icons are displayed.

1. Click on the Backup Wizard icon. The Backup Wizard window appears.

2. In the Backup device area, include the following fields:

- Workgroup or domain: allows your server to be integrated in a Microsoft network.

- Network share: gives the path to a particular directory on a network device.
- User Name: enter the user name of the network device on which you want to store your bac-
kup.
- Password

- Confirm Password

3. Click on Next. Depending on the parameters already configured, you access the Option 1: Add
a DNS entry area or the Option 2: Define the WINS server area.

3.1. In the Option 1: Add a DNS entry area, include the following fields:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/10

ADMINISTRATION TOOLS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- User Name: enter the user name of the network device on which you want to store your
backup.

- IP Address: Enter the IP address associated with the network device.

3.2. In the Option 2: Define the WINS server area, include the following field:

- WINS Server: If your network has a WINS server, you may enter its name.

4. Click on Next. A new window appears.

5. In the Backup device area, include the following fields if necessary:

- IP Address: enter the IP address associated with the network device.

- Gateway: Enter the IP address of the gateway to contact in order to reach the destination ad-
dress.
- Sub-network Mask: enter the sub-network mask associated with the destination address.

- Comment: comment for identifying the route entered.

6. Click on Next. A new window appears.

7. In the Periodicity area, select Backup trigger in the drop-down menu, the rate of the backup,
and in the Hours field, enter the time of the backup trigger.

8. Click on Next. The Summary window appears which displays the various backup features.

9. Click on Finish.

MANUAL BACKUP MANAGEMENT

To access the Backup Management window, click on Backup in the navigation bar.

1. In the Manual backup area, click on the Backup button to start the full system backup.

2. The Backup list area shows all the backups already carried out. To delete one or more list bac-
kups, click on the Delete button or on the Delete Selection button.

MODIFICATION OF THE BACKUP SYSTEM

1. In the Backup Management window, click on Backup settings hyperlink. The Backup Settings
window appears.

2. Click on the Settings tab. This tab displays the information needed to set up the backup of your
system on a network device.

2.1. In the Backup device area, include the following fields:

• Workgroup or domain: allows your server to be integrated in a Microsoft network.

• Network share: gives access to a particular directory on a network device.

• User Name: enter the user name of the network device on which you want to store your

6/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
13

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS ADMINISTRATION TOOLS

backup.

• Password

• Confirm Password

2.2. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

3. Click on the Behaviour tab. This tab displays the information needed to set up the backup beha-
viour.

3.1. In the Periodicity area, select Backup trigger in the drop-down menu, the rate of the bac-
kup, and in the Hours field, enter the time of the backup trigger.

3.2. In the Backup history area, include the following field:

• Size of backup history: enter the number of backups you wish to keep on the network
device.

3.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

TEST MANAGEMENT

Click onTests in the navigation bar. The Test tools window appears. This window is made up of the
following tabs: Connection, Services and Network.

1. Click on the Connection tab. This service allows to test the current connection profile. The tool uses
the test web site to test the name resolution and the ping in order to verify that the connection profile
works properly. Click on the Test button to start the connection test tool.

2. Click on the Services tab. This service tests e-mail and backup services. Choose the service you
want to test, then click Test to start the service test tool.

3. Click on the Network tab. Click Ping or Traceroute or NsLookup to start testing these utilities.
The Routing Table button gives access to the system's internal routing table.

GENERAL MENU

Click on General in the navigation bar. The General window displays. This window is made up of the
following tabs: Software, Hardware, Configuration Passwords and Miscellaneous.

1. Click on the Software tab. This tab lists the software keys installed on your system and indicates
whether it is available or not for each service.

2. Click on the Hardware tab. This tab indicates whether a specific hardware component is present
or not.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/10

ADMINISTRATION TOOLS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

3. Click on the Configuration tab. This tab allows to download a configuration file into the system
and to save your system's current configuration file or to reset to factory settings.

4. Click on the Password tab. This tab is used to change the operator and administrator passwords.
For more information, consult the "Security" section.

5. Click on the Miscellaneous tab. This tab allows to:

- Install the WBM SSL certificate by clicking the Install the certificate button in the Web-Based
Management SSL certificate area.

- Define the system's default language by selecting the language of your choice in the System
default language area's drop-down menu, then clicking on the Change button.

MANAGEMENT OF E-MAIL NOTIFICATIONS

Management of e-mail notifications comprises several tasks:

- Configuration of the general e-mail address

- Configuration of the Postmaster's e-mail address

Click on Notification in the navigation bar. The Notification management window appears. This
window comprises several areas:

- The General e-mail address for notifications area gives the general e-mail address used when
there is no specific e-mail address. This address is configured in the Notifications tab of the No-
tification Settings window.

- The Postmaster e-mail forwarding area gives the postmaster's address. This address is confi-
gured in the Postmaster tab of the Notification Settings window.

- The Service Settings area lists all the services that may send notifications, in the form of a table.
To access the pages where you can change these settings, click on the Change hyperlink in the
Action column.

Configuration of the general e-mail address

1. In the Notification Management window, click on the Notification Settings hyperlink. The No-
tification Settings window is displayed. This window has two tabs: Notifications and Postmaster.

2. Click on the Notifications tab.

3. Enter the general e-mail address in the E-mail address field of the General e-mail address for
notifications area.

Configuration of the Postmaster's e-mail address

1. In the Notification Management window, click on the Notification Settings hyperlink. The No-
tification Settings window is displayed. This window has two tabs: Notifications and Postmaster.

2. Click on the Postmaster tab.

8/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
13

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS ADMINISTRATION TOOLS

3. In the Postmaster e-mail forwarding area, select the required type of forwarding. Three choices
are available:

- Do not use forwarding of Postmaster e-mails

- Use a specific e-mail address: an e-mail address is configured to receive e-mails sent auto-
matically to the postmaster. In the E-mail Address field, type in the address for reception of
these e-mails.

- Use the general e-mail address for notification: the forwarded e-mails are sent to the ge-
neral e-mail address configured by the administrator.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/10

ADMINISTRATION TOOLS E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

10/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL

File
OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL
14

Web-Based Management (WBM) is an Alcatel OmniPCX Office Internet service administration tool.

WBM can be used by a local administrator called an operator.

To use the WBM at operator level, you must log on using:

- either a user account belonging to a group that has operator rights.

- or the default "operator" account.

WHAT ARE THE OPERATOR'S FUNCTIONS?

An operator can only manage routine tasks. S/he cannot modify service configuration.

The operator's main tasks are:

1. User management

The operator's most important responsibility is user management. Concerning the user groups, the
operator only has access to a read-only summary of the existing groups' settings. Creation of user
groups remains the administrator's privilege.

2. Supervision of system information and statistics

Advanced statistics on system activity can be obtained over a period of time or at a given time, and
on application aspects, thanks to the statistics tool integrated in Alcatel OmniPCX Office. These
data can be accessed through the WBM interface. These statistics are shown in tables with the pos-
sibility of accessing graphics allowing the user to view the evolution over time.

Two types of information are accessible via WBM:

- Snapshot information

These are measurements of the system's activity, recorded in real time.

- System information,

- management of the memory and swap, as well as the processor load,

- hard disk utilisation (partition),

- network traffic.

- Statistics

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/14

OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

Information stored on the Alcatel OmniPCX Office's hard disk (system activity statistics and ap-
plications statistics). It is stored in the log files. Three types of statistical analysis are available:

- Statistics on HTTP resources access: Proxy server (HTTP or FTP protocol) and Intranet Web
server.

- Statistics on e-mail service.

- Statistics on the various connection types: Internet connections (DSL or ISDN modem), VPN
and RAS connections.

Snapshot information and statistics can be consulted in the form of either graphics or tables.

3. Configuration of time ranges and mailing lists, as well as backup management.

- Configuration of the time ranges

Here, a time range for Internet access is determined for each day of the week, either for the
system itself, or for individual groups of users.

- Mailing list configuration

A mailing list contains one or more user's login and/or one or more email addresses. If an
email is sent to this mailing list, the message will be broadcast to every member belonging to
this list.

- Backup Management

To avoid losing data after a hard drive crash, Alcatel OmniPCX Office is equipped with a bac-
kup mechanism for all existing files. This mechanism also creates backup files for the configu-
ration of telephony and Internet services. The backup is done on network equipment.

In the event of a hard disk replacement, all data are restored on the new hard disk from the
last backup operation.

The backup can be manual or automatic. If it is automatic, the operator programs how often
and at what time the backup is carried out. Data restoration is manual.

SUMMARY OF THE OPERATOR'S TASKS

The following table lists all the Alcatel OmniPCX Office Internet services that can be configured by an
operator using WBM.

TASKS INDIRECT
Access to the Welcome Page Authorised
User management
Creating users Authorised
Changing a user's properties, Authorised
Deleting one or more users Authorised

2/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
14

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL

Transferring a user to a group without administrator rights Authorised

Transferring a user to a group with administrator rights Not allowed
Creating an operator Authorised
Changing properties of other operators Authorised
Deleting one or more other operators Authorised
Changing the group of another operator Authorised
Creating, changing and deleting an administrator Not allowed
Changing an administrator's group Not allowed
Distribution list management
Distribution list management
Adding a new mailing list, Authorised
Deleting one or more mailing lists Authorised
Changing the properties of a mailing list Authorised
Controlling Internet use
Time ranges management
Changing the properties of the global time range Authorised
Changing the properties of existing time ranges Authorised
Adding a time range Not allowed
Deleting a time range Not allowed
Security
Changing the operator password authorized
Supervision of system information and statistics
Access to the dashboard Authorised
Backup Management
Backup management (programming or deleting a backup, perfor- Authorised
ming a manual backup and managing the backup history)
Configuration of the backup system. Not allowed
Restoring a backup Not allowed

Remarque : The operator cannot access context-sensitive help.

If an operator attempts to access screens to which he does not have access, the login page is displayed
with an error message.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/14

OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

INTERFACE PRESENTATION

The main characteristics of the interface are:

- the use of hyperlinks, tables, buttons and wizards,

- verification of information prior to validation,

- the possibility of choosing the display language (French, English, German, Italian, Spanish, Portu-
guese or Dutch). The language is configured in the Web navigator.

The screens
The WBM interface contains three screen types:

1. A wizard screen

It allows rapid, easy user configuration (User Wizard)

2. The administration screens

These screens are accessed by clicking on the corresponding hypertext link in the navigation bar.
The administration screens give access to the lists of:

- Users per group

- Time Ranges
- Mailing lists
- Backups performed
- System information

From the administration screens you can access the configuration screens.

3. The configuration screens

The following screens are associated with the administration screens:

- user screens
- time range
- mailing lists

The following screens are used to directly configure the associated features:

- E-mail
- Backup

Description of the configuration and administration screens

The configuration and administration screens are divided into four areas:

1. The general information banner

It is made up of the current configuration title and the other configurations that can be accessed
from this page.

4/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
14

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL

2. The navigation bar

It is divided into sub-sections each representing a characteristic of Alcatel OmniPCX Office. By clic-
king on one of the menus offered, you will go to the corresponding configuration screens.

3. The screen body

Several tabs are available, depending on the screen. By clicking on one of the tabs, you will go to
other screens. Various windows can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlinks on any given page.

Some common actions

The following actions are common to all the screens.

To delete or move several elements in a list, use the check boxes to the left of the elements and click
on the Delete selection or Move selection button (in the middle of the screen).

To delete or add only the element corresponding to the line, click on the hypertext link Add or Delete.

CONNECTION TO WBM

The procedure for connecting to the WBM is as follows:

1. Open the Web navigator.

2. Enter the following address in the Address field of the Web navigator:

https://<Alcatel OmniPCX Office>/admin

where <Alcatel OmniPCX Office> is the machine's IP address or name.

You go to the Web-Based Management - Authentication page.

3. In the Administrator / operator authentication area, enter the user name belonging to a group
that had operator rights or "operator" followed by the associated password.

4. Click on Connect. Your service connection is established.

The WBM Operator Home Page is displayed directly. It presents a summary of the system's ac-
tivity.

How to disconnect
To disconnect, click onDisconnect in the navigation bar. The connection has been deactivated.

Remarque : After 30 minutes of inactivity, disconnection is automatic.

USER MANAGEMENT

User management comprises the following tasks:

- creating a user

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/14

OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- modifying a user's properties,

- adding one or several users,

- deleting one or several users,

- changing one or several users' group.

CREATING A USER
Click on Wizards in the navigation bar. The assistants' icons appear.

1. Click on the User's Assistant icon. The User Wizard window displays.

2. Complete the following fields:

- First name: the user's first name (optional)

- Name: the user's last name
- User name: this field is completed automatically. The user name takes the form First Na-
me.Surname. The user uses this name to connect to the services offered by the system. This
name is also used to create the user's e-mail address.
- Password: the user's password
Remarque : The passwords must comply with the following rules:
- comprise 6 to 8 characters,
- comprise at least one upper-case letter,
- comprise at least one non alphanumeric character.
- Confirm Password

- Telephone number: the telephone number is used when a phone set is associated with the
user, e.g. to use the Web Communication Assistant.

3. Click on Next. A new window appears.

4. In the drop-down menu, select the group where you wish to put the new user.

5. Click on Next. The Résumé window appears, showing the user's various characteristics.

6. Click on Finish.

Remarque : Depending on your system's configuration (mainly the RAS and e-mail functions), other
screens may appear in this assistant.

MODIFYING A USER'S PROPERTIES

1. Click onUsers in the navigation bar. The Users and Groups Management window appears.

2. Click on the user name in the User list area. The User Settings window displays. This page in-
cludes the following tabs: Settings, E-mails, Vacation, Forwards, Aliases.

3. Click on the Settings tab. This tab is used to:

- verify or modify all the parameters input during a user's creation.

6/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
14

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL

- attribute a Web Communication Assistant license to the user by selecting Yes in the Web Com-
munication Assistant License drop-down menu.

Remarque : If you assign a user to another group, he/she inherits all the rights of the new group.

4. Click on the E-mails tab. This tab allows verifying or modifying the user's e-mail parameters.

5. Click on the Vacation tab. This tab allows inputting an absence message.

5.1. Check the Send an e-mail for vacation box to enable this service.

5.2. In the field E-mail subject, input the subject of your e-mail.

5.3. In the field E-mail content, input the content of your e-mail.

5.4. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

6. Click on the Forward tab. This tab allows inputting the e-mail addresses where the user's mail is
to be sent on; a copy can be kept at the user's base address.

6.1. In the E-mail forwarding area, check the box:

- Forward all my e-mails to activate this service.

- Keep a copy before forwarding to keep a copy at the e-mail's initial recipient.

6.2. In the Forward address area, fill in the New address field by inputting your e-mails' desti-
nation address.

6.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

7. Click on the Aliases tab. This tab allows configuring an alias. An alias is another name for the
same user (for more details, please consult the E-mail sheet).

7.1. In the Aliases area, fill in the following field:

- New Alias: allows customising the user with an alias.

7.2. Click the button Add. The new alias appears in the Existing aliases list.

7.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

Remarque : Click Delete to delete an existing alias.

ADDING A USER
1. Click onUsers in the navigation bar. The Users and Groups Management window appears.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/14

OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

2. Click Add in the users' list to add a user.

DELETING ONE OR SEVERAL USERS

Delete a user

1. Click onUsers in the navigation bar. The Users and Groups Management window appears.

2. Click the corresponding Delete hypertext link.

Delete several users

1. Click onUsers in the navigation bar. The Users and Groups Management window appears.

2. Select users by checking the box preceding the user's name.

3. Click Delete the selection.

CHANGING GROUP FOR ONE OR SEVERAL USERS

Remarque : It is not permitted to transfer a user to a group that has administrator rights.

1. Click onUsers in the navigation bar. The Users and Groups Management window appears.

2. Select users by checking the box preceding the user's name.

3. Select the users' group to which they will belong from now on.

4. Click the button Move the selection.

Remarque : When a user is moved from group A to B, s/he loses the rights of group A and gains
the rights of group B.

MANAGING MAILING LISTS

Mailing lists management comprises the following tasks:

• adding a new mailing list,

• deleting one or several mailing lists,
• modifying mailing list properties,

Click on E-mail in the navigation bar. The E-mail management window appears, with the Mailing
list area showing. This window has the following areas:

- the E-mail server operating mode area, which lists the characteristics of the mail server configu-
red via the wizard.

- the User list area, which lists all the users created who have a local mailbox with their e-mail ad-
dress. Click on the user name to access the E-mail tab of the User Settings window.

- the Mailing lists area shows all the mailing lists. When the users and the messaging accounts have
been created, Alcatel OmniPCX Office is used to create and manage the mailing lists. A mailing

8/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
14

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL

list holds several electronic addresses under the same name, which allows users to fill in the name
of the list as the recipient of a message (name of a service for instance), rather than having to fill
in all the addresses of the individuals concerned.

ADDING A NEW MAILING LIST

1. Click Add The Mailing List Wizard window appears. It comprises the following tabs: Settings,
Members and E-mail.

2. Click on the Settings tab. In the Mailing List Name area, enter the name of the mailing list.

3. Click on the Members tab. This tab is used to create the mailing list members.

3.1. In the New Members area, there are two possible choices:

- Select Add a defined user if the member you want to add to the list is a user defined in
the system. Select the user(s) in the drop-down menu.

- Select Add an e-mail address if the member you want to add to the list has an external e-
mail address. Enter this e-mail address in the E-mail Address field.

3.2. Click on the Add button to validate the new member's addition. The new members appear in
the list located below the New Members area.

4. Click on the E-mail tab. This tab is used to configure the e-mail settings of the mailing list.

4.1. The E-mail Server Operating Mode area lists the characteristics of the e-mail server confi-
gured via the wizard.

4.2. The Mailing List e-mail address area gives the mailing list address which will be used to
send e-mails to this list. This address cannot be modified.

4.3. In the External POP3 mailbox area, fill in the following fields:

- POP3 mailbox name

- Password

- Confirm password

Remarque : This area is only displayed in POP3 configuration or POP3 multidrop configura-
tion with a mailbox dedicated to the mailing list.

5. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

DELETING ONE OR SEVERAL MAILING LISTS

To delete a mailing list, click on the corresponding Delete hypertext link.

To delete several mailing lists: select the mailing lists by checking the box located before the mailing
list name and click on Delete selection.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/14

OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

MODIFY A MAILING LIST PROPERTIES

Click on the mailing list name of your choice. The Mailing List Settings window appears. It comprises
three tabs: Settings, Members and E-mail. For more information on configuring this tab, see the Add
a new mailing list section.

TIME RANGES MANAGEMENT

Time range management comprises the following tasks:

- Time range selection,

- changing the settings of a time range,

Remarque : The system's time range always takes precedence over a group's defined time range.

To access the URL Filter Management window, click on URL Filters in the navigation bar. This win-
dow comprises two areas:

• The Time range selection area.

• TheTime range list area.

SELECT A GLOBAL TIME RANGE

1. In the Select a time range zone, choose a time range in the Global time range drop-down me-
nu.

2. Click Apply to validate.

CHANGING THE SETTINGS OF A TIME RANGE

1. Click on the name of the time range you want to change. The Time Range Settings window is
displayed.

2. Check and/or modify the characteristics of the time range.

3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

SECURITY

CHANGING THE OPERATOR PASSWORD

If the password is stolen or divulged, the operator password can be changed via WBM.

1. Click on General in the navigation bar. The General window displays.

2. Click on the Password tab.

3. In the Operator password area, fill in the following fields:

- Old password

10/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
14

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL

- New password

- Confirm password

4. Click Change to validate the changes.

Remarque : If the old password is entered incorrectly, the Web-Based Management - Error win-
dow is displayed, giving the causes and the solutions to the problem.

ACCESS TO THE DASHBOARD

Click on Dashboard in the navigation bar. The System Dashboard window appears. This window
has the following tabs:

- Statistics
- Information
- System
- Partitions
- Network

1. Click on the Statistics tab. This tab shows system application statistics. Three types of statistics are
defined:

- Connection statistics: to access those statistics, click on the hyperlinks in the Internet connec-
tions, VPN Connections or RAS Connections areas.

- The Available statistics table lists connection indexes with the appropriate counters.

- For each month, the hyperlink makes it possible to access the monthly connection details.
In case of VPN or RAS connections, the hyperlink list may contain an additional link (User
connections) for the analysis period. In those cases, the page contains an additional table
listing all users who have established a connection along with their statistics. The Summary
table contains a counter-based summary. The Daily Connections graphic represents all
days of the month when connections have been established. The histograms correspond to
the connection duration, and they are labelled in hours. The Connection List table lists all
connections established in the course of the month. The "Status" column shows a successful
connection.

- E-mail statistics: to access those statistics, click on the See e-mail statistics hyperlink in the
Internet utilisation area.

- The Mailbox sizes table lists the local mailboxes with their sizes. The Available statistics
table lists the months for which statistics are available.

- For each month, the hyperlink makes it possible to access the monthly index details. The
Summary table contains a counter-based summary. The Daily Messages graphic shows
the times at which the mail server has been accessed the most. The first table lists machines
with which the local server has processed the most messages: the transmitting machines
first, then the external servers. The other two tables show the accounts which received most
of the e-mail messages, and those which transmitted the most.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/14

OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

- Webalizer statistics: to access those statistics, click on the Proxy statistics and Intranet web
statistics hyperlinks in the Internet utilization area.

2. Click on the Information tab. This tab shows system statistics. They are specific to the hardware
configuration and the software version. Therefore, they remain unchanged as long as Alcatel Om-
niPCX Office is running. They are gathered as Alcatel OmniPCX Office boots up.

3. Click on the System tab. This tab shows system snapshot information. This information shows the
system status at a given moment.

- Click on the CPU Loads, Memory used or Swap used hyperlinks to open the System Graph
window. Each graphic shows the evolution for the dynamic data period.

- If necessary, use the Automatic scaling option.

- The drop-down list allows the user to choose between an hourly synthesis and a daily syn-
thesis.

- Click on the Process hyperlink to open the Process Tree window. The process tree is mainly
used to identify errors.

- The Close button causes the window to close.

- The Refresh button allows the data to be updated.

- Click on the Refresh button to update the dynamic information.

- Check the Auto-refresh box to automatically update the data every 7 seconds.

4. Click on the Partitions tab. This tab lists the partitions on the system, their mount points, capacities
and occupancy rate.

- Click on the partition-related hyperlinks to open the System Graph window. Each graphic
shows the partition occupancy over time.

- If necessary, use the Automatic scaling option.

- The drop-down list allows the user to choose between an hourly synthesis and a daily syn-
thesis.

- Click on the Refresh button to update the partition rates.

5. Click on the Network tab. This tab displays detailed information on the network interface usage.

- Click on the interface-related hyperlinks to open the System Graph window. Each graphic
shows the network traffic over time.

- If necessary, use the Automatic scaling option.

- The drop-down list allows the user to choose between an hourly synthesis and a daily syn-
thesis.

- Click on the Refresh button to update the information.

12/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
14

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL

BACKUP MANAGEMENT

To access the Backup Management window, click on Backup in the navigation bar.

1. In the Manual backup area, click on the Backup button to start the full system backup.

2. The Backup list area shows all the backups already carried out. To delete one or more list bac-
kups, click on the Delete button or on the Delete Selection button.

3. To access the Backup Settings window, click on the Backup Settings hyperlink. The Behavior
tab displays the information needed to determine the backup behavior.

3.1. In the Periodicity area, select the backup activation frequency and type in the backup activa-
tion time.

3.2. In the Backup History area, type in the number of backups you want to save on the network
hardware in the Size of backup history.

3.3. Click on Apply to validate the data, or on Cancel if you do not wish to keep the changes.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/14

OPERATOR ADMINISTRATION LEVEL E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

14/14 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

File
TROUBLESHOOTING
15

Implementing Alcatel OmniPCX and its functionalities brings into play three main elements which may
lie behind any problems encountered on installation and configuration. They are:

- the client station;

- the system (OmniPCX);

- the Internet access provider.

INTERNET ACCESS

Nothing works: check that all the network elements can communicate with each other.

1. Alcatel OmniPCX Office fails to respond to a ping from all PCs. Alcatel OmniPCX Office does not
have LAN access.

- Check the Ethernet connections, and the IP address on the LAN side.

- Check that the LAN settings in the Settings -> Network menu are correct.

2. OmniPCX fails to respond to a ping from a particular PC. There is a network problem on the PC.

- Check the connections (network cable and board).

- Check the network settings (Network icon in the control panel).

3. Alcatel OmniPCX Office responds to a ping from all PCs. Alcatel OmniPCX Office is properly con-
figured at LAN level. The problem therefore lies in the Internet connection.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office can't connect up to the ISP

1. Check the ISDN connection.

2. Check the connection settings provided by the ISP and configured in Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

3. Check that the ISP profile is active, and that communication has not been deactivated.

4. Use the connection test tool provided on Alcatel OmniPCX Office (click on Connection in the na-
vigation bar, then on Connection test in the general information banner or on the Test button in
the Selecting the Active Connection Profile) area. This tool carries out the connection to the ISP
step by step, and gives the main causes of the problem and the solutions, if a connection step fails.

The browser on the PC can't access web sites.

1. Alcatel OmniPCX Office fails to respond to a ping from the PC. See the instance above.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

TROUBLESHOOTING E-SERVER : INTERNET APPLICATIONS

2. Alcatel OmniPCX Office responds to a ping from the PC. This is caused by either:

- an Internet navigator configuration problem. Check that this configuration corresponds to the
Alcatel OmniPCX Office security function (proxy software key active or not).
- a security problem:

- If user access control is enabled, check that the user has been properly declared. If neces-
sary, change the password.

- If web access control is enabled, check that the site is authorized.

- If a particular protocol is being used, check that it is correctly configured in Alcatel OmniPCX
Office.

E-MAIL

When a client station can't send and/or receive e-mail, check the following:

1. The POP3 mailboxes are hosted by the ISP.

- Check the mail server configuration on Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

- Check the POP3 account settings (name and password) for the user created in Alcatel OmniPCX
Office.
- Test the mail server configuration using the testing tool included in Alcatel OmniPCX Office.
The tool will test the ISP's mail server and suggest appropriate solutions in the event of failure.
- Contact the ISP to check that the POP3 accounts are valid.

- Check the mail client configuration. Alcatel OmniPCX Office should be the POP3 and SMTP
server. The POP3 login and password for each user should correspond to the OmniPCX set-
tings.

2. The ISP is the SMTP relay for the messaging service.

- Check the mail server configuration on Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

- Test the mail server configuration using the testing tool included in Alcatel OmniPCX Office.
The tool will test the ISP's mail server and suggest appropriate solutions in the event of failure.
- Contact the ISP.

- Check the mail client configuration. Alcatel OmniPCX Office should be the POP3 and SMTP
server. The POP3 login and password for each user should correspond to the OmniPCX set-
tings.

3. The ISP has a direct SMTP connection to Alcatel OmniPCX Office. Check the configuration of Alcatel
OmniPCX Office, and of the ISP.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
e-SERVER : Remote Access Server (RAS)

SECTION

E-SERVER : REMOTE

ACCESS SERVER (RAS)

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

E-SERVER : REMOTE ACCESS SERVER

(RAS)

Section e-SERVER : Remote Access Server (RAS)

OUTLINE FILE 1

INSTALLATION FILE 2

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION E-SERVER : REMOTE E-SERVER : REMOTE ACCESS SERVER

ACCESS SERVER (RAS) (INDEX) (RAS)

Section e-SERVER : Remote Access Server (RAS)

(Index)

INSTALLATION FILE 2

OUTLINE FILE 1

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : REMOTE ACCESS SERVER OUTLINE
(RAS)

File
OUTLINE
1

PRESENTATION

The RAS (Remote Access Server) feature allows remote clients to connect seamlessly to the corporate
network from the outside.

This section describes the dialling remote access mode offered by Alcatel OmniPCX Office. This
mode allows a remote client to use the ISDN network to connect to the corporate LAN. Once they are
connected, the RAS clients (telecommuting or mobile workers) can use the corporate LAN resources as
if they were connected locally. They can share files, query databases, access their e-mails, print files,
etc.).

ISDN

LAN (Intranet)

RAS client

Nota : Alcatel OmniPCX Office also allows the remote access via VPN mode where a remote
client uses an IP sub-network to establish a virtual point-to-point connection to Alcatel Om-
niPCX Office.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

OUTLINE E-SERVER : REMOTE ACCESS SERVER
(RAS)

AVAILABILITY

RAS is available with the following solutions:

- Business (CPU, CPU-1/CPU-2)

- e-Business (CPUe-1/CPUe-2)

SERVICES PROVIDED

On-demand bandwidth
With MPPP (Multi-link Point-to-Point Protocol), an RAS client can dynamically make/release a second
ISDN call to the RAS server in order to decrease/increase its bandwidth from 64 to 128 Kbps.

Thus, an Alcatel OmniPCX Office system with 16 simultaneous RAS accesses can support a maximum
of:

- 16 accesses with a bandwidth of 64 Kbps

- or 8 accesses with a bandwidth of 128 Kbps

- or, more generally, N accesses at 64 Kbps + P accesses at 128 Kbps (with N + 2P < or = 16)

Nota : An RAS client can directly establish a connection at 128 Kbps.

Callback
Alcatel OmniPCX Office offers two types of recalls:

- Call-back of the requesting party's number where he/she is.

- Call-back of a predefined number wherever it is (it is the secured form of the call-back).

RAS Alcatel OmniPCX Office uses the CBCP (Call-back Control Protocol) protocol to negotiate the call-
back's use.

Nota : When the call-back is used, the connection's bandwidth cannot exceed 64 Kbps.

Quality of IP Service (QoS)

Alcatel OmniPCX Office offers the following QoS mechanisms:

- DiffServ (Differentiated Services) : QoS at the IP level

- Multi-Class Extension to MPPP: QoS at the PPP level (RFC 2686)

Nota : To be fully effective, QoS should also be applied on the RAS client's side.

Data compression
Alcatel OmniPCX Office offers the following compression algorithms:

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

E-SERVER : REMOTE ACCESS SERVER OUTLINE

(RAS)

- PPP header

- Van Jacobson

- STAC/MS-STAC and BSDCOMP

The compression rules are negotiated between the RAS client and the server during the LCP (Link Con-
trol Protocol) phase.

RAS service availability

The remote access availability can be defined globally or for each connection:

- By time range: access to the RAS server can be limited to certain times of the day and/or to some
days of the week.

- Inactivity timeout: period during which an RAS client can be connected without any data being
transferred.

Security
Since RAS is designed to seamlessly connect a remote client to a network, the security of these connec-
tions is important. The following security mechanisms are available:

- User authentication: The CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) and PAP (Password
Authentication Protocol) protocols are supported.

- Log: this log enables the administrator to detect connection issues easily. The following information
is available:

- User name, connection time, calling number, date, connection type (direct/call-back), band-
width used (64 or 128 Kbps).
- Authentication failure, date, calling number.
- Failure during LCP phase (IP addresses have run out, unauthorised bandwidth).

IP services
When the RAS client has successfully completed the authentication phase, it is assigned an IP address
by the server. This assignment is made individually in static mode (user always obtains the same IP
address) or in dynamic mode (user obtains an address from an address pool).

Nota : The RAS clients' IP addresses are on the same sub-network as the RAS LAN.

After this address has been assigned, the client can use the IP services (FTP, HTTP, POP3, etc.). If the
DNS and WINS services are used, it is important to ensure that the server is configured with the IP ad-
dresses of the appropriate DNS and WINS servers.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

OUTLINE E-SERVER : REMOTE ACCESS SERVER
(RAS)

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

E-SERVER : REMOTE ACCESS SERVER INSTALLATION
(RAS)

File
INSTALLATION
2

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT ON SYSTEM

Hardware
A CoCPU-1 or CoCPU-2 board and the RAS software key are required for the RAS function to be
available with a maximum of 16 accesses. A system can only have one RAS CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2
board.
The number of available remote accesses should be a multiple of 2.

The system should have at least the same number of ISDN accesses as RAS connections.

Software
The system should have the Internet Access software installed (RAS is included in the software).
The corporate LAN should use the IP protocol.

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT ON CLIENT PC

Hardware
The PC should be equipped with an ISDN adapter, typically a basic access with 2 64-Kbps B-channels

Software
The remote client PC should be equipped with the following software:
- Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 SP with patch 5997
- Microsoft Windows 95
- Microsoft Windows 98
- Microsoft Windows ME
- Microsoft Windows 2000 SP1
- Microsoft Windows XP

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION by PM5

RAS accesses are considered as virtual S0 interfaces, when it comes to telephones. These interfaces
follow the distribution mechanisms of the system's calls (discrimination, traffic sharing, etc.).

Direct access
T By default, all RAS accesses belong to a sequential grouping. Assign a DDI number to that grou-
ping so that it can be called from the outside:
Numbering plan -> Public Numbering Plan

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

INSTALLATION E-SERVER : REMOTE ACCESS SERVER
(RAS)

Callback
T Allow Main trunk group seizure (outgoing and incoming) for all RAS interfaces; assign the correct
CL2 link categories:
- for the users: Subscribers/Base stations List -> Subscribers/Base stations List -> De-
tails -> Barring
- for the trunk groups: External Lines -> Trunk Groups -> Details -> Link Cat.
- for access: External Lines -> Access -> Details -> Link Cat.

Time Ranges
T RAS activation is performed in normal or restricted mode (defined by time ranges). In restricted mo-
de, the RAS grouping should be inaccessible; for example, do not allow it data calls.
Time Ranges

INTERNET ACCESS CONFIGURATION BY WBM

Global Parameters
- Authorised on-demand bandwidth for all users
- Authorised call-back for all users
- IP address range
- Disconnection timeout in case of inactivity

User-specific parameters
- On-demand bandwidth
- Authentication mode (use of PAP in case of CHAP failure)
- Recall mode: predefined number (static mode), requesting party (dynamic mode) or forbidden re-
call
- Recall number in static mode
- Fixed IP Addresses

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
Applications

SECTION

APPLICATIONS

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

APPLICATIONS

Section Applications

THIRD PARTY CTI - TAPI FILE 1

THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA FILE 2

DOORPHONES FILE 3

CALL METERING SERVICES FILE 4

STARTING-UP AN ELITECOST 64-128 FILE 5

NMC (NETWORK MANAGEMENT CENTER) FILE 6

POINT TO POINT / POINT TO MULTIPOINT T0 FILE 7

PERMANENT LOGICAL LINK (PLL) FILE 8

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION APPLICATIONS (INDEX) APPLICATIONS

Section Applications (Index)

CALL METERING SERVICES FILE 4

DOORPHONES FILE 3

NMC (NETWORK MANAGEMENT CENTER) FILE 6

PERMANENT LOGICAL LINK (PLL) FILE 8

POINT TO POINT / POINT TO MULTIPOINT T0 FILE 7

STARTING-UP AN ELITECOST 64-128 FILE 5

THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA FILE 2

THIRD PARTY CTI - TAPI FILE 1

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

APPLICATIONS THIRD PARTY CTI - TAPI

File
THIRD PARTY CTI - TAPI
1

SUPPORTED ENVIRONMENTS
Third Party CTI connectivity relies on a server/client model:

- TAPI 2.0: the application developer has to program the link between client and server

- TAPI 2.1: Microsoft provides the link (via Microsoft Windows Remote Service Provider) between the
client PC and a server PC (an NT 4.0 server belonging to the NT domain) that hosts the Third Party
TAPI service provider.

The Alcatel Third Party TAPI service provider is implemented like a CSTA and uses the Alcatel OmniPCX
Office CSTA API.

Operating system Microsoft TAPI ver- Alcatel TAPI Third Remarks

sion party SPI
Windows 3.x 1.3 * / Not possible

Windows 95 2.1 * 5.0x

Windows 98 2.1 5.0x

Windows 98 Ed. 2 3.0 5.0x

Windows Millennium 3.0 5.0x

Windows NT 4.0 SP4 2.1 * 5.0x TAPI 2.1 is included in

SP4
Windows 2000 Prof. 3.0 5.0x

Windows WP ProF. 3.0 5.0x

* TAPI version not delivered with Operating System but can be downloaded from http://www.micro-
soft.com.

Applications available

- PIMphony Basic, Pro or Team. PIMphony is capable of monitoring sets (analog, Reflexes or cor-
dless) and of acting as an IP phone.

Supported terminals

- All the terminals supported by CSTA.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

THIRD PARTY CTI - TAPI APPLICATIONS

TAPI SERVER/CLIENT CONNECTIVITY

Microsoft TAPI 2.1 server

Various architecture solutions are available:

This architecture requires:

- Microsoft remote service provider on the client PC

- Microsoft TAPI 2.1 server and Alcatel TAPI SPI 5.0x on the server PC
- the CSTA server on Alcatel OmniPCX Office
TAPI Server TAPI Client
Alcatel OmniPCX
Office
TAPI interface TAPI interface

Alcatel Micro Microsoft

TAPI soft remote SPI
CSTA TAPI for TAPI 2.1
SPI 2.1 ser
Server 5.0x ver

IP stack IP stack

IP network

Alcatel TAPI Server

In this case no TAPI server is required: the CPU board acts as a TAPI server. As each Alcatel TAPI SPI
5.0x requires an CSTA session, the number of clients is limited by the number of possible CSTA ses-
sions.

Alcatel OmniPCX TAPI Client

Office
TAPI interface

Alcatel
TAPI SPI
CSTA
5.0x
Server

IP stack
IP network

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

APPLICATIONS THIRD PARTY CTI - TAPI

Comparison between these 2 architectures

Service Microsoft TAPI 2.1 server Alcatel TAPI Server

Constraints on the client PC - TAPI 2.1 remote SPI must be - Must have TAPI 2.0 or later
installed installed
- Must belong to an NT do- - Must have Alcatel TAPI SPI
main 5.0x installed on each client
- User must log into the NT
domain
Constraints on server PC - Must have TAPI 2.1 installed No server PC
- Must be an NT 4.0 server
- Must belong to an NT do-
main
- Must have Alcatel TAPI SPI
5.0x installed
Security Yes No
Centralized management Yes No
Mandatory configuration - Client PC must be configu- Alcatel TAPI SPI 5.0x must be
red as a client of the TAPI configured with the IP address of
2.1 server the Alcatel OmniPCX Office
- Server PC must be configu- CPU board
red as a TAPI 2.1 server
- Alcatel TAPI SPI 5.0x must be
configured with the IP ad-
dress of the Alcatel Omni-
PCX Office CPU board
Number of client PCs No limit (except server PC load) Limited by number of CSTA ses-
sions
Number of CSTA sessions used 1 Number of client PCs
Impacts on customer IT organi- Can be high Very low
zation
Cost Can be expensive Cheap

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

THIRD PARTY CTI - TAPI APPLICATIONS

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

APPLICATIONS THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA

File
THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA
2

PRESENTATION

The CSTA protocol is proposed on an Ethernet TCP/IP link via the Alcatel OmniPCX Office system CPU
board.

The CSTA application is built around an ECMA standard. This standard covers:
- a set of services for applications involving both telephone and computer (ECMA-179)
- a protocol for system/computer exchanges (ECMA-180) enabling the above-mentioned services to
operate

Version implemented: version 1

Applications available

- Alcatel Office Call Center (AOCC)

FUNCTIONAL ARCHITECTURE

A typical CSTA application involves:

- an Alcatel OmniPCX Office system which manages the application's telephone resources
- a CTI server on which the CSTA application is run. It is connected to the system's CPU board via a
CTI link (third party connectivity).
- client PCs associated with the telephone sets and constituting the operator's workstation.
Data
processing
CTI Server
section

Workstation

Third party CTI

adapter
adapter

LAN
LAN

connectivity
(to CPU board)

Telephone section

Public
network

Telephone sets

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/16

THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA APPLICATIONS

SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE

The CSTA connection is made via a CSTA agent located in the system. The maximum number of si-
multaneous sessions is 28. The tasks performed by an agent are:

- management of connection with the CTI server

- ASN1 encoding/decoding of requests and events in compliance with ECMA 180
- recovery of telephone events for the monitored devices
- management of the connection between the telephone application and the system corresponding
to the service request from the CTI server

CSTA DIALOGUE

CSTA dialogue is built around the Client/Server model. Each party (system, computer server) can send
or reply to a service request and provide an event report.

CSTA MODEL

The CSTA standard makes the application independent of physical implementation of the switching
networks used. To do this, it provides the applications it addresses with an abstract view of the under-
lying telephone assembly. This abstraction is obtained by modeling the switching part. The generic mo-
del developed to represent the working of the telephone part is built around three notions:

The Device

This notion refers to:

- physical devices such as: telephone sets, circuit groups, lines,

- logical devices: groups, ACD.
- Device Type
CSTA defines several types of devices which can be handled or observed (ACD, operator, circuit
group, etc.).
- Device Class
The devices observed can belong to different families (data, image, voice, other)
- Device Identifier
The devices handled are referred to by a device identifier for the CSTA service. Depending on
whether or not the device is involved in a call, the identifier will be dynamic or static.
- Device State
This is a set of connection states linked to a particular device.

2/16 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

APPLICATIONS THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA

Call

This is a switching relationship (generally) between two or more devices. It is also a CSTA object. In a
CSTA domain, the behavior of telephone call establishment and release can be observed and han-
dled. To characterize a call, two parameters are of use:

- Call Identifier
A call reference is automatically created by the switching domain as soon as a call appears.
- Call State
This is a list of connection states (see connection below) for all the devices involved in a particular
call.

Connection

A Connection is a relationship between a call and a device. This relationship can be both monitored
and handled. In fact, the various services provided by the CSTA protocol consist in observation and
handling of connections. A connection is defined by an identifier and a state.

- Connection Identifier
The connection identifier consists of the pairing of a call identifier with a device identifier.
- For each call, there are as many connection identifiers as there are devices connected.
- For each device, there are as many connection identifiers as there are calls connected.
- Connection state
A state is allocated to each connection, to characterize the position of the connection.
Changes in the state of the connection can be described using a states machine.

CAPACITIES

The CSTA processing capacities of the Alcatel OmniPCX Office system are listed in the following table:

Processing capacities Maximum

Number of simultaneous CTI applications 25
Number of simultaneous monitoring requests for 208
a terminal
Max. number of active simultaneous supervi- 208
sions per node (Alcatel OmniPCX Office system)
Number of CSTA requests processed simulta- 30
neously
Number of CSTA events per second 10
Number of CSTA switching requests per second 2

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/16

THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA APPLICATIONS

DESCRIPTION OF THE CSTA LINK (SYSTEM <-> SERVER)

PRESENTATION

The CSTA link is the one which connects the system's CSTA server to the CTI server. It consists of an
Ethernet link supporting a stack of BSD4.3 compatible TCP/IP protocols for the lower layers and OSI-
compliant ACSE/ROSE/ASN1 for the higher layers. The RFC 1122 and RFC 1058 recommendations
are also adhered to.

CTI Server Alcatel OmniPCX Office

CSTA CSTA

ACSE ROSE
Application ACSE ROSE

ASN1
Presentation ASN1

Proprietary Session Proprietary

Transmit Control Protocol

(TCP) Transport Transmit Control Protocol
(TCP)

Internet Protocol
(IP) Network Internet Protocol
(IP)
(IP)

802.3 Link 802.3

10BASE-T Physical 10BASE-T

LINK MANAGEMENT

Initialization

To initialize the link, the CTI server must connect to the transport layer (TCP protocol) on TCP port
2555. Once this connection is made, the application identifies itself at session level (by sending the
character 'B'), the system then responds by sending the character 'P'.
Message Transmission direction Meaning
B CTI Server -> System Identification of the application
P System -> CTI Server CPU
EXIT CTI Server -> System End of connection

4/16 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

APPLICATIONS THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA

Identification (future version)

The CSTA protocol falls into layer 7 (application) of the OSI model. Its implementation in the system
uses the ACSE (Association Control Service Element) defined by OSI for managing application links.

In the association request (AARQ) the CTI application specifies the list of CSTA versions supported and
the list of CSTA services and events used.

The association can be rejected by the system's CSTA server if:

- the ACSE versions are incompatible
- there is no common CSTA version between the CTI server and the system

When the association is accepted, the system sends back a reply (AARE) containing the chosen CSTA
version and the list of usable CSTA services and events.

Connection release

The CTI application sends an association cancellation request (RLRQ ADPU); the system replies with
RLRE ADPU.

The connection is then released by an EXIT message sent by the server. Each side then releases the TCP
connection.

Surveillance

A surveillance mechanism is installed at application level, to ensure that the link is available. This me-
chanism enables the CTI server to detect any malfunctions (reboot) on the system side. This function
exists in TCP but the reaction time is longer.

When there are no exchanges on the link, the system's CSTA server periodically (every 30 s) sends sys-
tem status requests (bi-directional services). These requests must be acknowledged by the CTI server.
If the requests are not transmitted or if the replies are not received, the link is considered to be faulty
after two messages have been sent with no reply.

Failures

- Failure of the CTI server or failure of the link:

- the calls established remain unchanged
- the monitoring events are lost
- the monitoring requests are cancelled
- the system's CSTA server cancels the connection context
The CTI server must reconnect and restart monitoring.
- Failure of a terminal (UA set, UA link or DLC board): the calls established are deleted. When the
terminal returns to valid status, the CSTA server resumes the monitoring process.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/16

THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA APPLICATIONS

- System reset:
- all the calls are lost
- the monitoring events are lost
- the monitoring requests are cancelled
The CTI server has to reconnect.

DEVICE IDENTIFIER

This paragraph describes the internal structure of the device identifiers used by the system's CSTA ser-
ver.

Static Device Identifier

As long as a device is not involved in a call, it is designated by its directory number. Thus, to establish
a call with "Make-Call", or request monitoring with "Monitor Start", the directory number of the device
concerned is used.

Dynamic Device Identifier

As soon as the device concerned is involved in a call, reference must be made to it in the connection
identifier, using the dynamic identifier. Thus, for a "Transfer-Call", the dynamic identifier obtained in
the previous events is used.

Label Length Connection identifier (10 bytes) .

Label Length Dynamic identifier (4 bytes) Label Length Call identifier (2 bytes)

6/16 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

APPLICATIONS THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA

DESCRIPTION OF CSTA SERVICES

The implementation of CSTA services in the Alcatel OmniOffice system uses the principle of device mo-
nitoring. Each monitoring request creates a "data stream" between the monitored system device and
the CSTA application of the CTI server which made the request. All the events of all the connections in
which the device is involved are reported by this "data stream" which is identified by a reference
(cross_ref_id). All the events carried by the "data stream" are identified by this reference, which enables
them to be routed through the CSTA application.

The CSTA services are available for the following elements:

- Alcatel multiline Reflexes sets (including DECT sets and IP Phones)

- Monoline Alcatel Reflexes sets
- Analogue Z terminals
- Virtual terminals

Nonetheless, devices not supported can be involved in communications with supported devices. In
such cases, the CSTA service requests can only be made on the supported devices.

The switching services introduced by CSTA use those offered by the system. This means that from the
viewpoint of the telephone set, the CSTA services behave in the same way as the equivalent telephone
services provided manually.
To be able to activate switching services on a device, the device must be the subject of a valid super-
vision request.

SERVICES PROVIDED

The services offered by the CSTA protocol are of four types:

- switching services enable a computer to control the switching capacity of the system. For all these
services, the server is, therefore, the system and the client is a computer on the network.
- monitoring services enable a client situated in the computing domain to receive information con-
cerning calls or system devices situated in the switching domain.
- computer services enable a client situated in the computing domain to request routing of a call.
- bi-directional services allow installation of services not defined in the protocol.

SWITCHING SERVICES

Answer Call

This service can be used to connect a call presented or camped on.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/16

THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA APPLICATIONS

Alternate Call

This service can be used to combine the "Hold Call" service followed by the "Retrieve Call" service.

The call on hold becomes active while the current call is placed on hold.

Clear Connection

This service can be used to clear a call from a specific device (similar to going on-hook manually).

Consultation Call

This service can be used to combine the "Hold Call" service followed by the "Make Call" service.

The call active on a device is placed on hold and a new call is made from the same device.

Hold Call

This service places an established connection on hold (similar to manually placing on hold).

Make Call

This service is used to generate a CSTA call between 2 devices.

The "Make Call" service is unaware of the device states (forwarded, controlled, etc.). The user can reject
(soft key, End key, time-out) or accept the call (off-hook, soft key, hands-free key, time-out).
The system can be programmed for automatic answer mode. After a time-out (5 seconds by default),
the system simulates a "hands-free" mode on the original device.
If the service is accepted, the application automatically dials on behalf of the user.

Query device

This service provides terminal status indications.

Reconnect Call

This service is used to combine the "Clear Connection" service with the "Retrieve Call" service.

Retrieve Call

This service is used to connect a call on hold (similar to the corresponding manual operation).

Transfer Call

This service transfers a holding call into an active call on the same device (similar to a supervised trans-
fer).

Associate data

This service (available through use of the "Escape" service) associates information (project code, autho-
rization, code, etc.) with a specific call (this information has no impact on the call).

Send DTMF tones

8/16 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

APPLICATIONS THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA

This service (available by using the "Escape" service) enables DTMF tones to be added after a call is
connected.

Dial digits

This service (available by using the "Escape" service) allows a dialing sequence to be associated with a
call (the call is initiated manually by going off-hook or via a "Make Call" or "Consultation Call" service).

Pick up Edn

This service (available by using the "Escape" service) camps a (ringing) call on a given terminal.

Get config

This service (available by using the "Escape" service) returns information about the system configura-
tion.

Device status

This service (available by using the "Escape" service) enables you to:

- start monitoring the creation/deletion of a terminal on the system

- stop monitoring
- request a device status
- request the status for all the terminals.

A terminal status gives the following information: direct number, physical status of terminal, in service
/ out of service.

Nota : Particularities of mono-line terminals:

Certain CSTA services (Answer Call, Consultation Call, etc.) may be rejected by mono-line
terminals, as a mono-line terminal can simultaneously manage only one connected call and
one call on hold (or 1 or more camped calls).
Example: it cannot answer a camped call when another call is on hold.

SUPERVISION SERVICE

This service enables a CSTA client to receive messages concerning the CSTA events occurring on a mo-
nitored device.

- It must be activated by the event monitoring activation service, used to specify the device monitored.
- Monitoring stops by itself if the monitored device disappears (as is the case with a call) or can be
stopped by the monitoring deactivation service.
- A client can find out the current state of a call or device simply by requesting it.
- The client may not necessarily receive all the events generated by the monitoring process, but sim-
ply a sub-set of them by activating a monitoring filter.

Monitor Start

This service activates Call Event Monitoring. There are two types of activation service:

- call monitoring activation: all events on the devices in which the call is involved are reported.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/16

THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA APPLICATIONS

- device monitoring activation

When the CSTA server has accepted the monitoring activation request, it sends the client an on-the-fly
data stream describing the CSTA events of the call or device being monitored. If a filter has been ac-
tivated, only the chosen events will be transmitted. The server automatically ends supervision when the
monitored object disappears, which can happen with a call.

The CSTA server also provides a reference: Cross Reference Id, associated with the monitoring process
for as long as it lasts. This reference will be used whenever anything is done on the monitoring process
(change filter, deactivate, etc.).

Monitor Stop

This service is used to stop the monitoring process for a given object (device or call). It can be invoked
by a client who no longer wishes to receive information concerning a previously monitored object, or
by a system no longer able to provide information about the object.

When the request is accepted by the server, the data stream describing the CSTA events for the moni-
tored call or device ceases.

Change Monitor Filter

This service is used to change the monitoring filter on an existing monitoring process. The monitoring
filters are used to define the information to be transmitted by the monitoring process.

Snapshot Device

This service is used to obtain information concerning a specified device. This information includes the
list of calls involving the device and the state of each connection.

BI-DIRECTIONAL SERVICES

Escape

The escape procedure permits the installation of services not defined in the protocol.

System Status

This service identifies the system status, whether for the switching part or the computing part.

PROTOCOL CONFORMITY: PICS

The implementation of the CSTA protocol on the Alcatel OmniPCX Office system is set out in the fol-
lowing tables.

Nota :

This list is not exhaustive and the implementation of the protocol can change with time.

Refer to the PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) for a description of the state of
conformance of this implementation of the protocol compared with the standard.

10/16 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

APPLICATIONS THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA

A Initialization Services Alcatel Remarks

Omni-
PCX
Office
A.1 Security services
A.2 ACSE negotiation (Non ECMA V1 Ad- ✓ For version, service capability and
ditional Features) authentication

B Switching Function Services Alcatel Remarks

Omni-
PCX
Office
B.1 Answer call ✓
B.2 Alternate call ✓
B.3 Call completion ✓ Intrusion supported

Callback supported
B.4 Clear call Not applicable for Alcatel OmniPCX
Office (use clear connection instead)
B.5 Clear connection ✓ In a basic call when you clear one con-
nection of the call, the other one is
automatically cleared.
B.6 Conference call ✓
B.7 Consultation call ✓ Correlator data supported
B.8 Divert call ✓ Call deflection supported

Individual call pickup supported

Group pickup supported
Correlator data supported
B.9 Hold call ✓
B.10 Make call ✓ Correlator data supported

AutoOriginate authorized
B.11 Make predictive call (group)
B.12 Query device ✓ Device info supported (type and class)

Forwarding supported
Do Not Disturb supported
B.13 Reconnect call ✓
B.14 Retrieve call ✓

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/16

THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA APPLICATIONS

B.15 Set feature ✓ MsgWaiting supported

Forwarding supported
Do Not Disturb supported
B.16 Transfer call ✓
Non ECMA V1 Additional Features
(using Escape service)
B.17 Associate data ✓ Only for CSTA Application Correlator
Data
B.18 Send DTMF tones ✓
B.19 Dial digits ✓
B.20 Pickup EDN ✓
B.21 Get config ✓
B.22 Device status ✓

C Status Reporting Services Alcatel Remarks

Omni-
PCX
Office
C.1 Events reports
C.1.1 Agent state event reports
C.1.1.1 Logged on
C.1.1.2 Logged off
C.1.1.3 Not ready
C.1.1.4 Ready
C.1.1.5 Work not ready
C.1.1.6 Work ready
C.1.2 Call event reports
C.1.2.1 Call cleared Not applicable for Alcatel OmniPCX
Office
C.1.2.2 Conferenced ✓ Correlator data supported
C.1.2.3 Connection cleared ✓ Correlator data supported
C.1.2.4 Delivered ✓ Correlator data supported

Used B-channel supplied with private

data (Network Time Slot)
Group number supported
Correspondent name supported

12/16 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

APPLICATIONS THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA

C.1.2.5 Diverted ✓ Correlator data supported

C.1.2.6 Established ✓ Correlator data supported
C.1.2.7 Failed ✓ Correlator data supported
C.1.2.8 Held ✓ Correlator data supported
C.1.2.9 Network reached ✓ Correlator data supported
C.1.2.10 Originated ✓ Correlator data supported
C.1.2.11 Queued ✓ Correlator data supported

Used B-channel supplied with private

data (Network Time Slot)
Group number supported
Correspondent name supported
C.1.2.12 Retrieved ✓ Correlator data supported
C.1.2.13 Service initiated ✓
C.1.2.14 Transferred ✓ Correlator data supported
C.1.3 Feature event reports
C.1.3.1 Call information ✓
C.1.3.2 Do not disturb ✓
C.1.3.3 Forwarding ✓
C.1.3.4 Message waiting ✓
C.1.4 Maintenance events
C.1.4.1 Back in service ✓
C.1.4.2 Out of service ✓

C Status Reporting Services Alcatel Remarks

Omni-
PCX
Office
C.2 Monitor/snapshot
C.2.1 Change monitor filter ✓
C.2.2 Monitor start ✓ Device-type only, with filters on events
C.2.3 Monitor stop ✓
C.2.4 Snapshot call
C.2.5 Snapshot device ✓

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/16

THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA APPLICATIONS

D Computing Function Services Alcatel Remarks

Omni-
PCX
Office
D.1 Re-route
D.2 Route end
D.3 Route request
D.4 Route select
D.5 Route used

E Bi-directional Services Alcatel Remarks

Omni-
PCX
Office
E.1 Escape ✓ See associate data
E.2 System status ✓ Used for the keep-alive mechanism

14/16 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

APPLICATIONS THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA

CONFIGURATIONS

The CPU board IP address is configured in PM5 -> Hardware and Limits -> IP Addresses.

VIRTUAL TERMINALS

Definition
A virtual terminal (so called because the terminal does not physically exist) is not visible and can only
be managed from a CSTA application. Created using MMC-PC (Expert View), it is assigned an internal
directory number and has the same characteristics as a Reflexes set.

An Alcatel OmniPCX Office system can have a maximum of 24 virtual terminals.

Description
A virtual terminal can receive internal and external calls. Incoming calls can be answered via CSTA
service requests; outgoing calls are also made in response to a CSTA service request.

A virtual terminal can form part of hunting group or an attendant (operator) group.

Default parameter setting:

- intercom profile (one resource key for each network access)

- 2 RGM keys for local calls
- 1 dedicated key for outgoing calls

A virtual terminal can have a maximum of 104 keys.

Configuration
- To create virtual terminals (max. 24) – MMC-PM5 (Expert view) only:
Subscribers -> Subscriber List -> Add -> Custom. Set: Add -> Virtual Terminals -> specify
the number of virtual terminals you want to create.

The system assigns the available directory numbers to the virtual terminals.
All the set parameters (accessible by Subscribers -> Subscriber List -> Details), with the excep-
tion of the individual directories and personal codes, can be modified.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/16

THIRD PARTY CTI - CSTA APPLICATIONS

16/16 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

APPLICATIONS DOORPHONES

File
DOORPHONES
3

DESCRIPTION

With the doorphone, it is possible to identify the person who has pressed the button before opening
the door. Identification is made after a communication has been set up between a set connected to the
system and the doorphone.

ALCATEL
BUSINESS
SYSTEMS

Alcatel
OmniPCX
Office

Station or
operator

2 doorphone types are available, depending on the operating mode used:

- Type A: relay-controlled doorphones (e.g. NPTT)

- Type B: doorphones controlled by MF Q23 signals (e.g. TELEMINI and UNIVERSAL DOORPHONE)

These doorphones are mutually exclusive on the same system. A flag must be placed to define the
operating mode in use.

By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select:

System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels -> flag DPHMode -> enter 00
(default value) for a TELEMINI or UNIVERSAL DOORPHONE or 01 for an NPTT doorphone.

A doorphone call is managed in the same way as all internal calls:

- it is indicated on the destination set display as another call

- a doorphone call may be intercepted, forwarded, put in a conference with other correspondents
and camped on if the destination set is busy.

Notas :

The destination of a doorphone call can be an external number (defined using a collective speed dial
number); in this case, the set in question cannot control the door opening mechanism.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

DOORPHONES APPLICATIONS

USING A TELEMINI DOORPHONE

These doorphones must only be connected to a Z station interface.

Basic characteristics of these doorphones:

- recognition of the opening and closing of the loop and passing into conversation.
- no detection of the ringing current (incoming call) except for those that are MF Q23 programma-
ble.
- recognition of MF Q23 signals or tones transmitted by the system (system -> doorphone dialog).
- possibility of configuring a directory nº (programmed in the memory) transmitted to the system.

Several doorphones may be connected to the system; the limit is defined by the maximum number of
analog set interfaces that the system can contain.

A system cannot have TELEMINI and UNIVERSAL doorphones at the same time.

Operating principle
Pressing the doorphone call button sends an MF code (START) which, after validation by the system,
maintains the call and triggers an off-hook signal on the doorphone destination set or group.

There is a specific key for answering the call, while another controls the automatic doorstrike (latch) by
sending an MF code (LOCK).

Hardware requirements
- a free Z device on an SLI board
- 2 free keys on one or more Reflexes sets
- a Telemini doorphone with doorstrike

Programming
- defining the Z interface (for subscriber 111, for example).
By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select:

Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscriber ->111 -> Details -> Misc. -> Special Function
= Door Phone -> Hotline = Immediate -> destination n° = set or group Subscribers ->
Subscriber -> 111 -> Details -> Features = protection against camp-on tone and intrusion
(optional)

- the feature access code for controlling the doorstrike

By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select:

Numbering -> Features in Conversation -> XX = Doorphone Unlock

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

APPLICATIONS DOORPHONES

- to create specific keys on the set(s) linked to the doorphone

- Supervision keys
By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select:
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List (select doorphone destination
set) -> Details -> Keys -> select a key -> Type = Resource Key -> Function = RSL -> Num-
ber = 111

- Doorstrike key
By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select:
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscriber (select set) -> Details -> Keys -> select a key -
> Type = Function Key -> Function = Doorphone Unlock

- specific programming instances

If the doorphone uses other MF command codes, refer to its instructions.
By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select:
System Miscellaneous -> Doorphone Signals -> change MF code values (start/stop signal),
if desired, add the ringing tone to the doorphone using Alert Signal / Tone

Connection diagram

PABX

Z station interface TELEMINI

(SLI board) or
UNIVERSAL
DOORPHONE
Door opener command Towards the
door opener

220V
Functional description

Setting up a doorphone requires a functional analysis of the device (expected signals or tones, system
open to programmable signals), before moving on to the system configuration, or that of the door-
phone.

Nota : It is recommended that you consult the doorphone installation manual.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

DOORPHONES APPLICATIONS

Functional analysis of the "UNIVERSAL DOORPHONE"

USER IN Alcatel
FRONT OF DOORPHONE OmniPCX
DOORPHONE Office
STATION/OPERATOR

Selection of the Closure of the loop, Detection of the

call button preparation of the closure of the loop
programmable
T time-out

Dial tone reception Sending of the

(reception acknowledged) "START" signal (Tone)

MF Q23 transmission of the Reception of the station

programmed directory No. directory No. and call Station rings

If the station
is not available
or inaccessible

Call back Sending of the

"ALERT" signal (Tone)

Conversation Station off hook,

conversation

Sending of the
Door opened Reception of the "LOCK" signal Feature code
programmable MF code (MF code) opening of the door
for door opener control

Opening of the loop if: Sending of the Station

- reception of the dial tone "STOP" signal (Tone) on hook
- T time-out has lapsed
and moving into not avail.

Moving into
availability

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

APPLICATIONS DOORPHONES

Functional analysis of the "TELEMINI" doorphone

USER IN Alcatel
FRONT OF DOORPHONE OmniPCX
DOORPHONE Office
STATION/OPERATOR

Selection of the Closure of the loop, Detection of the

call button preparation of the closure of the loop
T1 = 2s time-out

Reception of the MF A code

(reception acknowledged) Sending of the
cancelling of T1 and "START" signal (A)
preparation of the
T2 = 2 mins time-out

Reading of the station

directory No. in Station rings
Automatic call on off hook
and station call
If the station
is not available
or inaccessible

Call back Sending of the

"ALERT" signal (Tone)

Conversation Station off hook,

conversation

Door opened Reception of the MF D code, Sending of the Feature code

door opener control "LOCK" signal (D) opening of the door
while t = 1.5s

Opening of the loop if: Sending of the Station

- reception of MF C code "STOP" signal (C) on hook
- T1 time-out has lapsed
- T2 time-out has lapsed
and moving into not avail.

t = 3s

Moving into
availability

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

DOORPHONES APPLICATIONS

USING AN NPTT DOORPHONE

The doorphone interface comprises an intercom and an optional doorstrike powered by the mains
supply through a SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) transformer.

A single doorphone with doorstrike may be connected to the system.

The system also allows for the connection of 2 doorphones without doorstrikes.

Operating principle
Pressing the doorphone call button triggers a loop on the associated Z terminal. The loop is maintai-
ned by relay 1 on the AFU board until the call is answered. The Z terminal is in immediate selection
mode on the doorphone destination group or terminal.

There is a specific key for answering the call, while another controls the automatic doorstrike (latch)
via relay 2 on the AFU board.

HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
- an AFU board (a CPU daughter board)
- a free Z device on an SLI board
- 2 free keys on one or more Reflexes sets
- an NPTT doorphone
- a doorstrike with transformer

Programming with MMC-PM5

- set the flag "DPHMode" to 01.
This flag, with a default value of 00, enables the PCX to manage the type of doorphone interface
employed. Only the values 00 and 01 are currently used.
By PC- PM5 (Expert View), select:
System Miscellaneous -> Memory Read/Write -> Misc. Labels -> DPHMode -> Details ->
01 -> Modify -> Write

- defining the Z interface (for subscriber 111, for example).

By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select:
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscriber -> 111 -> Details -> Misc. -> Special Function
= Door Phone -> Hotline = Immediate -> destination n° = set or group Subscribers ->
Subscriber -> 111 -> Details -> Features = protection against camp-on tone and intrusion
(optional)

- the feature access code for controlling the doorstrike

By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select:
Numbering -> Features in Conversation -> XX = Doorphone Unlock

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

APPLICATIONS DOORPHONES

- to create specific keys on the set(s) linked to the doorphone

- Supervision keys
By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select:
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscriber (select doorphone destination set) -> Details -
> Keys -> select a key -> Type = Resource Key -> Function = RSL -> Number = 111

- Doorstrike key
By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select:
Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscriber (select set) -> Details -> Keys -> select a key -
> Type = Function Key -> Function = Doorphone Unlock

- configuring the Auxiliaries board relays

By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select:
Hardware and Limits -> Auxiliary Interfaces -> Doorphone 1: Hold Line = relay1 (maintain
call), Doorstrike = relay2 (open doorstrike), Nº = doorphone Z interface number (111)

Connection diagram

PABX DOORPHONE
White
Loop catch control
Orange

Red A
Z station interface Audio (intercom)
(SLI board) Blue B

Door opener control Towards door opener

(AFU board)

220V

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

DOORPHONES APPLICATIONS

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

File
CALL METERING SERVICES
4

The CALL METERING module is used for collecting specific information concerning telephone commu-
nications and printing this information in various formats, depending on the type of management se-
lected.

This section describes the implementation and use of call metering statements or tickets; these can be
printed on any printer connected to a V24 4083 ASM or 4093 ASY-CTI option on a Reflexes terminal.

It is also possible to display data relating to communication.

Nota : Not all the metering information supplied by the ISVPN+ protocol (operator, node,
services: transit, overflow, ARS, etc.) appears on the tickets; this data can only be
used from within a central management application (Alcatel 4740, 4760 or other).

V24 metering printout:

T Metering printout parameters: format (information bits, parity, stop bits) and speed; by default:
8N1, 9600 bps).
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basesta-
tions List -> select V24 access -> Details -> V24

T Activating external metering: printing of tickets/statements is or is not activated (default setting)

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts->check External Me-
tering Activation

Nota : The details on configuring the V24 metering printout can be found in the "Annexes" section.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

Connection

15 m max.
UAI
V24
Printer or external
management system

3 RD

2 TD
Alcatel Option 4083ASM
0V Metering
OmniPCX Connector 7
printer
Office SUBD 25 pins
4 RTS

5 CTS
If the printer does not manage the
RTS/CTS signals, strap 4-5.

15 m max.
UAI
V24
Printer or external
management system

3 RD

2 TD
Option 4093 ASY-CTI
Connector 0V Metering
5
SUBD 9 pins printer
7 RTS

8 CTS
If the printer does not manage the
RTS/CTS signals, strap 7-8.

2/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

PRINCIPLES

Meter charging according to the operating phase

Operation Meter charging method

Conversation Metering units received on the line are charged to the subscriber
in conversation with that line.
Park or Hold Metering units received on a parked or holding line are charged
to the subscriber who parked the call.
Retrieve from parking or hold The metering units are charged to whomever activated the ser-
vice. Subsequent metering units are charged to the user who re-
trieved the call.
Automatic forwarding The system does not manage charges for external forwarding;
this is managed by the public network.
Conference Any conference costs are charged to the conference initiator.
Transfer If a transfer takes place on an external call, the cost of the com-
munication is charged to the initial user until the external user is
put through to the new correspondent.

When a call is transferred while ringing or on busy, metering

units are charged to the transfer destination.

No units are charged to the OS when external calls are transfer-

red to a system user; all the metering units are charged to the
destination subscriber.

However, if a call is meant for the OS (by transfer or callback),

the communication is charged to the OS.
Ext/Ext transfer Metering units received after the transfer are charged to the user
who made the second external call.
Transfer failure A callback after a transfer failure is always treated as an inco-
ming communication for the set to which the call is rerouted after
the no-answer time-out.
External forwarding When an internal call is made to a user whose calls are being
diverted to an external number, the metering units are charged
to the forwarded subscriber.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

DURATION AND COST

Duration

The system counts two types of duration:

- Duration of the communication: this corresponds to the time during which the system considers that
a line is allocated to a subscriber; this accounting occurs after the first switch to conversation mode
by the subscriber with the line.
- Call phase duration: the system counts the call phase duration of an incoming external communi-
cation from the moment when the system detects the call to when the line changes to conversation
with a system terminal. This information is used during external management.

Cost

The cost of a communication is calculated according to the number of units charged:

- The value of the basic metering unit may be constant, regardless of the length of the communica-
tion.
- The value of the basic metering unit may be variable: the cost of the first x metering units is calcu-
lated according to an initial basic metering unit value. As soon as a threshold number of metering
units is reached, the cost is calculated according to a second metering unit value.

Notas :

The software allows the actual duration of the communication to be shown on the metering ticket:

- on receipt of a CONNECT message on digital networks

- on receipt of a polarity inversion or a metering pulse on analog networks.

In all other cases, the duration given is only approximate since it is calculated by an off-hook simulation
mechanism.

Useful parameters for calculating the cost of a communication:

T Value of the basic metering unit before reaching the configured threshold (6 digits in the chosen
monetary unit, of which 0 to 2 are decimals)
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Metering Options for Active
Currency-> 1. Base Charge Rate

T Threshold for using the second basic metering unit value (in metering numbers from 0 to 99)
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Metering Options for Active
Currency-> N° of units for cost threshold

4/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

T Second basic metering unit value (6 digits of which 0 to 2 are decimals)

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Metering Options for Active
Currency -> 2. Base Charge Rate

T Number of decimals in the cost

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Metering Options for Active
Currency -> Fractional Part Length for Costs

Notas : If it has been decided to operate with a single metering unit value, the same value must be
given to the second metering unit value.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

COST OF ISDN SERVICES

Since the costs of some facilities are not transmitted by the public network, it is possible to assign a
given value to the cost meter whenever such a service is activated.

Cost of ISDN services:

T Cost of on-line metering (in metering units) in the case of manual activation (if the network does
not add the cost of the service at the beginning of the communication).
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Metering Options for Active
Currency-> Online Metering

T Cost of user to user signaling (in the chosen monetary unit, 6 digits – of which 0 to 2 are decimal).
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Metering Options for Active
Currency-> User to User Information

T Cost of PCX forwarding (in the monetary unit chosen, 6 digits – of which 0 to 2 are decimal).
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Metering Options for Active
Currency-> Diversion Charge Rate

Example of the calculation of the cost of a communication

This example shows the effect of using the "On-line metering" and "UUS" services in terms of commu-
nication costs.

Parameters configured:

- basic metering unit value: 1.70 F

- threshold: 1 metering unit
- second basic metering unit value after threshold: 2 F
- cost of on-line metering: 4 metering units
- cost of UUS: 5.10 F

Example of a statement:

A100 --> N01 23/10/96 08:31 00:00:08 8 ST TI 00388677700............

14.500

The 8 metering units are made up as follows:

- 1 metering unit for the call; cost = 1.70 F

- 4 metering units for activation of the on-line metering; cost = 7.70 F (1 x 1.70 F + 3 x 2 F)
- 3 metering units for UUS (number of metering units =UUS/first basic metering unit value cost, i.e.
5.10/1.70 = 3); cost = 5.10 F

6/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

COMPLEMENTARY SERVICES

- On-line metering
This complementary service includes the services TOTAL COST (display of the total cost on release
of the communication) and COST INDICATION (display of the cost during a communication). Dif-
ferent cases are possible:
During a call

NO Subscription YE S
TOTAL COST

NO
Subscription Subscripion
COST IND. COST IND. YE S
YE S
NO
Complete
metering
TOTAL COST management
on request for all calls
NO YES (+ CS)

Complete Complete
metering metering
management management
for all calls for all calls
(- CS) (+ CS)

TOTAL COST
on request
NO YES

COST IND. COST IND. COST IND.

NO on request YE S NO on request YE S NO on request YES

No metering Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete

management. metering management without management with management without metering
Only management cost sharing cost sharing cost sharing management
management of for all calls for the call for the call for the call for all calls
the duration (+ CS) (+ CS) (+ CS) (+ CS) (+ CS)

Subscription to the TOTAL COST or COST INDICATION service means that the complementary service
is activated on subscription to the network operator.

TOTAL COST or COST INDICATION on request (call by call) signifies that the complementary service
is activated by system configuration (MMC) or by activation from an S0 set.
+ CS signifies that the cost of complementary services (UUS, terminal forwarding) is managed by the
system (-CS if not).
At each automatic or manual activation of an ON-LINE METERING request, a charge unit is assigned
to the caller.
T Activation of online metering during communication
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Metering Options for Active
Currency -> Advice of Charge -> check During the Call or At the End of the Call

Notas : The "At the end of the call" field (TOTAL COST on demand) is not used in France.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

- User to User Signaling (I)

The cost of this service is programmable by MMC.
It does not depend on the length of the message. It is assigned as soon as the UUS is transmitted
(even if the called party has not answered). The cost is assigned to the user who initiated the call:
it therefore only applies to outgoing calls.
Note: During such a call, the cost of outgoing and incoming messages is assigned to the initiating
user.
- Terminal forwarding or external forwarding (R)
A ticket or statement is printed whenever this feature is activated or deactivated.

BEARER SERVICES

One of the metering ticket fields mentions the "bearer service" used for the communication.

The following bearer services are provided:

- ST: voice, group 3 facsimile, teletext and videotex type services.
- T+: group 4 facsimile, transparent data transmission.

8/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

INFORMATION DISPLAYED ON SETS

Temporary counters keep track of information destined to be displayed during a network conversation.

Information which can be displayed on all system terminals with displays (except S0 sets):

- duration
- duration + number of metering units (including for complementary services)
- duration + cost
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Metering Options for Active
Currency -> Display on Sets

Pulse meter

- This counter counts the number of metering units received on a line and assigns them to a given
subscriber.
- It is reset when the line is released or the call is transferred to a new subscriber.

Duration counter

- This counter adds up the duration (in minutes) during which a given line is in connection with a
given subscriber.
- It is reset when the line is released or allocated to a new subscriber.

Cost meter

- This counter records the cost of a communication (in local currency) between a given subscriber
and a trunk line.
- It is reset when the line is released or allocated to a new subscriber.

Examples of displays

- 4034 and Advanced sets:

00388736458 xxx.yy Frs xxx' 11:00

Hold jConf jMF>

- 4023 set:

xxx.yy Frs xxx'

Hold

- 4011, 4012, Easy and Premium sets:

xxx.yy Frs xxx'

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

METERING COUNTERS

Description of the counters

The recording of the number of metering units and the cost of communications is done by 12 counters,
distributed as follows:

- 10 set counters:
- 2 adding counters (one for the number of metering units and one for the cost):
- read only
- no reset possible
- the number of metering units displayed returns to zero when the maximum number is reached
- 8 partial counters (4 pulse meters, 4 cost meters) according to the on-line services defined:
- read only
- reset possible by MMC
- the storage capacity of these counters is 65535 metering units
- for a non S0 set, there is only one pulse and cost meter.
- 2 line counters:
- one partial pulse meter which can be reset
- one adding pulse meter which cannot be reset
- the storage capacity of these counters is 4 thousand million metering units.

All of these counters can be read from MMC-Station or from MMC-PM5 (the updating of metering
counters at MMC-PM5 level can only be done during a PCX -> PC backup in a new file).

Metering counters

T Reading and resetting set counters

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basesta-
tions List -> subscriber identification -> Details -> Metering

T Reading and resetting line counters

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: External Lines -> List of Accesses -> line identification ->
Details

T Reading all the subscriber adding counters

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering Counters

Counter changes in break-out/transit

- normal break-out (leased line to public line): the line counter changes
- break-out by external forwarding (leased line to public line): the set counter changes
- normal transit (public line to public line): no counter change
- transit by hunting group external forwarding (public line to public line): the hunting group counter
changes

Meter printouts

10/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

The contents of the counters can also be printed out by the metering printer (by MMC-Station: Instal/
Admin -> Count -> Subscr or Access).

Set counters and operator counters

TAXES AND COST COUNTERS PER SUBSCRIBER - 12/08/00 14:05

USER TAXES : C1 C2 C3 C4 TOTAL

COST : C1 C2 C3 C4 TOTAL

A101 1203 20 0 400 2645

2467.50 422.32 0 53 23577.45
G1 23 0 2 0 60
47.05 0 23.76 0 458.32
FIELD DESCRIPTION
USER Terminal number (max. 9 characters, right justified); the number format is:

- AXXX for a subscriber

- GXX for a hunting group

C1-C2-C3-C4 Partial pulse and cost meters per subscriber/hunting group (5 characters)
TOTAL Total cost meter per subscriber/hunting group (5 characters)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

Line counters

TAX METERS PER ACCESS - 12/08/00 14:05

ACCESS PARTIAL TOTAL

L01 12030 26452584

N01 23532 6052487
FIELD DESCRIPTION
ACCESS Access number (max. 5 characters, right justified); the number format is:

- LXX for an analog line during break in/break out

- NXX in the case of a T0 basic access

- PX in the case of T2 primary access

PARTIAL Partial pulse meters per access (10 characters)
TOTAL Total pulse meters per access (10 characters)

Notas :

- Once a counter printout has been launched, no statement or ticket can be printed.
- A form feed is automatically performed before and after a counter printout.
- If the installer wants the SUBSCRIBER and the ACCESS counters to be printed on the same page,
the second printout request must be done before the end of processing the first printout.
- Pressing successively on the Subscr (or Access) key results in printing the counters twice. A third re-
quest is only taken into account when the first request has been printed.
- If a printout problem occurs (for example no more paper), any printout request is ignored.
- There is no specific display on the set for printer problems; only a system message is generated.

12/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

MANAGING METERING TICKETS AND STATEMENTS

The system enables metering tickets and statements to be printed out.

Selecting the type of metering printout

T line-by-line statement printout or ticket printout (1 ticket per call)

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts -> Type of Printout

Every call that meets the monitoring parameters defined for the various system terminals triggers a tic-
ket printout.

If a communication is free of charge (incoming call for example) or if an incoming call remains
unanswered, the transmitted ticket will specify the call history (ringing time, call duration, etc.).

Set monitoring

T Definition of the monitoring criteria values: cost threshold (monetary value), duration threshold
(from 0 to 99 minutes), international prefix (4 digits maximum).
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Metering Options for Active
Currency-> Activation Criteria

T Assigning the type of monitored communications for each set (parameter to be defined set by set):
none (no monitoring) or for all communications (outgoing and incoming) or all outgoing commu-
nications with monitoring criteria active; if this is the case, define the active criteria: duration thres-
hold (in minutes), cost threshold (6 digits of which 0 to 2 are decimals) or monitored (international
prefix).
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basesta-
tions List -> subscriber identification -> Details -> Metering

T It is also possible to assign a profile defining the applied monitoring criteria to a group of sets.
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basesta-
tions List -> Profiles

T To print out a ticket or statement if an incoming call is unanswered (default setting = no)
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts->check or uncheck
Print non-answered IC calls

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

FUNCTION OF THE BUFFER MEMORY

This is used to temporarily store the different messages (output terminal not available, several simul-
taneous messages, etc.).

The maximum number of tickets or statements that can be stored is 1000.

Alarm activation threshold

T percentage of tickets or statements printed before the alarm is activated (between 0% and 99%:
70% by default)
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts -> Printer alarm
threshold

As soon as the programmed threshold has been reached, an alarm is generated alerting the user
(message in the call history + flashing of the operator LED).

When the buffer memory is full, any new information is lost.

XON/XOFF TRANSMISSION PROTOCOL

When the printer is ready to print, it transmits an XON control character. The data received is stored
on a buffer. If there are only a certain number of bytes available on this buffer, the printer will transmit
XOFF. It continues to receive characters and print before transmission halt. When part of the buffer is
released, it transmits XON. The printer also transmits XOFF in the event of the following problems:
printer off-line, no more paper, paper jam, etc.. It transmits XON when these problems have been re-
solved.

Notas : The printer DTR signal is connected to the interface CTS signal if XON is not received.

14/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

STATEMENTS PRINTED LINE BY LINE

Each statement corresponds to a communication (16 fields maximum, separated by a space.)

Statement output format:

USER LINE TIME TAXES ADD. SERVICES MODE COST USER NAME
TYPE I DATE I DURATION I SERV I DIALLED NUMBER I RING I BUSIN. CODE I

A101 --> L04 23/10/00 08:31 00:02:40 6 ST 00388677700 M 00:00 1.000

Definition parameters for a statement:

T language for the printout

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Printouts -> Language

T company name: max. 16 characters

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Printouts -> Company Name

T masking the last 4 digits of the number dialed

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts -> check or uncheck
Masking 4 last digits

T maximum number of statements per page: 1 to 99 (50 by default)

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts -> Proofs per page

T form feed at the end of the day: yes/no (no by default)

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts -> check or uncheck
Form feed permitted

T Select printing of a header on each page, on the first page or not at all
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts -> Head

Notas :

If the form feed is active, it will be performed:

- when the maximum number of statements per page has been reached
- at the end of the day: the number of statements printed in one day is indicated at the bottom of the
page on the right-hand side (5 digits maximum)
- during startup if the header printing parameter is active

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

T fields to be printed on the statement; if none of the fields below have been defined, a default me-
tering statement is printed. It includes all the fields preceded by an asterisk (*):

Selecting:
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts -> Printed Fields ->
select each field:

- (*) charged user (yes/no)

- (*) communication type (yes/no)
- (*) trunk n° (yes/no)
- (*) date (yes/no)
- (*) time (yes/no)
- (*) duration (yes/no)
- (*) number of taxes (yes/no)
- (*) services (yes/no)
- (*) facilities (yes/no)
- (*) number dialed (yes/no)
- dialing mode (yes/no)
- ringing duration (yes/no)
- cost of communication (yes/no)
- business code (yes/no)
- subscriber name (yes/no)
- account code name (yes/no)
- initial user (yes/no)
- operator (yes/no)
- initial user – 8 digits (yes/no)
- charged user – 8 digits (yes/no)
- 4-digit line (yes/no)
- node (yes/no)

16/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

DESCRIPTION OF THE FIELDS IN THE STATEMENT

FIELD DESCRIPTION
INITIAL USER (1) 5 characters (left justified)

Outgoing call: empty field indicated by ****

Incoming call: called number (hunting group or set)

- AXXXX for a subscriber (2, 3 or 4-digit numbering plans, or the last digits
in the case of 8-digit numbering plans)

- GX for a hunting group (G9 for the attendant group)

CHARGED USER (2) 5 characters (left justified)

Outgoing call: caller

Incoming call: user who answered the call

Trunk identity not supplied: access number

- AXXXX for the calling or called user * (2, 3 or 4-digit numbering plans, or
the last digits in the case of 8-digit numbering plans)

- LXX for an analog line during break in/break out

- NXX for T0 access (no private/public distinction)

- PXX for T2 primary access (no private/public distinction)

TYPE 3 characters (left justified)

Type of communication:

-->: outgoing call on public network

<--: incoming call on public network

CS+: request complementary service

CS-: cancel complementary service

LINE 3 characters

Number of the line:

- LXX for a public analog line

- NXX for a public or private T0 base access

- PXX for a public or private T2 primary access

For wake-up calls: R (for room)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

DATE 8 characters

Date of the communication, made up of 3 x 2 numbers separated by "/"

TIME 5 characters

Start time of the communication, made up of 2 x 2 numbers separated by ":"

DURATION 8 characters

Duration of the communication, 3 x 2 numbers separated by ":"

For wake-up calls: programmed time

TAXES 5 characters

Number of metering units

SERV 2 characters

Bearer services:

- ST: telephone service (voice, G3 fax, teletex, videotex)

- T+: G4 fax, transparent data transmission

FACILITIES Max. 6 characters (each character indicates one complementary service; all
6 complementary services can thus be activated together)

Complementary service:

- I: user to user signaling

- R: terminal forwarding (external forwarding)

- T: on-line metering

- S: substitution (DISA transit)

- X: change correspondent (transfer)

- N: PCX forwarding
EXTERNAL CORRES- 26 characters (left justified)
PONDENT NUMBER
Dialed number:

- outgoing call: the number transmitted on the line (public or private)

- incoming call: the number received on the line (public or private)

- the destination number for external forwarding

For wake-up calls: WAKE-UP PROGRAMMED, WAKE-UP CANCELLED,

WAKE-UP ACKNOWLEDGED, WAKE-UP NOT ACKNOWLEDGED: FREE or
BUSY, SET NOT AVAILABLE

18/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

MODE 1 character

Dialing mode

- M: manual dialing

- I: individual (or personal) speed dial numbers

- R: collective speed dial numbers

RING 5 characters

Duration of the ringer, for all incoming ringing phases, made up of 2 x 2

numbers separated by ":"
COST 10 characters

Cost of the communication including ISDN service activation, where appli-

cable
BUSIN CODE 16 characters (right justified)

Charge account code specific to the communication

SUBSCRIBER NAME 16 characters

User name:

- outgoing call: caller

- incoming call: called party

- name associated with the account code

NODE Field not used
OPE. 1 character

Operator identifier
INITIAL USER 9 characters (left justified)

Same functions as field 1; employed when using an 8-digit numbering plan

CHARGED USER 9 characters (left justified)

Same functions as field 2; employed when using an 8-digit numbering plan

LINE 4 Field used instead of LINE when identification requires 4 characters; in this
case, the NXX and VXX identifiers from the LINE field are replaced by N**
and V**.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 19/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

EXAMPLES OF STATEMENTS

Outgoing call

USER LINE TIME TAXES FACILITIES MODE COST USER NAME

TYPE I DATE I DURATION I SERV I DIALLED NUMBER I RING I BUSIN CODE I

A101 --> N1 23/10/00 08:31 00:02:40 6 ST 00388677700 M 00:00 1.000 DUPONT

Transfer of an outgoing call

▼ A101 calls an external number then transfers the communication to 125.

USER LINE TIME TAXES FACILITIES MODE COST USER NAME

TYPE I DATE I DURATION I SERV I DIALLED NUMBER I RING I BUSIN CODE I

A101 --> N1 23/10/00 08:31 00:02:40 6 ST 00388677700 M 00:00 1.000 DUPONT

A125 --> N1 23/10/00 08:31 00:03:20 8 STX 00388677700 M 02:00 1.000 MARTIN
Transit call

▼ A101 is forwarded on the private external number 751234.

USER LINE TIME TAXES FACILITIES MODE COST USER NAME

TYPE I DATE I DURATION I SERV I DIALLED NUMBER I RING I BUSIN CODE I

A101 CS+ 23/10/00 08:31 00:00:00 0 ** R 751234 M 00:00 0.000 DUPONT

A101 I-> N1 23/10/00 08:31 00:03:20 1 ST 751234 M 00:00 1.000 DUPONT
A101 <-I N1 23/10/00 08:31 00:03:20 0 ST M 00:00 1.000 DUPONT

Incoming subscriber call

▼ Incoming call answered by the called subscriber.

USER LINE TIME TAXES FACILITIES MODE COST USER NAME

TYPE I DATE I DURATION I SERV I DIALLED NUMBER I RING I BUSIN CODE I

A101 A101<-- N1 23/10/00 08:31 00:02:40 0 ST 00388677700 M 00:04 0.000 DUPONT

▼ Incoming call answered by a subscriber (A125) other than the called subscriber (dynamic forwar-
ding, interception, monitoring, immediate forwarding).

USER LINE TIME TAXES FACILITIES MODE COST USER NAME

TYPE I DATE I DURATION I SERV I DIALLED NUMBER I RING I BUSIN CODE I

A125 A101<-- N1 23/10/00 08:31 00:02:40 0 ST 00388677700 M 00:04 0.000 MARTIN

Incoming hunting group call

▼ Incoming answered hunting group call.

USER LINE TIME TAXES FACILITIES MODE COST USER NAME

TYPE I DATE I DURATION I SERV I DIALLED NUMBER I RING I BUSIN CODE I

G50 A125<-- N1 23/10/00 08:31 00:02:40 0 ST 00388677700 M 00:04 0.000 MARTIN

20/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

External forwarding

▼ The operator is forwarded on the external number 0388677700; 125 calls the operator.

USER LINE TIME TAXES FACILITIES MODE COST USER NAME

TYPE I DATE I DURATION I SERV I DIALLED NUMBER I RING I BUSIN CODE I
G9 CS+ 23/10/00 08:31 00:00:00 0 ** R 00388677700 M 00:00 0.000 PO
G9 --> N1 23/10/00 08:31 00:03:20 1 ST 00388677700 M 00:00 1.000
G9 CS- indicates forward cancelled

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 21/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

METERING TICKETS

Printout format of a ticket

N 19 ALCATEL
SUBSCRIBER : A122
Number of the ticket prin DATE : 23.10.2000
ted during the day (here, it LINE : 11
th
is the 19 ticket printed on
23/10/2000). TIME : 08:35
NUMBER : 0038867770
COST : 3.50

Definition parameters for a ticket:

T language for the printout

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts -> Language

T company name: max. 16 characters

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts -> Company Name

T masking the last 4 digits of the number dialed

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts -> check or uncheck
Masking 4 last digits

T number of lines between tickets (1 by default)

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts -> Number of Blank
Lines

22/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

Description of the fields in the metering ticket

FIELD DESCRIPTION
SUBSCRIBER or TER- Number of the set or terminal (max. 8 characters)
MINAL
This number is preceded by A if it corresponds to a set
DATE Current date. 8 characters: 3 x 2 digits separated by "/"
LINE 3 characters

Number of the trunk line used (2 characters)

- LXXX for a public analog line

- NXXX for a public or private T0 base access

- PXXX for a public or private T2 primary access

- VXXX for an IP trunk

TIME Start time of the communication, made up of 2 x 2 numbers separated by
"H".
NUMBER Number dialed (max. 26 characters)
COST Cost of the communication or complementary service

WAKE-UP

Conditions for printing a ticket/statement for wake-up calls or temporary appointment re-
minders:

- wake-up activated
- wake-up cancelled
- wake-up failed
- wake-up answered
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Printouts-> Appointment prin-
tout for…

Printout format for a ticket

N 19 ALCATEL
SUBSCRIBER : A122
DATE : 25.12.2000
TIME : 08:35
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGED

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 23/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

Printout format for a statement

USER LINE TIME TAXES FACILITIES MODE COST USER NAME NOD
TYPE I DATE I DURATION I SERV I DIALLED NUMBER I RING I BUSIN CODE I OPERAT

A122 --> R 25/12/00 08:31 07:45 ALARM PROGRAMMED

A122 --> R 25/12/00 08:31 ALARM CANCELLED
A122 --> R 25/12/00 08:35 ALARM ACKNOWLEDGED
A140 --> R 25/12/00 08:31 ALARM NOT ACKNOWLEDGED : FREE
A145 --> R 25/12/00 08:35 ALARM NOT ACKNOWLEDGED : BUSY
A146 --> R 25/12/00 08:35 ALARM STATION NOT AVAILABLE

The fields TYPE, TAXES, MODE, RING, COST, BUSIN CODE and SUBSCRIBER NAME are not signifi-
cant. The DURATION field is only filled in if the time is programmed.

R = room.

24/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

USING THE EURO

This paragraph describes the configurations which need to be carried out to accommodate for the fu-
ture integration of the Euro in several European countries.

The following parameters need to be configured:

T the conversion rate with the current currency of the country:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Currency Conversion -> Exchange Rate

T Specify whether the public network operator carries out this conversion at the same date.
- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Currency Conversion -> check ❏ No Con-
version, ❏ User Defined or ❏ Immediately

T the label used ("EUR", for example):

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Metering -> Metering Options for Inactive
Currency -> Currency Name

T the date and time of the conversion:

- By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Metering -> Currency Conversion-> Conversion Date
& Time (only on selecting ❏ User Defined

At the date and time specified, the system will manage the following Euro conversions:

- partial counters and accumulators of sets and meter credit for Hotel clients.
- basic meter charge cost and cost thresholds (Business and Hotel), cost of VAT (Hotel).
- cost of metering reminder.

If the public operator carries out the conversion, then the conversion report between the system cur-
rency and the public network currency is equal to 1, and the following parameters are to be configu-
red:

- real cost of the metering unit.

- cost of UUS and PCX forwarding.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 25/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

ANNEX: V24 CONFIGURATIONS

V24 Signals

DCD DSR RTS TD 0V RTS CTS

Female socket PG RD TD
SG CTS RD
(view from behind station)

13 1 5 1

25 14 6 9

TI RI DTR LL

Functions performed by the various managed circuits (indications for 25-point connectors)

No of No of Abbreviation
Meaning Direction
pin circuit CCITT EIA
1 101 Protection Ground TP PG
7 102 Signal Ground TS SG
2 103 Transmit Data ED TD DTE --> DCE
3 104 Receive Data RD RD DTE <-- DCE
4 105 Request To Send DPE RTS DTE --> DCE
5 106 Clear To Send PAE CTS DTE <-- DCE
6 107 Data Set Ready PDP DSR DTE <-- DCE
108/1 Connect Data Set CPD (*) DTE --> DCE
20
108/2 Data Terminal Ready TPD DTR DTE --> DCE
8 109 Data Carrier Detect DS/DP DCD DTE <-- DCE
22 125 Ring Indicator IA RI DTE <-- DCE
18 141 Local Loop BL LL DTE --> DCE
25 142 Test Indicator IT TI DTE <-- DCE

(*): pin not assigned in standard EIA-RS232

101 (1): Protection Ground (PG)

This pin ensures continuity between the earth on the cable and on the optional board (the protection
and signal grounds are in this case connected to a joint reference).

26/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

102 (7): Signal Ground (SG)

Reference potential for the junction circuits.

103 (2): Transmitting Data (TD)

The data signals from the DTE are transmitted to the DCE on this circuit.

104 (3): Receiving Data (RD)

The data signals from the DCE are transmitted to the DTE on this circuit.

105 (4): Request To Send (RTS)

This circuit commands the DCE to prepare to transmit on the data channel.
Closed status forces the DCE into transmission mode.
Open status forces the DCE into non transmission mode on the data channel once all the data trans-
ferred on circuit 103 has been transmitted.
When connecting a DTE without a circuit 105, you should loop circuits 105 and 106 on the DCE soc-
ket.

106 (5): Clear To Send (CTS)

This circuit indicates whether the DCE is ready to receive data signals on circuit 104 and to transmit
them on the data channel.
Closed status indicates that the DCE is ready to receive data signals from the DTE on circuit 103.
Open status indicates that the DCE is not ready to receive data signals from the DTE on circuit 103.
In full-duplex mode, this circuit, in association with circuit 105, enables flux control during the data
transfer phase. Closed status means that the remote unit authorizes transmission.

107 (6): Data Set Ready (DSR)

The closure of this circuit indicates that the DCE is ready to operate. This acknowledges the data chan-
nel trunk seizure.
In addition to the trunk seizure, this circuit indicates that the DCE is ready to exchange other signals to
trigger the data exchange (initialize the dialog).

108/1 (20): Connect data set to line (CDSL)

This signal, transmitted by the DTE, forces the DCE to connect to the data channel.
Incoming call: As a general rule, the DTE emits this signal in response to an incoming call defined by
the closure of circuit 125 on the DCE. The DCE then closes circuit 107 as soon as the line is seized,
which triggers the dialog initialization phase. This circuit enables the DTE to remain in control of the
response to incoming calls, postponing or barring trunk seizures during critical operating phases.
Outgoing call: The closed status of this circuit can be used to initialize an outgoing direct call with an
automatic call DCE.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 27/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

108/2 (20): Data Terminal Ready (DTR)

The DTE closes this circuit to tell the DCE it is ready to operate.
Incoming call: closing circuit 108/2 authorizes the DCE to take an incoming call. The DTE is advised
accordingly by the closure of circuit 107 to indicate the trunk seizure. The dialog initialization phase
now begins.
Outgoing call: the outgoing call is initialized between the DTE and the DCE by a local dialog exchan-
ged on circuits 103 and 104.

109 (8): Data Carrier Detect (DCD)

Closing this circuit indicates that the carrier signal received on the data channel meets the relevant spe-
cifications.
This circuit can also be used in the closed state for DTE-DCE data exchanges when programming or
controlling serial automatic call DCEs.

125 (22): Ring Indicator (RI)

This circuit is closed to tell the DTE that a call signal has been received by the DCE.

141 (18): Local Loop (LL)

This circuit controls type 3 test loops in the DCE.

The closure of the circuit loops the DCE transmission channel back to the reception channel, on the
data channel side. On detecting that circuit 142 is closed, the DTE can then, in full-duplex mode, test
the DCE transmission interfaces. This looping function is not yet available in the current state of deve-
lopment of the product.

142 (25): Test Indicator (TI)

The closure of circuit 142 indicates that the DCE is in test mode, which precludes any transmission with
a remote DTE.

V24 metering printouts: configuration details

Physical characteristics

- Type of interface: V24

- Operating mode: asynchronous
- Interface function: DCE

Transmission characteristics

- Number of significant characters: 5, 6, 7 or 8 (default value)

- Parity: even, odd, no (default value), marked (set at 1) or spaced (set at 0)
- Number of stop bits: 1 (default value), 1.5 or 2
- Baudrate: 50, 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default value), 14400, 19200
- Rate adaptation: V110 (default value), X31, V120 or V14E (for 57600 bps)

28/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

APPLICATIONS CALL METERING SERVICES

Flux control

Possibilities available in either instance – flux control of the terminal by the adapter and vice versa:

- Mode: none (no flux control), inband (control with 2 characters - XON and XOFF by default) or
circuit (control with the RTS and CTS signals)
- If Mode = inband, then decimal value for XON (17 by default) and XOFF (19 by default)

Implicit number of XON characters

This field defines the number of XON characters required to boot the equipment:

- Zero
- One
- Two
- Three
- Four
- XANY (non-significant option)

Echo

Check the box for a local or character by character echo in Command mode.

No input acknowledgement

Check the box to operate without V24 device input acknowledgements at the terminal.

Display caller address

Check the box to send the caller address to the terminal or DCE.

Escape sequence

This field defines a sequence of 3 characters maximum for switching the V24 device from CONNEC-
TED (data transmission) mode to COMMAND mode. Each character is defined by entering its decimal
value: the hexadecimal value and the character are displayed automatically.

Communication protocol

- Hayes
- Automatic
- V25 bis 108/1
- V25 bis 108/2

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 29/30

CALL METERING SERVICES APPLICATIONS

DSR option

This field defines the operating mode for the DSR signal:

- Always active
- Active during the call
- Inactive in release phase

DTR option

This field defines the reaction of the DTR signal:

- Normal
- Forced

RTS option

This field defines the reaction of the CTS signal when the RTS signal changes state:

- CTS tracks RTS

- RTS ignored, CTS ON

Inactivity timeout

This field defines, in 30-second increments, the period of inactivity after which the call is released.

Loopback mode

This field defines the test loopback employed:

- no loop
- loop 1 (as defined by the V54 recommendation)
- loop 2 (as defined by the V54 recommendation)

30/30 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

APPLICATIONS STARTING-UP AN ELITECOST 64-128

File
STARTING-UP AN ELITECOST 64-128
5

The Elitecost 64-128 Enterprise (or Business), Guest or Hotel can be installed on the system Alcatel
OmniPCX Office. It operates starting from the version 19.3 release R1.1.

CONNECTING THE ELITECOST 64-128

Connect the V24 cord supplied, from the DB9 ’PCX" connector of the Elitecost 64-128 to the DB9 "V24"
connector on the 4093 Box (V24 option).

UA cord V24 cord

UA connector
V24 connector "PABX" connector

Alcatel OmniPCX Office

Reflexes set (UA)
with V24 option

Eltecost 64-128

PROGRAMMING OF ELITECOST 64-128

Refer to the Installation Manual of the Elitecost 64-128 section III page 38.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

STARTING-UP AN ELITECOST 64-128 APPLICATIONS

CONFIGURING THE ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

The Elitecost 64-128 Guest or Hotel operates only in the Hotel mode. To configure the system Alcatel
OmniPCX Office, please perform the following operations via PM5 (Expert View):

T Check that the system is operating in the Hotel mode ; if not, perform a cold reset and run the
"Wizard" to shift into the "Hotel" mode.
T Connect the PC with the system and open the "Communication path" session.
T Activate monitoring for alls calls on all subscribers:
- Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details -> Metering ->
Monitoring -> select ❏ All calls

T Activate the external metering and choice the language:

- Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations _> Details -> Metering -> ac-
tivate ❏ External Metering Activation, Language = English

T In the Printed Fields of Proof, select all the fiels except User 8 and Trunk 4.
T Manage appointment calls by Elitecost (applicable from Elitecost version 4.2 only:
- Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations _> Details -> Metering ->
Appointment printout for... : Activation, Cancellation, Failed, Complete

Nota :Check the Amount of taxes field only if you have configured in the Elitecost te "4. Unit rat
= 0 field in "3. Configuration" menu -> "3. Costing" -> "1. Costing parameter

T Set option V24/UA (ASM 4093) used for metering inMetering -> Metering Transmission Cha-
racteristics" , ensure that the format is 9600 8 N1.
T For the V24 port, remove the flow control, check the transmission format and change the commu-
nication protocol to V25 bis 108/1
- Subscribers/Basestations List -> Subscribers/Basestations List -> Details -> V24

T Check printing check-in/check-out tickets:

- System Miscellaneous -> Hotel parameters -> Print check-in/check-out

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

APPLICATIONS NMC (NETWORK MANAGEMENT
CENTER)

File
NMC (Network Management Center)
6

The Alcatel 4740/4760 network Management Center has been designed to enable telephone network
managers to manage, administer and optimize one or several Alcatel OmniPCX Office communica-
tion systems remotely.

ENVIRONMENT

Connecting remote Alcatel OmniPCX Office systems (Management Center subscribers)

All remote Alcatel OmniPCX Office subscribed systems managed by the same Management Center
are connected to the public network (PSTN or ISDN) through analog trunk lines or via T0 (2 B-chan-
nels), T2 or E1 accesses (30 B-channels).

Notas : ANALOG NMC:

The TL must be configured with Polarity Inversion or Detection of Busy Tone to release the modem (the
Management Center being the master of the communication).

Connecting the Management Center

The Alcatel 4760 station is connected to the Alcatel OmniPCX Office system by an Ethernet link (the
client LAN, ISDN or V34 modem).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

NMC (NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS
CENTER)

CONFIGURATION AND IMPLEMENTATION

The Network Management Control option makes it possible to access the various configuration win-
dows to set the network management parameters. To access the NMC home window from within the
main menu:

Select the Network Management Control menus, -> the following sub-menus are proposed:
Network Management, Urgent alarms, Recall/Authorized Callers

Attention :

Programming the authorized callers also affects access to the system by NMC, as well as remote access
by PM5.

"NETWORK MANAGEMENT" SUB-MENU

Network Management Active

Check the box to activate the central management feature (this avoids starting up the management
feature before the end of the system configuration). By default, the feature is inhibited.

General

- NMC N° for automatic alarm reporting (outside NMC session): number in the Management Center
numbering plan to dial for automatic alarm reporting if no NMC session is in progress.
- NMC Connectivity Mode: this field defines the connectivity mode.
- PCX Identification: this field, with a maximum of 30 characters, states the name of the remote
system. The name is defined by the Management Center; it cannot be modified by PM5 (Expert
View).

Notas :

The fields which are not modifiable by PM5 (Expert View) are defined either by the system or by the
Management Center; thus, as a minimum, an "on-line" connection with the remote system is required
so that these fields can be exploited.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

APPLICATIONS NMC (NETWORK MANAGEMENT

CENTER)

Call Accounting

- Metering activated for: activation of metering depending on the type of call: the following choices
are available:
- no call
- incoming calls
- outgoing calls
- incoming and outgoing calls (default value)
- Threshold for alarm activation(default 80 %): 100 % = 1000 to 30000 tickets depending on the
software license and hardware configuration. When the assigned threshold is reached, an alarm
is sent to the Management Center (on condition that automatic alarm reporting is activated and
the 'NMC_THRESHOLD_METERING_TBL' alarm is configured as urgent); the Management Center
reacts to the alarm and connects up to the remote system in order to collect and void the metering
tickets.

"Alarm Reporting": (Only visible after clicking the "Part 2" button

Alarm reporting enables the remote system to inform the Management Center as soon as an abnormal
event arises with the PCX.

- Automatic Alarm Reporting check the box to activate automatic alarm reporting. By default, this
feature is inhibited.
- Reaction on erroneous call (for example, the call number does not correspond to that of the Ma-
nagement Center):
- Time before retry (min): waiting time, in minutes, before trying again (value between 1 and
12 minutes inclusive, by default: 12 minutes)
- Max. number of retries: maximum number of call backs (a single call back authorized)
- Reaction on non-answered calls (for example, the Management Center has not answered, as all
the accesses are busy):
- Time before retry (min): waiting time, in minutes, before trying again (value between 1 and
12 minutes inclusive, by default: 12 minutes)
- Max. number of retries: maximum number of call backs(value between 1 and 99, by de-
fault: 50)
- Threshold for alarm reporting activation (by default, when the threshold is reached, an alarm is
sent to the Management Center). The Management Center is connected to the remote system auto-
matically so as to deduct the alarm information:
- History table: by default 80 % (100 % = 400 history messages)
- HW anomaly table: hardware messages, by default 80 % (100 % = 200 hardware messages)
- Urgent Alarm Table: by default 80 % (100 % = 200 urgent alarm messages)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

NMC (NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS
CENTER)

"URGENT ALARMS" SUB-MENU

This window makes it possible to define the urgent alarms for hardware anomalies as well as historic
messages.

Pre-defined urgent events in the Hardware Anomalies table:

- UNSUCCESSFUL ATTEMPT TO PRINT: Message emitted by the formatter (printer) after every 5
failed print attempts.
- T2_NO_SIGNAL: a signal shortage has been detected on a T2 access
- T2_RECEIVE_REMOTE_ALARM: A remote alarm indication has been received on a T2 access.

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF THE NMC FEATURE (remote system)

The recommended procedure is as follows:

- activate network management (value deactivated by default or after a cold reset)

- enter the remote system's complete configuration:
- station number for alarm reporting
- validation of the automatic alarm reporting feature
- definition of the various thresholds
- definition of the urgent alarms
- etc.
- activate the central management feature by checking the "Network Management Active" box in
the "Network Management" window
- carry out a warm reset for table dimensioning
- check that the call number has been programmed properly.

Remarque : Transmissions of Internet alarms are integrated in the History messages window.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

APPLICATIONS POINT TO POINT / POINT TO
MULTIPOINT T0

File
POINT TO POINT / POINT TO
7
MULTIPOINT T0
DEFINITIONS

Point to Point link: a Point to Point link is a digital access to the public network used exclusively by
Alcatel OmniPCX Office. The TEI settings are generally fixed, as there is only one terminal (Alcatel Om-
niPCX Office) for this access, but they can also be dynamic.

Point to Multipoint link: a Point to Multipoint link is a digital access to the public network shared by
several terminals. In this type of configuration, each terminal is identified by its TEI and dedicated DDI
sequence. The TEI management mode can be fixed or dynamic, depending on the public operator.

Both types of link can be supported simultaneously on the same system. The TEI management mode
(fixed or automatic) is configured separately for each access.

Example of the environment

This example illustrates both connection types: Point to Point and Point to Multipoint.

T0 Point-to-Multipoint
Public ISDN T0 bus
exchange

T0 MSN 1

Terminal 1 (TEI 1= 64)

MSN 2, MSN 3
... other terminals

MSN 4, MSN 5, MSN 6, .... MSN n

Auto TEI = 64 to 126
T0 Point-to-Point

TEI fixed = 0 DDI

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

POINT TO POINT / POINT TO APPLICATIONS
MULTIPOINT T0

DYNAMIC TEI

This feature assigns a TEI automatically to each T0 bus (mainly assured by the public network on mul-
tipoint accesses).

At each connection and at each reset, (cold or warm), each T0 "asks" the network to allocate it a TEI;
this procedure is carried out by sending 2 level 2 messages: the "Identity Request" message sent by the
system to the network, then the "Identity Assigned" message sent by the network. The value assigned is
stored by the system until the next reset.

Possible TEI values (in accordance with ETS300 125)

- 0 to 63: fixed TEIs (values used on the system side)

- 64 to 126: automatic TEIs (values used on the network operator side)
- 127: value reserved for management operations
When changing from a digital access with fixed TEI management to automatic TEI manage-
ment, it is essential to perform a warm reset so that the PCX sends the TEI allocation request
to the public exchange; if not, the TEI management on the system will be unstable.

CONFIGURATION

T0 configured in Point to Point

T To define the management mode:
By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: External Lines -> List of Accesses -> Details -> check ❏ Fixed
TEI or ❏ Auto TEI

T For fixed TEI, assign a value between 0 and 63 inclusive:

By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: External Lines -> List of Accesses -> Details -> Value

T Configuring the installation number:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Installation Number
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Ins Num -> Public

T Completing the substitution table (refer to the file concerning DDI with more than 4 digits in the
"System Features" section):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> DDI Number Modification Table
- by MMC-Station: Num Pln -> PubNMT

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

APPLICATIONS POINT TO POINT / POINT TO

MULTIPOINT T0

T Fill in the public numbering plan:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Numbering Plans -> Public Numbering Plan
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> PubNum

T0 configured in Point to Multipoint

- To configure the T0 access in Point to Multipoint:
By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: External Lines -> List of Accesses -> Details -> select ❏ Point
to Multipoint

- To define the management mode:

By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: External Lines -> List of Accesses -> Details -> select ❏
Fixed TEI or ❏ Auto TEI

- For fixed TEI, assign a value between 0 and 63 inclusive:

By MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: External Lines -> List of Accesses -> Details -> Value

- Configuring the installation number:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Installation Number
- by MMC-Station: Global -> Ins Num -> Public

- Completing the substitution table (refer to the file concerning DDI with more than 4 digits in the
"System Features" section):
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> DDI Number Modification Table
- by MMC-Station: Num Pln -> PubNMT

- Fill in the public numbering plan:

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Numbering -> Numbering Plans -> Public Numbering Plan
- by MMC-Station: NumPln -> PubNum

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

POINT TO POINT / POINT TO APPLICATIONS
MULTIPOINT T0

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

- By default, the T0 accesses are in Point to Point with automatic TEI management for all countries.
- Once the system has been configured for automatic TEI and reset, the automatic TEI request is sent
to the network. If there is no reply before the T202 timeout, the system switches back to fixed TEI
mode; otherwise, it stays in automatic TEI mode.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

APPLICATIONS PERMANENT LOGICAL LINK (PLL)

File
PERMANENT LOGICAL LINK (PLL)
8

The Permanent Logical Link (PLL) service handles the simultaneous bi-directional transfer of data fra-
mes between a T interface (T0 or T2) and an S0 interface (ePLL) or between 2 S0 interfaces (iPLL), each
interface being one extremity of a semi-PLL with:

- either a public network Packet Access Point (PAP) on the T interface side

- or an S0 terminal connected to the S0 bus on the S0 interface side.

The data packets are exchanged on this link in a transparent way through the D channels of these ac-
cesses.

The rate for this type of data transmission is limited to 9600 bps.

The link between the 2 Alcatel OmniPCX Office interfaces that connect the 2 semi-PLLs is established
by configuring a routing table.

The S0 terminals are connected to 4084 or 4094 interfaces.

DEFINITIONS

- SAPI: Service Access Point Identification; the value in the SAPI field identifies the type of information
transported by the data link and, for this reason, identifies the targeted access point, source or fra-
me destination. By default, a SAPI value of 16 is assigned to links carrying X25 type packets to the
PAP.
- TEI: Terminal Extremity Identification

EXTERNAL PLLs

The system makes it possible to establish one or several external PLLs (ePLLs) between T accesses of
the system and a data network access port and also to extend them to S0 accesses according to the
following rules:

- each ePLL associates the trinome [Interface T, SAPI (16), TEI] with an [Interface S0, SAPI (16), TEI]
trinome.
- a T or S0 interface can be used for several ePLLs (max. 4) by changing the TEI value.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

PERMANENT LOGICAL LINK (PLL) APPLICATIONS

General synopsis of an external PLL

ePLL

(fixed 16
sapi, tei)
PAP I (fixed 16
S0
T0
S sapi, tei)
D S0
S0 Terminal
N
S0
S0
S0 Terminal

T0 Alcatel OmniPCX Office S0

INTERNAL PLLs

The system makes it possible to establish one or several internal PLLs. The following rules apply to in-
ternal PLLs (iPLLs):

- each iPLL associates the trinome [Interface S0, SAPI (16), TEI] with an [Interface S0, SAPI (16), TEI]
trinome.

General synopsis of an internal PLL

(fixed 16 S0
sapi, tei)
S0 S0 Terminal
PLL S0 S0 Terminal
S0
(fixed 16
sapi, tei)
S0
Alcatel OmniPCX Office

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
8

APPLICATIONS PERMANENT LOGICAL LINK (PLL)

CONFIGURATION

Preliminary

Before configuring the PLL, the installer must:

- define the S0 and T0 accesses

- check that the interfaces to be used are present in the "Subscribers/Basestations List" screen (for S0
interfaces) and the "External Lines" screens (for T interfaces)

Creating a PLL

- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View), select: Subscribers Misc. -> Permanent Logical Link

To create a PLL, proceed as follows:

- choose the PLL caller from the list of declared accesses presented in the left-hand part of the win-
dow.
- enter the TEI of the caller PLL (SAPI = 16 is displayed, this value is not modifiable):
- for an external access, the TEI is given on subscription by the public network operator and is
between 0 and 63 inclusive.
- for an internal access, the TEI is between 1 and 63 inclusive (depending on the configuration
of the terminals).
- choose the PLL destination from the list of declared accesses presented in the right-hand part of the
window.
- enter the TEI of the destination PLL (follow the same procedure as for the TEI of the caller PLL)
- click Add to establish the connection. If all the checks are OK (see below), the connections are ad-
ded to the list of existing PLLs.

Checks

- The system can contain a maximum of 32 PLLs.

- The system cannot contain PLLs between 2 external accesses.
- The caller and the destination of the same PLL cannot be one and the same (same physical address
and same TEI).
- 4 TEIs per basic access (S0/T0), 16 per primary access (T2); 2 PLLs associated with different acces-
ses can have the same TEI (there is no check at MMC-PM5 level).

Overflow

It is possible to overflow onto a second destination if the initial destination is busy by configuring the
same caller with 2 different called parties.

Nota : Once declared, an ePLL or iPLL is bi-directional, i.e. either interface can initiate a call.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

PERMANENT LOGICAL LINK (PLL) APPLICATIONS

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
OmniTouch Call Center Office

SECTION

OMNITOUCH CALL

CENTER OFFICE

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

Section OmniTouch Call Center Office

GENERAL PRESENTATION FILE 1

INSTALLATION AND START-UP FILE 2

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD FILE 3

USE OF ANNOUNCEMENTS FILE 4

AGENT APPLICATION FILE 5

STATISTICS APPLICATION FILE 6

SUPERVISOR APPLICATION FILE 7

TRACEABILITY FILE 8

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

OFFICE (INDEX)

Section OmniTouch Call Center Office (Index)

AGENT APPLICATION FILE 5

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD FILE 3

GENERAL PRESENTATION FILE 1

INSTALLATION AND START-UP FILE 2

STATISTICS APPLICATION FILE 6

SUPERVISOR APPLICATION FILE 7

TRACEABILITY FILE 8

USE OF ANNOUNCEMENTS FILE 4

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE GENERAL PRESENTATION

File
GENERAL PRESENTATION
1

INTRODUCTION

Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office is a call center application of Alcatel OmniPCX Office and is
used to automatically distribute calls to the most appropriate agent sets, while also managing call
queuing.

Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office is made up of the following modules:

- Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) for the distribution of calls. The Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD) application is used to manage a large number of calls using a small number of agents
through control of flows, proportionate distribution of calls, and queuing calls, between agents.
The caller is immediately connected to an agent or to the most appropriate service, the agents
being identified by skills group.
- Agent application and configuration of the agent application to optimize management of
agents, their activity and organization into skills groups.
- Supervision module.

- Traffic statistics module allowing the supervisor to optimize management of agent groups.

The Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office application is used to:

- improve call distribution and processing,

- process a larger number of calls,

- improve the output and efficiency of human resources,

- supervise service quality,

- anticipate incoming calls using the statistics module,

- minimize operating costs.

Remarque : In this document, the term ACD, Automatic Call Distribution, is synonymous with call
center.

LICENSES

The Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office offer is available in two versions: Alcatel Welcome Office
and Alcatel Welcome Office Pro. The licenses and associated rights of these versions are listed in the
following table:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/12

GENERAL PRESENTATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

List of licenses Configuration Associated rights

Welcome Office CPU-1, CPUe, Open rights for: - 10 agents: the agent corresponds to one
CPUe-1, CPUe-2 connected agent set. He/she can receive an ACD call on an
or CPU-2 board identified telephone terminal. The maximum number of
with hard disk agents is 32. - 8 ACD groups
Welcome Office CPU-1, CPUe, Open rights for: - 20 agents (the maximum number of
Pro CPUe-1, CPUe-2 agents is 32) - 8 ACD groups
or CPU-2 board
with hard disk
Welcome Office CPU-1, CPUe, Used to increase agent numbers by 10 to 20.
upgrade to Wel- CPUe-1, CPUe-2
come Office Pro or CPU-2 board
with hard disk
Statistics module Optional on Wel- Used to manage ACD statistics.
come Office Inclu-
ded on Welcome
Office Pro
Supervisors (ad- 1 (maximum) on Number of users: 1 to 4 supervisers 1 to 4 supervisor licen-
ministrators) CPU-1, CPU-2, ses: - 1 for the Business offer - 4 for the e-Business offer
CPUe 4 (maxi- One "supervisor" license represents the opening of a Super-
mum) on CPUe-1 visor session. The supervisor can check the list of agents
and CPUe-2 connected by the agent application at any time.
Agent application 10 (maximum) on Used to manage agents and agent groups. Number of
CPU-1, CPU-2, users: 1 to 20 agents in steps of 1. 1 to 20 agent applica-
CPUe 20 (maxi- tion licenses: - 10 for Welcome Office, - 20 for Welcome
mum) on CPUe-1 Office Pro One "agent application" license corresponds to
and CPUe-2 the opening of one agent application session.

Remarque : The maximum number of agents which can be configured in the ACD is 32. Depending
on the license chosen, 10 or 20 agents can be used at the same time.

A position is used if:

- the agent is configured with a set number from the list of "Fixed Configuration" agents.
- the agent uses an active agent application.
- the configuration is dynamic (free seating).

The CPUe-1 or CPUe-2 boards are only necessary if more than 10 agent applications
or more than 1 supervisor application is used.

2/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE GENERAL PRESENTATION

Terminology and capacities

- Maximum number of agents: the maximum number of agents is 32 regardless of the hardware
platforms (business or e-business) or packages (Welcome Office or Welcome Office Pro) used. An
agent can use any terminal on the system.

- Maximum number of agents logged in: an agent must be logged in to a terminal on the system
in order to use the call center services. The maximum number of logged in agents is 10 or 20 de-
pending on the package selected: a maximum of 10 logged in agents with Welcome Office and
20 logged in agents with Welcome Office Pro.

- Login mode: agents can be logged in to a terminal on the system in two different ways:

- fixed mode: by configuration. In this case, the agent is permanently logged in to the same ter-
minal.

- dynamic mode: the agent logs in to a free terminal of his/her choice using the agent appli-
cation (free seating operation). The agent logs out and automatically frees up the terminal by
leaving the agent application.

- Agent Application Licences: a license is required for each active connection of the agent appli-
cation. The number of licenses necessary corresponds to the maximum number of simultaneous
connections required. The maximum number of licenses possible depends on the package (Wel-
come Office or Welcome Office Pro) and the hardware platform (business or e-business) selected.

- Supervisor Application Licences: a license is required for each active connection of the supervi-
sor application. The number of licenses necessary corresponds to the maximum number of simul-

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/12

GENERAL PRESENTATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

taneous connections required. The maximum number of licenses possible depends on the
hardware platform selected (business or e-business).

- Statistics Application Licence: This license is used to activate the statistics application. It is inclu-
ded with the Welcome Office Pro package and available as an optional extra with the Welcome
Office package.

The table below shows the Welcome Office and Welcome Office Pro offers.

Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office R3.0

Welcome Office Welcome Office Pro
Business eBusiness Business eBusiness
with HD with HD with HD with HD
Maximum number of agents logged 10 10 20 20
in
ACD groups (max.) 8 8 8 8
Agents (max.) 32 32 32 32
Call center option
Agent application (max. 10 10 10 20
connections)
Supervisor application 1 4 1 4
Statistics application Optional Optional Included Included
Additional options
Automated attendant Optional Optional Optional Optional
PIMphony PRO / TEAM Optional Optional Optional Optional

SERVICES PROVIDED

This section describes the services provided by the modules in the application.

4/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE GENERAL PRESENTATION

Services provided for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Services Description
Type Informal and integrated
Queue Management of incoming calls with dynamic sizing
based on predefined parameters.
Distribution mode Distribution of calls via 3 possible configuration modes
(longest idle time, fixed, rotating).
ACD groups Possibility of defining the parameters of 8 independent
ACD groups.
Opening criteria Automatic open/closed parameters for each ACD
group with 2 time slots per day and 15 holiday days.
Groups can be opened/closed by: - forcing via the
configuration, - time slot, - forcing via the supervision
interface.
ACD announcements Broadcasting of 5 ACD announcements (welcome, 2
queue announcements, dissuasion and closure).
Priority ranking Managing the priority of agents in relation to the
groups which the agent is assigned to.
Dynamic queue Depends on agent availability.
Leave queue Through reception of DTMF code.
Agents belonging to seve- An agent can belong to several ACD groups.
ral groups
Overflow 1 group can overflow to another group (no cascading
permitted).
Management Configuration of the ACD.
Group mailbox The group mailbox can be used if the caller is deterred,
leaves the queue or if the group is closed.

Services provided for the agent application and configuration of the agent
application

Agent application

The agent application allows agents to associate their telephone set with their PC.

Agents can indicate their status (on duty, off duty, temporary absence, clerical work) in a more user-
friendly environment. They can also access the following functions: observation of real-time statistics,
noting of call types, multi-skills management, free seating and customer information screen pop-ups.

The table below describes the agent services.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/12

GENERAL PRESENTATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

Services Description
ACD statuses Ser- Management of the 4 agent statuses (on duty, clerical work, tem-
vice code porary absence, off duty) by service code.
ACD statuses UPK Management of the 4 agent statuses using the programmable keys
keys on Reflexe sets.
ACD statuses Management of ACD statuses by the agent application.
Agent application
ACD group Possibility of joining/leaving an ACD group via the Agent applica-
tion interface.
Call supervision Real-time supervision of the ACD call (caller n°, n° called, heading
of the ACD group, call queuing time and timer)
Agent supervision Real-time statistics (activity rate, call counter, call types, queues of
the groups which the agent is assigned to)
Free seating Allows several agents to share one telephone terminal over time.

Free seating operation allows an agent to use any workstation with

the agent application installed.
Information Screen pop-up on an ACD call via several modes (integrated, Out-
screen pop-up look script, Goldmine, specific mode, etc.) while the call is being
presented.

Configuration of the agent application

The agent configuration application is a password-protected module which allows the administrator
to define the parameters of the agent application options by assigning rights to agents.

For more information on these applications, refer to the "Agent application" chapter.

Services for the statistics application

The statistics application is used to display statistics on the operation of the call center. The operator
can:

- analyze telephone traffic for each agent group and for each agent set in real-time on the screen
or in non-real-time in the form of statistical reports,

- compile statistics on how busy the lines are and on the calls per line,

- configure certain parameters.

Services Description
Groups Daily, monthly and periodical consolidated statistics of ACD
groups.

6/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE GENERAL PRESENTATION

Agents Daily, monthly and periodical consolidated statistics of ACD

agents.
Line statistics Used to check how busy the lines are.
Call statistics Used to quantify the number of calls per line.
Configuration Used to configure certain parameters.

Services for the supervisor application

The supervisor application gives the supervisor real-time access to call center activity. The information
can be displayed in the form of a table on his/her PC.

Services Description
ACD groups Real-time global supervision of ACD groups
ACD agents Real-time global supervision of ACD agents
ACD calls Real-time global supervision of ACD calls (calls answered, being
routed, in queue, deterred, closed etc.)
Forcing of group Assignment of agents to groups
statuses Forcing of
agent statuses

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CALL CENTER

Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office is available running on business and e-business solutions.

Technical characteristics of the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) function

- Number of agent groups: 8

- Number of queues: 8, i.e. one queue per group
- Maximum number of agents: 32 agents, with 20 active agents (depending on the type of CPU)
- Maximum number of supervisors: 4 (depending on the type of CPU)

Terminal type

- Reflexe set
- Analog set
- Reflexe DECT set
- IP phone

Remarque : Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office cannot operate without a 20 Gb hard disk.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/12

GENERAL PRESENTATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

CALL PROCESSING

General description of call flows

The figure below shows how calls are processed.

Figure 1: Call flows

Welcome announcement
of the ACD group

Closed
Queue saturated
Search for agent

Yes Open Yes

Transfer if Transfer Transfer Transfer
dissuasion to destination to destination if busy?
Filled in?

No Agent free Agent busy

No

Yes Ja

Existing group Transfer to Transfer to Existing group

mailbox? group mailbox group mailbox mailbox?

No No
Queue Closure
Dissuasion Agent call Agent announcement
announcement free announcement
N° 1 then disconnection
then disconnection
Agent answers
Agent does not answer

Selection of Transfer
another agent Queue announcement
then conversation N° 2 (continuous)
if available

Remarque : Callers can leave the queue by pressing *.

Call distribution
Calls coming into Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office are classified in accordance with:

- the priority assigned to the skills group and the order in which calls arrive, for subsequent distribu-
tion to the agent sets,
- the ACD groups,

8/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE GENERAL PRESENTATION

- the traffic load fairly distributed between the agent sets.

Incoming calls transferred to a skills group are distributed:

- in the chronological order in which they arrive on the sets assigned to this group,
- by the assignment rank of the agents in the group requested (sequential distribution only),
- in accordance with the distribution mode programmed in the group.

Queue

A call is placed in a queue once the welcome announcement has been played if all agents assigned
to the group requested are busy.

Calls are placed in the queue based on the chronological order in which they arrive, using the principle
of "FIFO" (First In, First Out).

Calls leave the queue in chronological order. The call is automatically distributed and presented to an
available agent without waiting for the end of the announcement if an agent becomes free while the
queue announcement is being broadcast. The dissuasion announcement is broadcast for subsequent
calls if the queue is saturated.

The maximum number of calls waiting is 8 (8 ACD ports).

Remarques :

- If the ACD group is open and no agents are active (logged in), the first call to this group will be
routed to the transfer number (if entered). If this is not the case, it will be routed to the dissuasion
message and then released. Subsequent calls will then be placed directly in the queue.

- If the ACD group is saturated, overflow is possible to another ACD group (no cascading).

- If the agent does not answer, another agent will be selected if available; if no agent is available,
that agent will continue to be called.

- If other agents are logged in to the group, several scenarios are possible:

- the "no answer" of the agent means they automatically go "off duty" (the parameters of this can
be defined)
- the agent goes "off duty" (or no answer in terms of the supervision status)
- all the other agents have gone off duty (no answer); in this case, the transfer number is tried.

Subsequent calls will be automatically placed in the queue until an agent comes on duty.

Core recommendations

Certain rules should be observed in order to guarantee that the system is as user-friendly as possible:

- Take the caller into account when thinking of an ACD group.

- In a voice menu, there must be no more than 4 options and the total tree must have no more than
2 levels.

- Voice messages must be short (< 15s).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/12

GENERAL PRESENTATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- When setting up the ACD group mailboxes, ask the people receiving the calls (operators, sales de-
partments, technicians, etc.) what the main requests from callers are.

- Do not forget to define what happens outside working hours and during the weekends.

- Do not forget to define what happens when an internal telephone is not answered.

- Start by drawing the total structure on a piece of paper based on the fixed tree of the ACD and the
relations between the automated attendant, mailboxes and info-text if necessary.

- At each stage, think carefully about the content of the voice message concerned.

- If all ACD ports are busy, calls coming in from the outside receive the ring back tone, until an ACD
port is free¡ This operation must be taken into account when defining the ACD.

10/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE GENERAL PRESENTATION

CONFIGURATION

Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office can operate in a stand-alone configuration or in a network con-
figuration.

Network configuration
The drawing below shows a configuration example using a local area network to connect Alcatel Om-
niTouch Call Center Office.

Figure 2: Network installation

Appels entrants
Accès distant
RAS
VPN
PM

LAN

Postes agent

Superviseur Superviseur
Agent APS
Statistiques Statistiques Agent

This configuration uses a local area network to connect Alcatel OmniPCX Office. It manages the call
center from client PCs connected to the local area network by using the applications Agent, Agent
configuration, Supervisor, Statistics, and Pimphony.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/12

GENERAL PRESENTATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

Stand-alone configuration
The drawing below shows a configuration example when Alcatel OmniPCX Office is stand-alone and
not connected to the local network, and therefore has no associated applications.

Figure 3: Local installation

Appels entrants

Postes agent

12/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE INSTALLATION AND START-UP

File
INSTALLATION AND START-UP
2

Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office is supplied pre-installed. Only the necessary licenses have to be
loaded in the PCX; the applications Supervisor, Statistics and Agent application must be installed
on each PC. The Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) application is configured using PM5. The system
and the ACD must be configured before configuring ACD services.

HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

Platforms supported by ACD applications

The following platforms are supported:

- Windows XP,

- Windows 2000 (service Pack 4),

- Windows NT.

Hardware required on the PCX

The hardware required on Alcatel OmniTouchPCX Office is:

- For the e-business offer: CPUe-1/CPUe-2, with a 20 Gb hard disk.

- For the business offer: CPUe, or CPU-1, or CPU-2, with a 20 Gb hard disk (not compatible with
the CPU board). The CPU board must be fitted with a 64 Mb RAM memory.

Nota : The RAS and ACD functions cannot be installed on the CPUe board simultaneously. The
CPUe-1/CPUe-2 board is required.

Software on the client PC

The items required on the client workstation are:

- The latest release of PM5 software for the administrator.

Nota : PM5 R3.0 is not compatible with Windows 98 and Millenium.

- Release 3.0 of Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office.

- Environments: Windows 98 (SR2), Windows XP, Windows 2000 (service Pack 4), Windows NT.

- The licenses necessary for the ACD.

- An Internet browser: Internet Explorer (release 6 or later) or Netscape Navigator (release 7 or later).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/10

INSTALLATION AND START-UP OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

INITIALIZATION OF THE ACD

In order to use the ACD application, the steps below must be followed to initialize Alcatel OmniPCX
Office:

In the event of migration

In the event of migration, refer to the Technical Communication "Migration of R1.x/R2.x to R3.0".

First initialization of the ACD

1. Start Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

Remarque : initialization must be completed before moving to the next step.

2. Open a PM5/300 session.

3. In the menu Call Center/ACD Configuration/General:

- the 8 ACD ports are ready to be created, together with the different groups used for the ACD.

- Enter one or more DDI number(s) to call the ACD groups from external numbers and then con-
firm by clicking OK.

4. To ensure that the call center (ACD) starts, check that lines are available in the line supervision mo-
dule.

2/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE INSTALLATION AND START-UP

CONFIGURATION OF THE CALL CENTER

In order to start up the call center, the following operations must be conducted:

- Configure the PCX and ACD.

- Define the agent parameters for the ACD.

- Fill in the ACD line tables.

- Download the announcements.

- Configure the group mailboxes.

- Assign keys to the sets.

These operations are described in the sections below.

Configuration of Alcatel OmniPCX Office and the call center

The PM5 configuration tool must be used to configure the ACD. To do this, proceed as follows:

1. Open a PM5 session.

2. To access configuration of the call center, click on PM5 -> PCX Client -> Call Center. Three me-
nus can be accessed:

- ACD configuration: used to configure the parameters of the ACD in the PCX.
- ACD Service: used to configure the ACD groups.

- Voice messages: used to configure the ACD announcements.

Attention : Alcatel OmniPCX Office and the ACD must be configured before ACD services are con-
figured.

CONFIGURATION OF ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

To ensure that the ACD works properly, certain Alcatel OmniPCX settings must be checked:

- Check that the option Group Call Mode with Signaling Mode in PM5/System Features/Fea-
tures/Part 2/ Group Call Mode with Signaling Mode is unchecked.

- Check that the parameters of the internal numbering plan in PM5/Numbering Plans/Internal
Numbering Plan are configured in accordance with the following rules:

- For local calls: local call function / start / end / base.

The base is always equal to the start of the numbering range

Exemple :

Function Start End Base

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/10

INSTALLATION AND START-UP OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

Local call 3000 3199 3000 OK

Local call 3000 3199 1000 Forbidden

- for ACD group calls: ACD group call function

Exemple :

Function Start End Base

ACD group call 600 619 600 OK
ACD group call 600 619 500 Forbidden

- Check that there are prefixes available in the main numbering plan for the group (at least 5 groups
are required for the ACD) and for the directory numbers (for the 8 ACD ports).

- When selecting DDI numbers, if these are not accepted by the system, check whether the range
already exists in the public numbering plan.

Attention : it is essential to switch off and restart the ACD (ACD Services/Maintenance menu), in the
following cases:
- the type of set is modified (UA to Z),
- change of
- directory numbers
- sets
- groups
- the main numbering plan is modified,
- the user name is modified in PM5.

ACD configuration menu

Alcatel OmniPCX Office is configured by creating:

- 8 media virtual terminals,

- 5 groups of cyclical ports containing the 8 terminals,

- virtual terminals for the voice mail of ACD groups,

- the ACD key profiles and their association with the ports.

4/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE INSTALLATION AND START-UP

Click ACD Configuration. The ACD Configuration window appears with the following tabs:

- General : shows the number of media virtual terminals created by Alcatel OmniPCX Office when
the call center was installed (or ACD ports).

Attention : the default value is 8. This figure must never be changed.

- ACD group: used to create and associate mailboxes with the ACD groups.

- ACD profiles: used to assign profiles to agent sets and supervisor sets.

- Agents/Supervisors : lists the numbers of agent and supervisor sets.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/10

INSTALLATION AND START-UP OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

General tab:
1. Click the General tab. It consists of the following areas:

- Area 1: the drop-down menu ACD Ports (8 recommended) shows the number of virtual ter-
minals required to start up the call center.

Attention : the default value shown in this field must not be changed.

- Area 2: lists the prefixes used to change the status of agents. The prefixes used to show that
agents are on/off duty, temporarily absent or performing clerical work are programmed in the
internal numbering plan of Alcatel OmniPCX Office and correspond to the cyclical groupings
containing the 8 ACD ports. The statuses are:
- on_duty: the agent is assigned to an ACD group.
- off_duty: the agent has withdrawn from all groups.
- temporary absence: the agent has temporarily gone off duty for a break. At the end of
this break, agents must come back on duty so that they are available again to process a
new call. Periods of temporary absence are not considered as work/service time.
- temporary work: the agent temporarily withdraws from the call distribution chain to per-
form an operation (fill out an information screen for example) following a call for example.
At the end of this clerical work period, agents must come back on duty so that they are
available again to process a new ACD call. Clerical work periods are considered as work
time for call distribution criteria.
- Area 3: shows the cyclical group number available for the call center and the associated direct
dialing-in (DDI) number(s). If the DDI number is entered, it will be automatically created in a
line of the Public Numbering Plan of Alcatel OmniPCX Office. For each DDI number created,
a new group (containing the 8 ACD ports) will be automatically generated.

Attention : the group number and DDI number must be manually entered in the line parame-
ter table.

2. Click OK to confirm the data.

6/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE INSTALLATION AND START-UP

Configuration of group mailboxes (ACD Groups tab).

1. Click ACD Configuration, then the ACD Groups tab. The ACD Groups window is displayed.
This window lists the groups for which a mailbox can be created.

The mailbox created can be used when the ACD group is in dissuasion or closure mode, or when
a caller leaves the queue.

2. Check the Mailbox box of the group that you want to select.

3. Click All to select all groups. All the boxes are automatically checked.

4. Click None to cancel the selection.

5. Click OK to confirm. The PCX creates mailboxes for the groups selected.

Remarque : the number of the associated mailbox is the same as the number of the virtual termi-
nal.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/10

INSTALLATION AND START-UP OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

Generation of ACD profiles (ACD Profiles tab)

Alcatel OmniTouch Call Center Office allows you to manage two types of ACD key:

- Keys for the operating status of agents corresponding to the groups previously created.

- Supervision keys for the mailboxes of ACD groups.

Once the General tab has been confirmed, the ACD profiles must be generated if you want to use
them.

1. Click the ACD Profiles tab. To generate the profiles, select Yes, Regenerate the Profiles as
Shown Below.

2. Click OK to confirm the new profiles.

Remarque : - The definition of the profiles obtained is predefined in the system. However, it is still
possible to modify them through standard management of profiles in PM5 / List of Sets
/ Profiles.

8/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE INSTALLATION AND START-UP

- These profiles have an influence on service categories and transfers, given that calls to
an agent set must neither be transferred nor intercepted.

Assignment of profiles to sets (Agent/Supervisor tab)

1. Click the Agents/Supervisors tab.

2. In the Agent Sets area, click Change. The Change List of ACD Agents window is displayed. It
can be used to select agent sets.

3. In the Non-member(s) area, select the objects to be added and click the Add button. The objects
selected appear in the Member(s) area.

4. Click OK.

5. To automatically assign profiles to sets, check the Apply ACD Profiles to Sets box.

6. Click OK.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/10

INSTALLATION AND START-UP OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

7. Follow the same procedure to assign supervisor profiles.

By default, a set with an agent profile is configured with 2 RGX keys, 2 RSB keys and 4 status keys. A
set with a supervisor profile is configured with 2 RGX keys, 2 RSB keys and 8 keys for supervising mail-
boxes (plus 4 agent keys if these have been programmed).

Important:

Assigning an ACD profile to a set has the effect of:

- deleting all the keys previously programmed

- programming the following keys: 2 RGX, 2 RSB, 4 CTI and/or 8 voicemails for the virtual terminals
of the ACD group mailboxes
- deleting internal dynamic transfers and inhibiting any type of internal transfer.

Remarque : ACD calls do not support any type of call transfer or interception.

Manual assignment of keys

To assign an agent key manually, do the following:

1. Open the menu PM5 > List of Sets/Terminals and select the set whose keys you want to modify.
Click Details, then Keys. A window displaying the keys of the set opens.

2. Click on the button of the key to be modified.

3. Select the Function Key type of key.

4. Click OK to confirm.

Agent keys correspond to the following CTI function keys:

- Application 12, service 1 for "on duty" status,

- Application 12, service 2 for "off duty" status,

- Application 12, service 3 for "clerical work" status,

- Application 12, service 4 for "temporary absence" status,

For the Supervision keys of mailboxes, simply create Voicemail function keys for the virtual terminal
corresponding to the mailbox of the ACD group.

Remarque : the assignment of profiles to sets is not checked (no checking of whether the set is an
agent set or not).

10/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD

File
CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD
3

LINE CONFIGURATION

The lines table is used to associate caller numbers(CLI) and/or called numbers (DDI number, cyclical
group number) with the different ACD groups (1 to 8) and agent status functions (on duty, off duty,
clerical work or temporary absence).

When defining the system parameters, the complete table will be filled in either by importing the data
collection file, or manually, on a number by number basis.

It is also possible to use the line table to enter VIP caller numbers in order to route them to a priority
ACD group.

It is possible to use private groupings to call the different ACD groups in order to limit access, the num-
ber of calls waiting, or the traffic of each ACD group; this is done by simply adjusting the number of
ACD ports contained in the different groupings.

Line configuration
The parameters of lines can be configured to make an application number correspond to:

- a "Caller" number,
- a "Called" number (DDI),
- a combination of the two numbers.

For example, it is possible make access to each agent group correspond to:

- a "Caller" number depending on the country the call comes from (for example, depending on the
language of the caller);
- a given "Called" number, in order to reach the correct ACD group (corresponding to a given ser-
vice);
- a combination of both (country + service).
Remarque : Several numbers can correspond to the same application.
1000 different numbers can be assigned in this way.

This list is created during the data collection process.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/20

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

Procedure
To fill in the line table, do the following:

1. Click ACD Services. The ACD Service window appears.

2. Click the Line Parameter icon. The Line Parameter window appears. It contains a tab with the
following columns:

- Caller N° Starting With: corresponds to the caller numbers likely to be received by the server.
- Called N° Ending With: corresponds to the DDI numbers likely to be received by the server.
- Application: N° + Heading
- Max. Number of Lines: this column is not used.

- Trace: this column is not used.

2/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD

3. To fill in or modify the fields, double-click the area of the table to be modified in order to access
the corresponding data entry area. The data entry window will differ depending on the column se-
lected.

- Caller N° Starting With (CLI) data entry window

The number on each line of the table can be a complete number, but it is also possible to make
selections of blocks of digits in order to:

- analyze the country code (from 1 to 3 digits on the left),

- analyze the region code (from one to six digits depending on the country of installation),

- analyze the complete number, or part of the number (for example, the last digit on the right
to distribute traffic between groups of agents).

Remarques :- Numbers are analyzed from left to right.

- The maximum number length is 20 digits.
- The character X can be used as a joker.
- Called N° Ending With (DDI) data entry window

Numbers are analyzed from left to right.

If a number received is not shown in the list, an error message appears in the Events file. The
server does not answer and the caller hears the ringback tone.

- Application: N° + Heading data entry window

From the list of applications, choose the one which corresponds to the number received. The
same number received can be assigned to two different applications. Calls will be routed as a
priority to the application registered at the highest level of the table.

Analysis process

A call entering the server is characterized by the pairing [DDIr - CLIr]. The output event of the
process described here is either the Application Number, or an execution command taking the
physical access configuration into account.

Attention : the comparison stops as soon as the first entry satisfying the condition is found. As
a result, it is important to fill in the table starting with particular cases (the longest
numbers) and ending with general cases (the shortest numbers).

The analysis process is as follows:

- 1st operation: CLIr/CLIs and DDIr/DDIs comparison. The system searches in the principal
table for the entry matching the condition: CLIr = *CLIs and DDIr = *DDIs

If it exists, it is unique. In this case, the output event of the process is the application number
associated with this pairing.

If it does not exist, the system moves to the second operation.

- 2nd operation: comparison of CLIr/CLIs and DDIs not entered. The system searches in the

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/20

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

principal table for the entry matching the condition: CLIr = *CLIs and DDIs = *0

If it exists, it is unique. In this case, the output event of the process is the application number
associated with this pairing.

If it does not exist, the system moves to the third operation.

- 3rd operation: comparison of DDIr/DDIs and CLIs not entered. The system searches in the
principal table for the entry matching the condition: DDIr = *DDIs and CLIs = *0.

If it exists, it is unique. In this case, the output event of the process is the application number
associated with this pairing.

If it does not exist, the output event of the process is a command taking the physical access
configuration into account.

Attention : this is not a case of simple equality. The conditions of equality are outlined below.

Method for comparing numbers

- CLI:

Condition 1: condition based on content (the number). The CLIr/CLIs comparison is made
starting with the digit of the greatest weight. It continues digit by digit and ends by compa-
ring the digit of the least weight of the shortest number.

The condition CLIr=CLIs is fulfilled if condition 1 is fulfilled. In other words, there are no
conditions related to the format. As a result, there can be no equality if one of the Network
or System parameters is not entered.

- DDI:

Condition 1: condition based on content (the number). The DDIr/DDIs comparison is made
starting with the digit of the least weight. It continues digit by digit and ends by comparing
the digit of the greatest weight of the shortest number.

The condition DDIr=DDIs is fulfilled if condition 1 is fulfilled. In other words, there are no
conditions related to the format. As a result, there can be no equality if one of the Network
or System parameters is not entered.

4/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD

Importing/exporting files

1. Click Import to import data ("caller" numbers or others) from a database or spreadsheet. The
Import a List window is used to access the .csv file that you want to import.

Remarque : if you also import application numbers, these applications must exist on the server,
otherwise the field will remain blank.

The character used to separate the columns is ";".

In general, the first line corresponds to the column headings. In order to avoid this first line being
taken into account during the import operation, the relevant headings must start with the character
"/".

Exemple : in Microsoft Excel:

A B C
1 / CLI No DDI No Application No
2 33 1 701
3 33 2 702
4 33 3 702
5 33 4 703
6 33 5 703

Only the first four columns will be imported. It is not obligatory to fill in the columns on the right.
The file must be saved in .csv format. To print, click on the Printer icon.

2. Click Export to export the file from the server to the spreadsheet in order to update it.

3. Click OK to confirm.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/20

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

Exemple : importing/exporting line parameters

The parameters of the lines existing in the ACD are defined in the following screen:

6/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD

Export the parameters by clicking Export. The .csv Excel file is displayed.

In this Excel file, select column A, then modify the format by selecting Data/Convert. An assistant is
displayed. Click in succession on Delimited, Next, Semi-colon, Next, End, Save. The next file is dis-
played.

Complete this file and then re-import it.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/20

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

CONFIGURATION OF AGENTS AND GROUPS

The agent is characterized by his/her phone set and the operating status of the set. In order to optimize
their management, agents are organized into groups (skills groups for example).

Assignment of agents to groups and operating status

An agent can belong to one or more groups. An agent can have one of the 4 operating statuses below:

1. On duty: the agent is assigned to an ACD group.

2. Off duty: the agent has withdrawn from all ACD groups.

3. Temporary absence: the agent has temporarily gone off duty for a break. At the end of this
break, agents must come back on duty so that they are available again to process a new ACD call.

Periods of temporary absence are not considered as work/service timein the statistics.

4. Clerical work: following a conversation, the agent may need to assess the call and fill out an in-
formation screen for example; he/she temporarily withdraws from the call distribution chain.

Once this work is complete, agents must come back on duty so that they are available again to
process a new call.

Clerical work periods are considered as work time for the call distribution criteria in the statistics.

Remarque : For the statistics, the "idle time" is processed differently, depending on whether the
agent is temporarily absent or is doing clerical work,

- if the agent is temporarily absent, the activity time is taken into account from the last
ACD conversation (when the agent hangs up),

- if the agent is doing clerical work, the activity time is taken into account from when the
agent comes back on duty following this period of clerical work.

The PC-based agent application provides agents with an interface to:

- change their status (on duty, off duty, temporary absence, clerical work) via an intuitive interface,

- access functions such as:

- real-time observation of statistics,

- definition of call types,
- multi-skills management (agents belonging to several ACD groups),
- free seating,
- customer information screen pop-ups.

For more information, refer to the "Agent application" chapter.

This section describes the parameters that must be defined to declare the agents and the group(s) they
belong to.

8/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD

Configuration of agent parameters

The parameters of agent groups can be changed.

1. Click ACD Services. The ACD window appears.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/20

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

2. Click the Agent Parameters icon. The A.C.D. - Agent Parameters window appears.

- Agent Number: identification number of each agent.

- Associated Groups: the agent's group; an agent can belong to several groups.
- Rank: priority rank assigned to each agent, in each of the groups they belong to.
- Set Number: directory number of the agent's set.
- Name: the agent's name.

- Status: operating status of the agent (on duty, off duty, clerical work or temporary absence).

3. For each line of the table (1 to 32), double-click on one of the headings. A data entry window ap-
pears for the current line. You can define the parameters of:

3.1. The groups to which the agent belongs, by checking and unchecking the Associated Groups
boxes (1 to 8).

3.2. The priority rank of the agent in the groups he/she belongs to, by entering a number in the
Rank field (1 to 32). The priority rank is predefined if the group is using Fixed distribution.

3.3. The set number of an agent, by entering a directory number in the Set Number field.

3.4. The name or identifier of the agent by entering a name in the Name field.

10/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD

3.5. The status of the agent, by selecting On Duty, Off Duty, Temporary Absence or Clerical
Work in the Status drop-down menu.

4. Click OK to confirm the data or Apply to stay in the current menu.

PARAMETERS OF ACD GROUPS - Configuration of general parameters

To set the parameters of the call center services, do the following:

1. Click ACD Services. The ACD window appears.

2. Click the General Parameters icon. The A.C.D. - General Parameters window appears.

- General: is used to configure the call center general parameters.

- Groups 1 - 4: used to define parameters for groups 1 to 4.
- Groups 5 - 8: used to define parameters for groups 5 to 8.

Remarque : for more information on defining the parameters of Group tabs, see the section
on Management of agents and agent groups.

- Types: used to define the type of call the agent receives.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/20

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- Maintenance: used to configure the reset parameters of the call center.

General tab
1. Click the General tab. This tab is used to configure the call center general parameters. These pa-
rameters are common to the 8 groups.

2. Enter the following parameters:

- Value of queue threshold T1 and T2

Threshold configuration is used to define service quality criteria. These values are used in the
supervisor application to indicate, in real-time, the number of calls in the groups waiting for a
period of time longer than T1 and T2. These values are also used in the publication of statistics.

- Idle time following processing of a call

Minimum time between two consecutive calls for the same agent.

- Maximum ringing time

If an agent does not answer within the period shown, the call is routed to another agent or re-
turned to the queue.

This time delay is also used when transferring a call to an internal or external called party or to
a mailbox. If the called party does not answer within this time delay, the call is automatically
returned to the queue (if the group is closed, the call is deterred or if the caller leaves the queue).

- Time delay before overload messages flash

Time period before additional indication (change in color) of overload messages of the groups
displayed in the supervisor application.

- Length of calculation period for agent activity rates

Possibility of printing activity rates every hour or every half-hour within the supervisor applica-
tion.

- Agents that do not answer are automatically removed

An agent not answering is removed from the ACD group either for 10 seconds (see the fol-
lowing parameter), or permanently. In the latter case, he/she must be put back "on duty".

- Duration of an agent's temporary removal after failure to answer

This parameter determines the period of time for which an agent who fails to answer is removed
from the ACD group.

- Waiting begins before overflow time delay

Possibility of starting the statistics counter related to customer waiting times as soon as the call
center answers or after the overflow time delay of the call.

12/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD

3. Click OK to confirm or Apply to stay in the current menu.

Group 1 - 4 and Group 5 - 8 tabs

1. The tabs Groups 1 - 4 and Groups 5 - 8 are used to define the parameters of the groups. Click
on the tab of the corresponding group(s).

The parameters which can be defined for each group are as follows:

1.1. Group Heading: used to give the group a name. This information is repeated on the Obser-
vation and agent application screens.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/20

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

1.2. Opening Criteria: used to define the open and closed parameters of the group. Click on the
button to open the relevant Group Opening Criteria window.

In the Time Slots Open column, define one or two time slots for each day of the week.

In the Exceptional Days Closed (Year Optional) column, specify the holiday days on which
the service is closed. The year is optional for holidays on fixed dates.

Remarque : this data can be modified in real-time.

Click Apply then OK to validate the data, or Cancel if you do not want to keep the changes.

14/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD

1.3. Call management

1.3.a. Click the tab of the ACD group required. The next window appears.

The following parameters are used to define possible actions in the event of dissuasion, clo-
sure or the caller leaving the queue in the ACD group.

- ACD call in the event of dissuasion: three choices are possible:

Broadcast the group dissuasion announcement.

Place the call in the group mailbox. For more information, see the chapter on Installation
and start-up.

Transfer to an internal or external number.

- ACD call and caller leaving the queue via the star key.

If the caller leaves the queue by pressing the star key and if the option Place Call in Group
Mailbox is checked, the call will be transferred here. If the option Place Call in Group
Mailbox is not checked, pressing the star key will have no effect.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/20

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- ACD call in the event of closure: three choices are possible:

Broadcast the group closure announcement.

Place the call in the group mailbox. For more information, see the chapter on Installation
and start-up.
Transfer to an internal or external number.
1.3.b. Click OK to validate the data or Apply to stay in the same screen, or Cancel if you do
not want to keep the changes.

1.4. Queue Length: used to define the length of the queue.

The length is equal to N x k where,

- N = number of agents logged in to a terminal in the group. For more information, see the
section on Definition and terminology.
- k = coefficient between 0 and 9, in steps of 0.1. The default value is: 0.5.

The queue is considered to be saturated when the condition N x k is met.

Remarque : if N x k is not a whole number, the value of the queue is rounded up to the next
whole number.

Exemple : if 3 agents are logged in, regardless of their status (1 agent on duty and 2 agents
off duty) in the group, and if K=0.5, the length of the queue is: 0.5 x 3 =1.5, i.e. 2
agents.

1.5. Search Mode: used to define the method for distributing calls within the group. Select the type
of search from the drop-down menu. The following choices are possible:

- longest idle time: call assigned to the agent whose last ACD call took place the furthest
time ago.

Remarque : non-ACD calls and the status temporary absence are counted as "idle time".

- Fixed: call assigned to the first free agent based on the priority rank of the agent in the
group.

- Rotating: call assigned through cyclical distribution.

1.6. Overflow Group: used to define the group (1 to 8) called in the event of overflow. Enter the
number of another group.

The time period is used to define after how many seconds the overflow function starts.

The time delay is enabled if no agent is free in the group requested.

Remarque : - this function allows a group which is underloaded to receive calls from a group
which is overloaded.

- If overflow occurs, the calls continue to stay in the queue of the group initially re-
quested.

- From a statistical point of view, calls are always assigned to the group initially re-

16/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD

quested.

Exemple : group 2 is specified as the overflow for group 1:

- when a call arrives for group 1 and if no agent is free in this group, a free agent
is searched for in group 2. If no agents in groups 1 and 2 are free, the call is placed
in the queue of group 1.

- when an agent in group 2 becomes free, if no calls are waiting for this group, the
calls waiting for group 1 overflow to group 2.

1.7. Transfer Number: used to define which set should be warned when an abnormal status oc-
curs in a group. Enter a number with no more than 5 digits in this field. The transfer number
can be:

- any internal set number (preferably, the supervisor number of the application),
- an abbreviated number of Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

When an abnormal status is detected (group open and no agent on duty), the first call is routed
to the transfer number, and the following calls are routed to the queue. It is the responsibility
of the supervisor to re-establish normal operation.

Remarque : If the transfer number is busy or does not answer, the call is returned to the queue.

1.8. Priority Order: used to define the priority group when simultaneous calls are received or
when calls are waiting and agents belong to several groups. Enter a number between 1 and 8.

The same level of priority can be assigned to several groups. In this case, searches for available
agents for waiting calls are conducted using the criteria of maximum queue time only.

1.9. Forced status: used to define the status of the group regardless of the status of the open/
closed parameters of the time slot. Select the status from the drop-down menu. The available
choices are:

- Closed: forces the group to be closed (for example, in the evening before the normal clo-
sing time).

- Open: forces the group to stay open (for example, in the evening after the normal closing
time).

- Automatic: allows the system to return to the criteria defined in the time slot.

Remarque : switching from one status to another is never automatic; a command to return to
normal mode must be sent in order to re-examine the normal open and closed pa-
rameters again.

Forcing to open or closed status is indicated on the Observation screens by the letter M for Ma-
nual. The group statuses are:

- OPEN M: group forced open

- CLOSED M: group forced closed
- OPEN: group open (in accordance with time slot or contact)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/20

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

2. Click OK to validate the data or Apply to stay in the same screen, or Cancel if you do not want to
keep the changes.

Remarque : follow the same procedure for the agents of groups 5 to 8 if necessary.

ACD Call Types tab (Types tab)

1. Click the Types tab. This tab is used to define the types of calls received by agents by assigning a
heading and code while the call is being processed with the agent application.

Ten service codes can be created with corresponding descriptions. These type codes can be used
during an ACD call with the agent application, in order to define the call types.

2. Click OK to validate the data or Apply to stay in the same screen, or Cancel if you do not want to
keep the changes.

Maintenance tab
The Maintenance tab is used to perform the following operations:

- Stop the ACD function: the application is stopped in the system.

18/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD

- Start the ACD function: the application is started in the system.

- Reload factory settings: the default ACD configuration is reloaded in the system.

Nota : A cold reset of the system does not delete the ACD configuration. To do this, use the Reload
Factory Settings button. The announcements are never deleted.

- Reset the supervisor password: the supervisor password of the agent configurator is help1954.

Remarques : - When the ACD application is stopped, the ACD function is completely inhibited in
the system.

- Stopping and restarting the ACD function may be useful during maintenance and de-
bugging operations.

1. Click ACD Services. The ACD window appears.

2. Click the Maintenance tab.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 19/20

CONFIGURATION OF THE ACD OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

20/20 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE USE OF ANNOUNCEMENTS

File
USE OF ANNOUNCEMENTS
4

Announcements are broadcast while telephone traffic is being processed. The call center contains de-
fault announcements. New ones can also be created.

DESCRIPTION OF THE ANNOUNCEMENTS

The four types of announcement are:

- Welcome announcement This announcement is broadcast when a call arrives in the group. (60
seconds max.)
- Queue announcements The first announcement is used when the call joins the queue for the first
time; it is broadcast once only. (60 seconds max.) The second announcement is used after the first
queue message; it is broadcast continuously until the call leaves the queue. (300 seconds max.)
- Dissuasion announcement This announcement is broadcast when the queue is saturated. (60
seconds max.)
- Closure announcement This announcement is broadcast when the ACD group is closed. (60 se-
conds max.)

Remarque : The minimum value of the first queue announcement and the welcome, dissuasion and
closure announcements is 0 seconds. The minimum value of the second queue an-
nouncement is 20 seconds. If the value of the announcement is set to 0 seconds, it can
be deleted.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

USE OF ANNOUNCEMENTS OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

SELECTING ANNOUNCEMENTS

To select the announcement you want to use, do the following:

1. Click ACD Messages. The ACD Voice Messages window appears. This window has the following
two areas:

- The ACD Group area is used to select the announcements for each group or all the groups.

- The Transfer Selected Messages area is used to import or export announcements to the call
center or to the system.

2. In the ACD Group area, click tab 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 if you want to select announcements for
a given group, or click All to select the announcements for all groups.

2.1. To select the type of announcement one by one, check or uncheck the following boxes:

- Welcome: this announcement is broadcast when a call arrives in the group.

- Queue 1: this announcement is broadcast once only, when the caller joins the queue.

- Queue 2: this announcement is continuously broadcast after the first queue announce-
ment.

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE USE OF ANNOUNCEMENTS

- Closure: this announcement is broadcast when a call arrives in the group to indicate the
group is closed.

- Dissuasion: this announcement is broadcast when the queue is full.

2.2. To select all five announcements, click the Select All button.

Remarque : To cancel the selection, click Deselect All.

3. In the Transfer Selected Messages area, click the button to the right of the field Load From This
Folder and Transfer. The Select Folder window is displayed. The announcements are by default
saved in C:/Program Files/PCXTools/PM5/R300_XXX/acd/Voice Messages. They are available in
English only.

40 messages are available (5 for each ACD group). Each message is identified by a file made up
of 3 figures x, y and z and with the extension .wav:

- x corresponds to the number of the ACD group (1 to 8)

- y is always equal to 0
- z corresponds to the message of the ACD group (1 to 5)

The messages types are as follows:

- 1 corresponds to the welcome message

- 2 to queue message 1
- 3 to queue message 2
- 4 to the dissuasion message
- 5to the closure message
For example, file 305.wav corresponds to the closure message for group 3.

Remarque : on starting the ACD, the system does not understand any messages. To conduct tests,
it is therefore essential to load the default ACD messages.

4. Select the announcements and click the => button. The messages selected are transferred to the
call center.

5. Click OK. The ACD Voice Messages window disappears.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

USE OF ANNOUNCEMENTS OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

CREATING ANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGES

To create your own announcement messages, you can use the recording software available on your
PC (Window/Accessories/Multimedia/Sound Recorder) or any multimedia application.

Recording announcements (.wav) on a PC

Proceed as follows:

1. On your PC, open a recording tool by clicking Start > Programs > Accessories > Multimedia
(or Entertainment) > Sound Recorder. The following window is displayed:

In order to record the message, your computer must be fitted with a sound card. Otherwise, a mes-
sage informs you that the recorder is operating in restricted mode.

2. If the sound card is available and configured, start to record your message by clicking on the red
button in the bottom right of the window.

3. To stop the recording, click the rectangular button.

4. To check and listen to the recorded message, click the triangular button.

5. If you are happy with the message, record it by clicking File > Save. Give it a file name and check
the message format.

Attention : announcements must have the format CCITT A-law 8 KHz, 8 bits, mono. The an-
nouncements created must have the same name as the default messages.

6. If the format is not correct, click Change and select the format CITT A-law 8 KHz, 8 bits, mono.
Click OK to confirm and OK again to save the message.

Recording ACD messages using a phone set

If you cannot record ACD messages using a PC, it is possible to record information messages using a
Reflexe set (Menu/System/Install/MV/inFMsg 1 to 50), and then export them using the menu PM5/Voi-
ce Application/Information Message/Transfer. Once they have been exported, convert and rename
the messages in the ACD-compatible format, then re-import them to the ACD.

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE USE OF ANNOUNCEMENTS

Converting an announcement file

If the format of your file is not compatible, convert it using the following procedure:

- Open the .wav file to be modified in Sound Recorder and click File > Properties to check the file
format.

- If the format shown is different from CCITT A-Law 8 KHz, 8 bits, mono, click Convert Now.... A
window opens; select the format CCITT A-Law or CCITT -law and click OK to confirm.

- Save your file.

Recording ACD messages using a professional studio

For optimum quality, the services of a professional recording studio should be used. If this option is
chosen, observe the file format required.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

USE OF ANNOUNCEMENTS OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE AGENT APPLICATION

File
AGENT APPLICATION
5

The agent application is a user interface available on the agent's PC. By associating agents' telephone
sets with their PCs, they have a user-friendly working environment in which to manage their sets.

Agents can use this window to more easily declare the status of their set (on duty, off duty, temporary
absence, clerical work) as well as accessing functions such as real-time observation of statistics, defi-
nition of call types, multi-skills management, free seating or extraction of a customer information
screen.

Introduction to the application

Thanks to a gateway integrated in the call center, each agent PC is in contact with the call center via
the local network. When a call is distributed, the PC starts communicating with the call center. For
example when the set rings, the application knows the number of the caller and the time spent in the
queue, and can display this information on the screen.

Description of functions

The agent application provides three groups of functions:

1. Control functions.

These are used to identify the agent, the status of the agent's set, the skills group to which he/she
belongs, and they also provide information on calls.

2. Statistical functions.

3. Information screen pop-up functions.

CONTROL FUNCTIONS
The control functions are:

- free seating,

- status declaration,

- skills management,

- provision of information on calls.

Free seating

This function is used to identify agents via their identifiers and access codes. This means that any agent
can occupy any position in the call center without having to change any of his/her details.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

AGENT APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

When a session opens, agents must identify themselves by selecting the identifier assigned to them and
by entering their password. If necessary, they can click the Change button to change their password.

Status declaration

Agents can easily declare the different activity statuses possible:

- On duty: agents are assigned to take calls in the groups which they belong to.

- Clerical work: the agent withdraws temporarily from the call distribution chain. For example,
when the agent is required to perform a task related to the call, such as filling in a form, sending
an e-mail or fax, etc.

- Temporary absence: the agent goes temporarily off duty for a break. Periods of temporary ab-
sence are not considered as work time.

- Off duty: the agent is no longer available to receive ACD calls.

- Information: the information button is used to warn the agent of a change in status or that he/she
has been assigned to a different group, this change being conducted outside the agent application.
The information button flashes to inform the agent of a forced change. To acknowledge the mes-
sage, the agent must click this button.

The call center manager can force the status of an agent. In this case, an icon in the agent application
flashes to show the agent that his/her status has been forced.

Skills management

When they come on duty, users can declare their skills (hotline, purchasing, sales for example). The
call center manages this information dynamically in order to route calls efficiently.

Call information

When the agent's set starts ringing, the application is activated with the data related to the call. The
agent can be provided with the following information:

- Caller number.

- Called number.

- ACD group requested.

- Caller queuing time.

- Conversation time.

- Activation of the customer information pop-up, if the screen pop-up does not appear automatically
or if the pop-up was closed before the end of the conversation.

- Choice of call type.

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE AGENT APPLICATION

Definition of call types

The call type is noted by the agent processing the call, using coding specified in advance by the call
center manager. The call type can only be noted during the call itself. The agent selects the call type
from a drop-down menu showing the predefined types.

This function is used to improve call analysis and relate calls directly to the activity and profitability of
the call center.

The call center manager can define the call types in the window A.C.D. - General Parameters in the
configuration module menu, in the Types tab. Ten types can be entered, by specifying a number and
heading for each type.

STATISTICS FUNCTIONS
The statistics functions allow the agent to manage his/her work effectively.

Personal data

The agent is provided with counters (counters related to status, call activity rate or distribution by type)
to directly manage his/her work and time.

- Status counter: displayed as a graph, this counter shows the time spent by the agent in the diffe-
rent statuses possible (on duty, clerical work, temporary absence and off duty) since the counter
was last reset and only while the application is running. The data is expressed in minutes. The
agent can reset the counter whenever required, or choose to reset the values whenever he/she lea-
ves the agent application.

- Activity rate: displayed as a graph, this counter shows the time spent by the agent on ACD calls
over the last hour or last half-hour, depending on the parameters configured in the ACD. This rate
is given as a percentage; it can be used to assess whether the agent is receiving too many or too
few calls.

- Call types table: displayed as a table, this information is used to determine the total number of
calls defined by the agent and broken down by call type (maximum of 10). The difference
between the total calls answered and the number of call types defined can be used to determine
the number of calls where the type was not defined. The agent can reset the counter whenever re-
quired, or choose to reset the values whenever he/she leaves the agent application.

Supervision

This function is used to determine the total load of the ACD in real-time. Each agent is both the ma-
nager and supervisor of his/her work. By combining supervision of traffic and declaration of skills, the
agent can directly participate in the smooth running of the ACD and in the smooth flow of his/her traf-
fic, by monitoring changes in indicators.

Statistical indicators provide the following information for each ACD group which the agent is connec-
ted to:

- the number of calls waiting as a function of the wait time for each call,

- the number of calls answered,

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

AGENT APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- the number of calls which can be held in the queue of each group,

- the status of each group (open, closed, saturated).

List of calls

The list of calls is used to keep a record of all the agent's calls. It allows the agent to accurately monitor
his/her work.

The following call information is provided:

- Caller: number received,

- Called number: number called by the customer,

- Customer code: customer code which may be entered by the agent in the Customer Code field,

- Group: ACD group requested,

- Type: name of the call type,

- Date: date of the call,

- Time: time of the call,

- Conversation: conversation time,

- Queue: time spent in the queue before being connected to the agent.

The list is deleted on a cyclical basis (this option must be defined in the configuration menu of the
ACD), or can be deleted by the agent at any time in the consultation interface.

CUSTOMER INFORMATION SCREEN EXTRACTION FUNCTION

This function allows an agent to extract information on a customer. It is reserved for the call center and
allows telephony-computer interactivity. The agent has three ways of operating, this choice being
made when the system is installed:

Integrated mode: using the built-in tools.

Connected mode: using an application which can be instantiated as a Com Server. For example, with
the applications in the Microsoft Office range, such as Microsoft Outlook.

Specific mode: using a third-party CRM (Customer Relations Management) application.

Integrated mode

The agent application includes a contact management application. This is a database in Microsoft Ac-
cess format which can be shared over a network. The database contains the standard fields for contact
management requirements: name, telephone, address, e-mail, etc. Each customer information screen
can be displayed in HTML format.

Users can add additional fields specific to the management of their area of expertise; these modifica-

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE AGENT APPLICATION

tions do not, however, appear on the information screen.

Agents can be made responsible for updating the database, their writing rights being opened via an
access code. They can then make the information screens available to other agents when the call is
presented.

The database has a direct link with messaging services. An e-mail can be sent to a contact by clicking
on their information screen.

Connected mode

The agent application can be interconnected with message or contact management software such as
Microsoft Outlook.

Connected mode allows execution of a script (Windows Scripting Host) when the call is received and
access to the database. The application is supplied with a default script file which can be changed by
the call center manager. This operating mode is usually used to access a customer database in Out-
look.

If the administrator chooses to use Outlook messaging, the Outlook contact record will appear when
a call is received. To make this interoperational system possible, the application activates the "script"
to run Outlook by sending it the necessary parameters (caller number).

Using the same procedure as in integrated mode, the contact database is directly accessible from the
agent application.

Specific mode

This mode is used to provide interconnection between the agent application and a third-party appli-
cation. This is useful as many companies use their own Customer Relations Management software.

To connect the agent application to another customer application, the call center manager specifies
an application which will be called by the agent application when an ACD call is received. When a call
is assigned to an agent, the associated agent application executes the command line entered in this
section, followed by two parameters specific to the call, the caller number and the number called.

The syntax is as follows:

program [option] /1:caller_number /2:called_number

By default, by way of example, "program [option]" is "Wscript.exe post_it.vbs"

SETTING PREFERENCE PARAMETERS

Preferences allow agents to set the parameters of their working environment. They can:

- Select the language used in the agent application.

- Define whether the customer information screen pops up automatically on the call center or is ac-
tivated by the agent.

- Leave the application always visible in relation to the other applications open on the PC.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

AGENT APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- Make the application appear in front of all applications already open.

- Place the phone set on duty when the application is launched.

- Reset the counters on leaving the application or whenever required.

- Disconnect on leaving the application.

This parameter is used in free seating scenarios when agents disconnect to leave the application;
this allows them to register their presence on another computer. If they are not disconnected on
leaving the application, a message informs them that they are not disconnected when they identify
themselves on another workstation.

- Select the information screen type: HTML or standard (on the call center).

- Select the graphs to be displayed.

- Reset their counters.

AGENT APPLICATION: CONFIGURATION

The configuration application allows the call center manager to set the parameters of the agent appli-
cation.

STARTING THE APPLICATION

To access configuration of the agent application, a Login window allows the call center manager to
authenticate him/herself. A password is necessary to establish the connection. The default password is
help1954.

CONFIGURATION OF THE AGENT APPLICATION

The call center manager has a password-protected configuration module which is used to change the
different agent application options and assign rights to agents. The configuration menu has three tabs:

- General: used to define preference parameters.

- Colors: used to define the colors used in the display of graphs and counters.

- Agents: used to list all agents.

GENERAL TAB
The general parameters can be divided into three groups:

- Supervisor

The call center manager specifies the language he/she wants to use in the configuration module
and customer information screen manager.

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE AGENT APPLICATION

- Agent

List: the call center manager enters the number of days of data which must be saved in the list of
calls. Each agent has a list in which he/she can consult the latest calls. This list is never deleted
(value "0") or is deleted on a cyclical basis. This parameter is the same for all agents.

Activity rate: the call center manager enters the values of the activity rates to be displayed on
agent PCs. These parameters are the same for all agents.

- Customer database

The call center manager enters the mode used to connect to the customer database, this mode
being identical for all agents. The three modes offered are:

- Integrated mode (standard),

- Connected mode (script),

- Specific mode.

For more information on these modes, refer to the section on "Customer information screen extrac-
tion function" in this chapter.

COLORS TAB
The administrator can change the colors of all the graphs made available to agents.

AGENT TAB
By default, the agent application manages 32 ACD agents. Each agent is located by his/her identifier
and name. These parameters can only be changed by the call center manager using the call center
configuration module.

To change Agent Rights, select the ACD agent to be changed and click the Properties button.

Agent Rights

This window shows all the agents declared in the call center configuration module.

Double-click on the agent or click Properties to display the agent's window and confirm or disable the
associated right:

- Change ACD Group: this right makes the Group button visible on the toolbar, allowing agents
to change the groups they belong to.

- Customize Interface (Preferences window): this right makes the Preferences button visible on the
toolbar, allowing agents to select their own parameters.

- Change Password: this right allows agents to change their own connection password when the
application is launched.

- Define Call Types: this right makes the drop-down call type menu visible in the call information
bar.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

AGENT APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- Display Statistics: this right makes the Statistics button visible on the toolbar, allowing agents to
view different types of statistical data.

- Access Call List: this right makes the Calls List button visible on the toolbar, allowing agents to
access their list of calls.

- Change Customer Information Screens: this right is only used in integrated mode (standard).
Agents can access the screens in the customer database, in read or write mode. If this right is un-
checked, the agent can still consult the customer database and use screen pop-ups.

- Change the Comment Field in Customer Information Screens: this right is only used in Inte-
grated Mode (standard). Agents can access the information screens in the customer database in
read mode only, but they can change the comment field in these screens.

- Delete Agent Password: this right allows the call center manager to delete the agent's password.

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

File
STATISTICS APPLICATION
6

The call server keeps a database of daily statistics on groups, agents, lines (also called ACD ports) and
calls over a period of 14 months. The statistics application is used to access this information and pre-
sent it in the form of tables and/or graphs.

This application is typically used by the person or people in charge of the call center (for example, the
supervisor(s)).

OPENING THE STATISTICS APPLICATION

Open the Statistic Manager application in your program manager. The Statistic Manager window
is displayed.

The functions available in this window are:

- Configuration: used to configure the Statistic Manager application.

- A.C.D.: used to access the statistics of groups or agents and to automatically print them.

- Line Statistics: used to check the sizing of the call center.

- Call Statistics: used to access the statistics on calls.

- Click on the open door icon to leave the application.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

CONFIGURATION OF THE STATISTICS APPLICATION

The application can be configured to define the language required and provide information on the
system used (server and IP address).

In the Statistic Manager window, click the Configuration icon:

1. The configuration window appears.

2. In the upper part, select a language for the application. The languages available are: French, Ger-
man, English and Spanish.

3. In the lower part, select:

- Linux Server (Call Server Service) when using the statistics application for the first time and
enter the IP address of the system in the field IP Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
- Local when using the application for the second and subsequent times and after repatriation
of the system statistics. The statistics application operates locally and the repatriated statistics
are stored in C:\temp\trace.

Remarque : it is possible to produce statistics locally without being connected to the system.

2/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

- Windows Server: if it exists, a server outside the system.

Remarque : this option is not used.

4. Click the Version button to display the copyright window of the application.

5. Click Confirm to confirm.

6. Click OK to exit the screen.

Remarque : - When connecting to a call server, the statistics files are repatriated to the folder c:/
temp/trace depending on the statistics requested (ACD groups, agents, calls or lines). A
specific folder corresponds to each type of statistic (acd_qualif, acd_stat, appel and
voies). If the folder corresponding to the statistics which are required locally does not
exist, statistics cannot be generated.

- Each time statistics from a call server are executed, the most recent statistics are dele-
ted. If you want to keep the statistics from several call servers, they must be saved in dif-
ferent folders.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

Remote access statistics

To execute remote access statistics, use the following procedure:

1. Open a PM5 connection on the remote server.

2. Note the IP address used by this connection by running Ipconfig in DOS or check the PPP address
of the system CPU board in the menu PM5/Hardware and Limits/IP Boards/IP Address of PCX
(the value is usually 10.168.92.100).

3. Program this IP address in the menu of the statistics application Statistics/Configuration/Linux

Server (Call Server)/ IP Address.

4. Run the statistics (wait several minutes).

Remarque : : depending on the statistics requested, the repatriation time may be very long.

LINE STATISTICS

The line busy rate is the time for which line(s) is(are) busy in relation to the maximum busy time possi-
ble. The value is expressed as a percentage.

Nota : information on lines (also called ACD ports) shows how the internal resources of the call
center are being used.

The busy rate can be calculated using the following criteria:

- Day: the calculation is performed for 1/2 hour or hour slots with statistics produced over 24 hours
or over a given time slot.

- Period: the calculation is performed for a 24-hour time period over several consecutive days.

- Month: the calculation is performed for a 24-hour time period.

4/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

- Lines: from 1 to 8, line by line or for several lines.

To access the line statistics window, do the following:

Open the Statistic Manager application. The Statistic Manager window is displayed.

To open the Line Statistics option, click the icon:

The following window opens:

DEFINING THE PARAMETERS OF LINE STATISTICS

The window includes the tabs Busy, Saturated and Saturation Period which are used to select the
elements you want statistics on. The Statistics, Options and Print buttons at the bottom of the screen
are respectively used to display options on how often statistics are printed, how they are displayed, and
printing of the statistical information selected. These options are displayed to the right of the tab you
are in.

1. Click the Busy tab. This tab is used to display a graphical representation of the line busy rate.

1.1. Click the Statistics button to display the window for selecting line statistics.

1.1.a. In the Lines area, select the line(s) to be observed by clicking in the corresponding boxes.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

1.1.b. In the Statistics area, select the frequency with which the statistics are printed. The
available choices are:

- daily:

Select a day from the drop-down menu. The selected day appears in the list to the left of
the window.

Select Full Day or define the time slot that you want statistics on, and select whether they
are presented every hour or half-hour.

- period:

Select the start day and end day of the period. The selected days in this period are displayed
in the list to the left of the window. You can delete a day from this list by double-clicking on
it.

- monthly:

Select a month from the drop-down menu. The days considered in this month are displayed
in the list to the left of the window. You can delete a day from this list by double-clicking on
it.

Remarque : for all these choices, it is possible to select the time slot over 24 hours or over a
value defined in the drop-down menus of the option Between.

1.1.c. Click OK to confirm your choices or Apply.

1.2. Click the Options button to choose how the graphs are displayed (colors, shapes and gridli-
nes) and to define the type of statistics. A window appears in the right-hand part of the screen.
1.3. Click the Print button to open a print options window and start printing the screen.

2. Click the Saturation Period tab. This tab is used to display a graphical representation of the line
saturation rate.

2.1. Click the Statistics button to display the window for selecting line statistics.
2.2. Click the Print button to open a print options window and start printing the screen.

Remarque : the Options button cannot be accessed in the Saturation Period tab.

SATURATION RATE
To access the saturation rate, click the Saturation tab.

The saturation rate is calculated for a given day; it is therefore possible to select only the daily statistics
mode. The statistics modes Period and Monthly cannot be used to display the saturation rate.

The information is displayed over the 60 minutes following the time selected. The busy rate of the line
or lines is expressed as a percentage.

The saturation represented by the value 100% corresponds to a time at which the line or lines cannot
handle other calls.

6/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

CALL STATISTICS

The Call Statistics option provides information on the traffic coming into the call center.

To open the Call Statistics option, click the Call Statistics icon:

The following window opens:

DEFINING THE PARAMETERS OF CALL STATISTICS

The window includes the tabs Graph, Absolute Value and List of Lost Calls which are used to select
the elements you want statistics on. The Statistics, Options, Parameters and Print buttons at the bot-
tom of the screen are used to display various options. These options are displayed to the right of the
tab you are in.

The Graph tab is used to display the call statistics. Click the Options button to select:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- Appearance: select the color of the graph (Color, Pastel or Grayed).

- Gridlines: select the type of gridline for the graphs (None, Horizontal, Vertical, Both).

- Graph: choose the type of graph by selecting: 2D Pie, 3D Pie, 2D Bar or 3D Bar.

- Option: select the type of calls that you want to see displayed. This information will be displayed
in the Absolute Value tab.

To confirm the selection, click OK.

You can request statistics over a day, a period of several days or a month. To do this, click the Statistics
button at the bottom of the screen. Select the period, full day or time slot of a day and select whether
the statistics are presented every half-hour or hour.

8/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

The Absolute Value tab allows you to obtain information on the lines (as an absolute value).

Information is provided on the following:

- Total number of calls.

- Number of calls which are shorter than T1; this parameter is defined by the manager.

- Number of calls which are longer than T1; this parameter is defined by the manager.

- Total call time.

- Average call time = total call time / total number of calls.

- Maximum time of a call.

- Minimum time of a call.

The List of Lost Calls tab provides information on lost calls.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

ACD STATISTICS

In the Statistic Manager window, click the ACD icon:

The following window opens:

The A.C.D. window contains the following icons:

- Group Statistics, for obtaining statistics on groups.

- Agent Statistics, for obtaining statistics on agents.
- Automatic Printing of Group Statistics
- Automatic Printing of Agent Statistics

10/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

DEFINING THE PARAMETERS OF GROUP STATISTICS

The statistics parameters are defined using the menu PM5/Call center/ACD Service/A.C.D - Gene-
ral Parameters.

When configuring the general parameters of the call center, you have the option of checking or un-
checking the box Waiting Begins Before Overflow Time Delay.

If the box is checked:

- The Waiting Time counter is incremented as soon as a call enters the queue and therefore groups
all waiting calls together.
- The Calls in Queue > T1 counter is incremented for all calls answered which have stayed in the
queue for longer than period T1.
- The Calls in Queue > T2 counter is incremented for all calls answered which have stayed in the
queue for longer than period T2.

If the box is not checked:

- The Waiting Time counter only groups together those calls placed in the queue after overflow to

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

another group has been implemented. It is possible to set the parameters of an overflow time delay
independently for each of the groups 1-4 and 5-8 in the Overflow Grouping field.
- The Calls in Queue > T1 counter is incremented for all calls answered which have stayed in the
queue for longer than (T1+ overflow time delay).
- The Calls in Queue > T2 counter is incremented for all calls answered which have stayed in the
queue for longer than (T2+ overflow time delay).

DISPLAYING GROUP STATISTICS

In the A.C.D window, click the Group Statistics icon:

The group statistics window appears.

The window includes the tabs Graph, Absolute Value, Percentage and Time which are used to se-
lect the elements you want statistics on. The Statistics, Options and Print buttons at the bottom of the
screen are respectively used to display options on how often statistics are printed, how they are dis-
played, and printing of the statistical information selected. These options are displayed to the right of

12/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

the tab you are in.

1. Click Statistics to:

- Select the group for which you want statistics in the Group area.
- Choose the period for which information will be displayed, in the Statistics area. The following
periods can be defined:

- daily: select a day from the drop-down menu. The selected day appears in the list to the
left of the window. Select Full Day per 1 hour or 1/2 hour or define a time slot.

- period: select the start day and end day of the period. The selected days in this period are
displayed in the list to the left of the window.

Remarque : you can delete a day by double-clicking on it.

- monthly: select a month from the drop-down menu. The days considered in this month are
displayed in the list to the left of the window.

Remarque : you can delete a day by double-clicking on it.

The time slot is only accessible in the Daily mode.

Click Apply to apply the changes without closing the window, OK to close the window and apply the
changes, or Cancel to close the window without implementing the changes.

2. Click Options to define the format the graphs are displayed in.

3. Click the Print button to select the print options and start printing the screen.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

STATISTICS AS A PERCENTAGE OR AS AN ABSOLUTE VALUE

Click the Absolute Value tab or the Percentage tab.

Selecting elements to produce statistics

You can request statistics on the following elements:

- Incoming Calls: total number of calls arriving in the call distribution chain.

- Calls Answered: number of ACD calls transferred to an agent and connected, regardless of the
group (called or through overflow).

- Calls Waiting

- Calls in Queue: number of calls placed in the queue before being answered (connected to the
customer), with:

Calls in Queue > T1: number of calls for which the wait period is longer than threshold T1*.
This counter is a subset of the "Calls in Queue" counter.

Calls in Queue > T2: number of calls for which the wait period is longer than threshold T2*.
This counter is a subset of the "Calls in Queue > T1" counter.

* T1 and T2 are two threshold values which can be defined in PM5/ACD Service/General Pa-
rameters/General tab.

- Calls Deterred: number of calls routed to the dissuasion announcement following saturation of
the queue, or if no agent is defined for a given group.

- Calls Abandoned: number of calls which have left the ACD; the caller hangs up before being
connected to an agent, regardless of the routing phase of the call.

- Calls Service Closed: number of calls while the group is closed.

- Calls Overflow: number of calls answered by an agent belonging to the group taking the overflow
from the group requested. This counter is a subset of the Calls Answered counter.

Summary

Number of calls Waiting for less than T1= (Number of calls Waiting) - (Number of calls in Queue
> T1)

Number of calls Waiting between T1 and T2= (Number of calls in Queue > T1) - (Number of calls
in Queue > T2)

Remarque : all the percentages in the table are calculated in relation to incoming calls.

14/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

TIME STATISTICS
In the Group Statistics window, click the Time tab.

The following statistics are available as periods of time:

- Average Busy Time: total time of calls answered (time measured between the welcome an-
nouncement and the end of the call), divided by the number of calls answered.

- Average Routing Time: total routing time of calls answered, divided by the number of calls
answered. The announcement time is counted in the routing time.

- Average Waiting Time: total time of calls in the queue, divided by the number of calls answered
which have been waiting.

- Average Ringing Time: total ringing time of calls answered, divided by the number of calls
answered.

- Average Conversation Time: total conversation time of calls answered, divided by the number
of calls answered.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- Average Abandoned Time: total time of calls in the queue before the caller abandons the call
(the caller hangs up before being connected to an agent), divided by the number of abandoned
calls.

- Number of Abandoned Calls: total time of abandoned calls following a caller hanging up when
they were in the queue, or while being transferred after leaving the queue. These calls have gone
through the queue. They are a subset of the counter.

- Voluntary Exits: number of calls which have voluntarily left the queue (by pressing the * key) wi-
thout hanging up, to leave a message in the group mailbox.

- Total of Transfer Numbers: number of calls routed to the transfer number (programmed in PM5/
Call Center/ACD Service/General Parameters/General tab) following an abnormal situation
(group open with no agents assigned, or call waiting when the last agent has gone off duty from
the service, for example). The first call is routed to the transfer number and the following ones to
the queue.

Summary

For a given time slot:

Average busy time = (Average routing time) + (Average conversation time)

Average routing time = (Average waiting time) + (Average ringing time)

Number of incoming calls = (Number of calls Answered) + (Number of calls Abandoned) +

(Number of calls with Voluntary Exit) + (Number of calls Deterred) + (Number of calls Closed) +
(Number of calls Transferred)

16/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

GRAPHS
In the Group Statistics window, click the Graph tab to obtain summary information.

The Graph Options button can be used to choose how the graphs are displayed (colors, shapes and
units).

- Choose the graph color by selecting Color, Pastel or Grayed in the upper area.

- Choose the graph type by selecting 2D Pie, 3D Pie, 2D Bar or 3D Bar in the lower area.

- Choose how the graph is displayed by selecting Absolute Value or Time in the Number area.
Depending on the choice made, the window listing statistical information on groups is displayed
as an absolute value or in terms of time. Select the elements of your choice and click OK to return
to the previous window.

- To define what type of call the statistics are produced from, select Incoming Calls or Calls
Answered from the Synthesis area.

- The Incoming Calls synthesis graph shows the calls answered, deterred, abandoned and closed,
for the day and the groups selected.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

Remarque : incoming calls are selected by default.

- The Calls Answered synthesis graph shows the ACD calls (direct, in queue, in queue longer than
T1 and in queue longer than T2) answered by an agent, for the day and the groups selected.

Summary

Definition of summaries for incoming calls:

Number of calls Answered = (Number of calls In Queue) + (Number of calls waiting Longer than
T1) + (Number of calls waiting Longer than T2) + (Number of Direct calls)

This synthesis graph shows the calls answered, deterred, abandoned and closed, for the day and the
groups selected.

Definition of summaries for calls answered:

Number of calls Answered = (Number of calls In Queue) + (Number of calls waiting Longer than
T1) + (Number of calls waiting Longer than T2) + (Number of Direct calls)

This synthesis graph shows direct calls, calls in queue, calls in queue longer than T1 and in queue lon-
ger than T2, for the day and the groups selected.

18/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

PRINTING GROUP STATISTICS

To access automatic printing options, open the ACD application from the Statistic Manager screen.
Click the icon Automatic Statistic Printing - Groups.

The following print window is displayed.

You can program automatic printing so that daily statistics are printed at certain times of day for the
groups concerned.

1. Click the Print Parameters tab to print group statistics at a set time.

Remarque : up to 8 printing operations can be programmed per day.

1.1. In the General Parameters area, define the type of printing (color or monochrome), the time
slot, scale and graph type.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 19/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

1.1.a. In the right-hand area, define:

- the automatic printing time,

- the number(s) of the group(s) concerned by the printing operation,

- the print profile(s) relating to profiles 1, 2, 3 or 4 defined by the supervisor.

1.1.b. Click OK or Apply to confirm your choices.

1.2. Click the Profile 1, 2, 3 or 4 tab to define the print profiles.

Remarque : the supervisor can print four types of print profile, depending on the analysis re-
quired.

For each profile, select the different statistics screens of the groups that you want to print by
checking the corresponding boxes, then click OK or Apply to confirm your choices.

1.3. Click OK to confirm.

Remarque : statistics can be printed manually from the Group Statistics screen.

20/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

PRINTING AGENT STATISTICS

To access automatic printing options, open the ACD application from the Statistic Manager screen.
Click the icon Automatic Statistic Printing - Agents.

The following print window is displayed.

You can program automatic printing so that the daily statistics are printed at certain times of day for
the agents concerned.

1. Click the Print Parameters tab to print agent statistics at a set time.

Remarque : up to 8 printing operations can be programmed per day.

1.1. In the General parameters area, define the type of printing (color or monochrome), the time
slot, scale and graph type.

1.2. In the right-hand area, define:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 21/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- the automatic printing time

- the number(s) of the group(s)

- the print profile(s) relating to profiles 1, 2, 3 or 4 defined by the supervisor

- the agent number when printing agent statistics only.

Remarque : to select all agents, enter 99 in the Agent column.

1.3. Click OK or Apply to confirm your choices.

2. Click the Profile 1, 2, 3 or 4 tab to define the print profiles.

Remarque : the supervisor can print four types of print profile, depending on the analysis requi-
red.

For each profile, select the different statistics screens of the agents that you want to print by chec-
king the corresponding boxes, then click OK or Apply to confirm your choices.

3. Click OK to confirm.

Remarque : statistics can be printed manually from the Agent Statistics screen.

22/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

AGENT STATISTICS

To access agent statistics, open the ACD application from the Statistic Manager screen and click the
Agent Statistics icon:

The agent statistics window appears.

The Agent Statistics window includes the tabs Graph, Table of Calls, Table of Times and Time
which are used to select the elements you want statistics on. The Statistics, Options and Print buttons
at the bottom of the screen are respectively used to display options on how often statistics are printed,
how they are displayed, and printing of the statistical information selected. These options are displayed
to the right of the tab you are in.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 23/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

DESCRIPTION OF OPTIONS
1. Click the Table of Calls tab. This tab shows statistical information on calls as an absolute value,
in the form of a table.

1.1. Click the Statistics button to display the window for selecting agent statistics.

- Agent: used to select the number of the agent to be included in the statistics or to select all
agents (All option).

- Group: used to select the group(s) which the agent belongs to; check groups 1 to 8.

- Statistics: used to select the display period (Daily, Period or Monthly).

- Click Apply to apply the changes without closing the window, OK to close the window and
apply the changes, or Cancel to close the window without implementing the changes.

1.2. Click the Options button.

- General: select to display all calls.

- Call Number/Type: used to display calls according to their type.

The table is automatically updated after this selection.

2. Click the Table of Times tab. This tab shows statistical information on calls as a time value, in the
form of a table.

2.1. Click the Statistics button to display the window for selecting agent time statistics.

2.2. Click the Options button to define the parameters of the type of information required.

2.3. Select

- General to display the time of all calls,

- Total Time/Type to display the total time of calls according to their type,

- Average Time/Type to display the average time of calls according to their type.

The table is automatically updated as soon as one of these 3 options is selected.

3. Click the Graph tab. This tab is used to view the statistics in the form of a graph.

3.1. Click the Options button to access the window allowing you to select how the graphs will be
presented.

3.1.a. Choose the graph color by selecting Color, Pastel or Grayed in the upper area.

3.1.b. Choose the graph type by selecting 2D Pie, 3D Pie, 2D Bar or 3D Bar in the lower area.

3.1.c. Choose how the graph is displayed by selecting Number of Calls/Type or Total Time/
Type. Depending on the choice made, the window listing the statistical information produ-
ced on the groups in terms of time is displayed. Select the elements of your choice and click

24/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
6

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE STATISTICS APPLICATION

OK to return to the previous window.

3.1.d. To define from what type of calls the graph statistics are produced, select Number of
Calls or Average Time or Total Time in the Synthesis area.

- The Number of Calls synthesis graph shows ACD, "Other", "Incoming" and "Outgoing"
calls, for the day, for agents, and their selected groups.

- The Average Time synthesis graph shows ACD conversations, ACD rings and other con-
versations, for the day, the agent(s) and their selected groups.

- The Total Time synthesis graph shows total ACD conversations, ACD ringing and other
conversations, for the day, the agent(s) and their selected groups.

3.1.e. To define graphs related to specific statuses, select Number of Calls or Time from the
Detail area.

4. Click the Print button to open a screen with the print parameters.

TABLE OF CALLS
Click the Table of Calls tab. The following call statistics are available:

- ACD Calls: number of ACD calls answered by the agent.

- "Incoming" Calls": number of non-ACD calls arriving on the agent's set (external calls (DDI) or
internal calls to the set).

- "Outgoing" calls: number of non-ACD calls initiated by the agent (internal or external calls and
picking up the call).

Remarque : this is only possible if the protocol allows the information to be obtained; otherwise
all "non-ACD" (or "Other") calls are placed in the "Incoming" Calls column.

- No Answer: number of calls of ACD origin that the agent does not answer.

Remarque : there may be several no answers for the same incoming call number.

- Temporary Absence: number of times the agent switches to "Temporary Absence" status.

- Clerical Work: number of times the agent switches to "Clerical Work" status.

- On Duty: number of times the agent comes "on duty".

- Off Duty: number of times the agent goes "off duty".

Summary

Synthesis for absolute value statistics

Total number of Calls = (number of ACD calls) + (number of Incoming calls) + (number of
Outgoing calls)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 25/26

STATISTICS APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

TABLE OF TIMES
Click the Table of Times tab. The following call statistics are available:

- ACD Com. Average: total ACD conversation time/number of ACD calls answered by the agent.

- ACD Ring Average Time: total ring time of ACD calls arriving on the agent set (ring phase)/num-
ber of ACD calls answered by the agent.

- Other Com. Average Time: time during which the line of the "agent" set is busy ("Incoming" and
"Outgoing") excluding calls originating from the ACD server/number of times this set is busy, ex-
cluding ACD calls.

- Total Fully Busy: total ringing time of calls from the ACD server + time of ACD conversations +
time of Other calls ("Incoming" and "Outgoing").

- Total ACD Com.: total conversation time of ACD calls processed by the agent.

- Total Other Com.: time during which the line of the "agent" set is busy ("Incoming" and
"Outgoing") excluding calls of ACD origin.

- Total Temporary Absence: total time the agent spends in "Temporary Absence" status.

- Total Clerical Work: : total time the agent spends in "Clerical Work" status.

- Total On Duty: total time the agent is connected (on duty).

26/26 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE SUPERVISOR APPLICATION

File
SUPERVISOR APPLICATION
7

The supervisor application is used to view real-time information on call center activity. This information
is presented in the form of tables and charts on supervisor PCs.

The supervisor application can be used to perform the following operations:

- Supervise traffic and agent workloads in real-time: real-time display of the number of calls waiting,
the number of agents connected, the number of calls deterred, the number of calls lost etc. The
queue indicators are of course specific to each team or each group.

- Place agents on duty or take them off duty.

- Oblige an agent to move from one group to another, depending on the call load in the queue, the
duration of calls or the workload observed.

- Simultaneously observe:

- several groups or teams,

- several call numbers,
- several queues.

The supervisor is provided with a tool which can be used to immediately check the status of his/her
team. It can be used to see:

- the number of calls waiting,

- the number of calls received and processed,
- the number of transactions made,
- the number of calls abandoned or deterred,
- the number of agents active, busy or free,
- the status of the agents assigned to sets: free, idle, post-processing or busy (conversation time,
answer time, idle time, etc.).

Using the supervisor application, the supervisor manages:

- agent status,

- group status,

- agent activity rates,

- line (ACD port) status.

Nota : The supervisor can also act as an agent.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/12

SUPERVISOR APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

INTERFACE DESCRIPTION

The supervisor application contains three types of screen:

1. A screen for observing agents or groups

It provides real-time information specific to:

- agent sets
- groups,
- activity rates (with screen refreshing every second).

To switch from the agent screen to the group screen, click the Group or Agent button at the bottom
of the observation screen.

2. A screen for defining the parameters used to display the results of the observation reques-
ted.

3. A screen for observing line (ACD port) status.

It provides real-time information on the status of lines (with screen refreshing every second).

To switch from the agent screen to the group screen, click the Lines or Supervisor Console button
at the bottom of the observation screen.

2/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE SUPERVISOR APPLICATION

OBSERVATION OF AGENT AND GROUP ACTIVITY

Observation of agent activity

When the Supervisor application is opened, the agent status window appears.

This window contains two areas:

- An upper area listing agent parameters.

- The Agent Activity Rate (%) area.

Upper area listing agent parameters

The upper area lists the agent parameters in a table.

A set can have the following statuses:

- On duty,
- Temporary absence,
- Clerical work,

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/12

SUPERVISOR APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- Off duty.

- On duty

A set can have the following statuses:

- Awaiting Call

The agent assigned to an ACD group is likely to answer the next ACD call.

- No Answer

A call has been sent to an agent who does not answer.

Remarque : when configuring the general parameters, if the heading Agents that do not
answer are automatically withdrawn is checked, the supervisor must put the set
back on duty for it to be operational again; if the heading is not checked, the status
No Answer is displayed for 10 seconds and the set then switches to Awaiting Call.

- Being Routed

The agent's set is reserved for a call currently being transferred to it (the set is not yet ringing).

- Ringing

The agent's set rings after transfer of the ACD call.

- ACD Busy

The agent is holding an ACD conversation.

- Idle

The agent has just hung up after an ACD call. He/she is then given an idle period (General
Parameters/General tab) before another call is sent.

- Not Available

The agent's set is busy with non-ACD calls.

- Faulty

The agent has dialed incorrectly.

- Busy, Outgoing Call

The agent's set is off the hook without any dialing taking place or the agent is making a non-
ACD call.

- Temporary Absence

The agent has temporarily gone off duty for a break.

- Clerical Work

4/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE SUPERVISOR APPLICATION

Following an ACD conversation, the agent may, for example, need to assess the call (fill out a cus-
tomer information screen etc.); he/she temporarily withdraws from the call distribution chain.

- Off Duty

The agent has withdrawn from all ACD groups or the agent has no associated terminal.

Remarque : an agent observed as off duty on an isolated basis can very easily have an activity
rate of 80% for the hour currently being observed.

Agent Activity Rate (%) area

The agent activity rate is represented as a bar chart or graph. The agent activity rate is the ratio
between the time spent on ACD calls for each agent in the selected time slot, and the period of time
used to calculate activity rates (1 hour or 1/2 hour).

Changing agent parameters

Using the Supervisor Console window, the supervisor can change:

- The priority rank of the agent in the groups he/she belongs to.

- The agent status in real-time.

- The group the agent belongs to.

1. In the Status column of the table, click the cell corresponding to the agent whose parameters you
want to change. The Agent X Parameters window appears.

2. Change the parameters as required.

Remarque : The name and set number of the agent cannot be changed by the supervisor.

3. Click Apply to confirm the data, then OK to close the window. The changes are implemented by
the system and the new parameters of the agent are shown in the table.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/12

SUPERVISOR APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

Observation of group activity

To access the window for observing the status of agent groups, click the Groups button. The groups
observation window is displayed.

It contains two areas:

- An upper area listing the agent parameters in a table, as described in the previous paragraph.

- A lower area listing the parameters of calls and groups in a table:

- Calls Answered: the number of ACD calls transferred to an agent, and resulting in a conver-
sation being started (even if the conversation time is 0 seconds), regardless of the group (called
or through overflow).
- Calls Being Routed: the number of calls in the process of being connected to an agent, but
not yet put through.
- Waiting Time < Overflow Time: the number of calls which have been waiting less time than
the overflow time delay (search for agent only in the group requested)
- Waiting Time > Overflow Time: the number of calls which have been waiting longer than
the overflow time delay (search for agent only in the group requested and possibly in the over-
flow group if the latter is entered).

6/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE SUPERVISOR APPLICATION

- Calls in Queue > T1: number of calls waiting for longer than threshold T1*. This counter is
a subset of the "Calls in Queue" counter.
- Calls in Queue > T2: number of calls waiting for longer than threshold T2*. This counter is
a subset of the "Calls in Queue > T1" counter.

Nota : * T1 and T2 are two threshold values which can be defined in PM5/General Parame-
ters/General tab.

- Deterred Calls: the number of calls routed to the dissuasion announcement following satura-
tion of the queue, or if no agent is defined in a given group.
- Calls Service Closed: the number of calls taking place while the group is closed.
- Group Status:

Forcing to open or closed status is indicated on the Observation screens by the letter M for Ma-
nual. To view these statuses, click on the Group Status field, selecting the group required.

The group statuses are:

- OPEN M: group forced open.

- CLOSED M: group forced closed.
- OPEN: group open (depending on time slot or contact).
- CLOSED: group closed (depending on time slot or contact).
- Saturated Group: there are too many calls and the group is overloaded.

A group x is shown as overloaded as follows:

- Group x saturated (orange): no agents are free in the group, the next call will be placed in
the queue.

- Group x saturated (red): the time elapsed since group x was saturated is longer than the
value Time Delay Before Gradation of Overload Announcements defined when the
groups are configured.

- Calls in Queue: there is at least one call in the queue.

- Deterred Calls: at least one call is being deterred.

Remarque : all the percentages in the table are calculated in relation to calls coming into the ACD.

Example 1: default scenario

The parameter Waiting Begins Before Overflow Time Delay(*)is checked:

- Calls in queue > threshold T1: number of calls in queue for longer than T1

- Calls in queue > threshold T2: number of calls in queue for longer than T2

In this case, counting of the queue time for the statistics starts as soon as the call enters the queue.

Example 2: specific scenario

The parameter Waiting Begins Before Overflow Time Delay(*)is not checked:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/12

SUPERVISOR APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- Calls in queue > threshold T1: number of calls in queue for longer than (T1 + overflow time)

- Calls in queue > threshold T2: number of calls in queue for longer than (T2 + overflow time)

where overflow time is a value programmed independently for each of the groups 1-4 and 5-8 in
the Overflow Grouping field.

In this case, counting of the queue time for the statistics starts on termination of the overflow time delay,
the wait before this threshold being ignored.

(*) this screen can be accessed via PM5/ACD Services/General Parameters/General tab.

Changing the parameters of agent groups

The only parameter which can be changed in real-time is the status of a group.

1. Click the cell corresponding to the group whose status you want to change. The window Status of
Group N° X is displayed.

2. Select one of the following statuses:

- Open (Manual): group forced open

- Closed (Manual): group forced closed
- Automatic (On Time Slot): group open in accordance with time slots

3. Click OK to confirm the data. The status of the group is simultaneously changed.

8/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE SUPERVISOR APPLICATION

DISPLAY PARAMETERS OF OBSERVATION WINDOWS

To customize how the observation window is displayed, click the Parameters button. The customiza-
tion window appears.

The following operations can be performed using this window:

- Customizing the table:

The table can be customized by:

- Selecting agents by group (Agent area, By Group option).

- Select agents in a specific way (Agent area, Specific option):

- Selecting agents on an agent by agent basis, regardless of the group they belong to.

- Deleting an agent from the list of agents in the table.

- Customizing the Agent Activity Rate (%) graph.

The Agent Activity Rate (%) graph can be customized by:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/12

SUPERVISOR APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- Changing the display percentage of thresholds T1 and T2.

- Changing the gridlines of the graph.

Selecting agents by group

1. To select agents by group, select the By Group option in the Agent area, then select the groups
that you want to observe by checking the relevant box in the Group area.

2. Click Apply. The agents belonging to the group selected are displayed in the area List of Selected
Agents.

3. Click OK to confirm the data and close the customization window. The observation window of the
supervision console is displayed. The table shows how it has been customized.

Selecting agents on an agent by agent basis

Agents are selected on an agent by agent basis, regardless of the group they belong to.

1. Select the Specific option in the Agent area. All agents configured are displayed in the List of All
Agents area, in the lower part of the window.

2. To select the agents you want to appear in the observation window, select an agent in the List of
All Agents area, then click the Add Agent button, or double-click on the agent in the List of All
Agents area. The agent is displayed in the List of Selected Agents area.

Remarque : each agent must be selected individually.

3. Click OK to confirm the data and close the customization window. The observation window of the
supervision console is displayed. The table shows how it has been customized.

Deleting one or all agents from the list of agents in the table

To delete an agent, select that agent from the List of Selected Agents area, then click the Delete
Agent button, or double-click on the agent in the List of Selected Agents area. The agent disappears
from the List of Selected Agents area.

To delete all agents from the List of Selected Agents area, click on the Delete All Agents button. All
agents disappear from the List of Selected Agents area.

Click OK to confirm the data and close the customization window. The observation window of the su-
pervision console is displayed. The table shows how it has been customized.

Customizing the Agent Activity Rate (%) graph

1. To customize the Agent Activity Rate graph, click the Parameters button. The customization win-
dow appears.

2. In the Threshold area,

2.1. Check the View box to display thresholds T1 and T2 on the activity rate graph.

2.2. In the fields T1 = and T2 =, enter the required value. T1 and T2 indicate quality of service,

10/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE SUPERVISOR APPLICATION

allowing rapid analysis of activity rates.

Remarque : T1 and T2 can be used to change the view thresholds of the agent activity rate.

3. In the Gridlines area, select the type of gridline required by checking the boxes None, Vertical,
Horizontal or Both.

4. Click OK to confirm the data and close the customization window. The observation window of the
supervision console is displayed. The graph is displayed with the new customization.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/12

SUPERVISOR APPLICATION OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

LINE OBSERVATION

The Supervisor application allows supervisors to access real-time information on lines (ACD ports).

To access the observation screen, click Lines.

This screen shows activation of the server lines in real-time (with screen refreshing every second). The
screen shows:

- The line number.

- The line status.

Lines can have one of the following 4 statuses: free (green), incoming (yellow), outgoing, faulty
(red).

- A description of the line.

The heading of the application assigned to the lines is displayed for ACD calls.

12/12 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE TRACEABILITY

File
TRACEABILITY
8

Trace files can be used to obtain information on agent activity or calls.

This information is provided to assist the installer in setting up the ACD. In particular, it provides a list
of the latest events related to agents and the ACD calls received.

Trace files are continuously activated, and their size is limited to approximately 100 kbytes. The files
are regularly emptied of their content. The traces are in the form of letters and headings, in French
only.

Important : the format of trace files can be changed at any time by the manufacturer, without notice
or guarantees in terms of syntax and/or content.

DISPLAYING ACD AGENT TRACE MESSAGES

To access the trace file of ACD agents, click the File of ACD Agents icon.

Each line displayed represents an action related to an agent or group. Information is provided on the
following:

- yyyy/mm/dd: the message date

- hh:mm:ss: the message time

- P or G: P for Agent Set and G for ACD Group

Nota : If P is used, the syntax is shifted to the right.

- AG:: Agent xx-yyy where xx is the agent identifier (1 to 32) and yyy is the agent set number.

- The letters S, H, A, O, D, N, X, P, B, F and G represent one of the statuses an agent can have. The
possible statuses are as follows:

- S: start of service
- H: end of service
- A: temporary absence
- O: busy, out of ACD service
- D: agent available again
- N: no answer
- X: anomaly
- P: busy with outgoing call
- B: double call

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

TRACEABILITY OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

- F: false call

- G: agent re-assigned(G). G is followed by the group number (0 to 7)

- a, b, c : show the group status: forced opening of the group (a), end of status forcing (b), forced
closure of the group (c).

The figure below shows an example of an ACD Agents trace file.

DISPLAYING ACD CALL TRACE MESSAGES

To access the trace file of ACD calls, click the File of ACD Calls icon.

Each line displayed represents a call. Information is provided on the following:

- yyyy/mm/dd: the call date

- hh:mm:ss: the call time

- A: ACD

- V: the ACD port number

- G: the number of the group called (1 to 8); the number of the assigned group which answered the
call

- Ag: the number of the assigned group which answered the call, followed by the set number of the
agent who answered the call

- Oc: the total busy time from the agent picking up the call to the end of the communication in se-
conds (busy time = routing time + queuing time + ringing time + conversation time)

- Ah: the routing time in seconds (routing time = busy time - conversation time)

- At: the queuing time

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
8

OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE TRACEABILITY

- Sn: the ringing time of the agent set included in the routing time, in seconds

- Cv: the conversation time in seconds

- S, D, A, F, f, R, Q and X show one of the statuses that a call can have. The possible statuses are
as follows:

- S: answered
- D: deterred
- A: abandoned by the caller
- F: closure on time slot
- f: forced closure
- R: routed to the transfer number
- Q: the caller voluntarily left the queue

- X: anomaly in routing the call

- Ia: the agent identifier (1 to 32)

- Qlf: definition of call types

The figure below shows an example of an ACD Calls trace file.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

TRACEABILITY OMNITOUCH CALL CENTER OFFICE

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
PM5 : System configuration

SECTION

PM5 : SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Section PM5 : System configuration

INSTALLATION PROCEDURES FILE 1

FEATURES INCLUDED FILE 2

VOICE PROMPTS MANAGEMENT FILE 3

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION PM5 : SYSTEM PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

CONFIGURATION (INDEX)

Section PM5 : System configuration (Index)

FEATURES INCLUDED FILE 2

INSTALLATION PROCEDURES FILE 1

VOICE PROMPTS MANAGEMENT FILE 3

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

File
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
1

PM5 is the unified administration and configuration tool for Alcatel OmniPCX Office; running on a PC,
it can be used for example to program the system's voice functionality, voice mail, the network, Internet
access, downloading, even printing of mailing labels.

MINIMAL PC CONFIGURATION

- Pentium 166 MHz processor.

- RAM: 128 Mb for Windows 2000 SP3; 64 Mb for Windows NT 4, 128 Mb for Windows XP Pro SP1.
- Hard disk
- Screen: 800 x 600 pixels
- 1 mouse.
- 1 serial port (connection to Alcatel OmniPCX Office for data transfer).
- 1 Ethernet board (IP mode).
- 64K PPP-compatible ISDN or V34 modem for remote access.

INSTALLING THE PM5 SOFTWARE

The PM5 software is installed from a CD-ROM.

The application is installed by making selections from the options proposed in the various windows.

When installation is finished, you access the application either:

1. by double-clicking on the new icon created on the Windows desktop.

2. by selecting Start -> Program -> Alcatel OmniPCX Office -> PM5. The window Welcome to
PM5 appears.

PM5 REMOTE ACCESS

With remote access, you can use PM5 to configure or download an Alcatel OmniPCX Office system.
This access can be managed using:

- an ISDN modem able to use ISDN PPP (point to point) protocol at 64 K.

- a V34 analog modem in Hayes protocol at 33600 bds.

These two modems are integrated on Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

Remarque : The PM5 software must be installed on the remote maintenance PC, if Windows Termi-
nal Server is not being used.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/10

INSTALLATION PROCEDURES PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

REMOTE ACCESS BY ISDN MODEM

ISDN modem recommended

Alcatel OmniPCX Office is equipped with an 64 K ISDN modem using PPP protocol for remote access
through the public network. It provides a point-to-point link accessible via standard LINUX procedures
(PPP, etc.)

The following modems are validated:

- KORTEX NOVAFAX ISDN 128000/33600 with PPP protocol

- FRITZ ¡X CAPI 2.0 or any standard "FRITZ" modem

- Multitech I Way Hopper MTA 128 ST 128 KBPS ISDN, with the specific ATS 58093 configura-
tion.

ISDN 64 to 128 KPBS modems handling the PPP protocol are generally compatible and support CHAP
authentication.

RAS installation process

The procedures described below only concern PCs running Windows NT 4 with access to the IP proto-
col stack. To use remote access it is necessary install RAS (Remote Access Service) on the PC.

There are two phases for installation process:

1. Install the RAS for the Alcatel modem (V24 modem)

2. Then install the ISDN modem and configure the RAS to use it.

Nota : To install the RAS, it is mandatory to have the Administrator rights , the Windows NT instal-
lation CD-ROM and service Pack 6.

RAS installation procedure for the V24 modem

1. Open the Control panel.

2. Open the Network folder

3. Select the Services tab.

4. Click Add.

5. Select in the list Remote Access Services.

6. The Windows NT installation program proposes either:

- to select the drive access path

- or to insert the Windows NT installation CD-ROM.

7. In the list of modems, select COM 1 (or COM 2) OmniPCX Direct V24 in order to subsequently
use the V24-PM5 connection.

2/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

8. Click on Continue.

9. Click on Close, then click on Continue.

Attention : At the end of the installation, the system asks "to restart the computer now" Click on
No.

10. Reboot the PC.

ISDN modem installation process (example)

The following procedure describes how to install a FRITZ modem.

1. Insert the modem installation CD-ROM.

2. Click the FRITZ ¡X PC Capi driver installer icon The wizard is displayed.

2.1. Indicate the serial where the modem will be connected.

2.2. When the install process is complete, reboot the PC.

3. Insert the modem installation CD-ROM. The wizard is displayed

3.1. Click the FRITZ ¡32 Communication Software installer icon.

3.2. Select Install and configure.

3.3. Use the default installation (click on Next in each Wizard screen).

3.4. At the end of the Wizard mode, check the Install Capi-port driver box.

4. Select AVM ISDN1 Internet (PPP over ISDN).

5. Reboot the PC.

Procedure to configure the RAS for the ISDN modem.

1. Open the Control panel.

2. Open the Network folder

3. Select the Services tab.

4. Click Add.

5. There are two ways to enable the Remote Access Service:

- Select Remote Access Service in the list if the service is already installed.

- Otherwise, add the Remote Access Service using the procedure described in the paragraph
above.

6. Click on Properties. The list displays the remote access identifier Com 1 Alizé Direct serial link
connection.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/10

INSTALLATION PROCEDURES PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

7. Add FRITZ AWM ISDN1 Internet (PPP over ISDN).

Attention : If another modem is already installed on the port you want to use, remove it and install
the new one.

8. Click on Continue, then click on Close.

9. Reboot the PC.

Alcatel OmniPCX Office remote access creation

1. Open the My Computer folder.

2. Select the Dial-Up Networking icon.

3. Create a new connection using default parameters and entering a connection name.

4. Check the modem used is AWM ISDN1 Internet (PPP over ISDN).

5. Click on Next.

Remarque : Do not enter a telephone number.

6. Click on Finish.

7. Close the folder.

Use of the remote access with PM5

1. Launch PM5. The PM5 Welcome page is displayed.

2. Select the Expert menu.

3. Click on Communication.

4. Select Connect....

5. Click on Modem direct, then click on OK.

6. Click on Dialing and select AWM ISDN1 Internet (PPP over ISDN).

7. Dial the customer phone number and click on OK.

8. Type in the following password: PBXk1064.

Remarque : The PC and B1 lights on the modem should light up when the connection is established.

The configuration session is open.

Remote access to the ISDN modem

When an ISDN modem is used, it is necessary to reserve a DDI number in the public numbering plan
to be able to establish remote access.

4/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

If no DDI number is available, check whether the system's ISDN modem access is in the default atten-
dant group (default group). In this case it is not necessary to keep a DDI number.

Remarque : If the modem is not currently in the attendant group, it is useful to set the Reroutdata flag
to the value 01H. The system then automatically recognizes the ISDN service correspon-
ding to the incoming call and looks in the default attendant group for a data terminal.

REMOTE ACCESS BY THE ANALOG MODEM

Analog modem recommended

Alcatel Omni PCX Office is equipped with an analog modem V34 for remote access through the public
network. This modem provides a point-to-point communication link accessible via standard LINUX
protocols (PPP, etc.).

Its main characteristics are:

- V34 Modem
- Maximum transmission speed: 33600 bds
- Hayes protocol.

In the current version of the system, the V34 "US Robotic" modem has been validated. The other types
of modems were not validated.

Installation process of the remote access by analog modem

Follow the procedures described in the previous paragraphs, but replacing the FRITZ modem with the
US Robotics analog modem.

Remote access to the analog modem

When the analog modem is used, it is necessary to hold a DDI number in the public numbering plan
in order to be able to carry out remote maintenance.

In the case of no DDI number is available, the access to the modem will be possible only via the ope-
rator transfer.

OPERATING MODE

1. Open PM5 on the remote access PC.

2. Select the Expert menu.

3. Click on Communication.

4. Select Connect....

5. Click on Modem direct, then click on OK.

6. There are two ways of establishing a remote connection:

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/10

INSTALLATION PROCEDURES PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

- Select an input already used in the Input used field of the Modem Connection window.

- Click on Dialing, select the modem to use ("used modem"), then dial the customer remote ac-
cess number in the Number field.

7. Enter the system's default password PBXk1064.

8. Wait a few seconds for the connection to be established.

SECURITY

In the remote access, the protocol used in the "data link" OSI layer is PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol). The
TCP/IP protocols are used respectively in the "transport" and "network" layers. For each layer, Alcatel
OmniPCX Office carries out an access control.

Authentication
At the start of the connection (PPP), an account name (system masked) and password (PBXk1064) are
required. This account name is automatically generated by PM5. The password is required by PM5 to
establish a direct connection (LAN) with Alcatel OmniPCX Office. Any other authentication will be re-
jected.

Firewall
If the system accepts the authentication, the PPP connection will be established, and all the data packets
received on this interface will be filtered according to the following rules:

All the packets are refused except:

- packets bound for Alcatel OmniPCX Office FTP server via two TCP ports preset for the PCX confi-
guration by PM5.
- packages bound for Alcatel OmniPCX Office HTTP server via the HTTP port preset for the Internet
access configuration by WBM (Web Based Management).
- control packets using the ICMP protocol (Internet Control Message Protocol).

LOCAL V24 ACCESS FOR PM5

It is possible to use PM5 software to dialog with OmniPCX Office using a V24 connection. In this case
the network connection is not necessary.

A specific reinforced cable must link the "Config" RJ45 connector on the system CPU to the Com port
of the PC using PM5.

Wiring of the connection cable

6/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

RJ45 SUB D 9-point (F)

1 7
2 4
3 3
4
5 5
6 2
7 6
8 8

Installation procedure
1. Open the PM5 software on the PC.

2. Select the Expert mode.

3. Click on the Communication menu.

4. Select the Connect menu.

5. Select the Local menu.

6. The system proposes installation of Alcatel OmniPCX Direct V24. Click on Yes. The Modem op-
tions window is displayed.

7. Click Add. The Installation window is displayed.

8. In the Installationwindow, check Don't detect my modem. Propose the option in a list and
click on Next.

9. Select Alcatel in the list of manufacturers.

10. Select OmniPCX Direct V24 for Windows NT or OmniPCX Direct V24 (W9xMe) for Windows
Millennium and 2000.

11. Select the Com port used.

12. Click on Next.

13. Click on Finish.

14. Click on Close.

15. Back in PM5, click on Communication. The Local box is now enabled and the Com port is dis-
played.

16. Click on Ok and enter the password.

17. Wait a few seconds for the PM5 to connect to the system.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/10

INSTALLATION PROCEDURES PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

LOCAL ACCESS BY LAN

The default IP address for the main CPU board is 192.168.92.246 for:

- A connection to the LAN port on the main CPU board via a UTP Category 5 5-100 ohm crossover
cable.

- A connection to the switch to which the main CPU board is connected by a direct cable.

The PC IP address and network mask must be compatible with the address of Alcatel OmniPCX Office.
For example 192.168.92.1 and 255.255.255.0.

DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE

To download the software, use the following procedure.

1. Open PM5.

2. Open the Tools folder.

3. Open the PM5-Software Download application.

4. In the Communication Mode window, select the type of download:

- Local
- Modem Direct
- Modem Call Back
- LAN

5. Enter the password PBXk1064.

6. The PM5-Software Download window opens. This window has several areas:

T One parameter setting area to:

• Select the directory containing the descriptor file for the new software release. By default this
file is in the BOOT directory.

Use the Delivery file drop-down menu.

• Select the country for the new software release.

Use the ...Delivery drop-down menu in the Country & Supplier... area. The field ... In
the PCX shows for information the country of the software release currently used.

• Download all the files (by checking the Download all files box) or just those whose Action
field contains the value Install.

• Save the data.

If the Data saving box is checked: the system automatically saves and restores the data
after having swapped over to the new software release.

8/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

If the Data saving box is not checked: you must use PM5 to save the data with the new
version (R2.1) before starting the download. You must restore this data after the download
is completed.

• Download the files needed for voice features on IP.

According to customer needs, check Voice Over IP.

• Download the files required for remote access.

Depending on customer needs, check Remote Access Service.

• Download the files required for Internet services.

According to customer needs, check Internet Services.

• Select the language of the voice guides to download.

Click on the Languages button to access the Languages to Download window.

• Define a time zone by selecting a city and country.

Click on the Time Zone button to access the Time Zone to Download window.

• Define the software swap mode.

In the Software Exchange area, there are two possible choices:

Click on the After PM5 disconnect button to swap immediately. The swap starts when you
quit the downloading application.

Click on the Date button and indicate the required date and time for a delayed swap.

Remarque : If you select immediate switching, it will take effect as soon as you quit the down-
load application.

T A read only zone

- The Downloadable Item area allows you to see the different versions of the applications
constituting Alcatel OmniPCX Office.

- The Action column lists the files to download.

- The bottom part of the window allows you to follow downloading progress precisely. Each
downloading and acknowledgement action produces a message.

7. Click on Start to start downloading.

IMPORTING / EXPORTING FILES

This function is used to import into Alcatel OmniPCX Office a data file sent by a customer (or a files
previously exported from an Alcatel OmniPCX Office system; for example, a file of collective speed dial
numbers with the extension .CRP).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/10

INSTALLATION PROCEDURES PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

To import or export a file, follow the procedure below.

1. Edit the file in EXCEL.

2. Check the syntax. The name must contain no punctuation, spaces, digits in the first 2 characters,
or more than 15 characters.

3. Copy all the file's data.

4. In PM5 (connected beforehand), select Collective Speed Dial.

5. Copy the file's data into this directory. The system checks the syntax.

6. Click on OK to confirm copying of the data.

10/10 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FEATURES INCLUDED

File
FEATURES INCLUDED
2

PM5 provides a complete set of configuration tools for Alcatel OmniPCX Office systems.

2 packages are available:

Package Corresponding views Levels of use (passwords)

PM5 Expert Expert View, EasyPlus View, Easy Manufacturer
View
Installer (PBXk1064)
PM5 Easy Easy View Attendant (help1954)

Easy View offers Wizard-type configuration.

The Wizard (or configuration assistant) serves to configure the most commonly used system parame-
ters; PM5 helps configure these parameters using a series of simple questions, with plenty of guidance
and explanation. Indeed, using the default configuration avoids having to program a lot of the para-
meters.
For customized installation, there are links to Expert View menus from the pages of the Wizard, flagged
by the "Advanced" and "Details" buttons in EasyPlus View. The configuration assistant is available on
installation and throughout the life of the system.

Expert View gives you unrestricted access to all the configuration possibilities.

Features included Easy EasyPlus Expert

Tools
. Downloading the software ✓
. Distribution of software in batches ✓
Client/supplier information ✓
Typical installation
. Business Initial Installation Wizard ✓
. Hotel Initial Installation Wizard ✓
. Installation Wizard ✓ ✓ ✓
Typical modification
. Subscribers ✓ ✓ ✓
. Groups ✓ ✓ ✓
. System ✓ ✓ ✓

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

FEATURES INCLUDED PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Features included Easy EasyPlus Expert

. Collective Speed Dial ✓ ✓ ✓
. External Lines ✓ ✓ ✓
. Export System overview ✓ ✓
Main numbering plan
. Installation numbers ✓
. Default numbering plans ✓
. Numbering plans ✓
. Features in conversation ✓
. DDI number modification table ✓
. Number modification table ✓
. Table of splitting prefixes ✓
. Table of end of dialing prefixes ✓
. Automatic Routing Selection (ARS table, ✓
trunk group list, ARS time ranges, groups,
day groups, operators/destinations, client
codes, call tone/pause, miscellaneous ARS)
. Public directory number conversions ✓
Collective Speed Dial ✓ ✓ ✓
Directory ✓
Subscribers/Basestations List ✓
Voice Processing
. Voice processing activation ✓
. Automated attendant ✓
. Mailboxes ✓
. Information messages ✓
. General parameters ✓
. Statistics ✓
Time Ranges ✓
List of operator groups ✓
List of hunting groups ✓
List of broadcast groups ✓
List of pick-up groups ✓
Manager/secretary relationship ✓

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FEATURES INCLUDED

Features included Easy EasyPlus Expert

Subscribers Misc.
. Pre-announcement ✓
. Permanent Logical Links (PLLs) ✓
. Fax notification for subscribers ✓
External Lines
. External accesses table ✓
. Trunk group list ✓
. Remote substitution ✓
. Traffic counters (number of outside calls) ✓
. Protocols (analog protocols, private and ✓
public ISDN access at levels 2 and 3, ISVPN
protocols)
. Selection of analog protocols ✓
. Incoming call processing ✓
Hardware and Limits
. Main cabinet ✓ ✓ ✓
. Auxiliary interfaces ✓
. IP boards ✓
. Service level (keys) ✓
. Fan Management ✓
. System's Limits ✓
Metering
. Metering (Impression, Metering options for ✓
alternate monetary unit, Metering options
for current monetary unit)
. V24 seizure parameters ✓
. Currency conversion ✓
. Metering counters ✓
Traffic Sharing and Barring
. Trunk access matrix ✓
. Barring matrix ✓
. Barring tables ✓
. Joining ✓

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

FEATURES INCLUDED PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Features included Easy EasyPlus Expert

. Account code table ✓
Network Management Control
. Recall/Authorised callers ✓
. Centralized management ✓
. Urgent alarms ✓
. SNMP (Simple Network Management Pro- ✓
tocol)
Voice over IP
. VoIP: Parameters ✓
. VoIP: Traffic counters ✓
Internet Access Configuration ✓
System Miscellaneous
. Features ✓
. PCX date and time adjustment ✓
. Password ✓
. System Reset ✓
. DECT/PWT ARI/GAP ✓
. DECT/PWT Frequencies ✓
. UTAM Link ✓
. Read/Write Memory
. Timer Labels ✓
. Debug Labels ✓
. Other Labels ✓
. Addresses by value ✓
. Messages and Music ✓
. Please-wait music ✓
. Text messages ✓
. Gatekeeper signals ✓
. Manual normal/restricted mode ✓
Software releases
Import/Export
. Data import/export ✓

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FEATURES INCLUDED

Features included Easy EasyPlus Expert

. Labels to export ✓
History & Anomalies
. History table ✓
. Messages table (Hardware) ✓
Data Saving & Swapping
. Commands ✓
. Data backup ✓
. Downloading ✓
Call Centers
. ACD configuration ✓ ✓
. ACD services ✓ ✓
. ACD voice messages ✓ ✓

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

FEATURES INCLUDED PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION VOICE PROMPTS MANAGEMENT

File
VOICE PROMPTS MANAGEMENT
3

On Alcatel Omni PCX Office, it is possible to manage "Voice prompts" using Alcatel software PM5.

The facility of importing, exporting and saving voice mail names and greetings, all automated atten-
dant greetings and all information messages is offered by PM5.
The voice prompts are managed via sound files under "Wav" formats. Different formats are used ac-
cording exportation or importation.
Access to these facilities depends of software licences and system hardware (Hard disk, ...).

"VOICE PROMPTS" EXPORTATION

Individual Voice prompts exportation is possible using different sub-menu in PM5 or collectively using
a general "Save" procedure (see "Voice prompts importation").
All voice prompts used by the system are managed via sound files under the specific format Alcatel
Wav ADPCM G726. It is usually not possible to edit files with this format on regular sound editors.
To have the possibility to listen, record and import sound files via standard PC's sound editors, it is
necessary to convert them to more popular format.
This operation is done by PM5 software which converts file system from format Alcatel Wav ADPCM
G726 to format Wav PCM 16 bit 8kHz mono.
Knowing that each converting operation causes a loss of sound quality, it is advisable to use the
ADPCM format as much as possible for an export/import of the same voice prompts.

"Voice prompts" exportation process

In order to export voice prompts (mail box greeting in this example) it is necessary to open the Alcatel
PM5 software in direct connection and expert mode and use the following process:

- select the Subscribers/Basestations list

- select subscriber of you choice which as a mail box all ready personalized
- click on Details
- click on Mailbox
- select the property page Option in windows Subscriber mailbox select Combo box Voice
prompt - Personal greeting Transfer and save as
- At this step, it is possible to:
- export the voice prompt in different format
- listen directly the message (click on "Play")
- delete it (click on "Erase" )
- Specify the destination path on your main drive (eg C:/Temp/Prompts) and the file name.
- Click on " export" ; at this step, the system will propose to use a standard Wav PC format or the
regular Alcatel ADPCM format.
- The voice prompt is then transfered from the system to the PC; this operation may take few seconds
according the size of the file). The voice prompt will be stored on your drive in format Alcatel
ADPCM G726 or PCM 16 bit 8 kHz mono according your choice.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

VOICE PROMPTS MANAGEMENT PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Nota : if no greeting has been prerecorded (no customization), the combo boxes "personal
greeting" are Grey. This operation is possible for all voice prompts about Mail boxes,
Automated Attendant and information messages. The procedure is the same as descri-
bed before; just select the corresponding menu.

"VOICE PROMPT" COMPLETE SAVE

All "Voice prompts" may be saved used the following system save procedure:

- start the Alcatel PM5 software in direct or remote connection

- select the menu Com -> Read from PCX -> Voice Prompts
- click on OK
- wait until the end of the transfer.
- save the file selecting File -> Save as
- enter a file name and click on OK.

The "prompts" files stored this way are available under: C:/Program Files/Alcatel/PM5/R110-13.3/tar-
gprod/afr100/customer.dbs/saved file name.

Nota : Directory "R110-13.3" corresponds to the PM5 version used during save procedure- ;direc-
tory "afr100" corresponds to "Target" system used during PM5 installation

"Wav" files stored after this procedure are in format Alcatel ADPCM G 726 and can't be listen to or
modified only via specific software and Codec.

"VOICE PROMPT" IMPORTATION

As described in exportation procedure, it is necessary to convert "Wav" files from PCM to ADPCM for-
mat. This operation is done in PM5 during the transfer from the PC to the system.
If the prompt to be imported is in ADPCM format (file imported from a system) the conversion will not
be necessary. If the prompt to be imported is in PCM format , the conversion will be automatically pro-
ceed during the PM5 transfer.
In this case, the format to use is Wav PCM 16 bits 8 kHz Mono these type of sounds file and formats
can be generate on all PC types equipped with Sound baster music boards.
Importing procedure is the same as the exporting one described in the previous paragraph. It is only
necessary to specify the exact path where the file to be imported is located.
Then click on "Import".
At any time, it is also possible to listen or erase the message (only the message present in the system.
The transfer duration depends of the file size (or prompt duration).

RECORDING OF MUSIC ON HOLD (MOH)

It is possible to record the system music on hold using either a "Reflexes" set and it's microphone or
using Internet explorer for importing sound files.

In the last case, the sound file must me in one of the following format:

- .wav, ADPCM 32 kbps, 4 bit, mono

- .wav, PCM 8 kHz, 8 bit, mono

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION VOICE PROMPTS MANAGEMENT

- .wav, CCITT A-law (PCM A law) 8 kHz, 8 bit, mono

- .wav, CCITT Mu-law (PCM Mu Law) 8 kHz 8 bit, mono

The maximum size of the file (or the music) to import is 10 minutes.

Importing sound file for Music on Hold

- Select via PM5 or MMC set, the music on hold by default (standard; example via MMC set: menus
"Voice", "SrcMus", "Stndart".
- Create a sound file for the new music on hold using a PC equipped with a sound baster board (for
instance) with the correct format listed before. The format and the size of the file may be verified
using "Windows recorder" (select file properties)
- (It is also possible to convert a sound file to the correct format using the same "Windows recorder"
tool, and menus "save as", Choose the correct format in the list and Click on "Convert now")
- Open Internet browser and remove the proxy.
- Access to the main CPU with it's IP address (by default: 192.168.92.246:81)
- Enter the login operator
- Enter the password help1954
- The system displays the following window "Music On Hold : MOH Upload"
- Select the sound file to be imported clicking on "Parcourir" or "Browse"
- Then click on "Submit" to import the file
- If the operation is successful, the following screen "Muisc On Hold : MOH CODER - Success" ap-
pears (this operation may take few seconds according the size of the file)
- Then select with PM5 or MMC Set the recorded music; example via MMC Set: menus "Voice", ""Src-
Mus", "Prvoice".
- The new music is available in the system.

Recording music on hold via MMC station

It is also possible to record the music on hold using the MMC station programming mode. To do so,
proceed as follow

- enter in programming mode using 4034 or Advanced set

- enter in "System" session
- select "Instal" menu
- enter the password
- select "Voice" menu in the second page
- select "MOH" menu
- select "Music" message by access on "Prev" or "Next" keys (Message 1 is selected by de-
fault).
- press "Record" key twice in order to record the music on hold using the handset
- once the music on hold recorded, enable it using "Muscrc", VoicPr" and "OK" menus.

RECORDING PREANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGES 01 TO 08 VIA MMC

STATION

It is also possible to record preannouncement messages 1 to 8 using the MMC MR2 programming
mode as in the previous systems.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

VOICE PROMPTS MANAGEMENT PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

To do so, proceed as follow:

- enter in programming mode using 4034 or Advanced set

- enter in "System" session
- select "Instal" menu
- enter the password
- select "Voice" menu in the second page
- select "MOH" menu
- select "Message 1 to 8 by access on "Prev" or "Next" keys (Message 1 is selected by default).
- press "Record" key twice in order to record the message using the handset
- listen to the message and assign it with the normal procedure

Nota : It is not possible to import preannouncement messages.

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION VOICE PROMPTS MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM LANGUAGE MODIFICATION

The list of languages present in the system Alcatel Omni Pcx Office is installed during software down-
loading in the manufacture. It depend of hardware and key (license) ordered:

- 2 languages are installed in case of no XMEM is equipped (no memory expansion)

- 4 languages are available if a XMEM or a hard disk is equipped.

It is possible to modify the number and the type of languages using the software downloading mecha-
nism in PM5.

Procedure
In a first time it is necessary to choose a software version to be downloaded (usually the current softwa-
re version already installed on the system). This way, only the languages will be loaded during the
downloading.
Languages modification could also be done during a software downloading for a migration to a new
version.
Proceed as follow:
- open PM5 software.
- select the "Tools" menu.
- select "Software Download".
- in the window "Software Download", choose the desired version in "Delivery file" (V19_09 for exam-
ple).
- click on "OK".
- select the box "languages" in "Languages" menu, modify order and/or choice of languages.
- click on "OK".
- select "Data saving" box (if data saving is not performed, all customers datas will be lost after the
swap.
- click on "Start"
- the system downloads the different languages and corresponding voice prompts. The new langua-
ges will be available at the end of downloading, swap and the system reset. All other configuration
parameters will stay unchanged.

Notas : The list of available language can be easily checked using the customization mode on
Reflexes set (menu Custom, option, language)

During languages downloading, the system does not check if the memory capacity is
correct for the number of languages loaded; it is to installer to make sure the system
configuration is correct for 4 languages max.

If one language is selected for a subscriber and after language downloading, the lan-
guage is not present in the system anymore, silence will replace the missing language
for this subscriber.

The primary default languages is always the first one in the list.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

VOICE PROMPTS MANAGEMENT PM5 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
MMC Station

SECTION

MMC STATION

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

MMC STATION

Section MMC Station

OUTLINE FILE 1

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS FILE 2

METERING COUNTERS FILE 3

GENERAL COMMANDS FILE 4

COLLECTIVE SPEED DIAL NUMBERS FILE 5

TIME RANGES FILE 6

ANALOG LINES AND DIGITAL ACCESSES FILE 7

TRUNK GROUPS FILE 8

GROUPS FILE 9

SYSTEM RESET FILE 10

TERMINAL PROFILES FILE 11

METERING CONFIGURATION FILE 12

BARRING PREFIXES FILE 13

PARAMETER DUPLICATION FILE 14

WELCOME AND PLEASE-WAIT MESSAGES FILE 15

NUMBERING PLANS FILE 16

SPLITTING AND END OF DIALLING FILE 17

PRE-ANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGES FILE 18

DECT FILE 19

BACKUP AND RESTORATION OF THE CONFIGURATION FILE 20

MOVING OF 2 STATIONS FILE 21

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION MMC STATION MMC STATION

DISA FILE 22

ARS CALENDAR FILE 23

MULTI REFLEXES FILE 24

INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER FILE 25

2/4 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Fiche

ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

MMC STATION SECTION MMC STATION (INDEX)

Section MMC Station (Index)

METERING COUNTERS FILE 3

ANALOG LINES AND DIGITAL ACCESSES FILE 7

ARS CALENDAR FILE 23

BACKUP AND RESTORATION OF THE CONFIGURATION FILE 20

BARRING PREFIXES FILE 13

COLLECTIVE SPEED DIAL NUMBERS FILE 5

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS FILE 2

DECT FILE 19

DISA FILE 22

GENERAL COMMANDS FILE 4

GROUPS FILE 9

INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER FILE 25

METERING CONFIGURATION FILE 12

MOVING OF 2 STATIONS FILE 21

MULTI REFLEXES FILE 24

NUMBERING PLANS FILE 16

OUTLINE FILE 1

PARAMETER DUPLICATION FILE 14

PRE-ANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGES FILE 18

SPLITTING AND END OF DIALLING FILE 17

SYSTEM RESET FILE 10

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION MMC STATION (INDEX) MMC STATION

TERMINAL PROFILES FILE 11

TIME RANGES FILE 6

TRUNK GROUPS FILE 8

WELCOME AND PLEASE-WAIT MESSAGES FILE 15

4/4 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION OUTLINE

File
OUTLINE
1

The Man-Machine Conversation (MMC) by 4034/Advanced station enables modification of the para-
meters of the different system elements.

Notas :

- only a single 4034/Advanced station can be in MMC at a given moment.

- simultaneous access to the MMC by station and by PC is impossible.

The modifications are made in 2 ways:

- By introducing a numeric value (number of the station for example) or an alphanumeric value.
- By choosing one of the predefined values presented on the display using the soft keys.

ACCESS TO THE MMC

Access to the MMC is enabled by:

- entering the code 70 (by default) or by using a key programmed with this code, or by pressing the
SYSTEM key (Advanced station).

- choosing the session: 3 sessions are offered: INSTALLER (key INSTAL ) ADMINISTRATOR (key ADMIN )
and OPERATOR * (key OPERAT). These different levels of access to the parameterizable features thus
enable modifications to be authorized to cleared people only.
- entering the password corresponding to the chosen session.

Notas : * Only Installer and Administrator sessions are presented in this notice; for the Operator
session, refer to the Installation guide.

Password default values

INSTALLER session pbxk1064

ADMINISTRATOR session kilo1987

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

OUTLINE MMC STATION

CONFIGURABLE FEATURES

All the features configurable in the Installer session are described in the different files contained in the
current guide. The features and sub-features available in the Administrator session are indicated by
the symbol A positioned beside the titles of the configurable elements.

Each feature has a diagram describing the entry procedure (in Installer session). The features which
are accessible by soft keys are indicated by:

- SUBSCRsoft key for moving through the MMC tree or for choosing a feature.
- CHOICEgiving access to the drop-down menu.

Quitting the session

To quit the MMC session press the F F key (4034 station) or the key (Advanced station). You
will quit the session automatically, after a time delay after the last key has been pressed.

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

MMC STATION OUTLINE

GENERAL COMMANDS

Soft keys

- ADD : adds an item to a list

- GOTO : moves quickly through a list
- READ+ : displays the next page
- CLEAR : cancels
- RUBOUT : corrects the last character
- MODIFY : modifies an item in a list
- NEXT : next entry in a list
- PREV : previous entry in a list
- BACK : returns to previous menu
- Valide : validates an entry
- -> : forward cursor movement
- <- : backward cursor movement

Using the alphabetic keypad

Each time you need to enter a name or a label associated to a key or a feature, use the alphabetic
keypad. If the station does not have an alphabetic keypad, use the dialling keypad. To enter a letter,
press the key which has the required letter on it: once for the first letter, twice for the second and three
times for the third. To enter two consecutive letters on the same dialling key, press -> before entering
the second letter. Entering special characters:

- "space" : press 1
- "-" : press 1 twice
- "." : press 1 three times
- "#" : press #
- ":" : press # twice
- "=" : press # three times
- "*" : press *
- "+" : press * twice
- "/" : press * three times
- "0" to "9" : press #0 or #9

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

OUTLINE MMC STATION

CONFIGURABLE FEATURES IN INSTALLER SESSION

INSTALL session SUBSCR

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS

COUNT METERING COUNTERS

GLOBAL GENERAL COMMANDS

COMSPD COLLECTIVE SPEED DIAL NUMBERS

1st page TIMERA TIME RANGES

ACCESS ANALOG LINES AND DIGITAL ACCESSES

TRGP TRUNK GROUPS

GROUPS GROUPS

RSTSYS SYSTEM RESET

TERMINAL PROFILES
TERPRO

METER METERING CONFIGURATION

BARPFX BARRING PREFIXES

COPY PARAMETER DUPLICATION

2nd page
VOICE WELCOME AND PLEASE-WAIT MESSAGES

NUMPLN NUMBERING PLANS

EODPFX SPLITTING AND END OF DIALLING PREFIXES

PREANN PRE-ANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGES

DECT DECT STATIONS

MOVING MOVING OF 2 STATIONS

DISA DISA TRANSIT AND ANALOG DISA

DATSAV BACKUP AND RESTORATION OF THE CONFIGURATION

ARSCAL ARS CALENDAR

3rd page
MLTRFX MULTI REFLEXES

VMU INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

MMC STATION OUTLINE

CONFIGURABLE FEATURES IN ADMINISTRATOR SESSION

ADMINISTRATOR SUBSCR
session CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS

COUNT METERING COUNTERS

GENERAL COMMANDS
GLOBAL

COMSPD COLLECTIVE SPEED DIAL NUMBERS

1st page TIMERA TIME RANGES

METER METERING CONFIGURATION

VOICE WELCOME AND PLEASE-WAIT MESSAGES

BARPFX BARRING PREFIXES

DECT DECT STATIONS

PREANN PRE-ANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGES

GROUPS GROUPS

ACCESS ANALOG LINES AND DIGITAL ACCESSES

2nd page
MOVING MOVING OF 2 STATIONS

DISA DISA TRANSIT AND ANALOG DISA

ARSCAL ARS CALENDAR

VMU INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER

Nota : The INTTMP and PREDEC functions are no longer offered on a R2.0 system's MMC station.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

OUTLINE MMC STATION

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS

File
CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS
2

This feature makes it possible to define particular characteristics for each station.

SUBSCR Station No. OUTINS INSERV Switched on

OUTOFS Switched off

A
TERMNL Reading of station type

SUBPRO FEATUR VLOW Feature rights

LOW

MIDDLE

HIGH

BARRNG VLOW

LOW Barring profiles

MIDDLE

HIGH
NORRES INHIBI Inhibition flag against system locking

NORRES Normal or restricted mode for each time range

PWDRES User code reset

BARTYP CATEGO NNV Barring or traffic sharing (trunk group access)

link categories
RNV

NV

RV

LANG Choice of language

DESTI Automatic call setup on going off-hook

AUTOCA

ACTIVE
TEMP

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/18

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS MMC STATION

SUBSCR Station No. PERSPD CLEAR Modification of an entry in the individual directory
- deletion of an entry
PREV - entry of name (up to 8 characters)
A - entry of public number (up to 22 digits, trunk group included)
NEXT

MODIFY B

KEYS Key No. Function Parameter Role of programmable keys

Various possibilities depending on key type

DYNROU EXTERN destination Dynamic call distribution

LOCAL destination

TMOUT1 1st time-out

TMOUT2 2nd time-out

V24PRO PROT Transmission protocol (Hayes, 108/1, 108/2, etc.)

FLOW Flow control (XON-XOFF, RTS/CTS, none)
SPEED Speed (1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 57600)
SIGBIT Nbr of significant bits (7 or 8)
PARITY Parity (even, odd, none, fixed at 0, fixed at 1)
STPBIT Nbr of stop bits (1 or 2)

WIRLSS PERM Permanent registration of a DECT handset

Visitor registration
VISIT Date completion date DECT station

IPUI DECT UA station identification code

Validation/inhibition of the management
DISPL of a GAP DECT handset

Registration of a new station (if the selected number corresponds to a DECT access)

PAGING Number Paging receiver code

SERVIC SERVI1
Definition of remote services:
SERVI2 (voice, G4 fax, AB, ISDN, All or None)
ou Aucun)
SERVI3

SERVI4

SPEDEV CHOICE Allocation of a special feature (paging, voice mail, etc.)

PRIO Priority level

HEADST CHOICE Headset mode

ADMINISTRATOR session only
HANDST CHOICE Gain switching

CLASS CHOICE Hotel: choice between Administrative, Host and Booth station

2/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

MMC STATION CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS

Press SUBSCR .
Enter the directory number of the station concerned.

STATUS OF THE STATION - OUTINS A

Before allocating a terminal profile or carrying out a remote customisation of a station, this station
A
must be switched off by pressing HS/ES . After allocation, the station can be switched on again.

The station can be:

- In Service
- Logical OOS
- Physical OOS/Logical OOS: station not operational
- Physical OOS/Logical OOS: station not regarded by the system (not declared or disconnected) and
switched on by the installer

Choosing ENSERV + validation switches the station ON (IN SERVICE). Choosing OUTSERV + validation swit-
ches the station OFF (OUT OF SERVICE).

Nota : The Administrator session only allows the status of the station to be read.

TYPE OF STATION USED - TERMNL A

A
Press TERMNL .

The station directory number, type and software version are displayed.

SUBSCRIBER PROFILE - SUBPRO A

Feature rights profile - FEATUR A

Press SUBPRO then FEATUR .

Choose the feature rights to be allocated to the station.

FEATURE RIGHTS VERY LOW LOW (de- MIDDLE HIGH
fault)
Authorized camp-on YES YES YES
Protection against camp-on -- -- -- --
Authorized intrusion -- -- YES YES
Protection against intrusion (station busy) and -- -- YES YES
protection against intercom (station free)
Protection against camp-on tone -- -- -- YES
Conference -- YES YES YES

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/18

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS MMC STATION

Automatic call back YES YES YES YES

Call pick-up authorized -- YES YES YES
Paging -- -- YES YES
Calling line identity secrecy -- -- -- YES
UUS reception authorized -- -- YES YES
Restricted mode inhibited (no longer exists in -- -- -- --
R2.0)
Private station -- -- -- --
VM = automated attendant dyn. forward le- -- -- -- --
vel 1
VM = automated attendant dyn. forward le- -- -- -- --
vel 2
Name display YES YES YES YES
External accesses joining by transfer -- -- -- --
Trunk access by transfer YES YES YES YES
Selective forwarding -- YES YES YES
External forwarding -- -- -- --
Trunk line allocation -- -- -- --
DISA Transit -- -- -- --
Protection against DDC calls -- -- -- --
Automatic call setup on going off hook (im- -- -- -- --
mediate or after time-out)
DND override authorized -- -- -- YES
Protection against DND override -- -- YES YES
Assign authorization for cost (hotel: possibility -- -- -- --
of charging costs to a room telephone

4/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

MMC STATION CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS

Barring profile - BARRNG A

A
Press SUBPRO then BARRNG.

Choose the barring profile to be allocated to the station.

CONTENT VERY LOW LOW (de- MIDDLE HIGH

fault)
Traffic sharing (access Normal mode No trunk Main trunk Main and All trunk
to trunk groups) group group even trunk groups
groups
Restricted mode No trunk No trunk Main trunk All trunk
group group group groups
Station traffic sharing Normal mode (N) 16 12 8 4
Restricted mode 16 16 12 4
(R)
Barring level of trunk Trunk groups 1 to 1 2 3 4
groups (result from 9, 50 to 57 and
the barring matrix with 98 to 105
station barring below
Trunk groups 10 2 3 4 5
and trunk group bar-
to 17, 58 to 65
ring by default)
and 106 to 113
Trunk groups 18 3 4 5 6
to 25, 66 to 73
and 114 to 120
Trunk groups 26 4 5 6 1
to 33 and 74 to
81
Trunk groups 34 5 6 1 2
to 41 and 82 to
89
Trunk groups 42 6 1 2 3
to 49 and 90 to
97
Station barring (voice Normal mode 1 2 3 4
or data) (NV and NNV)
Restricted mode 1 1 1 4
(RV and RNV)
Station speed dial ri- Normal mode 10000000 11100000 11111000 11111111
ghts (voice or data)
Restricted mode 10000000 11100000 11111000 11111111

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/18

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS MMC STATION

NORMAL/RESTRICTED MODE FOR EACH STATION - NORRES A

Nota : This function is no longer offered on a R2.0 system's MMC station.

A
NORRES is used to define the time range operating mode.

makes it possible to inhibit the switch to restricted mode. By successively pressing on keys CHOICE,
INHIBI

you can define whether changing the operating mode by operator command or by a key at central
processing level is taken into account for this station:

by successively pressing this key, you can choose the operating mode for the time range concer-
NORRES

ned.
- inhibited: changing the operating mode is not possible for this station.
- possible:changing the operating mode is possible.

REINITIALISATION OF THE USER CODE - PWDRES A

A
Press PWDRES . Validating makes it possible to return to the default value for the personal code of the
station concerned: 1515)

BARRING AND TRAFFIC SHARING CATEGORIES - BARTYP A

A
BARTYP makes it possible to define barring and traffic sharing link categories for each station.

NNV : barring link category for data communications in normal mode

RNV : barring link category for data communications in restricted mode

NV : barring link category for voice communications in normal mode
RV : barring link category for voice communications in restricted mode
N : traffic sharing link category in normal mode
R : traffic sharing link category in restricted mode

Notas :

Barring link categories make it possible to define the controls carried out during a trunk seizure by a
means other than the collective speed dial numbers or during the seizure of a trunk group. Traffic sha-
ring link categories define the controls for accessing the trunk groups (outgoing traffic sharing).

After pressing , enter the value (from 1 to 16) to be allocated to the category concerned, then
CATEGO

validate.

6/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

MMC STATION CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS

CHOICE OF LANGUAGE - LANG A

A
After pressing LANG , choose the display language for the station from the proposed languages.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/18

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS MMC STATION

AUTOMATIC CALL SET-UP ON GOING OFF-HOOK - AUTOCA A

A
AUTOCA makes it possible to define:

- the destination of an automatic call setup on going off-hook

- call type: immediate or after a timeout

: enter the destination of an automatic call (station's directory or hunting group number or exter-
DESTI

nal number using a speed dial number).

ACTIVE: by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the automatic call is active (YES) or
inactive (NO) for the station concerned.

: by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the automatic call is after a timeout
TEMP

(YES) or not (NO).

PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS - PERSPD

A
PERSPD makes it possible to create/modify the name and number stored in an entry in the individual
directory of the station concerned (the complete entry of an entry with the line or trunk group used and
sub-address is only possible through MMC PM5).

And NEXT make it possible to select a personal directory entry (01 to 30 for a 4034/Advanced
PREV

station, 01 to 15 for 4023 stations and 01 to 10 for other stations). If this entry is already configured,
the name and associated public number (last 18 digits) are displayed.

MODIFY makes it possible to modify the data stored in a directory entry.

Enter the name (up to 8 characters) and press OK . Then enter the public number (up to 22 digits,
including the trunk group number) and press OK .
CLEAR makes it possible to erase ALL the data of a directory entry (even those that cannot be configured

in this session).

8/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

MMC STATION CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS

ROLE OF THE PROGRAMMABLE KEYS - KEYS A

A
KEYS makes it possible to define the role of the programmable keys.

Notas :

Before performing a remote customization of a station, the station must be switched off. It is advisable
to cancel a key's current configuration before beginning a new configuration.

The display may show:

- the number (for example 01/98)

- the type of key (for example RGM)
- the rights associated with it (INS = installer)
- the current feature
- possible parameter(s)

State the number of the key to be programmed (see location below) by pressing ALLERA or by selecting
the next or previous key.

B
UPDATEmakes it possible to show the display which groups together all the functions offered. . Press
the soft key corresponding to the list which contains the desired function.

Function list

B
Choosing CALL

KEY FUNCTION PARAMETERS

❏Cback Automatic callback request --
■Cback Cancellation of an automatic --
call-back request
ProCom Protection of a call against --
any intrusion
Intru Intrusion --
Pgpfix Paging call by prefix --
PgaGen Paging call by suffix --
CLIR Calling Line Identification --
Restriction (CLIR)
BMdial Block mode dialling --
SubAdd Sub-address (ISDN) --
DNDovr Override DND/Priority call --

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/18

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS MMC STATION

B
Choosing ABBNUM

KEY FUNCTION PARAMETERS

Redial Redial last number --
TmpRep Putting a number into a tem- --
porary memory
PerSpD Access to personal speed dial --
numbers
Call Direct local or external call Trunk number
External number (22 digits maximum)
Sub-address (4 digits maximum)
Dir Directory access --
Macro1 Local call + intercom intru- Station directory number
sion on free; equivalent to an Data for dynamic routing
incoming RSL
Macro2 External call + business ac- Trunk number
count code + business ac- External number (22 digits maximum)
count code value Sub-address (4 digits maximum)
Business account code (16 digits maximum)
Macro3 Calibrated loopbreak + Number to be transmitted after the calibrated loop break
time-out + number
PrCall Priority calls --

10/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

MMC STATION CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS

B
Choosing ANSWER

KEY FUNCTION PARAMETERS

IndPic Individual call pick-up Station directory number
GrpPic Pick up group --
GenBel Unassigned night answer --
Monit Selective monitoring Station directory number (internal or DDI numbers)
Type of calls monitored (local, external, all)
SubMon Subscriber monitoring Station directory number (internal or DDI numbers)
Type of calls monitored (local, external, all)
GrpSup General monitoring Hunting group number
AutAns Auto-answer mode (intercom --
mode)
Ring Supervised call ringing --
Pgasel Paging call answer --
PgaGen General paging answer --
GenMon Group supervision --
2ndCal Enquiry call (only for 4073 --
stations)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/18

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS MMC STATION

B
Choosing DIVERT

KEY FUNCTION PARAMETERS

SelFwd Selective forwarding --
PCX➨ PCX forwarding --
IndFwd Access to personal call forwar-
ding
- Imme- Internal or external destination
d➨ Immediate call forwarding
Internal or external destination
- Busy➨ Forward on busy
--
- Text➨ Diversion to text mail
Number of the station concerned
- Follo➨ Follow-me
--
- Page➨ Diversion to paging
--
- DND "Do Not Disturb"
GrpFwd Group forwarding --

- Imme- --
d➨ Immediate group call forwar-
ding Station number
- GrpWd
Disconnect from group
MstFwd Master forwarding keys

-M Immediate call forwarding Internal destination

ImmD

- M Busy
Forward on busy Number of the station or group
- M Grp
Immediate forwarding of Number of the station or group
group calls
ScrMgr Screening Directory number of the secretary station
ScrSec Screening Directory number of the manager station
DelAll Cancel all forwardings --

12/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

MMC STATION CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS

B
Choosing OPTION

KEY FUNCTION PARAMETERS

❏Conf Conference --
AccCom Modification of the business ac- Value of the code (16 digits maximum)
count code during the call
AccOut Business account code entered Value of the code (16 digits maximum)
before new outgoing call
Mail K Access to text mail --
Read+ Display next screen --
VMU Access voice mail Number of the voice mail box
❏PCX Calibrated loop --
NRMode Normal or restricted mode for --
attendant
Reserv Trunk group reservation for at- --
tendant
Prog Programming mode --
Hold Common hold for voice transfer --
Transf Transfer of a call --
Digits Putting dialling into a memory --
Mail L Access to mailing --
❏DTMF Send MF code Digits (22 max) to be sent in MF
Forced Intercom intrusion on free --
Lock Station lock/unlock --
Park Call parking/retrieval --
MTR METER TOTAL RECALL --
AllotN Trunk line allocation Barring level
AllotM Allocation of a line with total me- Barring level
ter recall
AttDiv External forwarding of operator Internal or external destination
calls
BkgMus To choose the emitting source of --
please wait message
Door Door opener control --
Broker Shuttle call (only for 4073 sta- --
tion)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/18

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS MMC STATION

RecCal Recording of conversations --

MVScrn Filtering of vocal messages --

B
Choosing RESOU

KEY FUNCTION PARAMETERS

RGI Handles local incoming calls Call type: local, external, all
Data for dynamic routing
RGO Handles local outgoing calls Call type: local, external, all
RGM Handles mixed calls (inco- Call type: local, external, all
ming-outgoing) Data for dynamic routing
RSL Handles local calls with a given Station directory number (4 digits max)
station Sub-address (4 digits maximum)
Data for dynamic routing
RSD Reception of local or external Station directory number or hunting group directory
calls number (local call) or DDI (external call)
Trunk directory number or ARS for outgoing call (optio-
Outgoing seizure on a given nal)
trunk Data for dynamic routing
RSB Set up of an external call on a Trunk directory number or ARS
specific trunk group and recep- Data for dynamic routing
tion of external call
RSP Reception and transmission of Line number
calls on a specific external in- Data for dynamic routing
terface
SUP Station monitoring Monitored station directory number
Monitored resource key address

PARAMETERS ASSOCIATED WITH RESOURCE KEYS

Notas :

This paragraph only describes the main parameters which can be defined according to the role assi-
gned to the key; other parameters are possible (trunk number if RSD or RSB, station sub-address if RSL,
type of monitoring key and number of the monitoring key if RSP).

❏ Dynamic routing

This sub-function is only provided for the MACRO1, RGI, RGM, RSL, RSD, RSB and RSP keys. DYNDYN
makes it possible to define the data necessary for the dynamic routing of calls managed by the key
concerned. Press : E
T
A
D
P
U

- TP1 : by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the timeout 1 is active (TP1) or inac-

14/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

MMC STATION CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS

tive (tp1).
- TP2 by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the timeout 2 is active (TP2) or inac-

tive (tp2).
- OPERAT Or GENBELL : by successively pressing this key, define whether the system should route the call

to the operator and/or the general bell after the non-response time-out TP2 has lapsed (active =
ATTD or GBEL; inactive = attd or gbel).
- DIVERT makes it possible to authorise (DIVE) or not (dive) forwarding for this key.

- NUMBER makes it possible to define a destination station (or group) for the dynamic routing in the

case of no answer after a timeout TP1 (12 seconds by default).

❏ Type of call

This sub-function is only provided for the RGI, RGO and RGM keys.
CALLTYP makes it possible to determine the type of calls managed by the key concerned.

By successively pressing on keys P

Y
T
L
A
C

key, you can choose between Ext/Loc, External and Local.

❏ Number of the associated station

This sub-function is only provided for the RSL, RSD and SUP keys. NUMBER makes it possible to define the
directory number of the associated station.

DYNAMIC ROUTING OF CALLS - DYNROU A

Dynamic routing of calls makes it impossible to have a call (internal, external, private, ...) remaining
unanswered.

A
Press DYNROU .
EXTERN And LOCAL make it possible to define whether the dynamic distribution (timeouts T1 and T2, des-
tinations) criteria for each type of call (external or local) are active or not:

- NUMBER makes it possible to define a destination station (or group) for the dynamic routing in the
case of no answer after a timeout TP1 (12 seconds by default).
- TP1 : by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the timeout 1 is active (TP1) or inac-

tive (tp1).
- TP2 by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the timeout 2 is active (TP2) or inac-

tive (tp2).
- OPERAT Or : by successively pressing this key, define whether the system should route the call
to the operator and/or the general bell after the non-response time-out TP2 has lapsed (active =
ATTD or GBEL; inactive = attd or gbel).
- DIVERT makes it possible to authorise (DIVE) or not (dive) forwarding for this key.

And TMOUT2 make it possible to define the timeouts in tenths of a second. The default value is 12
TMOUT1

seconds.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/18

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS MMC STATION

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE V24 OUTPUT OF A DIGITAL STATION -

V24PRO A

A
V24PRO (when the selected station corresponds to a V24 interface) makes it possible to define the
characteristics for the V24 option installed on a Reflexes station.
PROT: by successively pressing this key, you can choose the transmission protocol: 108/1, 108/2,
Hayes or Dec. auto (Hayes by default).
FLOW : by successively pressing this key, you can choose the type of flow control: XON/XOFF, RTS/CTS
or without (XON/XOFF by default).
SPEED : by successively pressing this key, you can choose the transmission speed: 1200, 2400, 4800,

9600, 19200 or 57600 bits/s (9600 bits/s by default).

SIGBIT : by successively pressing this key, you can choose the number of significant bits: 7 or 8 (8 by

default).
PARITY : by successively pressing this key, you can choose the parity: 0, 1, even, uneven or no parity (no

parity by default).
STPBIT : by successively pressing this key, you can choose the number of stop bits: 1 or 2 (1 by default).

CORDLESS DECT STATIONS - WIRLSS A

A
WIRLSS (when the selected station is a DECT) makes it possible to define the parameters for DECT
stations.
PERM makes it possible to select a permanent association with the system.
VISIT makes it possible to select a temporary association with the system; enter the date on which the
mobile is to be automatically disconnected from the system and validate.
IPUI makes it possible to modify the IPUI value of the DECT station; enter 14 octal digits and validate.

DISPL makes it possible to validate or inhibit a GAP DECT display.

A
WIRLSS (when the selected number is a DECT access) allows registering of a new DECT station (UA
or GAP).

PAGING NUMBER - PAGING A

A
PAGING makes it possible to define the number of the paging receiver for the station concerned.

16/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

MMC STATION CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS

REMOTE SERVICES - SERVIC A

A
SERVIC makes it possible to define the remote service(s) accessible for the station concerned (4 ser-
vices maximum).

By successively pressing on keys SERVI1 to SERVI4 , select the authorised remote service:

- VOICE (telephone services)

- ALLSVC (all remote services)
- ABS (analog data service)
- FAX2/3
- FAX4
- V24AE (asynchronous V24)
- TLTX64 (64 kbits/s teletext)
- DATA64 (64 kbits/s data transmission)
- VIDEO
- X21
- X25
- Bdx
- BdxNw
- MixMod
- NOSERV

Only calls compatible with the services programmed are accepted for both outgoing and incoming
calls. All other types of call are rejected and not presented when incoming. For non S0 stations, only
service 1 is to be defined.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/18

CONFIGURATION OF STATIONS MMC STATION

SPECIAL FEATURES - SPEDEV A

A
After pressing SPEDEV , by pressing successively on CHOICE , you can select features from those offered:

- Normal
- Paging
- Voice mail unit
- Doorphone
- Bank Alarm (priority call)
- Fix DTMF

PRIORITY LEVEL - PRIO

A
PRIO makes it possible to define the priority level (0 to 7, 7 = highest level) for external calls (prio-
rity call feature).

FEATURES ONLY PROVIDED IN AN ADMINISTRATOR SESSION -

HEADST, HANDST AND CLASS

Headset mode - HEADST

A
After pressing HEADST , by pressing successively on CHOICEyou can tell whether or not the station ope-
rates with a headset. If it does, plug the headset into the handset slot.

Gain improvement - HANDST

A
After pressing HANDST , by pressing successively on CHOICEyou can activate or cancel gain improve-
ment on a station (improves hearing in noisy surroundings).

Hotel type telephone set - CLASS

CLASS A
After pressing , by pressing successively on CHOICE, select between Administrative, Host and
Booth station.

18/18 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION METERING COUNTERS

File
METERING COUNTERS
3

The system sums up the following metering information in the form of partial and adding counters:

- For each station or group (stations or OS):

- 4 partial charge counters and 4 partial cost counters
- 1 adding charge counter and 1 adding cost counter
- For each line:
- 1 partial charge counter
- 1 adding cost counter

COUNT PRINT Printing of partial and adding counters

EXTENS for stations and groups
A ACCESS Printing of partial and adding counters of lines

Station or Reading and resetting of a station or

EXTENS group No. METER RESET1 a group partial metering
pulse counters
B RESET4

COST RESET1 Reading and resetting of a station or

a group partial cost counters

RESET4
TOTAL Reading of adding counters

Reading of the access partial counter

ACCESS Slot No. Equipment No. and adding charge counter

RESPAR Resetting of the line partial

metering pulse counter

RESALL EXTENS
Resetting of all the partial counters of all stations and groups or all lines
ACCESS

Access type Number Reading of the access partial counter

LOGACC and adding charge counter

RESPAR Resetting of the access partial

metering pulse counter

Press Accoun .

PRINTING OF STATION/GROUP AND LINE COUNTERS - PRINT A

A
Press Print .
Extens makes it possible to print the partial and adding counters for the stations and groups.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

METERING COUNTERS MMC STATION

Access makes it possible to print the partial and adding counters for the lines.

READING OF A STATION'S/GROUP'S COUNTERS - EXTENS A

A
After pressing Extens , enter the directory number of the station (or group) whose counter should be
printed.

Reading and resetting of the meter pulse counters - METER A

B
Meter displays the contents of the 4 partial metering pulse counters for the station concerned.
Reset1 to Reset4 make it possible to reset the 4 counters individually.

Reading and resetting of the cost counters - COST A

B
Cost displays the contents of the 4 partial cost counters for the station (or group) concerned.
Reset1 to Reset4 make it possible to reset the 4 counters individually.

Readout of the adding counters - TOTAL A O

B
Total displays the station adding and cost counter values.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

MMC STATION METERING COUNTERS

READING AND RESETTING OF THE LINE COUNTERS (PHYSICAL

ADDRESSES) - ACCESS

A
After pressing Access , enter the data necessary for identification of the line whose partial and ad-
ding counters are to be displayed, validate.

Identification of interfaces:

- SLOT : slot number: 1 to 8 (basic module), 11 to 18 (extension module 1), 21 to 28 (extension

module 2)
- EQUIP : equipment number: 1 to 8

The display then shows the values for the line metering pulse and cost adding counters.
ResPar makes it possible to reset the line partial metering pulse counter.

RESETTING OF THE STATION/GROUP AND LINE PARTIAL COUNTERS -

RESALL A

A
ResAll makes it possible to reset all the partial counters for the stations or lines.
Extens makes it possible to reset all the station or group partial counters.
Access makes it possible to reset all the line partial counters.

Notas : Only the station partial counters can be reset in Administrator session.

READING AND RESETTING OF THE LINE COUNTERS (LOGICAL

ADDRESSES) - LOGACC

A
After pressing LogAcc , enter the data necessary for identification of the access (access number and
type) for which the partial and adding counters are to be displayed and then validate.

To enter the access type, press the L(AG) soft keys for a TL, N(T0) for a T0 access or P(T2) for a T2/
DLT2 access. The display then shows the values for the line partial and adding counters.
ResPar makes it possible to reset the line partial metering pulse counter.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

METERING COUNTERS MMC STATION

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION GENERAL COMMANDS

File
GENERAL COMMANDS
4

This function is used for defining general elements which are common to the whole system.

GLOBAL CONF NOCONF No conference

A ONEEXT Conference with up to 1 TL

2 EXT Conference with up to 2 TL

PASSWD RESADM ADMINISTRATOR default password

RESOPE OPERATOR default password

Modification of the
NEWPWD Previous password New password INSTALLER password

MAINTE RDHIST History reading

RDANOM Reading of the system message table

RRANOM Resetting of the system message table

Slot number, equipment Reading and resetting of T1/T2/DLT2

L1ALAR Reading
number or logical number alarm counters

RESALL

NUMPFX INTERNTL PREFIX

International prefix
AREA PREFIX
Area prefix
CALL-BACK PREFIX
Call-back number

MASREC CHOICE Call-back from the operator or initiator of the transfer if a transfer fails

RD/WR MEMORY
RAM memory read/write

ADDRES
TIMER

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

GENERAL COMMANDS MMC STATION

GLOBAL INSNUM PUBLIC

Installation public and private number

A PRIVAT

ALTCLI Alternative CLIP number

KOFPAG CHOICE Paging type (suffix, prefix 2, prefix 4 or prefix 5)

JOING. TRANSF Joining by transfer authorized or not

DIVERT Joining by forwarding authorized or not

NAME Number Name associated with a number

DOWNLD SWAP DATE Software downloading:

- definition of switchover parameters
(date, time, with or without data saving)
TIME
- reading of software versions
MODE

SWVERS CURENT

OTHER
FAXTAB RESUBS Fax notification table

FAXNUM

MFTRAN CHOICE
DTMF end-to-end signalling
KEYPAD CHOICE
Keyboard facilities
SWKEYS MAIN Software keys (system and CTI)

CTI
NETCNF IP addresses configuration

Press .
GLOBAL

CHOICE OF THE TYPE OF CONFERENCE - CONF A

A
After pressing CONFER , choose the conference operating mode (no conference, with one external
line, with 2 external lines); by default: with 1 external line.

PASSWORDS - PASSWD A

A
Press MOTDEP .

Reinitializations of the passwords - RESADM and RESOPE

The choices RAZADM and RAZOPE make it possible to return to the default password required for entering
the ADMINISTRATOR and OPERATOR sessions.

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

MMC STATION GENERAL COMMANDS

Modification of the Installer password - NEWPWD

CHGMDP makes it possible to change the INSTALLER password.

Enter the current password (8 characters).

Enter the new password (8 characters).

Confirm the password by entering it a second time.

Notas :

In the Administrator session, only the password of the current sessions can be modified, that of a lower
level may be reinitialized.

HISTORY AND EQUIPMENT MESSAGES - MAINTE A

A
Press MAINTE .
LIHIST makes it possible to read the history message table.
LIANOM makes it possible to read the hardware messages.
RZANOM makes it possible to reset the system messages table.

Notas :

For more details regarding the messages, refer to the Maintenance guide.

T1/T2/DLT2 ALARM COUNTERS- L1ALAR A

A
ALARL1 makes it possible to read and reset the T1/T2/DLT2 alarm counters. Select the link (slot num-
ber + equipment number or logical number).

- MS : No 2 Mbits Signal
- RRA : Receive Remote Alarm
- AIS : Alarm Indication Signal
- PVT: Loss of Synchronization
- TE : Error rate
- LV1 : Level 1 unavailable
- LV2:: Level 2 unavailable
RAZTOU makes it possible to reset all the counters.

DIALLING PREFIXES - NUMPFX

A
Press PFXNUM .

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

GENERAL COMMANDS MMC STATION

1st display: enter the international prefix, validate.

2nd display: enter the area prefix, validate.
3rd display: enter the call back prefix (4 digits max, trunk group number used to make an outgoing
call from the directory of callers), validate.

REACTION ON TRANSFER FAILURE - MASREC

A
Press RAPMAI .

By successively pressing on keys CHOIX , you can choose the destination set to which the call will be rou-
ted when a transfer fails: ATTENDANT RECALL or MASTER RECALL (initiator of the transfer).

READ/WRITE IN MEMORY - RD/WR

A
LECECR makes it possible to read and modify the contents of the labeled addresses in the system
RAM memory. Modification of these contents makes it possible to parameterize certain particular sys-
tem operations.

Entering a value at the wrong address may result in deterioration of system operation.

Write in memory - MEMORY

makes it possible to modify the value of a labeled address. Enter the address (8 characters maxi-
MEMOIR

mum) then validate.

Softkeys A, B, C, D, E and F are used to enter the hexadecimal noteworthy address.

Read memory (except timers and maintenance and debug addresses) - ADDRES
ADRESS makes it possible to read the contents of the system's labeld addresses, except for addresses

which concern timers and maintenance and debug features.

ALLERA makes it possible to go to any index.

Reading the timers - TIMER

TEMPO makes it possible to read the contents of the labeled addresses concerning the system timers.

INSTALLATION NUMBERS - INSNUM

A
NUMINS makes it possible to define the Alternative CLIP number and the installation's public and
private numbers.
PUBLIC : number up to 20 digits max, separators * not included; the * character separates the different
fields: country indication, area number (optional field depending on country), PCX number. The size
of the field depends on the country.

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

MMC STATION GENERAL COMMANDS

PRIVE : number up to 10 digits max. without separators.

: Alternative CLIP number (20 digits max.). This number, if configured, is sent to the ISDN cor-
ALTCLI

respondent on an outgoing call in place of the installation number + DDI number of the calling party.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

GENERAL COMMANDS MMC STATION

KIND OF PAGING - KOFPAG

A
Press TYPBIP .
CHOIX : by successively pressing this key, you can define the operating mode for paging:

- suffix: paging connected to a trunk line interface; selective paging.

- prefix 2
- prefix 4: paging connected to a Z station interface; general paging
- prefix 5

JOINING - JOING

A
Press ABOUT .
TRANSF : by successively pressing this key, you can authorize or inhibit joining by transfer (transfer ext -
ext).
RENVOI: by successively pressing this key, you can define the type of external forwarding: Joining or Re-
routing.

DIRECTORY - NAME A

A
NOM makes it possible to display all the names corresponding to a given number in the numbe-
ring plan, with the possibility of modifying these names.
MODIF et AJOUTE and make it possible to modify/add a name; enter the user name (16 characters maxi-
mum) as "surname-space-first name" using the alphabetic keypad or the station's dialing keypad which
will have automatically switched to "letters" mode.

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
4

MMC STATION GENERAL COMMANDS

DOWNLOADING - DOWNLD

A
Press TELECH .
BASCUL makes it possible to configure the date, time and mode of the software swap:
DATE : swap date
HEURE : swap time
MODE : swap mode; by pressing successively on CHOIX , define the swap operating mode:
- normal with data saving
- normal without data saving
- forced with data saving (no restoration of the old version in the case of a transfer failure).
VERSW makes it possible to read the software references of the CPU board:
ACTUEL : current CPU software reference
AUTRE : new CPU software reference

FAX NOTIFICATION TABLE - FAXTAB

This 30-entry table defines the relationships between the user numbers to be notified by a message in
an incoming fax which is intended for them and the number of the receiving fax machine.

A
Press TABFAX .

makes it possible to define the number of the set to call (sending a message saying that a fax
SUBSDI

has arrived).
NUMFAX makes it possible to define the number of the fax machine concerned.

DTMF END-TO-END SIGNALING - MFTRAN

A
Press MFTRAN .
CHOIX : by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the DTMF end-to-end signalling is ap-

plied overall for all users, for no user or whether the passage in DTMF end-to-end signalling is carried
out individually for the sets.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

GENERAL COMMANDS MMC STATION

KEYBOARD FACILITIES - KEYPAD

A
Press CLAVIE .
CHOIX : by successively pressing this key, define whether the “Keyboard facilities” feature is activated or
not in the system. For further information, refer to the “Supplementary Services” of the “Telephone ser-
vices” section.

SOFTWARE KEYS - SWKEYS

A
Press CLELOG .
PRINC makes it possible to configure the system software license.
CTI makes it possible to configure the CTI software license.

IP ADDRESSES - NetCNF

Press NETCNF .

This function makes it possible to read and change the following system elements' IP addresses:

- IP@CPU: IP address of the main CPU.

- IP@Rtr: default IP address of the router.
- IP@Msk: IP address of the sub-system mask.
- VoIP@: VoIP master IP addresses (VoIPm) and slaves (VoIPs1 to VoIPs5).

The system MUST be re booted for any IP address change to be incorporated.

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION COLLECTIVE SPEED DIAL NUMBERS

File
COLLECTIVE SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
5

The system makes it possible to create a general directory of 2000 numbers.

Each number can have 22 digits (trunk group number included).

COMSPD Speed dial No. Deletion of a speed dial number

CLEAR
A
MODIFY Creation or modification of a speed dial number
(from a specific number)

GOTO Selection of a speed dial number

NEW Creation of a new speed dial number

(1st free speed dial number)

Press ComSpD .
Clear makes it possible to delete the programming of a specific speed dial number.
Modify after pressing this key, enter the call recipient’s name and validate; then enter the public number
preceded by the trunk group number and validate.

Nota : A "pause" (character !) or an “MF forcing” (character /) can be entered in the public number
entry screen using the alphanumeric keyboard.
Goto provides direct access to a specific speed dial number; enter the call recipient’s name or press
the Number key to provide access via the speed dial number, and then validate.
New after this key is pressed, the first free entry in the directory is displayed; the procedure is then
identical to the procedure provided by the Modify key.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

COLLECTIVE SPEED DIAL NUMBERS MMC STATION

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION TIME RANGES

File
TIME RANGES
6

WARNING: This function is no longer offered on a R2.0 system's MMC station.

This function is used for dividing a day's 24 hours into a maximum of 7 time ranges defined by the
starting time. Each range can be in normal or restricted mode. A group of a maximum of 8 operator
stations can be assigned to each time range. At least one time range must be defined in the system.

TIMERA MODE Normal or restricted mode

A
ATTGRP Assignment of an operator group to
Group No. the time range

TIME Time Start time of a time range already defined

ADD Start time of a new time range

Time

DELALL Deletion of all time ranges

Press TIMERA .

A
MODE : by successively pressing this key, you can choose the desired operating mode: normal or
restricted.

A
ATTGRP makes it possible to state the operator group number (1 to 8) assigned to the time range
concerned.

A
TIME makes it possible to enter the start time of the time range.

A
ADD makes it possible to add a new time range (if less than 7).

A
DELALL makes it possible to delete all time ranges.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

TIME RANGES MMC STATION

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION ANALOG LINES AND DIGITAL
ACCESSES

File
ANALOG LINES AND DIGITAL
7
ACCESSES
This function is used to define the characteristics of the analog lines (possibility provided from version
R1.1 onwards) and T0/T2/DLT2 digital accesses.

ACCESS Access identification if analog TL connection (incoming, outgoing, mixed, PABX)

DIRECT

NUMBER Decadic or DTMF dialling

A
POLARI With or without polarity reversal

Paging connection interface

PAGING

OUTINS INSERV Switched on

OUTOFS Switched off

CALDIS Normal Call destination in normal and

restricted mode (DDI No.)

Restricted

DISA Line used for DISA transit calls

DDCPRO Protection against DDC calls

CATEGO NNV, RNV, NV, RV: barring link category

N, R: traffic sharing link category

NNV, RNV, NV, RV: collective speed dial rights

REPENT (access to collective speed dial numbers)

if digital access B_CHAN Incoming

Number of incoming, outgoing channels,
Outgoing total number of channels
B
Total

OUTINS INSERV Switched on

OUTOFS Switched off

CALDIS Normal Call destination in normal and

restricted mode (DDI No.)
Restricted

CATEGO NNV, RNV, NV, RV: barring link category

N, R: traffic sharing link category

NNV, RNV, NV, RV: collective speed dial rights

REPENT (access to collective speed dial numbers)

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

ANALOG LINES AND DIGITAL MMC STATION
ACCESSES

Press Access .

Enter the data necessary for identifying the access and validate:

Identification of interfaces:

- SLOT : slot number: 1 to 8 (basic module), 11 to 18 (extension module 1), 21 to 28 (extension

module 2)
- EQUIP : equipment number: 1 to 8

ANALOG LINES (from version R1.1 onwards)

A
Direct : by successively pressing this key, you can display the desired line connection mode:

- PCX : line behind PCX

- INC : incoming line
- OUT : outgoing line
- MIX : mixed line

A
Number : by successively pressing this key, you can display the desired dialling mode:

- DE : decadic dialling
- MF : MF dialling
- NO : no dialling

A
Polari : by successively pressing this key, you can display the desired characteristic:

- YES : with polarity reversal

- NO : without polarity reversal

A
Paging : by successively pressing this key, you can display the desired characteristic:

- YES : interface for connection of a paging device

- NO : TL interface

A
OutInS makes it possible to read the current access status: In Service, Out of Service, Physical OOS/
Logical OOS or Physical OOS/Logical IS.

Choosing INSERV + OK sets the access to LOGICAL IN SERVICE.

Choosing OUTOFS + OK sets the access to PHYSICAL OUT OF SERVICE/LOGICAL OUT OF SERVICE.

A
A
: enter the DDI number of the destination station or hunting group for calls in normal
CalDis

mode. A second similar display is presented indicating the destination for calls in restricted mode.

A
DISA : by successively pressing this key, state whether the line can be used for DISA calls or not.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

MMC STATION ANALOG LINES AND DIGITAL

ACCESSES

A
DDCPro : by successively pressing this key, it is possible to accept or refuse DDC calls when this line
is used for a station external forwarding.

A
A
Catego makes it possible to define barring and traffic sharing link categories for each station.

NNV : barring link category for data communications in normal mode

RNV : barring link category for data communications in restricted mode

NV : barring link category for voice communications in normal mode
RV : barring link category for voice communications in restricted mode
N : traffic sharing link category in normal mode
R : traffic sharing link category in restricted mode

Enter a value from 1 to 16 to assign to the category concerned then press APPLY.

A
A
RepEnt makes it possible to define the collective speed dial numbers which can be transmitted
on each trunk. For example, a trunk with category 10100000 may be used to transmit speed dial num-
bers in categories 1 and 3.
NV : speed dial rights link category for voice communications in normal mode
NNV : speed dial rights link category for data communications in normal mode
RV : speed dial rights link category for voice communications in restricted mode
RNV : speed dial rights link category for data communications in restricted mode
Featur: by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the station concerned has the right (1)
or not (0) to access the chosen directory list (NV, NNV, RV, RNV), then validate.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

ANALOG LINES AND DIGITAL MMC STATION
ACCESSES

DIGITAL ACCESSES

B
B_Chan : for T0/T2/DLT2 accesses, state the number of incoming (INC) or outgoing (OUT) channels
as well as the total number of channels (value non modifiable for T0 access), then validate; the number
of mixed (MIX) channels is deduced from the other data.

B
OutInS makes it possible to read the current access status: In Service, Out of Service, Physical OOS/
Logical OOS or Physical OOS/Logical IS.

Choosing INSERV + OK sets the access to LOGICAL IN SERVICE.

Choosing OUTOFS + OK sets the access to PHYSICAL OUT OF SERVICE/LOGICAL OUT OF SERVICE.

A
B
CalDis: enter the DDI number of the destination station or hunting group for calls in normal
mode. A second similar display is presented indicating the destination for calls in restricted mode.

A
A
Catego makes it possible to define barring and traffic sharing link categories for each access.

NNV : barring link category for data communications in normal mode

RNV : barring link category for data communications in restricted mode

NV : barring link category for voice communications in normal mode
RV : barring link category for voice communications in restricted mode
N : traffic sharing link category in normal mode
R : traffic sharing link category in restricted mode

Enter a value from 1 to 16 to assign to the category concerned then validate.

A
A
RepEnt makes it possible to define the collective speed dial numbers which can be transmitted
on each access. For example, an access with category 10100000 may be used to transmit speed dial
numbers in the speed dial rights and traffic sharing categories.
NV : speed dial rights link category for voice communications in normal mode
NNV : speed dial rights link category for data communications in normal mode
RV : speed dial rights link category for voice communications in restricted mode
RNV : speed dial rights link category for data communications in restricted mode
Featur: by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the station concerned has the right (1)
or not (0) to access the chosen directory list (NV, NNV, RV, RNV), then validate.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION TRUNK GROUPS

File
TRUNK GROUPS
8

It is possible to create 120 trunk groups with up to 120 lines in each trunk group.

Each trunk group is allocated barring and traffic sharing link categories and a control mode (cyclic or
sequential).

TRGP Trunk group No. MODE

Trunk group control mode (cyclic or sequential)
A
CHANNL Reading of the trunk group configuration

ADD Trunk group content

CATEGO Level 1 to 16 Barring and traffic sharing link categories

Press TrGp .

Enter the trunk group number (1 to 120), validate.

TRUNK GROUP CONTROL MODE - MODE

A
Mode : by successively pressing on this key, you can choose the trunk group control mode: se-
quential (SEQ) or cyclic (CYC).

TRUNK GROUP CONFIGURATION - CHANNL

A
Channl grants access to the trunk group configuration window.
Add makes it possible to add a line (or an access) to the trunk group. Enter the data necessary for
identification of the trunk group and validate:

Identification of interfaces:

- SLOT : slot number: 1 to 8 (basic module), 11 to 18 (extension module 1), 21 to 28 (extension

module 2)
- EQUIP : equipment number: 1 to 8

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

TRUNK GROUPS MMC STATION

BARRING AND TRAFFIC SHARING CATEGORIES - CATEGO

A
Catego makes it possible to define the barring and traffic sharing link categories for each trunk:

NNV : barring link category for data communications in normal mode

RNV : barring link category for data communications in restricted mode

NV : barring link category for voice communications in normal mode
RV : barring link category for voice communications in restricted mode
N : traffic sharing link category in normal mode
R : traffic sharing link category in restricted mode

Enter a value from 1 to 16 to assign to the category concerned then validate.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION GROUPS

File
GROUPS
9

This function is used to create:

- 50 hunting, call pickup or broadcast groups with up to 32 stations in each group.

- 8 groups of operator stations with up to 8 stations in each group.

GROUPS PICKUP Group No. ADD Station No. Call pickup groups

HUNT Group No. ADD Station No. Hunting groups

GRPTYP

DYNROU EXTERN destination

LOCAL destination Dynamic distribution of hunting

group calls
TMOUT1 1st time-out

TMOUT2 2nd time-out

VMUBEH LEVEL1

LEVEL2

BROADC Group No. ADD Station No. Broadcast groups

TRANS OTHER
ADD

RECEPT

ATTGRP Group No. ADD Station No. Operator groups

OTHER
DYNROU EXTERN destination

LOCAL destination Dynamic distribution of operator

group calls
TMOUT1 1st time-out

TMOUT2 2nd time-out

VMUBEH LEVEL1

LEVEL2

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

GROUPS MMC STATION

Press GrpPic .

CALL PICKUP GROUPS - PICKUP

A
After pressing Pickup , enter the group index and validate. The directory number of the first station
in the group is displayed.
Add makes it possible to add a station directory number to the group. Enter the number of the station
to be added to the group.

HUNTING GROUPS - HUNT

A
After pressing IndPic , enter the hunting group directory number. The directory number of the first
station in the group is displayed.
Add makes it possible to add a station directory number to the group. Enter the number of the station
to be added to the group.
GrpTyp : by successively pressing this key, you can choose the type of group: parallel, sequential or cyclic

then validate.
DynRou makes it possible to define the dynamic routing mechanisms for hunting group calls:

- Extern and Local make it possible to define whether the dynamic distribution (time-outs T1 and T2,
destinations) criteria for each type of call (external or local) are active or not:
- Number makes it possible to define a destination station (or hunting group) or a collective speed
dial number for the dynamic routing in the case where the call has not been answered after a
time-out TP1 (12 seconds by default).
- TP1 : by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the time-out 1 is active (TP1) or
inactive (tp1).
- TP2 : by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the time-out 2 is active (TP2)
or inactive (tp2).
- Operat or GenBel : by successively pressing this key, define whether the system should route the
call to the operator and/or the general bell after the non-response time-out TP2 has lapsed (ac-
tive = ATTD or GBEL; inactive = attd or gbel).
- Tmout1 and Tmout2 make it possible to define the time-outs in tenths of a second. The default value is

12 seconds.
- VMUBeh makes it possible to define the role of the office communicator when it is used in a level 1
or 2 dynamic routing; by successively pressing Level1 or Level2 , you can choose between "Auto-sec"
or "Mailbox".

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

MMC STATION GROUPS

BROADCAST GROUPS - BROADC

A
After pressing Broadc , enter the broadcast group directory number. The directory number of the first
station in the group is displayed.
Add makes it possible to add a station directory number to the group. Enter the number of the station
to be added to the group; press Other to add the general bell to the group.
Trans : by successively pressing this key, you can choose whether the station concerned can transmit
a broadcast call.
Recept : by successively pressing this key, you can choose whether the station concerned is subjected to
a broadcast call.

Notas : In a group with an external loudspeaker, the following rights must be observed: for the sta-
tions: transmission = YES, reception = NO; for the loudspeaker: transmission = NO, re-
ception = YES

OPERATOR STATION GROUP - ATTGRP

A
After pressing AttGrp , enter the group index and validate. The directory number of the first station
in the group is displayed.
Add makes it possible to add a station directory number to the group. Enter the number of the station
to be added to the group.
Other proposes another destination; by successively pressing this key, you can choose the destination
(General bell, Welcome 1 to 8) then validate.
DynRou makes it possible to define the dynamic routing mechanisms for operator station group calls:

- Extern and Local make it possible to define whether the dynamic distribution (time-outs T1 and T2,
destinations) criteria for each type of call (external or local) are active or not:
- Number makes it possible to define a destination station (or hunting group) or a collective speed
dial number for the dynamic routing in the case where the call has not been answered after a
time-out TP1 (12 seconds by default).
- TP1 : by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the time-out 1 is active (TP1) or
inactive (tp1).
- TP2 : by successively pressing this key, you can define whether the time-out 2 is active (TP2)
or inactive (tp2).
- Operat or GenBel : by successively pressing this key, define whether the system should route the
call to the operator and/or the general bell after the non-response time-out TP2 has lapsed
(active = ATTD or GBEL; inactive = attd or gbel).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

GROUPS MMC STATION

- Tmout1
and Tmout2 make it possible to define the time-outs in tenths of a second. The default value is
12 seconds.
- VMUBeh makes it possible to define the role of the office communicator when it is used in a level 1
or 2 dynamic routing; by successively pressing Level1 or Level2 , you can choose between "Auto-sec"
or "Mailbox".

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION SYSTEM RESET

File
SYSTEM RESET
10

This function is used for defining the conditions of the next system reset (warm, cold, manual or auto-
matic).

RSTSYS TEMP HOT

COLD

TYPE MANUAL

AUTOMATIC

Press RstSys .
Temp : by successively pressing this key, you can display the type of reset to be carried out:

- warm reset: simple reset.

- cold reset: reset + loss of client configuration (return to default configuration).
Type : by successively pressing this key, you can display the condition for the next reset: manual or
automatic.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

SYSTEM RESET MMC STATION

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION TERMINAL PROFILES

File
TERMINAL PROFILES
11

This function is used for assigning a terminal profile to the stations, in the following order:

- assignment of a basic profile:

- key system mode (operator and stations)
- PCX mode (operator and stations)
- single line (stations only)
- assignment of an advanced profile:
- manager/secretary
- teamwork

TERPRO SUBSCR PABX Station No. Trunk group No. Station in PABX, key system
or single-line mode
A
KEYSYS Station No.

MONO Station No.

Operator in PABX
OPERAT PABX Station No. Trunk group No. or key system mode

KEYSYS Station No.

Manager Secretary
MGRSEC
station No. station No. MODE Manager/secretary pair in Basic
or Advanced mode
TEAMWK ADD Station No. Teamwork

DELSET Station No. Cancellation of the terminal in the system

Station No. Erasing of the station key programming

DELKEY

TERACC Station No. De-registration

CN of a DECT Reflexes handset

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

TERMINAL PROFILES MMC STATION

TERMINAL PROFILES AVAILABLE ACCORDING TO THE TYPE OF STATION

Station type BASIC PROFILE ADVANCED PROFILE

Single line Multiline Working Manager/Secretary couple
group
PCX Key system Manager Secretary
Stations with YES YES YES YES YES
display
Multiline sta-
tions wi-
thout display Except 4003 YES YES YES YES
Single line YES Except 4003 Except 4003
stations
Z Option YES

Press TerPro .

STATION PROFILE - SUBSCR

A
After pressing Subscr , choose the profile to be assigned: single line, key system or PCX.

Enter the station directory number; for the PCX mode, state the trunk group number associated with
the RSB keys and validate. To load the selected profile, validate.

OPERATOR PROFILE - OPERAT

A
After pressing Operat , choose the profile to be assigned: key system or PCX.

Enter the operator station directory number; for the PCX mode, state the trunk group number associa-
ted to the RSB keys and validate. To load the selected profile, validate.

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
11

MMC STATION TERMINAL PROFILES

MANAGER-SECRETARY PROFILES - MGRSEC

A
After pressing MgrSec , enter the manager station's directory number followed by that of the secretary
station.
Mode : by successively pressing this key, define the mode for the secretary station: ADVANCED or
BASIC, then validate. After choosing Basic, each station in the pair has:

- A Filter key for activating or deactivating the filtering of manager station calls.
- An RSL key which allows both members of the couple to call the other member directly.

If the secretary station is to monitor the manager stations resources, choose Advanced mode instead
of Basic mode.

To cancel the manager-secretary configuration, cancel the programmed Filter key and the RSL resour-
ce key on each station of the filtering pair.

TEAMWORK PROFILE - TEAMWK

A
Press Teamwk .
Add makes it possible to add a member to the group. Enter the station directory number. Validate.
The display then states the number of station resources.

CANCELLATION OF DATA - DELSET AND DELKEY

A
DelSet after a logical switchoff, makes it possible to erase the data from the station (station type,
appointment reminders, messages, forwardings, etc.). Enter the station directory number. Validating
erases the data from the station.

A
DelKey after a logical switchoff, makes it possible to cancel all programmings of the keys (MMC
station or MMC PM5) so that a new profile may be loaded. Enter the station directory number. Valida-
ting cancels all key programming.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

TERMINAL PROFILES MMC STATION

REMINDER OF FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE WITH THE RESOURCE KEY

A resource key is a line key that manages only one incoming/outgoing, local or external communica-
tion. Resource keys can be specialized or not. If a resource key is not specialized, that key can handle
all types of call:

- mixed resource key (RGM): handles local and/or external calls, whether incoming or outgoing.
- outgoing resource key (RGO): handles local and/or external outgoing calls.
- incoming resource key (RGI): handles local and/or external incoming calls.

If the key is specialized, that key handles a particular type of call:

- resource key dedicated to external access (RSP): handles the calls coming from or going to that ac-
cess.
- resource key specialized in destination (RSD):
- dedicated to a directory number, handles local calls for this number.
- dedicated to a DDI number, handles incoming calls for this number.
- associated to a trunk number, handles the outgoing calls on this trunk.
- resource key dedicated to a station (RSL): handles the calls coming from and going to a particular
station
- resource key dedicated to a trunk (RSB): for making external outgoing calls via a particular trunk
and receiving all network calls.

TERMINAL PROFILE IN KEY SYSTEM MODE

This profile consists of:

- 2 mixed resource keys (RGM) for local and external calls

- as many network monitoring, physical resource keys (RSP) as trunks in the system.

TERMINAL PROFILE IN PCX MODE

This profile consists of:

- 2 mixed resource keys (RGM) for local and external calls

- 2 RSB keys for external calls

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
11

MMC STATION TERMINAL PROFILES

TERMINAL PROFILE IN SINGLE LINE MODE

This profile consists of 3 virtual keys (RGM) for local and external calls.

TEAMWORK PROFILE

assigning this profile gives stations:

- n-1 RSL keys ("n" being the number of members in the group)
- a selective ringing monitoring key
- a group call pickup key

MANAGER/SECRETARY TERMINAL PROFILES

Mode MANAGER SECRETARY

Basic - key for direct call from the secretary - key for direct call from the secretary
station station
- FILTER key - FILTER key

- key for direct call from the secretary - key for direct call from the manager
station station
Advanced
- FILTER key - FILTER key
- monitoring keys for all manager's
resources

DE-RECORDING OF DECT REFLEXES STATIONS - TERACC

This function makes it possible to de-record a DECT Reflexes station.

Enter its directory number, erase it and then confirm the de-recording.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

TERMINAL PROFILES MMC STATION

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION METERING CONFIGURATION

File
METERING CONFIGURATION
12

This function defines all the parameters related to the pulse metering operation.

METER PRIPAR Check of the V24 output used for ticket printout

TICKET MODE Type of printout: ticket or statement

LANG Ticket or statement printout language

FORM_F Form feed at the end of the day (ticket or statement)

LINE_F Number Number of line spaces between 2 tickets

MASK Masking of the last 4 digits of the dialled number

FIELD1
Fields included in metering statements
FIELD2

FIELD3

DISPL Information displayed during the communication

PRINTO HEADPR Header printout format

Value Number of statements per page

PROOFS

COST 1 Value 1st basic charge value

PARAM1
Value 2nd basic charge value
COST 2
Threshold at which the 2nd basic charge value
UNIT T Value is taken into account

COSTPE Value Cost of the public network metering pulse

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

METERING CONFIGURATION MMC STATION

METER PARAM2 DUR TH Value Duration threshold

A COST T Value Cost threshold

INTNAT Value International call access code

MTEND Display of the cost at the end of communication

MTDUR Display of the cost during the communication

ACTMET Activation of V24 output metering

LLEASE Metering statements on QSIG leased lines (Alcatel)

PARAM3 CSTOLM On-line metering cost

FRTCST Number of decimals in the cost

ICCALL Statement for untreated incoming calls

ALATHR Value Alarm activation threshold

COMPAN Value Company name for statements and tickets

SUPSER UUSCST Value UUS cost

PBXCST Value PABX forwarding cost

WAKEUP Definition of the criteria for printing alarm tickets

CLABEL Currency unit label

CURCNV Converting of the currency unit into Euros

Press Meter .

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE V24 METERING - PRIPAR

A
PriPar makes it possible to check the V24 output used to print metering statements/tickets.

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
12

MMC STATION METERING CONFIGURATION

DEFINITION OF THE PRINTOUT TYPE AND FORMAT - TICKET

A
Press Ticket .

Various parameters - MODE, LANG, FORM_F, LINE_F, MASK

Mode : by successively pressing this key, define the type of printout: TICKET, LISTING or NETWORK.
Lang : by successively pressing this key, define the language for the ticket and statement printouts.
Form_F : by successively pressing this key, define whether a form feed will (YES) or will not (NO) be per-
formed at the end of the day for the printing of statements.
Line_F : after pressing this key, state the number of lines you wish to have between each metering ticket.

Mask : by successively pressing this key, define whether the last 4 digits of the number dialled are to
be masked (YES) or not (NO) in the printouts of statements and tickets.

Fields to be shown on a pulse metering statement - FIELD1, FIELD2 and FIELD3

, Field2 and
Field1 Field3 make it possible to define the fields which are to be shown on the metering
statements.

❏ Field 1: Field1

SUB : station number

TYP : call type
TRK : trunk number
DAT : date
TIM : time
DUR : call duration
TAX : number of metering units
SER : remote services

❏ Field 2: Field2

FAC : supplementary services

DNU : dialled number
DMO : dialling mode
RIN : ringing duration
CST : call cost
ACC : account code
SUN : printout of user name or business code or no printout

❏ Field 3: Field3

IUS : initial user (charged user)

NOD : node number (modifiable only if MODE = NETWORK)
CAR : operator
SU8 : 8-digit user identification
TR4 : 4-digit trunk identification

The selected field flashes.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

METERING CONFIGURATION MMC STATION

Featur: by successively pressing this key, you can choose whether the flashing field must be included
(label in capitals) or not (label in lower case letters) on the statement.

INFORMATION DISPLAYED ON A STATION DURING A CALL - DISPL

A
After pressing Displ , by successively pressing Displ , you can choose the type of information to be
displayed on the stations during a communication: duration (DISPLAY DURATION), units + duration
(DISPLAY UNITS) or cost + duration (DISPLAY COST).

PRINTOUT FORMATS (HEADER AND NUMBER OF STATEMENTS/PAGE) -

PRINTO A

A
After pressing PrintO , by successively pressing HeadPr , you can choose the type of printout for the
header: on each page (EP), on the first page (FP) or no header printout (NO).
Proofs makes it possible to define the number of statements (0 to 99) per page.

PARAMETERS CONCERNING THE COST OF A CALL - PARAM1 A

A
Press Param1 .
Cost 1 : first basic charge value
Cost 2 : second basic charge value
Unit T : threshold where the second basic charge value is taken into account (number of pulse meters)
CostPE : cost of the meter pulse sent by the public exchange (this value is used to calculate the number

of meter pulses to be displayed during or at the end of a call).

When choosing Cost 1 , Cost 2 , and CostPE , state the value (value then decimal value).

When choosing Unit T , state the number of meter pulses after which the second basic charge value is
taken into account.

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
12

MMC STATION METERING CONFIGURATION

THRESHOLD VALUES-V24 ON-LINE METERING - PARAM2 A

A
Press Param2 .
Dur Th : state the duration threshold value (in minutes).
Cost T : state the threshold value (integer value then decimal value).
Intnat : state the monitored business code.
MTend : by successively pressing this key, you can choose whether the total cost is displayed at the end
of the call (END) or not (end).
MTdur : by successively pressing this key, you can choose whether the cost is to be displayed during the
communication (DURC) or not (durc).
ActMet : by successively pressing this key, you can choose whether the V24 metering is activated (TAX)
or not (tax).
LLease : by successively pressing this key, you can choose whether the pulse metering statements are
to be printed (LEAS) or not (leas) on QSIG leased lines.

ON-LINE METERING COST-NUMBER OF DECIMALS-ALARM THRESHOLD

- PARAM3 A

A
Press Param3 .
CstOlm : by successively pressing this key, you can choose the on-line metering cost (0 to 9 pulse me-
ters).
FrtCst : by successively pressing this key, you can choose the number of decimals for the costs (0, 1 or
2).
IAPENT : by successively pressing this key, you can choose whether a statement is printed or not in the
case of an untreated incoming call.
AlaThr : to define the percentage of statements stored before an alarm is activated (0 to 100, 0 = no
alarm).

COMPANY NAME - COMPAN A

A
After pressing Compan , enter the company name (16 alphanumeric characters maximum) shown
on the statements and tickets and validate.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

METERING CONFIGURATION MMC STATION

COST OF SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES - SUPSER

A
Press SupSer .
UusCst : cost of the user to user signalling (UUS)
PBXCst : cost of the PCX forwarding

For these 2 choices, state the value (value then decimal value).

PRINTOUT OF ALARM TICKETS - WAKEUP A

A
After pressing Wakeup , by successively pressing Featur , you can choose whether to validate the va-
rious printout criteria or not (a criterion is active when its label is displayed in capital letters on the first
line of the display; if not, it is displayed in lower case letters):

ACT: alarm activated

CANC:alarm cancelled
FAIL: alarm aborted
ANSW:alarm answered

MONEY UNIT- CLABEL A

A
CLabel makes it possible to define the label for the present money unit used in the country and
displays it on the stations.

CONVERTING THE MONEY UNIT - CURCNV A

A
Press CurCnv .

This feature makes it possible to define the application methods for the change over to the Euro.
CLabel : label displayed (Eur).
Date : date of change over to Euro.
Time : time of change over to Euro.
ExRate : exchange rate of the Euro with the country's own money unit.
Param1 : cost of basic charge (COST 1 and COST 2); cost of charge sent by the public network (COSTPE);

threshold of the basic charge's 2nd value (UNIT T).

Param2 : cost of on-line metering and number of decimals.

SupSer : cost of signalling from user to user and PCX forwarding.

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION BARRING PREFIXES

File
BARRING PREFIXES
13

This function is used for defining a maximum of 100 barring prefixes.

BARPFX LEVEL Barring level (1 to 6)

AUT/FB Prefix authorized or forbidden

A
MODIFY Number LEVEL1 YES Prefix authorized

LEVEL6 NO Prefix forbidden

GOTO Prefix index Selection of a specific prefix

Press BarPfx .
Level : by successively pressing this key, you can change the prefix barring level.
Aut/Fb : by successively pressing this key, you can change the type: FORBIDDEN or AUTHORIZED prefix.

After pressing Modify A , enter the prefix value (10 digits max.) and validate. The following possibilities
are offered:
- Choose the barring level ( Level1 to Level6 ).
- Choose the type of prefix: press Yes for an authorized prefix or No for a forbidden prefix.
Goto makes it possible to position yourself at any position in the barring prefixes table.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

BARRING PREFIXES MMC STATION

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION PARAMETER DUPLICATION

File
PARAMETER DUPLICATION
14

This function is used for assigning the parameters of a given station to other stations:

- duplicating user parameters (dynamic forwarding, metering profile, ...): the source and destination
stations can be of different types.
- duplicating terminal parameters (keys); the source and destination stations must be of the same
type.

Notas :

The personal speed dial numbers, RSL and RSD keys cannot be duplicated from one station to another.

Source station No. Destination station No. User parameter

COPY SUBSCR (irrespective of station type)

Source station No. Destination station No. Terminal parameters

TERMNL (same station type)

Press Copy .

Choose the duplication type ( Subscr or Termnl ). Enter the source station directory number followed by
that of the destination station.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

PARAMETER DUPLICATION MMC STATION

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION WELCOME AND PLEASE-WAIT
MESSAGES

File
WELCOME AND PLEASE-WAIT
15
MESSAGES

The please wait message music is subject to composer's rights. For further information, consult the appropriate body.

This function makes it possible to record welcome messages and define the source of the please-wait
message.

VOICE MOH RECORD Recording of welcome messages and please wait music

A DFAULT

MUSSRC STNDRD Selection of please wait music source

VOICPR

TAPE

Press Voice .

RECORDING OF WELCOME MESSAGES - MOH A

A
MOH of makes it possible to record 8 welcome messages and one please-wait message.

After selecting the type of message to be recorded, press Regist .

Record the message using the station handset.

Split makes it possible to stop the recording and then restart it by Contin . Stop lets you stop the recor-
ding.
Dfault lets you return to the default welcome message.
Listen
lets you listen to the recorded message.

EMITTING SOURCE OF THE PLEASE-WAIT MESSAGE - MUSSRC A

A
MusSrc of makes it possible to select the emitting source for the please wait message.

- Stndrd : default please-wait music (DEFAULT displayed on the first line of the display).
- Tape : external please-wait music (EXTERN displayed on the first line of the display).
- VoicPr : customized please-wait music (CUSTO displayed on the first line of the display).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

WELCOME AND PLEASE-WAIT MMC STATION
MESSAGES

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION NUMBERING PLANS

File
NUMBERING PLANS
16

This function is used for defining the codes associated to the features of the main numbering plan, the
private numbering plan, the public numbering plan and the table of features in conversation.

NUMPLN INTNUM GOTO Main, private and public numbering plans

(normal or restricted mode)
PUBNUM BEGIN - range start and end
A
- base
RESNUM - function
END - private or otherwise
PRINUM - TMN
BASE

FUNCT

PRIVAT

TMN

FAXROU Fax call routing (public numbering plan only)

CODE GOTO Features in conversation

FUNCT

NUMBER

NBDIGI Preprogrammed NP with 2, 3 or 4 digits, national or with

3CHIFF

TMN ADD Number modification table

ABSORB

PUBTMN EXTDIG DDI number modification table

INTDIG

Press NumPln .

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

NUMBERING PLANS MMC STATION

NUMBERING PLANS - INTNUM, PUBNUM, RESNUM AND PRINUM

IntNumgrants access to the selected main numbering plan (99 ranges) for analysis of the dialling made
on a terminal.
PubNum grants access to the public numbering plan in normal mode (99 ranges), ResNum grants access to
the public numbering plan in restricted mode (99 ranges); these plans are selected for analysis of the
dialling received by the system via a T0/T2 access or to carry out call distribution (TL or T0/T2).
PriNum grants access to the selected private numbering plan (36 ranges) for analysis of the dialling re-

ceived by the system via a private line.

Funct lets you select a function from those offered.

DESIGNA- Function USE OF USE OF

TION THE BASE THE TMN
MTrG Main trunk group seizure (private or not) YES YES (33)
Subsc Station call (private or not) YES
STrG Secondary trunk group seizure (private or not) YES YES (33)
Code Collective speed dial numbers YES
Group Group call YES
Broad Broadcast group call YES
Prog Switch to programming mode
Pickp Call pick-up YES
Rdial Last number redial
ProCo Data connection protection against intrusion
Forwd Diversions YES
Attd Operator call station
PagS Paging call answer
Pagin Answer to a general paging call
PagP Paging by prefix
CClbk Automatic call back on busy station cancellation
Lock Locking / Unlocking
Mail Text mail
VMU Voice mail unit LED lighting
CVMU Voice mail unit LED lighting off
MTR Metering reminder
DESIGNA- Function USE OF USE OF
TION THE BASE THE TMN

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
16

MMC STATION NUMBERING PLANS

Accou Business account code for new outgoing call

Disa DISA Transit
Appmt Appointment reminder / Alarm
CLoop Loopback of dialling into current numbering plan YES (1 to 32)
Main Change of numbering plan (loopback of number in the YES (1 to 32)
main numbering plan)
VisAl Temporary allocation of a DDI number to a room
VisFr Cancellation of the allocation of a DDI number to a
room
RoomS Room status
Replc Station replacement
Move Station movement
OwnVM Mailbox call
Audtx Audiotex service DDI number YES

The VisAl, VisFr, Disa and Audtx functions are only provided in the public numbering plans (normal
and restricted mode).
Privat: by successively pressing this key, state whether the number is private or not; this parameter is
only used for the Subsc, Main trunk groups and Secondary trunk groups functions.
TMN makes it possible to enter the index (1 to 32) of the NMT table; enter 33 to retain the initial value
(without modifications) for the Main trunk group and Secondary trunk group functions.
Begin makes it possible to enter the number which starts the range (0 to DDDD). The characters *, #,
A, B, C, D are allowed in the fixed part of the range but not in the variable part (A00 to A99; 100 to
10B: incorrect).
End makes it possible to enter the number which ends the range (0 to DDDD).
Base : used for working out the directory number. The base is included between 0 and 9999. For the
functions which use the base, the calculation is done as follows: Directory number = Dialled number
- Begin + Base
FaxRou followed by the destination Fax number: makes it possible to associate the user’s DDI number
with the Fax number to which incoming Fax calls must be routed. This function is only provided in the
public numbering plan.

FEATURES IN CONVERSATION - CODE

These codes make it possible to access services during an established call.

A
Press Code .
Number : makes it possible to enter the features in conversation value

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

NUMBERING PLANS MMC STATION

Funct : makes it possible to select a function from those offered.

DESIGNATION Function
PCX recall Calibrated loopbreak
Canc enquiry Enquiry call cancellation
Broker Shuttle call
Callback Automatic call back
Consult Waiting call consultation
Conference Conference
Intrusion Intrusion on busy
Code paging Paging
Resend MF DTMF end-to-end signalling
Parking Parking
Send MF num Automatic switch DTMF end-to-end signalling and retransmission of this service
access code
Doorphone Open door
AllotN Cat 1 to 7 Allocation of line with barring category 1 to 7
AllotM Cat 1 to 7 Allocation of line with barring category 1 to 7 + Metering reminder
Mcid Malicious call identification
DND override Override Do not disturb
Conv record Recording of conversations

Preprogrammed numbering plans - NBDIGI

A
NbDigi makes it possible to choose one of the preprogrammed numbering plans (2 to 4 digits, na-
tional or with *). Validate.

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
16

MMC STATION NUMBERING PLANS

NUMBER MODIFICATION TABLE - TMN

A
TMN makes it possible to define the modifications to be made to the incoming dialling. Position
yourself at the beginning (index 1 to 32) of the table quoted by the main numbering plan function.
Add : digits to be added (16 maximum).
Absorb : number of digits to be deleted (4 maximum).

DDI NUMBER MODIFICATION TABLE - PUBTMN

A
PubTMN makes it possible to define the digits to be substituted before analysis by the DDI numbering
plan (this function concerns DDI with more than 4 digits). Position yourself at the beginning (index 1
to 32) of the table quoted by the DDI numbering plan.
ExtDig : digits to be deleted (16 maximum).
IntDig : digits to be added (8 maximum).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

NUMBERING PLANS MMC STATION

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION SPLITTING AND END OF DIALLING

File
SPLITTING AND END OF DIALLING
17

This function is used for defining the following elements:

- maximum number of digits in closed dialling mode

- 20 end of dialling prefixes and their associated counters
- 16 splitting prefixes for all lines (PCX or public network)

A B
EODPFX EODIAL PREFIX Prefix End of dialling prefixes

REFCNT Number of digits Number of digits in closed dialling mode

C
SPLIT Prefix Splitting prefix
PREFIX

TONDET MANUAL TONE Tone detection

SPLIT PAUSE

END OF DIALLING - EODIAL

A
Press EODpfx then EODial .

End of dialling prefixes - PREFIX

B
Prefix displays the end of dialling prefixes and value of the counters associated with the different
prefixes.

After pressing Modify , enter the end of dialling prefix (6 digits max) and validate. Then state the value
of the counter associated with the prefix and validate.

Reference counter - REFCNT

B
After pressing RefCnt , enter the value of the counter and validate.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

SPLITTING AND END OF DIALLING MMC STATION

SPLITTING - SPLIT

A
Press EODpfx then Split .

Splitting prefixes - PREFIX

C
Prefix of displays the splitting prefixes.

After pressing Modify , enter the splitting prefix and validate.

By successively pressing Modify , define the type of connection associated with the prefix, PCX, PSTN, ALL
or CTRYCD then validate.

Tone detection/pause - TONDET

C
Press TonDet .

TONE or PAUSE are provided by successively pressing Manual or Split to define the operation in manual
seizure mode ( Manual key) or during dialling ( Split key).

PAUSE: the system must insert a pause

TONE: the system uses the tone detection mechanism

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION PRE-ANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGES

File
PRE-ANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGES
18

WARNING: This function is no longer offered on a R2.0 system's MMC station.

This function makes it possible to assign up to eight 16-second welcome messages to stations or hun-
ting groups (up to 15 entries with DDI numbers + 1 entry corresponding to all stations and hunting
groups) with validity according to the time ranges.

PREANN ADD Destination MODE Operating mode

MSG Choice of welcome message

NEXT Next time range

MODIFY Modification of the current entry

CLEAR Deletion of an entry

DELALL Deletion of all data in the table

Press PREANN.

After pressing ADD Or MODIFY :

makes it possible to choose the operating mode (OFF, MODE1, MODE2, MODE1 BUSY or
MODE

MODE2 BUSY).

- MODE 1: the external correspondent hears the message from start to finish then the called station
is rung.
- MODE 2: the external correspondent hears the message while the called station is being rung.
- MODE & OCC: message broadcasted in mode 1 only if the station or hunting group is busy.
- MODE 2 OCC: message broadcasted in mode 2 only if the station or hunting group is busy.
- OFF: no access to welcome message
MSG makes it possible to choose the welcome message: Msg 1 to Msg 8.
NEXT makes it possible to choose the time range (the starting time for the range is displayed).
CLEAR makes it possible to delete the data from the selected entry.
DELALL makes it possible to delete all the entries in the table.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

PRE-ANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGES MMC STATION

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION DECT

File
DECT
19

This function is used to define the parameters for the use of DECT handsets.

DECT ARI System ARI modification

A NEWHDS VISIT Addition of DECT handset data structures

GAP PERM Permanent registration of a GAP DECT handset

VISIT Date Visitor registration completion date

MODE GAP DECT handset operating mode

WUA1 PERM Permanent registration of a UA DECT handset

VISIT Date Visitor registration completion date

IPUI UA DECT station identification code

DISPL Feature not used

HANDST Reading of data concerning handsets

BASES Identification NAME Base station characteristics

(slot, equipment)
OUTINS

DETAIL LENGTH

DELSET ANTDIV

FIRMID

BOOTID

REGIST Authorization to carry out an access procedure from a GAP DECT handset.

AUTHEN System operating with an authentication code or not

AUTHCD Authentication code modification (AC)

Press DECT .

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

DECT MMC STATION

MODIFICATION OF THE SYSTEM ARI - ARI

When a system is put into service for the first time, its ARI (Access Right Identifier) has the default value.
If there are two ALCATEL DECT systems which belong to two different clients but which have the same
radio signalling zones, the default values must be modified and a different ARI value assigned to each
one of the systems. After modification of the ARI, the base stations are informed of the new ARI.

After pressing ARI , enter 11 octal digits, the first being non-modifiable (always equal to 1) and the
last being equal to 0 or 4.

ADDITION OF DECT MOBILE DATA - NEWHDS

A
Add makes it possible to create new data structures for DECT mobiles.

Data associated with a DECT access - VISIT

Visitmakes it possible to create data associated with a DECT access specified as a visitor. This DECT
access is then used to record a DECT station subsequently (UA or GAP).

Data associated with a GAP DECT handset - GAP

This command makes it possible to automatically register a new GAP DECT handset. This registration
is based on the reception of an access right sent by the GAP DECT handset (after a manoeuvre on the
part of the user). Only one GAP DECT handset can be registered at a given time.
Perm makes it possible to select a permanent association to the system.
Visitmakes it possible to select a temporary association with the system; enter the date on which the
mobile is to be automatically disconnected from the system and validate.
Mode makes it possible to define the operating mode for the GAP DECT handset: Bas, Enh or UA
(WUA: significant choice for UA + GAP DECT).

Data associated with a UA DECT handset - WUA1

A UA DECT handset is registered manually by entering its IPUI.

Perm makes it possible to select a permanent association with the system.
Visitmakes it possible to select a temporary association with the system; enter the date on which the
mobile is to be automatically disconnected from the system and validate.
IPUI makes it possible to modify the DECT handset IPUI value; enter 14 octal digits and validate.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
19

MMC STATION DECT

READING OF THE DATA CONCERNING MOBILES - HANDST

A
Handst makes it possible to display the data (directory number, type of association with the system,
IPUI) relative to all the DECT mobiles declared in the system.
Goto makes it possible to display the data of a specific mobile; enter the directory number of the mo-
bile whose data you wish to see.

BASE STATION FEATURES - BASES

A
Press Bases and then enter the slot number and the equipment number of the interface to which
the base station to be parametered is connected.
Name makes it possible to modify the name of the base station.
OutInS makes it possible to display the status of the base station concerned. InServ and OutofS make it
possible to put the base station concerned in or out of service.
Detaildisplays the number of DECT channels (3 or 6) and gives access to the following sub-features
for the 4070 IO base station:

- Length : by successively pressing this key, indicate the connection distance from the base to the sys-
tem: short line (0-400 m), average line (400-800 m) or long line (800-1200 m). This data is ne-
cessary for synchronization with trame DECT.
- AntDiv : by successively pressing this key, indicate whether the 2 antennas (Diversity) or only the first
(No diversity) are used.
- FirmId : reading the software version currently on the base station.
- BootId : reading the software version for initialization of the base station.
DelSet makes it possible to delete the data relating to the base station concerned.

ACCESS PROCEDURE FOR A GAP DECT HANDSET - REGIST

A
Regist makes it possible for a registered GAP DECT handset to carry out an access procedure. A
particular piece of information is sent to the DECT handset enabling it to carry out this procedure.

MANDATORY AUTHENTICATION CODE - AUTHEN

A
Authen is used to define the system operating mode: recording of stations with or without an
authentication code. Choice lets you switch from ON to OFF.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

DECT MMC STATION

MODIFYING THE AUTHENTICATION CODE - AUTHCD

A
AuthCd makes it possible to modify the authentication code (up to 8 digit AC code) requested during
system access.

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION BACKUP AND RESTORATION OF THE
CONFIGURATION

File
BACKUP AND RESTORATION OF THE
20
CONFIGURATION
This function provides manual backup controls and restoration controls and enables the definition of
parameters enabling backup and restoration of the configuration.

DATSAV MANBKP Manual backup control

A Automatic backup:
AUTBKP PERIOD
- periodicity
DATE - date of first backup
- time of first backup

TIME

RESTOR Restoration control

Press DatSav .

MANUAL BACKUP - MANBKP

A
Press ManBkp . Validate; the backup starts.

AUTOMATIC BACKUP - AUTBKP

A
AutBkp makes it possible to define the date and time of the first automatic backup as well as the
periodicity.

makes it possible to state the interval (00 to 99 days) separating 2 automatic backups (00 cor-
Period

responds to an infinite interval: no backup).

Date makes it possible to state the date (as: Day 01-31/Month: 00-12) of the first backup.
Time makes it possible to state the time (as: Hour 00-23/Minutes: 00-59) of the first backup.

AUTOMATIC RESTORATION - RESTOR

A
Press Restor . Validate; the restoration starts.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

BACKUP AND RESTORATION OF THE MMC STATION
CONFIGURATION

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION MOVING OF 2 STATIONS

File
MOVING OF 2 STATIONS
21

This function is used to move the physical addresses of 2 stations of the same family.

MOVING Station 1 Station 2 SAVING Backup:

- 2 stations switched off
- logical moving of 2 stations
Physical moving of 2 stations

RESTOR Restoration
- 2 stations switched on again

Press Moving .

Enter the directory number of station 1 (source station).

Enter the directory number of station 2 (destination station).

Follow this moving procedure:

- press Saving : the 2 stations are put out of service and logically moved.
- physically move the 2 stations.
- press Restor : the 2 stations are put back in service.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

MOVING OF 2 STATIONS MMC STATION

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION DISA

File
DISA
22

This function is used to define the various parameters necessary for analog DISA and DISA transit ser-
vices.

Analog DISA
DISA ANALOG MSG Message for DISA on analog lines

DISA Transit
TRANSI PASSWD DISA service access control code (up to 16 characters)

WTDTMF Await DTMF receiver

MSG DISA message number

RESCOD Reset code

RESCNT Reset DISA call failure counter

Press DISA .

ANALOG DISA - ANALOG

Press Analog .
Msg by successively pressing this key, it is possible to select the message transmitted during a DISA
call on an analog line: Msg1 to Msg8.

DISA TRANSIT - TRANSI

Press Transi .
Passwd makes it possible to modify the personal code for accessing the DISA transit service. Enter the

current code then the new code and validate.

WtDTMF by successively pressing this key, it is possible to define the system response in the case of an

unavailable MF receiver for a DISA transit call: camp-on authorized or call failure and redistribution.
Msg by successively pressing this key, it is possible to select the message transmitted during a DISA
transit call: Msg1 to Msg8.
ResCod makes it possible to reset the DISA service access control code.

ResCnt makes it possible to reset the DISA call failure counter (this counter's value is not displayed).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

DISA MMC STATION

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION ARS CALENDAR

File
ARS CALENDAR
23

This feature makes it possible to define the operation parameters by ARS mechanism time ranges.

ARSCAL TIMERA HOUR- Time ranges (addition and deletion of a range, deletion of all the ranges,
operator deletion and modification)
HOUR+

DAY-

DAY+

OP-

OP+

CLEAR

MODIFY

ADDTIM

DELTIM

DELALL

DAYS CHOICE Allocation of a day group to the days of the week

HOLID. CHOICE Definition of bank holidays (+ allocation of a day group)

MODIFY

Press ARSCal .

TIME RANGES - TIMERA

A
Press TimeRa .

By successively pressing Hour- and Time , it is possible to switch to the previous and next time range.

By successively pressing Day- and Day , it is possible to switch to the group for the previous and next
days (Day 1, Day 2, Day 3).
By successively pressing Op- and Op- , it is possible to switch to the group for the previous and next
operator (1 to 4) defined for the time range and for the current day's group.
Clear makes it possible to delete the name of the operator.
Modify makes it possible to modify the name of the operator; press Modify or enter the first letter of the

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

ARS CALENDAR MMC STATION

name of the operator using an alphabetic keypad.

AddTim makes it possible to add a time range by defining a start time (information in the current visible

range is copied into this new time range).

DelTim makes it possible to delete the current time range (visible range).
DelAll makes it possible to delete all the time ranges and their contents.

Notas :

The operators can only be defined by MMC PM5.

The 7 days of the week can be split up into 3 groups of days (example: Day 1 for Sunday, Day 2 for
the 5 working days, Day 3 for Saturday); this makes it easier to allocate operators to the days of the
week.

ALLOCATION OF A GROUP FROM DAY TO DAY IN THE WEEK - DAYS

A
Press Days .
Next makes it possible to switch to the next day of the week.

By successively pressing Choice , choose the group of days to be associated with the current day of the
week.

DEFINITION OF BANK HOLIDAYS - HOLID.

A
HoliD. makes it possible to enter bank holidays.
Next makes it possible to switch to the next bank holiday.

By successively pressing Choice , choose the group of days to be associated with the next bank holiday.
Modify makes it possible to modify or create a bank holiday.
- For changeable bank holidays (Easter for example): enter the date as DD/MM/YYYY.
- For set bank holidays (Christmas for example): enter the date as DD/MM (at the next consultation,
the character * is displayed instead of the year).

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION MULTI REFLEXES

File
MULTI REFLEXES
24

This feature makes it possible to define the parameters concerning each Multi Reflexes connected to
the system; each Multi Reflexes allows 3 Reflexes stations to be connected.

MLTRFX Identification NAME Enter MultiReflexes name

(slot, equipment)

OUTINS INSERV Switch Multi Reflexes on/off

OUTOFS

DETAIL INTF1 INSERV Switch Multi Reflexes 3 interfaces on/off

INTF2 OUTOFS

INTF3

FIRMID Read Multi Reflexes software version

DELSET Delete Multi Reflexes data

Press MltRfx and then enter the slot number and equipment number of the interface to which the Multi
Reflexes to be parameterized is connected.

MULTI REFLEXES NAME - NAME

Press Name .

Enter the Multi Reflexes name (18 characters):

- either using the alphabetic keypad
- or the station's numeric keypad which automatically switches to "letters" mode

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

MULTI REFLEXES MMC STATION

MULTI REFLEXES STATUS - OUTINS

lets you switch the Multi Reflexes off and then on again. Reminder: a Multi Reflexes is switched
OutInS

on automatically (as in the case of a Reflexes station).

If the secondary UA interfaces (see DETAIL function) are not declared as off, the Multi Reflexes cannot
be switched off.
A Reflexes station cannot switch off the Multi Reflexes it is connected to.

The Multi Reflexes can be:

- In Service
- Out of Service
- Physical OOS/Logical OOS: Multi Reflexes not operational
- Physical OOS/Logical IS: Multi Reflexes not seen by the system (not declared or disconnected) or
switched off by the installer

STATUS OF SECONDARY UA INTERFACES - DETAIL

Detail makes it possible to read the last 3 digits of directory numbers and declare the 3 secondary UA
interfaces of the Multi Reflexes as on/off.
InServ and OutofS make it possible to modify the state of each secondary UA interface.

SOFTWARE VERSION - FIRMID

FirmId makes it possible to read the software version embedded in the Multi Reflexes.

ERASING OF DATA - DELSET

FirmId makes it possible to delete all Multi Reflexes data (this operation is only possible after the Multi
Reflexes is switched off.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MMC STATION INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER

File
INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER
25

This feature makes it possible to manage voice guides and configure broadcasting lists.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER MMC STATION

VMU AUTOAT DAY LISTEN

Voice guides for the opening and closing times of the
NIGHT RECORD automated attendant "Goodbye" announcement

GDBYE DFAULT
NEXT

PREV

AUDTX DAY LISTEN Voice guides of the opening and closing times
of the Audiotex "Goodbye" announcement
NIGHT RECORD

DFAULT
GDBYE

LIST CLEAR
Configuration broadcasting lists
NEXT

PREV

LISTEN

RECORD

EDIT

GALMBX
LISTEN General mailbox welcome message

RECORD
DFAULT

INFMSG LISTEN Recording of information messages

RECORD

NEXT
PREV

NOTIF LISTEN Recording of the message notification announcement

RECORD

DFAULT

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
25

MMC STATION INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER

Press VMU .

AUTOMATED ATTENDANT - AUTOAT

AutoAt lets you define 3 different types of automated attendants:

- Day : lets you access voice guides for opening times.

- Night : lets you access voice guides for closing times.
- GdBye : lets you access voice guides for the “Goodbye” announcement.

For the Day and Night functions, the following possibilities are provided:

- Listen : lets you listen to the recorded or default voice guide.

- Prev : lets you return to the previous voice guide (main menu, sub-menu 0 to 9, welcome messa-
ge).
- Next: lets you go on to the next voice guide (main menu, sub-menu 0 to 9, welcome message).
- Regist : lets you record a customized voice guide.
- Dfault : lets you erase the recorded voice guide and replace it by the default voice guide; this key is
only provided if recorded voice guides are available.
Select Yes (return to default voice guide) or No .

For the GdBye function (end of "Goodbye" announcement) the following possibilities are provided:

- Listen : lets you listen to the recorded or default voice guide.

- Regist : lets you record a customized voice guide.
- Dfault : lets you erase the recorded voice guide and replace it by the default voice guide; this key is
only provided if recorded voice guides are available.
Select Yes (return to default voice guide) or No .

AUDIOTEX - AUDTX
AudTx lets you define 3 different Audiotex types.

- Day : lets you access Audiotex voice guides for opening times.
- Night : lets you access Audio voice guides for closing times.
- GdBye : lets you access the Audiotex “Goodbye” announcement voice guide.

The following possibilities are offered:

- Listen : lets you listen to the Audiotex recorded or default voice guide.
- Regist : lets you record a customized Audiotex voice guide.
- Dfault : lets you erase the recorded voice guide and replace it by the Audiotex default voice guide;
this key is only provided if a recorded voice guide is available.
Select Yes (return to default voice guide) or No .

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER MMC STATION

BROADCASTING LISTS - LIST

List lets you customize broadcasting lists (51 possible lists including a general broadcasting list).

The following possibilities are offered:

- Clear : makes it possible to delete all data relative to a broadcasting list.

- Edit : lets you create/modify the parameters of each broadcasting list.
- Add : lets you add a member to a broadcasting list.
- Prev : lets you return to the previous member.
- Next : lets you go on to the next member.
- Clear : lets you delete a member from the list.
- Name : lets you modify the name allocated to the list
- Listen : lets you listen to the broadcasting list name.
- Regist : lets you record the broadcasting list name.

GENERAL MAILBOX - GALMBX

GalMbx lets you define the general mailbox welcome message:

- Listen : lets you listen to the recorded or default welcome message.

- Record : lets you record a customized welcome message.
- Dfault : lets you erase the recorded welcome message and replace it by the default message; this
key is only provided if a recorded message is available.
Select Yes (return to default message) or No .

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
25

MMC STATION INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER

INFORMATION MESSAGES - INFMSG

InfMsglets you record up to 50 information messages used by the Automated Attendant and the Audio-
tex service (opening or closing times).

- Listen : lets you listen to the recorded information message.

- Regist : lets you record an information message
- Prev : lets you return to the previous message.
- Next : lets you go on to the next message.

Nota : Other parameters (message name, end of message response) have to be configured by
PM5.

MESSAGE NOTIFICATION ANNOUNCEMENT - NOTIF

This function makes it possible to define the announcement for a remote notification of messages:

- Listen : lets you listen to the recorded or default announcement.

- Record : lets you record a customized announcement.
- Dfault : lets you erase the recorded announcement and replace it by the default announcement; this
key is only provided if a recorded announcement is available.
Select Yes (return to default announcement) or No .

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER MMC STATION

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
Software keys

SECTION

SOFTWARE KEYS

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SOFTWARE KEYS

Section Software keys

SOFTWARE KEYS FILE 1

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION SOFTWARE KEYS (INDEX) SOFTWARE KEYS

Section Software keys (Index)

SOFTWARE KEYS FILE 1

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

SOFTWARE KEYS SOFTWARE KEYS

File
SOFTWARE KEYS
1

DESCRIPTION

In the Alcatel OmniPCX Office system, a software key is represented by an alphanumeric string of cha-
racters, which opens functions. Two software keys correspond to each Alcatel OmniPCX Office system:

- the PRINC (PRINCIPAL) software key or MAIN for the system functions (voice, Internet, etc.)

- the CTI Software key for the CTI functions

The software key corresponds to a text file where the name is the CPU hardware number with the .MSL
(MAIN key) or .CSL (CTI key) extension.

Example: file 000068DA.msl and 000068DA.csl for main CPU no. 000068DA.

Each system needs the Main and CTI Software keys even if no CTI application is used on the system.

The systems can be delivered with a key that is already personalized for the client. The Distributor
needs to load if necessary the personalized key on the non-factory-configured systems.

CONFIGURATION

Keys must be downloaded in the event of CPU replacement or modifications to improve the system
features.

However, the installation can be adapted to meet new needs when the system is in place by entering
a new software key:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Typical Modification -> System -> Software key
- by MMC-Station: Global -> SwKeys -> Main/CTI

Two software keys can be entered: one for the system functionalities (Main key), the other for CTI func-
tionalities (CTI key).

Keys consist of:

- all upper-case letters except I and O

- all digits except 1 and 0
- the special characters #, $, /, %, &, *, +, @,( and )

In some cases it is necessary to do a warm reset to activate the new key. A message is dis-
played for doing this reset.

Nota : In PM5, the values contained in the key are displayed in the first column "Authorized by li-

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

SOFTWARE KEYS SOFTWARE KEYS

cense" and the functions that are really open are displayed in the second column "Really
activated". Since the equipment has no influence on the CTI functions, a single display co-
lumn is available.

Remarque : In the event of a software key change or a reduction in the number of Web Communi-
cation Assistant users, it is recommended to withdraw Web Communication Assistant ri-
ghts from the relevant users before loading the new software key. Otherwise the system
randomly selects users and withdraws their rights. For a more detailed description of the
allocation and withdrawal of Web Communication Assistant rights via the WBM, refer
to "Users and user groups" in the Internet Applications section.

SOFTWARE KEY CONTROL MECHANISM ON THE SYSTEM

On starting up the system, different cases are possible:

- The functions needed by the customer are open and work properly: the software key present
on the system is correct.

- The functions needed are not open

- The key is valid but some functions are not open (verification done by MMC).

- Verify that the order meets the client's needs. If not, contact the orders' department. A new
software key needs to be created including the new features.

- When loading the key via PM5 a warning message is displayed. In this case the functionalities
may be limited due to insufficient memory (Hard disk or XMEM) or CPU power.

- The software key present on the system is not correct:

- The software key syntax is correct but it does not match the CPU's serial number. The system
functions correctly with all its functionalities for 30 days. A message " Software Key Error " is
displayed on the Operator terminal. Press the Alarm key to show the expiry date. When loading
a correct key (valid CPU serial number) during this period, the system state is normal. If no cor-
rect key is loaded after 30 days, the system will restart in limited state with only sets belonging
to the Operator group working, all other sets being out of service; the 'Software key error" is
displayed on the operator station.
- The software key syntax is incorrect. The system starts in limited mode. When loading the correct
Software key (with the correct serial number), the system restarts with all functions working.
- New control starting with R2.0:

- The software key syntax is correct, but the software key does not match the system's software
release. The system functions correctly with all its functionalities for 30 days.

- The software key syntax is correct, the software release is correct but a more recent key has
already been entered on this system and it is not possible to revert to a previous key. The
system functions correctly with all its functionalities for 30 days.

Remarque : For a system in limited mode, when a valid software key is loaded, the system restarts
with all its functionalities.

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

SOFTWARE KEYS SOFTWARE KEYS

CONTROL OF THE SOFTWARE VERSION

Starting with version R2.0, each key works with a specific system software version.
This mechanism concerns only the "major" versions: R1, R2, R3.

If the key version does not correspond to the system software version, the system starts with the reques-
ted functions but for a limited period (30 days). At the end of this period, it reinitialises in limited mode.

When entering a key by PM5, if the software version is not correct, PM5 signals it and requests confir-
mation.

EDITING NUMBER AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT CODE

The editing number is incremented with each implementation of a new key on a specific installation.

The acknowledgement code is indicated in message 34 (bytes 2 and 3) of the history messages table.

When a key is provided by Alcatel and is implemented in the system, this procedure is irreversible.

It is possible to reload a previous key but the system will only open the requested functions for a limited
period (30 days). At the end of this period, the system reinitialises in limited mode.

PROCEDURE IN CASE OF PROBLEM

To obtain a key corresponding to the main CPU, you must contact ALCATEL. You must explain the pro-
blem.

- The client's main CPU has been changed. (Indicate the old and new CPU no.)
- The system was delivered with a software key corresponding to the CPU but does not work
- Etc….

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

SOFTWARE KEYS SOFTWARE KEYS

FUNCTIONS CONTROLLED BY THE "MAIN" SOFTWARE KEY

The following table lists the functions controlled by the "Main" software key of Alcalel OmniPCX Office,
the "limited" mode values and the configuration modularity.

Functions controlled Validity/ Values in li- Modu- Max Hardware

software mited mode larity extension
version
STANDARD TELEPHONY
Number of Reflexes sets All According to +1 236
selected mo-
Number of analogue sets All +1 236
del
MOBILITY
Number of DECT + Reflexes DECT 1(R2), 0 +1 200
sets 2(R3)
CALL MANAGEMENT
ADL All open in R1.0/ open
R1.1, closed
DISA/Transit DISA All open
since R2
ISVPN on ISDN (ARS required) All closed open
QSIG + (ARS required) All closed open
NETWORKS
Number of B-channels All 0 +1 120
INTERNET ACCESS
Internet and Intranet Access All closed open
Proxy : Web cache and Access controls All closed open
E-mail server All closed open
VPN Internet All closed open
Internet Access on CoCPU R1.0/R1.1 NO YES YES
DSL starting closed open
with R1.1
Lan to Lan starting closed open
with R1.1
Save/Restore starting closed open
with R2.0
Loading URL filters starting closed open
with R2.0

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

SOFTWARE KEYS SOFTWARE KEYS

Functions controlled Validity/ Values in li- Modu- Max Hardware

software mited mode larity extension
version
Statistical data starting closed open
with R2.0
Files and Web server (Intranet) starting closed open
with R2.0
RAS
Number of accesses (B-channels) starting 0 +2 16
with R2.0
LAN TELEPHONY
Number of IP Phones (e-Reflexes and All 0 +1 200
IPTouch)
Number of PIM-Telephony Multimedia All 0 +1 200
terminals
VoIP GATEWAY
Number of VoIP channels All 0 +1 120
VOIP
VoIP on CoCPU R1.0/R1.1 NO YES YES
VOICE MAIL UNIT AND AUTOMATED ATTENDANT
Number of VMU ports All 2 ports +1 8 YES
Storage capacity All 20' 10' 200 YES
hours
Automated Attendant All closed open YES
Audiotext All closed open YES
Fax switching All closed open
Mailbox welcome messages All closed open
Name in mailing lists All closed open YES
Recording of conversations All closed open YES
Remote customizing starting closed open
with R2.0
GREETING
Number of messages (16") All 4 +4 8 YES
PLEASE-WAIT MUSIC
Duration All 2 minutes 2 mi- 10 mi- YES
nutes nutes

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

SOFTWARE KEYS SOFTWARE KEYS

Functions controlled Validity/ Values in li- Modu- Max Hardware

software mited mode larity extension
version
METERING
Number of NMC tickets All 0 1000 30000 YES
LANGUAGES
Number of languages All 2 2 4 YES
WEB COMMUNICATION ASSISTANT
Number of users starting 0 +1 200
with R2.1
SNMP
SNMP activation starting closed open
with R2.1
SWL RELEASE
Required system release starting 0-R1X 1 1 YES
with R2
1-R2X

2-R3-X
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT CODE
Random code provided ecom. starting 1 FFFF NO
with R2
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION
Number of active ACD agents starting 10 agents 10 20 YES
with R3
ACD Statistics Module starting closed open YES
with R3
Number of agent Applications starting 0 1 20 YES
with R3
Number of Supervisors starting 0 1 4 YES
with R3
MANAGED SERVICES
Proxy H323 starting closed open NO
with R3

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
Maintenance

SECTION

MAINTENANCE

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

MAINTENANCE

Section Maintenance

PROBLEM-SOLVING METHODOLOGY FILE 1

BOARD MANAGEMENT FILE 2

REPLACING/RELOCATING SETS FILE 3

DATA SAVING FILE 4

SYSTEM MESSAGES FILE 5

DATA RESTORATIONS FILE 6

START AND STOP OF A SYSTEM FILE 7

DATA TRANSFER PROBLEM WITH WINDOWS NT4 FILE 8

MIGRATION R1.X TO R2.X FILE 9

MINIMUM SERVICE IN CASE OF HARD DISK CRASH FILE 10

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION MAINTENANCE (INDEX) MAINTENANCE

Section Maintenance (Index)

BOARD MANAGEMENT FILE 2

DATA RESTORATIONS FILE 6

DATA SAVING FILE 4

DATA TRANSFER PROBLEM WITH WINDOWS NT4 FILE 8

MIGRATION R1.X TO R2.X FILE 9

MINIMUM SERVICE IN CASE OF HARD DISK CRASH FILE 10

PROBLEM-SOLVING METHODOLOGY FILE 1

REPLACING/RELOCATING SETS FILE 3

START AND STOP OF A SYSTEM FILE 7

SYSTEM MESSAGES FILE 5

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MAINTENANCE PROBLEM-SOLVING METHODOLOGY

File
PROBLEM-SOLVING METHODOLOGY
1

WARNING
NO INTERVENTION IN THE CABINET IS AUTHORIZED FOR THE USER. ONLY THE
INSTALLER OR THEIR REPRESENTATIVE IS AUTHORIZED TO INTERFERE WITH THE
CABINET

This section does not deal with failures caused by configuration errors nor with those caused by errors
in the telephone features.

In either of these cases, refer to the sections on MMC-Station and Telephone Features.
In all cases, a perfect knowledge of the system (architecture, distribution of function processing, etc.)
and of its telephone features is essential, and in particular the limits of these features.

Faults concerning distribution must be eliminated first.

To avoid taking a wrong track when determining faults, it is vital to define the source of the fault from
the outset:
- operating error by the user
- programming error by the user or operator
- programming error in implementation
- genuine system failure

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE

For any system failure, it is essential to make visual checks (LEDs for the various boards, data testing,
automatic set testing), to check the power supply voltage (mains and battery) and to read the system
messages.

The procedure is as follows:

- locate the terminal(s) affected by the fault. If several terminals are affected by the same fault, de-
termine the common link which might be the cause (logical numbers of the same board, geogra-
phical distribution, same type of programming, etc.)
- determine at what level the faulty feature is occurring (local or external call, etc).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

PROBLEM-SOLVING METHODOLOGY MAINTENANCE

EXTENT OF FAILURE

A failure may be characterized by various aspects:

- Total system failure:

- In this case, the fault can only be located in the module
- The failure is most likely to come from the power supply or from the CPU (control unit); the next
most likely cause is a set or network interface board interfering with the CPU.
- Total failure of a group of sets:
- if all the sets are on the same board, then the fault probably lies in the board
- if all the sets go out on the same cable, then the fault probably lies with the cable.
- Total failure of a single terminal: the fault is probably in the set itself. If not, check the equipment
in question.
- Partial failure of a single terminal: the fault is probably due to the configuration or mode of ope-
ration.

DELIBERATE REPRODUCTION OF DEFAULTS

To make sure that your analysis of the fault is correct, it is essential to try to repeat the failure intentio-
nally, unless it is unequivocal and permanent.

Once the fault is observed or repeated, and depending on the presumed source of the failure, replace
the faulty element with a working one and try to repeat the original fault again.

If the fault remains, carry out the complete analysis of the failure again.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

MAINTENANCE PROBLEM-SOLVING METHODOLOGY

LOCATING FAULTS

Power supply problem

If the mains and battery operation LEDs are both out, check all the fuses.

If the fuses are correct, this means that the duration of the mains power outage has been longer than
the battery autonomy.

CPU board problem

If the CPU board LEDs are off, or are on steady, the system control unit is not working.

Miscellaneous

For any fault signaled on a terminal (set, add-on module or optional terminal such as a printer, etc),
the following operations will be necessary:

- Test of the maintenance terminal in place of the failed terminal

- Test of the terminal at the module level

ELEMENT SUBSTITUTION

RULES TO RESPECT
Any substitution (power supply, CPU station board, interface board, etc.) must be carried out
with the system powered down.

With PM5 you can save and subsequently restore the configuration (see "Data Saving").

If replacing a PRA board, make sure that the configuration of the new board is consistent with the old
one.

Powering up/down the system

- Press the ON/OFF button.
- Wait for the LED to go to steady red (about 30 seconds): system powered down
- Press ON/OFF to power up again after intervening (with the boards plugged back in). Wait 3 to 4
minutes for the system to initialize completely.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

PROBLEM-SOLVING METHODOLOGY MAINTENANCE

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MAINTENANCE BOARD MANAGEMENT

File
BOARD MANAGEMENT
2

SYSTEM WITH A SOFTWARE VERSION OLDER THAN R2.0

The system should always be powered down before plugging/unplugging a board.

Plugging in a board
When a board is plugged in, the system allocates numbers to the board equipment (subscriber direc-
tory numbers or line numbers); these numbers are allocated in ascending order of free system num-
bers. The board equipment is initialized with the corresponding default configuration.

When a board is plugged into a slot previously taken up by another board, this board is managed in
the following way:

- if the new board is of the same type (same scan point) as the board previously plugged in, the new
board is assigned the same data (numbers and configuration) as the previous one
- if the new board is different from the previous one, the system deletes the previous board and as-
sociated data (the numbers allocated are now available and the default configuration is cancelled).
The new board is then recognized as if it was plugged into a free slot (the equipment numbers are
allocated in ascending order and the board initialized with the default configuration corresponding
to the new board type).

Unplugging a board
In general, unplugging a board from the module does not trigger an update of the data allocated to
the board (directory numbers, key programming, line parameters, etc.) ; the unplugged board is con-
sidered as "absent and accepted" (it is taken into account when the system checks the equipment limits)
as long as no other board is plugged into this slot or a cold reset carried out on the system.

SYSTEM WITH A SOFTWARE VERSION FROM R2.0

Except for power and CPU/CoCPU/MEX, any board can be plugged/unplugged when the sys-
tem is powered up.

Before unplugging or plugging in a CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 board, it MUST be switched off using

the On/Off button on this board.

Interface boards can be replaced on a powered-up system if their OBC version allows it (ver-
sion readable by PM5 -> Hardware and Limits):

- from the 2.006 version for old boards.

- from the 3.003 version for the APA, LANX-1, UAI16-1, SLI-1 boards.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

BOARD MANAGEMENT MAINTENANCE

Plugging in a board
- Plugging in a board in an unused environment:The board is considered as "present, accepted
or refused"; it depends on the various configuration settings: authorised or unauthorised slot, equi-
pment limits, software keys, etc. A "present and accepted" board is taken into account by the sys-
tem.

- Plugging a board into a slot which was previously used by a similar board with the same
number of interfaces or accesses: The data related to the old board are not deleted; the new
board is considered as "present, accepted or refused" with the same number of accesses or inter-
faces as the previous board.

- Plugging a board into a slot which was previously used by a different board or by a similar
board with a different number of interfaces or accesses: All the data related to the old board
are deleted; the new board is then considered as if it had been plugged in a new slot.

Unplugging a board
If the board is unplugged when it is in "present and accepted" status, it is deactivated and declared
"absent"; the other data related to the board configuration remain unchanged. The processing is the
same for a board in a "present but refused" state, but that board will not be deactivated.

Nota : In case of a "gentle" plugging-in, it is possible that the plugged board may not be detected
by the CPU board or detected with the wrong slot number.

In On line Mode, PM5 does not automatically detect a plugged/unplugged board on a

powered-up system; the session should be closed, then restarted for the board to be taken
into account.

ALLOCATING DIRECTORY NUMBERS

When the system is booted, the directory numbers are assigned to the internal and virtual terminals on
the basis of the default numbering plan, in the following order of appearance of interface boards and
connected terminals:

- terminals connected to the SLI and UAI boards of the basic module
- terminals connected to the SLI and UAI boards of the add-on modules (if fitted)
- virtual terminals (XRA, DECT handsets, VMU, IP).

At the end of the system boot, the following numbers are assigned to the set options in order of ap-
pearance.

Example:

We have an Alcatel OmniPCX Office system comprising 2 modules:

- a basic module with 2 VMU ports and fitted with a UAI16 board (a V24 option is embedded in the
Reflexes sets connected to board interfaces 1 and 16)
- an add-on module fitted with a UAI16 board (a V24 option is embedded in the set connected to
the first board interface)
- after the system boot, 10 DECT handsets are added using MMC-PM5.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
2

MAINTENANCE BOARD MANAGEMENT

In the above configuration, and with a 3-digit numbering plan, the following directory numbers are
assigned:

- 101 to 116: Reflexes sets on the basic module

- 117 to 132: Reflexes sets on the add-on module
- 133 and 134: VMU ports
- 135 and 136: V24 accesses on the basic module
- 137 : V24 accesses on the add-on module
- 138 to 147: DECT handsets

Configuration checks

In case of any hardware or configuration change, the following limits are checked (for detailed quan-
tifications, please see "Capacities and limits" in the "Product Presentation" section):

- maximum number of corded interfaces: any additional interface will be refused.

- maximum number of directory numbers: any attempt to add another number will be rejected.
The directory numbers assigned to the auxiliaries (VMU, XRA, etc) are not covered by these checks,
and are always accepted.
- maximum number of D-channels (T0/T1/T2/DASS2 interfaces): Any additional interface (T0)
or board (PRA) will be refused.
- maximum number of B-channels (TLs, ISDN access, VoIP access): any attempt to add another
interface will be rejected (and the interface containing the B-channel in question declared out of
service).
- maximum number of hard disks:

INITIALIZING SETS

On powering up, Reflexes sets execute a self-test:

- display test
- test of the LEDs or icons of the set and add-on module, if any
- audio test

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

BOARD MANAGEMENT MAINTENANCE

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MAINTENANCE REPLACING/RELOCATING SETS

File
REPLACING/RELOCATING SETS
3

REPLACING A SET

You can replace your Reflexes set by connecting a set of the same family, but of a different type, into
your phone socket. This substitution can be temporary or permanent.

Replacing an analog set by another analog set, or replacing a Reflexes set by a set of the same type,
requires no special procedure (simple hardware exchange).

Temporary substitution
The replacement set keeps its own default functions (customized settings are not transferred). The data
not transferred are stored in the Alcatel OmniPCX Office system until a set of the same type as the
initial one is connected.

Your terminal is unserviceable Your terminal is repaired

Unplug Plug in Unplug Plug in

Defective Replacement Replacement Repaired

terminal terminal terminal terminal

Permanent replacement
The maximum quantity of data from the initial set is transferred to the replacement. Data not transfer-
red are deleted.

Unplug Plug in

"Terminal replacement"
code + password

Defective Replacement
terminal terminal

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/4

REPLACING/RELOCATING SETS MAINTENANCE

Characteristics preserved during temporary or permanent set substitution

- Rights (restricted features)

- Barring level

- Metering profile

- Messages and last caller repertories

- Destination set for metering reminder, forwarding and/or monitoring

- Set belonging to a hunting group and/or a Manager-Secretary relation

- Appointment reminder

- Locked or unlocked set

- Callbacks

- Active forwarding

- Last number redial

Data preserved during permanent set replacement

Replacement of Reflexes sets

Regardless of the type of the initial Reflexes set and that of the replacement, the function and resource
keys are not preserved. The directory numbers are preserved in accordance with the size of the direc-
tories of the stations concerned (for example, when replacing a Reflexes Advanced set with a Reflexes
Premium set, only the first 10 numbers are preserved.

The add-on modules are always transferred provided the substitution set supports these modules.

RELOCATING A SET

If you move office, you can move your set from one socket to another and still preserve all or part of
its settings.

Before relocating the set:

- You need to change the personal code, which must be different from the default code.

- It is advisable to lock the set.

2/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
3

MAINTENANCE REPLACING/RELOCATING SETS

Relocating a set to an unused socket

Unplug Plug in

"Terminal movement" code

+ Dir. P1
Movement
+ password
(not default password)

ADDING SETS

When adding sets, attention must be paid to the limits on the number of sets and the features offered
by the system software key.

Plug in

The set is recognized as soon as it has been plugged into the socket.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/4

REPLACING/RELOCATING SETS MAINTENANCE

4/4 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MAINTENANCE DATA SAVING

File
DATA SAVING
4

OUTLINE

Configuration backup

The backup operation concerns all the parameters not reinitialized during a warm reset:

- global data (software version, backup time and date, etc)

- configuration data (types of boards and terminals, characteristics of terminals and groups, keys
and repertory settings, numbering plans, directory, barring tables)
- data recorded by users (mail, appointment reminders, forwarding)
- metering counters

The configuration data backup can be activated in either of 2 ways:

- manually by the installer (MMC-PC or Station backup command)

- automatically and periodically, at a time programmed by the installer, using MMC-PC or Station

The backup session is exclusive of any MMC-PC or MMC-Station operation or customization session;
any modification is ignored during backup. During the backup, avoid any activation or inhibition of
services (appointment reminders are not protected, diversions and filtering are refused) which would
modify the settings.

Any system data modification and any hardware modification by MMC PM5 or Station must be fol-
lowed by a backup.

Duration of a backup session: about 20 seconds per module; more than a minute for a multi-module
installation.

At the end of the session, a message appears in the hardware message table (to signal failure) or in
the system history table (to signal success).

Configuration restore

The restore session is activated manually by the installer (MMC-PC or Station restore command). All
the saved data are restored.

Duration of a restore session: 1 to 7 minutes.

At the end of the session, a message appears in the hardware message table (failure indication) or in
the system history table (success indication).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

DATA SAVING MAINTENANCE

CONFIGURATION

- Manuel backup:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Data Saving & Swapping -> Commands -> check Backup
- by MMC-Station: DatSav -> ManBkp

- Automatic backup:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Data Saving & Swapping -> Data Saving -> Enter date, time
and periodicity
- by MMC-Station: DatSav -> AutBkp -> Enter date, time and periodicity

- Restore:
- by MMC-PM5 (Expert View): Data Saving & Swapping -> Commands -> check Immediate
Restore
- by MMC-Station: DatSav -> Restor

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

File
SYSTEM MESSAGES
5

The system messages are divided into 2 tables:

- the hardware message table

- the history message table

INTERFACE MARKERS

XX # 1 for the first half-board of slot XX, XX # 2 for the second half-board, XX - YY for the YY access
of slot XX, ***** concerning the system messages.

A board can be cut into 2 half boards, this means that the same board uses 2 LCP codes (one per half-
board). The 2 half boards may or may not be identical.

FORMAT OF SYSTEM MESSAGES ON REFLEXES ADVANCED SETS

To see the messages, go into an Installer session and choose the GLOBAL feature out of the available
features. Choose the sub-feature MAINTE then RDHIST to read the history messages, RDANOM to read the hard-
ware messages or RRANOM to empty the hardware messages table.

30-12 15 : 30 106 **** 01030000 001/005

- 30-12 : date
- 15 : 30 : time
- 106 : type of message
- **** : location (XX - YYY: access YYY of slot XX, *****: system)
- 01030000 : INFO 0 to INFO 3 hexadecimal (INFO 0 = 01; INFO 1 = 03; INFO 2 and 3 = 00)
- 001 / 005 : message index in relation to the total number of saved messages

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

HARDWARE MESSAGES

All of the hardware faults detected locally by a board or by the CPU board are listed in this table.

When the table is full, a new fault is memorized in place of the most recent message (the table may
be emptied by an MMC-PM5 command or by cold starting the system).

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

5 CONFIGURATION BAC- Check the
KUP FAILURE configura-
tion
9 CONFIGURATION RES- Check the
TORATION FAILURE configura-
tion.
33 KEY REDUCED CPU board INFO 0 = reduced feature set index
(80)
The features normally as- - 01 : VMU storage capacity dimi-
sociated with the active nished
key have been reduced - 02 : number of VMU and Auto-
due to a hardware pro- mated Attendant ports dimi-
blem (CPU type, insuffi- nished
cient memory) - 03 : Automated Attendant una-
vailable
- 04 : Audiotex unavailable
- 05 : welcome messages una-
vailable
- 06 : distribution list names una-
vailable
- 07 : recording of conversations
unavailable
- 08 : duration of please-wait
message diminished
- 10 : number of NMC metering
statements diminished
- 12 : number of languages dimi-
nished
50 ISDN ACCESS REBOOT Board loca- INFO 0 = D-channel
PROBLEM tion.

Interface mar-
ker

2/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

51 CLOCK PROBLEM Board loca- INFO 0 = type of interface: T0, T2, Check there
tion. DASS2, etc. is no syn-
Clock synchronization chronizing
problem detected on an Access marker access in the
add-on module interface add-on mo-
dules
52 SPECIFIC ACCESS PRO- Board loca- INFO 0 = 1 : FCS (Frame Check Se- If the fault
BLEM DETECTED BY AN tion. quence) 2: CRC (Cyclic Redundancy recurs fre-
ISDN BOARD LEVEL 2 Check) quently,
Access marker check the
connection
to the public
network.
53 ALARM DETECTED ON A Board loca- INFO 0 = XX : type of alarm
PRIMARY ACCESS tion.
- 00 : Level 1 synchronized; all
Access marker systems go.
- 01 : Synchronization loss in
"multiple frame" mode (synchro-
Ensure that
nization in "double-frame" mode
the alarm
is correct).
disappears.
- 02 : No multiple frames; T2
automatically starts "double-fra- If the fault
me" mode. recurs fre-
- 03 : RDS (...) quently,
- 04 : Remote Frame Alarm. check the
- 05 : Synchronization loss in connection
"double-frame" mode. to the public
- 06 : Alarm Indication Signal; se- network.
quence of "1"s received, interfa-
ce not synchronized.
- 07 : Loss of Frame Alignment
(occurs when the cable is discon-
nected).
- 08 : Temporary clock lag; syn-
chronization established.
- 09 : Error rate; number of error
frames > 5 in 1 second.
- 10 : Erroneous frames received
in the checksum (CRC).
- 11 : The network emits this
alarm when the FALC (Framing
and Line Interface Component)
sends erroneous frames in the
CRC.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

54 EXTERNAL FAULT ON S0 Board loca-
tion.
External problem detec-
ted on an S0 access fol- Access marker
lowing release message
giving cause as "deactiva-
tion of level 1"
55 INTERNAL FAULT ON S0 Board loca- If the fault
tion. keeps recur-
Internal problem detected ring, check
on an S0 access following Access marker the bus wi-
release message giving ring.
cause as "deactivation of
level 1"
58 ISDN BOARD FAULT Board loca- INFO 0 =type of error (not signifi- If the fault
tion. cant) keeps recur-
A level 1 error was detec- ring, check
ted by the board's OBC Access marker the bus wi-
ring.
72 UNSUCCESSFUL AT- Check the
TEMPT TO PRINT printer and
its connec-
Message emitted by the tion cable.
formatter (printer) after
every 5 failed print at-
tempts.
103 OBC FAULT Board loca- INFO 0 and 1 = type of fault
tion.
200 4070 IO/EO BASE: SLA- Board loca- INFO 0 = interface number invalid Check the
VE LINK CONNECTED tion. cables on
TO INVALID INTERFACE INFO 1 = number of channels the 2nd link
Interface mar- in the base
ker station
201 4070 IO/EO Board loca- INFO 0 to 3 = bitmap of frequen-
BASE: FREQUENCY RE- tion. cies authorized and in use
JECTION
Interface mar- For more information, refer to the
Discrepancy between the ker "Installing 4070 IO/EO base sta-
number of frequencies tions", file in the "Mobility" section.
configured by the installer
and the number of DECT
frequencies processed

4/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

202 4070 IO/EO BASE: LOSS Board loca- INFO 0 = link status (0 = link KO; Check ca-
OF SYNCHRONIZA- tion. 1 = link OK) bling
TION ON UA LINK 0
Interface mar- Replace the
ker 4070 base
station
203 4070 IO/EO BASE: LOSS Board loca- INFO 0 = link status (0 = link KO; Check ca-
OF SYNCHRONIZA- tion. 1 = link OK) bling
TION ON UA LINK 1
Interface mar- Replace the
ker 4070 base
station
204 4070 IO/EO BASE: NO Board loca-
REPLY ON DSP PRESENT tion.
(RESET)
Interface mar-
ker
205 4070 IO/EO BASE: Board loca-
TRANSMISSION ERRORS tion.
DETECTED ON SERIAL
LINK TO DSP (RESET) Interface mar-
ker
206 4070 IO/EO BASE: ER- Board loca-
RORS DETECTED DU- tion.
RING INIT PHASE OF
BOOT PROGRAM (RE- Interface mar-
SET) ker
207 4070 IO/EO BASE: ER- Board loca-
RORS DETECTED DU- tion.
RING SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD PHASE Interface mar-
ker
208 4070 IO/EO BASE: RE- Board loca-
CEPTION BUFFER FULL tion.

Interface mar-
ker
209 4070 IO/EO BASE: RE- Board loca-
CEPTION BUFFER FULL tion.

Interface mar-
ker

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

210 4070 IO/EO BASE: A Board loca-
MESSAGE IS SENT TO tion.
THE BASE WITH A FALSE
LINK IDENTITY Interface mar-
ker
212 4070 IO/EO BASE: Board loca-
WRONG LINE LENGTH tion.

Interface mar-
ker
213 4070 IO/EO BASE: RE- Board loca-
CEPTION OF AN ERRO- tion.
NEOUS MESSAGE
Interface mar-
ker
214 4070 IO/EO BASE: RE- Board loca-
CEPTION OF AN ERRO- tion.
NEOUS FREQUENCY
PLAN Interface mar-
ker
220 DSP OUT OF SERVICE Board loca- INFO 0 = DSP number
ON ONE OF THE tion.
BOARDS INFO 1 = cause (resource problem,
DSP overload, etc)
239 STORAGE MEMORY CPU (80) INFO 0 = type of error
CHANGED OR LOST
- 0 : medium KO
- 1 : medium full
- 2 : checksum error
- 3 : system file control error

INFO 1 = type of medium

- 0 : NAND FLASH CPU

- 1 : NAND FLASH XMEM
- 2 : HARD DISK

INFO 2 = type of initial medium

INFO 3 = affected memory area

(metering, alarms, voice prompts,
etc)
242 ERROR ON OPENING CPU (80) INFO 0 to 3 = type and value of
VOICE PROMPT FILE voice prompt
243 ERROR ON CLOSING CPU (80) INFO 0 to 3 = type and value of
VOICE PROMPT FILE voice prompt

6/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

244 ERROR ON READING CPU (80) INFO 0 to 3 = type and value of
VOICE PROMPT FILE voice prompt
245 ERROR ON WRITING CPU (80) INFO 0 to 3 = type and value of
VOICE PROMPT FILE voice prompt
246 ERROR ON OPENING CPU (80) INFO 0 to 3 = type and value of
VOICE PROMPT FILE voice prompt
247 ERROR ON OPENING CPU (80) INFO 0 to 3 = type and value of
VOICE PROMPT FILE voice prompt
248 DISCHARGED BATTERY CPU (80)
OR BATTERY REPLACE-
MENT
This results in an incorrect
date/time
249 THE CPUe-1/CPUe-2 CPU (80)
BOARD DOES NOT
BOOT UP WITH THE
HARD DRIVE.
The system runs on Flash
with reduced services.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

HISTORY MESSAGES

The events identified by the codes in the system history messages table concern modifications to the
system hardware configuration (appearance/disappearance of boards or terminals, refusal of a board
on exceeding equipment limits) or other events (reset execution, buffer fill rate attained, etc).

When the table is full, a new event is memorized in place of the oldest message.

This table is only emptied in the event of a cold system reset.

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal
0 SYSTEM REBOOT INFO 0 = cause of reboot
1 : MMC reset command
2 : reset due to hardware fault
3 to 5: reset following software
problem
7 : reset following software key
problem (the values of the de-
fault key are used)
11 : reset following software
swap or after restoration (fol-
lowing swap)
12 : too many one-way commu-
nications
13 : automatic reset program-
med by MMC
14 : timeout expiry
55 : normal reset
1 DOWNLOAD INFORMA- CPU (80) INFO 0 = information
TION
1 : begin download
2 : download finished
3 : download failure

INFO 1 = cause of failure

0 : download complete
9 : date invalid
11 : file transfer error
14 : download incomplete

8/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

2 SWAP INFORMATION CPU (80) INFO 0 = 1 : swap OK; 2: data
saving error; 3: fault during
Program change-over swap

INFO 1 = type of swap: 0 : nor-

mal with data saving; 1: normal
without data saving; 2: forced
with data saving

INFO 2 = acknowledgement: 0
: no problem; 1: save KO; 2:
restore KO; 3: save/restore KO
3 LAUNCH OF CONFIGURA- CPU (80)
TION SAVE

Data Saving
4 CONFIGURATION SAVE OK CPU (80)
6 AUTOMATIC CONFIGURA- CPU (80) End the
TION SAVE REFUSED MMC ses-
sion. Save
MMC session in progress manually or
wait for the
next auto-
matic save.
7 LAUNCH OF CONFIGURA- CPU (80)
TION RESTORE

Data Saving
8 CONFIGURATION RESTORE CPU (80) Check if the
OK hardware
configura-
tion has
been chan-
ged since
the last bac-
kup
9 CONFIGURATION RESTORE CPU (80) Check if the
FAILURE hardware
configura-
tion has
been chan-
ged since
the last bac-
kup

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

10 CONFIGURATION RESTORE CPU (80)
REFUSED

No backup available
11 END OF START-UP

The system is operational

20 NOT ENOUGH RAM CPU (80)

Available space < 15 %

21 MESSAGE POOL LEVEL CPU (80) INFO 0 = type of pool
22 FLUX CONTROL ON A ME- Board loca- INFO 0 = type of pool
MORY POOL tion
INFO 1 = state (95 = exceeded
Exceeded size of memory al- 95 % threshold; 75 = gone un-
located to flux control on a der 75 % threshold)
memory pool
30 DBMS SUICIDE CPU (80) INFO 0 to 3 = causes of suicide

31 CURRENCY CONVERSION - CPU (80) INFO 0 = 1 : conversion OK

> EURO
32 PRIORITY CALL CPU (80) INFO 0, INFO 1 = number of
the set with which communica-
tion was lost in order to take a
priority call
34 SOFTWARE KEY CHANGE CPU board INFO 0 = type of key (0= main
(80) key; 1 = CTI key)

INFO 1 = software key states

(the various states are explained
at the end of the record)

INFO 2 and 3 = Bytes corres-

ponding to the acknowledge-
ment code
56 ISDN BOARD FAULT Board loca- INFO 0 = access status (0 = ac-
tion. cess KO, 1 = access OK)
The ISDN protocol manage-
ment module detected a level Access mar- INFO 1 = type of access (03 =
1 fault on an ISDN access ker T0, 23 = DLT0)

10/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

57 TEI DELETION CPU (80) INFO 0 = D-channel Analyze the
reason why
INFO 1 = TEI the TEI was
modified by
the network
operator.
70 METERING SPOOLER K.O. Check the
printer and
Message emitted by the its cable
spooler when the metering connection
buffer (the array where the
tickets are stored) is n% full
(70% by default)
71 METERING SPOOLER O.K.

Message emitted by the

spooler when the metering
buffer is available again(-n%
full; -70% by default)
90 ENTERING AN MMC SES- CPU (80) INFO 0 = 1 : ADMINISTRATOR
SION password; 2: INSTALLER pas-
sword; 3: OPERATOR password;
5: protected access
91 QUITTING AN MMC SES- CPU (80)
SION
100 BOARD BACK IN SERVICE Board loca- INFO 0 = type of board
tion
(Following a system stoppage
or after being unplugged)
101 BOARD DISCONNECTION Board loca- INFO 0 = type of board (if
tion known)
104 TEMPORARY BOARD RESET Board loca- INFO 0 = 1 : hardware fault; 2:
tion no response from board; 3: fan
fault; 4: running on battery; 5:
license problem; 6: maintenan-
ce problem; 7: reason unknown

INFO 1 = cause of reset

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 11/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

105 PERMANENT BOARD RESET Board loca- INFO 0 = 1 : hardware fault; 2: Disconnect
tion. no response from board; 3: fan and recon-
fault; 4: running on battery; 5: nect the
license problem; 6: maintenan- board. If the
ce problem; 7: reason unknown; fault per-
8: power supply problem sists, repla-
ce the board
INFO 1 = cause of reset
106 BOARD REFUSED Board loca- INFO 0 = type of board Check the
tion hardware
The board has been refused INFO 1 = cause of refusal configura-
and, in the case of a digital tion (the sys-
board, a permanent reset is tem limits
performed on it may have
been excee-
ded).
107 MMC BOARD RESET Board loca-
tion
The reset of an interface
board processor has been re-
quested by MMC
108 POWER DOWN: LAUNCH Board loca-
OF BACKUP PROCEDURE tion
FOR A GIVEN BOARD
109 BOARD INFO ERASED BY Board loca-
MMC tion
110 APPEARANCE OF A TERMI- Board loca- INFO 0 = type of terminal
NAL tion.

A terminal has been recogni- Interface

zed by the system. This termi- marker
nal is now operational

NB: this message will only be

sent if the NMC is present
and active
111 TERMINAL REFUSED Board loca- INFO 0 = type of terminal Check the
tion. hardware
Configuration limit attained INFO 1 = cause of refusal configura-
Interface tion (the sys-
marker INFO 2 = 1 (software license
tem limits
problem; in this case, INFO 1 =
may have
255 (terminal not totally refused,
been excee-
because recognized by MMC)
ded).

12/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

112 FAULT ON A TERMINAL Board loca- INFO 0 = type of terminal If the fault
tion. recurs fre-
INFO 1 = type of error quently,
Interface check the
marker terminal
and its con-
nections.
113 INTERFACE REFUSED Board loca- INFO 0 =type of interface Check the
tion. hardware
An interface was refused be- INFO 1 = cause of refusal configura-
cause the system limits were Interface tion (the sys-
exceeded marker tem limits
may have
been excee-
ded).
120 MODULE BACK IN SERVICE Controller INFO 0 = type of backpanel
board (81 or board (4.7 = BACK1; 5.8 =
82) BACK2; 6.9 = BACK 3)

INFO 1 = module operating

mode (0 = restricted mode, run-
ning on battery; 1 = normal mo-
de, running on the mains)
121 MODULE REFUSED Controller
board (81 or
82)
122 MODULE DISCONNECTED Controller
board (81 or
82)
123 POWER SUPPLY FAULT CPU (80) INFO 0 = mains power state (0
= Mains KO - battery activated;
1 = mains OK)
124 FAN FAULT CPU (80) or INFO 1 = fan identity (0 = fan
Controller 1; 1 = fan 2)
Board (81)
or (82) INFO 2 = fan state (0 = KO; 1
= OK)
125 POWER SAVING INFO 0 = module (0 = basic Check rota-
module; 1 = add-on 1; 2 = add- tion of the
System in power-saving mo- on 2) module
de; only the 2 first Reflexes te- fans.
lephones as well as all T0
accesses will be taken into
account

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 13/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

126 DSP RESOURCE KO CPU (80) or INFO 0 = 0 or 1 (DSP0 or DSP1)
controller
Message not processed by board (81 or
the DSP of one of the control- 82)
ler boards
127 DSP RESULT CODES CPU (80) or INFO 0 = 0 or 1 (DSP0 or DSP1)
controller
These codes are used in con- board (81 or
firmation messages and by 82)
the reception buffer
128 DSP KO CPU (80) or INFO 0 = 0 or 1 (DSP0 or DSP1)
controller
The DSP of one of the con- board (81 or
troller boards is out of servi- 82)
ce.
129 CPU KO INFO 0 = type of CPU (0 = In-
ternet access; 1 = VoIP)
CPU board not detected by
the backpanel board 10 mi- INFO 1 = number of CPU resets
nutes after initialization during the-10 minute period

INFO 2 = CPU state

INFO 3 = final byte of CPU

board Internet address
160 HARDWARE TABLE THRES- CPU (80)
HOLD

The critical threshold (80 %

by default) of the hardware
fault table has been reached
161 HISTORY TABLE THRESHOLD CPU (80)

The critical threshold (80 %

by default) of the history fault
table has been reached
162 METERING TABLE THRES- CPU (80)
HOLD

The critical threshold (80 %

by default) of the data mete-
ring buffer has been reached

14/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

163 URGENT TABLE THRESHOLD CPU (80)

The critical threshold (80 %

by default) of the urgent
alarms table has been rea-
ched
164 HARDWARE TABLE FULL CPU (80)

The hardware fault table is

full
165 HISTORY TABLE FULL CPU (80)

The history fault table is full

166 METERING TABLE FULL CPU (80)

The data metering buffer is

full
167 URGENT TABLE FULL CPU (80)

The urgent alarms table is full

168 BEGINNING OF NMC CON- CPU (80)
NECTION

The NMC application has es-

tablished a connection with
the PCX
169 END OF NMC CONNEC- CPU (80)
TION

The NMC application has en-

ded the connection with the
PCX
170 UNAUTHORIZED CALL CPU (80)

NMC call by analog XRA

(prohibited)
171 INCORRECT NMC CALL CPU (80)

The PCX tried to establish a

call to an NMC but it was un-
successful

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 15/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

172 NMC CALL NOT ANSWERED CPU (80)

The PCX tried to establish a

call to an NMC, but the call
was not answered
173 NMC COMMUNICATION CPU (80)
FAILURE

The PCX connected to an

NMC and sent an INFO mes-
sage saying that an urgent
alarm should be read. The
PCX did not respond to this
message.
174 NMC COMMUNICATION CPU (80)
FAILURE

The PCX received no ack-

nowledgement for the data
sent in the message. The
communication failed.
175 NMC COMMUNICATION CPU (80)
FAILURE

The PCX received no ack-

nowledgement for the esta-
blishment request sent to the
NMC
176 ALARM REPORT FAILURE CPU (80)

The PCX attempted to call the

NMC to send urgentalarms,
but the NMC number was not
specified
177 PCX NOT SAVED CPU (80)

The PCX attempted to call the

NMC, but the NMC refused
the call because it didn't reco-
gnize the PCX
178 UNKNOWN ALARM CPU (80)

There was an alarm on the

PCX but it was not recognized
by the NMC

16/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

190 UNKNOWN IPUI CPU (80) INFO 0, INFO 1, INFO 2, INFO
3 = last 4 bytes of the IPUI
221 ETHERNET LINK OUT OF Board loca- Check the
SERVICE tion. LAN con-
nection and,
Ethernet in- if necessa-
terface mar- ry, the LAN
ker. elements
(hub,
switch).
222 ETHERNET LINK IN SERVICE Board loca-
tion.

Ethernet in-
terface mar-
ker.
223 REMOTE GATEWAY OUT OF INFO 0 to INFO 3: bytes corres- Check the IP
SERVICE ponding to the IP address of the connectivity
remote gateway to the remo-
te gateway
(LAN, inter-
mediate IP
router) and
the remote
gateway
status.
224 REMOTE GATEWAY IN SER- INFO 0 to INFO 3: bytes corres-
VICE ponding to the IP address
225 TRAFFIC OVERLOAD TO OR CPU (80) INFO 0 to INFO 3: bytes corres- If this alarm
FROM A REMOTE GATEWAY ponding to the IP address keeps recur-
ring, in-
For each gateway, a traffic crease the
counter logs the overflow bandwidth
calls due to total occupation associated
of the bandwidth; the step va- with the ga-
lue N for generating this teway in the
message can be defined for ARS table,
each labeled address (Thr- and the
GWTraff). number of
DSPs alloca-
ted to VoIP
access.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 17/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

226 EXTERNAL GATEKEEPER Check the IP
INACCESSIBLE connectivity
to the remo-
te gatekee-
per (LAN,
intermedia-
te IP router)
and check
that the re-
mote gate-
keeper is
indeed on
line.
227 VoIP CALL REFUSED CPU (80) If this alarm
keeps recur-
All incoming and outgoing ring, in-
calls refused due to busy IP crease the
accesses (no DSP or B-chan- number of
nel available) are logged by DSPs alloca-
a traffic counter; the step va- ted to VoIP
lue N for generating this access, or
message can be defined for increase the
each labeled address (Thr- bandwidth
NoIPTru). in the ARS,
or add a
CoCPU@ +
VoIP board.
228 VoIP CALL FAILED CPU (80) If this alarm
keeps recur-
Calls made by IP Phones due ring, in-
to a lack of DSP channels are crease the
logged by a traffic counter; number of
the step value N for genera- DSPs alloca-
ting this message can be de- ted to the IP
fined for each labeled user pool
address (ThrNoDSP). (decrease
the number
of VoIP-ac-
cess DSPs or
add a CoC-
PU@ +
VoIP board).

18/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

Type Message Location Additional Information Principal

229 IP ENABLER 4098/IP PHONE Increase the
NOT INITIALIZED number of
IP addresses
DHCP problem in the DHCP
server range
(this address
range must
be greater
than or
equal to the
number of
IP Enablers
to be instal-
led).
230 EXTERNAL GATEKEEPER RE-
FUSED
240 VOICE MESSAGES UNA- CPU (80) INFO 0 = number of megabytes
VAILABLE of DRAM detected by the BIOS.

Detection error on RAM ini-

tialization by the BIOS
241 VMU MEMORY THRESHOLD CPU (80) INFO 0 = 1 (ON) if there are just
a few minutes of recording time
The voice message recording left; 0 (OFF) end of the anomaly.
memory area is nearly full.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 19/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

INFORMATION DISPLAYED

The information given below concerns the hardware messages as well as those contained in the system
history.

Types of boards (INFO 0 of messages 100, 101 and 244)

1. Boards R1.0 and R1.1

82h: integrated voice server

9Eh:SLI board
A0h: UAI board
A1h: PRA board = E1
A2h: PRA board = DLE1/DLT2
A3h: PRA board = T1/T2
A4h: PRA board = DASS2
A7h: virtual XRA board
B0h: main or applications CPU board
B1h: MIX board
B2h : BRA board
B3h: LanX board
96h: ATA board (Analog lines)

2. Additional boards R2.0

B4h: APA board (Analog lines)

B5h: T1 CAS board
B6h: LanX-1 board
B7h: UAI-1 board
B9h: DDI board

3. Additional boards R2.1

A5h: PRA board = PCM

B9h: SLI-1 board (legerity)
BAh: SLI-1 board (ST)

4. Additional boards R3.0

BBh: MediaBCh virtual board: LANX-2BDh board: MIX-1 board (legerity) BEh : MIX-1 board (ST)

5. Additional boards R3.1

BFh: AMIX-1 board (legerity)

C0h: AMIX-1 board (ST)

TYPES OF TERMINAL (INFO 0 of messages 111 and 112)

00h: 4034 1G set 02h: 4023 1G set 06h: 4034 2G set 07h: 5028 set 08h: 4023 2G set 0Ah: 4012
set 0Bh: 5022 set 0Ch: 4011 set 0Eh: 4001 set 0Fh: 5010 set 12h: 5018 set 14h: 5015 set 15h: 4003

20/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

set 16h: 4088 adapter 17h: First set 19h: Easy set 1Bh: Premium set 1Dh: Advanced set 1Fh: 4070
IO base station 20h: multi Réflexes 4099 22h: 4070 PWT base station 26h: IPTouch 4038 set 27h:
IPTouch 4068 set 28h: 4081 L 40-key add-on module 2Ah: 4081 M 20-key add-on module 2Ch: 10-
key add-on module for IPTouch set 2Dh: 40-key add-on module for IPTouch set 2Eh: MAC/PC option
(Réflexes 2G set) 2Fh: External alphanumeric keyboard for réflexes set 30h: V24 option (Reflexes 3G
set) 32h: Z option (Reflexes 3G set) 33h: DECT option (Reflexes 3G set) 34h: S0 option (Reflexes 3G
set) 35h: Z standard 2-wire set 36h: Z CLASS standard 2-wire set 37h: Alcatel GAP DECT handset wi-
thout display 38h: Alcatel GAP DECT handset with 16-character display 39h: third-party GAP DECT
handset without display 3Ah: third-party GAP DECT handset with 16-character display 3Bh: Réflexes
set + 4097 CBL adapter 3Ch: 4073 set 3Dh: Mobile Réflexes 100/200 set 3Eh: 4073 PWT set 40h:
CSTA virtual set

REASONS FOR BOARD REFUSAL (INFO 1 of message 106)

01h: consumption limits exceeded
04h: unknown board type
05h: board refused
06h: no primary access in basic module
07h: feature denied (rights linked to license)
08h : max. number of applications CPUs attained
09h: board cannot be initialized
0Dh: max number of CoCPU RA exceeded

REASONS FOR TERMINAL REFUSAL (INFO 1 of message 111)

04h: exceeding the max number of corded interfaces in the system
05h: exceeding the use of terminals
06h : UA devices exceeded (2 add-on modules per set and 4 options)
07h : total number of terminals exceeded
08h : number of users exceeded
09h : max. number of B-channels exceeded
0Ah : max. number of T0 accesses exceeded
0Bh : max. number of primary accesses exceeded
0Dh : incompatible terminal
0Eh : number of programmable keys exceeded
0Fh: memory capacity exceeded
10h : number of S0 accesses exceeded
11h : unauthorised terminal
12h : number of DLT0 accesses exceeded
13h : number of DLT2 accesses exceeded
19h : max. number of DECT base stations exceeded
1Ch : exceeded equipment level in module in terms of available energy
1Dh: exceeded max. number of HSL resources in a module
1Eh: exceeded max. number of HDLC resources for the overall system
1FH: exceeding max number of analogue lines in a module (RackX)
20H : exceeding the max number of analogue lines in the system

Additional information contained in message 112 (INFO 1: type of error)

This message only concerns the Reflexes stations.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 21/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

60h: unequipped station

61h: transmission of erroneous message
62h: bad checksum message
63h: occupation of UA link
64h: receipt of a reset
65h: out of order option dedicated handset
66h: unplugging of the handset
67h: maintenance seized handset

TYPES OF INTERFACE (INFO 0 of message 113)

01h: analogue set interface
03h : T0 access interface
04h: T2 access interface
05h: S0 set interface
14h: Reflexes set interface
20h: master DECT base interface
21h: slave DECT base interface
22h: DECT Reflexes interface
25h: Multi-Reflexes interface
26h: IP interface
27h: IP network interface
28h: TSC IP set
29h: IA access on IA board
2Ah: PCM digital network interface
2Bh: PCM analog network interface
2Ch: RAS access on RAS board
2Dh: T1-CAS digital network interface
2Eh: T1-CAS analog network interface
2Fh, 30h, 31h, 32h: interfaces MSG1 to MSG4
34h: Audio In interface
35h: Audio Out interface
36h: General bell interface
3Eh: integrated analog modem interface
3Fh: integrated ECMA modem interface
40h: integrated IA access
41h: integrated RAS access
1Dh : "integrated voice mail" interface

Software key states (Info 1 of message 34)

01 : system boot; the current key does not correspond to the system (wrong serial number): the services
are open for a limited time.
02 : system booted with a valid key.
03 : system booted with a key problem. The services are closed.
04 : system boot; the current key version does not correspond to the system software version: the ser-
vices are open for a limited time.
05 : system boot; the current key version does not correspond to the system software version; the end
of the limited period causes the services to close.
06 : system boot; the current key edition is too old; the services are open for a limited time.

22/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
5

MAINTENANCE SYSTEM MESSAGES

07 : system boot; the current key edition is too old; the end of limited time causes the services to close.
12 : valid key entered.
13 : the current key does not correspond to the system (invalid serial number); end of limited time cau-
ses the services to close.
14 : serial number problem with the system key; a new key with a valid serial number but with a ver-
sion which does not correspond to system software version has been entered: the services are open for
a limited time.
16 : serial number problem with the system key; a new key with a correct serial number but with too
old an edition has been entered: the services are open for a limited time.
21 : the key entered does not correspond to the system: the services are open for a limited time.
24 : the software key entered does not correspond to system software version (invalid serial number):
the services are open for a limited time.
26 : a software key with too old an edition has been entered: the services are open for a limited time.
32: the services were closed; entering a valid key causes the services to open.
35 : the services were closed; the new key entered has a valid serial number but a version which does
not correspond to the system: the services remain closed.
37 : the services were closed; the new key entered has a valid serial number but too old an edition:
the services remain closed.
41 : the key version does not correspond to the system; the new key entered does not correspond to
the system (invalid serial number): the services are open for a limited time.
42 : the key version does not correspond to the system; a valid key was entered: the services are open.
45 : the key version does not correspond to the system; the end of the limited time causes the services
to close.
46 : the key version does not correspond to the system; a new key with a valid serial number but too
old an edition has been entered: the services are open for a limited time.
52 : the services were closed; a valid key was entered: the services are open.
53 : the services were closed; the key entered does not correspond to the system: the services remain
closed.
57 : the services were closed; the key entered has a valid version but does not correspond to the system
(invalid serial number): the services remain closed.
61 : the system's edition is too old; the new key entered does not correspond to the system: the services
are open for a limited time.
62 : the system's edition is too old; a valid key was entered: the services are open.
64 : the edition of the system's key is too old; a new key with a valid edition, but an old version, was
entered: the services are open for a limited time.
67: the edition of the system's key is too old; the end of limited time causes the services to close.
72: the edition of the system is too old; the services were closed; the new key entered is valid: the ser-
vices are open.
73 : the system's edition is too old; the services were closed; the new key entered has a problem with
the serial number: the services remain closed.
75 : the edition of the system's key is too old; the services were closed; the new key entered has a valid
serial number, but a version which does not correspond to the system: the services remain closed.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 23/24

SYSTEM MESSAGES MAINTENANCE

MANAGEMENT OF TWO-COLOR LED ON OPERATOR STATION

The two-color LED on the operator station flashes quickly (orange) in the following cases:

- either of the 2 following T2 alarms(message 53):

- MS : Missing Signal.
- RFA: Remote Frame Alarm.
- the metering ticket storage buffer is 70% full (default value) (message 70)
- metering printer fault (message 72); this alarm is only transmitted if the "PrintFault" flag is other
than 0.
- problem regaining ISDN access (message 50)
- mains power fault (message 123).
- the hardware message table is 80% full (message 160); this alarm is only transmitted if the "Ope-
rAlarm" flag is other than 0.
- erroneous NMC call (message 171).
- unanswered NMC call (message 172).
- NMC communication failure (messages 173, 174 or 175).
- NMC : alarm report failure (message 176).
- NMC : PCX not registered (message 177).
- NAND Flash memory (CPU or XMEM) or hard disk not detected (message 239).

URGENT ALARMS

The PCX will generate a call to the network management center (NMC) if any of the following alarms
is detected:

- either of the 2 following T2 alarms(message 53):

- MS : Missing Signal.
- RFA: Remote Frame Alarm.
- the metering ticket storage buffer is 70% full (default value) (message 70)
- metering printer fault (message 72); this alarm is only transmitted if the "PrintFault" flag is other
than 0.
- problem regaining ISDN access (message 50)
- mains power fault (message 125).
- the hardware message table is 80% full (message 160); this alarm is only transmitted if the "Ope-
rAlarm" flag is other than 0.
- NMC : history table full (message 165).
- NMC : metering ticket table 80% full (message 162).
- NMC : metering ticket table full (message 166).

24/24 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MAINTENANCE DATA RESTORATIONS

File
DATA RESTORATIONS
6

In case of maintenance and exchange of CPU board (main CPU and/orCoCPU@), the data stored on
the daughter board XMEM64 and/orthe Hard Disk will or will not be restored depending on the con-
ditionsdescribed hereafter.

PROCEDURE TO EXCHANGE A MAIN CPU BOARD

CPU with XMEM64 (no Hard Disk)

The XMEM64 is not faulty and doesn't have to be exchanged

- Install the old XMEM64 on the new mainCPU board.

- All datas stored in the XMEM64 board are normally still availableafter the CPU exchange. Howe-
ver, data saved on the XMEM64 board(messages, conversations, metering tickets) will not be res-
toredif for some reason it is not stored (see Nota). After which it willbe requiered to make a cold
reset of the system, launch the "Datasaving" process via PM5 to restore the data configuration in-
formation(see paragraph A).

Nota : You could find a new/replacementCPU delivered from the factory which will not always res-
tore thedata from the XMEM. But normally it would only occur if the exchangeCPU is not
charged with a software version.

Paragraph 1: The XMEM64 is faulty and has to be exchanged

When the new XMEM64 board is installed, launch the "Data restore"process via PM5 to restore the data
configuration information.

Select Comm ->Write to PCX, select the box VoicePrompts (screen "Write to PCX").

The data restored are :

- names and announcements of the voicemail unit.
- auto attendant announcements, greetings.

But, voice mail messages, NMC metering tickets and conversationsrecorded can not be restored.

CPU without XMEM64

Launch the "Data restore" process via PM5 to restore configurationinformation. The voice files will be
available in the conditionsof paragraph A (except for customizable voices announces used withHard
Disk or XMEM64).

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

DATA RESTORATIONS MAINTENANCE

CPU with Hard Disk

The Hard Disk is not faulty and doesn't have to beexchanged

- Install the old Hard Disk on the newmain CPU board.

- After a cold reset of the system, launch the "Data restore"process via PM5 (see paragraph A). All
informations saved on theHard Disk are normally available (including voice messages and conver-
sationsrecorded).
- The Internet Access configuration (FAI, users, proxy, security,...) can be restored. Select the box "In-
ternet Access Data" duringthe data base restore (screen Write to PCX.

The Hard Disk is faulty and has to be changed

- All messages, record conversations andNMC metering tickets are lost.

- The cache memory is also lost.
- Voice files (= Voice prompts) are available by respectingthe condition explained in paragraph A.

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MAINTENANCE START AND STOP OF A SYSTEM

File
START AND STOP OF A SYSTEM
7

START MONITORING

It is possible to follow the progress of the start in 3 ways:

- On the display of the Reflexes stations.

- Using the web browser
- On the console port

On station
The display on the Reflexes set indicates the different steps for starting the system with following ele-
ments: Start x.y (x represents the step and y represents the sequence)

Detail:

- Start 2-6: detection of the main module's boards

- Start 2-5: search for add-on 2 and loading of the DSP if the add-on exists
- Start 2-4: detection of the extension boards 2 (optional)
- Start 2-3: search for add-on 2 and loading of the DSP if the add-on exists
- Start 2-2: detection of the extension boards 2 (optional)
- Start 2-1: end of detection of telephony (appearance of virtual boards XRA IVPS)
- UNBLOCKINKG of the telephony (stations are on operational duties)
- Start 1-0: start of the CoCPU VOIP or RAS and the integrated Internet services
- Normal display.

Web navigator (browser):

- 1) Disable the proxy used by your browser (navigator):

- in Netscape: Edit/ Preferences/ Advanced/ Proxy

- in Internet Explorer: Tools/ Internet options/ Connections/ LAN Settings

- 2) In the address field, type in: http://192.168.92.246:81/ or http:// IP address of the CPU fol-
lowed by " :81/ "

- 3) In the login window, enter:

- user name: operator

- password: help1954

- 4) Click on Main monitoring on the left of the screen. On yourright you will have the sequences of
starting of the CPU

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/6

START AND STOP OF A SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

This operation is available as soon as the system is in phase1-6 (as per the station display) and is me-
morized for later consultation.

Console port
To follow progress of start-up on the console port, use the following characteristics:

- Login: swap_serial

- Password: alcatel

TIME EXAMPLES

Configuration CPU CoCPU Application Start Stop

Rack 1 CPUe No Telephony 3 min. 30 15 sec.
sec.
Rack 3 CPUe + XMEM + 2 x VOIP Telephony + 8 minutes
HardDisk VoIP
Rack 3 CPUe + XMEM + VOIP Telephony + 10 minu- 2 minu-
HardDisk VoIP + Internet tes tes
Access
3 x Rack 3 CPUe + XMEM + No Telephony 5 minutes
HardDisk

Notas : The given times are equivalent to hotor cold reset.

For the swap/restore procedure, count 2*(start+stoptime)

The times given are only approximate times

EXAMPLE OF START MONITORING BY NAVIGATOR (BROWSER)

The main system is starting up. Please wait ...

----------------------------
--- CPU TYPE: MAIN ---
----------------------------

--- Start of BIOS ---

Succeeded

--- Start of Linux kernel ---

Operating system: Linux 2.2.13-RTL2.0
Succeeded

--- Ramdisk initialization ---

2/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

MAINTENANCE START AND STOP OF A SYSTEM

Succeeded

--- Hardware detected ---

CPU : AuthenticAMD 486 DX/4-WB
CPU speed:133 MHz
RAM size:64 Mo
Flash size:30075 kb
Xmem flash:present
Xmem flash size:60879kb
Hard disk:present
Hard disk size:5729 Mo
Hard disk manufacturer: FUJITSUMHK2060AT

--- Start of the software ---

++++++++++++++++++++++++
++ 8 ++ Start of Init of telephony ++ 8 ++
++++++++++++++++++++++++

Type of reset: WARM

Cti license Status: open

++++++++++++++++++++++
++ 7 ++ Initcontroller Master ++ 7 ++
++++++++++++++++++++++

Dld DSP 0: OK
Type of Backpanel: RACK 3
Dld DSP 1: KO
Power supply Status: MAIN
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++ 6 ++ Detection of boards on controller Master ++ 6 ++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

Slot: 2 - Board: EBUA- hb in slot: 1

status: accepted

Slot: 3 - Board: EBZ_LH- hb in slot: 1

status: accepted

Slot: 7 - Board: BRA- hb in slot: 1

status: accepted

FAN1 Status: OK
FAN2 Status: OK
++++++++++++++++++++++
++ 5 ++ Initcontroller Sat 1 ++ 5 ++
++++++++++++++++++++++

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/6

START AND STOP OF A SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

++++++++++++++++++++++
++ 3 ++ Initcontroller Sat 2 ++ 3 ++
++++++++++++++++++++++

++++++++++++++++++++++++
++ 1 ++ End of Init of telephony ++ 1 ++
++++++++++++++++++++++++

- > Creation of virtual boards:

Slot: 91 - Board: XRA- hb in slot: 1

status: accepted

Slot: 92 - Board: IVPS- hb in slot: 1

status: accepted

Comment: no restore, call handling is available

+++++++++++++++++++++++
++ 0 ++ telephony is running ++ 0 +++
+++++++++++++++++++++++

Comment: no restore, call handling is available

Comment: no restore, call handling is available

Comment: no restore, call handling is available

Slot: 6 - Board: CPU- hb in slot: 1

status: accepted

Slot: 9 - Board: CPU- hb in slot: 1

status: accepted

Comment: no restore, call handling is available

+ SLOT: 1 - CPU TYPE: MAIN

ANV number: 3EH73026ACAA04
db1: absent
db2: xmem
db3: absent
db4: absent
CPU speed: 133 MHz
RAM size: 64 Mb
Flash size: 32 kb
Hard disk: present
Hard disk size: 5729 Mb
Hard disk manufacturer: FUJITSUMHK2060AT a_

+ SLOT: 5 - CPU TYPE: VOIP

4/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
7

MAINTENANCE START AND STOP OF A SYSTEM

ANV number: 3EH73026ACAA04

db1: absent
db2: absent
db3: absent
db4: absent
CPU speed: 133 MHz
RAM size: 64 Mb
Flash size: 32 kb
Hard disk: absent

Detected sets:
=========
UA :5
MUA :0
IBS :0
Z :8
mobile set :0
V24 :0
TA :0
S0 :0
AOM :0

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/6

START AND STOP OF A SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

6/6 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MAINTENANCE DATA TRANSFER PROBLEM WITH
WINDOWS NT4

File
DATA TRANSFER PROBLEM WITH
8
WINDOWS NT4
PROBLEM DESCRIPTION

During data transfer from a PC under Windows NT4 pack 6 by using TCP protocol, the transfer can
stop and the application can be blocked.

This is due to a loss of acknowledge frame during the transfer. This problem occurs during the transfer
of a big file: downloading of a software version, global save of a configuration, ...

This problem is already identified in Microsoft under the number : Q254930.

SOLUTION

To solve this Microsoft problem, it is mandatory to load a patch of Windows NT4. Microsoft doesn’t
allowed us to send directly this patch to our distributors, so you must contact the Technical Support of
Microsoft. We can only provide a procedure to contact Microsoft and request this patch.

PROCEDURE

- Go to the Microsoft Web site : www.microsoft.com

- Click to the page "Support"

- Click on the field List of phone numbers.

- Call the Microsoft Technical Support by using the phone number of the Welcome center.

- Describe the problem to the technician as it is written in the chapter "Description" and don’t forget
to give the anomaly number Q254930.

- Give your contact to the technician to receive the patch by mail.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

DATA TRANSFER PROBLEM WITH MAINTENANCE
WINDOWS NT4

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MAINTENANCE MIGRATION R1.X TO R2.X

File
MIGRATION R1.X TO R2.X
9

INTRODUCTION

This file describes the details of evolution and migration of an installation integrating a R1.X solution
to an installation integrating a R2.X solution.

Evolution
The term evolution refers to transition from a Business R1.X solution to a Business R2.X / Voice solution
(and not to an e-Business / Voice + IA solution). Therefore a software evolution only.

Migration
The term migration refers to changes or adaptations to hardware that will be necessary in addition to
the software evolution. A migration will make it possible to benefit from new Internet services available
in R2.X.

Installation migration refers to one of the following cases:

- switching from a Business R1 solution (R1.0/R1.1) to an e-Business R2.X solution.

- switching from an e-Business R1.X solution to an e-Business R2.X solution.

Attention : In order to make migrations easier, kits are offered according to the client's needs and
current installation.

EVOLUTION OF AN INSTALLATION: VOICE SYSTEM ONLY

To benefit from the new Voice services, the system software must be updated: switch from a Business
R1.X solution (with a CPU, CPUe or CPU-1 board) to a Business R2.X solution (with a CPU, CPUe or
CPU-1 board). This is an evolution to a Business R2.X solution. No exchange of hardware (CPU) has
taken place.

Backup
You must use the PM5 release that will be run with the R2.X.

Open PM5, connect to the R1.X system and carry out a backup save of the R1.X database:

- select "Communication" / "Read from PCX".

- DO NOT select "Internal access data.
- select "Voice prompts" if necessary, followed by "OK".
- once this database has been transferred, select "File / Save as" (and define a file name) in order to
save this database.
- disconnect the current on-line session: "Communication" / "Disconnect".

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/8

MIGRATION R1.X TO R2.X MAINTENANCE

Swapping software R1.X to R2.X

Carry out software swapping by means of the PM5 R2.X.

- select "Tools" / "PM5 - Software Downloading.

- start a session.
- select the "Delivery File" (R2.X software to load).
- if necessary, (depending on the services to be loaded), select "Voice over IP Services", "Remote Ac-
cess Services" (RAS).
- DO NOT select "Data Backup" (cold swap).
- select Start, then Exit at the end of loading.

T2 board
Before any restore procedure on a database incorporating more than one T2 board:

- Cold exit after this swap procedure to the software release R2.X.
- Start the Wizard. You must enter into this function in order to identify the number of B-channels (T2
board).
- After identifying the number of B-channels to use, carry out a hot reset.
- Start the database restore procedure.

Restoring
Carry out restoration of the database by means of the PM5 R2.X.

- in off-line mode, select the database to restore ("File" / "Open" / selection of database/ "Open").
- start an on-line session on the R2.X system.
- as soon as the connection is established, the "Transmit to PCX" screen is displayed in order to res-
tore the database.
- in this same screen, DO NOT select "Internet access data".
- select "Dynamic data" and "Voice Prompts" if necessary.
- confirm with "OK" => an alert screen proposes a hot reset of the system after restoration: select
"Yes".

R2.X software key

Once the evolution to the software release R2.X has been performed, type in the code of the new R2.X
software key.
A hot reset is required after you type in this new key.

INSTALLATION MIGRATION: VOICE SYSTEM + INTERNET ACCESS

Migration of a R1.X solution (Business or e-Business) to an e-Business R2.X solution (integrating Internet
access services).
To take advantage of the new Internet services, it is necessary to follow the migration procedure (re-
quiring hardware changes or adaptations).
Migration of an e-Business R1 solution (with Internet Access) to a Business R2 solution (Voi-
ce) must be performed using Lola.

2/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

MAINTENANCE MIGRATION R1.X TO R2.X

Hardware

1 - Module

If the R1.X solution's installation is a first generation Rack 1, 2 or 3, you must replace this module with
a second generation Rack 1, 2 or 3.

The technical code of the 2nd generation module is visible at the back (see label):

- Rack 1: 3EH 76020 ACAA or 3EH 76020 ACAB

- Rack 2 : 3EH 76045 ABAA or 3EH 76045 ABAB
- Rack 3 : 3EH 76027 ACAA or 3EH 76027 ACAB

2 - main CPU - CoCPU@

In all cases, when the Internet function is used in R2.X, it is vital to use a CPUe-1 board (Pentium III)
instead of the CPU boards (or CPUe or CPU-1) and CoCPU@. boards

3 - WAN board

The WAN daughter board allows an ADSL Internet connection.

If this board is used on the R1.X system, remove this board from the CoCPU@ board and position it
on the new CPUe-1 board.

Backup / restore of the database as part of an installation migration (to R2.X Voice +
Internet Access solution)
Important : Only the WinNT and Win2000 operating systems can run the backup / restore
procedures via PM5 described below

In addition, the Windows releases must incorporate the appropriate updates:

- Windows NT 4.0

- Service pack 6a
- Security Rollup Package (SRP: Q299444)

- Windows 2000

- Service pack 2
- Security Rollup Package (W2KSP2SRP1: Q311401)
- or Service pack 3 (which contains the 2 Service Packs described above)

1 - Backup

It is necessary to deactivate the Proxy (manual and/or automatic proxy configuration) in In-
ternet Explorer on the PC where the database will be saved.

Check the available disk space on the hard disk of the PC where the database will be saved is sufficient
to store all the system's data.

You must use the PM5 release compatible with R2.X.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/8

MIGRATION R1.X TO R2.X MAINTENANCE

Connection to the R1.X system (incorporating the old hardware, CPUe + CoCPU@) and backup of
this system's database.

Important : All the saved data (e-mails, voice mails, NMC accounting tickets) are potentially
confidential. Security actions must therefore be deployed:

- data backup is only possible via a direct local PM5 connection via a crossover Ethernet cable.

- during the data backup phase, the CPUe + CoCPU boards must be disconnected from the
network.

- 1st step: connection by PM5 and selection of the components to save:

- connect a crossover Ethernet cable directly to the LAN input on the main CPU board of the R1.X
system.
- open PM5 (corresponding to release R2.X).
- select "Communication" / "Read from PCX": the screen "Read from PCX" is displayed.
- select "Internet Access data" (in this case of migration we assume that Internet access is available
on the R1.X system).
- select "Voice Prompts" if necessary.
- The choice "Voice mails, e-mails and NMC tickets" is proposed. This section is only open
when a PM5 connection using the R2.X release is generated to a system equipped with a R1.X
software. If these requirements are not fulfilled, this choice is grayed out and cannot be selec-
ted. Select this choice in order to save e-mails, voice mails and NMC accounting tickets.
- confirm the selections with "OK".

- 2nd step: reading the selected data:

- when the option "Voice mails, e-mails and NMC tickets" is selected, PM5 checks the connection
has been established by means of a direct crossover cable. If this test fails, PM5 displays an
error message indicating this cable is mandatory for this step.
- a progress bar is displayed (indicating the state of progress of data reading) while the data are
being read.
- before PM5 starts to read the e-mails, the hardware is detected in advance in order to ascertain
whether the Internet access is running in single CPU or CoCPU@ mode:

- if Internet access is running in single-CPU mode, the data reading procedure continues as
normal.

- if Internet access is running on CoCPU@, PM5 clears the current session on the main CPU
and a message will indicate that to continue the reading procedure, the crossover cable
must be connected to the CoCPU@ board => connect this cable to the LAN input on the
CoCPU board and select "OK".

- when the data reading procedure has finished, the progress bar disappears from the screen.
- once all these data have been transferred, select "File / Save as" (and define a file name) in
order to save this R1.X database on the PC's hard drive.
- disconnect the current on-line session: "Communication" / "Disconnect".

- 3rd step: adaptation of the database in off-line mode:

4/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

MAINTENANCE MIGRATION R1.X TO R2.X

- open this database in off-line mode in order to adapt the hardware and the IP addresses.
- change this database according to the hardware that needs to be adapted:

- In the "Hardware and Limits" / "Main Cabinet" section, the R1.X system is equipped with a
CPUe board. In the column headed " Board Variant" change this selection " CPUe " to "
CPUe-1 ". In the slot for the CoCPU@ board (if present), in the column headed "Board Va-
riant" change this selection " CoCPU@ " to " No board".

- In the "Hardware and Limits" / "IP Boards" section, change the "Default address of router"
field. If a CoCPU@ board was being used in release R1.X, this field indicates either the de-
fault address 192.168.92.247 or the modified IP address. Modify this field using the ad-
dress of the CPUe-1 router (default address 192.168.92.246 or modified IP address). If
Internet access is managed by means of the main CPU (IA application on single CPU) with
the default IP address in release R1.X, the default address of the CPUe-1 board does not
need to be changed (= 192.168.92.246 in both releases R1.X single CPU and R2.X CPUe-
1). If the IP address of the CPUe-1 board has been changed, this field must contain this va-
lue.

- program the IP addresses of the various CoCPU boards.

- save this new database which will be used for restoration on the R2.X system.

2 - Swap from the R1.X system to the R2.X system.

See the appropriate chapters for details of hardware migration.

In the following steps, we assume the R2.X system (new module, CPUe-1 board) has been installed.

The CPUe-1 has been loaded with a R2.X software.

If this R2.X release is not the latest evolution, see below for the software loading/swapping procedure:

- connecting the PM5 to the new R2.X system.

- select "Tools" / "PM5 - Software Downloading".
- start a session.
- select the "Delivery File" (R2.X software to load).
- if necessary, (depending on the services to be loaded), select "Voice over IP Services", "Remote Ac-
cess Services" (RAS), "Internet Services".
- DO NOT select "Data Backup" (cold swap).
- select Start, then Exit at the end of loading.

3 - T2 board

Before any restore procedure on a database incorporating more than one T2 board:

- Cold exit after this swap procedure to the software release R2.X.
- Start the Wizard. You must enter into this function in order to identify the number of B-channels (T2
board).
- After identifying the number of B-channels to use, carry out a hot reset.
- Start the database restore procedure.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/8

MIGRATION R1.X TO R2.X MAINTENANCE

4 - Restoration

Connection to the R2.X system (including the new hardware: new module + CPUe-1, old hardware
removed: CoCPU@) and restoration of the R1.X database on this R2.X system.

Important : All the data to restore (e-mails, voice mails, NMC accounting tickets) are poten-
tially confidential. Security actions must therefore be deployed:

- data restoration is only possible via a direct local PM5 connection via a crossover Ethernet cable.

- during the data restoration phase, the CPUe-1 + CoCPU boards must be disconnected from the
network.

- 1st step: select the database to restore:

- open PM5 (corresponding to release R2.X).

- in off-line mode, select the database to restore ("File" / "Open" / selection of database/ "Open"),

- 2nd step: connection by PM5 and selection of the components to restore:

- connect a crossover Ethernet cable directly to the LAN input on the CPUe-1 board of the R2.X
system.
Don't forget the PC must have an IP address compatible with the default address of the
R2.X system (such as 192.168.92.XXX).

The R2.X system must be "cold" (default configuration).

- start an on-line session on the R2.X system.

- as soon as the connection is established, the "Transmit to PCX" screen is displayed in order to
restore the database.
- if this screen is not proposed automatically, select "Communication" / "Write to PCX".
- select "Internet Access data" (in this case of migration we assume that Internet access was ini-
tially available on the R1.X system).
- select "Voice Prompts" if necessary.
- the choice "Voice mails, e-mails and NMC tickets" is proposed. This section is only open if:
- the database was initially saved on a R1.X system.
- during the backup, the choice "Voice mails, e-mails, NMC tickets" was selected.
- PM5 is connected to the restoration on an R2.X system.
- Internet access is open and used on this R2.X system.
- If these requirements are not fulfilled, this choice is grayed out and cannot be selected. Se-
lect this choice in order to restore e-mails, voice mails and NMC accounting tickets.
- confirm these selections with "OK".
- an alert screen proposes a hot reset of the system after restoration: select "Yes".

- 3rd step: restoring the selected data:

- when the option "Voice mails, e-mails and NMC tickets" is selected, PM5 checks the connection
has been established by means of a direct crossover cable. If this test fails, PM5 displays an
error message indicating this cable is mandatory for this step.
- during data restoration, there is no progress bar to indicate the state of progress of data rea-

6/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
9

MAINTENANCE MIGRATION R1.X TO R2.X

ding (unlike for the data backup procedure).

- once all these data have been restored, a screen is displayed proposing restoration of the
software key:
- select "No" if the previously saved database includes the old software key used in the R1.X
solution => this key will not be restored on the R2.X system. Go to the "R2.X software key"
chapter.
- select "Yes" if the previously saved database already includes the new software key to be
used on the R2.X solution (if this key was modified manually in off-line mode in the saved
R1.X database) => this key will be restored on the R2.X system. In this case the "Software
key R2.X" chapter is not applicable.
- disconnect the current on-line session: "Communication" / "Disconnect".
- the system automatically generates a hot reset (reason: see the end of the procedure in the "2nd
step"). Immediately disconnect the connection cable from the PM5 PC and reconnect the CPUe-
1 and CoCPU boards to the network (via LanX board or external switch).
The IPSec settings are not restored when software is migrated.

R2.X software key

Once the migration to the software release R2.X has been performed, type in the code of the new R2.X
software key.
A hot reset is required after you type in this new key.

MIGRATION ALCATEL OMNIPCS OFFICE -> ALCATEL OMNIPCS

ENTERPRISE

For a description of migration procedures, check the Alcatel OmniPCX Enterprise technical documen-
tation.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/8

MIGRATION R1.X TO R2.X MAINTENANCE

8/8 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

MAINTENANCE MINIMUM SERVICE IN CASE OF
HARD DISK CRASH

File
MINIMUM SERVICE IN CASE OF
10
HARD DISK CRASH
e-Business solutions require a CPUe-1/CPUe-2 board equipped with a hard disk. In case of hard disk
crash, the system works with reduced services, using NAND Flash memory.

In case of hard disk crash, the system works with the following characteristics:

- all telephone services are available.

- configuration data are saved by the NAND Flash.
- system configuration by PM5 is possible.
- CoProcessing boards are ignored: no VoIP and RAS functionalities.
- Internet Access services are not available.
- the VMU data is not backed up; only the following services of the voice server are offered: 20 mi-
nutes message storage capacity, no welcome messages, no conversation recording, no name re-
cording for new mailboxes (when the system works on NAND Flash, there is no need for a mailbox
to have a name in order to consult it; however, it is possible to record the name via the customiza-
tion menu).
- NMC tickets are not saved, but new tickets can be generated; only 1,000 taxation tickets can be
stored.
- only the system's first language is available (for voice prompts and station displays).
- recordings of conversations, welcome messages and names are not kept.
- configuration data modified in the last 24 hours (maximum) are lost.
- only one software version is stored in NAND Flash; it is not possible to download a new version
using PM5.

When the system switches to minimum service, a hardware message (message 249) is emitted, indi-
cating a hard disk problem.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

MINIMUM SERVICE IN CASE OF MAINTENANCE
HARD DISK CRASH

2/2 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 Alcatel OmniPCX Office
Glossary

SECTION

GLOSSARY

REF: 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

GLOSSARY

Section Glossary

GLOSSARY FILE 1

Ed. 01 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/2

 ALCATEL OMNIPCX OFFICE

SECTION GLOSSARY (INDEX) GLOSSARY

Section Glossary (Index)

GLOSSARY FILE 1

2/2 Réf. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

GLOSSARY GLOSSARY

File
GLOSSARY
1

ACSE
"Association Control Service Element". OSI convention used for establishing, maintaining and re-
leasing connections between two applications.
AFU
"Auxiliary Function Unit". Daughter board of the CPU/CPUe/CPU-1/CPU-2/CPUe-1/CPUe-2 board
supporting ancillary functions such as general bell, doorphone, audio in, audio out, etc.
AMIX-1
Mixed analog equipment board: analog accesses with CLIP functionalities, analog and reflexes ter-
minal connection interfaces.
APA
Analogue Public Access". Board allowing the connection of analogue network lines (switched
network) with CLIP functionality; that board, equipped with GSCLI boards (Ground Start), is com-
patible with the American public network.
API
"Application Programming Interface".
ARI
"Access Right Identifier". System identification number (DECT feature).
ARS
"Automatic Route Selection". A logic direction is a set of trunks used for a call with the following fa-
cilities: seeking out the optimal path for a call, using the least-cost operator or network; overflow
management: enables a PCX to find a new route to make an outgoing call when there are no re-
sources available in the initial trunk.
ASN-1
"Abstract Syntax Notation 1". OSI language for describing data types independently of processor
structures and technical representations.
ATA
"Analog Trunk Access". Board for connecting analog network lines (switched network).

BACP
"Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol". Control protocol associated with BAP.
BAP
"Bandwidth Allocation Protocol". PPP protocol that manages bandwidth by allocating it dynamically
between two ports, i.e. between the two extremities of a point-to-point link.
BOD
"Bandwidth On Demand". Service that allocates bandwidth automatically in response to traffic vo-
lume.
BRA

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 1/9

GLOSSARY GLOSSARY

"Basic Rate Access". Board for connecting T0 or DLT0 digital basic accesses; each access supports
a data rate of 144 kbps, structured as 2 B-channels at 64 kbps for voice and data transmission,
and 1 D-channel at 16 kbps for signaling.
S0 BUS
Type of connection for S0 digital terminals (passive short bus, long/short point-to-point bus, exten-
ded bus); S0 buses and terminals are connected up via an S0 option embedded in an Alcatel Re-
flexes terminal.

CCP
"Compression Control Protocol".
CIFS
"Common Internet File System". This protocol is an extension to the SMB file sharing system. Its main
benefit is to provide compatibility with locking operations and multiple SMB read/write operations.
CHAP
"Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol". Security function supported on connections that
use PPP encapsulation: prevents unauthorized access.
CLIP
"Calling Line Identification Presentation". Complementary service for digital protocols that allows
the caller number to be presented to the called party.
CLIR/COLR
"Calling/COnnected Line Identification Restriction". Service that inhibits CLIP or COLP.
CNIP
"Calling Name Identification Presentation". Complementary service for private digital protocols
(ISVPN or ABC-F) that allows the caller's name to be presented to the called party.
PASSWORD
Code acting as a password, controlling access to the voice mail unit and the terminal locking func-
tion.
COLP
"COnnected Line identification Presentation". Complementary service for digital protocols that al-
lows the number of the connected user (the one who answered the call) to be presented to the caller.
CONP
"COnnected Name identification Presentation". Complementary service for private digital protocols
(ISVPN or ABC-F) that allows the name of the connected user (the one who answered the call) to be
presented to the caller.
CPU
"Central Processing Unit". Term designating the processor or microprocessor. The central proces-
sing unit executes computer program instructions.
CSTA
"Computer Supported Telephony Application". ECMA standard that defines command exchanges
between a PCX and a server.
CTI
"Computer-Telephone Integration". Interaction mechanism between 2 sections, namely a data pro-
cessing section (computer) and a telecommunications section (PCX), independently of the physical
layout of the 2 sections.

2/9 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

GLOSSARY GLOSSARY

DASS2
"Digital Access Signaling Specification number 2"
SDA
"Direct Dialling Inward"; A board allowing the connection of direct dialling inward lines.
DECT
"Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication". European cordless telephony standard. DECT ter-
minal: cordless terminal that complies with this standard.
DHCP
"Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol". Protocol that manages IP address allocation dynamically
so that addresses can be reassigned when no longer being used by LAN hosts.
DISA
"Direct Inward Station Access". Services (Analog DISA and Transit DISA) enabling outside callers to
dial a specific number giving direct access to the system.
DLL
"Dynamic Link Library". Windows library linked dynamically to an application.
DLT0
"Digital Line T0". Basic access configured with the QSIG protocol (= digital LIA).
DLT2
"Digital Line T2". Private 2 MHz link in PRA mode (= digital ATL).
DNS
"Domain Name Server". System used on the Internet for converting domain names or machine na-
mes into IP addresses. A domain name, unlike an IP address, is an easily memorized Internet ad-
dress.

ECMA
"European Computer Manufacturers Association".
ETHERNET
Local network (LAN) operating at 10 or 100 Mbps (10 base T or 100 base T) over a coaxial cable.
Ethernet is similar to the IEEE 802.3-series standards.

IAP
"Internet Access Provider". See ISP.
FoIP
"Fax over IP". Refers to the message and data transmission from a G3 Fax using the Internet protocol
(usually T38).
FTP
"File Transfer Protocol". Standard protocol for exchanging files between remote computers over the
Internet.
FTP/STP/UTP
"Foiled Twisted Pairs/Shielded Twisted Pairs/Unshielded Twisted Pairs". Types of connection cables
to be used between an Alcatel OmniPCX and an external distribution panel.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 3/9

GLOSSARY GLOSSARY

GATEKEEPER
Secure directory server.
TERMINAL GROUP
Series of terminals grouped under the same directory number. Any call to that number is routed to
a free terminal line.
GATEWAY
Device connecting different networks.

LOUDSPEAKER
External loudspeaker used for broadcasting messages.
HSL
"High Speed Link". Link between the basic module and an add-on module; requires an HSL dau-
ghter board to be fitted on the CPU and MEX boards.
HTTP
"HyperText Transfer Protocol". Standard application protocol for exchanging files (text, images,
audio, video, etc.) over the Internet.
HTTPS
"Secure HyperText Transfer Protocol". Secure version of HTTP: encrypts and decrypts pages contai-
ning user requests as well as pages retrieved from a web server.
H.323
ITU standard for multimedia communication (voice, video, data).
H.450
Additional services associated with H.323 version 2.

ICMP
"Internet Control Message Protocol". Network protocol that provides error reports and information
on the processing of IP packets.
IMAP4
"Internet Message Access Protocol". A protocol of the same type as POP3, the difference being that
the messages always stay on the ISP server, even after consultation. IMAP requires continuous ac-
cess to the server while the messaging service is in use.
KEY SYSTEM (mode)
Reflexes terminal operating mode in which the terminal features as many resource keys (RSP) as
there are network lines in the system.
IPSec
"Internet Protocol Security". Standard taking network security into account. Protocol used in the im-
plementation of VPNs, and for remote access by connection to a VPN.
ISDN
"Integrated Services Digital Network". Standard for the transmission of digital data over telephone
cables or other communication vectors.
RNIS-EFM

4/9 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

GLOSSARY GLOSSARY

"Integrated Services Digital Network- Emergency Forwarding Module". T0/S0 Forwarding Module.
ISP
"Internet Service Provider". Internet Access Provider. A company that provides Internet access for in-
dividuals and enterprises, along with other services, such as web site construction and hosting.
ISVPN:
"Integrated Services Virtual Private Network". Protocol used in a private virtual digital network; it of-
fers functions such as transfer optimization and the transmission of information such as the name,
busy status or diversions.
ISVPN+
Includes metering information in addition to the usual ISVPN services.
ITU
International Telecommunications Union : global coordination body.

LAN
"Local Area Network". Network of interconnected machines that share the resources of a processor
or server in a relatively restricted geographical area, usually the premises of a company.
TL
"(Analog) Trunk Line" connecting the system to the public switched network.

PLEASE WAIT MESSAGE

An audio component of the system (or an external device, such as a cassette player) which plays a
message or piece of music while keeping an external correspondent on hold.
MEX
Add-on module. Controller board for extension or 'add-on' module.
MIX
Mixed equipment board: T0 accesses, analog and reflexes terminal connection interfaces.
MPPP
"Multi-link PPP". A protocol that aggregates bandwidth from a number of links to obtain faster com-
munication speeds.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
External device (e.g. radio tuner) that can broadcast music over the loudspeakers of idle terminals;
broadcasting is stopped automatically if there is an incoming call to the terminal or if the user ma-
kes a call.
VMU
Voice Mail Unit. The integrated voice server provides a voice mailbox for each user as well as a
general voice mailbox and features such as Personal Assistant, Automatic Attendant and Audiotex.

NAT
"Network Address Translation". A service that converts the IP address used on one network into ano-
ther IP address recognizable by another network. Address translation allows companies to keep
their own private IP addresses for internal purposes while using just one IP address for communi-

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 5/9

GLOSSARY GLOSSARY

cation with the outside.

IN
Installation Number.
ADN
Additional Designation Number.
NMC
"Network Management Center". Workstation allowing a communication server administrator to re-
motely manage, administer (storage of call metering tickets for example) and optimize one or more
Alcatel OmniPCX Office systems.
NNTP
"Network News Transfer Protocol". Protocol used by computers to handle messages created in Use-
net forums.

PCX (mode)
Mode of operation of Reflexes terminals; in this mode, all the network lines are materialized by ge-
neral-purpose resource keys (RSB).
PAP
"Password Authentication Procedure". Procedure used by PPP servers to validate connection re-
quests.
PAT
"Port Address Translation".
MANAGER/SECRETARY
Set of specific services (profile, filtering, diversion) between a manager terminal and a secretary ter-
minal.
PCBT
"PC Based Telephony".
PE
"Public Exchange". Public central terminal (switch).
OS
"Operator Station". Dedicated Reflexes terminal for answering incoming calls from the public
network.
POP3
"Post Office Protocol". Standard Internet protocol for receiving electronic messages. POP3 is a
client/server protocol in which the messages are received and hosted by the ISP. When a message
is read, it is transferred to the client terminal and is no longer hosted by the ISP.
MULTILINE TERMINAL
Terminal that has several lines for managing several calls at the same time.
PPP
"Point-to-Point Protocol". Protocol used in communication between two computers using a serial in-
terface (typically a PC connected to a server via a telephone line).
PRA
"Primary Rate Access". Board for connecting a T2 digital primary access; the access supports 48
kbps structured as 30 B-channels at 64 kbps for voice and data transmission, and 1 D-channel at
64 kbps for signaling.
PROXY
A proxy server is used as an interface between a user and the external Internet network.

6/9 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

GLOSSARY GLOSSARY

PSTN
"Public Switched Telephone Network". Public Switched Telephone Network.
PTN(X)
"Private Telecommunications Network (eXchange)". A private network consisting of switches and ter-
minals connected together by telephone links.
PWT
"Personal Wireless Telecommunications". Corresponds to the DECT standard for the North Ameri-
can countries (especially the US).

QOS
"Quality Of Service". Network characteristics (transmission speed, etc.) can be measured, improved
and, to an extent, guaranteed in advance.
QSIG
"Q Signaling Protocol". Set of standard signaling protocols between the private PCXs of a telephone
network (Q reference point) interconnected by digital ATLs.

RADIUS
"Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service". A client/server protocol that enables remote access
servers to communicate with a central server in order to authenticate remote users before allowing
them access to the systems or services they have requested.
RAS
"Remote Access Server". Remote access server to the system LAN.
RGO, RGI, RGM
General resource keys supporting local and or/external calls, whether outgoing (RGO), incoming
(RGI) or mixed (RGM).
ISDN
"Réseau Numérique à Intégration de Services". French equivalent of ISDN.
ROSE
"Remote Operations Service Element".
RSB
Resource key dedicated to a trunk group (bundle); used for making external outgoing calls on a
particular trunk group and receiving all network calls.
RSD
Resource key for a particular destination; supports local calls for this number if assigned to a speed
dial number, incoming calls for the number if assigned to a DDI number or outgoing calls on a
trunk group if assigned to a trunk group.
RSL
Resource key dedicated to a set; supports calls to and from a particular set.

DDI
"Direct Dialing In". Direct external call number for the system terminals (depending on the configu-

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 7/9

GLOSSARY GLOSSARY

ration with the public network operator).

SLAN
"LAN Switch". Daughter board for mounting on a CoCPU/CoCPU@/CoCPU-1/CoCPU-2 board to
enable it to communicate with the CPU/CPUe/CPUe-1/CPUe-2.
SLI
"Single Line Interface". Board allowing the connection of analog terminals (also known as Z termi-
nals).
SMB
"Server Message Block". File sharing protocol which enables a terminal to localise one or more files
across the network and then to open them, read them, write to them or delete them.
SMTP
"Simple Mail Transfer Protocol". Standard protocol used for sending and receiving mail.
GENERAL BELL
If the operator is absent, internal and external calls to the operator are directed to an external si-
gnaling device that lets any authorized terminal take these calls.
SPI
"Service Provider Interface".
SSH
"Secure Shell". A UNIX interface protocol for obtaining secure access to remote computers.
SSL
"Secure Socket Layer". Encryption and authentication layer which ensures the authentication, inte-
grity and privacy of the documents distributed by the World Wide Web.
UUS
"User to User Signaling". Information carried clear end-to-end by ISDN to enable exchanges
between network subscribers; the ISVPN protocol is contained within this information.

TAPI
"Telephony IP". Standard defined by Microsoft.
SELV
"Safety Extra Low Voltage". Classification of interfaces in accordance with standards EN60950 and
IEC 950.
TCP/IP
"Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol". Standard protocol used on the Internet. TCP cor-
responds to the Transport layer (layer 4) of the OSI model. IP corresponds to the Network layer
(layer 3) of the OSI model.
TFTP
"Trivial File Transfer Protocol". The simplest network application for transferring files.
NMT
"Numbering Modification Table".
TSAPI
"Telephony Services API". Standard defined by Novell, based on ECMA's CSTA standard.

UAI
"Universal Alcatel Interface". Board used for connecting up Alcatel Reflexes terminals or DECT 4070

8/9 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA Ed. 01

 File
1

GLOSSARY GLOSSARY

IO/EO base stations.

UPS
"Uninterruptible Power Supply". Device increasing the system's backup time.
URL
"Uniform Resource Locator". Address of a resource (file, program, image, etc.) accessible on the
Internet.

VoIP
"Voice over IP". Term designating voice transmission over a data network using the Internet protocol.
VPN
"Virtual Private Network". Private data network that uses the public telecommunications infrastruc-
ture (e.g. the Internet) while maintaining confidentiality by means of tunneling protocols and security
procedures.

WAN
"Wide Area Network". A geographically dispersed telecommunications network. The term WAN is
used in contrast to LAN.
WBM
"Web-Based Management". Management tools for the system's Internet features.
WINS
"Windows Internet Naming Service". In Windows environments, the service that manages the cor-
respondence between client station names and LAN locations relative to their IP addresses.

XMEM
"eXpansion Memory". Daughter board of the CPU board that extends the memory capacity and al-
lows a hard disk to be connected.

Ed. 01 Ref. 3EH 21065 BSAA 9/9